The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutPermit D98-0246 - ELECTRIC LIGHTWAVE - TELECOMMUNICATIONS SWITCH AND TRANSMISSION FACILITYD98 -0246 13075 Gateway Dr. Electric Lightwave City of Tukwila (206) 431 -3670 Community Development / Public Works • 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite 100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 DEVELOPMENT PERMIT WARNING: IF CONSTRUCTION BEGINS BEFORE APPEAL PERIOD EXPIRES, APPLICANT IS PROCEEDING AT THEIR OWN RISK. Parcel No: 000480 -0010 Address: 13075 GATEWAY DR Suite No: Location: SUITE 130 Category: AOT Type: DEVPERM Zoning: Const Type: III -N Gas /Elec.: Units: 001 Setbacks: North: Water: UNKNOWN Wetlands: .0 South: Sewer: Slopes: Contractor License No: POECOI *247QZ Permit No: Status: Issued: Expires: D98 -0246 ISSUED 09/28/1998 03/27/1999 Occupancy: Not in table. UBC: 1997 Fire Protection: SPRINKLERS .0 East: .0 West: .0 Streams: OCCUPANT ELECTRIC LIGHTWAVE 13075 GATEWAY DR STE 130, TUKWILA WA 98188 OWNER EAST VALLEY 34 LLC Phone: 206 728 -1130 C/O TEUTSCH PARTNERS, 2001 WESTERN AV SUITE #200, LYNNWOOD WA 98 CONTACT CRAIG BEAUMONT Phone: 509- 328 -2994 201 WEST NORTH RIVER DR, SPOKANE WA 99201 CONTRACTOR POE CONSTRUCTION Phone: 253 833 -2400 PO BOX 899, AUBURN WA 98071 ***************************************************** *** * * * * *•k * * * ** * ** * ** *•k ** * * * ** Permit Description: TENANT IMPROVEMENT FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS SWITCH/ TRANSMISSION FACILITY. **************************************************** * * * * * * * * * * * * * *. * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** Construction Valuation: $ 1,500,000.00 PUBLIC WORKS PERMITS: *(Water Meter Permits Listed Separate) Eng. Appr: Curb Cut /Access /Sidewalk /CSS: Fire Loop Hydrant: Flood Control Zone: Hauling: Land Altering: Landscape Irrigation: Moving Oversized Load: Sanitary Side Sewer: Sewer Main Extension: Storm Drainage: Street Use: Water Main Extension: No: Start Time: Cut Start Tine: No: Private: Private: Size(in): .00 End Time: Fi11: End Time: Public: Public: ********• k****************************************** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** TOTAL DEVELOPMENT PERMIT FEES: $ 12,270.19 k***k k****************************• k**************** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** Permit Center Authorized Signature:/ L Date: 9 -d-E_ I hereby certify that I have read and examined this permit and know the sane to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provision of any other state or local laws regulating construction or the performance of work. I am authorized to sign for and obtain this development permit. Date: _1=a: ra This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days from the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection. CITY OF TUKWILA Addcess: 13075 GATEWAY DR Permit No: D98-0246 uite: Tenant: Status: ISSUED Type: DEVPERM Applied: 07/13/1993 raccel #: 000480-00•0 issued: 09/28/1993 A*k*-4'**,1-4***********k***AA*****************k**k******•kk*********-4,*kq..**4.kk* Permit Conditions: 3. No changes will be made to the plans unless approved bv the Architect or Engineer and the Jukwila Building Division. 2. Plumbing permits shall..be-obtained:throughthe Seattle-King County Department :of 'public-Health.' PlUMbjno..will be inspected by that,agency, lncluding all gas pi'ping (296-4722), . . 3. Electrical perMits shall be obtained.through the:Washington State Division of Labor.•and Industries and,all-eleCtrical work will be inspected by that agency ,(243-6630)....,. 4. All mechanical work shall be under separate permit'isSded by the City of Tukwila.- S. All permits, inspection records, and approved plahs-shal*he available'at the lob site prior to the start of any con- struction. These documents are to be maintained- andavaitH, able 'until final inspection approval is granted. . 6. All Cont ruction to be done in conformance with approved . planS and r'eclOrements. of tcu Building Code: (1997 Edition ) as amended, Uniform Mechanical. Code (1997 Edition) encl.:Washington State Energy Code (1Q Edition). - - • - 7. All rack Storage requires a separate —permit throughthe Citi of:Tukwfta. Structural calculations stamped by a Washtngton:ii* State licensed StrUctural Engineer'are.required forrack: storage,. over eight (8) feet inyiejght'. 8. When .special inspection is required either•the owner,. architect or engineer shall notify the-Jukwila Building Division of appointment of the inspection agencies 07.1Or to the first building inspection. , Copies 'of inspection reports :shall be subMitted to thel3uilding DivisiOnin a timely manner. Reports shall contain address. project:.name, permit number and type of insPection-being performed. 9. The special inspector shall submit a final signed report stating whether the work requiripgspecial inspection-was, to the best of the inspector's4,noW1edge, in confOrMance with approved plans.and specifications and the_aWicable workmanship provisions of the UBC. 10. Any new ceiling grid and light'fliture,jristallation is required to meet lateral bracing requirements for Seismic one 3. 11. Readily accessible access to roof mounted equipment is required. 12. Any exposed insulations backing material shall have a• Flame Spread Rating of 25 or less, and material shall bear identi- fication showing the fire performance rating thereof. 13. There shall be no occupancy of the building(s) until the final inspection has been completed by the Tukwila Building Inspector. 14. A CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY WILL BE REOUIRED FOR THIS PERMIT. 25, Validity of Permit. The issuance of a permit or approval of plans, specifications, and computations shall not be con- strued to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation CITY OF T1 <WILA Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 OR STAFF: uSR: ON. Project Number Permit Number: DIf '� fl__ Application and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mail or facsimile. Project NamefTenant: Electric Lightwave — Tukwila Switch Facility Value of Construction: $1.520..000. Site Address: City State /Zip: V767,7/1 Gateway Drive Suite ?yo, Tukwila WA 98188 Tax Parcel Number: 000630.-00I0 Property Owner: Will there be rack storage? ® yes ❑ no Phone: Teutsch Partners Area of Construction: (sq. ft.) 9,800 s q . f t . (206) 728 -1130 State /Zip: StreZUOci Western Fax #: 1 Avenue Suite 330, Seattle WA 98121 (206) 728 -0935 Co t actor Not belected Phone: Street Address: City State /Zip: Fax #: Architect: Phone: Coffman Engineers, Inc. (509) 328 -2994 Strezu1 City Fax #: west North River Dr. Ste 510, Spokane WA 99201 P (509) 328 -2999 Engineer: Phone: -Coffman Engineers, Inc. (509) 328 -2994 Street Address: City State /Zip: Fax #: 201 West North River Dr. Ste 510, Spokane WA 99201 (509) 328 -2999 Contact Person: Phone: Craig Beaumont (509) 328 -2994 Street Address: City State /Zip: Fax #: 201 West North River Dr. Ste 510, Spokane WA 99201 (509) 328 -2999 Description of work to be done: Tenant improvements for Telecommunications Switch/ Transmission Facility. Existing use: ❑ Retail ❑ Restaurant ❑ Multi- family ❑ Warehouse ❑ Hospital ❑ Church ❑ Manufacturing ❑ Motel /Hotel ❑ Office ❑ School /College /University Other Vacant Proposed use: ❑ Retail ❑ Restaurant ❑ Multi- family ❑ Warehouse El Hospital ❑ Church ❑ Manufacturing ❑ Motel /Hotel ❑ Office ❑ School /College /University © Other Telecommunication Facility Will there be a change of use? ❑ yes ® no If yes, extent of change: (Attach additional sheet if necessary) Will there be rack storage? ® yes ❑ no Existing fire protection features: in sprinklers ❑ automatic fire alarm ❑ none ❑ other (specify) Building Square Feet: 54,463 sq . f t . existing Area of Construction: (sq. ft.) 9,800 s q . f t . Will there be storage of flammable /combustible hazardous material in the building? ❑ yes ❑ no Attach list of materials and storage location on separate 8 1/2 X 11 paper indicating quantities & Material Safety Data Sheets APPLICANT REQUEST FOR PUBLIC WORKS SITE/CIVIL PLAN REVIEW OF THE FOLLOWING :. (Additional reviews may be determined by the Public Works Department): ❑ Channelization /Striping ❑ Curb cut /Access /Sidewalk ❑ Fire Loop /Hydrant (main to vault) #: Size(s): ❑ Land Altering 0 Cut cubic yds. 0 Fill cubic yds. ❑ Sanitary Side Sewer #: ❑ Sewer Main Extension ❑ Storm Drainage ❑ Street Use ❑ Water Main Extension ❑ Water Meter /Exempt #: Size(s): 0 Deduct ❑ Water Meter /Permanent #t Size(s): ❑ Water Meter Temp # Size(s): Est. quantity: ❑ Miscellaneous ❑ Flood Control Zone ❑ Hauling ❑ Landscape Irrigation O Private 0 Public O Private 0 Public 0 Water Only gal Schedule: Value of Construction - In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Permit Center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review - Applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. The building official may extend the time for action by the applicant for a period not exceeding 180 days upon written request by the applicant as defined in Section 107.4 of the uniform Building Code (current edition). No application shall be extended more than once. Date application accepted: ic r- 6cJr -!� Date application expires: (-O 19 Applic tio"n'jtak by: (initials) LEASE-.SIGN _BACK .oF.Aph.LICATION• FORM; CTPERMIT.DOC 1/29/97 CO MMERCIALIMULTI 7Fi4 :TENANT IMPROVEMENT /ALT ; TION PERMIT APPLICATIONS .; • MUS E SUBMITTED WITH ,THE FO ' LO ING: _ • ALL'DRAWIt6S TO`' BE STAMPED BY WASHINGTON STATE LICENSED ARCHITECT, Si UCTURAL' ENGINEER OR CIVIL ENGINEER ALL DRAWINGS SHALL BE AT A LEGIBLE SCALE AND NEATLY DRAWN BUILDING SITE PLANS AND UTILITY PLANS ARE TO BE COMBINED N/A SUBMITTED ® ® Complete Legal Description ❑ ® Metro: Non - Residential Sewer Use Certification if there is a change in the amount of plumbing fixtures (Form H -13). Business Declaration required (Form H -10): Four (4) sets of working drawings (five(5) sets for structural work), which include : ❑ ® Site Plan (including existing fire hydrant location(s) 1. North arrow and scale 2. Property lines, dimensions, setbacks, names of adjacent roads, any proposed or existing easements 3. Parking Analysis of existing and proposed capacity; proposed stalls with dimensions 4. Location of driveways, parking, loading & service areas 5. Recycle collection location and area calculations (change of use only) 6. Location and screening of outdoor storage (change of use only) 7. Limits of clearing /grading with existing and proposed topography at 2' intervals extending 5' beyond property's boundaries 8. Identify location of sensitive area slopes 20% or greater, wetlands, watercourses and their buffers (change of use only) 9. Identify location and size of existing trees that are located in sensitive areas and buffer (TMC 18.45.040), of those, identify by size and species which are to be removed and saved 10. Landscape plan with irrigation and existing trees to be saved by size and species (exterior changes or change of use only) 11. Location and gross floor area of existing structure with dimensions and setback 12. Lowest finished floor elevation (if in flood control zone) 13. See Public Works Checklist for detailed civil /site plan information required for Public Works Review (Form H- 9). (❑ R Floor plan: show location of tenant space with proposed use of each room labeled ❑ ® Overall building floor plan with adjacent tenant use; identify tenant space use and location of storage of any hazardous materials; dimensions of proposed tenant space. ❑ �' Vicinity Map showing location of site ❑ ® Rack Storage: If adding new racks or altering existing rack storage, provide a floor plan identifying rack layout and all exit doors. Show dimensions of aisles, include dimensions of height, length, and width of rack. Structural calculations are required for rack storage eight feet and over. ❑ ® Indicate proposed construction of tenant space or addition and walls being demolished ❑ © Construction details ❑ © Sprinkler details - details of sprinkler hangers, specifically penetrations in structure, i.e., roof; size of water supply to sprinkler vault with documentation from contractor stating supply line will meet or exceed sprinkler system design criteria as identified by the Fire Department. ❑ ❑ Washington State Non - Residential Energy Code Data shall be noted on the construction drawings. ❑ SEPA Checklist - if intensification of use (check with Planning Department for thresholds). ❑ ® Attach plans, reports or other documentation required to comply with Sensitive Area Ordinance or other land use or SEPA decisions. 0 ❑ Food service establishments require two (2) sets of stamped approved plans by the Seattle -King County Department of Public Health prior to submitting for building permit application. The Department of Public Health is located at 201 Smith Tower, Seattle, WA or call (206) 296 -4787. (Form H -5) ❑ ❑ Copy of Washington State Department of Labor and Industries Valid Contractor's License. If no contractor has been selected at time of application a copy of this license will be required before the permit is issued OR submit Form H -4, "Affidavit in Lieu of Contractor Registration ". Building Owner /Authorized Agent If the applicant is other than the owner, registered architect/engineer, or contractor. licensed by the State of Washington, a notarized letter from the property owner authorizing the agent. to submit this permit application and obtain the permit will be required as part of this submittal I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. BUILDING OWNERRIZED AGENT: Signature:' Date: July 10, 1998 Print name: Craig Beaumont Phone:509- 328 -2994 Fax #: 509 -328 -2999 Address 201 W. North River Dr. #510, City /State /Zip Spokane WA 99201 CTPERMIT.DOC 1/29/97 . ~- �+�*�+++++�*+°*�* ��***^+f�+*++�++�++�A+A++**++++****+�*+*�+**A* ~,�""",, /x:nun�' �"��"`~"^°..-~..''' ' �� ,-_. OF ,.."",`^ WA x ^�� /v ur �u^��n "" ' ' - ^^^�».��+ +++*��*�*a�+��*� �/++A**++**+u*+*++*‘*A*+**A*r�..*^``" *��a-��1�*� TPANSMIT Nu 7 438 25 O9/26/98 14:]3 mber: R97OO838 Amount: � , . payment Method: CHECK Notation: POE CONST8UCTIUN_.._Injt:KJp_ -----'---_-_--_-_-_-----_--__-------__- ` ' -''-'-- Permit N ot D96-0246 Type: DEVPERM DEVELOPMENT PEKMIT` Parcel Not O0O48O-0O10 ' Site Address: 13075 GATEWAY DR ti SUITE 130 Location: ^' SUITE --' 12,270.19 - T�ta1 Fees: ihis Payment 7 1438 ^ 25 Tota l ALL Pmts: 12 ,270~19 Balance: '00 7r5._�/ �** ^�+k**A�*�*�«+aa**4i***++*+*+a+++*+aAa++��° k^+++a*+*^1\a***' +* Account Code Description � ` Am `' unt '000/322 .100 BUILDING _ NONkES ` 7,433:75 O0O/386~904 STATE BUILDING SURCHARGE `4"5O ' ''' - - .--------'__-----_--__-_--_-----_----�_._---_- � ' 3 ` 6213 09/29 97�7 ��TOTAL ��`�7438"25�.��`' _' ,—'"•"r ` +++ +A+�+++a+aa*A+++*^+�A* -le A+* A- 4: k ***+a^+*o* ++A. *4�* '+*"*�*+ C�TY OF TUKWILA. NA `.� � , � ' - TRANSMIT TRANSMIT Number': K9700794 Amount: 4.831.94 07/13/98 14:14 Pavment Method: CHECK, Notation: PPLCJFFMAN [NGI Init: DLH' -..--_--------�-,----'---^_~-��--'-'-~�~-~---'-----'-__�_�_�—^_- Permit Not D98-0246 TvPm: DE.VPERM DEVELOFMENT.PERMIT . Parcel Not 000480-0010 Site Address:: 13075 -,GAlENAy DR` Total Feee: 12.265,69 . This Pavment 4.831.94 Total ALL Pmts: 4.831.94 Balance: � � ` 7433>75 ' **++^A**aa++*+^+ak+a*+A+*6++x*AAA+*++^+*^^+*A*A+^*+.4+*a**/.+**4** Account Code ' Dericription Amount'` 000/345.830 ' _ / PLAN CHE CK� - NnhKES � '�� `� ' � 3l.94'� �� '� m717 TOTAL .94� �6�2��7/14�,._� �`._._��.�48�1 .��^�� INSPECTION NO. ;1,..,1;1,;1,3,1,, • INSPECTION RECORu Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 9$18 4 PERMIT NO. �� 'ect: ` `, 'p of Inspect Adddress: \ Dat pedal instructions: Date wanted: q a.m. p.m. Reques er: `, \�QM Lh_ Phone: p,Qq Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Inspecto Date: Ei $47.00 REINSPECTI„FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. CaII to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: INSPECTION RECO( ) Retain a`copy with permit INSPECTION NO, CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 PERMIT NO. (206)431 -3670 Proect: �t c. g « Y I c . tit k,,,Aja Ve Type f InspectJJ'QQn: " fsG;L.j[__._, Address: J t 3C S :-�'`2C I `� >r Date called: / 13 1 11' Special instructions: r.. Date wanted: a /a 1 1 ,� m. Requester; -: ' 6 li n Phone: I j .4, 101 F7Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: fri-t, bie $47.00 REINSPECTION FEE ` QUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. ` i.•".= F*..: c'- sM1i,+. 3{ pi, �aCi:; K. yi' J` Za.`" h: �fY+';�7y�h.r'Y`_�:13^'r1r,�.F, ,�+tx jt_ ::u:'�'^k'` �i'±:.w�i�.... �oy� •r•:D.'J�r!S'.�Y*'ii::+'�'': �t�:.i•��.k�3Q:aNS:�`�? �'r ?�'�'.... INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100; Tukwila, WA 98188 INSPECTION REC Retain a copy with pL it PERMIT NO. (206) 431 -3670 Project: F dry &.` `� 4.1.2.,/"..? Type of inspection: F.454 clr i ` Address: ( zit,/ Date called: (4.. att.,/ 3 Special instructions: Date wanted/2_8 ,%e drtv. Requester: Phone No.: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Inspector: Date: 1.2.7.6.1 ` $42.00 REINSPECT ON FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: Date: agi-OP-76 0,j INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100; Tukwila, WA 98188 INSPECTION RECCE, Retain a copy with pILAit PERMIT NO. (206) 431 -3670 Project4 L Type of 'nspeFti n: / f/t 6,, .6.,/ Address: �te called: Special instructions: Date wanted: ,..7_, 6 12-- Requester: Phone No.: rt- Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Inspector, Pi Dater $42.00. REINSPECT N FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: Date: am; INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 INSPECTION REC Retain a copy with p it 7Jt� -'o2 Ale PERMIT NO. (206) 431 -3670 Pr t: (erf, --ic Li k-%iA/a Ve Ty of inspection: J2. .l �i'�o r6�� Address: Da```��e \LI • p 6 Special instructions: Date wfirat Gil a.m. R u ster: Phone .• -41 p p, I) 19a --- Approved per applicable codes. WrCorrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: ,&/-Ais/g (4.59 ro . z' r• PI $42.' s REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: Date: ...�.1:�V�T34.+ ^Y 2' :: F:,T:�.. ..�1''.•':r:±l�.;I. 'y .... .r �l:....h !• . .... �`�"..: t INSPECTION RECIVII Retain a copy with pLilit INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 PERMIT NO. (206) 431 -3670 1l tr c l . �� I I/�a''�'- Ty r i�p p�%r i�l / (� irLi' �' d re u Sr G a-t� wa r Da e called t a-.3 Li ce Special instructions: 4., � Date wanted:(/ CM Requ a r: c- bider A Ph ? O ) * ib G - c-2 Rif !r Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: ' 1) ma "r.a.2,71 --- l/ ` 1-- ,5100.1" • 2.) Co a i — - ! ' 4 � 5 J �� a _ -��'e s /zz_--l. // —& 3 , ---� 4 k /,,c, ---1 if)(//‘ e /-e- ..e4e a -_____C-_________ etheli i2-10 6.13e,P7 1.�& modk fld/ •y 94/4/ ___A Inspector: A-Lt - 14401'7 $42.00 €INSPECTIO EE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcen er Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Date:) Receipt No.: Date: - .S�Ss .b -t Y.,rYp.y.��1..: ._ "'Li• �f L'l'A7�"�` rri!!%kV tiinwi�� i.^(.. :.t�"��Pri"�:1�: ^: ��i"S.;S :� °',.: �:., «t7.ry �,,.�I_-�: INSPECTION REC Retain a copy with .'f' it INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 0,6-04 PERMIT NO. (206) 431 -3670 Project: // Type f ins ection: Address: /J27.5 / . /� ,,,,r�' ate ca led: Speci structions: G� (/p 1 o7/ �Q S Date wanted: _ a.m. �� Requester: X411 Phone No.: 4,/J/ g 72_ pproved per applicable codes. COMMENTS: Corrections required prior to approval. $42.00 • EINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to nspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. CaII to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: Date: ' i? 4' �?: ii .'•`t:,t;.��t`:.< : °r`::�.. # ".: w'�;`�i:h,.T,se�e;":^ttl:^:'�?4 i'+ *;7Cy *2.• �:'- VIWt. +�,^',+^.1A + +'x: "y'p :Y�r •«..R..�7L..;,. �r.e.- ...:�1r .,q;y..;....., .:,.r.: rwy -,x,a. INSPECTION REC Retain a copy with INSP CTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100; T kwila, WA 98188 t PERMIT NO. (206) 431 -3670 Project: --- 6-1.}7.1`6, JJ r/ Type of inspectio i . — Address. pate called: Special instructions: Date wanted: a. m. / .47 `' /j, AA/Ls÷ Requester: Phone No.: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: ijo ter--- oc.•f . Date: ! / ,rte $42.00 REINSPECT! ON FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. CaII to schedule.reinspectiori. Receipt No.: Date: . .`i,'•', ":�^xm..a�s� :T?'e�y �Y;��yn-.foviL M*y<r:'.t4 �' �.+•o.._ ,- c.,�._., •,,,.,,.,,f z's- 7r,` x, T,- .:"'..r.,,..r,....i�- �._ ^. „. 4 .1'; '•�'. } jfF"."r!f�... �i Y;,f.:. ✓•J. i. ��'Y,._ i'r:F.i: =.: �.:`;'.Jr��l�i%:,� f %:.' S!T.`n' �,"•��.i'iS�t.. M1y,.,.... INSPECTION RECD,,. Retain a copy with p ►,..alt INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100; Tukwila, WA 98188 p7r--oay 4 • PERMIT NO. (206) 431 -3670 Project: �' ec\ t i �� Type of inspe on: rets1,,, f,1 wail4- F,��,f „ Address: VI 0-1 S Ga wc+,� \ (. Date called: /u /l `T /q25" Date wanted: i U/3J1 --a:n, �' Special instructions: d. Requester''''An u es Phti/-F5'`7? Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: � f"--1702,-1 4.f.4._ . arm .d--? i 7 / -----J-4L-i----5-- 1, A r-f.--- 1, 4 e 2 4 / / 1— . . _ rGfr /1• , 1,71, _______S . ,-, Inspector: Date:. J $42.00 REINSPECTION E. REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: Date: v.- ..c,.— ..w.snry, ;7.+x n'c^F: +waCw�� n�,r.,T°'1t"+.nx^ err- ,r,»r.•.- n::.�-- ... ^ "."'�'� s� +ca�r.M^,'�6= rai?;cli: INSPECTION RE Retain a copy with /mit INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100; Tukwila, WA 98188 PERMIT NO. (206) 431 -3670 • •'ect: _ r • *Ht . V Type • i sDection: (VJII tt r? • Al -)5 �^C Date calle�b ..a..{0 _ a --'0 Special instructions: Date wante) fa,-7 _q g am; Requester: �Jh ii) Phone I3 J _ C ^q q -0 Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: ) Inspector: 111,4 " Date: /f/"�if (L/ $42.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: Date: ;a 'lsl' "w '' >A a,rtrc�,. .tszr ra Vii,;: ,..., -k wa yr K:nti. tg.s�"rt':4Y1 r„ :! W: INSPECTION RECO rN Retain a copy with pei..../it INSPEC ON NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100; Tukwila, WA 9818 (206) 431 -3670 of *&-k ; c L Type Date cal • dp ec ; j (ail ,V : Ad Special instructions: Date wa t � q • ��(9:1 !� p.m. Requester: John Phone NoL 3 j — 5y9 qD.... Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Inspector: Date: 0;2.7-64 P1 $42.00 REINSPEC ION E REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: Date: i..' '.' ty11411 n�.s.u•7 �A515` l+:f`iT:i�:�;��.�'%- 'u�M�: x -alf: VicyC te,'W4A:1ti4•701,Wiki tic% wri t%if yp, ∎.p :T::,1?•4:i"`.M: INSPECTION RECI Retain a copy with p:-4i INSPE ON NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100; Tukwila, WA 98188 :fk PERMIT NO. b (206) 431 -3670 Project: P. IPr-Fi► C Club /t- Type .QLii spection:. -KCAM Address: `-r Lao c Way a.)1 Date called: 1D- 0-c9—gS Spe i� ruction` �l-_ 714.('0400,71-6(41 / 4 f C.rl'" Date wanted: q �`�n" t, ' �'� ^ per Requester: �� „ 1 \s Phone No.: Xa1 sG ca. Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: ' AI '.,62;eil___/ a.)1 X Z-Lt---Lie- ./-07 A ter► 1 L _ Inspector: y / Date: $42.0RNSPECTIONFEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: Date: ,INSPECTION RED Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100; Tukwila, WA 981 PERMIT NO. (206) 431 -3670 Project: � C. kiwi �(,,, ►Vf e of inspection: was L�� .tc,wteve• Address: 1 `'7 5 pu,j�� j.Date called: I pl-L 2..../ 5 Special instructions: u/ e. I, —ON( `(5 et6k.\- Date wanted: (0 WP Requester: a.‘ vi Phone No.: 1) j`c6 2....._ Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: t5c1bO -c _(410 eI Inspector: Date: 10_,23._ 11 i $42.00 REINSPEC ION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: Date: i�w�YYes� .'t?T�'s.wy��j.y ^ ^;L- b�.r -.r. ,j:.t••*,�t,ns.Yw. '7*�,:^n••�rcr. -�.... y - +�w.yT'`<'� 'i �rq:.n.�.p �. r ryb:�e......_.- n1- �-- •,2•• -"f•y. i�'t'S^' ..:.y`f. INSPECTION RE Retain a copy with p'mit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 of ‘ PERMIT NO. (206) 431 -3670 Project: T e of in ectio 04 ia. Address1307; G Date called: lo �' q'� Special instructions: Date wanted: (U+Z0�9.m= Requesterf Phone No 3 f t Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Inspector: _ s Al L .4 AA pi $42.00 EINSPECTIO" FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Date:, /'j 7 Receipt No.: Date: ' • ' " , 7.47. •=7.71,7r7777.777.7.7.i." City of Tukwila Fire Department TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT FINAL APPROVAL FORM Project Name e Address 130-15 Cc-4.1/4-)--ri • Retain current inspection schedule Needs, shift inspection John W Rants, Mayor Thomas P. Keefe, Fire Chief Permit No. 7) csik 2.4-(0 Suite # Approved without correction notice Approved with correction notice issued Sprinklers: .cz; Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Halon: Monitor: Pre-Fire: Authorize� ignature MEI FINALAPP.FRM Rev. 2/19/98 Date T.F.D. Form P.P. 85 Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone:PON 575-4404 Fax (206) 575-4439 26 January 1999 O1-1J ROSENAU & ASSOiIATES, INC. Construction Inspection & Material Testing 6747 M.L. King Way South, Seattle, Washington 98118 -3216 • Tel:(206) 725 -4600 • Toll Free:(888) OTTO -4 -US • Fax:(206) 723 -2221 WBE W2F5913684 • WABO Registered Agency • A2LA Accredited Laboratory �, {,r... a� Ira � ��s � JAN 2 9 1999 City of Tukwila Building Division 6200 Southcenter Blvd. Tukwila, Washington 98188 Project: Electric Lightwave Permit Number:''' 13075 Gateway Drive Job Number: 98-482 Ladies/Gentlemen: We herewith certify that we have completed the following types of inspection and testing on this project. To the best of our knowledge, all work inspected is according to approved plans and specifications. 1. Reinforcing steel [not required — informational purposes only] 2. Reinforced concrete [not required — informational purposes only] 3. Epoxied anchors 4. Expansion anchors 5. Structural steel erection — welds and high strength bolts Copies of all reports have been submitted to your office. Sincerely, OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. Susan Rosenau -Moser Vice President SRM/jlp fax c: Poe Construction ,INC. Construction inspection & Material Testing 6747 M.L. King Way South, Seattle, Washington 98118 -3216 • Tel:(206) 725-4600 • Toll Free:(888) OTTO-4-US • Fax:(206) 723-2221 WBE W2F5913684 • WABO Registered Agency • A2LA Accredited Laboratory CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION REPORT REPORT NUMBER: 003 REPORT INCLUDES: Reinforced concrete - cancel PROJECT: Electric Lightwave PERMIT NUMBER: D98 -0 ADDRESS: 13075 Gateway Drive, Tukwila JOB NUMBER: OWNER: CONTRACTOR: Poe Construction ARCHITECT: CLIENT: Poe Construction ENGINEER: PPL Coffman ADDRESS: RECEIVED DEC 0 7 1998 VE! OPMENr 98-482 INSPECTOR AND DATE INSPECTOR'S REMARKS 13. Robertson Arrived on site as requested for inspection of concrete placement. Slab placement at utility structure stopped by 11 -25 -98 City of Tukwila due to no permits. CC: Owner Architect 1 Engineer 1 Contractor I Building Department REVIEWED BY This report applies only to the items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of the client and Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except in full, without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited. Page l of 1 OTTL ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. Construction Inspection & Material Testing 6747 M.L. King Way South, Seattle, Washington 98118-3216 • Tel:(206) 725-4600 • Toll Free:(888) OTTO.44US • Fax:(206) 723.222' WBE W2F5913684 • WABO Registered Agency • A2LA Accredited Laboratory CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION REPORT REPORT NUMBER: 002 REPORT INCLUDES: High strength bolting PROJECT: Electric Lightwave ADDRESS: 13075 Gateway Drive, Tukwila OWNER: ARCHITECT: ENGINEER: PPL Coffman INSPECTOR AND DATE R. Hardy I1 -I1 -98 RECEIVED NOV 3 0 COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT PERMIT NUMBER: D98 -0246 JOB NUMBER: 98 -482 CONTRACTOR: Poe Construction CLIENT: Poe Construction ADDRESS: INSPECTOR'S REMARKS Performed inspection of high strength bolting at grids A to C/4.5 to 5.5. A325 bolts were brought to snug tight condition as defined by AISC 9th edition and as per details on S1.0 and S2.1. All bolted conditions are acceptable and in accordance with plans and specifications. CC: Owner Architect 1 Engineer 1 Contractor 1 Building Department REVIEWED BY This report applies only to the items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of the client and Otto Rosenau & Associates. Inc. Reproduction of this report. except in full, without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited. Page 1 of 1 JOB NUMBER: 98-482 OTT) ROSENAU & ASSC,JIATES, INC. Construction inspection & Material Testing 6747 M,L. King Way South, Seattle, Washington 98118.3216 • Tel:(206) 725-4600 • Toll Free:(888) OTTO.4 -US • Fax:(206) 723 -2221 WBE W2F5913684 • WABO Registered Agency • A2LA Accredited Laboratory CONCRETE REPORT REPORT NUMBER: 001 PERMIT NUMBER: C98 -0246 PROJECT: Electric Lightwwve CLIENT: ADDRESS: 13075 Gateway Drive, Tukwila ADDRESS: Poe Construction DATE: 22 October 19916 INSPECTOR: C. Mlodzik Cast test specimens for 10 cubic yards 5 sack, psi concrete from Miles in the following areas: slab on grade for standby generator - enclosure..Reinforcingsteel - inspected previously on 1O -20 -98 by H. Roehrig. No special inspection of cast -in -place concrete is required by plans nor the City. However, at the request of Poe Construction, sampled the concrete for strength tests (did- not - inspected placement). Resteel is grade 60 , as specified, from Birmingham Concrete was placed via and it was - vibrated - internally. Mix- Number: 1050A Batch weights per cubic yard Admixtures: Air # type cement # 7/8" agg., -# agg., # fly ash # water # sand agg. Cast specimens #: 1-4 at cubic yards with a 4 %" slump. Truck #: 032 Del. ticket #: 0437478 Cast specimens #: at cubic yards with a - slump. T- ruck#: -Del.-ticket #: Cast specimens #: at cubic yards with a slump. Truck #: Del. ticket #: Ambient Temp (Each Set): 61 °F C- oncrete Temp (Each Set): -63 °F Weather: Date Samples Received: 10 -23 -98 COMMENTS: 10 gallons water Mdd'd.bv contractor TEST RESULTS SPECIMEN NUMBER TEST DATE FIELD CURE AGE (DAYS) SIZE (IN) AREA (SQ.IN.) WEIGHT MAX LOAD (LBS) STRENGTH (PSI) 1 10 -29 -98 7 6x12 28.28 28.34# 82,370 2910 2 11 -19 -98 28 6x12 28.32 28.50# 114,140 4030 3 11 -19 -98 28 6x12 28.32 28.43# 113,810 4020 4* *Discarded REVIEWED BY TESTED IN GENERAL ACCORDANCE TO ASTM C39 x ASTM C78 ASTM C109/109M COMPRESSIVE x FLEXURAL THIS REPORT APPLIES ONLY TO THE ITEMS TESTED OR REPORTED AND IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF THE CLIENT AND OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. REPRODUCTION OF THIS-REPOIt'T, EXCEPTtN FULL, WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION PROlvtOUR -FIRM !S-S` RiC`PLY`PROHlBiTEI7. OWNER 1 CONTRACTOR ARCHITECT 1 BUILDING DEPT 1 ENGINEER _ REVIEWED BY TESTED IN GENERAL ACCORDANCE TO ASTM C39 x ASTM C78 ASTM C109/109M COMPRESSIVE x FLEXURAL THIS REPORT APPLIES ONLY TO THE ITEMS TESTED OR REPORTED AND IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF THE CLIENT AND OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. REPRODUCTION OF THIS-REPOIt'T, EXCEPTtN FULL, WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION PROlvtOUR -FIRM !S-S` RiC`PLY`PROHlBiTEI7. JOB NUMBER: 98-482 OT].-J ROSENAU & ASSCSL IATES, INC. Construction Inspection & Material Testing 6747 M.L. King Way South, Seattle, Washington 98118 -3216 • Tel:(206) 725.4600 • Toll Free:(888) OT O.4 -US • Fax:(206) 723.222 - WBE W2F5913684 • WABO Registered Agency • A2LA Accredited Laboratory CONCRETE REPORT REPORT NUMBER: 001 PERMIT NUMBER: C98 -0246 PROJECT: Electric Lightwave ADDRESS: 13075 Gateway Drive, Tukwila CLIENT: ADDRESS: Poe Construction DATE: 22 October 1998 INSPECTOR: C. Mlodzik Cast test specimens for 10 cubic yards 5 sack. psi concrete from Miles in the following areas: slab on grade for standby generator enclosure. Reinforcing steel inspected previously on 10 -20 -98 by H. Roehrig. No special inspection of cast -in -place concrete is required by plans nor the City. However, at the request of Poe Construction. sampled the concrete for strength tests (did not inspected placement). Resteel is grade 60 , as specified. from Birmingham Concrete was placed via and it was vibrated internally. Mix Number: 1050A Batch weights per cubic yard Admixtures: Air # type cement # sand # 7/8" agg., # agg., # agg. # fly ash # water Cast specimens #: 1-4 at cubic yards with a 4'/4" slump. Truck #: 032 Del. ticket #: 0437478 Cast specimens #: at cubic yards with a slump. Truck #: Del. ticket #: Cast specimens #: at cubic yards with a slump. Truck #: Del. ticket #: Ambient Temp (Each Set): 61 °F Concrete Temp (Each Set): 63 °F Weather: Date Samples Received: 10 -23 -98 COMMENTS: 10 gallons water added by contractor TEST RESULTS SPECIMEN NUMBER TEST DATE FIELD CURE AGE (DAYS) SIZE (IN) AREA (SQ.IN.) WEIGHT MAX LOAD (LBS) STRENGTH (PSI) 1 10 -29 -98 7 6x12 28.28 28.34# 82,370 2910 REVIEWED BY TESTED IN GENERAL ACCORDANCE TO ASTM C39 ASTM C78 ASTM C109/109M COMPRESSIVE FLEXURAL THIS REPORT APPLIES ONLY TO THE ITEMS TESTED OR REPORTED AND IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF THE CLIENT AND OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. REPRODUCTION OF THIS REPORT, EXCEPT IN FULL, WITHOUT WRITTEN PERbIISSION FROM OUR FIRM IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED. OWNER 1 CONTRACTOR ARCI-IITECT 1 BUILDING DEPT 1 ENGINEER REVIEWED BY TESTED IN GENERAL ACCORDANCE TO ASTM C39 ASTM C78 ASTM C109/109M COMPRESSIVE FLEXURAL THIS REPORT APPLIES ONLY TO THE ITEMS TESTED OR REPORTED AND IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF THE CLIENT AND OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. REPRODUCTION OF THIS REPORT, EXCEPT IN FULL, WITHOUT WRITTEN PERbIISSION FROM OUR FIRM IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED. OT1J ROSENAU & ASSO-IATES, INC. Construction Inspection & Material Testing 6747 M.L. King Way South, Seattle, Washington 98118-3216 • Tel:(206) 725 -4600 • Toll Free:(888) OTTO -4 -US • Fax:(206) 723-222' WBE W2F5913684 • WABO Registered Agency • A2LA Accredited Lagtont r ECEVED CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION REPORT 1 REPORT NUMBER: 001 REPORT INCLUDES: Resteel, Epoxy, Structural steel erection PROJECT: ADDRESS: OWNER: ARCHITECT: ENGINEER: Electric Lightwave 13075 Gateway Drive, Tukwila PPL Coffman PERMIT NUMBER: JOB NUMBER: CONTRACTOR: CLIENT: ADDRESS: NOV 1 8 1998 COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT D98 -0246 98 -482 Poe Construction Poe Construction INSPECTOR AND DATE INSPECTOR'S REMARKS H. Roehrig Inspected exterior preparations and reinforcing steel for standby generator enclosure slab on grade per layout on 10 -20 -98 drawing A1.1 and found preparatory work and resteel to be in accordance with specifications. Inspected five locations of two (10) epoxy anchors: (2) 7/8" diameter holes x 4" brushed and blown from inside -out: and 3 /a" diameter rods (supplied by epoxy manufacturer). Epoxy is CiaGel 7000, covert operations. Holes are partially filled: rod is twisted into epoxy -filled hole. All installation is in accordance with specifications, good practice. and manufacturers directions (see 1 /S2.1). C. Mlodzik 10 -22 -98 R. Hardy 1 1 -2-98 CC: 1 1 1 Inspected the field erection, high strength bolting, and field welding for the cable frame assembly. Reference to drawing S2.1 and particular to details #3 and #4. Steel is in progress between B- C/5 -5.5 grid area. All work appears to comply with City of Tukwila approved drawings and AWS D1.1, AISC. Performed visual inspection of expansion anchors through 6 "x3 "x1/4 " tube steel and angle 5 "x5 "x5/8" as per connection detail 2 on S2.1. Holes were inspected prior to placement for depth and cleanliness. They were torqued to 350# maximum in snug tight position. Owner Architect Engineer Contractor Building Department REVIEWED BY CeZ;;17//: ,a-ae--irdeL1 This report applies only to the items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of the client and Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except in full. without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited. Page I of 1 TUICwitA, WASIiiNCITON 1501 DtN- Dl*Sll` iON REGISTERED ARCHITECT CRAI D. BEAUMONT STATE OF WASHINGTON PPL ► COFFMAN I N E E R S 201 W. North River Drive, Suite 510 Spokane, WA 99201 (509) 328 -2994 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility ELECTRIC LIGHTWAVE TUKWILA SWITCH FACILITY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 00 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS (VOLUME 1) Section 00100 Section 00200 Section 00300 Bid Solicitation Instruction to Bidders Bid Form DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (VOLUME 1) Section 01100 Summary Section 01200 Price and Payment Procedures Section 01300 Administrative Requirements Section 01400 Quality Requirements Section 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 01600 Product Requirements Section 01700 Execution Requirements Section 01800 Closeout Requirements DIVISION 02 - SITEWORK (VOLUME 1) Section 02223 Selective Demolition DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE (VOLUME 1) Section 03300 Cast -in -Place Concrete DIVISION 05 - METALS (VOLUME 1) Section 05500 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTICS (VOLUME 1) Section 06100 Section 06410 Rough Carpentry Custom Cabinets DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION (VOLUME 1) Section 07200 Insulation Section 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Section 07840 Firestopping Section 07900 Joint Sealers 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS (VOLUME 1) Section 08110 Steel Doors and Frames Section 08211 Flush Wood Doors Section 08710 Door Hardware Section 08800 Glazing DIVISION 09 - FINSHES (VOLUME 1) Section 09260 Section 09511 Section 09650 Section 09900 Gypsum Board Assemblies Suspended Acoustical Ceilings Resilient Flooring Paints and Coatings DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL (VOLUME 2) Section 15010 Mechanical General Provisions Section 15020 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Section 15050 Basic Materials and Methods Section 15250 Insulation Section 15400 Plumbing Piping and Accessories Section 15450 Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment Section 15530 Refrigeration Piping and Accessories Section 15770 Air Conditioning Units Section 15840 Ductwork and Accessories Section 15850 Fans Section 15900 Building Controls System DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL (VOLUME 2) Section 16010 General Provisions Section 16111 Conduit Section 16112 Surface Raceways Section 16118 Underground Ducts and Manholes Section 16121 600 Volt or Less Wire and Cable Section 16130 Boxes Section 16140 Wiring Devices Section 16150 Motors Section 16160 Cabinets and Enclosures Section 16180 Overcurrent Protection Devices Section 16190 Supporting Devices Section 16195 Electrical Identification Section 16425 Switchboards Section 16440 Disconnect Switches Section 16450 Secondary Grounding Section 16451 Lightning Section 16461 Dry-Type Transformers Section 16462 Dry-Type Transformers - K -Rated t Section 16470 Panelboards Section 16481 Surge Suppression Section 16485 Contactors 07/07/98 ; 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility DIVISION 16 CONT'D ELECTRICAL (VOLUME 2) 07/0707/07/98 o a, Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL WORK TABLE OF CONTENTS A. 15010 Mechanical General Provisions B. 15020 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing C. 15050 Basic Materials and Methods D. 15250 Insulation E. 15400 Plumbing Piping and Accessories F. 15450 Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment G. 15530 Refrigeration Piping and Accessories H. 15770 Air Conditioning Units I. 15840 Ductwork and Accessories J. 15850 Fans K. 15900 Building Controls Systems TABLE OF CONTENTS 15000 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwa e, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 15010 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 GENE L 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Bas c General Provisions specifically applicable to Division 15 Sections, in addition to Division 1 - eneral Requirements. 1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conditions: 1. Conform to all Bidding Requirements, General Conditions and Amendments to the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Special Conditions and General Requirements, Division 1, which govem the work specified herein. 2. The Contractor is obligated to comply with the above in addition to the requirements of this Section. 3. Modifications by this Section do not nullify any other portions of the above referenced conditions. B. Plans and Specifications: 1. Plans and specifications shall be taken together. 2. Contractor shall provide all equipment, materials and work shown on the plans and /or called for in these specifications. Provide work specified and not indicated on plans, or work indicated on plans and not specified, as though mentioned in both. 3. When discrepancies occur between plans and specifications, the Architect shall determine which takes precedence and the Contractor shall perform the selected requirement without additional cost. 4. Mechanical drawings: a. Mechanical drawings are diagrammatic and show general arrangement of piping, ductwork, equipment, etc. Follow as closely as actual building construction and work of other trades will permit. Because of small scale of mechanical drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories which may be required. Provide these items as required for a complete and operational system. b. Consider architectural structural and electrical drawings part of this work insofar as these drawings furnish information relating to design and construction of building. c. Investigate structural and finish conditions affecting this work and arrange work accordingly, providing such fittings, valves, and accessories required to best meet conditions. C. Red and become familiar with Bidding Documents and all other Divisions of this Specification as they do apply to work in Division 15. 1.03 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS A. The word "provide," as used in Division 15, means "furnish and install." B. The word "Contractor," as used in these specifications, means the Mechanical Contractor. C. The word "approved," as used in these specifications, means approval of the Architect. MECHANICAL ENERAL PROVISIONS 15010 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility D. Abbreviations: AABC AMCA ANSI ARI ASHRAE ASME ASTM AWWA AWS CISPI FM MEC NEBB NEC NEMA NFPA NREC OSHA SMACNA UBC UMC UPC UL Associated Air Balance Council Air Moving and Conditioning Association American National Standards Institute Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers American Society of Mechanical Engineers American Society of Testing Materials American Water Works Association American Welding Society Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation Model Energy Code National Environmental Balancing Bureau National Electric Code National Electrical Manufacturers Association National Fire Protection Association Washington State Non - Residential Energy Code Occupational Safety and Health Administration Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. Uniform Building Code Uniform Mechanical Code Uniform Plumbing Code Underwriters Laboratory 1.04 CODES, PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS A. Codes: Work shall be installed as a minimum in conformity with applicable local ordinances and statutes. Standards and sizes which exceed preceding requirements shall be installed as drawn or specified. Nothing in the specifications shall be construed to permit deviation to less than the requirements of governing codes. B. Codes and Standards: Applicable codes and standards shall include, but not necessarily be limited to: 1. Uniform Plumbing Code, 1997, by International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials. 2. Uniform Mechanical Code, 1997, by International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials. 3. Uniform Building Code, 1997, by International Conference of Building Officials. 4. Model Energy Code (ASHRAE Standard 90.1- 1989). 5. Requirements of OSHA and EPA. 6. National Fire Protection Association Codes. 7. SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, latest edition. 8. All state and local amendments. C. Agencies having jurisdictional authority over mechanical installation. Local Municipal Building Department Local Sewer and Water District Requirements State and County Department of Health Local Fire Marshal MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVW.'_ "C:NS 15010 - 2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility D. Permits, Fees and Inspections: 1. Arrange and pay for all permits, fees and inspections required in connection with this installation. Present the Owner with properly signed certificates of final inspection before the work will be accepted. 2. Call for all inspections by local building official(s) when they become due, and do not cover any work until approved by these governing authorities. 3. Make all arrangements with utility companies for water, gas and drainage services, etc., associated with the work and include required payments for meters, piping, services, connection charges and materials fumished and installed by utility companies. Work and materials shall be in strict accordance with rules of respective authorities. E. Underwriters Laboratory Approval: Where Underwriters Laboratory standards exist, all items of electrical equipment or items partially composed of electrical equipment shall carry Underwriters Laboratory (UL) label either for the entire unit or for the electrical portion of the equipment. If standards do not exist, equipment will be approved if the item has been submitted to the testing laboratory and the manufacturer certifies compliance with Underwriters Laboratory standards established for similar items. F. ASME Code Stamp: ASME code stamp required on all pressure vessels and relief valves. 1.05 WORK INCLUDED A. Work under this division shall include fumishing all materials, labor, equipment, tools, appliances, hoisting, scaffolding, supervision and overhead for the proper execution and completion of the mechanical work. B. All new equipment and products as noted in PART 2 - PRODUCTS of each section shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. C. Mechanical Systems - Including but not limited to: 1. Plumbing Systems. 2. Fire Suppression Systems. 3. Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning Systems. 4. Temperature Controls System. D. Demolition: 1. Perform all demolition or interface work required in the existing building for the removal of or interface with existing mechanical equipment, ductwork, tubing, or piping. Relocate or modify the existing piping, tubing and ductwork as required by any general construction alterations or by the installation of new ductwork, tubing, or piping in the existing building. 2. Notify Architect/Engineer of discovery of any hazardous materials such as asbestos, etc. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. References hereinafter in Division 15 of this Specification to material or type of construction are for the purpose of establishing a standard of quality. Any equipment or material that is proposed by the Contractor and is not specifically identified in this specification shall require Engineer's approval. B. Provide materials bearing legible markings showing the standards to which they conform: i.e. ASTM, ANSI, Commercial Standards, AMCA, ARI, etc. C. Where specifically noted, systems such as computer room air conditioning and fire suppression, etc., shall be installed by factory trained and authorized contractors. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 15010 - 3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility D. Where specifically noted, provide manufacturers' certification that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements specified. Certification shall be signed and dated by manufacturer's executive or authorized representative. E. Make complete mechanical installation, connecting to all equipment shown on the plans or called for in the specifications. F. All work, material and equipment to be free of defect. 1.07 WORKMANSHIP A. This Contractor shall provide completed systems with a first class, neat and finished appearance. If, in the judgement of the Engineer, any portion of the work has not been performed in a workmanlike manner or is left in a rough, unfinished state, this Contractor will be required to remove, reinstall or replace same and patch and paint surrounding surfaces in a manner acceptable to the Architect, without increase in cost to the Owner. 1.08 SAFETY AND PROTECTION A. Safety Measures to be Taken: The Engineer has not been retained or compensated to provide design and construction review services relating to the Contractor's safety precautions or to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures required for the Contractor to perform his work. The Contractor will be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the job site, including safety of all persons and property during performance of the work. B. Head Protection: Provide head protection where duct angles, pipe hangers, equipment support angles, etc., are exposed in walkways, or in access ways for any maintenance. Cover all such potentially injurious protrusions occurring less than 7' -0" above the floor with padding. Padding shall be securely and permanently fastened and finished comparable to adjacent finishes. 1.09 RESPONSIBILITY AND GUARANTEES A. Without cost to Owner, correct all defects and failures discovered within one year from date of final acceptance except when, in the opinion of the Engineer, such condition is due to neglect or carelessness of those other than the Contractor. B. The guarantee of the Mechanical Contractor is independent of shorter time limits by any manufacturer of equipment he has furnished. C. Make all necessary adjustments during first year of operation. D. The presence of an inspector during any construction does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for defects discovered after completion of the work. 1.10 SERVICE A. Where required by the specifications, mechanical equipment such as packaged air conditioners, etc. shall be furnished and installed by, or under direct supervision of, factory trained representative. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 15010 -4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Equipment Schedules: 1. Fixture and equipment schedules are on the drawings. 2. Capacities, ratings, sizes, etc., shown are minimum acceptable and may not necessarily correspond with catalog ratings of equipment specified. C. Submittals: 1. Submit complete bound sets at one time. Partial submittals will be retumed without action. 2. Submittals shall include items called for in individual Sections of these Specifications. 3. Submittals shall include all items as called for on drawings, schedules and plans. D. Required Data: 1. Equipment identification number as shown on drawings. 2. Manufacturers' names and address. 3. Catalog number and trade name. 4. Detailed description and /or cuts; include voltage, phase, full -load currents, performance capacities, efficiencies, noise data, etc. E. Substitutions: 1. Manufacturers: a. The use of brand names is for the purpose of description and establishing level of quality and does not eliminate the requirements of meeting specifications. b. Manufacturers listed in product specifications are approved to bid the project for the items indicated without obtaining prior approval. Other manufacturers desiring to bid the project require prior approval. c. The listing of a manufacturer does not necessarily mean that the products of that manufacturer are equal to those specified. The listing is only an indication of those manufacturers which may be capable of manufacturing, or have in the past manufactured, items equal to those specified, and is intended to aid the Contractor in identifying manufacturers. d. Exceptions: Other brands are not accepted where an item or class of material is specified exclusively by trade name and followed by the word "only." e. The approval of a manufacturer applies to the manufacturer only and does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of meeting all applicable requirements of the plans and specifications. 2. Requests for substitutions (Prior Approvals) shall be furnished not later than 10 working days prior to bid date or request may be not considered. All substitutions requests reviewed and accepted will be described in an addendum issue prior to bid date. Prior approvals are for manufacturer only and not specific styles or models of equipment or materials and does not relieve the Contractor from compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 3. Changes Due to Substitutions: Design is based on equipment as listed in the equipment schedule. All changes in foundation, bases, connections, piping, controls, starters, electrical equipment, wiring and conduit, space, openings, wall and ceilings, sound and vibration isolation, etc., required by alternate equipment submitted and reviewed shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Shop Drawings: Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including changes to Work specified in other Sections. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 15010 - 5 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility G. Minor Deviations: 1. Contract drawings are diagrammatic and indicate extent and general arrangement of systems. Generally follow the layouts shown and coordinate the installation of mechanical work with that of the other trades. 2. Minor deviations may be made on the job with the written approval of the Architect/Engineer, provided no additional charges will be made to the Owner for such deviation. 2.02 OPERATING & MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Following initial operation of mechanical systems and prior to acceptance by the Owner, perform the following services: 1. At least two weeks prior to each instruction period give written notification of readiness to proceed to the Architect/Engineer and the Owner, and obtain mutually acceptable dates. 2. Conduct demonstrations and instructions for the Owner's representatives, pointing out requirements for servicing and maintaining equipment and systems provided under this Contract. 3. If requested by the Architect/Engineer, furnish qualifications of Contractors' personnel in charge of the instruction; foreman position is minimum acceptable. 4. Owner's representative may include personnel from Operations, Facilities Engineering and Maintenance Departments. 5. Include preliminary discussion, information from maintenance manual and contract drawings; conduct tours of the new construction, explaining maintenance, operation and adjustment of each piece of equipment. 6. Minimum duration of instruction periods: a. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning; 16 hours. b. Fire Protection; 4 hours. 7. Provide written outline of material to be covered in instruction periods for review two weeks minimum prior to sessions. 8. Instruction periods shall occur after O &M Manuals have been reviewed and approved and shall incorporate manuals in the course material. 2.03 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS, MECHANICAL A. General 1. Provide 3 manuals containing operation and maintenance information, manufacturer's parts list, names and addresses of suppliers and service agencies, supplementary drawings and diagrams for all systems and equipment of Project. 2. Present data on clean, neat and legible copies, accordion folded as necessary. 3. Do not include non - applicable information (or cross out in a permanent fashion). 4. Furnish typewritten or printed indexed and tabbed dividers between principle categories. 5. Hard cover 3 post binders. 6. Embossed on cover: a. Name of project and specification number. b. Owner. c. Location of project. d. Architect/Engineer. e. Contractor. f. Year of completion. 7. Imprint on backing: a. Name of project and specification number. b. Year of completion. MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 15010 - 6 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 2.04 RECORD DRAWINGS A. General: 1. Corrections and changes made during the progress of the work shall be neatly recorded as actually installed. 2. One set of prints showing this information shall be kept up to date at all times. These marked prints shall be kept at the job site. 3. Quality of workmanship must be clearly legible and be consistent with industry drafting standards. Drawings provided lacking these standards will not be accepted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT /SITE CONDITIONS A. Examine premises and understand the conditions which may affect performance of work of this Division before submitting proposals for this work. No subsequent allowance for time or money will be considered for any consequence related to failure to examine site conditions. B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including changes to Work specified in other Sections. Obtain permission of Owner before proceeding. C. Refer to RECORD DRAWINGS. 3.02 MAINTAINING SERVICE A. Contractor shall repair or replace promptly any existing utilities damaged by the Contractor's operation. B. Contractor shall coordinate phasing of construction work with General Contractor and shall abide by General Contractor's phasing schedule. 3.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Use care in transporting, storage and handling to avoid damage. B. Keep materials and equipment clean, dry and free from harmful conditions. 3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect all materials, equipment, fixtures, piping and valves from damage and against rust and dirt during progress of the job. B. Promptly remove all waste material and rubbish at the end of each work day. C. Clean up all equipment and flush out and clean all plumbing fixtures at completion of job. D. Clean out ventilation equipment both inside and out on completion of the job. Install clean filters. E. Flush out all piping, clean dirt legs and strainers. 3.05 INSPECTION A. Do not allow any Work to be covered up or enclosed until inspected, tested and approved by MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 15010 - 7 07/07/98 Electri 3.06 Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility Architect/Engineer, Owner's representative and /or other authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Should any Work be enclosed or covered up before such inspection and test, Contractor shall, at its own expense, uncover Work, and after it has been inspected, tested and approved, make all repairs as necessary to restore all Work disturbed to its original condition. EMPORARY SYSTEMS Air Systems: Do not use HVAC air systems during construction for temporary heat or construction ventilation. Cover duct and grille openings with taped -on plastic sheet or equivalent to keep all construction dust out of the ductwork. Temporary Heat: Make separate temporary heating system available and operate as early as practical for temporary heating of building during construction. 3.07 FUNCTIONAL TESTING Prior to performing the functional test in the presence of the Engineer and Building Owner's representative, the Contractor shall have tested all mechanical systems, components and controls to fully prove functionality. Make all final calibrations, adjustments and repairs prior to calling for functional test to be witnessed. Provide functional test of all mechanical systems, components and control system. Systems and components shall be run through all modes of operation demonstrating that systems and components are fully functional. Test shall be conducted in the presence of the Engineer and Building Owner's representative. Provide written verification of test to be signed by Owner's Representative. Provide Owner with copy of signed verification. C. Should systems not function properly in functional test witnessed by Engineer, Contractor shall reimburse Engineer for time and expenses required to witness additional tests for systems or components not performing acceptably. 3.08 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Requirements for Final Inspection: B. All of the following items shall be completed prior to final inspections. No exceptions will be made and no approval for final payment will be made until all items are completed: 1. Cleaning equipment and premises. 2. Proof of functional testing. 3. Operating instructions and maintenance manuals. 4. Operator training sessions. 5. Testing, adjusting and balancing. 6. Approvals of all code authorities and building officials. 7. Record drawings ( "as- built "). 8. Guarantee. C. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements. END OF SECTION MECHANICAL GENERAL PRC'ViSiCiNS 15010 - 8 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 15020 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work under this section shall include furnishing all labor, materials, tools, and equipment necessary for testing and adjusting necessary to place all systems and items of equipment, specified in Division 15, in proper operating condition. All work shall be completely tested as required by this section and applicable city, county, and state codes and ordinances. 1.02 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. Applicable Publications: Current publications of the issues listed below, referred to thereafter by basic designation only, form a part.of this specification to the extent indicated by references thereto. B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air- Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): 1. ANSI /ASHRAE 111 -1988 Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilating, Air - Conditioning and Refrigeration Systems. 2. ASHRAE Guideline 1 -1989 Commisioning of HVAC Systems. C. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB): 1. Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, Balancing of Environmental Systems, 5th ed. (1991). D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 13 Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 2. NFPA 14 Standpipe and Hose Systems. 3. NFPA 20 Centrifugal Fire Pumps. 4. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code. 5. NFPA 72A Local protective Signaling Systems, Current Edition. 6. NFPA 72E Automatic Fire Detectors, Current Edition. 7. NFPA 99 Standard for Health Care Facilities. E. Sheet Metal and Air - Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA): 1. HVAC Duct Construction Standards (1985)(HVAC /DCS). 2. HVAC Systems- Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (1993). 3. Building System Analysis and Retrofit Manual (1995). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit each item specified in this Section according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections and Section 15010, "Mechanical General Provisions." B. Submit Balancing Contractor's qualifications, including a copy of National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) or Associated Air Balancing Council (AABC) certification. C. Submit copies of log and reporting forms used to record balancing data. TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15020 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All equipment and apparatus required for performing tests shall be provided by the Contractor. All defects disclosed by the tests shall be corrected and the tests repeated. B. Test Log: Prepare and maintain test records of all systems tests. Records shall show Contractor personnel responsibilities, dates, test gauge identification numbers, ambient temperatures, pressure ranges, rates of pressure drop, and leakage rates. At completion of testing, logs of tests shall be certified, signed by the Contractor, and three copies sent to the Architect/Engineer. C. Covering or Using: No water distribution, sewer, special piping, plumbing, process piping, heating, cooling, refrigeration, or air distribution system shall be covered, concealed, or put into use until it has been tested, inspected, and accepted. D. Provide cooling and heating system tests as may be required at later season. If the work is completed during the heating season, perform final tests of cooling equipment the following summer; if completed during summer, perform testing of heating system the following winter. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE A. Water Piping: All piping inside building shall be tested by hydrostatic pressure at least 1 -1/2 times the maximum operating pressure, but not less than 100 psi, for a minimum of 24 hours. Only potable water shall be used for testing. B. Backflow Prevention: Backflow prevention into connected water systems shall be tested for proper functioning under conditions normal to their application. Testing shall be performed in compliance with the requirements of the local water purveyor or health authority. C. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: All pipe shall be filled with water to the highest point in each system with all air removed. The lines shall be flushed by removing the test plug. Piping may be tested in sections providing that all portions to be concealed shall be subjected to not Tess than 10' of water column. Stand piping installed for head test shall be 2" minimum. D. Drains: All floor drains, garage drains, planter drains, trench or area drains shall be flow tested to demonstrate proper operation. All traps and sumps shall be cleaned out. E. Downspout or Rainleader Piping: Test same as for soil, waste, and vent piping. F. Domestic Hot Water: Set water temperature at point of generation not to exceed 120 °F. G. Each piece of plumbing equipment and the entire plumbing system shall be adjusted and readjusted as required to ensure proper functioning and shall be left in first -class operating condition. H. Sterilization and Flushing: All water piping, eight -hour sterilization contact time, 50 parts per million chlorine concentration; open all valves several times, following by flushing with clean water until residual chlorine is Tess than 0.2 ppm. 2.02 FUEL PIPING SYSTEMS A. Natural Gas Piping: Test with compressed air at 5 psi minimum for two -hour duration with no leaks. Locate leaks by use of soap and water at joint. Repair and test until accepted. TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15G20 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 2.03 FIRE PROTECTION A. Water Service Line: Test same as specified for "Water Service Work" and NFPA 24. B. Piping: Test at hydrostatic pressure of 200 psig, duration not less than two hours, or at 50 psig in excess of the maximum pressure when the maximum pressure to be maintained in the system is in excess of 150 psig. C. Final Tests: Upon completion of the installation, the system shall be hydrostatically tested and flushed as specified in NFPA Standard No. 13. When hydrostatic, pneumatic, trip and alarm test have been completed and all necessary corrections made, final inspection shall be made by the fire marshal {or authority having jurisdiction }, prior to acceptance. The installation foreman or other competent representative of the Contractor shall be present during final inspection. The Contractor shall submit a signed and dated certificate, as stipulated in NFPA Standard No. 13, section on Acceptance Test. D. Backflow Provisions: Backflow prevention into connected potable water systems and all systems devices shall be tested for proper functioning under conditions normal to their application. 2.04 AIR DISTRIBUTION A. Ductwork Test: Test completed ducts. Leakage shall be based on the total designed air flow and shall not exceed 1 %. Provide standard test equipment including a high - pressure rotary blower, calibrated orifice section, diffusion plate, and U -tube manometer, and conduct testing as recommended by SMACNA/DCS, 1975 edition, Section VII, "Functional Criteria." When partial sections of the system are tested the summation of the leakage for all sections shall not exceed 1% of design air volume. B. Air Supply and Distribution System: The air supply and distribution system and its components shall be given an operational test, duration not Tess than four hours. 2.05 TEMPERATURE REGULATION A. At completion of the work, all temperature regulation equipment shall be tested out under operating service by a qualified engineer in the employ of the manufacturer. The manufacturer shall submit a signed statement following all testing and adjusting, certifying the equipment has been put in perfect operating order and all thermostats have been field calibrated. 2.06 ROTATING EQUIPMENT A. Motor -Driven Equipment: Test all motor -driven equipment, including fans and pumps for proper rotation. Test amperage of motors for all such equipment and correct all conditions where motor overloading occurs. 2.07 BALANCING OF HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS A. General: 1. Provide the testing, adjusting, and balancing of all mechanical systems including but not limited to air distribution systems, and the equipment and apparatus connected thereto. 2. Work shall consist of setting volume (flow) and speed adjusting facilities provided or specified for the systems, recording data, making tests, and preparing reports, all as hereinafter specified. 3. Perform test of all operational equipment under working conditions. All of this work, both as to procedure and sequence, shall be reviewed by the Architect/Engineer. TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15020 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility B. Special Requirements: The work described in this Section shall be performed by a firm certified by the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB). C. Procedures: 1. The environmental systems, both the air handling and hydronic systems, including all equipment, apparatus, and distribution systems, shall be tested, adjusted, and balanced in accordance with the latest edition of the "NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems." 2. All work performed under this Section shall be by an independent air balance and testing agency under the direction of the supervisor who is designated and qualified under the certification requirements of NEBB. 3. All instruments used for measurements shall be accurate, and calibration histories for each instrument shall be available for examination. Calibration and maintenance of all instruments shall be in accordance with the requirements of NEBB. 4. Accuracy of measurements shall be in accordance with NEBB standards. D. Notification of Time at Which Balancing Can Be Performed: It will be the responsibility of the mechanical subcontractor to notify the balancing engineer when the balancing can be performed. This notice will be given at least 30 days before time work is to be performed. The time required for testing, adjusting, and balancing shall be included in the Contractor's progress schedule. Written notices shall be sent by the Contractor 30 days or more in advance of the date or dates when mechanical systems will be operational and ready for balancing. Work will be done after the systems are substantially completed to such a degree as will permit continuous working day sequence on this balancing work. E. Operation of equipment shall be by Contractor during the time balancing work is being performed. Balancing engineer will advise the Contractor as to the time at which equipment operation is required. F. Contractor - Fumished Material and Labor: Contractor shall furnish ladders, staging, accessories, and labor to provide access to mechanical control devices, including ceiling removal and replacement, and shall change motor drive ratios and assist wherever a tradesman's skill and tools are needed. G. Instruments: The balancing engineer shall use instruments similar to those listed below in performing this balancing and testing work. The instruments should be recently factory calibrated and shall be used with factory- determined application factors. 1. Anemometer, 4" Biram type. 2. Anemotherm, Anemostat Model 60. 3. Velometer, Alnor Type 3002. 4. Pitot tube and air velocity meter, Dwyer Model 400. 5. Pyrometer, contact type, Alnor Type 4200. 6. Static pressure gauge, Dwyer "Magnehelic," 0-4" w.g. 7. Smoke gun, E. V. Hill manufacturer. 8. Speed indicator, Veedroot or J. B. Biddle "Jagabi." 9. Ammeter, clip -on, Amprobe manufacturer. 10. Electronic Flowhood, direct digital readout, Shortridge Manufacturer. H. Records of Balancing Test: Records of balancing test shall be kept accurately, carefully and consistently using printed forms approved by the Architect/Engineer. Final power measurements of all motors, except fractional, shall be measured and recorded. I. Air Handling Systems: 1. Measure and adjust all ventilation openings on all systems to produce the air flow rates TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15020 -4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility shown on the Contract Drawings. 2. Air flow rates, as adjusted, shall be within a tolerance of ±5% from the design rates shown on the Contract Drawings. 3. When complete, at least one air path from each fan an air outlet or inlet shall have all volume dampers wide open. This is to ensure minimum static pressure build -up in the system as a result of balancing. 4. Determine the minimum operating static pressure required to deliver the required air volumes, for each terminal unit, inlet vane, or other automatic static pressure regulator, and note the setting adjacent to the regulator and on the record sheets. 5. The total air volume handled by each system shall be measured and recorded, by readings taken at appropriate locations in the fan intake or discharge plenums. These measurements shall be compared with the design system volumetric rate and the individual inlet or outlet readings to correlate and substantiate the system measurements. 6. Determine drive ratio changes required in order to obtain the optimum operating fan speeds, review with the Design Engineer, and make necessary changes. 7. After final drive ratio changes have been completed, make a final set of readings and adjustments, if necessary, to ensure the system balance. Record the final fan rpm pulley, sheave and belt sizes, and motor amperage. J. Miscellaneous Measurements and Records: 1. Record nameplate data for all fans, air filters, pumps, motors, etc. associated with the air handling and /or hydronic systems. 2. Measure and record, for all motors associated with the air handling and /or hydronic systems, the rpm, amperage, and voltage of each phase and the rating of the "thermal element" overload protection components. 3. Where definite relationships of "positive" and "negative" pressure are required between adjoining areas, these shall be checked and proven by smoke tests or other appropriate methods. K. Temperature Control Systems: Test each component of systems, terminal unit controls, air coil controls, and other air conditioning controls for proper operation. This work shall not take the place of manufacturer's testing and adjusting specified in this section of the specifications. L. The mechanical subcontractor shall be responsible for balancing the temperature control system. M. Adjust and balance the controls during the first cooling season after work is completed and also during the first heating season. Calibrate and set each control device, including dampers to perform the function required. N. Calibrate, adjust, and balance controls to facilitate the air balancing work. Promptly correct deficiencies reported during the air balancing. 0. Readjust control settings as requested by the Engineer during the guarantee period to provide economical operation. P. Notify Architect/Engineer, in writing, giving the date on which all the cooling and heating control, testing, calibration and settings are complete. Q. Marking of Positions: At completion of balancing, mark all settings of quadrants with centerpunch. Where quadrants are located in areas in which the destination of the duct is not self- evident, the room number of the space served shall be marked at the quadrant. R. Automatic Control Devices: All automatically operated devices that are pertinent to the adjustment of the aforementioned air systems shall be set and adjusted to deliver the required quantities of air and at temperatures specified. All control work shall be done in coordination with TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15020 -5 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility the control representative. S. Bi- Seasonal Adjustment: Within the one -year guarantee period following initial acceptance, the testing and balance subcontractor shall return to the site and complete the adjustment of the equipment that has not been thoroughly tested under maximum obtainable load condition in the preacceptable period. T. Procedures and Instrumentation: The procedures, techniques, and instrumentation shall be those set forth in the "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environ- mental Systems" as published by the National Environmental Balancing Bureau, latest edition. U. Reports: 1. The testing and balancing agency shall, at the completion of the balancing work, submit, through the Contractor, a complete report consisting of typewritten data sheets covering all phases of the work herein specified and a set of single line drawings. The single line drawings are to be to the same scale as the Engineer's drawings and on the same size sheets. The drawings shall show all significant deviations from the original design. 2. Reports of all tests and balancing shall be prepared in three copies. The reports are to be signed by the principal of the firm and listing the person in charge of on -site work. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TESTING A. General: Perform all tests including operation of equipment. Give sufficient notice to Architect/Engineer to permit witness of all tests. All tests shall be repeated to the satisfaction of those making the inspection. B. Leaks: After testing, all leaks and defects shall be made tight in an approved manner. If necessary, piping shall be taken down and reassembled. No temporary method of repairing leaks will be permitted. C. Performance Tests: Test each item of equipment to show that it will operate in accordance with the indicated performance requirements. D. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Where test procedures are required to be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being installed, printed copies of these recommendations shall be furnished to the Architect prior to commencing tests. Testing of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are received. END OF SECTION TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15020 -6 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 15050 BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Work of this section includes, but is not limited to the following: 1. Cutting and patching. 2. Excavation and backfill. 3. Plates and isolators. 4. Sleeves. 5. Fire -rated penetration seals. 6. Flashing. 7. Inserts. 8. Supports and anchors. 9. Access doors. 10. Mechanical identification. 11. Valves and accessories. 12. Electric motors. 13. Mechanical - electrical interface. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies. B. Fabricate and install equipment, apparatus and system in accordance with applicable codes and standards listed in General Provisions and current as of date of this specification. C. Where conflicts arise between Contract Documents and Regulatory Agencies, the latter shall prevail unless documents are more stringent. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog cuts and performance data on all manufactured items per General Provisions Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CUTTING & PATCHING A. Cutting: 1. Do cutting, core- drilling and similar work required for installation of systems under Division 15. 2. Through concrete slabs or walls, all round holes shall be core drilled with a diamond drill and all rectangular openings shall be cut with a diamond saw. Contractor shall make provisions for water, capture when working above occupied spaces or areas subject to water damage. 3. Cut no structural members without prior written approval of Architect/Engineer. 4. Drilling and cutting of concrete and other work which makes objectionable noise shall be performed at times as coordinated with the Owner before doing the work. BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS 15050 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility B. Patching of finished building elements after mechanical installation shall be in accordance with Division 1 specifications. 2.02 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Contractor shall do all excavation and backfill required for Division 15 work, including any necessary sheathing and pumping. B. Trench bottoms and shelves shall be cut to suit required grades of mechanical work. C. Piping shall rest on undisturbed earth or pea gravel. D. Bell holes shall be provided for all bell and hub or mechanical joint piping. E. After work has been inspected, tested and approved, all excavation shall be backfilled in layers of approximately 8 inches, each layer moistened as directed and pneumatically tamped to minimum compaction of 90 percent. F. Jetting or flooding will not be permitted. G. Restore all surfaces to original condition, properly installed to eliminate any settlement and satisfactory to Architect. 2.03 PLATES AND ISOLATORS A. Plates: 1. Chrome Plated, stamped or cast brass. 2. Grinnell figure 10 or Beaton Corbin. B. Isolators: 1. Stoneman Trisolator, No. 100 for steel pipe, No. 500 for copper tube. 2. Link -Seal type Model LS or Pyro -pac. 2.04 SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non -fire Rated Floors: Form with 18 gage galvanized steel. B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non -fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Form with steel pipe or 18 gage galvanized steel. C. Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fireproofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed. D. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel. E. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel. F. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping thru sleeve. G. Stuffing Insulation: Glass fiber type, non - combustible. H. Caulk: Acrylic sealant of quality specified in Section 07900. BASIC MATERIALS & METHO' ?3 15050 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 2.05 FIRE -RATED PENETRATION SEALS A. Manufacturers: 1. 3M Fire Barrier Penetration Sealing System. 2. Thomas & Betts Flame Safe Fire Stop. 3. Chase Foam Fire Stop System. 4. Proposed substitutions shall meet or exceed all requirements of these specifications. 5. Contractor shall be responsible for the substituted equipment or materials fitting available space and for any impacts to other trades. 6. Furnish wall wrap, partitions, caps or other accessories as required. he B. Requirements: 1. All materials to comply with UL 1479 (ASTM E -814). 2. The fire rating of the sealant shall be at least that of the floor, wall or ceiling into which it is installed. 2.06 FLASHING A. Metal Flashing: 26 gage galvanized steel. B. Lead Flashing: 5 Ib /sq ft sheet lead for waterproofing; one Ib /sq ft sheet lead for soundproofing. C. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet, compatible with roofing. D. Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements. 2.07 INSERTS A. Concrete construction: 1. Grinnell Fig. 282, Elcen Fig. 65, Fee & Mason 2570 or Super M -732, Unistrut P -3521, Elcen 1150 -6. Michigan 353. 2. Channel Insert Unistrut P -3200, Elcen 1150 with end caps and cardboard filler strips. B. Frame Construction: 1. Flattened lag screw with coupling or socket to match. 2. Angle clip bolted or screwed with coupling or socket to match. 3. Use lag screws or drive screws for extension bar; nailing not permissible. C. Brackets: Shelf bracket Unistrut P -1000 with P -1332 corner support, Elcen 600 with 676 comer support or Super Strut A -1200 with AB -214 corner support. D. Power driven inserts allowed only on Architects approval. E. Expansion shields: Diamond, Rawl plug, Star, Phillips or Cinch Anchor manufacture. 2.08 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS A. General: 1. Furnish hanger and support inserts and sleeves for placement into formwork to serve equipment supplied under other Sections but installed by this contractor. 2. Submittals: Indicate hanger and support framing and attachment methods. BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS 15050 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility B. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1 -1/2 Inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 to 4: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 3. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 4. Hangers and supports exposed to weather or wet conditions shall be galvanized. 5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook. 6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 7. Vertical Support: a. Type A: Steel riser clamp. b. Type B: Steel riser clamp with spring isolation. 8. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches and All Cold Pipe Sizes: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 9. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. 10. Shield for Insulated Piping 2 Inches and Smaller: 18 gage galvanized steel shield over insulation in 180 degree segments, minimum 12 inches long at pipe support. 11. Shields for Vertical Copper Pipe Risers: Sheet lead. C. Hanger Rods: Steel Hanger Rods: Threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded. D. Fabrication: 1. Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe. 2. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. 3. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. 2.09 ACCESS DOORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Inryco /Milcor. 2. J.L. Industries. 3. Greenheck. 4. Proposed substitutions shall meet or exceed all requirements of these specifications. B. Furnish to General Contractor hinged metal panel access doors of proper size, suitable to installation conditions, with concealed spring hinges and flush screwdriver operated locks. Fire rated with UL label if located in a required fire separation. 1. 12" x 12" at fire damper, minimum size. 2. 8" x 12" at concealed damper quadrant or regulator, minimum size. 3. Style and size as required for ceiling or wall construction and large enough to allow resetting fusible links or other work as necessary. C. Mechanical Subcontractor shall furnish all required access doors for access to mechanical system through building finish work. Installation of access doors into finished walls and ceilings not in Mechanical. 2.10 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Manufacturers: 1. The following manufacturers may be considered subject to review. a. Brady. b. Seton. c. Allen Systems. BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS 15350 -4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 2. Proposed substitutions shall meet or exceed all requirements of these specifications. 3. Contractor shall be responsible for the substituted equipment or materials fitting the available space and for any impacts to other trades. B. Materials: 1. Color: Unless specified otherwise, conform with ANSI /ASME A13.1. 2. Plastic Nameplates: Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. 2.11 VALVES AND ACCESSORIES A. General Valves: 1. Manufacturers: a. Milwaukee. b. Nibco. c. Stockham. d. Hammond. e. Proposed substitutions shall meet or exceed all requirements of these specifications. 2. General: a. Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. b. Accept valves and accessories on site in shipping containers with labelling in place. Inspect for damage. c. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. d. Provide temporary end caps and closures on valves and accessories. Maintain in place until installation. 3. Gate Valves: a. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, non -rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, single wedge disc, solder or threaded ends, 125 Ib. SWP. b. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS &Y, single wedge, flanged ends, 125 Ib. SWP. 4. Ball Valves: a. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze one piece body, stainless steel ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle, solder or threaded ends with union, 150 Ib. SWP. b. Over 2 Inches: Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball, teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever handle, flanged. 5. Globe Valves: a. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, renewable composition disc, solder or screwed ends, with back seating capacity repackable under pressure. b. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS &Y, plug -type disc, flanged ends, renewable seat and disc. 6. Swing Check Valves: a. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze swing disc, solder or screwed ends, 125 Ib. SWP. b. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends, 125 Ib. SWP. c. Check valves in mechanical coupling systems, i.e., Victaulic, etc., may be by coupling manufacturer. 7. Spring - loaded Check Valves: a. Iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, renewable composition disc, screwed, wafer, or flanged ends. b. Check valves in mechanical coupling systems, i.e., Victaulic, etc., may be by coupling manufacturer. BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS 15050 -5 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility B. Backflow Preventers: 1. Manufacturers: a. Watts. b. Febco. c. Hersey. d. Other manufacturers offering equivalent products and approved by local jurisdiction may be considered. 2. Double Check Valve: a. 2" and under, Bronze body, rubber check valves, stainless steel check seats, shafts and flange bolts, bronze ball valve test cocks, bronze ball valve shut -offs, strainer, threaded connections, 175 psi pressure rating. b. 2 -1/2" and over; Epoxy coated iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel internal parts, removable bronze seats, gate valve shut -offs, strainer, flanged ends, 175 psi pressure rating. 3. Reduced Pressure Type: a. 2" and under; Bronze body, rubber check valves with reduced pressure zone, stainless steel check seats, shafts and flange bolts, bronze ball valve test cocks, bronze ball valve shut -offs, strainer, threaded connections, 175 psi pressure rating. C. Relief Valves: 1. Manufacturers: a. Watts. b. B &G. c. Amtrol. d. Other manufacturers offering equivalent products may be considered. 2. Bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct temperature and pressure actuated, capacities ASME certified and labelled. D. Strainers: 1. Manufacturers: a. Watts. b. Armstrong. c. Spirax/Sarco. d. Other manufacturers offering equivalent products may be considered. 2. Size 2 inch and Under: Screwed brass or iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen. 3. Size 2 -1/2 inch to 4 inch: Flanged iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattem with 3/64 inch stainless steel perforated screen. 4. Size 5 inch and Larger: Flanged iron body for 175 psig working pressure, basket pattern with 1/8 inch stainless steel perforated screen. 5. Provide nipple and blowdown valve with plug on all strainers 1" pipe size and larger. 2.12 MECHANICAL- ELECTRICAL INTERFACE A. Separation of work between trades and subcontractors is not within the scope of these Specifications. The following is proposed for assistance in bidding only. B. Unless otherwise indicated, mechanical equipment and controls are suggested to be fumished, installed and wired in accordance with the following schedule; coordinate all work with Division 16, Electrical: BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS 15050 -6 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS POWER CONTROL FURNISHED INSTALLED WIRING WIRING ITEM BY: BY: BY: BY: Equipment Motors: Magnetic Motor Starters: a. Automatically Controlled with or without HOA switches: b. Manually controlled: c. Furnished w/ mech. equipment, factory- mounted: d. Furnished w/ mech. equipment, for field mounting: Disconnect switches, manual motor starters, thermal overload switches: M M E M E E M M E E E M E E M E E E M E M E E Valves, float controls, damper motors, EP and PE M M M M switches, other miscellaneous Division 15 controls: Thermostats (Low Voltage Electric) M M — M M = Division 15, Mechanical E = Division 16, Electrical C. Mechanical- Electrical Coordination 1. Check mechanical and electrical drawings and specifications to assure proper location and electrical characteristics of outlets serving mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Advise the Architect/Engineer of any modifications required to suit equipment furnished. D. Wiring 1. Power wiring is in Division 16. 2. Provide under Division 15 all control wiring, line or low voltage, through the coils of the magnetic starters and relays and through the contacts of thermostats and other pilot devices. - r BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS 15050 -7 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 3. Provide under Division 15 conduit for all line voltage control wiring and exposed low voltage wiring in mechanical rooms and ceiling plenums. 4. Provide flexible conduit required on short runs to equipment subject to vibration, i.e., motors, fans. 5. Mount starters, disconnects and panels on walls where practical, not on equipment or on stand from floor. 6. Provide electrical equipment furnished under this section of specifications in strict accordance with the National Electrical Code and Local Codes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL COORDINATION AND INSTALLATION A. Inform other trades thru General Contractor as to requirements for sleeves, boxes, other openings, and embedded items. Coordinate with other trades in order to maintain job progress schedule and to avoid conflicts in the installation of work by other trades. B. Furnish and install pipe sleeves and embedded items required under Division 15. C. Contractor shall become thoroughly acquainted with the work involved and shall verify at the site all measurements necessary for the proper installation of his work. D. Contractor shall refer to architectural and structural drawings for building construction and other details which affect the mechanical installation and shall confer with those trades for finish adjacent to his work and arrange to have visible portions of his work (such as access doors, grilles, etc.) fit in and harmonize with the finish in a manner satisfactory to the Architect. E. Ceiling Heights: Refer to Architectural drawings for ceiling height requirements. F. Accessibility of Equipment: Equipment, coils, valves, dampers, etc. shall be installed so as to be accessible for operation, maintenance and repair, and access clearances shall comply with all applicable codes and as recommended by respective manufacturer. G. Belts, pulleys, couplings, projecting set screws, keys and other rotating parts which may pose a danger to personnel, shall be fully enclosed or guarded in accordance with OSHA regulations. H. Provide offsets around all electrical panels (and similar electrical equipment) to maintain space clear above and below panel to structure and clearance of 3 feet directly in front of panel, except where indicated otherwise or required by NEC to be more. 3.02 PLATES AND ISOLATORS A. Plates: 1. Install where pipes pass through finished ceilings and floors. B. Isolators: 1. Model 100 or 500 for piping thru frame walls. 2. Model LS for piping thru concrete walls and floors. 3. Pyro -pac if floor or wall is fire rated. 3.03 SLEEVES A. Install 20 gage galvanized sleeves for piping thru concrete floors aboveground and thru masonry, BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS 15050 -8 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility plastered and frame walls. Clearance around pipe for installation of isolators and seals. B. Iron pipe sleeves for piping thru concrete walls and beams. Grout around sleeves thru walls. C. Iron pipe sleeves thru concrete floors in mechanical rooms, in toilet rooms and other areas with concrete floors subject to flooding and mopping. Set to extend 1 /z' above finished floors. Sealed or caulk. No floor plates. D. Where covering is specified, make sleeves or cores proper size to allow for isolators thru walls and unfinished floors. E. Except as noted in the foregoing, cut sleeves flush with surface. F. Sleeve pipes passing thru walls or floors in finished areas, thru Stoneman Trisolators, or Link - Seal type LS or Pyro -seal or 3M Fire Barrier FS -195, to extend thru both faces of the wall or floor. Caulk around sleeves to prevent sound transmission. G. Where sleeves are oversize thru fire separations, fill void with Dow Corning 3-6548 silicone RTV foam, Link -Seal Pyro -seal, Flame -Safe Fire Retardant Compound, or equal. H. Bore openings for pipes thru concrete and masonry, using diamond core drill where sleeving not done during construction. I. Make all holes thru plenums airtight. 3.04 FIRE -RATED PENETRATION SEALS A. Install in accordance with UBC. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for sealing fittings and barrier sealing systems. 3.05 FLASHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs. B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 3 inches minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked one inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, tum flanges back into wall and calk, metal counterflash and seal. C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches clear on sides with minimum 36 x 36 inch sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device. D. Seal floor, shower and mop sink drains, etc., watertight to adjacent materials. E. Provide acoustical lead flashing around ducts and pipes penetrating equipment rooms, installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for sound control. F. Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 6 inch minimum high above roofing surface. Flexible sheet flash and counterflash with sheet metal; seal watertight. BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS 15050 -9 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 3.06 INSERTS A. Provide inserts to General Contractor for placement in concrete formwork. B. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs preformed hollow core planks and sides of reinforced concrete beams. C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, provide inserts to be flush with slab surface. E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide thru -bolt square steel plate and nut. Obtain approval of Structural Engineer prior to drilling of any structural members. 3.07 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS A. Pipe Anchors and Supports: 1. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. 2. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. 3. Use hangers with 1 -1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. 4. Hanger rods exposed to weather or wet conditions shall be coated with paint or other coating to prevent rust. 5. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers. 6. Support vertical piping at every other floor unless specified otherwise. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub. 7. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. 8. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. B. Support horizontal piping as required by the Uniform Plumbing Code, 1994 Edition, Section 314, Table 3 -1. 3.08 SEISMIC BRACING AND SUPPORTS A. Bracing of Ducts: 1. All bracing shall be designed and installed for Zone 2 seismic hazard. 2. Brace all rectangular ducts 6 sq. ft of area and larger. Brace all round ducts 28" in diameter and larger. 3. Brace Spacing: a. Transverse bracing to occur 30' - 0" o.c. maximum. b. Transverse bracing shall be installed at each duct tum and at each end of a duct run. c. Longitudinal bracing shall occur at 60' - 0" o.c. maximum. Transverse bracing for one duct section may also act as longitudinal bracing for a duct section connected perpendicular to it, if the bracing is installed within four feet of the intersection of both ducts and bracing is sized for the larger duct. Duct joints shall conform to SMACNA Duct Construction standard. All joints in duct sections shall provide a positive fastening together of the section. 4. No bracing is required if the top of the duct is suspended 12" or less from the supporting structural member and attached to top of duct. 5. A group of ducts may be combined into a larger size frame using the overall dimensions with maximum weight for selection of the members. BASIC MATERIALS & METHO:"'S 15050 -10 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 6. Walls (including gyp -board non - bearing partitions) which have ducts running through them may replace a typical transverse brace. Provide solid blockings around duct penetration at stud wall construction. 7. Ducts and pipes not braced shall be installed with 6" minimum clearance to vertical ceiling hanger wires. 8. All sheet metal for bracing to be Fy= 33ksi. 9. It is the responsibility of the installer to ascertain that an appropriate size device be selected for each individual piece of equipment. B. Bracing of Pipes: 1. All bracing shall be designed and installed for Zone 2 seismic hazard. Brace all pipes 2W diameter and larger, with the following exceptions: a. Brace all fuel gas piping 1" and larger. b. Seismic braces may be omitted: 1) When the top of the pipe is suspended 12" or less from the supporting structure member and the pipe is suspended by an individual hanger. 2) On all piping %" and smaller. 2. Vertical Piping: a. Attachment - Vertical piping shall be secured at sufficiently close intervals to keep the pipe in alignment and carry the weight of the pipe and contents. Stacks shall be supported at their bases and if over 2 stories in height or 24' at every 12' by approved metal floor clamps. b. Screwed pipe - Screwed pipe (I.P.S.) shall be supported at not less than every other story height or 24'. c. Copper tubing - Copper tubing shall be supported at each story for piping 1'/2" and larger diameter, and at not more than 6 foot intervals for piping 11/2' and smaller in diameter d. Pipes of other approved material shall be supported in accordance with their approved installation standards. 3. Horizontal Piping: a. Supports - Horizontal or less than 90° from horizontal, piping shall be supported at sufficiently close intervals to keep it in alignment and prevent sagging. b. Screwed pipe - Screwed pipe (I.P.S.) or flanged pipe shall be supported at approximately 10 foot intervals. c. Copper tubing - Copper tubing shall be supported at approximately 6 foot intervals for tubing 1' /z' and smaller in diameter and 10 foot intervals for tubing 2" and larger in diameter. d. Pipes of other approved materials shall be supported in accordance with their approved installation standards. 4. Brace Spacing: a. Transverse bracings at 40' - 0" o.c. maximum unless otherwise noted. b. Longitudinal bracings at 80' - 0" o.c. maximum unless otherwise noted. When thermal expansion or contraction is involved, provide longitudinal bracings at anchor points. The longitudinal braces and the connections must be capable of resisting the force induced by expansion and contraction. c. Transverse bracing for one pipe section may also act as longitudinal bracing for the pipe section connected perpendicular to it, if the bracing is installed within 24" of the elbow of tee of similar size. d. For threaded piping the flexibility may be provided by the installation of swing joints. In welded or solder joint piping, the flexibility shall be provided by expansion loops or manufactured flexible connectors. For piping with BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS 15050 -11 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility manufactured ball joints select length of piping offset using "Seismic Drift" in place of "Expansion Per Joint Manufacturers" selection table. Seismic Drift = 0.015 ft. per foot of height. 5. Do not use branch lines to brace main lines. 6. Trapeze hangers may be used. Provide flexibility in joints where pipes pass through building seismic or expansion joints, or where rigidly supported pipes connect to equipment with vibration isolators. 7. A rigid piping system shall not be braced to dissimilar parts of a building or two dissimilar building systems that may respond in a different mode during an earthquake. Examples: Wall and a roof; solid concrete wall and a metal deck with lightweight concrete fill. 8. Provide large enough pipe sleeves through walls or floors to allow for anticipated differential movements. 9. At vertical pipe risers, wherever possible, support the weight of the riser at a point or points above the center of gravity of the riser. Provide lateral guides at the top and bottom of the riser, and at intermediate points not to exceed 30' -0" on center. 10. Cast iron pipe of all types, and any other pipe joined with a shield and clamp assembly where the top of the pipe is 12" or more from supporting structure shall be braced on each side of a change in direction of 90° or more. Riser joints shall be braced or stabilized between floors. 11. For gas piping, the bracing details, schedules and notes may be used except that transverse bracing shall be at 20' -0" o.c. maximum and longitudinal bracing at 40' - 0" o.c. maximum. Also 1 ", 1'/:', 1W, and 2" diameter pipes shall be braced the same as 2W diameter pipe in the schedule. (No bracing is required for pipes' /." diameter and smaller). 12. It is the responsibility of the user of the guidelines to ascertain that an appropriate size device be selected for each individual piece of equipment. C. Equipment Restraints: 1. Mechanical equipment anchorages such as bolts, expansion anchors, screws, etc., shall comply with the force level requirements Zone 2B seismic hazard. 2. Restraining devices must be placed on all sides of the equipment base. 3. It is the responsibility of the Equipment Manufacturer to design his equipment so that the strength and anchorage of the internal components of the equipment exceeds the force level used to restrain and anchor the unit itself to the supporting structure. 4. It is the responsibility of the installer to ascertain that an appropriate size device be selected for each individual piece of equipment. 3.09 ACCESS DOORS A. When necessary to gain access to the mechanical system thru finished walls or ceilings, furnish metal panel access doors of proper size, suitable to installation conditions, for the General Contractor to install and give necessary information for proper location. Notify General Contractor of requirements prior to bidding. B. Fire rated with UL label if located in a fire separation. 3.10 VALVES AND ACCESSORIES A. Record actual locations of valves in all mechanical systems on project record drawings. B. Install valves and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS 15050 -12 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility D. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. 1 E. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. F. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. 1 G. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters to pipe. IH. install gate or ball valves for shut -off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. 1 I. Install globe, ball or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services. J. Provide plug valves in natural gas systems for shut -off service. 1 3.11 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION INSTALLATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. B. Plastic Nameplates: Install with corrosive - resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. C. Equipment: Identify air handling units and heat transfer equipment with plastic nameplates. D. Controls: Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates. END OF SECTION 1 BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS 15050 -13 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 15250 INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping insulation. B. Ductwork insulation. C. Jackets and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM C177 - Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded - Hot -Plate Apparatus. B. ASTM C195 - Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulation Cement. C. ASTM C335 - Steady -State Heat Transfer Properties of Horizontal Pipe Insulation. D. ASTM C449 - Mineral Fiber Hydraulic- setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement. E. ASTM C518 - Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. F. ASTM C547 - Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation. G. ASTM C553 - Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation. H. ASTM C585 - Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System). I. ASTM C612 - Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. J. ASTM C921 - Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation. K. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. L. ASTM E96 - Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. M. NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. N. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. O. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. INSULATION 15250 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010. B. Product Data: Provide product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials: Flame spread /smoke developed rating of 25/50 or less in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five (5) years experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 15010. B. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. C. Store insulation in original wrapping and protect from weather and construction traffic. D. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements. B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours. 1.08 TOLERANCE A. Substituted insulation materials shall provide thermal resistance within 10 percent at normal conditions, as materials indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING INSULATION A. Rigid Glass Fiber: 1. Manufacturers: a. Schuller (Manville). b. Certain -Teed. c. Knauf. d. Other manufacturers offering equivalent products may be considered. 2. Insulation: ASTM C547; rigid molded, noncombustible. a. 'K' ('ksi') value : ASTM C335, 0.24 at 75 °F. b. Minimum Service Temperature: -20 °F. c. Maximum Service Temperature: 300 °F. d. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. INSULATION 15250 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 3. Integral Vapor Barrier Jacket: a. White raft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. b. Moistu e Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm inches. c. Secur: with self sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. d. Secur with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic. 4. Vapor Barrie Lap Adhesive; Compatible with insulation. 5. Insulating C= ment/Mastic: a. ASTM IIC195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool. 6. Fibrous GlasS Fabric: a. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight. b. Blanket: 1.0 lb/cu ft density. 7. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish: a. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color. 8. Insulating C ment: ASTM C449. 2.02 DUCT INSULATION A. Glass Fiber, Flexib e: 1. Manufacture s: a. Schull r (Manville). b. Certai -Teed. c. Knauf. d. Other anufacturers offering equivalent products may be considered. 2. Insulation: A TM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket with foil kraft vapor barrier. a. 'K' ('Ksi') value : ASTM C518, 0.31 at 75 °F. b. Maximum service temperature: 250 °F. c. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.20 percent by volume. d. Densit,: 3.0 lb/cu ft or as required by Energy Code. B. Glass Fiber, Rigid: 1. Manufacture s: a. Schull r (Manville). b. Certai -Teed. c. Knauf. d. Other anufacturers offering equivalent products will be reviewed. 2. Insulation: A TM C612; rigid, noncombustible blanket with foil kraft vapor barrier. a. 'K' ('K i') value : ASTM C518, 0.31 at 75 °F. b. Maxim m service temperature: 250 °F. c. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.20 percent by volume. d. Dens' : 3.0 lb/cu ft or as required by Energy Code. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PIPE INSULATION A. Verify that piping h: s been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surface are clean, foreign material removed, and dry. C. Install materials in . ccordance with manufacturer's instructions. Insulation shall run continuous through sleeves, hangers and supports. Provide proper protection from supports and hangers. D. On exposed piping, locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. INSULATION 15250 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility E. Insulated dual temperature pipes or cold pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: 1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory applied or field applied. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. 3. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive. 4. PVC fitting covers may be used. 5. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. 6. Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints. F. For insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: 1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory applied or field applied. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. 3. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive. 4. PVC fitting covers may be used. 5. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 °F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation. G. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. 3.02 DUCTWORK INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Verify that ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry. C. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Generally insulate ductwork as follows: 1. Supply air ductwork concealed in ceiling space; Apply fiberglass duct wrap with vapor barrier to exterior of duct. 2. Supply air ductwork exposed to view; Line as indicated on drawings. 3. Plenums; Line as indicated on drawings. Insulation within double -wall plenum construction counts toward insulating value. E. Insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature: 1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets. 2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket. 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 4. Insulate entire air duct system as outlined above including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. Install in accordance with the Energy Code. F. Insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature: 1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket. 2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of insulation. G. For ductwork exposed in equipment rooms or in finished spaces below 10 feet above finished floor, finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting. H. External Duct Insulation Application: 1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor barrier adhesive or tape to match jacket. INSULATION 15250 -4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 2. Secure insulation without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires. 3. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift ductwork off trapeze hangers and insert spacers. 4. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive. 5. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing wrapping. 3.03 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. RIGID GLASS FIBER PIPE SIZE THICKNESS Inch Inch Plumbing Systems: Domestic Hot Water Supply All 1" Domestic Cold Water All 1/2" 3.04 DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE A. GLASS FIBER MIN. R -VALUE Concealed Supply Ducts R -8 END OF SECTION INSULATION 15250 -5 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 15400 PLUMBING PIPING & ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, fittings and accessories. B. Domestic water piping system. C. Sanitary sewer piping system. D. Natural gas piping system. E. Plumbing specialty valves. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI B31.2 - Fuel Gas Piping. B. ANSI B31.9 - Building Service Piping. C. ANSI /ASSE 1013 - Backflow Preventers, Reduced Pressure Principle. D. ANSI A112.26.1 - Water Hammer Arrestors. E. ASME 616.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. F. ASME B16.4 - Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Class 125 and 250. G. ASME B16.18 - Cast Bronze Solder -Joint Pressure Fittings. H. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder -Joint Pressure Fittings I. ASME B16.26 - Cast Bronze Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes. J. ASTM A47 - Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. K. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot - Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless. L. ASTM A74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. M. ASTM A120 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot - Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized), Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary Uses. N. ASTM A234 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures. O. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal. P. ASTM B42 - Seamless Copper Pipe. PLUMBING PIPING & ACCESSORIES 15400 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility Q. ASTM B75 - Seamless Copper Tube. R. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube. S. ASTM B251 - Wrought Seamless Copper and Copper -Alloy Tube. T. ASTM C564 - Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. U. AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal. V. AVWVA C506 - Backflow Prevention Devices - Reduced Pressure Principle and Double Check Valve Types. W. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains. X. CISPI 301 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems. Y. CISPI 310 - Joints for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems. Z. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code. AA. PDI WH -201 Water Hammer Arresters. BB. UPC - Uniform Plumbing Code. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010. B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings. Provide component sizes, rough -in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and support requirements. 1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010. B. Record actual locations of valves and accessories. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010. B. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. PLUMBING PIPING & ACCESSC'R: ='ES 15400 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code and applicable state labor regulations. C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME Sec 9. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer. Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five (5) years experience. B. Installer. Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five (5) years documented experience. 1.08 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform Work in accordance with local plumbing code. B. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices. C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of installation of backflow prevention devices. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 15010. B. Accept valves and accessories on site in shipping containers or factory packaging with labelling in place. Inspect for damage. C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. E. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install underground piping when bedding materials are wet or frozen. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER PIPING, BURIED A. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, Class 50, cement mortar lined and seal coated. 1. Fittings: Ductile or gray iron, standard thickness. 2. Joints: AWWA C111, rubber gasket with 3/4 inch diameter rods or mechanical joint. B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type K, soft copper tube. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast bronze or ASTM B16.22 wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM B32, non -lead bearing solder, Grade 95TA. 3. Protect buried copper tubing with Republic "X -TRU -COAT" or approved continuous PLUMBING PIPING & ACCESSORIES 15400 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility polyethylene tape on exterior. 2.02 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast bronze, or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM B32, non -lead bearing solder, Grade 95TA. 2.03 SANITARY SEWER AND VENT PIPING, BURIED A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: The following types of joints are acceptable. a. Hub -and- spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets. b. Lead and oakum. c. Cast iron, rigid mechanical coupling with neoprene gaskets and stainless steel screws. MG Couplings or approved. 2.04 SANITARY SEWER AND VENT PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: ASTM C564, neoprene gasket system or lead and oakum. B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints, 4" pipe and larger: a. ASTM C564, neoprene gasket system; 1) Type 304 stainless steel coupling torqued with minimum 60 in -Ibs. 2) Manufacturers: a) Clamp -All "HI -TORQ 80 ". b) Anaco "Husky" SD 4000. c) Mission HW. d) Other manufacturers offering products meeting these specifications may be considered, subject to review. 3. Joints, 3" pipe and smaller: a. ASTM C564, neoprene gasket system; 1) No -Hub (CISPI- 301 -85). 2) 4.3 PSI rated working pressure. C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, ASTM A120 Schedule 40, galvanized. 1. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.4, screwed fittings. 2. Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, screwed type. 3. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron, galvanized. 2.05 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE • A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A120, Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234, forged steel welding type. 2. Joints: NFPA 54, threaded or welded to ANSI 831.2. 3. Paint exterior pipe with corrosion resistant paint. PLUMBING PIPING & ACCESSORIES 15400 -4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 2.06 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS A. Pipe Size 2 Inches and Under: 1. Ferrous pipe: 150 psig malleable iron threaded unions. 2. Copper tube and pipe: 150 psig bronze unions with soldered joints. B. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. 2.07 FUEL GAS SHUT -OFF VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Crane 1228. 2. Other manufacturers may be considered subject to review. Proposed substitutions shall meet or exceed all requirements of these specifications and the requirements of the local gas utility company. 3. Bronze or iron body, square head cock with bronze plug or AGA- approved ball valve, 125 psi pressure rating. 2.08 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Precision Plumbing Products. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Josam. b. J. R. Smith. c. Wade. B. ANSI A112.26.1; sized in accordance with PDI WH -201, precharged suitable for operation in temperature range -100 to 300 °F and maximum 250 psig working pressure. 2.09 TRAP PRIMERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Precision Plumbing Products. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Josam. b. J. R. Smith. c. Wade. B. ASSE Standard #1018, Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) listed, automatic brass trap primer fitting activated by a drop in domestic water pressure with no springs or diaphragms. "0" ring seals, -40° to 450° temperature range. C. Provide distribution unit and manifold when supplying more than one drain. 2.10 CLEANOUTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Josam. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Smith. b. Wade. c. Zurn. PLUMBING PIPING & ACCESSORIES 15400 -5 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility B. Exterior Surfaced Areas: Round cast nickel bronze access frame and non -skid cover. C. Exterior Unsurfaced Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover. D. Interior Finished Floor Areas: Lacquered cast iron, two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and adjustable nickel- bronze strainer, round with scoriated cover in service areas and round with depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas. E. Interior Finished Wall Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw. F. Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas: Calked or threaded type. Provide bolted stack cleanouts on vertical rainwater leaders. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify excavations under provisions of Division 1. B. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over - excavated. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. 2. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. 3. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. 5. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space. 6. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. 7. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. 8. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. 9. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. 10. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories not prefinished, ready for finish painting. 11. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not Tess than 3 ft of cover. 12. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Division 1 for work of this Section. 13. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream. B. Water Piping, Above Grade: 1. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 2. Provide non - conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. 3. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. 4. Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points. 5. Pipe relief from back flow preventer to nearest drain. 6. Provide isolating shut -off valves on all hot and cold water branchlines serving more than one plumbing fixture. Install in accessible location with access panel as required. PLUMBING PIPING & ACCESSORIES 152.450-6 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 7. Install water hammer arrestors on hot and cold water supply piping to each bank of fixtures. C. Sanitary Sewer Piping: 1. Slope horizontal waste piping within building minimum 1/4" per foot wherever possible. In no case slope horizontal waste piping less than 1/8" per foot within the building. Provide fixture unit calculations in accordance with the UPC for waste lines that are installed at Tess than 1/4" per foot slope. Adjust pipe sizes accordingly. 2. Provide cleanout in waste piping at all changes in direction greater than 45 °. 3. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. 4. Provide trap primer fittings and connections to all floor drains connected to the sanitary sewer system. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 5. Slope horizontal plumbing vent piping minimum of 1/8" per foot. 6. Pipe plumbing vents through roof. Extend to 12" above roof line. Flash with 4 Ib. sheet lead with soldered joints and seams, 24x24 base pad. Counterflash into end of vent pipe, length equal to or greater than pipe diameter. D. Natural Gas Piping, Above Grade: 1. Provide plug valves in natural gas systems for shut -off service. 2. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3. Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in weather proof hood. 4. Paint exposed exterior pipe with corrosion resistant paint. E. Valves: 1. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. 2. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. 3. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters to pipe. 4. Install gate or ball valves for shut -off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. 5. Install globe or ball valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services. 3.03 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean. B. Ensure PH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 mg /L residual. D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets. E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg /L, repeat treatment. G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg /L. H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 2 percent of outlets and from water PLUMBING PIPING & ACCESSORIES 15400 -7 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651. 3.04 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Connect to existing sewer services outside building. Before commencing work check invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing. B. Connect to existing gas service. Gas service distribution piping to have initial minimum pressure of 7 inch wg. Provide regulators on each line serving gravity type appliances, sized in accordance with equipment. 3.05 TESTING A. Water Piping: AU piping inside building shall be tested by hydrostatic pressure at least 11/2 times the maximum operating pressure, but not less than 100 psi, for a minimum of 24 hours. Only potable water shall be used for testing. B, Sterilization and Flushing: Sterilizing and flushing of potable water shall comply with authority having jurisdiction and other local health requirements, or as specified. C. Backflow Prevention: Backflow prevention into connected water systems shall be tested for proper functioning under conditions normal to their application. Testing shall be performed in compliance with the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. D. Waste and Vent Piping: All pipe shall be filled with water to the highest point in each system with all air removed. The lines shall be flushed by removing the test plug. Piping may be tested in sections providing that all portions to be concealed shall be subjected to not less than 10' of water column. Standpipes installed for head test shall be 2" minimum. END OF SECTION I PLUMBING PIPING & ACCESSORIES 15400 -8 07/07/98 I Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 15450 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Plumbing fixtures and trim. B. Plumbing drains. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI /ASME A112.6.1 - Supports for Off - the -Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use. B. ASME A112.18.1 - Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings. C. ANSI /ASME A112.19.1 - Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures. D. ANSI /ASME A112.19.2 - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures. E. ANSI /ASME A112.19.5 - Trim for Water - Closet Bowls, Tanks, and Urinals (Dimensional Standards). F. ANSI A112.21.1 - Floor Drains. G. ANSI /ARI 1010 - Drinking- Fountains and Self- Contained, Mechanically- Refrigerated Drinking -Water Coolers. H. ANSI /ASHRAE 90A - Energy Conservation in New Building Design. I. ASME Section VIIID - Pressure Vessels; Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes. J. ANSI /NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code. K. ANSI /NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010. B. Plumbing Fixture Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of new dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes. C. Plumbing Drain Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of new dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with local codes and standards. fixtures, sizes, rough -in drains, sizes, rough -in PLUMBING FIXTURES 15450 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility B. Ensure products and installation of specified products are in conformance with recommendations and requirements of the following organizations: 1. American Gas Association (AGA). 2. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF). 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 4. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA). 5. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect existing fixtures to be reused from damage during construction. Owner shall inventory existing fixtures and equipment for condition. Existing fixtures and equipment damaged by Contractor during construction shall be repaired or replaced at Contractor's expense. B. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas to protect fixtures and prevent use. 1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of countertop lavatories and sinks. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Plumbing Fixtures: 1. Provide one year warranty under provisions of Division 1 on new fixtures and equipment provided. B. Plumbing Drains: Provide one year warranty under provisions of Division 1. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER CLOSET - FLOOR MOUNTED, TANK TYPE A. Bowl: 1. Basis for Design: TOTO Model CST704. 2. Substitutions: a. Equivalent fixtures of the following manufacturers may be considered subject to review: 1) American Standard. 2) Kohler. 3) Eljer. 4) Crane. b. Proposed substitutions shall meet or exceed all requirements of these specifications. c. Contractor shall be responsible for the substituted equipment and /or materials fitting the available space and for any impacts to other trades. 3. ANSI /ASME A112.19.2; floor mounted, vitreous china, close - coupled closet combination with elongated rim, insulated vitreous china pressurized closet tank with fittings and lever flushing valve, bolt caps. 4. Maximum 1.6 gallon flush. B. Seat: 1. Manufacturer: Bemis Model 1655 -C. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15450 -2 07/07/98 1 T Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Beneke Model 527 SS. b. Church Model 9500C. c. Olsonite Model No. 95CC -SS. 3. Solid white plastic, open front, extended back, self- sustaining hinge, brass bolts. 2.02 LAVATORY A. Basin: 1. Manufacturer: Kohler Greenwich Model K -2032. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. American Standard. b. Eljer. c. Crane. 3. ANSI /ASME A112.19.2; vitreous china wall -hung lavatory 20 x 18 inch minimum, with 4 inch minimum high splash back, drillings on 4 inch centers, rectangular basin with splash lip, front overflow, and soap depression. B. Trim: 1. Manufacturer: Chicago Faucet Model 1802A -255. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. T & S Brass and Bronze Works. b. Moen. c. Grohe. 3. ASME A112.18.1; chrome plated mixing faucet with open grid strainer, water economy aerator, indexed lever handles (ADA), chrome plated loose -key stops, chrome plated 17 gage brass P -trap and arm with escutcheon. C. Wall Mounted Carrier: 1. Manufacturer: Josam Series 17100. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. J.R. Smith. c. Zurn. 3. ANSI /ASME A112.6.1; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment, concealed arm supports, bearing plate and studs. 2.03 SINK - SINGLE COMPARTMENT A. Bowl: 1. Manufacturer: Elkay Model LR -2522. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Just. 3. ANSI /ASME A112.19.3; single compartment 25x22x8 inch outside dimensions, 18 gage thick, Type 302 stainless steel, self- rimming with undercoating, chrome plated perforated plate drain, ledge back drilled for trim. B. Trim: 1. Manufacturer: Chicago Faucet Model 201. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. T & S Brass and Bronze Works. b. Moen. c. Grohe. 3. ASME A112.18.1; chrome plated brass supply with swing spout, water economy aerator, indexed lever handles; chrome plated 17 gage brass P -trap and arm with escutcheon. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15450 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 2.04 SERVICE SINK A. Bowl: 1. Manufacturer: Fiat. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Stern - Williams. b. Universal Rundle. 3. 32 X 32 X 6 inch high white molded stone, floor mounted, with one inch wide shoulders, integral drain body and stainless steel strainer. B. Trim: 1. Manufacturer: Chicago Faucet No. 897. 2. Other manufacturers offering equivalent products are acceptable. 3. ASME A112.18.1 exposed wall type supply with lever handles, spout wall brace, vacuum breaker, hose end spout, strainers, eccentric adjustable inlets, integral screwdriver stops with covering caps and adjustable threaded wall flanges; 5 feet of 1/2 inch diameter plain end reinforced rubber hose, hose clamp, mop hanger. 2.05 FLOOR DRAINS A. Manufacturers: 1. Josam 30000 Series. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. J. R. Smith. b. Wade. c. Zurn. 3. Provide drain size as noted in these specifications and on drawings. 4. Provide drains with outlet style suitable for sanitary sewer piping system. B. Finished Areas: 1. ANSI A112.21.1, with the following; a. Lacquered cast iron two -piece body with double drainage flange, bottom outlet, weep holes, reversible non - puncturing clamping collar, 1/2" primer tap. b. 6" round, adjustable, nickel- bronze strainer, satin finish, secured grate, vandalproof screws. 2. Josam No. 30000- 6A- 2- 17 -50. C. Funnel Floor Drain: 1. ANSI A112.21.1; a. Lacquered cast iron two -piece body with double drainage flange, bottom outlet, weep holes, reversible, adjustable, non - puncturing clamping collar, 1/2" primer tap, perforated sediment bucket. Minimum drain size, 3 ". b. 7" round, rough bronze strainer with oval funnel. 2. Josam No. 30000- E3 -6 -80. 2.06 WATER HEATER - ELECTRIC, TALL MODEL A. Manufacturers: 1. Basis for Design: A. O. Smith Model EEST. 2. The following substitute manufacturers may be considered subject to review. a. State. b. Rheem. c. Ruud. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15450 -4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 3. Proposed substitutions shall meet or exceed all requirements of these specifications. 4. Contractor shall be responsible for the substituted equipment or materials fitting the available space and for any impacts to other trades. B. General: 1. Tall tank type recovery heater with electric heating elements. Outside diameter shall not exceed 18 ". 2. Meets or exceeds requirements of ASHRAE 90.1b-1992. 3. UL listed. 4. See schedule on plans for size and capacities. C. Tank: 1. 150 psig working pressure. 2. Glass - lined, foam insulated with cabinet of baked enamel finish. 3. Anode rod for corrosion protection. 4. ASME temperature /pressure relief valve and drain valve. D. Heating Elements and Controls: 1. Two, medium watt density, non- simultaneous, zinc plated, copper sheathed elements. Wattage and voltage as scheduled on drawings. 2. Manual reset high limit, one per element. 3. Close differential immersion type thermostat adjustable through a range of 110 °F to 170 °F. 4. 120 volt control circuit powered by fused transformer. 5. Heavy duty, UL rated magnetic contactors. 2.07 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS A. Manufacturers: 1. Paco Series PIP 500. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Flygt. b. Hydromatic. c. Weil Pumps. B. Type: Duplex, completely submersible vertical centrifugal with automatic level controls. UL label for Class 1, Division I, Group D environments. C. Casing: Cast iron pump body and oil filled motor chamber. D. Impeller: Two -vaned with pressure vanes on back side. E. Seals: Mechanical type running in oil -filled chamber, ceramic and carbon faces with stainless steel metal parts. F. Bearings: Bali type thrust bearings and sleeve type radial bearings with permanent lubrication. G. Accessories: 1. Oil resistant cord and plug for connection to electric wiring system including grounding connector. Furnish sump pumps with power cords long enough to reach out of sump to J -box without splicing. Coordinate required cord length with Division 16. 2. Sump Pit: Provide sump pit of asphalt coated steel, fiberglass or precast concrete construction. Sump diameter shall be adequate for duplex pump setup. H. Controls: Integral mercury switch type level controls with separate liquid level control high level PLUMBING FIXTURES 15450 -5 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. alarm. Extend alarm signal to building controls (SiteScan) system. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION Tukwila Switch Facility A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures, drains and equipment. B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Rough -in piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture, drain and equipment rough -in schedule or to suit fixtures, drains and equipment provided. B. Coordinate with all trades and provide plumbing rough -ins as required for fixtures, drains or equipment furnished under other Sections of these Specifications. 3.03 PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install each sink fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. C. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and escutcheons. D. Install components level and plumb. E. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall carriers and bolts. F. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 07900, color to match fixture. G. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended to hold fixture in place. 3.04 PLUMBING DRAIN INSTALLATION A. Set drain in floor in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Floor surfaces shall uniformly slope minimum 1/8" per foot to all drains. C. Provide trap primer fittings and connections to all floor drains connected to the sanitary sewer system. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Refer to Section 15400. D. All floor drains in mechanical rooms shall be minimum 3" outlet pipe size, or larger as scheduled on drawings. 3.05 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before PLUMBING FIXTURES 15450 -6 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility rough -in and installation. 3.06 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 15010. B. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow. 3.07 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of Division 1. B. At completion of project, clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. 3.08 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Division 1. B. Do not permit use of fixtures during construction. 3.09 FIXTURE HEIGHTS A. Install fixtures to heights above finished floor as indicated on Architectural drawings. 3.10 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION A. Provide seismic restraint of water heater assemblies. B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and electrical work to achieve operating system. C. Extend pressure /temperature relief valve full size to new service sink location. 3.11 SUMP PUMP INSTALLATION A. Install pumps and controls in pit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Make all connections and put system into operation.. PLUMBING FIXTURES END OF SECTION 15450 -7 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 15530 REFRIGERATION PIPING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping. B. Accessories. C. Refrigerant. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI /ARI 495 - Refrigerant Liquid Receivers. B. ANSI /ARI 710 - Liquid Line Dryers. C. ANSI /ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. D. ANSI /ASHRAE 34 - Number Designation of Refrigerants. E. ANSI /ASME SEC 8D - Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code, Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels. F. ANSI /ASME SEC 9 - Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code, Welding and Brazing Qualifications. G. ANSI /ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. H. ANSI /ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings For Flared Copper Tubes. I. ANSI /ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping. J. ANSI /ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping. K. ANSI /ASTM B32 - Solder Metal. L. ANSI /ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube. M. ANSI /AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal. N. ANSI /UL 429 - Electrically Operated Valves. O. ARI 750 - Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion Valves. P. ARI 760 - Solenoid Valves for Use With Volatile Refrigerants. Q. ASTM B280 - Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service. REFRIGERANT PIPING & ACCESSORIES 15530 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 15010. B. Submit shop drawings indicating schematic layout of system, including equipment, critical dimensions, and sizes. C. Submit product data under provisions of Section 15010. D. Submit product data indicating general assembly of specialties, including manufacturers catalogue information. E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 15010. F. Submit design data as a submittal under provisions of Section 15010. G. Submit data indicating pipe sizing. H. Submit Test reports indicating results of leak test, acid test. 1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit documents under provisions of Section 15010. B. Accurately record exact locations of equipment and refrigeration accessories on record drawings. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSI /ASME B31.9. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 15010. B. Deliver and store piping and specialties in shipping containers with labelling in place. C. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 15010. D. Protect piping and specialties from entry of contaminating material by leaving end caps and plugs in place until installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B280, Type ACR hard drawn or annealed. 1. Fittings: ANSI /ASME B16.22 wrought copper. 2. Joints: ANSI /ASTM B32, ANSI /AWS A5.8 BCup silver braze. 2.02 REFRIGERANT A. Refrigerant: ANSI /ASHRAE 34; R -22: Monochlorodifluoromethane, or as required by equipment. REFRIGERANT PIPING & ACCESSORIES 15530 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 2.03 MOISTURE AND LIQUID INDICATORS A. Indicators: Single or double port type, UL listed, with copper or brass body, flared or solder ends, sight glass, color coded paper moisture indicator with removable element cartridge and plastic cap; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi, and maximum temperature of 200 °F. 2.04 VALVES A. Diaphragm Packless Valves: UL listed, globe or angle pattern, forged brass body and bonnet, phosphor bronze and stainless steel diaphragms, rising stem and handwheel, stainless steel spring, nylon seat disc, solder or flared ends, with positive backseating; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 275 °F. B. Packed Angle Valves: Forged brass or nickel plated forged steel, forged brass seal caps with copper gasket, rising stem and seat with backseating, molded stem packing, solder or flared ends; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 275 °F. C. Packed Bali Valves: Two piece forged brass body with teflon ball seals and copper tube extensions, brass bonnet and seal cap, chrome plated ball, stem with neoprene ring stem seals; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 325 °F. 2.05 STRAINERS A. Straight Line or Angle Line Type: Brass or steel shell, steel cap and flange, and replaceable cartridge, with screen of stainless steel wire or monel reinforced with brass; for maximum working pressure of 430 psi. B. Straight Line, Non - Cleanable Type: Steel shell, copper plated fittings, stainless steel wire screen, for maximum working pressure of 430 psi. 2.06 CHECK VALVES A. Globe Type: Cast bronze or forged brass body, forged brass cap with neoprene seal, brass guide and disc holder, phosphor- bronze or stainless steel spring, teflon seat disc; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 300 °F. B. Straight Thru Type: Brass body and disc, phosphor- bronze or stainless steel spring, neoprene seat; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 250 °F. 2.07 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES A. Straight Thru or Angle Type: Brass body and disc, neoprene seat, factory sealed and stamped with ASME UV and National Board Certification NB; for standard 450 psi setting; selected to ANSI /ASHRAE 15. 2.08 FILTER - DRIERS A. Replaceable Cartridge Angle Type: ANSI /ARI 710, UL listed, brass shell and bronze cap, perforated brass shell and molded desiccant filter core; for maximum working pressure of 350 psi. B. Permanent Straight Thru Type: ANSI /ARI 710, UL listed, steel shell with molded desiccant filter core, for maximum working pressure of 500 psi. REFRIGERANT PIPING & ACCESSORIES 15530 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. 'i ukwila Switch Facility 2.09 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Corrugated stainless steel hose with single layer of stainless steel exterior braiding, minimum 9 inches long with copper tube ends; for maximum working pressure 500 psi. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install refrigeration specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Route piping in orderly manner, with plumbing parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient. C. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space. D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations and locations. Slope piping one percent in direction of oil return. E. Provide non - conducting dielectric connections when joining dissimilar metals. F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. G. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. H. Provide access to concealed valves and fittings. Coordinate size and location of access doors. I. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building frame, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. J. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories not prefinished, ready for finish painting. K. Insulate refrigerant suction and hot gas piping with 1/2" thick preformed cellular foam insulation, sealed to form vapor barrier. Provide UV resistant coating for insulation exposed on the roof. L. Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Provide line size liquid indicators in main liquid line leaving condenser, or if receiver is provided, in liquid line leaving receiver. B. Provide line size strainer upstream of each automatic valve. Where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers are used install single main liquid line strainer. REFRIGERANT PIPING & ACCESSORIES 15530 -4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility C. Provide shut -off valve on each side of strainer. D. Provide permanent filter- driers in low temperature systems and systems utilizing hermetic compressors. E. Provide replaceable cartridge filter- driers vertically in liquid line adjacent to receivers with three valve bypass assembly to permit isolation of driers for servicing. F. Provide replaceable cartridge filter- driers, with three -valve bypass assembly. Provide filter- driers for each solenoid valve. G. Provide solenoid valves in liquid line of systems operating with single pump -out or pump -down compressor control, in liquid line of single or multiple evaporator systems, and in oil bleeder lines from flooded evaporators to stop flow of oil and refrigerant into the suction line when system shuts down. H. Provide refrigerant charging (packed angle) valve connections in liquid line between receiver shut -off valve and expansion valve. I. Utilize flexible connectors at or near compressors where within piping configuration does not absorb vibration. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. B. Test refrigeration system in accordance with ANSI /ASME 831.5. C. Pressure test system with dry nitrogen to 200 psig. Perform final tests at 27 inches vacuum and 200 psig using electronic leak detector. Test to no leakage. END OF SECTION REFRIGERANT PIPING & ACCESSORIES 15530 -5 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 15770 AIR CONDITIONING UNITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Packaged rooftop, gas /electric air conditioners. B. Computer room air conditioning units. C. Maintenance service. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI /ASME - Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code. B. ANSI /NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems. C. ANSI /NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). D. ARI 210 - Unitary Air - Conditioning Equipment. E. ARI 240 - Air Source Unitary Heat Pump Equipment. F. ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment. G. ASHRAE 52 - Air - Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter. H. UL - Underwriters Laboratories. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 15010. B. Submit shop drawings and product data for manufactured products and assemblies required for this project. C. Indicate equipment performance data, electrical service and duct connections on shop drawings or product data. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 15010. 1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 15010. B. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing. AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15770 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. T u •sfila Switch Facility 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 15010. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 15010. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide one year standard plus four year extended manufacturer's warranty on entire units under provisions of Section 15010. B. Warranty: Include coverage of refrigeration compressors and heat exchangers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GAS /ELECTRIC ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Basis for Design: Trane Model YCD. 2. Proposed substitutions shall meet or exceed all requirements of these specifications. 3. Contractor shall be responsible for the substituted equipment or materials fitting the available space, for required ductwork and/or piping revisions and for any impacts to other trades. B. General: 1. Unit(s) shall be self- contained, packaged, factory assembled and prewired, consisting of cabinet and frame, supply fan, heat exchanger and burner, controls, air filters refrigerant cooling coil and compressor, condenser coil and condenser fan(s). 2. Supply and return airflow shall be vertical. 3. Unit(s) shall be charged with R -22 refrigerant and run - tested before leaving factory. 4. Cooling performance shall be rated in accordance with DOE and /or ARI testing procedures. 5. Unit(s) shall be UL listed and labeled, classified in accordance with ANSI Z21.47 for gas - fired central furnaces. C. Fabrication: 1. Cabinet: a. Zinc coated, heavy gauge, galvanized steel, cleaned and phosphatized, with baked enamel finish tested in accordance with ASTM 8117. b. The top cover shall be one piece, or have seams double hemmed and gasket sealed. c. Access doors or removable access panels with lifting handles shall be located on one side of unit and shall be air and water tight. d. Insulation: Minimum 1 -inch thick, neoprene coated, glass fiber insulation on surfaces where conditioned air is handled. Protect edges from erosion. 2. Base: Base of unit shall have provisions for forklift and crane lifting. 3. Supply [and Return] Fan: Forward curved centrifugal type, resiliently mounted with V -belt drive, adjustable variable pitch motor pulley, and rubber isolated hinge mounted motor. Isolate complete fan assembly. 4. Filters: Two -inch thick, throwaway type filters. 5. Heating Section: a. Drum and tube heat exchanger of corrosion resistent steel construction. b. Two -stage power burner with pilotless hot surface ignition system. c. Airflow proof switch to allow gas flow. AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15770 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility d. Combustion chamber purge cycle. e. Gas system lockout with manual reset after three unsuccessful gas firing attempts. 6. Compressor(s): a. Provide hermetic or semi - hermetic compressor(s), 3600 rev /min maximum, resiliently mounted with positive lubrication, crankcase heater, high and low pressure safety controls, motor overload protection, suction and discharge service valves and gage ports, and filter drier. b. Motor shall be suction gas cooled. c. Five minute timed off circuit shall delay compressor start to prevent short cycling. d. Provide step capacity control by cycling compressors. 7. Refrigerant Circuit: a. Each refrigerant circuit shall have independent fixed orifice expansion devices, service pressure ports and filter driers. b. Provide space for replacement suction line driers. 8. Evaporator and Condenser Coils: a. Provide internally finned copper tube /aluminum fin coil assembly with galvanized drain pan and connection. b. Coil shall be leak tested at factory to 200 psig, pressure tested to 450 psig. 9. Condenser Fan(s): a. Direct drive, upblast, propeller type fans, statically and dynamically balanced. b. Fan motor(s) shall be permanently lubricated, with built -in thermal overload protection. D. Unit Controls: 1. Unit(s) shall be completely factory wired with necessary controls and contactor pressure Tugs or terminal blocks for power wiring. 2. Unit(s) shall have an external location for mounting fused disconnect device. 3. Micro - processor controls shall be provided for 24 volt control functions. E. Economizer Controls: Field or factory installed assembly consisting of fully modulating, 0 -100% damper and motor, minimum position setting, preset linkage, wiring harness with plug and fixed dry bulb control. F. Operating Controls - Single Zone Units: 1. Electric solid state microcomputer based room thermostat, located as indicated in service area with remote sensor located as indicated. 2. Room thermostat shall incorporate: a. Automatic switching from heating to cooling. b. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from set point. c. Set -up for four separate temperatures per day. d. Instant override of setpoint for continuous or timed period from one hour to 31 days. e. Short cycle protection. f. Programming based on weekdays, Saturday and Sunday. g. Switch selection features including imperial or metric display, 12 or 24 hour clock, keyboard disable, remote sensor, fan on -auto. 3. Room thermostat display shall include: a. Time of day. b. Actual room temperature. c. Programmed temperature. d. Programmed time. e. Duration of timed override. f. Day of week. g. System model indication: heating, cooling, auto, off, fan auto, fan on. h. Stage (heating or cooling) operation. AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15770 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 4. Provide low limit thermostat in supply air to close outside air dampers and stop supply fan. G. Mixed Air Controls: Maintain selected supply air temperature and return dampers to minimum position on call for heating and when ambient air temperature exceeds return air temperature. 2.02 COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS, FLOOR MOUNTED A. Manufacturer: 1. Basis for Design: The environmental control system shall be a Liebert Deluxe System/3 only, factory assembled unit. The refrigeration system shall be split, with the compressor located in the indoor evaporator unit. 2. Substitutions: a. No substitutions allowed. B. Provide packaged, air - cooled, factory assembled, pre -wired and pre -piped unit, consisting of cabinet, fans, filters, electric supplementaryhumidifier, controls. C. Submittals: Submittals shall be provided with the proposal and shall include: 1. Single -Line Diagrams 2. Dimensional, Electrical, and Capacity data 3. Piping and Electrical Connection Drawings D. Quality Assurance: 1. The specified system shall be factory- tested before shipment. 2. Testing shall include, but shall not be limited to: Quality Control Checks, "Hi -Pot" Test (two times rated voltage plus 1000 volts, per UL requirements), and Metering Calibration Tests. 3. Assemble unit for up -flow air delivery, in draw - through configuration. E. Cabinet and Frame Construction: 1. The frame shall be constructed of heliarc welded tubular steel. 2. The exterior panels shall be insulated with a minimum 1 in., 1.5 lbs. density fiber insulation. 3. The main front panel shall have captive 1/4 turn fasteners. 4. The main unit color shall be standard Liebert color Z -0430. The accent color shall be the same. F. Fan Section: 1. The fan shall be the centrifugal type, double width double inlet vertical upward discharge, and shall be statically and dynamically balanced as a completed assembly to a maximum vibration level of two mils in any plane. 2. The shaft shall be heavy duty steel with self - aligning ball bearings with a minimum life span of 100,000 hours. 3. The fan motor shall be mounted on an adjustable slide base. 4. The drive package shall be two -belt, variable speed, sized for 200% of the fan motor horsepower. 5. The fans shall be located to draw air over the A -frame coil to ensure even air distribution and maximum coil performance. G. Filter Chamber: The filter chambers shall be an integral part of the system, located within the cabinet serviceable from either end of the unit. H. Advanced Microprocessor Control 1. The optional Advanced control processor shall be microprocessor based with a front monitor LCD display panel and control keys for user inputs. The controls shall be menu driven with on- screen prompts for easy user operation. The system shall allow user review AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15770 -4 07/07/98 I 1 I Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility and programming of temperature and humidity setpoints, alarm parameters, and setup selections including choice of control type. A password shall be required to make system changes. For all user selections, the range of acceptable input (temperature, humidity, or time delay) shall be displayed on the monitor screen. The system shall provide monitoring of room conditions, operational status in % of each function, component run times, date and time, and four analog inputs from sensors provided by others. 2. Front Monitor Display Panel: The microprocessor shall provide a front monitor LCD backlit display panel with 4 rows of 20 characters with adjustable contrast. This display (along with five front mounted control keys) shall be the only operator interface required to obtain all available system information such as room conditions, operational status, alarms, control and alarm setpoints, and all user selections including alarm delays, sensor calibration, DIP switch selections, and diagnostics. All indicators shall be in language form. No symbols or codes shall be acceptable. 3. Control Parameters: The control system shall allow programming of the following room conditions: a. Temperature Setpoint 65 to 85 °F (18 to 29 °C) b. Temperature Sensitivity +1 to +9.9 °F (0.6 to 5.6 °C) in 0.1° increments c. Humidity Setpoint 20 to 80% RH d. Humidity Sensitivity +1 to +30% RH e. All setpoints shall be adjustable from the individual unit front monitor panel. f. Temperature and Humidity Sensors shall be capable of being calibrated using the front monitor panel controls to coordinate with other temperature and humidity sensors in the room. 4. Unit Controls: a. Control Type: The user shall be able to select the type of control the advanced microprocessor will use. Selections available shall be intelligent, proportional, and tunable PID (proportional, integral, and derivative gains). If tunable PID is selected, the user shall be able to program each of the three gains. b. Predictive Humidity Control: The microprocessor shall calculate the moisture content in the room and prevent unnecessary humidification and dehumidification cycles by responding to changes in dewpoint temperature. c. Compressor Short-Cycle Control: The control system shall include a program to prevent compressor short- cycling. d. System Auto - Restart: For start-up after power failure, the system shall provide automatic restart with a programmable (up to 9.9 minutes in 6- second increments) time delay. Programming can be performed either at the unit or from the central site monitoring system. e. Sequential Load Activation: During start -up, or after power failure, the microprocessor shall sequence operational load activation to minimize inrush current. Systems allowing multiple Toads to start simultaneously are unacceptable. f. Diagnostics: The control system and electronic circuitry shall be provided with self - diagnostics to aid in troubleshooting. The microcontroller board shall be diagnosed and reported as pass /not pass. Control inputs shall be indicated as on or off at the front monitor panel. Control outputs shall be able to be turned on or off from the front monitor panel without using jumpers or a service terminal. Each control output shall be indicated by an LED on a circuit board. g. Data Collection: The control system shall maintain accumulative operating hours of compressor, reheat, humidifier, fan motor, and Econ -O -Coil. The ten most recent alarms shall also be retained. h. Analog Input: The system shall include four customer accessible analog inputs for sensors provided by others. The analog inputs shall accept a 4 to 20 mA signal. The user shall be able to change the input to 0 to 5 vdc or 0 to 10 vdc if desired. The gains for each analog input shall be programmable from the front panel. The analog inputs shall be able to be monitored from the front panel. AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15770 -5 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 5. Alarms: a. Unit Alarms: The microprocessor shall activate an audible and visual alarm in event of any of the following conditions: 1) High Temperature 2) Low Temperature 3) High Humidity 4) Low Humidity 5) Short Cycle 6) Compressor Overload (Optional) 7) Main Fan Overload (Optional) 8) Humidifier Problem 9) High Head Pressure 10) Change Filter 11) Loss of Air Flow 12) Low Suction Pressure 13) Loss of Power 14) Custom Alarm ( #1 to #4) b. Custom Alarms: Custom alarms are four customer accessible alarm inputs to be indicated on the front panel. Custom alarms can be identified with prepared (programmed) alarm labels for the following frequently used inputs: 1) Water Under Floor (in drain pan) c. Alarm Controls: Each alarm (unit and custom) can be separately enabled or disabled, selected to activate the common alarm, and programmed for a time delay of 0 to 255 seconds. 1) Audible Alarm: The audible alarm shall annunciate any alarm that is enabled by the operator. 2) Common Alarm: A programmable common alarm shall be provided to interface user selected alarms with a remote alarm device. 3) Remote Monitoring: All alarms shall be communicated to the Liebert site monitoring system with the following information: date and time of occurrence, unit number, and present temperature and humidity. d. Communications: The microprocessor shall be compatible with all Liebert remote monitoring and control devices. I. Steam Generating Humidifier: 1. The environmental control system shall be equipped with a steam generating humidifier that is controlled by the microprocessor control system. 2. It shall be complete with disposable canister, all supply and drain valves, steam distributor, and electronic controls. 3. The need to change canister shall be annunciated on the microprocessor control panel. J. Electric Reheat: The low -watt density, stainless steel, finned - tubular electric reheat coils shall be capable of maintaining room dry bulb conditions when the system is calling for dehumidification. The reheat section shall include U.L. approved safety switches to protect the system from overheating. K. Compressorized Systems: 1. Dual Refrigeration Systems : Each refrigeration circuit shall include hot gas mufflers, liquid line filter dryers, refrigerant sight glass with moisture indicator adjustable, externally equalized expansion valves, and liquid line solenoid valves. 2. Semi - Hermetic Compressors: The compressors shall be located in a separate compartment so they may be serviced during operation of the equipment. The compressor shall be semi - hermetic with a suction gas cooled motor, vibration isolators, thermal overloads, oil sight glass, manual reset high pressure switch, pump down low pressure AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15770 -6 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility switch, suction line strainer, reversible oil pumps for forced feed lubrication, a maximum operating speed of 1750 RPM, and a minimum EER of 10.0. 3. Four -Step Refrigeration System: The environmental control system shall include cylinder unloaders on the semi - hermetic compressors. The unloaders shall be activated by solenoid valves which are controlled from the microprocessor control. In response to the return air temperature, the microprocessor control shall activate the unloader solenoids and the liquid line solenoids such that four stages of refrigeration cooling are obtained. The stages shall be: a. one compressor, partially loaded b. two compressors partially loaded c. one compressor partially loaded, one compressor fully loaded d. two compressors fully loaded e. On a call for dehumidification, the microprocessor control shall insure that at least one compressor is on full for proper humidity control. L. A -Frame D.X. Coil: 1. The evaporator coil shall be an A -Frame design. 2. It shall be constructed of copper tubes and aluminum fins. 3. Refrigerant of each system shall be distributed throughout the entire coil face area. 4. A stainless steel condensate drain pan shall be provided. M. Air Cooled Systems: The Liebert manufactured air cooled condenser shall be the low profile, slow speed, multiple direct drive, propeller fan type. The condenser shall balance the heat rejection of the compressor at 115 °F ambient. The condenser shall be constructed of aluminum and contain a copper tube, aluminum fin coil arranged for vertical air discharge. 1. Fan Speed Control Condenser: a. The winter control system for the air cooled condenser shall be Liebert Fan Speed Control. b. The variable speed motor shall operate from 0 to 230 volts single phase, 10 to 1050 RPM. c. It shall be designed with ball bearings, permanent lubrication, internal overload protection, 40 °C rise at full speed, 65 °C rise at 10 RPM. d. The control system shall be complete with transducers, thermostats and electrical control circuit, factory pre - packaged in the integral condenser control box. e. The transducer shall automatically sense the highest head pressure of either operating compressor and control the variable speed fan on the air cooled condenser to properly maintain the head pressure. f. The fan speed control system shall provide positive start-up and operation in ambient temperature as low as -20 °F (- 28.9 °C). N. Floor Stand: Provide floor stands for indoor units where shown on drawings. The floor stand shall be constructed of a heliarc welded tubular steel frame. The floor stand shall have adjustable legs with vibration isolation pads. The floor stand shall be 9 inches high. O. Condensers: Air cooled refrigerant condensers consisting of corrosion resistant cabinet, copper tube aluminum fin coils arranged for two circuits, multiple direct drive propeller fans with permanently lubricated ball bearing single phase motors with intemal overload protection. P. Filters: 1. Media: Pleated, lofted, non - woven, reinforced cotton fabric; supported and bonded to welded wire grid; enclosed in cardboard frame; 4 inch nominal thickness. 2. Rating: ASH RAE 52; 65 percent dust spot efficiency, 90- 92 percent weight arrestance; 500 ft/min face velocity, 0.30 inch WG initial resistance, 1.0 inch WG recommended final resistance. AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15770 -7 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility Q. Heating Coils: 1. Heating Coils: Enclosed fin electrical elements arranged for minimum of three stages. 2. Circuit Protection: Primary and secondary thermal cutouts, differential air pressure switch, and manual reset overload protection, branch circuit overcurrent protection. R. Steam Generating Humidifier. The environmental control system shall be equipped with a steam generating humidifier that is controlled by the microprocessor control system. It shall be complete with disposable canister, all supply and drain valves, steam distributor, and electronic controls. The need to change canister shall be annunciated on the microprocessor control panel. S. Electrical Panel: 1. Service Connections, Wiring, and Disconnect Requirements: Conform to Division 16. 2. Control Cabinet: NEMA 250; Type1 enclosure, UL listed, with piano hinged door, grounding lug, combination magnetic starters with overload relays, circuit breakers and cover interlock, and fusible control circuit transformer. 3. Disconnect Switch: Non - automatic molded case circuit breaker with handle accessible with panel closed and capable of preventing access until switched to "off' position. 4. Time delay relay start adjustable from 0 -180 seconds minimum range, set at 60 seconds for standby generator start-up sequencing of Toads. T. Autochangeover Controller: 1. Three unit controller, powered by 24 VAC, to monitor NC units for running and standby status and automatically switch to redundant unit when running unit goes into alarm. Controller will also balance the run -time of the A/C units. Unit shall be Liebert Model AC3 Autochangeover Controller. 2. Controller shall have: a. Common alarm inputs and control outputs for NC units. b. LCD readout. c. Adjustable autochangeover interval. d. Adjustable alarm delay. e. Alarm unit shut down control. f. Nonvolatile memory storage. g. Removable screw terminals blocks. h. Manual override pushbutton to turn on all NC units. i. Manual lead /lag changeover. j. DIP switch selection of two or three unit operation. k. Common alarm relay output. I. Alarm silence pushbutton. m. Alarm reset pushbutton. 2.03 COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS - UNITARY, ABOVE - CEILING MOUNTED A. Manufacturer: 1. Basis for Design: The environmental control system shall be a Liebert mini -MATE Plus only, factory assembled unit. The refrigeration system shall be split, with the compressor located in a remote condensing unit. 2. Substitutions: a. No substitutions allowed. B. General: The evaporator section shall be specifically designed for above dropped - ceiling installation and serviceable from one side of the system. Condensing units shall be propeller fan for outdoor installation. AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15770 -8 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility C. Submittals: Submittals shall be provided with the proposal and shall include: Single -Line Diagrams; Dimensional, Electrical, and Capacity data; Piping and Electrical Connection Drawings. D. Quality Assurance: The specified system shall be factory- tested before shipment. Testing shall include, but shall not be limited to: Quality Control Checks, "Hi -Pot" Test (two times rated voltage plus 1000 volts, per UL requirements), and Metering Calibration Tests. The system shall be designed and manufactured according to world class quality standards. The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified. E. Evaporator Cabinet and Frame Construction: The cabinet and chassis shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel and designed for easy installation and service access from one side only. F. Air Distribution: The air distribution system shall be constructed with a quiet, direct -drive fan assembly equipped with double -inlet blower, self - aligning sleeve bearings, and lifetime lubrication. Fan motor shall be permanent -split capacitor, high efficiency type, equipped with two speeds for air flow modulation. Dehumidification shall utilize the lower fan speed. G. Microprocessor Control System: The control system shall be microprocessor based. The wall- mounted control enclosure shall include an LCD custom display providing a continuous display of operating status and alarm condition. An 8 key membrane keypad for setpoint/program control, unit on /off, and fan speed shall be located below the display. 1. Monitoring: The LCD display shall provide an on /off indication, fan speed indication, operating mode indication (cooling, heating, humidifying, dehumidifying) and current day, time, temperature and humidity (if applicable) indication. The monitoring system shall be capable of relaying unit operating parameters and alarms to the Liebert SiteScan® Monitoring system. 2. Control Parameters: a. The control shall have two temperature control setpoints for cooling and heating functions with a minimum 2 °F differential between them. The control shall automatically switch from cooling to heating modes based on return air conditions. The temperature control setpoint range shall be 60 °F to 85 °F (15.6 °C to 29.4 °C). b. On units with humidity control: The control shall have two humidity control setpoints for humidification and dehumidification functions with a minimum 4% RH differential between them. The control shall automatically switch from humidifying to dehumidifying based on return air conditions. c. The humidity control setpoint range shall be 20% RH to 80% RH. 3. Programmability: a. The control shall be programmable on a daily basis or on a 5 day /2 day program schedule. It shall be capable of accepting 2 programs per day. b. The control shall include the capabilities to calibrate the temperature and humidity sensors and adjust the sensor response delay time from 10 to 90 seconds. c. The control shall be capable of displaying temperature values in °F or °C. 4. Alarms: a. The control system shall monitor unit operation and activate an audible and visual alarm for the following field adjustable conditions. 1) High Temperature (max 90 °F) (32.2 °C) 2) Low Temperature (min 35 °F) (1.7 °C) 3) High Humidity (max 85% RH) 4) Low Humidity (min 15% RH) 5) The control shall be capable of disabling any alarm it required. 5. System Auto Restart: The auto restart feature shall automatically restart the mini -MATE Plus after a power failure. AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15770 -9 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility H. Finned Tubular Electric Reheat: The electric reheats shall be low -watt density, finned - tubular elements and shall include U.L. approved safety switches to protect the system from overheating. I. Direct Expansion Coil: 1. The evaporator coil shall have 2.6 sq.ft. (.24 m2) face. It shall be constructed of copper tubes and aluminum fins. Refrigerant flow shall be controlled by an externally equalized thermostatic expansion valve. 2. The coil shall be provided with a stainless steel drain pan. J. Refrigeration System: The refrigeration system shall consist of a hermetic compressor with vibration isolating springs, high pressure safety switch, externally equalized expansion valve, a refrigerant sight glass and moisture indicator, and a compressor crankcase heater. Refrigeration components shall be located in the condensing unit. K. Propeller Fan Condensing Unit: 1. The condensing unit shall be remotely located. The condenser coil shall be constructed of copper tubes and aluminum fins with a direct -drive propeller fan. 2. All components shall be factory assembled, charged with refrigerant, sealed and be capable of being connected to the evaporator section using pre - charged refrigerant line sets. No piping, brazing, dehydration or charging shall be required. The external panels shall be powder coated. 3. Condenser shall be designed for 115 °F ambient and be capable of operation to -20 °F. L. Refrigerant Line Sets: Pre - charged refrigerant line sets shall be provided in proper lengths for application. M. Air Filter Box: Evaporator section shall be supplied with an air filter box for use with ducted installations. Filter shall be 4" deep pleated type with a minimum efficiency of 20% based on ASHRAE 52 -76. N. Steam - Generating Humidifier: 1. Provide steam - generating humidifier factory piped, mounted and wired to the integral control system. The steam generator shall provide dry steam to the bypass air around the evaporator coil. 2. Controls for the humidification system shall include: Humidity setpoint, automatic water feed and drain valves. 2.04 HUMIDIFIER WATER TREATMENT FILTER A. Provide Systems IV Model HUM16P Humidifier Filter at inlet of make -up water for scale control in NC unit humidifier. B. Filter shall have 125 psig maximum operating pressure,100 °F maximum operating temperature, 100 gph flowrate and have 2 psi intial pressure drop. Fumish with Red Line Gauge and mounting bracket. 2.05 LIEBERT UNIT MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish complete service and maintenance of air conditioning units for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. Service shall be Liebert Startup Plus plan. B. Provide maintenance service with a two month interval as maximum time period between calls. Provide 24 -hour emergency service on breakdowns and malfunctions. Service shall be Vemco Startup Plus plan. AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15770 -10 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility C. Include maintenance items as outlined in manufacturer's operating and maintenance data, including minimum of six filter replacements, minimum of one fan belt replacement, and controls check -out, adjustments, and recalibrations. D. Submit copy of service call work order or report, and include description of work performed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNIT INSTALLATION A. Verify that roof is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings or as illustrated by the manufacturer. B. Verify that proper power supply is available. C. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Mount units on factory built roof mounting frame providing watertight enclosure to protect ductwork and utility services. Install roof mounting frame level. E. Provide deep seal P -trap at rooftop unit. 3.02 COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONER INSTALLATION A. Verify that proper power supply is available. B. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Provide adequate drainage connections for condensate and humidifier flushing system. D. Provide shut -off valves in water inlet to humidifier. E. Provide deep seal P -trap and extend condensate drain thru exterior wall to grade. F. Provide refrigerant piping between indoor unit and condenser unit mounted on roof. G. Provide heat rejection interface (low voltage) between indoor unit and condenser unit. 3.03 COMPUTER ROOM UNITARY ABOVE - CEILING UNIT INSTALLATION A. Verify that ceiling space is ready to receive work and clearance dimensions are as required. B. Verify that proper power supply is available. C. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Coordinate installation of air conditioning unit with room ceiling installer. E. Provide deep seal P -trap and extend condensate drain to Janitor Service Sink. F. Provide refrigerant piping between indoor unit and condenser unit mounted on roof. AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15770 -11 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc.. Tukwila Switch Facility G. Provide heat rejection interface (low voltage) between indoor unit and condenser unit. 3.04 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Provide initial start-up and shut -down during first year of operation, including routine servicing and check -out. AIR CONDITIONING UNITS END OF SECTION 15770 -12 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 15840 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Low pressure ductwork. B. Grilles, registers and diffusers. C. Roof ventilators. D. Accessories. E. Duct liner. F. Air filters. G. Duct cleaning. H. Testing of ductwork. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ADC 1062 - Air Distribution and Control Device Test Code. B. AMCA 500 - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters. C. ANSI /UL 586 - Test Performance of High Efficiency Particulate, Air Filter Units. D. ANSI /UL 900 - Test Performance of Air Filter Units. E. ARI 650 - Air Outlets and Inlets. F. ASHRAE - Handbook 1993 Fundamentals; Chapter 33 - Duct Design. G. ASHRAE - Handbook 1992 Equipment; Chapter 1 - Duct Construction. H. ASHRAE 52 - Method of Testing Air Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter. I. ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets. J. ASTM A 90 - Weight of Coating on Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles. K. ASTM A 167 - Stainless and Heat - Resisting Chromium - Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. L. ASTM A 525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. M. ASTM A 527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) by Hot -Dip Process, Lock Forming Quality. DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15840 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility N. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate. O. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. P. NFPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. Q. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards. R. UMC - Uniform Mechanical Code, 1997. S. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire - Protection Service. T. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors. U. UL 555 - Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Duct Sizes: Inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining. B. Low Pressure: Three pressure classifications: 1/2 inch WG positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 2,000 fpm; 1 inch WG positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 2,500 fpm and 2 inch WG positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 2,500 fpm. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test and rate performance of air outlets and inlets in accordance with ADC Equipment Test Code 1062 and ASHRAE 70. B. Test and rate performance of louvers in accordance with AMCA 500. C. Filter media shall be ANSI /UL 900 listed, Class 1 or Class 2, as approved by local authorities. D. Provide all filters as product of one manufacturer. E. Assemble filter components to form filter banks from products of one manufacturer. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Construct ductwork to SMACNA, UMC and NFPA standards. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds, and configuration prior to start of work for low pressure. B. Provide shop drawings for shop fabricated assemblies indicated, including volume control dampers, duct access doors, duct test holes. Provide product data for hardware used. C. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets indicating type, size, location, application, and noise level. D. Review requirements of outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submitting product data and schedules of outlets and inlets. DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORiES 15840 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility E. Submit shop drawings and product data on filter media, filter performance data, filter assembly and filter frames. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and protect products under provisions of Section 15010. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Provide minimum one year manufacturer's warranty on all manufactured items. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTWORK MATERIALS A. General: 1. Non - combustible or conforming to requirements for Class 1 air duct materials, or UL 181. 2. Rigid fiberglass "ductboard" or similar fabricated ductwork systems are not acceptable. B. Steel Ducts: ASTM A525 or ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet, lock- forming quality, having zinc coating of 1.25 oz per sq ft for each side in conformance with ASTM A90. C. Aluminum Ducts: ANSI /ASTM B209; aluminum sheet, alloy 3003 -H14. Aluminum Connectors and Bar Stock: Alloy 6061 -T6 or of equivalent strength. D. Flexible Ducts: Interlocking spiral of galvanized steel or aluminum construction or fabric supported by helically wound spring steel wire or flat steel bands; rated to 2 inches WG positive and 1.5 inches WG negative for low pressure ducts and 15 inches WG positive or negative for medium pressure ducts. E. Insulated Flexible Ducts: Flexible duct wrapped with flexible glass fiber insulation, enclosed by seamless aluminum pigmented plastic vapor barrier jacket; maximum 0.23 K value at 75 °F. F. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws. G. Sealant: Water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials; liquid used alone or heavy mastic. Sealant shall be paintable. Aluminized, pressure sensitive duct tape is not acceptable. H. Hanger Rod: Steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded. 2.02 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards and ASHRAE handbooks, except as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. B. Size rectangular ducts installed in place of round ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission. C. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not Tess than 1 -1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15840 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility insulation. D. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible. Divergence upstream of equipment shall not exceed 30 degrees; convergence downstream shall not exceed 45 degrees. E. Provide easements where low pressure ductwork conflicts with piping and structure. Where easements exceed 10 percent duct area, split into two ducts maintaining original duct area. F. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with SMACNA approved draw bands. G. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller with crimp in direction of air flow. H. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. 2.03 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS A. Long -Throw Jet Diffusers: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Anemostat Model DJ "Diffus -A- Jet ". b. Other manufacturers offering equivalent products will be reviewed. 2. Multiple -jet diffuser assembly consisting of single or multiple, adjustable nozzle diffusers in common face plate mounting panel. 3. Nozzles: Diffuser nozzles shall have jet stream discharge pattern or diffused pattern if inner assembly is reversed in face plate. Diffuser nozzles shall be individually adjusted for direction and air pattern. 4. Face plate: Heavy gauge stamped steel with beveled edges. 5. Fabricate of steel with primer coat finish. B. Drum Diffusers: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Anemostat Model IJ "Infinijet ". b. Other acceptable manufacturers offering similar products. 1) Titus. 2) Tuttle & Bailey. 3) Krueger. 2. Performance: a. As scheduled on drawings. 3. Drum: Diffuser drum shall rotate in mounting frame for directional adjustment and have individually adjustable, aerodynamic blades for spread. 4. Face plate: Heavy extruded aluminum. 5. Fabricate of aluminum with off -white finish. C. Round Ceiling Diffusers: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Titus Model TMRA. b. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 1) Tuttle & Bailey. 2) Anemostat. 3) Barb -Aire. 2. Round, horizontal to vertical adjustable pattern, stamped or spun, multicore type diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern, with sectorizing baffles where indicated. 3. Project diffuser collar not more than one inch above ceiling face and connect to duct with duct ring. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster ring and ceiling plaque. DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15840 -4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 4. Fabricate of steel with baked enamel off -white finish. 5. Provide butterfly damper and multi - louvered equalizing grid with damper adjustable from diffuser face. D. Square Ceiling Diffusers: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Titus Model TDCA. b. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 1) Tuttle & Bailey. 2) Anemostat. 3) Barb -Aire. 2. Square, stamped, multicore, louver -face type diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern with sectorizing baffles where indicated. 3. Provide frame type to match ceiling. 4. Fabricate of steel with baked enamel off -white finish. E. Ceiling Return Grilles: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Titus Model PFR. b. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 1) Tuttle & Bailey. 2) Anemostat. 3) Barb -Aire. 2. Perforated face with 3/16" holes at 1/4" staggered centers. 3. Fabricate of heavy gauge steel with factory baked enamel off -white finish. F. Ceiling Exhaust Grilles: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Titus Model 50R. b. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 1) Tuttle & Bailey. 2) Anemostat. 3) Barb -Aire. 2. Eggcrate grille. 3. Fabricate of aluminum with factory baked enamel off -white finish. 1/2 "x1 /2 "x1/2" grid pattern. 2.04 ROOF VENTILATORS A. Roof Exhaust Hood: 1 Manufacturers: a. Basis for design: Acme "SkyMaster" Model EV. b. The following manufacturers may be considered subject to review. Proposed substitutions shall meet or exceed all requirements of these specifications. 1) Cook. 2) Carnes. 2. General: a. Hood shall have a minimum 1:1 ratio of perimeter openings to throat area. b. Furnish with 1/2" mesh birdscreen of galvanized steel. c. Perimeter openings shall be on all sides of hood. d. Select hood for 0.25" maximum static pressure drop at specified air flowrate. 3. Fabrication: a. Aluminum base and throat with continuously welded mitered comers, .08" thick material. b. Aluminum hood supported and reinforced by structural frame. DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15840 -5 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility c. All fasteners to be aluminum or stainless steel. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Volume Control Dampers: 1. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated. 2. Fabricate splitter dampers of material same gage as duct to 24 inches size in either direction, and two gages heavier for sizes over 24 inches. 3. Fabricate splitter dampers of double thickness sheet metal to streamline shape. Secure blade with continuous hinge or rod. Operate with minimum 1/4 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint action flanged bushing with set screw. 4. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 9 -1/2 x 30 inch. 5. Fabricate multi -blade damper of opposed blade pattem with maximum blade sizes 12 x 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware. 6. Except in round ductwork 8 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil- impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings. 7. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi -blade dampers. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends. 8. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand -off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters. 9. Volume damper accessories: a. Rods with end bearings: Young No. 656. b. Quadrants: Young No. 403. c. Standoff brackets for insulated ductwork: Young No. 443. d. Remote damper operator: Young No. 301. B. Fire Dampers: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Prefco. b. Ruskin. c. Air Balance. d. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 15010. 2. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555, and as indicated. 3. Fabricate ceiling firestop flaps of galvanized steel, 22 gage frame and 16 gage flap, two layers 0.125 inch ceramic fiber on top side, and one layer on bottom side for round flaps, with locking clip. 4. Fabricate ceiling dampers of galvanized steel, 22 gage frame, stainless steel closure spring, and light weight, heat retardant non - asbestos fabric blanket closure. 5. Fabricate curtain type dampers of galvanized steel with interlocking blades. Provide stainless steel closure springs and latches for horizontal installations. Configure with blades out of air stream except for low pressure ducts up to 12 inches in height. 6. Fabricate multiple blade fire dampers with 16 gage galvanized steel frame and blades, oil- impregnated bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, 1/8 x 1/2 inch plated steel concealed linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade stops, and lock. 7. Fusible links, UL 33, shall separate at 160 °F. Provide adjustable Zink straps for combination fire /balancing dampers. C. Backdraft Dampers: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. American Warming & Ventilating. b. Ruskin. c. Air Balance. d. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 15010. DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15840 -6 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 2. Gravity backdraft dampers, size 18 x 18 inches or smaller, furnished with air moving equipment, may be air moving equipment manufacturers standard construction. 3. Fabricate multi - blade, parallel action gravity balanced backdraft dampers of 16 gage galvanized steel, with blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in rattle -free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. D. Air Tuning Devices: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Titus. b. Tuttle & Bailey. c. Barb -Aire. d. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 15010. 2. Multi -blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel construction; with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps. E. Flexible Duct Connectors: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Vent Fabrics. b. Durodyne. c. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 15010. 2. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated. 3. UL listed fire - retardant neoprene coated, asbestos -free, woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 36 oz per sq yd, approximately 3 inches wide, crimped into metal edging strip. F. Duct Access Doors: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Milcor. b. Kirk Blum. c. Controlled Air. d. Fiexmaster USA. e. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 15010. 2. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards and as indicated. 3. Review locations prior to fabrication. 4. Fabricate rigid and close - fitting doors of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum one inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover. 5. Access doors smaller than 12 inches square may be secured with sash locks. 6. Provide two hinges and two sash locks for rectangular sizes up to 18 inches square, three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles for sizes up to 24 x 48 inches. Provide an additional hinge for larger sizes. 7. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable. G. Duct Test Holes: 1. Cut or drill temporary test holes in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist -on metal caps. 2. Permanent test holes shall be factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation. DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15840 -7 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 2.06 DUCT LINER A. Glass Fiber, Flexible: 1. Manufacturers: a. Schuller (Manville). b. Certain -Teed. c. Knauf. d. Other manufacturers offering equivalent products will be reviewed. 2. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket, coated one side. a. Fire hazard classification (UL 723): 1) Flame spread: Not over 25. 2) Smoke developed: Not over 50. b. 'K' value: ASTM C518, 0.28 at 75 °F. c. Moisture absorption: Not greater than 0.5% moisture by volume when exposed to moisture laden air at 120 °F, 96% RH. d. Air friction factor: 1) Absolute roughness: 0.003 ft. /ft. 2) Air friction correction factor: 1.34 at 1000 fpm. e. Maximum service temperature: 250 °F. f. Density: Minimum 1.5 lb/cu ft. g. Maximum Velocity on Coated Air Side: 4,000 fpm. 3. Adhesive: Waterproof, fire - retardant type. 4. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, welded with press on head. B. Glass Fiber, Rigid: 1. Manufacturers: a. Schuller (Manville). b. Certain -Teed. c. Knauf. d. Other manufacturers offering equivalent products will be reviewed. 2. Insulation: ASTM C612; semi - rigid, noncombustible. a. Fire hazard classification (UL 723): 1) Flame spread: Not over 25. 2) Smoke developed: Not over 50. b. 'K' value: ASTM C518, 0.23 at 75 °F. c. Moisture absorption: Not greater than 0.5% moisture by volume when exposed to moisture laden air at 120 °F, 96% RH. d. Maximum service temperature: 250 °F. e. Density: 3.0 lb/cu ft. f. Maximum Velocity on Coated Air Side: 4,000 fpm. 3. Adhesive: Waterproof, fire- retardant type. 4. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, welded with press on head. C. Preformed Glass Fiber for Round Duct: 1. Manufacturers: a. Schuller (Manville) "Spiracoustic ". b. Other manufacturers offering equivalent products will be reviewed. 2. Insulation: Round, preformed, self - supporting insulation for use as lining in round, sheetmetal duct. a. Fire hazard classification (UL 723): 1) Flame spread: Not over 25. 2) Smoke developed: Not over 50. b. 'K' value: ASTM C518, 0.23 at 75 °F. c. Maximum service temperature: 250 °F. d. Density: 3.0 lb/cu ft. DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15840 -8 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility e. Maximum Velocity on Coated Air Side: 4,000 fpm. 2.07 AIR FILTERS A. Disposable, Extended Area Panel Filters: 1. Manufacturers: a. Basis for Design: Farr 30/30. b. The following substitute manufacturers may be considered subject to review. 1) Airguard. 2) Cambridge. c. Proposed substitutions shall meet or exceed all requirements of these specifications. d. Contractor shall be responsible for any impacts to other trades due to substituted equipment or materials provided. 2. Media: Pleated, lofted, non - woven, reinforced cotton fabric; supported and bonded to welded wire grid; enclosed in cardboard frame; nominal size 24 x 24 inches x 4 inches. 3. Rating: ASHRAE 52; 25 -30 percent dust spot efficiency, 90 -92 percent weight arrestance; 500 FPM maximum face velocity, 0.30 inch WG initial resistance, 1.0 inch WG recommended final resistance. B. Extended Surface Retained Media Filters: 1. Manufacturers: a. Basis for Design: Farr Riga -Flo 200. b. The following substitute manufacturers may be considered subject to review. 1) Airguard. 2) Cambridge. c. Proposed substitutions shall meet or exceed all requirements of these specifications. d. Contractor shall be responsible for any impacts to other trades due to substituted equipment or materials provided. 2. Media: Pleated, non -woven cotton fabric, scrim reinforced; supported by welded steel retainer; in 16 gage steel holding frame with corrosion resistant coating; effective media area 20 sq ft per 1000 CFM capacity rating. Nominal size 24 x 24 x 12 inches deep. 3. Rating: ASHRAE 52; 95 percent dust spot efficiency, 99 percent average weight arrestance; 500 FPM maximum face velocity, initial resistance, 0.25 inch WG, recommended final resistance 0.50 inch WG above initial resistance. C. Filter Frames: 1. General: Fabricate filter frames and supporting structures of 16 gage galvanized steel or extruded aluminum T- section construction with necessary gasketing between frames and walls. 2. Standard Sizes: Provide for interchangeability of filter media of other manufacturers; for panel filters, size for 24 x 24 or 24 x 12 inches filter media, minimum 4 inches; for extended surface provide for upstream mounting of panel filters. 3. Side Servicing Housings: Flanged for insertion into ductwork, of reinforced 16 gage galvanized steel; access doors with continuous gasketing and positive locking devices on both sides; extruded aluminum tracks or channels for primary and secondary filters with positive sealing gaskets. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK A. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15840 -9 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring. B. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. C. Connect diffusers boots to low pressure ducts with 5 feet maximum length of flexible duct. Hold in place with strap or clamp. D. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. E. Duct and Plenum Liner Application: 1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage. 2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Refer to SMACNA Standards for spacing. 3. Seal and smooth joints. 4. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive. 5. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness. 6. Duct liner in large round ductwork shall be secured in place with 1/4" or 1/2" mesh hardware wire. F. Adjusting and Cleaning: 1. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning. 2. Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS A. Install items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. C. Install grilles, registers and diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take -off to grilles, registers and diffusers regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the grille, register or diffuser assembly. E. Paint inside of ductwork visible behind air inlets and outlets matte black. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide balancing dampers at points on low pressure supply, retum, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Use splitter dampers only where indicated. C. Provide balancing dampers on medium pressure systems where indicated. D. Provide fire dampers at locations indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15840 -10 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility components, and where required by authorities having jurisdiction. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges. E. Demonstrate re- setting of fire dampers to authorities having jurisdiction and Owner's representative. F. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside, and where indicated. G. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment. H. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and as indicated. I. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. 3.04 AIR FILTER INSTALLATION A. Install air cleaning devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Prevent passage of unfiltered air around filters with felt, rubber, or neoprene gaskets. C. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace temporary filters used during construction. 3.05 TESTING OF DUCTWORK SYSTEMS A. General: The contractor is responsible for the administration and direction of tests. Furnish instruments, equipment, connecting devices, and personnel for the tests. Notify engineer three days before inspection or testing is scheduled. B. Low Pressure Ductwork: Test ducts, plenums, and casings for air leakage. Prior to application of insulation, subject new ductwork to static pressure equivalent to that indicated or implied in drawings. Before installing supply outlets, apply temporary caps where outlets will be connected. Connect a test blower temporarily to inlet end of duct and, by throttling its intake, adjust static pressure in duct to required value. Read voltage and current to blower motor and total static pressure across blower wheel. Apply these data to AMCA- certified performance table for the test blower to derive volumetric flow rate (cfm) of air injected into duct. This amount shall not exceed 5 percent of total air that duct is required to deliver. Remove temporary caps and test blower. DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES END OF SECTION 15840 -11 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 15850 FANS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Roof exhausters. B. Fan accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. B. AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. C. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook. D. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes E. AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices. F. AMCA 301 - Method of Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data. G. NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators. H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. I. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Indicate assembly of fans and accessories and provide product data including fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. 1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts list, and wiring diagrams. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect motors, shafts, and bearings from weather and construction dust. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS FANS A. Do not operate fans for any purpose until ductwork is clean, filters in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. 15850 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal. B. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99. C. Temperature Limit: Maximum 300 °F, unless otherwise noted. D. Performance Base: Sea level conditions. E. Static and Dynamic Balance: Eliminate vibration or noise transmission to occupied areas. 2.02 ROOF EXHAUSTER - CENTRIFUGAL, DIRECT DRIVE A. Manufacturers: 1. Basis for Design: Cook. 2. The following manufacturers may be considered subject to review. Proposed substitutions shall meet or exceed all requirements of these specifications. a. Greenheck. b. JennAir. c. Penn Ventilator. B. Unit: 1. Heavy- gauge, corrosion free, spun aluminum housing and aluminum curb cap. 2. Non - overloading all aluminum, centrifugal wheel and hub, dynamically and statically balanced. 3. Permanently lubricated motor mounted in compartment sealed from exhaust air stream. 4. Fan and motor shall be vibration isolated from housing. 5. Assembly shall be UL listed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install fans as indicated, with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads. C. Install flexible connections between fan and ductwork. Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between ductwork and fan while running. D. Install fan restraining snubbers as required. Adjust snubbers to prevent tension in flexible connectors when fan is operating. E. Provide safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed. F. Pipe scroll drains to nearest floor drain. G. Provide backdraft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans where indicated. FANS END OF SECTION 15850 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 15900 BUILDING CONTROLS SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Controls. B. Sequences of Operation. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI /ASHRAE - 90A - Energy Conservation in New Building Design. B. ANSI /NFPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. C. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.06 SITE SCAN SYSTEM A. The following specifications describe the requirements for a complete site monitoring control system. The system architecture shall utilize intelligent distributed monitoring /control modules and have the capability to centrally or remotely communicate to one or more workstations. The system provided will be configured to meet the requirements of the project and shall consist, at a minimum, of gateway module(s) and monitoring /control module(s). This system shall also have the capability to directly interface with Liebert information gathering modules (IGMs) found internally to Liebert Environmental, Power and UPS units, or external IGMs to monitor dry or voltage present contacts, space temperature /humidity, water detection cable, and /or power parameters. B. The system specified shall be provided by Liebert Corporation, an IS09001- certified manufacturer and shall be known as SiteScan SS2W for Windows. C. Hardware - System Requirements 1. General: All material and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured and available —not customer - designed especially for individual projects. All hardware systems and components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use prior to installation. 2. Workstations: Workstations shall be a minimum of 486/50Mhz, 8 Mb RAM, 120Mb hard drive, 3 1/2" floppy drive, local video bus with 256 -color capability, and have a minimum of two (2) serial ports and one (1) parallel port. 3. Gateway Modules: Gateway Modules shall be capable of creating an EIA -485 communication network between the monitoring /control modules and the workstation(s). The following types of Gateway Modules shall be offered: a. DC232: Capabilities of the DC232 Gateway Module shall include: 1) Store alarms in the event of a workstation power down until the workstation power is restored. 2) Support two (2) EIA -232 ports which shall have the capability to be directly BUILDING CONTROLS SYSTEMS 15900 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility connected to any combination of workstation or Hayes compatible (14400 baud) modem. 3) Support up to fifty (50) physical or virtual monitoring /control module addresses via an EIA -485 communication network labeled CMnet. b. DCLAN: Capabilities of the DCLAN Gateway Module shall include: 1) Store alarms in the event of a workstation power down until the workstation power is restored. 2) Support for four (4) EIA -232 ports which shall have the capability to be directly connected to any combination of workstation or Hayes compatible (14400 baud) modem. 3) Support up to fifty (50) physical or virtual monitoring /control modules via an EIA -485 communication network labeled CMnet. (For example: will support up to 146 Liebert Units per gateway through twelve (12) DC12 -422 modules and two (2) DC1 modules). 4) Capability of interconnecting a total of sixty (60) DCLAN Modules via either its own network, labeled LGnet, at 9600 or 38.4Kbps or by Ethernet at 10Mbps. Connections between DCLANs shall be either twisted pair, coaxial or fiber. 5) Provide full arbitration between multiple users, whether they are communicating through the same DCLAN or different ones. 4. Monitoring /Control Modules: Monitoring /Control Modules will be the interface modules between the Liebert units, dry contact inputs /outputs, or analog input points, and the Gateway Module. Monitoring /Control Modules will reside on the CMnet. The following types of Monitoring /Control Modules shall be available: 5. Liebert Unit Interface Modules: Capabilities of the Liebert Unit Interface Modules shall include: a. DC12 -422 Module shall have the capacity to interconnect with any combination of twelve (12) Liebert Environmental, Power, UPS, Temperature /Humidity, or Contact Closure units. The DC12 -XXX will be known to have one physical address and up to three (3) virtual addresses when calculating the capacity number of monitoring /control module addresses that may be connected to a Gateway Module. The DC12 -422 shall communicate directly with the Liebert units via EIA -422 communication cable. The DC12 -485 will communicate to an interface device known as a "Liebert Multi -Drop Adapter" (LMDA) which is connected near the Liebert unit via EIA -422 cable (LMDA to Liebert unit) and via EIA -485 communication cable. (LMDA to DC12 -485) b. DC4 -422 module shall have the capacity to interconnect with any combination of four (4) Liebert Environmental, Power, UPS units, or external Liebert IGMs. The DC4- 422 will be known to have one physical address and three (3) virtual addresses when calculating the capacity number of monitoring /control module addresses that may be connected to a Gateway Module. c. DC1 module shall have the capacity to interconnect with any one (1) Liebert Environmental, Power, or UPS unit and have one physical address. d. RCM10U Module: The RCM10U Module shall have the capability to monitor any combination of ten (10) digital inputs (.5Ma maximum current sense), and /or thermistor inputs (10k ohm @ 77 degree F - Precon Type 2), and /or analog input (4- 20Ma - 24Vdc loop power, 250 ohm impedance; 0 -5Vdc -10k ohm maximum source impedance). It will have one physical address. 6. Liebert Information Gathering Modules (IGMs) Internal to the Liebert Environmental, Power, and UPS units: The SiteScan monitoring system connected to the Liebert units shall provide full monitoring and control functions as described in the "SiteScan SS2W Reference Library." 7. Liebert Information Gathering Modules (IGMs) External: The external Liebert IGMs shall consist of the following Information Gathering Modules: a. RPMP: The SiteScan monitoring system connected to the Remote Power Monitoring BUILDING CONTROLS SYSTEMS 15900 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility Panel (RPMP) shall provide full monitoring functions as described in the "SiteScan SS2W Reference Library." The SiteScan SS2W Reference Library may be obtained from Liebert Corporation, Site Products Department, 1050 Dearborn Dr., P. O. Box 29186, Columbus, Ohio 43229. D. Software - System Requirements 1. General: The system software application code shall be written for "Windows ", not to be confused with application code running in the Windows environment. 2. Graphics: The System shall have the following 256 -color graphic display capabilities: a. Equipment - specific graphics that include pictorial representations of current status of I/O points being monitored including analog /digital readouts in appropriate locations contained within the graphic bezel. 3. Data Base Generation: The user shall have the following capabilities to alter the data base: a. Add and delete monitoring /alarm points. b. Modify point parameters. c. Restrict user access by assigning user passwords. The system shall have the capability to accept up to thirty-two (32) unique passwords; each may be one of six (6) levels of access. 4. Monitoring: All operator commands shall be in the graphics data base and menu driven. Selection of desired functions shall result in the display of selected object item or the allowable options desired. Functions shall include, but not be limited to: a. Complete data received from the Liebert Environmental, Power, and UPS units as referred by the "SiteScan SS2W Reference Library." The SiteScan SS2W Reference Library may be obtained from Liebert Corporation, Site Products Department, 1050 Dearborn Dr., P.O. Box 29186, Columbus, Ohio 43229. b. Complete data received from all analog and /or digital points external to the Liebert Environmental, Power, and UPS units. c. The system shall have the capability to monitor third -party systems such as fire detection, water detection, generator monitors, battery monitors, etc., via a single communication connection, such as an EIA -232 connection. d. All monitoring displays shall contain a date and time header line. 5. Control: The system shall be capable of control. Control shall mean to include changing setpoints of Liebert Environmental units, controlling the on /off feature of Liebert Environmental units that are equipped with the remote on /off feature, and remote on /off control of digital points through keyboard access, schedules, or logic. 6. Alarm Software "Logger": The system shall include an alarm software package labeled as "Logger" and shall include the following capabilities: a. Allow receipt of alarms and messages while in a functional mode other than monitoring; i. e., incoming alarms shall be displayed while the operator is utilizing another Windows -based program such as a word processor. b. The system shall distinguish between alarms and messages with alarms having high priority. c. The system shall be capable of calling up to three different remote locations to deliver an alarm or message to either remote display devices or numeric pagers. d. The text for alarms and messages shall be operator - definable. The system shall be capable of storing at least 1,000 messages. Generic messages used for multiple points throughout the system shall only count as one message. All messages and alarms shall have the capability of printing actual values of the monitored points. e. The system shall have the optional capability to deliver simultaneous alarms to multiple central sites, as well as store the alarm/message text on the hard drive and /or print to a printer. 7. Trending and Reports: The system shall be capable of the following archiving and display of achieved data: BUILDING CONTROLS SYSTEMS 15900 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility a. The field modules shall be capable of calling a remote workstation during off peak phone rate hours to automatically upload all current and accumulated data. This shall be delivered to the corresponding workstation for printing and /or permanent storage on hard disk. The system shall further be capable of transferring hard disk information onto a floppy disk or magnetic tape for remote site storage b. The system shall be capable of reporting and archiving the following information as a minimum: Temperature values, humidity values, electrical parameters, alarms, and messages. Equipment run time information may be included as an optional feature c. The operator shall be able to create custom reports and logging formats d. Up to four (4) trended parameters shall be displayed on a single graphical screen at one time. e. Polling and storage of trended points shall be user - \selectable from one (1) second to four (4) hour intervals between recordings. f. Through a standard supplied separate Window application database program labeled "Trend Historian," the system shall have the additional capabilities: 1) The duration of each data point stored on the workstation hard drive shall be operator selectable from 1 to 365 days. 2) Data stored on the workstation hard drive shall have the capability of, at a click of an icon, being sorted by system, parameter, name, or address. 3) Data stored on the workstation hard drive shall have the capability of being displayed in either a 12 -hour or 24 -hour format. 2.01 OPERATING CONTROLS A. Fumish and install all control devices required to achieve the sequences of operation described. 2.02 THERMOSTATS A. Room Thermostats: Low voltage, programmable, to control respective rooftop unit. Honeywell T7300, or approved. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SEQUENCES OF OPERATION A. Computer Room A/C Units: 1. The self- contained controls with the NC units shall control their respective spaces for temperature and humidity. a. Switch Facility/Transmission Area: 1) The fans in both units installed under this contract shall run continuously. 2) Compressors in one unit shall stage on to meet the load. 3) Cooling load shall be shared by the two units in lead /lag sequence. 4) In future, third A/C unit will be added and one unit will act as standby. Units will be cycled by autochangeover controller furnished with future A/C unit. b. Collocate Room: 1) A/C units will be cycled by autochangeover controller fumished under this Contract. 2) The fan in one unit shall run continuously. The other unit shall serve as full standby. 3) Compressors in lead unit shall stage on to meet the load. c. Map Room: 1) The A/C unit's fan shall run continuously. BUILDING CONTROLS SYSTEMS 15900 -4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 2) The unit's compressorshall stage on to meet the cooling load. 2. Computer room NC units shall shut down on signal from their respective zone smoke detector or fire alarm system. B. Gas /Electric Rooftop Units: 1. Rooms shall be heated and cooled by respective rooftop gas /electric air conditioner. 2. Controls shall be by programmable thermostat. See Section 15770. 3. Electrical Room and Power Room units shall operate in occupied mode continuously. 4. Materials Management and Lobby /Breakroom units shall have occupied mode and night setback operation. 5. Motorized dampers in roof hoods shall open in sequence with outside air dampers in respective gas /electric rooftop unit. C. Exhaust Fans: 1. Toilet exhaust fan shall run continuously during Lobby /Breakroom occupied mode and shall be off during night setback. 2. Power Room exhaust fan shall run continuously. BUILDING CONTROLS SYSTEMS END OF SECTION 15900 -5 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Requirements of the General Requirements of the Contract, the Supplemental Conditions, Division 1, and this section apply to all work in this division. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Each section of Division 16000 shall be considered related to all other sections of Division 16000 to form a complete and inclusive Division. B. Division 16000 shall be considered related to all other divisions of the Specifications to form a single complete and inclusive document. C. References to related work generally will not be indicated because all divisions and sections of the Specifications are interrelated. When references to related work are used, the intent is to assist the Contractor. The references to related work are in no way intended to limit the related work to those divisions or sections noted. 1.03 SCOPE OF WORK A. The work shall include the entire electrical work as shown and specified. Some items are owner furnished and are to be installed by the Contractor as part of this project. Some demolotion is required by this contract to transform the existing building into the end product desired by the Owner as shown by the plans. Not all demolition is shown by the plans and the Contractor shall acquaint himself with the existing conditions prior to bid. Review of all Contract documents is required as some electrical work may be shown or reference on plans or specifications other then Division -16 documents. 1.04 INTENT A. The Contractor is responsible for providing a complete and operating facility. The intention of the Contract Documents is to include all labor and materials, equipment, and transportation necessary or reasonably inferable as being necessary for the execution of the work. By submitting a proposal, the Contractor represents that he has made a thorough examination of the site, of the work and existing conditions and limitations, and that he has examined the Contract Documents in complete detail and has determined beyond doubt that the drawings, specifications and existing conditions are sufficient, adequate, and satisfactory for the construction of the work under the Contract. Where minor adjustments of the work are necessary for purposes of fabrication or installation of items, or resolution of conflicts between items within the intent of the Contract Documents , the Contractor shall make such adjustments at no added expense to the Owner. Where such adjustments affect functional or aesthetic design of the work, they shall first be submitted to the Owner's Representative for review and approval. General Provisions 16010 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility B. Discrepancies: The Contractor shall bring to the Owner's Representative attention, any discrepancies within the Contract Documents and between the Contract Documents and field conditions, and any design and layout changes required due to specific equipment selection, etc., prior to equipment and material purchasing and installation. Corrective work necessitated by discrepancies after purchasing and installation shall be at the Contractor's expense. Where conflicts between the plans and specifications may occur the most stringent of the two shall apply. 1.05 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. All electrical work and phasing of work shall be coordinated with other trades. B. The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the Contract Documents and shall verify at the site all measurements necessary for the proper installation of his work. C. The Contractor shall refer to all Construction Drawings, details, and specifications, including Architectural, Structural, and Mechanical, and shall fully coordinate all Electrical work with other trades. D. The Contractor shall provide all offsets and special fittings such as flexible connections and expansion fittings as required to conform his work to the physical conditions of the building and site. E. All changes caused by failure to coordinate shall be made at the Contractor's expense. F. Special attention shall be paid to all visible devices and equipment in finished areas. Verify the exact location and receive approval from the Owner's Representative prior to installation. G. This Contractor shall schedule his work with all other Contractors in order to maintain job progress schedule and to avoid conflicts in the installation of work by various trades. Coordinate with General Contractor to provide adequate access for installing large equipment. 1.06 COOPERATION A. There shall be complete cooperation with all other crafts in the matter of planning and laying out of the work, and every reasonable effort shall be made to prevent conflict as to space requirements, dimensions, locations, access openings or other matter tending to obstruct or delay the work of any craft. B. Any changes required in the work of the Contractor, caused by his neglect to coordinate his work with others, shall be made at his own expense. 1.07 DRAWINGS General Provisions 16010 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility A. The electrical drawings are diagrammatic and are not intended to show all raceway, wiring, exact locations of equipment, terminations, or number or types of fittings required by the electrical system. Provide all related electrical work which is specified herein, diagrammed or scheduled on the electrical drawings, required by code enforcing agencies and as indicated on other details or elevations for complete and operating electrical systems. Since the drawings of floor, wall, and ceiling installation are made at a small scale, outlets, devices, equipment, etc. are indicated only in their approximate location unless dimensioned unless otherwise indicated. Locate outlets and apparatus symmetrically on floors, walls and ceilings where not dimensioned, and coordinate such locations with work of other trades to prevent interferences. Verify all dimensions on the job. Do not scale the electrical drawings. Refer to the architectural and mechanical shop drawings and project drawings for dimensions as applicable. B. Branch Circuit Wiring: 1. Duplex receptacles and miscellaneous power wiring are shown diagrammatically. In general the panel and circuit numbers are shown adjacent to the device or equipment connection. The Contractor shall provide all interconnecting conduit, wire, and junction boxes per code. Home runs shall not exceed three (3) current carrying conductors. Provide a ground wire in all raceway. 2. The Contractor shall provide all conduit, wire, and junction boxes in accordance with all applicable codes and standards. Home runs are not to exceed three (3) current carrying conductors unless otherwise noted on the drawings. C. Signal and Communications: Where the devices only are shown, the Contractor shall provide complete and operational systems as specified. This includes all conduit, wire, junction boxes and other necessary equipment for system operation. 1.08 WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Where other divisions call for work under this division of the specifications, comply with all requirements herein. Electrical work required by other divisions which is not shown on the electrical drawings and /or specified in this division of these specifications shall be provided by the trade or sub -trade requiring the electrical work. 1.09 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS A. Definitions: 1. Provide: To furnish and install. 2. Contractor: Electrical Contractor. 3. As Directed: As directed by the Owner's Representative. 4. As Shown: As shown on the drawings. 5. Concealed: Built into the construction and not exposed to view. General Provisions 16010 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 6. Hot -Dip Galvanize: Galvanized after fabrication by hot -dip process. 7. Approval: Acceptance by Owner's Representative. 8. Salvage: Remove item, clean, and deliver to the Owner's on -site storage facility. B. Abbreviations: ANSI American National Standards Institute. galv galvanized. Hz hertz. mfr manufacture, manufacturer. NEC National Electrical Code. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association. NFPA National Fire Protection Association. per according to, in accordance with. UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. C. Additional abbreviations as shown on plans. 1.10 CODES AND ORDINANCES A. All work shall comply with the National Electrical Code, NFPA regulations, and all other applicable national, state, and local codes and ordinances. 1.11 PERMITS AND FEES A. Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits relating to the work in this Contract. Contractor shall be responsible for contacting the various agencies involved relating to the electrical work and shall include all inspection and other fees in the Contract. 1.12 CERTIFICATION OF INSPECTION A. Certification of Inspection from the code enforcing agency stating that all work complies with the ordinances shall be presented to the Owner upon completion. B. Where an existing system(s) are to be extended, expanded, or otherwise modified the Contractor shall witness the functional operation of the system(s) as demonstrated by the Owner's representative and sign an existing condition working functional test agreement prior to beginning any modification to said system(s). Where it is determined during this existing condition functional test that certain components of the system(s) under test do not work, the Contractor and Owner's representative shall mutually note these items on the acceptance form. Additionally, the Contractor shall prepare an estimate at no additional cost to the Owner to bring these items into working condition. If such estimate is acceptable to the Owner's representative, this work will be included as part of the Contractors scope of work. Any impact to the schedule to bring non- working system(s) into full working condition shall be noted on the Contractors repair estimate. If schedule impact is foreseen by this work, provide an additional cost to employ additional resources to maintain original schedule. Do not proceed with this repair work without written authorization from the Owner's representative. Schedule with General Provisions 16010 -4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility the Owner a time prior to construction when such test may transpire. No additional work• on such system shall be done by the Owner once the system has been agreed to be in working condition by the Contractor, thus resulting in a single point of system responsibility. Failure to perform such test prior to modification may result in the Contractor bringing the existing system into full working condition at the Contractors expense. 1.13 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All materials shall be new. Contractor shall properly store all materials and equipment for protection from physical damage or damage due to corrosion. B. Drawings and specifications shall be taken together. Provide work specified and not indicated or work indicated and not specified as though mentioned in both. C. Standardization of Manufacturer: The Contractor shall make every effort to furnish all equipment of any equipment type (such as panelboards, starters, devices) from one manufacturer. Confirm before ordering, requirements of standardization with existing Owner's equipment. D. Manufacturer's Directions: Each material for which the manufacturer issues directions shall be used according to its manufacturer's directions, as approved and if not at variance with these specifications. E. Equipment Furnished by Others: For installation of equipment furnished by others and installed by this Contractor, roughing -in dimensions shall be obtained from approved shop drawings, by measurements from the actual equipment, details shown on drawings or as directed by Architect. Install all equipment to be easily accessible for operation, maintenance or repair. Equipment deemed inaccessible shall be relocated as directed. F. Examination of Site and Drawings: Submittal of bid shall indicate the Contractor has examined the site and drawings and has included all required allowances in his bid. 1.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING IN NEW CONSTRUCTION A. The Contractor shall coordinate all openings required in the building construction for the installation of the work. All such openings will be provided by the Contractor. Any cutting and patching made necessary through the neglect of the Contractor will be done at the expense of the Contractor. Penetrations required through concrete slabs or walls shall be drilled with a diamond core drill by the Contractor. In no case shall any structural member be cut without prior approval by the structural engineer of record. 1.15 SLEEVES AND OPENINGS A. Sleeves and openings required through floors and walls for electrical work shall be the responsibility of this Contractor. This work shall be carefully coordinated with the other trades involved. All openings around conduits in sleeves and cable tray penetrations shall be sealed with a material of equal fire rating as the surface penetrated. Reference Architectural plans and specifications for pertaining details. General Provisions 16010 -5 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 1.16 SUBMITTALS, APPROVALS, AND REVIEWS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: After the Contract is awarded but prior to manufacture or installation of any equipment, prepare complete Shop Drawings and Brochures for materials and equipment as required by each section of the specification. Submit five (5) complete sets for review within 30 days after award of Contract. Prior to submission of the Shop Drawings and Project Data, review and certify that they are in compliance with the Contract Documents. Verify all dimensional information to insure proper clearance for installation of equipment. Check all materials and equipment after arrival on the job site and verify compliance with the Contract Documents. A minimum period of two weeks, exclusive of transmittal time, will be required each time a Shop Drawing and /or Brochure is submitted or resubmitted for review. This time period shall be considered by the Contractor when scheduling submittal data. B. Review of Shop Drawings and Brochures shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for dimensions and /or errors that may be contained therein, or deviations from the Contract Documents' requirements. It shall be clearly understood that the noting of some errors but overlooking others does not grant the Contractor permission to proceed in error. Regardless of any information contained in the Shop Drawings and Brochures, the requirements of the Contract Documents shall govern and are not waived or superseded in any way by the review of the Shop Drawings and Brochures. Certifications shall be written or in the form of rubber stamp impressions as follows: I hereby certify that this Shop Drawing and /or Brochure has been checked prior to submittal and that it complies in all respects with the requirements of the Contract Drawings and Specifications for this Project. (Name of Electrical Subcontractor) Signed By Date C. Observe the following rules when submitting the Shop Drawings and Brochures: 1. Each Shop Drawing shall indicate on a title sheet placed at the beginning of the Shop Drawing: Title of the sheet or brochure, name and location of the building; names of the Electrical Engineer, Contractor, subcontractors, manufacturer, supplier /vendor, etc., date of submittal, and the date of correction and revision. Unless the above information is included the submittal will be returned for resubmittal. 2. Shop Drawings shall contain sufficient plans, elevations, sections, and isometrics to clearly describe the equipment or apparatus, and its location. Drawings shall be prepared by an Engineer /Draftsman skilled in this type of work. Shop Drawings shall be drawn to a minimum of 1/8" = 1' -0" scale or larger. Contact Owner's representative for an electronic copy of the appropriate AutoCAD file. An electronic AutoCAD R13 CAD file shall be submitted with all shop drawings. 3. Manufacturers' brochures and data to be submitted shall be published by the manufacturers and shall contain complete and detailed engineering and dimensional information. Brochures and data submitted shall contain only General Provisions 16010 -6 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility information relevant to the particular equipment or materials to be furnished. The Contractor shall not submit information which describes several different items in addition to those items to be used, unless all irrelevant information is marked out, or unless relevant information is clearly marked. Each brochure shall consist of a 10" x 15" accordion -type file folder with each compartment tabbed to indicate the specific submittal enclosed within that compartment. All submittals shall be reviewed by Contractor and stamped approved before forwarding to the Owner's Representative for review. Contractor shall establish quantities, verify space requirements, dimensions, and possible interferences with other trades. Submittals shall include all specified materials. Brochures must include all specified items. Submittals of individual items, or those that do not follow specified format, will not be accepted. 4. Each item submitted shall be identified with the pertinent specification paragraph number. D. Ordering Materials: The Contractor shall order materials within two (2) weeks of receiving reviewed submittals from the Engineer. Provide proof of order placement upon request. Failure to comply will be considered non - performance and progress payments will be suspended until proof of order placement is reviewed and accepted by the Engineer. 1.17 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Maintain, on a daily basis, a complete set of "Record Drawings," reflecting an accurate dimensional record of all buried or concealed work. Mark "Record Drawings" to show the precise location of concealed work and equipment. This requirement shall not be construed as authorization for the Contractor to make changes in the layout or work without definite authorization for such changes. The "Record Drawings" for daily recording shall consist of a set of blue line prints of the Contract Drawings. B. On a pay - period basis the Contractor shall record all changes on Blueline prints. C. Record dimensions clearly and accurately, delineating the work as installed; identify locations by at least two dimensions to permanent reference points. Indicate spare conduits with dimensional information such as measurements from landmarks with depth information and size and quantity of all spare conductors on the Record drawings for future use. D. Upon completion of the work, provide a complete set of clean reproducible sepia mylar drawings. Transfer all "Record" information from the blue line prints to the sepias using standard drafting methods with straight edge guided lines and smooth arcs. Lettering shall be legible. At the Owner's option, these Record drawings may be tranferred to the project AutoCAD. If such option is chosen, this Contractor shall provide all assistance as necessary for clarification information. Where record documents are unclear, the Contractor may be required to re-verfiy final field conditions at no additional expense to the Owner. 1. Certify the "Record Drawings" for correctness by placing and signing the following certifications on the first sheet of the sepia: General Provisions 16010 -7 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility "CERTIFIED CORRECT" (3/8" high letters) (Name of General Contractor) By Date (Name of Electrical Contractor) By Date 1.18 SAFETY AND PROTECTION A. Safety Measures To Be Taken: The Engineer has not been retained or compensated to provide design and construction review services relating to the Contractor's safety precautions or to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures required for the Contractor to perform his work. The Contractor will be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the job site, including safety of all persons and property during performance of the work. This requirement will apply continuously and not be limited to normal working hours. The duty of the Engineer to conduct construction observations of the Contractor's performance is not intended to include review of the adequacy of the Contractor's safety measures, in, on or near the construction site. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to comply with "Safety and Health Regulations for Construction," Volume 36, No. 75, Part II of the Federal Register by the U.S. Department of Labor. Contractor shall be responsible for providing all such safety measures and shall consult with the state or federal safety inspector for interpretation whenever in doubt as to whether safe conditions do or do not exist or whether he is or is not in compliance with state or federal regulations. B. Protection: The Contractor shall take whatever measures are required to insure that electrical safety and protection is maintained. This shall include the proper covering, signage, and securing of "live" circuits. 1.19 EQUIPMENT ACCESSIBILITY AND INSTALLATION A. Accessibility of Equipment: Equipment shall be installed so as to be accessible for operation, maintenance or repair and access clearances shall comply with applicable codes. B. Manufacturer's Installation Details: Manufacturer's installation details, where available, shall be followed exactly. Special wiring or fittings required shall be provided. 1.20 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The Contract Documents are based on the specified items regarding the physical size and shape, relative clearances around equipment, rough -in requirements, and performance. B. Substitutions will be considered, unless it is a proprietary item, if the Contractor follows the specified format for substitutions. C. In the case of proprietary items, substitutions are NOT permitted. D. Changes Due to Substitutions: General Provisions 16010 -8 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for all changes related to substituted items and shall pay all costs. Compensation to other division Contractors are the responsibility of the substituting Contractor. Coordinate fully with all other Contractors before submitting a request for change. 2. The Contractor shall coordinate with all other trades and be responsible for all changes of other trades. 3. All substitutions requested after the award of contract are considered cost reduction in nature and a credit shall be offered the owner. The amount of credit shall be clearly shown on the request for substitution along with a detailed explanation giving reason for Owner consideration of said substitution. All substituted items shall be equal to or better then the specified product. Lead times shall be listed on the submittals. 4. Substitutions for lead time problems resulting from the Contractor having not ordered the material sufficiently early in time will not be accepted and the Contractor shall bear the cost of any additional freight charges that may result to deliver the product on time. 1.21 PRODUCTS A. General: Products are specified by manufacturer name, description, and /or catalog number. Discrepancies between equipment specified and the intended function of equipment shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer in writing prior to bidding. Failure to report any conflict, including catalog numbers, discontinued products, etc., does not relieve the Contractor from meeting the intent of the Contract Documents nor shall it change the Contract cost. If the Contractor is unable to interpret any part of the plans and /or specifications, or should he find discrepancies therein, he shall bring this to the attention of the Engineer who will issue interpretation and/or additional instructions to Bidders before the project is bid. B. Manufacturers: Provide products of manufacturers specified. Manufacturers' catalog numbers and descriptions establish the quality of product required. C. No materials or apparatus may be substituted after the bid opening except where the equipment specified has been discontinued. D. Provide only equipment specified in the Contract Documents or approved by addendum. 1.22 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. General: Prepare instruction manuals describing the operation, servicing and maintenance requirements of all electrical equipment provided and complete parts lists. B. Equipment Described in the Manual: Include all equipment submitted for approval. Each section shall have a separate index tab. General Provisions 16010 -9 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility C. Information Contained in the Manual: Catalog data on each item installed and not the complete "line" of the manufacturer. Supplementary drawings for servicing and maintenance points. Index all contents listed in an orderly presentation. Include tabulations describing the type of equipment, frequency and type of service. D. Binding: Bind material post -type expandable three -hole binder with cloth- covered heavy -duty hardboard cover and cloth back panel. Imprint the front cover with the name of the project, the Owner, year of completion, the words "Electrical Equipment," and names of the Engineer and Electrical Contractor. The back edge shall be imprinted with the name of the project, Owner and year of completion. If thickness of the manual exceeds 3 ", provide separate volumes, each not to exceed 3" thick with each volume imprinted as described above. All printing in gold lettering. Submit for review and approval. E. Number of Copies: Submit one preliminary copy for approval. Deliver three final bound copies final approval and delivery to the Owner. 1.23 OPERATING PERSONNEL INSTRUCTION A. General: Provide instruction of facility operating personnel sufficiently prior to facility acceptance, upon mutually satisfactory arrangement with Owner. B. Instruction: Instruction shall not begin until the component, assembly, or system has been tested and is in acceptable operating condition, otherwise instruction shall be deemed incomplete. Instruction shall encompass normal operation, emergency operation, fire and other hazards, safety provisions, pollution prevention provisions, and maintenance procedures for all work provided. C. Instructors: Instructors shall include the Contractor's staff supplemented by authorized representatives of the component, assembly or system manufacturer. D. Time: Provide all necessary instruction to the complete understanding of the operating personnel. Minimum instruction periods shall be as recommended by manufacturer unless noted otherwise. Provide a time schedule to the Engineer for review and approval. 1.24 ELECTRICAL WORK EXPOSED TO WEATHER A. General: Provide corrosion protection for all ferrous metal portions of electrical work exposed to weather including conduit, clamps, supports, disconnect switches and other items. B. Protection: All ferrous metal shall be hot -dip galvanized after fabrication, painted or cadmium plated, or similarly protected against corrosion. Approval of painting materials and methods is required. C. All enclosures and equipment shall be weathertight. General Provisions 16010 -10 07/07/98 1 i i Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 1.25 TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION SERVICE A. Temporary electrical construction service shall be provided in the General work. Electrical Contractor shall verify with the General Contractor the extent of this service. 1.26 SERVICE A. Scope: It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to contact all Utility Companies (Power, Telephone, Cable TV) and verify the extent of the service work to be performed by the Contractor and by the utilities regardless of what is shown on the drawings in order to provide complete electrical utility services. Portions of the services provided by the Electrical Contractor shall be confirmed prior to bidding. Confirm location of point of service prior to bidding. Verify with each utility requirements for separation and location of underground utilities that may be encountered when ditching. B. Service Charge: Contractor shall obtain and include in his bid the cost of all utility service charges. C. Metering: Verify all metering requirements with utility and comply with their regulations. Provide all labor and materials as required to accomplish utility company metering in accordance with their standards and requirements. D. Some coordination numbers are listed on the front page of the electrical plans and such numbers indicate personnel that have been involved with this project in the design phase. 1.27 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT A. General: Extent of electrical connection for equipment includes final electrical connection of all equipment having electrical requirements. Make final connections for all Owner - furnished equipment. Refer to Division 15 sections for motor starters and controls furnished integrally with equipment. B. NEC Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEC as to type products used and installation of electrical power connections. C. Underwriters Laboratories acceptance: All materials, devices, appliances, and equipment shall be acceptable by the established standards of the Underwriters' Laboratories Inc., or other electrical product testing laboratories which are acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. A UL label is required. D. Execution: Make electrical connections in accordance with connector manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices, and complying with requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation" to ensure that products fulfill requirements. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. Coordinate installation of electrical connections for equipment with equipment installation work. Verify all electrical loads (voltage, phase, full load amperes, number and point of General Provisions 16010 -11 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility connections, minimum circuit ampacity, etc.) for equipment furnished under other divisions of this specification, by reviewing respective shop drawings furnished under each division. Meet with each subcontractor furnishing equipment requiring electrical service and review electrical characteristics. Report any variances from electrical characteristics noted on the electrical drawings to Architect before proceeding with rough work. Obtain and review the equipment shop drawings to determine particular final connection requirements before rough -in begins for each equipment item. 1.28 EQUIPMENT BASES AND FASTENING A. Housekeeping Bases: Provide appropriately sized concrete housekeeping bases for all floor- mounted equipment unless noted otherwise. Bases shall be 4" thick reinforced concrete with #4 rebar each way, 12" on center, doweled to floor slab and trowel finished with 1" bevel edge all around. B. Floor- Mounted Equipment Fastening: All floor- mounted equipment shall be secured to the housekeeping bases with ductile steel anchor bolts, preset in the concrete base. Where vibration mounts are required, they shall be secured to the concrete bases and in addition, the equipment restrained whereby the equipment is free to vibrate but cannot move from the base. C. Wall- Mounted Equipment Fastening: All flush- or surface- mounted equipment, such as panelboards, cabinets and other wall- mounted equipment, shall be rigidly secured to the structure or, in the case of concrete or masonry construction, secured with expanding type anchors. 1.29 ANCHORAGE AND BRACING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. General: Provide complete seismic anchorage and bracing for the lateral and vertical support of conduit and electrical equipment as required by Section 2312 of the Uniform Building Code and local codes and ordinances B. Conduit Crossing Structural Separations: Conduit that cross structured separations between buildings or building units shall be installed with flexible connections, suitable to accommodate longitudinal and transverse displacements. C. Anchorage of Equipment: All mechanical and electrical equipment shall be braced or anchored to resist a horizontal force acting in any direction using the following criteria: Fixed equipment Flexibly mounted equipment Communication equipment and Emergency power equipment Simultaneous vertical force 50% of operating weight 100% of operating weight 100% of operating weight Use 1/3 x horizontal force D. All anchorage and bracing must be designed by a licensed structural engineer and submitted to the project structural engineer for review and approval. The Contractor shall pay all costs. 1.30 EARTHWORK General Provisions 16010 -12 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility A. Scope: Do all earthwork required for installation of the underground electrical work. B. Existing Utilities: Prior to performing any excavation, Contractor shall establish all existing utilities in area. C. Lines and Grades: Contractor shall have surveying crew set all lines and grade stakes and do all other surveying required for the work. D. Excavation shall be done as necessary for the installation of all work in the ground. Care shall be taken to prevent damage to lawn and planted areas in and adjacent to the excavation. If damaged, Contractor shall replace damaged areas similar to existing before excavation occurred. E. Bracing and Shoring: Provide where the depth of excavation of the character of the soil make it necessary for protection of workmen; shall conform with local and state safety laws and regulations. F. Temporary Pumping Equipment: Provide to keep the excavation free from water during the progress of the work. G. Backfill and Compaction in Nonpaved Areas: Backfill shall be provided for excavated areas after testing and inspection, done in layers not to exceed 6 ", each thoroughly machine compacted. Backfill material shall be only clean earth, suitable for fill and compaction. The top 6" shall be top soil in planting areas. H. Backfill and Compaction in Paved Areas: Trenches across roadways or other areas to be paved shall be backfilled in 6" layers with each layer moistened and compacted to a density at least equal to that of the surrounding earth so that paving of the area can proceed immediately after backfilling is completed. I. Sod Removal and Replacement: Where excavation is routed through a lawn area, the Contractor shall carefully cut, remove and store sod. Extreme care shall be taken not to damage adjacent lawn areas. Backfill shall be accomplished as specified above, except that the top 6" of backfill shall be clean top soil free of stones larger than 3/4 ". Top of backfill shall be regressed as required to permit replacement of sod with top of sod exactly level with adjacent surfaces. The removal, storage and replacement of sod shall be accomplished by a skilled professional landscape firm. While in storage sod will be kept moist, in good condition. J. Patching and Paving: All existing paving, including curbs, which are cut shall be patched to match the original installation. Where sidewalks or curbs are cut, paving shall be removed to the nearest construction joint and patched. Patching of all sidewalks and roads shall comply with the Standard Specifications of the authority having jurisdiction. K. Surplus Earth: Remove from the site. L. After excavation, ducts and /or manholes shall be installed as quickly as possible and the excavation backfilled in order to reduce hazards. Barricades, construction signs, battery operated flashing lights and guards, as required, shall be placed and maintained during General Provisions 16010 -13 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility the progress of the construction to protect persons from i jury and to avoid property damage. 1.31 EXISTING UNDERGROUND UTILITIES A. Scope: Contractor shall verify, before excavation, the lo which are in path of new construction. All work adjacent accomplished with care. A designated representative of power company where he can be contacted in any emer B. Deviations of duct runs, to avoid conflict with existing utili Engineer; such changes of work, resulting in the same q shall not entitle the Contractor to any claim for an additio ation of all existing utilities o these utilities shall be he Contractor shall advise the ency. ies, shall be verified with antities of trenching material, to his contract. C. Damage to Existing Utilities: This Contractor shall be re - ponsible for any damage done to existing utility installations during the course of his wo ; shall replace all damaged installations to the satisfaction of the utility or agency inv• Ived, at the expense of the Contractor. 1.32 PROJECT FINALIZATION AND START UP A. Upon completion of equipment and system installation, a representatives and subcontractors for system start up. B. Each representative and subcontractor shall assist in sta respective system and remain at the site until the total s the Owner's Representative. C. The factory representative and /or system subcontractor on operating and maintenance of their equipment to the operation personnel. To certify acceptance of operation Representative, the Contractor shall prepare a written st semble all equipment factory up and check out their tem operation is accepted by hall give personal instruction wner's maintenance and /or nd instruction by the Owner's tement as follows: This is to certify that the factory representative an system subcontractor for each of the systems listed below have performed start p and final checkout of their respective systems. The Owner's Representative has received comple e and thorough instruction in the operation and maintenance of each system. System Facto re • res = ntative (List systems included) (List name and - ddress of factory represe tative) Owner's Representative Contractor D. Send copy of acceptance to the Engineer. 1.33 TESTS General Provisions 16010 -14 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility A. The Contractor shall fully test and adjust the equipment installed under this specification and demonstrate its proper operation to the Engineer. No equipment shall be tested or operated for any other purpose, such as checking motor rotation, until it has been fully checked in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Testing and adjustment shall be accomplished prior to employee instruction above. Test report for each system or component shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Where specified, certified test reports shall be submitted by certified service organizations representing the system or equipment involved. All test reports shall be included in maintenance manuals. 1.34 FINAL REVIEW A. At the time of final review, the project foreman shall accompany the reviewing party, and remove cover plates, panel covers and other access panels as requested, to allow review of the entire electrical system. 1.35 GUARANTEE A. Ensure that electrical system installed under this Contract is in proper working order and in compliance with drawings, specifications, and /or authorized changes. Without additional charge, replace any work or materials which develop defect, except from ordinary wear and tear, within one year from the date of substantial completion. Exception: Incandescent and fluorescent lamps shall be guaranteed for their normal Tamp life as published by the lamp manufacturer. 1.36 CLEAN AND TOUCH UP EQUIPMENT A. Clean up all equipment to factory condition. Use touch -up paint where required. Remove all packing cartons and other debris that is a direct result of the installation of the work of this Division. B. Clean light fixtures, interiors and exteriors of all equipment. All cleaning shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Vacuum the interior of all switchboards, panelboards, cabinets, and dry type transformers. Wipe down to remove dust and dirt. 1.37 SITE CLEAN UP A. Contractor shall remove from site all waste and rubbish resulting from the work. Site shall be kept clean on a day -to -day basis. 1.38 STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS A. Provide a secure storage space for storage of materials and apparatus and assume complete responsibility for all losses and damage. Protect completed work, work underway, and apparatus against loss or damage. 1.39 EXISTING AND REMODELLED CONSTRUCTION General Provisions 16010 -15 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility A. Continuity of Service to and in Existing Buildings: 1. Continuity of Service: This Contractor shall permanently reroute or relocate existing wiring and /or equipment which is in conflict with existing building alterations and which is required to be maintained in use. B. Rerouting of Existing Wiring: 1. This Contractor shall reroute, relocate all existing electrical work which is in conflict with building alterations and new construction and which is required to be maintained in use. This work shall include exterior as well as interior work. 2. Existing Conduit and Wiring To Be Reused: In areas of building that have alterations, existing conduit and wiring, where applicable, may be reused in their original location. No existing conduit or wiring which is once removed may be reused. Any existing wiring found during the course of construction to have deteriorating insulation shall be replaced with new. 3. Unused Conduit and Wiring: All unused conductors in existing building shall be removed. All unused conduit shall be removed except where located in or above existing construction which is not being altered and would require removal and replacement of the existing construction. C. Demolition: In the areas of the project which are having alterations, the Electrical Contractor shall remove or modify the existing electrical installation as required by the alterations. Contractor shall be responsible for de- energizing circuits in demolition areas to ensure a safe condition. Existing material which is not to be reused or is not requested to be retained by the Owner shall be removed from the site and become the property of the Contractor for salvage. D. All existing equipment left remaining shall be maintained in service. When encountered in work, whether shown on the drawings or not, protect, brace and support existing items. If existing active electrical services are encountered that require relocation in order to execute general, electrical, or mechanical work, relocate services as required as directed without additional cost to the Owner. Any equipment which is not specifically indicated for removal or is not shown or noted shall remain in service.. 1.40 CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Provide construction coordination drawings for all areas requiring close coordination with other trades and the general construction. Upon review and approval by the Engineer, electrical work that is fully coordinated and that can be installed without detailed coordination drawings will not require the drawings. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to work out and coordinate all conflicts, and to provide all offsets and special fittings required to facilitate installation of work. Failure to provide the drawings, when required, shall be considered non - performance and progress payments will be suspended until the drawings are reviewed and accepted. General Provisions 16010 -16 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility B. Prior to installation, where conflicts can not be worked out due to space restrictions, and where Contract modifications are required, the Contractor shall notify the Owner and obtain written instructions. C. The construction coordination drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for review prior to commencement of any related work. Drawings shall be executed on sheets sized the same as the Contract Documents, and shall be reproducible mylar, either hand drafted or produced on a CAD. Drafting shall be the same quality as the Contract Documents. D. The construction coordination drawings shall show all related trades, structure, and ceilings, walls, and partitions. Provide cross sections of all congested areas. E. The construction coordination drawings shall be continuously up -dated during the execution of the work. The drawings shall be submitted at the completion of the project for record purposes. 1.41 PAINTING A. Painting of the electrical work shall be performed by the General Contractor and shall not be included in the electrical work, unless specified otherwise. 1. Equipment painted at factory shall not be repainted unless specified otherwise. 2. Equipment exposed in finished areas such as panelboards, cabinets, surface raceway, etc. shall be painted to match color of adjacent walls. 1.42 SCHEDULE OF VALUES General Provisions 16010 -17 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility A. This Contractor shall furnish the Engineer a breakdown of the Electrical Contract within 10 days of the notice to proceed with the work. The breakdown shall be as follows: 1. Miscellaneous Overhead Expenses 2. Switchgear and Panelboard and Similar Distribution Equipment 3. Switchgear and Panelboard and Similar Distribution Labor 4. Feeder Conduit and Wire 5. Feeder Labor 6. Branch Circuit Conduit, Wire, and Devices 7. Branch Circuit Labor 8. Lighting Fixtures 9. Lighting Labor 10. Fire Alarm System Components 11. Fire Alarm System Labor 12. UPS System 13. UPS Labor 14. Generator Components 15. Generator Labor 16. Telephone and LAN Data Components 17. Telephone and LAN Data Labor 18. Intercom Data Components 19. Intercom Labor 20. Interior Grounding Components 21. Interior Grounding Labor 22. Exterior Grounding Components General Provisions 16010 -18 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 23. Exterior Grounding Labor 24. Security System Components 25. Security System Labor 26. Water Alarm System Components 27. Water Alarm Labor 28. Lightning System Components 29. Lightning System Labor 30. Demolition - Materials and Labor 31. Equipment Connections - Materials and Labor 32. Project Closeout END OF SECTION General Provisions 16010 -19 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 16111 CONDUIT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Rigid metal conduit and fittings. B. Electrical metallic tubing and fittings. C. Flexible metal conduit and fittings. D. Liquid -tight flexible metal conduit and fittings. E. Non - metallic conduit and fittings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc - Coated. B. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc - Coated. C. ANSI /NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. D. FS WW -C -563 - Electrical Metallic Tubing. E. FS WW -C -566 - Specification for Flexible Metal Conduit. F. FS WW -C -581 - Specification for Galvanized Rigid Conduit. G. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RIGID METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1 B. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: ANSI C80.5 C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI /NEMA FB 1; threaded type, material to match conduit. 2.02 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) AND FITTINGS Conduit 16111 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility A. EMT: ANSI C80.3. galvanized tubing. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI /NEMA FB 1; steel set screw or steel compression type. 2.03 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Conduit: steel. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI /NEMA FB 1 2.04 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Conduit: Flexible metal conduit with PVC jacket. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI /NEMA FB 1. 2.05 PLASTIC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Conduit: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3. 2.06 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Conduit Clamps, Straps, and Supports: Steel or malleable iron. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUIT SIZING, ARRANGEMENT, AND SUPPORT A. Size conduit for conductor type installed. B. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present a neat appearance. C. Route exposed and concealed conduit parallel and perpendicular to structure. D. Maintain minimum 6 inch minimum clearance between conduit and other piping. Maintain 12 inch minimum clearance between conduit and heat sources such as flues, steam pipes, and heating appliances. The ambient air temperature and the temperature of the conductor shall not exceed code requirements. Conduit E. Arrange conduit supports to prevent distortion of alignment by wire pulling operations. Fasten conduit using galvanized straps, lay -in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, or bolted split stamped galvanized hangers. 16111 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility F. Group conduit in parallel runs where practical and use conduit rack constructed of steel channel with conduit straps or clamps. Provide space for 25 percent additional conduit. G. Do not fasten conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove all wire used for temporary conduit support during construction, before conductors are pulled. H. Support conduit as required by code. I. Ceiling support wires shall not be used for support of conduits. J. Individual conduits shall be secured with steel pipe straps or lay -in pipe hangers. K. Multiple rows of suspended conduit shall be supported from trapeze style hangers. L. Multiple runs of conduit on ceiling or wall surfaces shall be mounted on flush or surface mounted steel channels. M. Rigid Steel Conduit: 1. Malleable iron spacers (clamp backs) shall be provided when surface mounted. 2. Provide malleable iron pipe straps. 3.02 CONDUIT INSTALLATION A. Cut conduit square using a saw or pipecutter; de -burr cut ends. B. Bring conduit to the shoulder of fittings and couplings and fasten securely. C. Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts for fastening conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp or wet locations. D. Install no more than the equivalent of four 90- degree bends between boxes, except conduits used for fiber optic cabling where the maximum number shall be reduced to three 90- degree bends total. E. Conduits shall be installed in a uniformly spaced manner which is level and plumb. F. Conduits shall be installed parallel with or at right angles to the building lines, and not installed diagonally, unless distance is Tess then 36" measure along the diagonal. G. Minor changes in the location of raceways from those shown on the drawings shall be made without extra charge if so directed by the Architect before installation. Conduit H. For conduits one inch and larger, hickey bends are not acceptable. Either manufactured elbows or bends fabricated in a bending machine must be used. 16111 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility I. Where a conduit enters a box or other fitting through a knockout, an approved double locknut and insulating bushing shall be provided. All conduits shall be equipped with insulating bushing at all outlet, pull boxes, panels, etc. J. Flexible conduit connections to motors shall be limited to one 90 degree bend. K. All conduit shall be cleaned by pulling a swab through the conduit before pulling in wires. L. Branch raceway runs are shown diagrammatically. Except where exact routing is indicated, branch raceways may be grouped, the actual routing of the branch circuit raceways may be altered, provided that actual locations are properly indicated on the record drawings. M. Conduit connections between outlet boxes Tess than 24" apart on opposite sides of a wall shall be made with a loop of flexible conduit (no nipples). N. Seal around all conduits at ceiling, floor, wall penetrations to provide airtight seal. 0. Provide roof jack at all roof penetrations. Coordinate roof jack type and installation with General Contractor. Equipment shall be compatible with required roof guarantee. P. Where conduits runs are 100 feet in total length, or longer, or contain more than 360 degree worth of bends, pull /junction boxes shall be provided. Indicate these pull box locations on the record drawings. Q. All spare conduits shall be provided with a Greenlee #431 pull string with tag denoting the "to" and "from" locations of conduit. Raceways larger than 2" shall be provided with a' /4' poly pull line. R. Minimum conduit size to be 1/2" except underground conduits which shall be a minimum of'/ ". S. All offsets shall be made from one contiguous piece. Cut sweeps will not be allowed for offset creation. T. Use hydraulic one -shot conduit bender or factory elbows for bends in conduit larger than 2 inch size. U. Avoid moisture traps where possible; where unavoidable, provide junction box with drain fitting at conduit low point. V. Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. W. Provide No. 12 AWG insulated conductor or Greenlee #431 pull string in empty conduit, except sleeves and nipples. Conduit 16111 -4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility X. Install expansion - deflection joints where conduit crosses building expansion or seismic joints. Other areas requiring expansion- deflection joints are areas under generator and other such vibrative equipment. Locations requiring such joints are generally not shown on the plans. It is the Contractor's responsibility to field verify all areas that may require such joints and include them in his bid estimate. Y. Where conduit penetrates fire -rated walls and floors, provide mechanical fire -stop fittings with UL listed fire rating equal to wall or floor rating. Reference Division -1 documents for fire stopping methods s and materials. Z. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible; otherwise, route through roof jack with pitch pocket. Provide a detail of the roof penetration for approval prior to installation. All roof jacks shall be compatible with the roofing manufacturer's approved methods and materials. AA. Conduit in slabs and structure shall be approved by the structural engineer. BB. Use PVC - coated rigid steel factory elbows for bends in plastic conduit runs. CC. Wipe plastic conduit clean and dry before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area that will be inserted into fitting. Let joint cure for 20 minutes minimum. DD. Nonmetallic conduit shall not be used inside a building unless encased in 2" of concrete or the installation requires corrosion protection. Where corrosion requirements a paramount, PVC coated rigid steel conduit shall be used. EE. Where installation of conduits occur in washdown areas, all conduits shall be spaced away from walls to prevent water build -up. FF. Locate conduits so that the strength of structural members is not comprised. Where conduits penetrate building members, coordinate locations with piping and ductwork installers. Obtain approval from Owner's representative before drilling through reinforced beams, columns, or other structural members. GG. Conduits installed in concrete or underground shall have manufactured raceway closures installed immediately after installation to prevent foreign object from entering raceway system. Closures shall stay in place until conductors are pulled. HH. Internally seal conduits which penetrate floors, roofs, or insulated walls with an approved putty -like material to prevent the migration of moisture due to temperature differences. II. Where cables and conduits penetrate fire -rated walls and floors, such penetrations shall be sealed with a fire rating equal to the wall of floor rating. Penetrations by cables shall be done using a length of metallic conduit such that two feet of conduit emerges from each side of the rated wall or floor and conduit shall be sealed with fire -stop putty or compound. Conduit 16111 -5 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility JJ. Install seals in all conduits at the boundaries between Class I, Div. I areas, Class I, Div. areas, and unclassified areas. Cluster all seals for a conduit group in a single area so t is easy to see that all raceways have seal fittings. KK. Arrange conduits to maintain headroom and present a neat appearance. LL. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. MM. Provide buried conduits with large- radius sweeps. 3.03 UNDERGROUND DUCTBANK INSTALLATION A. Install top of duct bank minimum 36 inches below finished grade. Provide marker tape not more than 12" below grade centered on ductbank. B. Install conduit with minimum grade of 4 inches per 100 feet. C. erminate conduit in end bell at manhole entries. D. Use suitable separators and chairs installed not greater than 4 feet (1.2 m) on centers. Band conduit together with suitable banding devices. Securely anchor conduit to prevent movement during concrete placement. 3.04 CONDUIT INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Underground Installations: Rigid steel conduit or Schedule 40 plastic conduit where noted. B. In Slab Above Grade: Rigid steel conduit or Schedule 40 plastic conduit where noted. C. Exposed Outdoor Locations: Rigid steel conduit. D. Wet Interior Locations: Rigid steel conduit. E. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, lectrical meta!lic tubing. x osed Dry Locations: p ry ations: Rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing. G. Do not install aluminum conduit in concrete or underground. Conduit END OF SECTION 16111 -6 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 16112 SURFACE RACEWAYS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Surface metal raceways. B. Multi- outlet assemblies. C. Auxiliary gutters (wireways). 1.02 REFERENCES A. FS W -C -582 - Conduit, Raceway, Metal, and Fitting; Surface. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data. B. Include product data for surface metal raceways, multi - outlet assemblies, auxiliary gutters, and accessories. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - SURFACE METAL RACEWAYS A. Wiremoid Company. B. Airey Thompson C. !so Duct. 2.02 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY A. Surface Metal Raceway: sheet metal channel with fitted cover, suitable for use as surface metal raceway B. Size: As shown on Drawing. C. Fittings: Couplings, elbows, and connectors designed forr use with raceway system. D. Boxes and extension rings: Designed for use with raceway systems. Surface Raceways 16112-1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 2.03 AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Auxiliary Gutters: General purpose type wireway without knockouts. B. Size: Size as noted on plans; length as indicated on Drawings. C. Cover: Screw applied cover. D. Connector: screw applied cover. E. Fittings: Lay -in type. F. Finish: Rust inhibiting primer coat with gray enamel finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - SURFACE METAL RACEWAY AND MULTI- OUTLET ASSEMBLY A. Use flat head screws to fasten channel to surfaces. Mount plumb and level. B. Use suitable insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings. C. Maintain grounding continuity between raceway components to provide a continuous grounding path. D. Fastener Option: Use clips and straps suitable for the purpose. 3.02 INSTALLATION - AUXILIARY GUTTER A. Bolt auxiliary gutter to wall using two -piece hangers. Install level. B. Gasket each joint in oil -tight gutter. C. Mount raintight gutter in horizontal position only. Surface Raceways END OF SECTION 1 611 2-2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 16118 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND MANHOLES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Trenching, backfilling, and installation of underground conduits. 1.02 CODE REQUIREMENTS AND STANDARDS A. Standards: 1. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 6 -1981 Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit (R1983) 543 -1982 Impregnated Fiber Conduit 651 -1981 Schedule 40 & 80 PVC Conduit (R1985) 1242 —1983 Intermediate Metal Conduit B. Applicable NEMA, ANSI, and IEEE standards 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's data: 1. Conduit 2. Precast Handholes 3. Interlocking Duct Spacers 1.04 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. Work will be performed in accord with the safety requirements of Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Volume 36, Number 105, Part II, Subpart P, "Excavations, Trenching, and Shoring," and with Section 7 of the Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction as published by the Association General Contractors of America, Inc. B. The Contractor shall comply with federal, state, and local safety codes and regulations and is responsible for educating his supervisors and employees of the safety requirements and practices to be followed during the course of his work. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUITS Underground Ducts and Manholes 16118 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility A. Conduit materials shall be as detailed on the drawings. Where not specified, use metallic above and underground. B. Metallic Conduit - Above and underground where shown: 1. Provide galvanized rigid steel (GRS). C. Nonmetallic - Underground conduits only: 1. Concrete - encased: Provide PVC, ABS, or fibre conduit, Type I, conforming to UL 651 or UL 543. 2. Direct - burial: Provide PVC, ABS, or fibre conduit, Type II, (heavy - wall), conforming to UL 651 or UL 543. D. All underground conduit shall be a minimum of one inches. 2.02 CONDUIT FITTINGS A. Steel Fittings: Provide zinc - coated, cast malleable, ferrous metal, threaded fittings, Appleton "Form 35 Unilets" or Crouse -Hinds "Form 7 Condulets." Provide a neoprene cover gasket on each fitting installed outdoors. B. "Mogul Fittings ": Provide "Mogul" size fittings for all conduit. C. Seal Bushings: Provide O.Z. compound bushing on each conduit entering a building from outside underground on each conduit passing from one space into another, which is normally at a lower temperature. D. Hubs: Provide Appleton "Hub" or "Hub -U" series of Thomas & Betts "370" series hub on each conduit terminating in a box where a hub was not previously provided. E. Unions: Where conduit unions are necessary, provide Appleton Type "EC" or Thomas & Betts "Erickson Coupling." F. Provide PVC fittings for PVC conduit and suitable water -tight connections where PVC conduit connects to galvanized steel conduit. 2.03 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Duct Spacers: Provide high density polyethylene interlocking concrete - encased conduit spacers to maintain spacing. In no case shall spacing be Tess than 3" between ducts. B. Terminal Fittings: Type I, with standard end bells. Underground Ducts and Manholes 16118 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 2.04 MANHOLES A. Precast Manholes: Provide with the following standard features: 1. Cover shall include inserts to facilitate lifting, and hinged galvanized steel access door, not less than 24" square, with provision for lifting and locking. 2. Where located in a roadway, covers shall support H2O loading. All others shall be for H10 loading. 3. For manholes greater than five feet in depth, provide steel ladder. 4. Horizontal inserts in walls, approximately midway between floor and ceiling, to provide a means of attachment for cable support brackets. (Unistrut P -1000 or equal) 5. Drain holes in floor, at least two, minimum two inch diameter except where drawings show an internal sump and pump. 6. Knockouts in sides of adequate number and spacing to accommodate duct banks shown. B. Cast -in -Place Manholes: Provide manholes constructed per Section 3.04 using the following: 1. Covers shall include a hinged galvanized steel access hatch at least 24" square, with provisions for lifting and locking. 2. Horizontal inserts shall be Unistrut P -1000 or equal, galvanized or zinc - chromated steel. C. All manhole hardware, including covers, ladders, steps, pulling hardware, and insets for conduit or raceway supports, shall be prefabricated for the intended purpose and use. 2.05 HANDHOLES A. Provide precast concrete or structural plastic handholes in accordance with the drawings, with the following standard features: 1. Cover shall include insert or other device to facilitate lifting. 2. Cover shall contain locking device similar to REA or FARGO. 3. Drainhole in base, at least two inches diameter. Underground Ducts and Manholes 16118 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 4. Knockouts in sides of adequate number and spacing to accommodate duct bank shown. 5. Underground enclosures shall be "Carlon Composolite" nonconcrete or approved equal. Enclosures shall be composed of reinforced plastic mortar and be designed and tested to temperatures of -50 °F and meet ASTM D-635 flammability test. 2.06 CONCRETE A. Material: Provide as follows: 1. Gravel shall not exceed 3/8 ". 2. Slump shall not exceed four inches maximum. 3. Compressive strength: 3,000 psi at 28 days. 4. All duct bank concrete shall be dyed red. B. Reinforcing: Provide reinforcing steel in ducts and manholes in accordance with 3.03B2 and as shown on drawings. Steel shall conform to ASTM A15, with deformations conforming to ASTM A305. 2.07 CONTROLLED DENSITY FILL A. Provide Class 300 CDF. It shall have a compressive strength at 28 days of 300 psi (_ 100 psi, -50 psi). Maximum density 130 pcf. The minimum shall be proportional so that the material is machine excavatable after Tong -term strength gain. 2.08 BACKFILL MATERIAL A. Lower Trench Portion (surrounding duct bank): Shall consist of sandy silt, clay silt, sand clay, or other approved materials free from stones and conglomerates larger than two inches. B. Upper Trench Portion: One foot above duct bank up to grade shall be on -site backfill material consisting of rock, soil, or soil -rock mixture containing no rocks or lumps over six inches. 2.09 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Materials required but not specified for proper completion of the work of this section to. be selected by the Contractor, subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative. PART 3 EXECUTION Underground Ducts and Manholes 16118 -4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 3.01 TRENCHING - PROVIDE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING: A. Depth: Excavate to bottom elevation of duct bank encasement, and correct points of over - excavation by returning trench to grade with mechanically- compacted backfill to form a smooth trench bottom. Trench to be of a depth to provide a minimum cover over the top of the conduit duct bank of 24 ". B. Width: Excavate to minimum width consistent with stability of sides. C. Slope: All ducts shall be sloped to drain to a manhole, or other suitable sump, and minimum continuous slope shall be 0.25 percent. The rate of change of grade shall not exceed one inch in ten feet. D. Muck Excavation: Where muck or unstable material is encountered, over - excavate as required and backfill to attain proper grade with coarse sand, gravel, or CDF (controlled density fill). E. Rock Excavations: Where rock pad is used for conduit trench, over - excavate six inches below the conduit duct banks, and refill and compact with selected backfill material of same composition. Where rock is encountered, carry the excavation 6" below the noted elevation and backfill with a 6 ": layer of sand prior to installing raceway. F. Materials suitable for backfilling to be piled in an orderly manner; a sufficient distance from the banks for the trench to avoid overloading. G. Bedding: The entire bottom of the excavation is to be firm, stable, and at a uniform density. H. Exercise extreme care while excavating in the area of existing utilities. Check carefully for the location of all possible utilities, whether shown on the drawings or not, and establish the location of all cutoff valves and switches for ready shutoff in case of emergency. This Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to any utility caused by him in excavation, as well as damage to personnel and property caused by said damaged utilities. I. Refinishing of streets, walks, paved areas, lawns, curbs, and fences removed or damaged by the excavation shall be done by this Contractor to the satisfaction of the Architect. 3.02 EXCAVATING FOR MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES A. Sufficient to leave 12" minimum clearance between outer surfaces and embankment or timber used for shoring. 3.03 CONDUIT INSTALLATION A. General: According to Section 16111 and as follows: Underground Ducts and Manholes 16118 -5 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 1. Use only factory- manufactured elbow bends for 30 °, 45 °, 60 °, and 90 °. 2. Field bends shall not be larger than 20 °. 3. Conduits to be installed and sized as indicated on drawings. B. Conduit Duct Banks - Concrete (or Controlled Density Fill [CDF]) Encased: 1. Minimum spacing of three inches with three inch minimum covering. 2. Number 4 reinforcing bars at a maximum spacing of 12" to provide duct bank strengthening. 3. Anchor ducts so as to prevent flotation when concrete is poured. 4. Provide interlocking supports at intervals of eight feet maximum. C. Conduit Duct Banks - Direct Buried 1. Bury conduit 36" minimum (unless otherwise noted by drawings) in sand slurry backfill (four inches above and below conduit). D. Conduit Terminations:, 1. Conduits terminating above grade from duct banks shall be stubbed up two feet and capped. 2. Conduits terminating in concrete pads shall have conduit couplings installed flush with the top of the pad and an eight inch nipple extended from the couplings above the pad. The nipple shall be capped. 3. Conduits terminating in electrical manholes shall have end bells installed to protect cable. 4. All conduit duct bank terminations shall be galvanized rigid steel from the last elbow before coming above grade and the two feet preceding the elbow. Conduit shall also be rigid steel a minimum two feet before entering manholes. 5. Conduits terminating in duct banks below grade shall be stubbed two feet from bank and capped. Location of stubs shall be clearly identified on as -built drawings and shall be marked in field with red stake driven at least two feet below grade. E. MANHOLE AND HANDHOLE INSTALLATION 1. Precast Manholes: Located as shown on drawings and as follows: Underground Ducts and Manholes 16118 -6 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility a. Provide at least two feet of gravel under each manhole to facilitate drainage. b. Install cable support brackets at two feet intervals. 2. Cast -in -Place Manholes: Provide manholes with dimensions as shown on drawings, including the following features: a. Manhole cover shall be reinforced concrete or cast iron. Where located in a roadway, cover shall be suitable for H2O loading. All others shall be for H10 loading. b. Manhole walls and floors shall be reinforced in accordance with details shown on drawings. c. Manhole floor shall have at least two holes for drainage, two inches minimum diameter, except where drawings show an internal sump and pump. d. Where manholes have drain holes in the bottom, provide at least two feet of gravel under manhole to facilitate drainage. e. Provide 4" drain line from manholes to sump, storm sewer, or as directed. 3. Handholes: Locate as shown on drawings and provide drainline to sump or drywell outside building foundation. 3.04 CONCRETE OR CDF INSTALLATION A. Cover: Provide at least four inches of concrete or CDF between conduits and surrounding earth. B. Placement: When conduit installation has been approved, pour as follows: 1. Hold length of fall to five feet or Tess. 2. Divert flow away from trench sides to minimize dislodgment of soil and stones. 3. Place from bottom to top, and from end to end in a continuous pour. Construction joints may be permitted at approved locations. 4. Use a mechanical vibrator wherever practical, not exceeding one inch diameter, to density concrete. Not required for CDF. 3.05 BACKFILLING Underground Ducts and Manholes 16118 -7 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility A. Backfill shall be deposited in layers and compacted with suitable tampers to the density of adjacent soil. B. Backfilling shall not be done until all necessary inspections and tests are performed and until the conduit base banks conform to the requirements specified. C. All debris, rocks, broken concrete formwork, etc., is to be removed from the trench and backfill material prior to the start of backfilling operations. D. Backfill material is to be placed in the trench in such a manner so as not to disturb the alignment of the conduit duct bank. E. Backfill material shall be uniformly spread and uniformly compacted. F. Whenever the trenches have not been properly filled, or if settlement occurs, they shall be refilled, compacted, smoothed off, and finally made to conform to the surface of the ground. 3.06 CLEANING A. All conduits must have a swab pulled through to verify cleanliness. B. All manholes and handholes must be cleaned. END OF SECTION Underground Ducts and Manholes 16118 -8 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. SECTION 1:121 600 VOLT OR LESS WI ' E AND CABLE (COPPER 0 LY) PART1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Building wire. B. Cable. C. Wiring connections and terminations. D. Modular wiring system. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NEMA WC 3 - Rubber - Insulated Wire an Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. B. NEMA WC 5 - Thermoplastic - Insulated ire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. C. NEMA WC 7 - Cross - Linked Thermosetti g Polyethylene insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Elec rical Energy. D. NEMA WC 8 - Ethylene - Propolene -Rubb r Insulated Wire and Cable. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data. B. Submit shop drawings for modular wiring system including layout of distribution devices, P 9 9 branch circuit conduit and cables, circuiti g arrangement, and outlet devices. C. Submit manufacturer's instructions•and r: commendations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BUILDING WIRE A. Thermoplastic- insulated Building Wire: N MA WC5. B. Rubber - insulated Building Wire: NEMA C3. C. Feeders and Branch Circuits Larger than 10 AWG: 75 degree C, copper, stranded conductor, 600 -volt insulation, THW, TH N/THWN, XHHW. 600 Volt or Less Wire and Cable 16121 -1 07/07/98 Tukwila Switch Facility Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility D. Feeders and Branch Circuits 10 AWG and Smaller: 75 degree C, copper solid conductor, 600 -volt insulation, THW, THHN/THWN, XHHW. E. Control Circuits: Copper, stranded conductor 600 -volt insulation, THW, THHN/THWN. 2.02 REMOTE CONTROL AND SIGNAL CABLE A. Control Cable for Class 1 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper conductor, 600 - volt insulation, rated 60 degree C, individual conductors twisted together, shielded,]and covered with a PVC jacket. B. Control Cable for Class 2 or Class 3 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper conductor, 300 -volt insulation, rated 60 degree C, individual conductors twisted together , shielded, and covered with a PVC jacket; UL listed. C. Plenum Cable for Class 2 or Class 3 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper conductor, 300 -volt insulation, rated 60 degree C, UL listed for use in air handling ducts, hollow spaces used as ducts, and plenums. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL WIRING METHODS A. Use no wire smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits, and no smaller than 14 AWG for control wiring. B. Use 10 AWG conductor for 20 ampere, 120 -volt branch circuit home runs longer than 75 feet, and for 20 ampere, 277 -volt branch circuit home runs longer than 200 feet. C. Place an equal number of conductors for each phase of a circuit in same raceway or cable. D. Splice only in junction or outlet boxes. E. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. F. Make conductor lengths for parallel circuits equal. G. Wire insulation shall be UL listed for the application, i.e. Wet, Dry, Underground, Temperature, and other environmental considerations. H. All receptacle circuits shall have separate neutrals. No shared neutrals will be allowed. Neutral conductor shall be considered as "current- carrying" for the pupose of applying NEC Table 310 -16, Note 8 for derating. I. Wiring shall be as arranged on the drawings. Combining of homeruns will not be allowed except as shown. 600 Volt or Less Wire and Cable 16121 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility J. Conductor length and raceway type for parallel feeders shall be identical as required by the NEC. 3.02 WIRING INSTALLATION IN RACEWAYS A. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use UL listed wire pulling lubricant for pulling 4 AWG and larger wires. B. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors. 3.03 SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATION CABLE INSTALLATION A. Provide protection for exposed cables where subject to damage. B. Use plastic cable ties to support cables. C. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. D. All cables must be supported for their entire length. Support at 5 feet on center minimum. 3.04 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS A. Splice only in accessible junction boxes. B. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper wire splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller. For 10 AWG and smaller, use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps. C. Use split bolt connectors for copper wire splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of the insulation value of conductor. D. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors. E. Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors without perceptible temperature rise. F. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape. 3.05 ALUMINUM WIRE A. Aluminum wire will not be accepted. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform megger tests on all conductors #2 AWG and larger. 600 Volt or Less Wire and Cable 16121 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility B. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection. C. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to manufacturer's recommended values. D. Perform continuity test on all power and equipment branch circuit conductors. Verify proper phasing connections. Refer to Section 16950. 3.07 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Exterior feeders and branch circuits: Cross - linked polyethylene. B. Interior Feeders #2 AWG and larger: Cross - linked polyethylene. C. Interior feeders smaller than #2 AWG and branch circuit wiring: Thermoplastic. 3.08 COLOR CODING A. Wiring shall conform to the color code following. Sizes #8 AWG and smaller shall be colored, #6 AWG and larger may be colored with plastic tape or sleeves of the appropriate color. Where used, this method of coding shall be incorporated in all junction boxes, switches, etc., that comprise the circuit. Description 208Y/120V 480Y/277V Phase A (Left) Black Brown Phase B (Center) Red Orange Phase C (Right) Blue Yellow Neutral White Gray Ground Green Green • END OF SECTION 600 Volt or Less Wire and Cable 16121 -4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 16130 BOXES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes. B. Floor boxes. C. Pull and junction boxes. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI /NEMA OS 1 - Sheet -Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports. B. ANSI /NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports. C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 OUTLET BOXES A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: ANSI /NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel, with 1/2 inch (13 mm) male fixture studs where required. B. Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes: ANSI /NEMA OS 2. 2.02 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sheet Metal Boxes: ANSI /NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel. B. Sheet Metal Boxes Larger than 12 inches (300 mm) in Any Dimension: Hinged enclosure in accordance with Section 16160. C. Fiberglass Handholes for Underground Installations: Die - molded with pre -cut 6 x 6 inch (150 x 150 mm) cable entrance at center bottom of each side; fiberglass weatherproof cover with non -skid finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION OF BOX LOCATIONS Boxes 16130 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility A. Provide electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and code compliance. B. Electrical box locations shown on Contract Drawings are approximate unless dimensioned. Verify location of floor boxes and outlets in offices and work areas prior to rough -in. C. Locate and install boxes to allow access. Where installation is inaccessible, coordinate locations and sizes of required access doors with Section 08305. D. Locate and install to maintain headroom and to present a neat appearance. E. Contractor shall consult the Architectural drawings for exact height of all outlets not specified herein or shown on the drawings. 3.02 OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION Boxes A. Do not install boxes back -to -back in walls. Provide minimum 6 inch (150 mm) separation, except provide minimum 24 inch (600 mm) separation in acoustic -rated walls. B. Locate boxes in masonry walls to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat openings for boxes. C. Provide knockout closures for unused openings. D. Support boxes independently of conduit. E. Use multiple -gang boxes where more than one device are mounted together; do not use sectional boxes. Provide barriers to separate wiring of different voltage systems. F. Install boxes in walls without damaging wall insulation. G. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. H. Position outlets to locate luminaries as shown on reflected ceiling plans. I. In accessible ceiling areas, position outlets and junction boxes within 6 inches (150 mm) of recessed luminaire, to be accessible through luminaire ceiling opening. J. Provide recessed outlet boxes in finished areas; secure boxes to interior wall and partition studs, accurately positioning to allow for surface finish thickness. Use stamped steel stud bridges for flush outlets in hollow stud wall, and adjustable steel channel fasteners for flush ceiling outlet boxes. K. Align wall- mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. 16130 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility L. Where two or more of the same type of device occur adjacent to each other, they shall be ganged. Where different type devices occur adjacent to each other, space outlet boxes so that finish plates will be spaced one inch apart (verify spacing requirement with Architect). M. Each ceiling outlet occurring in a suspended ceiling shall be supported from a bar hanger rigidly attached to ceiling support channels. N. All boxes shall be supported independently from the raceway system. O. All switch locations shall be located where shown, on strike side of door, and shall be 6" from the door casing, unless it is necessary to center switch between door and other construction for appearance. P. Where two or more outlets occur on the same wall, unless individually noted otherwise, they shall be mounted at exactly the same height. Q. Where outlets are shown side by side but at different heights, they shall be centered one above the other unless otherwise noted. R. Outlets which are shown immediately opposite one another on two sides of a wall shall have boxes sized to prevent contact between the two. Nipples between boxes are prohibited to prevent noise transmission between the two spaces. S. Outlets shown immediate opposite one another on two sides of a fire rated wall shall have 24" minimum horizontal separation. T. No outlet or group of outlets in a single stud space of a fire rated wall shall have a total opening area larger that 16 square inches. Where this occurs such as for panelboards the opening shall be lined to maintain the wall fire rating. U. Seal around all outlet boxes to seal spac between box and wall or ceiling materials. 3.03 FLOOR BOX INSTALLATION A. Set boxes level and flush with finish flooring material. B. Use cast iron floor boxes for installations in slab on grade. 3.04 PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION A. Locate pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings or in unfinished areas. B. Support pull and junction boxes independent of conduit. END OF SECTION Boxes 16130 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Wall switches. B. Receptacles. C. Device plates and box covers. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Federal Specifications 1. W -C -596 Electrical Power connector, Plug, Receptacle and Cable Outlet 2. W -S -896 Switch, Toggle B. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) 1. WD 1 General- purpose Wiring Devices 2. WD 2 Semiconductor Dimmers for Incandescent Lamps 3. WD 5 Specific Purpose Wiring Devices 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data. B. Provide product data showing configurations, finishes, dimensions, and manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Hubbell. B. Arrow Hart. C. Pass & Seymour. D. Leviton. 2.02 MATERIALS PASS & ARROW Wiring Devices 16140 -1 07/07/98 i Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility ITEM HUBBELL SYEMOUR HART LEVITION Duplex Receptacle 5252 5252 5252 5252 Isolated Ground IG -5262 IG -6200 IG -5262 52621 G Surge Suppression 5250 -S 6262 -SP — 5280 GFCI Receptacle GF -5252 1591 -F GF -8200 6598 Single Pole Switch 1221 20AC1 1991 1221 Three -Way Switch 1223 20AC3 1993 1223 Four -Way Switch 1224 20AC4 1994 1224 2.03 WALL SWITCHES A. Wall switches for Lighting Circuits and Motor Loads under 1/2 HP: NEMA WD 1 and FS W -S -896; AC general use snap switch with toggle handle, rated 20 amperes and 120- 277 volts AC. B. Color: Ivory. C. Pilot Light Type: Lighted handle type, on when switch is closed. D. Locator type: Lighting handle type, on when switch is open. 2.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - RECEPTACLES A. Hubbell. B. Arrow Hart. C. Pass & Seymour. D. Leviton. 2.05 RECEPTACLES A. Color: Ivory. B. Convenience and Straight -blade Receptacles: NEMA WD 1 and FS W -C -596. C. Locking Blade Receptacles: NEMA WD 5 D. Convenience Receptacle: NEMA 5 -15R and 5 -20R. 1. Rating: 125 -volt, 15 or 20 Ampere, 2 -pole, 3 -wire, grounding type. 2. Single piece grounding contacts and mounting strap, conductive material of brass or approved equal. 3. Line contacts shall be brass, triple wipe type. 4. Base and cover shall be wide frame construction, of high strength nylon or Wiring Devices 16140 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility approved equal. 5. Suitable for back and side wiring, with 8 -hole back wiring provisions. 6. Contact pressure for line and ground contacts shall be per UL requirements. 7. Available colors shall be brown, gray, ivory, or white. 8. Shall be Arrow Hart 5262 and 5362 Series, Hubbell 5252 and 5362 Series, or approved equal. E. Specific use receptacle configuration: NEMA WD 1 or WD 5; type as indicated on Draw- ings, black plastic face. F. GFCI Receptacles: Duplex convenience receptacle with integral ground fault current interrupter. Feed - through type unless otherwise noted. 2.06 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - WALL PLATES A. Hubbell. B. Pass & Seymour. C. Sierra. D. Arrow Hart. 2.07 WALL PLATES A. Finished Areas: Smooth unbreakable nylon or approved equal; same manufacturer as receptacle with color identical to devices. B. Unfinished Areas: Steel outlet box device cover, suitable for flush or surface mount. C. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with hinged gasketed device covers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install wall switches at 48 inches above floor to top of device, OFF position down. B. Install wall dimmers 48 inches above floor; derate ganged dimmers as instructed by manufacturer; do not use common neutral for lighting circuits. C. Install convenience receptacles 18 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. Install 10 inches above surface of counter -tops. Receptacles to have grounding hole down. D. Install specific -use receptacles at heights shown on Contract Drawings. Wiring Devices 16140 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility E. Install plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas, using extra large plates for outlets installed in masonry walls. Utilize washers if required to provide proper depth with respect to cover plate. Arrange with trades to patch and paint surfaces if not covered by plate. Install plates with an alignment tolerance of 1/16" to plumb. F. Unless otherwise noted devices are to be vertically mounted. G. Install galvanized steel plates on outlets boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface - mounted outlets. H. Install device and wall plates flush and level. I. Convenience Receptacles: J. A single receptacle on a 20 amp circuit shall be rated at 20 amps or more receptacles on a 20 amp circuit may be rated at 15 amps, unless noted otherwise. K. Receptacles for dedicated loads exceeding 15 amps shall be 20 amp rated. L. Coordinate the location of all wiring devices with the Owner's Representative prior to installation. M. Devices at counters, cabinets, millwork and casework shall be coordinated with the manufacturer /supplier as shown on the Division -1 documents and shall be verified with shop drawings prior to rough in. N. Finished plates and devices shall not be installed until after final painting is complete. Scratched or splatter finished plates and devices will not be accepted. O. The self grounding feature of receptacles shall not be used as the primary ground return. All receptacles shall have a green grounding conductor installed to the ground screw from the circuit grounding conductor. P. Mount devices securely to the outlet boxes. Q. Provide ground straps between each wiring device and its associated outlet box. R. Mount weatherproof receptacles vertically, up 18" from finished grade. S. All existing outlets noted on the drawings as being existing and reused shall have devices replaced with new. T. All exterior receptacles and receptacles within 6' -0" of sinks, toilets, etc. shall be GFCI type. U. Special outlets (anything other than 15 or 20 amp 120 volt receptacles) to be NEMA configuration and to be capacity voltage and phase as noted. Wiring Devices 16140 -4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility V. Contractor shall include in his bid ten additional duplex receptacles complete with outlet box,20 feet of conduit and wiring and plate to be provided in the project as directed by the Owner's representative. Submit a fair cost value for these devices and a blank log sheet along with the device submittals. W. Provide matching cord caps (plugs) for all special outlets. For existing or new equipment as served by special outlets or receptacles and provide and install 'SO' cords and plug on that equipment. X. In general, switches shall comply with NEC Article 380 and to be as noted, or accepted equal. END OF SECTION Wiring Devices 16140 -5 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 16150 MOTORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Work Included: 1. All motors shown on the drawings or specified in other divisions of the specifications shall, in general, be furnished with the driven equipment and connected under Division 16 of the specification. 2. If motors are specified in other divisions of the specification, and in the event of conflicts, the more restrictive specification shall apply. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. A. Standards of Manufacture and Installation (the most recent edition, revision, or amendment is referenced): 1. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL1004 Motors, Electric 2. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA) MGI -77,78 Motors and Generators 3. Applicable ANSI and IEEE Standards. 2.02 DISCONNECTS (MOTORS AND CIRCUITS) Motors A. Where shown on plans, required by the NEC or specified elsewhere herein, furnish and install externally operated safety switches in steel cabinets. B. Switches shall be fused type heavy duty 250 or 600 volt rated, or as noted, of capacity for size of motor or equipment indicated on the drawings. Disconnect switches shall be installed on all roof ventillating, exhaust fans and on all other motors as indicated. C. Fused safety switches shall be heavy duty type 2 or 3 pole and shall be provided with neutral connection block as required. 16150 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility D. In damp, wet or or exterior locations disconnects to be NEMA 3R. E. Where exhaust fans are switched with lights, provide a separate disconnect toggle switch at the fan. F. All fusible switches shall be equipped with non - renewable type fuses. G. Any snap switches used in lieu of a fused disconnect shall be motor rated and have overload protection in accordance with the NEC. 2.03 STARTERS Motors A. Non- Reversing Starters: reference Division 1, 15, and 16 drawings and specifications and provide all motor starters indicated by Division 16. Some starter are furnished as part of the start package of equipment specified under other divisions. Coordinate with these trades and make all required line voltage connections to starter equipment furnished by others. B. Combination starters are acceptable for locations where both the disconnecting means and starter are provided by Division 16. C. Motor starters provide by Division 16 shall be across - the -line, non - reversing, NEMA Size 1 (minimum) for motors up to 100 HP <600 volts. Starters shall be furnished with the following: D. Overloads: Three Overload Relays — overload shall be block -type with a push -to -test feature. Provisions for an isolated, field- mountable alarm contact shall be available. Starter shall provide for field installation of up to 3 NO and 4 NC auxiliary contacts in addition to the hold -in interlock. E. HOA Switch: Three position control switch for hand, off, and automatic (HOA) operation. F. NEMA enclosures rated for the enviroment where the equipment is to be installed. Verify locations with equipment supplier and /or Contractors. G. In addition to the above items combination starters shall be provide with the following features: H. Operating handle shall always remain connected to the breaker or switch. The operating handle shall not be mounted in the door of the enclosure, but to the side of the door for safe "stand- aside: operation. Position of the operating handled will indicate On, Off or Tripped condition off switch or circuit breaker. I. Interlock provisions shall prevent unauthorized opening or closing of the starter door with the disconnect in the On position. 16150 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility J. If a relay is permitted by the Engineer instead of a motor starter, then the relay shall be of sufficient size to handle the motor starting current and fused disconnect or motor rate switch with overload protection shall be provided. K. All locations of motor starting equipment furnished by Division 15, shall be coordinated with the supplier of the equipment and the Division 15 Contractor. L. Where the mechanical schedule as shown on the electrical prints indicate a device such as a disconnect, starter or other such device and the actual equipment does not require such device or is furnished with one, a credit to the Owner shall be offered. 2.04 MOTOR WIRING AND MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Provide power wiring including service to each unit, motor and or equipment and associated line voltage control wiring. B. Verify motor characteristic prior to installing wiring. Obtain catalog cuts for Division 15 Contractor prior to rough -in. Exact location of motor and connection will e ascertained before installation of conduit. A liquid -tight flexible conduit connection with grounding wire, a minimum length of 30 times the diameter of the conduit, or length to comply with vibration requirements, shall be provided at each motor or vibrative piece of equipment. C. Prior to energizing any motor or mechanical equipment circuit notify the Division 15 Contractor. Prior to motor start-up ensure that all motors are lubricated, rotate in the correct direction and are furnished with the proper overload protection. Energizing any mechanical circuit prior to coordination with the Division 15 Contractor is at your own risk. D. Make all required equipment connections to the mechanical equipment based on the Division 15 and Division 16 documents. Some items may only show in one location. 2.05 CONNECTIONS A. Unless otherwise indicated on electrical drawings, heating, ventilating, and plumbing equipment motors and controls are furnished, set in place, and wired in accordance with the following schedule (coordinate all work with Division 15): 2.06 RESPONSIBILITIES Furnished. Set in Wired Wired ITEM Place By Power Control Equipment Motors MC MC EC EC Magnetic Motor Starters: Automatically controlled with or without HOA Motors 16150 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility switches EC EC EC EC Manually controlled EC EC EC EC Furnished with MC MC EC EC mechanical equipment Disconnect switches, manual motor starters, thermal overload switches EC EC EC Thermostats, valves, float controls, damper motors, EP and PE switches, other miscellaneous Division 15 controls MC MC EC EC (MC - Division 15) (EC - Division 16) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLIANCE AND MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS Motors A. Provide wiring and make all final electrical connections in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations for equipment furnished by others. Where equipment is fed from wiring in slab, terminate conduit in flush coupling at floor or suitable watertight nipple 8 inches above floor with flexible conduit connection to equipment. Make conduit connections at floor watertight with silicone sealant. B. Refer to Equipment Manufacturer's shop drawings for details of equipment connections. 1. Provide outlets at locations to conveniently serve equipment. 2. Provide receptacles as required to match cord caps on equipment furnished. 3. Provide direct wiring or receptacles under base bid for final connection to equipment as required for particular equipment furnished, regardless of type of outlet shown on plans. C. Label all safety switches with white bakelite nameplates with engraved black letters that identify the equipment served with the mechanical equipment designations. D. All disconnect switches, starter, etc. shall be installed in locations that are within sight of the equipment being served and where they are readily accessible with the required working clearances in front and to the side per the NEC and manufacturer requirements. E. Check the rotation of all three phase motors and reconnect same where necessary to provide the proper direction as required for the drive unit. Check all starters for properly size overload relays, properly sized heaters and properly sized fuses. 1 61 50-4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility F. Where connections are made to mechanical equipment, circuit breaker, fuse and heater sizes shall be coordinated with the nameplate data on the equipment actually furnished. If the equipment furnished requires starters, disconnects, etc. of smaller size than what is shown, install the proper size utilization equipment and provide a credit to the Owner for the difference. G. Provide wiring and make all final electrical connections in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations for equipment furnished by others. Where equipment is fed from wiring in slab, terminate conduit in a flush coupling at floor or suitable watertight nipple 8 inches above floor with flexible conduit connection to equipment. Make conduit connection at floor watertight with silicon sealant. H. Refer to equipment manufacturer's shop drawings for details of equipment connections. Provide all required relays, wiring, and miscellaneous equipment for Fire Alarm Fan shut -down and time delay starting. Inter - connection controls shall be rated to match starter control voltage. END OF SECTION Motors 16150 -5 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 16160 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Hinged cover enclosures. B. Cabinets. C. Terminal blocks and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). B. ANSI /NEMA ICS 1 - Industrial Control and Systems. C. ANSI /NEMA ICS 4 - Terminal Blocks for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems. D. ANSI /NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data. B. Shop Drawings for Equipment Panels: Include wiring schematic diagram, wiring diagram, outline drawing and construction diagram as described in ANSI /NEMA ICS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES A. Construction: NEMA 250; Type 1 and Type 3R steel. B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. C. Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by screwdriver and staple for padlock. D. Panel for Mounting Terminal Blocks or Electrical Components: 14 gauge steel, white enamel interior finish grey exterior finish. 2.02 TERMINAL BLOCKS AND ACCESSORIES Cabinets and Enclosures 16160 -1 07/07/98 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility A. Terminal Blocks: ANSI /NEMA ICS 4; UL listed. B. Power Terminals: Unit construction type, closed -back type, with tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 600 volts. C. Signal and Control Terminals: Modular construction type, channel mounted; tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 300 volts. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble enclosures and cabinets housing terminal blocks or electrical components in accordance with ANSI /NEMA ICS 6. B. Field punch all knockouts on enclosures. C. Provide protective pocket inside front cover with schematic diagram, connection diagram, and layout drawing of control wiring and components within enclosure. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install cabinets and enclosures plumb; anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each corner, minimum. B. Provide accessory feet for free - standing equipment enclosures. C. Install trim plumb. D. Enclosures for individual units shall be mounted at 4'-6° above floors to centerline of switch, controls, etc. E. Connections to NEMA 3R, 4, 7, and 9 enclosures shall be from below, unless a myers hub is provided. Conduits shall be arranged to drain moisture away from the enclosure and the enclosure shall be equipped with a Crouse Hinds EYD drain. END OF SECTION Cabinets and Enclosures 16160 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 16180 OVERCURRENT PROTECTION DEVICES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provision and installation of molded case circuit breakers and fuses where indicated and specified. 1.02 CODE REQUIREMENTS AND STANDARDS A. Standards: 1. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) a. 198- 1982Fuses b. 489- 1980Molded -Case Circuit Breaker Enclosures (R1984) 2. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. AB1- 1975MoIded Case Circuit Breakers (R1981) 3. Applicable ANSI and IEEE Standards 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Per Section 01340 and 16000. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Molded case, thermal magnetic type, unless otherwise specified. B. To be installed in individual enclosures, in panelboards, combination motor controllers and control panels, with proper voltage and interrupt rating for point of application. C. Frame size and trip rating as noted on drawings. Overcurrent Protection Devices 16180 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility D. Provide high interrupting capacity breakers as indicated on drawings. E. Quick -make and quick -break type, with wiping contacts. Provided with arc chutes and individual trip mechanisms on each pole. Two and three -pole breakers - single operator trip only. No common trip bars allowed. F. Trip -free with trip indication independent of the "ON" or "OFF" positions. G. Calibrated for operation in an ambient temperature of 40 °C. H. Anti -turn solderless type terminals, UL listed for both copper and aluminum copper. 1. Provide "switching rated" circuit breakers for all 120 -volt lighting circuits controlled at the panelboard. J. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. General Electric Company 2. Square D Company 3. Westinghouse Company K. Accessories: Provide interlocks, auxiliary contacts, bell alarm switches, and other modifications as specifically noted on the drawings or called for in these specifications. 2.02 FUSES A. Provide complete set of fuses for switches, panels, switchgear, and control centers and equipment as required. Coordinate time current - tripping characteristics of fuses serving motors or in series with circuit breakers for proper operation. B. Time Delay Applications: 1. Provide UL Class L current limiting for fuses 600 -amp through 2,000 -amp and greater with interrupting rating of 200,000 amps RMS. 2. Provide UL Class RK1 current limiting, rejection, fast acting fuses, for fuses Tess than 600 -amps with interrupting rating of 200,000 amps RMS. 3. Provide UL Class K for fuses Tess than 600 -amps with interrupting rating of 200,000 amps RMS. 4. 4. Provide UL Class H renewable for fuses less than 600 -amps with interrupting rating of less than 10,000 amps RMS. Overcurrent Protection Devices 16180 -2 07/07/98 1 T 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility C. Provide fuse puller or pullers for fuse sizes used. D. Provide surface- mounted cabinet, 24W x 36H x 12D sized to store required spare fuses at location coordinated with Owner's Representative. E. Furnish one set (3 -pole, 3- fuses; 2 -pole, 2- fuses; 1 -pole, 1 fuse) of spare fuses for each size and type used. F. Fault current calculations are based on Bussmann fuses. Manufacturers other than Bussman shall ensure that the fault current characteristics of their fuses are equal to or better than Bussman. Any substitution required to fulfill this requirement shall be made at no expense to the Owner. G. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Bussman 2. Gould Shawmut 3. Little Fuse H. Calibrate for operation in an ambient temperature of 40 °C. I. All fuses provided under Division 16 shall be of the same manufacturer. J. Where fuses in motor circuits are indicated, but not sized, provided manufacturer's recommended fuse size based on actual equipment installed. K. Provide in -line or integrally- mounted fuse clips on control power or low- voltage transformers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 BREAKER INSTALLATION A. Install breakers in this section in switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers, combination motor starters, and individual enclosures, with trip ratings as shown. B. Mount individually enclosed circuit breakers with top of enclosure 6" above finished floor; except where used for feeder tap protection, mount within 10' of the point of tap. In all cases, mount breaker in a readily accessible location, as defined by NEC. C. Trip Settings: Set all adjustable instantaneous trips to minimum, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. On magnetic breakers in combination starters, set trips at the lowest value that will permit motor starting. 3.02 SPARES Overcurrent Protection Devices 16180 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility A. Upon completion of the building, the Contractor shall provide the Owner 10% (minimum of 3) spare fuses of each type and rating of installed fuses. B. Spare Fuse Cabinet: 1. Fuse cabinets shall be of the same type and finish as the cabinets specified elsewhere in these specifications. 2. A spare fuse cabinet shall be provided at each switchboard supplied with spare fuses of every type installed in that switchboard. These cabinets may be used to store other fuses used elsewhere in the project and shall be provided by the Division 16 Contractor. 3. Cabinets shall be sized as required to contain spare fuses as required above. Arrange so fuses are stored on adjustable steel shelves so that all cartons are exposed when the door is open. 4. Cabinets shall be equipped with a typewritten directory card of size as required to display the information as follows: a. Quantity of fuses. b. Fuse type. c. Equipment where fuse is used. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Furnish and install fuses in all fusible equipment. Ampacity shall be as shown on the drawings, or selected to match equipment ratings. B. Provided fuse clips and adapters as required to match fuse type to fuseholder. C. Install fuses in fuseholder with fuse rating visible and in the proper manufacturer's recommended orientation. D. Fuses shall not be installed until equipment is ready to be energized. This measure prevents fuse damage during shipment of equipment from the manufacturer to the job - site or from water that may contact the fuse before the equipment is installed. Final tests and inspections shall be made prior to energization of the equipment. This shall include a through cleaning , tightening, and review of all electrical connection and inspections of all grounding conductors. All fuses shall be provided by the Division 16 Contractor. Overcurrent Protection Devices END OF SECTION 16180 -4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Conduit and equipment supports. B. Fastening hardware. 1.02 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size, shape and location of concrete pads with other divisions work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL A. Support Channel: Galvanized or painted steel. B. Hardware: Corrosion resistant. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, and outlet and junction boxes to building structure using either expansion anchors, preset inserts, beam clamps, or spring steel clips. B. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum board partitions and walls; expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry walls; self - drilling anchors or expansion anchor on concrete surfaces; sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs; and wood screws in wood construction. C. Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, or conduit. D. Do not use powder- actuated anchors. E. Do not drill structural steel members. F. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to present a neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers under all nuts. Supporting Devices 16190 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility G. Install surface - mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. Provide steel channel supports to stand cabinet one inch off wall. H. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support flush - mounted cabinets and panelboards in stud walls. END OF SECTION Supporting Devices 16190 -2 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Nameplates and tape labels. B. Wire and cable markers. C. Conduit color coding. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01300. B. Include schedule for nameplates and tape labels. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Nameplates: Engraved three -layer laminated plastic, black letters on a white background. B. Tape Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch white letters on black back- ground. C. Wire and Cable Markers: Cloth markers, split sleeve or tubing type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and tape labels. B. Install nameplates and tape labels parallel to equipment lines. C. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using screws, rivets, or adhesive. Secure nameplate to inside face of recessed panelboard doors in finished locations. D. Embossed tape will not be permitted for any application. Use embossed tape only for identification of individual wall switches and receptacles and control device stations. Electrical Identification 16195 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 3.02 WIRE IDENTIFICATION A. Provide wire markers on each conductor in panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and at load connection. Identify with branch circuit or feeder number for power and lighting circuits, and with control wire number as indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams and equipment manufacturer's shop drawings for control wiring. 3.03 NAMEPLATE ENGRAVING A. Provide nameplates of minimum letter height as scheduled below. B. Panelboards, Switchboards and Motor Control Centers: 1/4 inch; identify equipment designation. 1/8 inch; identify voltage rating and source. C. Individual Circuit Breakers, Switches, and Motor Starters In Panelboards, Switchboards, and Motor Control Centers: 1/8 inch; identify circuit and load served. including location. D. Individual Circuit Breakers, Enclosed Switches, and Motor Starters: 1/8 inch; identify Toad served. E. Transformers: 1/4 inch; identify equipment designation, 1/8 inch; identify primary and secondary voltages, primary source, and secondary Toad and location. END OF SECTION Electrical Identification 16195 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 16425 SWITCHBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Main Switchboard - Fumish and install the Service Entrance switchboard(s) as herein specified and shown on the associated electrical drawings. B. Distribution Switchboard - Furnish and install the Distribution Switchboard(s) as herein specified and shown on the associated electrical drawings 1.02 REFERENCES The switchboard(s) and overcurrent protection devices referenced herein are designed and manufactured according to the following appropriate specifications. A. ANSI /NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC). B. ANSI /IEEE C12.1 - Code for Electricity Metering. C. ANSI C39.1 - Electrical Analog Indicating Instruments. D. ANSI C57.13 - Instrument Transformers. E. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches. F. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. G. NEMA PB 2 - Deadfront Distribution Switchboards, File E8681 H. NEMA PB 2.1 - Proper Handling, Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Deadfront Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. I. NEMA PB 2.2 - Application Guide for Ground Fault Protective Devices for Equipment. J. UL 50 - Cabinets and Boxes. K. UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead Front Switches. L. UL 489 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers. M. UL 891 - Dead -Front Switchboards. N. UL 943 - Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters. O. UL 1053 - Ground -Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment. P. UL 977 - Fused Power Circuit Devices. Switchboards 16425 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility Q. CSA 22.2 No. 5 - M1986 Molded Case Circuit Breakers. R. Federal Specification W- C -375B /Gen - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case, Branch Circuit And Service. S. Federal Specification W -C -870 - Fuseholders (For plug and enclosed cartridge fuses). T. Federal Specification W -S -865 - Enclosed Knife Switch. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings shall indicate front and side enclosure elevations with overall dimensions shown; conduit entrance locations and requirements; nameplate legends; one -line diagrams; equipment schedule; and switchboard instrument details. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. To be considered for approval, a manufacturer shall have specialized in the manufacturing and assembly of switchboards for at least fifty (50) years. B. Furnish products listed by Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated and in accordance with standards listed in Article 1.03 - References. C. The manufacturing facility shall be registered by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. to the International Organization for Standardization ISO 9002 Series Standards for quality. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products in conformance with manufacturer's recommended practices as outlined in applicable Installation and Maintenance Manuals. B. Each switchboard section shall be delivered in individual shipping splits for ease of handling. They shall be individually wrapped for protection and mounted on shipping skids. C. Inspect and report concealed damage to carrier within their required time period. D. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory protection and /or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect structure from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. Where applicable, provide adequate heating within enclosures to prevent condensation. E. Handle in accordance with NEMA PB 2.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only by lifting means provided for this express purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to switchboard internal components, enclosure, and finish. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Switchboards 16425 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility A. Conform to NEMA PB 2 service conditions during and after installation of switchboards. 1.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide one (1) set of installation and maintenance instructions with each switchboard. Instructions are to be easily identified and affixed within the incoming or main section of the line -up. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall warrant equipment to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for the lesser of one (1) year from date of installation or eighteen (18) months from date of purchase. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Shall be Square D Company or prior approved equal. B. Substitutions must be submitted in writing two (2) weeks prior to original bid date with supporting documentation demonstrating that the alternate manufacturer conforms to all aspects of the specifications herein. 2.02 SWITCHBOARD - GENERAL A. Utility Metering Compartment: The utility current transformer compartment shall be connected for cold sequence metering. Provisions for Bar type current transformers shall be supplied. The compartment shall be barriered with a hinged door with sealing provisions. The compartment shall comply with the local utility construction specifications. B. Short Circuit Current Rating: Switchboards shall be rated with a minimum short circuit current rating as indicated on the plans. C. Future Provisions: All unused spaces provided, unless otherwise specified, shall be fully equipped for future devices, including all appropriate connectors and mounting hardware. D. Enclosure: Type 1 - General Purpose. Switchboards 1. Sections shall be aligned front and rear. 2. Switchboard height shall be 91.5 inches including 1.5 inch floor sills and excluding lifting members and pull boxes. 3. The switchboard(s) shall be of deadfront construction. 4. The switchboard frame shall be of formed steel rigidly bolted together to support all cover plates, bussing and component devices during shipment and installation. 16425 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 5. Steel base channels shall be bolted to the frame to rigidly support the entire shipping section for moving on rollers and floor mounting. 6. Each switchboard section shall have an open bottom and an individually removable top plate for installation and termination of conduit. 7. The switchboard enclosure shall be painted on all exterior surfaces. The paint finish shall be a medium gray, ANSI #49, applied by the electro- deposition process over an iron phosphate pre - treatment. 8. All front covers shall be screw removable with a single tool and all doors shall be hinged with removable hinge pins. 9. Top and bottom conduit areas shall be clearly indicated on shop drawings. E. Nameplates: Provide 1 in H X 3 in W engraved laminated (Gravoply) nameplates for each device. Furnish black letters on a white background for all voltages. F. Bus Composition: Shall be plated aluminum. Plating shall be applied continuously to all bus work. The switchboard bussing shall be of sufficient cross - sectional area to meet UL Standard 891 temperature rise requirements. The phase and neutral through -bus shall have an ampacity as shown in the plans. For 4 -wire systems, the neutral shall be of equivalent ampacity as the phase bus bar. Tapered bus is not acceptable. Full provisions for the addition of future sections shall be provided. Bussing shall include all necessary hardware to accommodate splicing for future additions. G. Bus Connections: Shall be bolted with Grade 5 bolts and conical spring washers. H. Ground Bus: Sized per NFPA70 and UL 891 Tables 25.1 and 25.2 and shall extend the entire length of the switchboard. Provisions for the addition of future sections shall be provided. I. Accessibility: Accessible from the front, left side, right side and rear of the switchboard. 2.03 SWITCHBOARD - INCOMING MAIN SECTION DEVICES A. Main Circuit Breaker 1. Electronic trip molded case standard function 80% rated circuit breaker a. Individually fixed mounted through 2500 A 2. Circuit breaker(s) shall have power terminals to accommodate either cable or bolted bus connections. 3. All circuit breakers shall be equipped with electrical accessories as noted on the drawings. Switchboards 16425 -4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility Switchboards 4. Each circuit breaker trip system is to include an externally accessible test port for use with a Universal Equipment Test Set. Provide one (1) Universal Equipment Test Set for this project job for final inspection. This test set shall be suitable for testing all electric circuit breakers specified for this project. No disassembly of the circuit breaker is required for testing. 5. Each SE type circuit breaker trip unit shall be capable of communicating the following data via a high speed network (19.2k Baud). 6. Phase current of A, B, and C phases and ground fault in real -time. 7. Switch settings: a. Long -time settings: pickup and delay b. Short-time settings: pickup and delay c. Instantaneous settings d. Ground fault settings: pickup and delay 8. Trip History a. Last fault type b. Phase current of A, B, and C phases and ground fault indication at time of last trip c. Short circuit pickup d. Overload pickup e. Overload trips (cumulative) f. Short circuit trips (cumulative) g. Ground fault trips (cumulative) 9. Equipment Ground Fault Protection a. Circuit breaker(s) shall be provided with integral equipment protection for grounded systems. b. The ground fault system shall be of the residual type. c. Circuit breaker(s) shall be provided with zone selective interlocking (ZSI) on the Ground Fault function in order to limit thermal stress caused by a fault, yet permit optimum coordination with all other electronic trip circuit breakers. 16425 -5 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 10. Terminations a. All lugs shall be UL Listed to accept solid and /or stranded copper conductors only. Lugs shall be suitable for 90° C rated wire, sized according to the 75° C temperature rating in the NEC]. b. All circuit breakers shall be UL Listed to accept field installable /removable mechanical type lugs. c. All circuit breakers shall be suitable for bus connection. 2.04 SWITCHBOARD - DISTRIBUTION SECTION DEVICES A. Branch Circuit Breakers 1. Individually fixed mounted, rear connected, through 1200 A a. Each circuit breaker shall have power terminals to accommodate either cable or bolted bus connections. b. Branch circuit breakers shall be positioned vertically with the operating handles extending through an individual cover over the device. c. Each circuit breaker is to be individually mounted in four high type compartmentalized construction and individually fed by connector from the vertical section bus. d. The load side of each circuit breaker is to be bussed to cable Tugs located in a rear load side lug compartment. e. Each circuit breaker compartment is to be isolated from adjacent compartment with horizontal mounted barriers. Individual circuit breakers mounted within each circuit breaker compartment shall be isolated from each other with vertically mounted barriers. f. There shall be no exposed live components in the circuit breaker compartment. Each circuit breaker shall be capable of being removed from the front of the switchboard. 2. Thermal magnetic molded case circuit breaker(s). a. Group mounted through 1200 A Circuit protective devices shall be Square D molded case circuit breaker(s). Circuit breaker(s) shall be standard interrupting. Ampere ratings shall be as shown on the drawings. Branch circuit breaker(s) shall be group mounted plug -on with mechanical restraint on a common pan or rail assembly. Switchboards 16425 -6 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility The interior shall have three flat bus bars stacked and aligned vertically with glass reinforced polyester insulators laminated between phases. The molded polyester insulators shall support and provide phase isolation to the entire length of bus Circuit breaker(s) equipped with line terminal jaws shall not require additional external mounting hardware. Circuit breaker(s) shall be held in mounted position by a self- contained bracket secured to the mounting pan by fasteners. Circuit breaker(s) of different frame size shall be capable of being mounted across from each other. Line side circuit breaker connections are to be jaw type. 2.05 POWER AND TRIP HISTORY MONITORING A. System Description: 1. The customer 1% monitoring shall consist of a electronic Circuit Monitor and System Display installed as designated on the project drawings. 2. Provide a Square D PowerLogic Class 3020 CM 2250 circuit monitor with waveform capture provisions to monitor the main disconnect in the switchboard. Provide a PowerLogic System Display Class 3050 SD 100 to monitor mains, tie, and branch full function circuit breakers. (Current metering, trip history, and switch settings). B. Circuit Monitor Installation: 1. Electronic circuit monitors shall be installed by the switchboard manufacturer for all circuits as indicated by the project drawings. 2. All control power (current and voltage transformers) and communications wire shall be factory wired and harnessed within the switchboard lineup. 3. Where external circuit connections are required, terminal blocks shall be provided and the manufacturer's drawings must clearly identify the interconnection requirements including wire type to be used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine area to receive switchboard to provide adequate clearance for switchboard installation. B. Check that concrete pads are level and free of irregularities. C. Start work only after unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install switchboard in accordance with manufacturer's written guidelines, the NEC, and local codes. Switchboards 16425 -7 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect completed installation for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. B. Measure, using a Megger, the insulation resistance of each bus section phase -to- phase and phase -to- ground for one minute each, at minimum test voltage of 1000 VDC; minimum acceptable value for insulation resistance is 1 megohms. NOTE: Refer to manufacturer's literature for specific testing procedures. C. Check tightness of accessible bolted bus joints using calibrated torque wrench per manufacturer's recommended torque values. D. Physically test key interlock systems to check for proper functionality. E. Test ground fault systems by operating push -to -test button. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust all operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement per manufacturers specifications. B. Tighten bolted bus connections in accordance with manufacturers instructions. C. Adjust circuit breaker trip and time delay settings to values as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.05 CLEANING A. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. END OF SECTION Switchboards 16425 -8 07/07/98 4! 4 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 16440 DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Switches shall be furnished and installed at locations as shown on the drawings. Switches shall be of the type approved, indicated and specified herein. 1.02 REFERENCES Switches shall be manufactured in accordance with the following standards: A. UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead Front Switches B. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 1.03 SERVICE ENTRANCE A. Switches identified for use as service equipment are to be labeled for this application. 1.04 DRAWINGS A. Provide outline drawings with dimensions, and equipment ratings for voltage, amperage, horsepower and short circuit. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Switches shall be manufactured by Square D Company, Westinghouse /Cutler Hammer, Siemens, or prior approved equal. 2.02 SWITCH INTERIOR A. All switches shall have switch blades which are visible when the switch is OFF and the cover is open. Type 1, 3R. B. Lugs shall be front removable and UL Listed for 60o C or 75o C conductors (30 -100 ampere), 75o C conductors (200 -1200 ampere, copper conductors only. C. 30 through 100 ampere switches shall be equipped with field installed fuse pullers, Type I or Type 3R. D. All current carrying parts shall be plated to resist corrosion. E. Switches shall have removable arc suppressors to facilitate easy access to line side lugs. Disconnect Switches 16440 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility F. Switches shall have provisions for a field installable electrical interlock. 2.03 SWITCH MECHANISM A. Switch operating mechanism shall be quick -make, quick -break such that, during normal operation of the switch, the operation of the contacts shall not be capable of being restrained by the operating handle after the closing or opening action of the contacts has started. B. The operating handle shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover, Type 1, 3R C. Provisions for padlocking the switch in the OFF position with at least three padlocks shall be provided. D. The handle position shall travel at least 90 between OFF and ON positions to clearly distinguish and indicate handle position, Type 1, 3R. E. All switches Type 1, 3R shall have a dual cover interlock mechanism to prevent unintentional opening of the switch cover when the switch is ON and prevent turning the switch ON when the cover is open. The cover interlock mechanism shall have an externally operated override but the override shall not permanently disable the interlock mechanism. The tool used to override the cover interlock mechanism shall not be required to enter the enclosure in order to override the interlock. 2.04 SWITCH ENCLOSURES A. Switch covers shall be attached with welded pin -type hinges (Type 1), top hinged, attached with removable screws and securable in the open position (Type 3R). B. The enclosure shall be finished with [gray baked enamel paint which is electrodeposited on cleaned, phosphate pre- treated steel (Type 1)],gray baked enamel paint which is electrodeposited on cleaned, phosphate pre- treated galvannealed steel (Type 3R). C. The enclosure shall have ON and OFF markings stamped into the cover (Type 1, 3R. D. The operating handle shall be provided with a dual colored, red /black position indication, Type 1, 3R. E. All switches shall have provisions to accept up to three 3/8 in hasp padlocks to lock the operating handle in the OFF position. F. Tangential knockouts shall be provided to facilitate ease of conduit entry Type 1, 3R for switches rated 30 -200A. G. Enclosures for Type 3R switches through 200 ampere shall have provisions for interchangeable bolt -on hubs in the top endwall. Hubs shall be Square D B -Type hubs sized as indicated on the plans. Disconnect Switches 16440 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 2.05 SWITCH RATINGS A. Switches shall be horsepower rated for ac and /or dc as indicated on the plans. B. The UL Listed short circuit cur ent rating of the switches shall be: 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes when u ed with or protected by Class H or K fuses (30 -600 ampere, 200,000 rms symme rical amperes when used with or protected by Class R or Class J fuses (30 -600 a pere switches employing appropriate fuse rejection schemes) 200,000 rms symm -trical amperes when used with or protected by Class L fuses (800 -1200 ampere. EN ' OF SECTION Disconnect Switches Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 16450 GROUNDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This specification describes the construction and installation of the electrical grounding system for personnel safety, protection of equipment and proper equipment operation. 1. Properly ground transformers, switchboard, panelboards, UPS, controls, conduit systems, supports, cabinets, equipment, fixtures, fuel tanks, gas pipes, etc., and grounded circuit conductors in accordance with the latest adopted issue of the National Electrical Code. 2. Provide all bonding jumpers and wire, grounding bushings, clamps, etc., required for complete grounding. 3. Route grounding conductors to provide shortest and most direct path to ground electrode system. Install all ground conductors in conduit except as noted on drawings or schedules. 1.02 CODE REQUIREMENTS AND STANDARDS A. Standards of Manufacture and Installation (the most recent edition, revision, or amendment is referenced): 1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, the latest adopted edition 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 3. UL467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Per Section 01340 and 16010 on the following: 1. Connectors and Lugs 2. Grounding and Bonding Materials 3. Grounding Rods 4. Exothermic Welding Molds and Charges PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTORS Secondary Grounding 16450 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility A. Per Section 16121. 2.02 CONNECTORS A. Cable -to -Cable compression -type, copper. 1. Thomas & Betts 53500 series or 53000 series. 2. Burndy Hyground System types YGHS, YGHP, or YGL. B. Cable -to -Flat: 1. Compression -type copper Tugs with silicone bronze bolts. a. Thomas & Betts 53200 series. b. Burndy type YCA -2N 2. Bolted -type copper lugs with silicone bronze bolts. a. Thomas & Betts 32000 series, Tandem type. b. Burndy Hyground System type YGHA, YGA with two -hole pad. 2.03 EXOTHERMIC WELDING A. Provide copper molds and charges for exothermic welding as manufactured by Cadweld or Burndy. 2.04 GROUND RODS A. Provide electrolytically enhanced ground rods (chemical ground rods) where shown on the drawings. B. All components of the ground rod system shall be manufactured by Lyncole XIT Grounding, no substitutions allowed. The ground rods shall be 10' straight shaft model no. K2 -10CS. For each ground rod provide a ground access box, XIT model no. XB -11, and bentonite clay backfill material, trade name Lynconite, XIT model no. LNC. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ROUTING OF GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Underground: Maintain at least 10' clearance between ground conductors and parallel underground metallic piping, and 5' clearance at points of crossing, unless ground conductor and underground piping are shown to be bonded on the Drawings. When such clearance is not possible at points of crossing, insulate the ground conductor for 5' on either side to 600 -volt minimum. Secondary Grounding 16450 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility B. Install ground conductors free of cuts, kinks, and abrasions. 1. Grounding electrode conductors shall be unspliced. Grounding electrode conductors joined with irreversible compression connectors or exothermic welds are considered to be unspliced. 3.02 GROUND CONDUCTOR TERMINATIONS A. Exothermic Welds: Exothermic welding is required for all connections made below grade. Exothermic welding is permitted for all cases where copper is connected to copper (except at the Master Ground Bar where two -hole lug compression fittings must be used), or to structural steel, provided that the following conditions are met: 1. All surfaces to be joined shall be "bright clean" and thoroughly dry. 2. Install flared copper sleeves over stranded conductors. Note: Shim stock, wrap sleeves, or adapter sleeves are not acceptable. 3. Preheat Cadweld molds to at least 200 °F prior to use. 4. Complete exothermic weld per manufacturer's instructions. 5. Clean molds after each use and inspect for wear. Discard molds which show excessive wear. Do not use any mold for more than 15 welds. 6. Test each weld after removal of mold by backing the weld with a hard surface and rapping the weld with a hammer. B. Compression Fitting Installation: Where compression fittings are used in lieu of welds: 1. Use a deoxidant joint compound for all conductor connections. Burndy "Pentrax" or equivalent. 2. Apply compression fittings with a 12 -ton compression tool designed for the purpose and approved by the fittings manufacturer. 3. Use only the proper compression die and leave joint showing die code number clearly embossed on each fitting. C. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections are acceptable only where drawings do not require exothermic welds or irreversible compression fittings on exposed or accessible grounding connections. Include lock washers or Belleville washer under lug bolts. 3.03 GROUNDING OF RACEWAYS, STRUCTURES, AND EQUIPMENT A. Provide a low- impedance ground return path from each piece of electrical equipment back to the building service ground bus. Provide additional exposed ground conductors to meet the requirements described in this section. Secondary Grounding 16450 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility B. Raceways: 1. Conduit: Effectively make up all conduit connections, including conduit couplings, connectors to boxes, enclosures, and housing to provide a permanent and continuous path to grounding electrode. Bond both ends of conduit to ground conductor. 2. Grounding: Provide equipment grounding conductors in all conduits of electrical distribution system. Equipment grounding conductors shall have green insulation and be sized per the drawings. Bond equipment grounding conductor at each electrical enclosure. Utilize ground bushings, wedges, lugs, etc., for this purpose. 3. Boxes: Provide green grounding jumper from the ground screw to a box grounding screw or clip for all grounding type devices, using insulated wire, unless UL- approved self - grounding devices are used. Provide grounding jumper on all surface - mounted devices, regardless of type of device used. C. Connections to Building Steel: Building steel shall be used as one of the grounding electrodes to form the grounding electrode system. Connect only to building steel which is inherently earth grounded. D. Pipes: Connect equipment grounding conductors to pipes only as directed by the drawings. Provide bonding around all water meters, etc. E. Duct Work: All metallic duct work shall be grounded in accordance with the NEC Article 250 requirements. F. General Equipment: Make connections to equipment by means of factory installed lugs. If not provided, make connections within enclosures with approved lugs or connectors. G. Motor Connections: 1. Use flexible conduit for motor connections. Provide a bare copper bonding jumper running with the supply conductors between the rigid steel conduit and the motor frame, using approved grounding fittings. Size this equipment bonding jumper per NEC Table 250 -95. 2. Motor mounting bolts may be used for connecting the equipment ground to the frame of motors smaller than 213 frame. For 213 frame and larger motors, the grounding connector shall be fastened beneath the head of an end shield bolt or by means of a 5/16" (minimum) bronze bolt tapped into a suitable place on the motor frame. Do not use soldered terminals. Place a washer between bolt head and terminal lug. Ground motors rated above 480 volts at two points on opposite sides of the motor. 3.04 MAIN BONDING JUMPERS A. Permanently and effectively bond the equipment grounding conductors and the service - disconnect enclosure to the system grounded conductor within the main distribution Secondary Grounding 16450 -4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility switchboard. The conductor shall be unspliced bare stranded copper of the same size as the grounding electrode conductor. 3.05 GROUND RODS A. Follow the manufacturer's installation instructions. Installation includes, but is not limited to, boring a minimum 10" diameter hole 6" deeper than the length of the rod, installing the rod, backfilling the hole with a Lynconite -water mixture, connecting the rod's 4/0 pigtail to the ground ring with exothermic welds and positioning the ground access box. 3.06 GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM A. Connect the grounding electrode conductor to the ground ring. Bond the ground ring to each of the following electrodes to form the grounding electrode system. See the Drawings for the required conductor sizes. 1. Underground water main pipe. 2. Underground sanitary sewer system. 3. Ground rods. 4. Building steel. 3.07 GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR A. All grounding electrode conductors shall be installed in rigid metal conduit. The conduit shall be made electrically continuous from end -to -end and shall be bonded to the grounding electrode conductor at both ends. B. Service Entrance Equipment: Provide a bare copper grounding electrode conductor sized per the Drawings to connect the grounding electrode system to the system grounded conductor. C. Generator (Separately Derived System): Provide a bare copper grounding electrode conductor sized per the Drawings to connect the grounding electrode system to the generator's grounded conductor. D. Transformers and UPS (Separately Derived System): Provide bare copper grounding electrode conductor sized per the Drawings to connect the grounding electrode system to the transformer (UPS) grounded conductor. 3.08 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. All equipment grounding conductors shall be routed in conduit with its circuit conductors. 3.09 SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEMS Secondary Grounding 16450 -5 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility A. Bond separately derived systems to the nearest available point on the interior metal water piping system in the area served by the separately derived system. The bonding conductor shall be sized per the Drawings. The points of attachment of the bonding conductor shall be accessible. 3.10 MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Ground conductors shall be insulated to permit integrity testing. Conductors shall be free of splices. If splices must be made only exothermic welding (Cadwelding)will be allowed with the Engineers prior permission. B. Ground conductors should be routed in a manner that will avoid sharp or right angle bends. Routes should follow the most direct path with gradual bends to minimize the inductive reactances that tend to impede surge currents and reduce the overall effectiveness of the grounding system. C. Ground conductors except the green wires and d.c. power conductors, shall not be routed closely parallel to other conductors in the areas so as to minimize induction of surges into equipment wiring. These conductor shall not be routed through cables racks or troughs, or within confines of any iron work. D. The ground conductor shall only be placed in nonmetallic conduit if allowed by the local AHJ. If it must be routed through metallic conduit, both ends of the conduit shall be bonded to the grounding conductor. Furthermore, ground conductors shall not be encircled with metal clamps. This is essential to eliminate the high inductive reactance that will impede the flow of surge current along the conductor. E. Wire -to -wire and wire -to- ground rod connection shall only be made with Cadweld connections. Solder joints shall not be used for any grounding connection. F. Wire -to- bonding -bar (busbar) connections should be made with Tugs that have a double compression connector. The lugs shall have bolt -on provisions for the busbar connections using copper bolts and nuts. Periodically, some of the busbar connections may be removed for test purposes. G. The self grounding feature of devices shall not be utilized as the sole grounding source. Provide a grounding conductor from the ground screw on the device to the circuit grounding conductor. H. The following tagging shall be provided for simplification of maintenance and testing: 1. Permanent shrink type typed cable labels shall be provided on all ground wire leads at all busbars to identify the origin of each conductor. 2. The location for each ground conductor shall be identified on each ground bar by permanent adhesive label or stenciling. 3. The designated P(surge producers), A(surge absorbers),N(grounds to non - isolated ground zone equipment), and [(grounds to isolated ground zone Secondary Grounding 16450 -6 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility equipment) segment of the Master Ground Bar (MGB) and Single Principle Point of Ground (SPPG) shall be clearly identified. 4. Permanent identification tags shall be placed on lightning ground leads at their accessible points of connection to the Perimeter Earth Ground System outside the facility. 3.11 TESTING A. Upon completion of grounding grid, and before connecting to building steel or building service, measure the resistance between grounding electrode and earth in accordance with IEEE Standard 81 -1962, "Recommended Guide for Measuring Ground Resistance and Potential Gradients in Earth." Submit test results to Owner's Representative for evaluation. Secondary Grounding END OF SECTION 16450 -7 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 16451 LIGHTNING PROTECTION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The Contractor shall provide and install a complete Lightning Protection System for the building included in this project. Installation shall be by a listed Lightning Protection Systems Installer capable of installing UL listed components in accordance with "Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems ", UL96A. The lightning protection system shall be installed under supervision of UL representatives and shall meet all requirements to earn the UL Master Label. 1.02 CODE REQUIREMENTS AND STANDARDS A. The completed installation shall meet the requirements of: 1. System Design: NFPA 780 Code, latest edition. 2. Component Design: U.L. 96A Standard, latest edition. 3. Certification: Underwriters Laboratories Master Label. Furnish the Master Label to the Owner upon completion. B. The designs shown for these systems are schematic and are intended to show the basic system design. The contractor shall verify dimensions and site conditions and provide systems that comply with code requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Per Section 01340 and 16010 on the following: 1. Lightning Conductors 2. Air Terminals 3. Ground Terminals 4. Grounding Rods 5. Associated Fittings 6. Thru Wall Assemblies PART2 PRODUCTS 1.04 MANUFACTURER Lightning Protection 16451 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility A. Member in good standing of the Lightning Protection Institute. B. Materials listed and labeled in accordance with Underwriters' Laboratories requirements. 1.05 CLASS 1 MATERIALS A. All lightning conductors, air terminals, ground terminals and associated fittings shall be Class I materials, for structures not exceeding 75' in height. 1.06 LIGHTNING CONDUCTORS A. Lightning main conductors (interconnecting conductors, down conductors, and some bonding conductors; refer to drawings) shall be stranded copper wire having a minimum effective cross - sectional area of 80,000 circular mils and a minimum strand size of No. 17 AWG. B. Lightning secondary conductors (some bonding conductors; refer to drawings) shall be stranded copper wire having a minimum effective cross - sectional area of 28,000 circular mils and a minimum strand size of No. 17 AWG. 1.07 EXOTHERMIC WELDING A. Provide copper molds and charges for exothermic welding as manufactured by Cadweld or Burndy. 1.08 GROUND RODS A. Provide copper -clad steel, 8' x 5/8" diameter ground rods where shown on the drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 1.09 LIGHTNING CONDUCTOR TERMINATIONS A. Exothermic Welds: Exothermic welding must be used for all connections made below grade. Exothermic welding is permitted for all cases where copper is connected to copper, or to structural steel, provided that the following conditions are met: 1. All surfaces to be joined shall be "bright clean" and throughly dry. 2. Install flared copper sleeves over stranded conductors. Note: Shim stock, wrap sleeves, or adapter sleeves are not accpetable. 3. Preheat molds to at least 200 °F prior to use. 4. Complete exothermic weld per manufacturer's instructions. 5. Clean molds after each use and inspect for wear. Discard molds which show excessive wear. Do not use any mold for more than 15 welds. Lightning Protection 16451 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 6. Test each weld after removal of mold by backing the weld with a hard surface and rapping the weld with a hammer. B. Compression Fitting Installation: Where compression fittings are used in lieu of welds: 1. Use a deoxidant joint compound for all conductor connections following cleaning of to be joinded surfaces with an abrasive pad. Burndy "Pentrax" or equivalent. 2. Apply compression fittings with a 12 ton compression tool designed for the purpose and approved by the fittings manufacturer. 3. Use only the proper compression die and leave joint showing die code number clearly embossed on each fitting. C. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections are acceptable only where drawings do not require exothe welds or irreversible compression fittings on exposed or accessible grounding connections. Include washers or Belleville washer under lug bolts. 1.10 BONDING A. Grounded metal bodies within the bonding distance as determined by NFPA 780, current edition, shal bonded to the system in accordance with code requirements. B. Underground metallic piping entering the building shall be bonded to the nearest down conductor or gro electrode. C. Ground level potential equalization: all grounded media below the 12' elevation of the building shal bonded together. 1.11 AIR TERMINALS A. Air terminals shall be installed in accordance with the following: 1. Minimum 10" projection above the object protected. 2. Maximum 20' spacing on roof ridges or edges. 3. Maximum 24" from ridge ends or roof edges and outside corners. 4. Midroof areas are to be provided with air terminals of sufficient quantity and height, to insure the entire roof area is covered by a "zone of protection" as afforded by a 150' radius "Ball ", per NFPA 780 standard. 1.12 LIGHTNING ARRESTORS (SURGE SUPPRESSORS) A. Lightning Arrestors to be provided on electrical and communication service entrances and on communication antenna lead -ins. Proper protection may only be provided by communication systems supplier. Lightning Protection 16451 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 1.13 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The installation shall be done in a neat and inconspicuous manner. B. All mounting and penetration of the roof surface shall be sealed to guarantee roof waterproofness. C. Fasteners shall be provided: 1. At 3' intervals on center for exposed conductors. 2. As necessary to maintain position and hold permanently in place on concealed runs of conductors. D. Copper lightning protection system components shall not be mounted to aluminum surfaces in order to prevent electrolytic corrosion. 1.14 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. The Contractor shall complete the Master Label Application, obtaining the required signatures. Provide to the Owner his copy of the Underwriters Laboratories' Master Label Application and forward two copies to UL for processing. The contractor shall make corrections to the installation, at no further cost to the Owner, as directed by UL representatives. B. The installer shall provide a nameplate bearing the installation company's name and phone number in the electric room near the electric service. END OF SECTION Lightning Protection 16451 -4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 16461 DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMERS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Dry-type distribution transformers with primary and secondary voltages of 600 V and less and capacity ratings through 2000 kVA. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code B. NEMA ST20 C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1561 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Suppliers asking consideration as an approved equal shall submit complete, warranted performance data and physical dimensions for similar transformers. Data shall be submitted for each size specified, and shall be received by the consultant engineer no Tess than 10 days prior to the bid due date for consideration. 1.04 STANDARDS A. Transformers 1000 kVA and smaller shall be listed by UL. B. Conform to the requirements of ANSI /NFPA 70. C. Transformers are to be manufactured and tested in accordance with NEMA ST20. PART2 PRODUCT 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Transformers shall be as manufactured by Square D Company, Westinghouse /Cutlet Hammer, Siemens, or approved equal. B. Approved manufacturers shall be registered firms in accordance with ISO 9001:1994 SIC 3612 (US); which is the design and manufacture of low voltage dry- type power, distribution, and specialty transformers. 2.02 RATINGS INFORMATION A. All insulating materials are to exceed NEMA ST20 standards and be rated for 220° C UL component recognized insulation system. Dry-Type Transformers 16461 -1 07/07/98 lectric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility B. Transformers 15 kVA and larger shall be 150° C temperature rise above 40° C ambient. Transformers 25 kVA and larger shall have a minimum of 4 - 2.5% full capacity primary taps. Exact voltages and taps to be as designated on the plans or the transformer schedule. C. The maximum temperature of the top of the enclosure shall not exceed 50° C rise above a 40° C ambient. D. The transformer(s) shall be rated as indicated in the following schedule: 1. Identification Number(s) 2. kVA Rating 3. Voltages 4. Phase 5. Frequency .03 CONSTRUCTION A. Transformer coils shall be of the continuous wound construction and shall be impregnated with nonhygroscopic, thermosetting varnish B. All cores to be constructed with low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Magnetic flux densities are to be kept well below the saturation point to prevent core overheating. Cores for transformers greater than 500 kVA shall be clamped utilizing insulated bolts through the core laminations to provide proper pressure throughout the length of the core. The completed core and coil shall be bolted to the base_of the enclosure but isolated by means of rubber vibration - absorbing mounts. There shall be no metal -to -metal contact between the core and coil and the enclosure except for a flexible safety ground strap. Sound isolation systems requiring the complete removal of all fastening devices will not be acceptable. C. The core of the transformer shall be visibly grounded to the enclosure by means of a flexible grounding conductor sized in accordance with applicable UL and NEC standards. D. The transformer enclosures shall be ventilated and be fabricated of heavy gauge, sheet steel construction. The entire enclosure shall be finished utilizing a continuous process consisting of degreasing, cleaning and phosphatizing, followed by electrostatic deposition of polymer polyester powder coating and baking cycle to provide uniform coating of all edges and surfaces. The coating shall be UL recognized for outdoor use. The coating color shall be ANSI 49. E. Sound levels shall be warranted by the manufacturer not to exceed the following: 15 to 50 KVA - 45 dB; 51 to 150 kVA— 50 dB. END OF SECTION ry-Type Transformers 16461 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 16462 DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMERS — K RATED PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Dry-type distribution transformers for non - linear Toads, single- and three - phase, primary and secondary voltages of 600 V and Tess, and capacity ratings of 15 kVA through 1000 kVA. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code B. NEMA ST20 C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1561 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Suppliers asking consideration as an approved equal shall submit complete, warranted performance data and physical dimensions for similar transformers. Data shall be submitted for each size specified, and shall be received by the consultant engineer no Tess than 10 days prior to the bid due date for consideration. 1.04 STANDARDS A. Transformers 750 kVA and smaller shall be listed by UL. B. Conform to the requirements of ANSI /NFPA 70. C. Transformers are to be manufactured and tested in accordance with NEMA ST20 and UL 1561. PART2 PRODUCT 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Transformers shall be as manufactured by Square D Company, Westinghouse /Cutlet Hammer, Siemens, or approved equal. B. Approved manufacturers shall be registered firms in accordance with ISO 9001:1994 SIC 3612 (US); which is the design and manufacture of low voltage dry- type power, distribution, and specialty transformers. 2.02 RATINGS INFORMATION A. All insulating materials are to exceed NEMA ST20 standards and be rated for 220° C UL component recognized insulation system. Dry-Type Transformers — K Rated 16462 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility B. Neither the primary nor the secondary temperature shall exceed 220° C at any point in the coils while carrying their full rating of non - sinusoidal Toad. Transformers are to be UL listed and labeled for K -13 as defined as the sum of fundamental and harmonic Ih(pu)2h2 per UL 1561. Transformers evaluated by the UL K- Factor evaluation shall be listed for 115° C average temperature rise. K- Factor listed transformers rated at 150° C rise shall not be acceptable. C. K- Factor rated transformers shall have an impedance range of 3% to 5 %, and shall have a minimum reactance of 2% in order to help reduce neutral current when supplying loads with large amounts of third harmonic current. D. Transformers 15 kVA and larger shall have a minimum of 6 - 2.5% full capacity primary taps for 480 V primaries and a minimum of 2 - 5% full capacity taps for 208 V primaries. Exact voltages and taps to be as designated on the plans or the transformer schedule. E. The maximum temperature of the top of the enclosure shall not exceed 50° C rise above a 40° C ambient. F. The transformer(s) shall be rated as indicated in the following schedule: 1. Identification Number(s) 2. kVA Rating 3. Voltages 4. Phase 5. Frequency 6. Temperature Rise 7. K- Factor 2.03 CONSTRUCTION A. Transformer coils shall be of the continuous wound construction and shall be impregnated with nonhygroscopic, thermosetting varnish. B. All cores to be constructed with low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Magnetic flux densities are to be kept well below the saturation point to prevent core overheating. The core laminations shall be clamped together with steel angles. The completed core and coil shall be bolted to the base of the enclosure but isolated by means of rubber vibration - absorbing mounts. There shall be no metal - to -metal contact between the core and coil and the enclosure except for a flexible safety ground strap. Sound isolation systems requiring the complete removal of all fastening devices will not be acceptable. Dry-Type Transformers — K Rated 16462 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility C. The core of the transformer shall be visibly grounded to the enclosure by means of a flexible grounding conductor sized in accordance with applicable UL and NEC standards. D. The transformer enclosures shall be ventilated and be fabricated of heavy gauge, sheet steel construction. The entire enclosure shall be finished utilizing a continuous process consisting of degreasing, cleaning and phosphatizing, followed by electrostatic deposition of polymer polyester powder coating and baking cycle to provide uniform coating of all edges and surfaces. The coating shall be UL recognized for outdoor use. The coating color shall be ANSI 49. E. Transformers shall be supplied with quality, full width electrostatic shields resulting in a maximum effective coupling capacitance between primary and secondary of 33 picofarads. With transformers connected under normal, loaded operating conditions, the attenuation of line noise and transients shall equal or exceed the following limits: 1. Common Mode: 0 to 1.5k Hz -120 dB; 1.5k Hz to 10k Hz - 90 dB; 10k Hz to 100kHz - 65 dB; 100k Hz to 1M Hz - 40 dB. 2. Transverse Mode: 1.5k Hz to 10k Hz - 52 dB; 10k Hz to 100k Hz - 30 dB; 100k Hz to 1M Hz - 30 dB. 2.04 SOUND LEVELS A. Sound levels shall be warranted by the manufacturer not to exceed the following: 1. K-4 rating: 15 to 50 kVA - 45 dB; 51 to 150 kVA - 50 dB; 151 to 300 kVA - 55 dB; 301 to 500 kVA - 60 dB; 501 to 700 kVA - 62 dB; 701 to 1000 kVA - 64 dB. 2. K -13 rating: 15 to 50 kVA - 42 dB; 51 to 150 kVA - 47 dB; 151 to 300 kVA - 52 dB; 301 to 500 kVA - 57 dB; 501 to 700 kVA - 69 dB; 701 to 1000 kVA - 61 dB. Dry-Type Transformers — K Rated END OF SECTION 16462 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 16470 PANELBOARDS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Power Distribution Panelboard - Furnish and install distribution panelboard(s) as specified herein and where shown on the associated schedules and drawings. B. Lighting and Appliance Panelboard - Furnish and install lighting and appliance panelboard(s) as specified herein and where shown on the associated schedules and drawings. 1.02 REFERENCES The panelboard(s) and circuit breaker(s) referenced herein are designed and manufactured according to the latest revision of the following specifications. A. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards B. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. C. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers D. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum) E. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment F. UL 67 - Panelboards G. UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead -front Switches H. UL 489 - Molded -Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures I. CSA Standard C22.2 No. 29 -M1989 - Panelboards and Enclosed Panelboards J. CSA Standard C22.2 No. 5 -M91 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers K. Federal Specification W- P -115C - Type 1 Class 1 L. Federal Specification W- P -115C - Type II Class 1 M. Federal Specification W- C -375B /Gen - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case, Branch Circuit And Service. N. Federal Specification W- C -865C - Fusible Switches 0. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC) Panelboards 16470 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. P. ASTM - American Society of Testing Materials 1.03 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION Tu A. Approval documents shall include drawings. Drawings shall c panelboard dimensions, interior mounting dimensions, and wir dimensions. The location of the main, branches, and solid ne shown. In addition, the drawing shall illustrate one line diagra voltage systems. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS wila Switch Facility ntain overall ng gutter tral shall be clearly s with applicable A. Company specializing in manufacturing of panelboard product with a minimum of fifty (50) years documented experience. B. Panelboards shall be manufactured in accordance with standa ds listed Article 1.02 - REFERENCES. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inspect and report concealed damage to carrier within their required time period. B. Handle carefully to avoid damage to panelboard internal comp•nents, enclosure, and finish. C. Store in a clean, dry environment. Maintain factory packaging -nd, if required, provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to p otect enclosure(s) from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. 1.06 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Manufacturer shall provide installation instructions and NEMA .tandards Publication PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operatio and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall warrant specified equipment free from defe is in materials and workmanship for the lesser of one (1) year from the date of ins allation or eighteen (18) months from the date of purchase. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Shall be Square D Company, Westinghouse /Cutler Hammer, 1. I -LINE - CLASS 2110 2. NQOD - CLASS 1630 Panelboards 16470 -2 iemens. 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 3. NEHB - CLASS 1660 B. Substitutions must be submitted in writing three weeks prior to original bid date with supporting documentation demonstrating that the alternate manufacturer meets all aspects of the specification herein. 2.02 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. I -LINE Circuit Breaker Distribution Panelboard 1. Interior a. Shall be Square D I -LINE type rated 600 VAC or 250 VDC maximum. Continuous main current ratings as indicated on associated schedules and drawings not to exceed 1200 amperes maximum. Panelboard bus current ratings shall be determined by heat -rise tests conducted in accordance with UL 67. b. Provide UL Listed short circuit current ratings (SCCR) as indicated on the associated [schedules] [drawings] not to exceed the lowest interrupting capacity rating of any circuit breaker installed with a maximum of 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes. Main lug and main breaker panelboards shall be suitable for use as Service Equipment when application requirements comply with UL 67 and NEC Articles 230 -F and -G. c. The panelboard interior shall have three flat bus bars stacked and aligned vertically with glass reinforced polyester insulators laminated between phases. The molded polyester insulators shall support and provide phase isolation to the entire length of bus. d. The bussing shall be fully rated with sequentially phased branch distribution. Panelboard bussing rated 100 through 600 amperes shall be plated aluminum. Bussing rated 800 amperes and above shall be plated copper. The entire interleaved assembly shall be contained between two (2) U- shaped steel channels, permanently secured to a galvanized steel mounting pan by fasteners employing the use of a tamper- resistant warning label. e. Interior trim shall be of dead -front construction to shield user from all energized parts. Main circuit breakers through 800 amperes shall be vertically mounted. Main circuit breaker and main lug interiors shall be field convertible for top or bottom incoming feed. f. Equipment ground bar shall be bonded. Ground bar shall be aluminum. Solid neutral shall be equipped with a full capacity grounding strap for service entrance applications. UL Listed panelboards with 200% rated solid neutrals shall have plated copper neutral bus for non - linear load applications. Gutter - mounted neutral will not be acceptable. g. Nameplates shall contain system information and catalog number or factory order number. Interior wiring diagram, neutral wiring diagram, Panelboards 16470 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility UL Listed label, and Short Circuit Current Rating shall be provided. Leveling provisions shall be provided for flush mounted applications. 2. Molded Case Circuit Breakers - Mains and Branches a. Common Characteristics Circuit breakers shall be constructed in accordance with the following standards: UL 489 Federal Specification W- C- 375B /GEN NEMA AB1 CSA 22.2, No. 5 -M91 IEC 157 -1 BS 4752 b. Circuit breakers shall be constructed using glass reinforced polyester insulating material providing superior dielectric strength. Current - carrying components shall be completely isolated from the handle and the accessory mounting area. c. Circuit breakers shall have an overcenter, trip -free, toggle operating mechanism which will provide quick -make, quick -break contact action. The circuit breaker shall have common tripping of all poles. d. Circuit breakers shall have a push -to -trip button for maintenance and testing purposes. e. Circuit breaker escutcheon shall have intemational I/O markings, in addition to standard ON /OFF markings. Circuit breaker handle accessories shall provide provisions for locking handle in the ON or OFF position. f. Breaker faceplate shall indicate rated ampacity. Breaker faceplate shall indicate UL and IEC certification standards with applicable voltage systems and corresponding AIR ratings. g. Circuit breakers shall be factory sealed and shall have a date code on the face of the circuit breaker. Poles shall be labeled with respective phase designations. h. Standard construction circuit breakers shall be UL Listed for reverse connection without restrictive line or load markings. Circuit breakers shall be suitable for mounting and operating in any position. J• Panelboards Circuit breakers equipped with line terminal jaws shall meet the following requirements. In the event of a short circuit condition, the increased magnetic flux shall cause the jaws to grip the supply bus more firmly. Circuit breaker jaws shall be protected by an impact resistant molded shroud. Circuit breakers equipped with line terminal jaws shall not require any additional external mounting hardware. Circuit breakers shall be held in mounted position by a self- contained bracket secured to the mounting pan by fasteners. Each individual circuit breaker shall be 16470 -4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility capable of being mounted independently. Circuit breakers of different frame sizes shall be capable of being mounted across from each other. k. Manufacturer shall provide time /current characteristic trip curves (Ip and 12T let- through curves for true current limiting circuit breakers only) for each type of circuit breaker. I. Lugs shall be UL Listed to accept solid or copper conductors only. Lugs shall be suitable for 90° C rated wire, sized according to the 75° C temperature rating per NEC Table 310 -16. Lug body shall be bolted in place; snap -in designs are not acceptable. 3. Circuit breakers shall be UL Listed for use with the following accessories: Shunt Trip, Under Voltage Trip, Auxiliary Switch, Alarm Switch, Ground Fault Shunt Trip, Electrical Operators, Cylinder Locks, Mechanical Lugs Kits, Compression Lugs Kits, and Handle Accessories. 4. Thermal Magnetic B. Circuit protective devices shall be Square D molded case circuit breakers. Circuit breakers shall be standard interrupting construction. Ampere ratings shall be as shown on the schedules and drawings. C. Circuit breakers shall have a permanent trip unit with thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. Thermal elements shall be factory calibrated to operate in a 40° C ambient environment. Thermal elements shall be ambient compensating above 40° C. D. Two- and three -pole circuit breakers shall have an internal common trip crossbar to provide simultaneous tripping. Circuit breaker frame sizes above 100 amperes shall have a single magnetic trip adjustment located on the front of the breaker which allows the user to simultaneously select the desired trip level of all poles. E. Standard circuit breakers up to 250 amperes at 600 VAC shall be UL Listed with HACR ratings. 2.03 ENCLOSURES A. Type 1 Boxes 1. Boxes shall be galvanized steel constructed in accordance with UL 50 requirements. Zinc - coated galvannealed steel will not be acceptable. 2. Boxes shall have removable blank end walls and interior mounting studs. Interior support bracket shall be provided for ease of interior installation. 3. Maximum enclosure dimensions shall be 42 in wide and 9.5 in deep. B. Type 1 Trim Fronts Panelboards 16470 -5 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 1. Trim front steel shall meet strength and rigidity requirements per UL 50 standards. Shall have an ANSI 49 medium gray enamel electrodeposited over cleaned phosphatized steel. 2. Trim front shall be 1 -piece with door available in flush and /or surface mount. Trim front door shall have rounded corners and edges free of burrs. A clear plastic directory card holder shall be mounted on the inside of the door. 3. Locks shall be cylindrical tumbler type with larger enclosures requiring sliding vault locks with 3 -point latching. All lock assemblies shall be keyed alike. Two (2) keys shall be provided with each lock. 2.04 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARD TYPE A. NQOD 1. Interior a. Shall be type NQOD panelboard rated for 240 VAC /48 VDC maximum. Continuous main current ratings, as indicated on associated schedules, not to exceed 600 amperes maximum. b. Minimum short circuit current rating: 10,000 in rms symmetrical amperes at 240 VAC. c. Short circuit current rating: 5,000 at 48 VDC. d. Provide one (1) continuous bus bar per phase. Each bus bar shall have sequentially phased branch circuit connectors suitable for plug - on or bolt -on branch circuit breakers. The bussing shall be fully rated. Panelboard bus current ratings shall be determined by heat -rise tests conducted in accordance with UL 67. Bussing rated 100 -400 amperes shall be [copper] [aluminum]. Bussing rated for 600 amperes shall be copper as standard construction. Panelboards shall be suitable for use as Service Equipment when application requirements comply with UL 67 and NEC Articles 230 -F and -G. e. All current - carrying parts shall be insulated from ground and phase -to- phase by Noryl high dielectric strength thermoplastic or equivalent. f. Split solid neutral shall be plated and located in the mains compartment up to 225 amperes so all incoming neutral cable may be of the same length. [UL Listed panelboards with 200% rated solid neutral shall be plated copper for non - linear Toad applications. Panelboards shall be marked for non - linear load applications]. g. Interior trim shall be of dead -front construction to shield user from energized parts. Dead -front trim shall have pre - formed twistouts covering unused mounting space. h. Nameplates shall contain system information and catalog number or factory order number. Interior wiring diagram, neutral wiring diagram, Panelboards 16470 -6 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility Panelboards UL Listed label and short circuit current rating shall be displayed on the interior or in a booklet format. i. Interiors shall be field convertible for top or bottom incoming feed. Main and sub -feed circuit breakers shall be vertically mounted. Main lug interiors up to 400 amperes shall be field convertible to main breaker. Interior leveling provisions shall be provided for flush mounted applications. 2. Main Circuit Breaker a. Main circuit breakers shall have an overcenter, trip -free, toggle mechanism which will provide quick -make, quick -break contact action. Circuit breakers shall have a permanent trip unit with thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. Each thermal element shall be true rms sensing and be factory calibrated to operate in a 40° C ambient environment. Thermal elements shall be ambient compensating above 40° C. b. Two- and three -pole circuit breakers shall have common tripping of all poles. Circuit breakers frame sizes above 100 amperes shall have a single magnetic trip adjustment located on the front of the circuit breaker which allows the user to simultaneously select the desired trip level of all poles. Circuit breakers shall have a push -to -trip button for maintenance and testing purposes. c. Breaker handle and faceplate shall indicate rated ampacity. Standard construction circuit breakers shall be UL Listed for reverse connection without restrictive line or Toad markings. d. Circuit breaker escutcheon shall have international I/O markings, in addition to standard ON /OFF markings. Circuit breaker handle accessories shall provide provisions for locking handle in the ON or OFF position. e. Lugs shall be UL Listed to accept solid or copper conductors only. Lugs shall be suitable for 90° C rated wire, sized according to the 75° C temperature rating per NEC Table 310 -16. Lug body shall be bolted in place; snap -in designs are not acceptable. f. The circuit breakers shall be UL Listed for use with the following accessories: Shunt Trip, Under Voltage Trip, Ground Fault Shunt Trip, Auxiliary Switch, Alarm Switch, Mechanical Lug Kits, and Compression Lug Kits. 3. Branch Circuit Breakers a. Circuit breakers shall be UL Listed with amperage ratings, interrupting ratings, and number of poles as indicated on the panelboard schedules. b. Molded case branch circuit breakers shall have bolt -on type bus connectors. 16470 -7 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility c. Circuit breakers shall have an overcenter toggle mechanism which will provide quick -make, quick -break contact action. Circuit breakers shall have thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. Two- and three -pole circuit breakers shall have common tripping of all poles. d. There shall be two forms of visible trip indication. The breaker handle shall reside in a position between ON and OFF. e. The exposed faceplates of all branch circuit breakers shall be flush with one another. f. Lugs shall be UL Listed to accept solid or stranded copper conductors only]. Lugs shall be suitable 90° C rated wire, sized according to the 75° C temperature rating per NEC Table 310 -16. Branch circuit breakers rated 30 amperes and below shall be UL Listed to accept 60° C rated wire. g. Breakers shall be UL Listed for use with the following factory installed accessories: Shunt Trip, Auxiliary Switch, Alarm Switch. 4. Enclosures a. Type 1 Boxes Boxes shall be galvanized steel constructed in accordance with UL 50 requirements. Galvanealed steel will not be acceptable. Boxes shall have removable end walls with knockouts located on one end. Boxes shall have welded interior mounting studs. Interior mounting brackets are not required. Box width shall be 20 in wide Type 1 Fronts B. NEHB Panelboards b. Front shall meet strength and rigidity requirements per UL 50 standards. Front shall have ANSI 49 gray enamel electrodeposited over cleaned phosphatized steel. c. Panelboards rated 225 amperes and below shall have MONO -FLAT fronts with concealed door hinges and trim screws. Front shall not be removable with the door locked. Panelboards rated above 225 amperes shall have fronts with trim clamps and concealed door hinges. Front doors shall have rounded corners and edges shall be free of burrs. d. Front shall have cylindrical tumbler type lock with catch and spring- loaded stainless steel door pull. All lock assemblies shall be keyed alike. Two (2) keys shall be provided with each lock. A clear plastic directory card holder shall be mounted on the inside of door. 16470 -8 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility Panelboards 1. Interior a. Shall be type NEHB panelboard rated for 480Y/277 VAC maximum. Continuous main current ratings as indicated on associated schedules, not to exceed 400 amperes maximum for main breaker or 600 amperes maximum for main lugs. b. Minimum short circuit current rating: 25,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 48OY/277 VAC. c. Provide one (1) continuous bus bar per phase. Each bus bar shall have sequentially phased branch circuit connectors suitable for plug - on or bolt -on branch circuit breakers. The bussing shall be fully rated. Panelboard bus current ratings shall be determined by heat -rise tests conducted in accordance with UL 67. Bussing rated 100 -400 amperes shall be [copper] [aluminum]. Bussing rated for 600 amperes shall be copper as standard construction. Panelboards shall be suitable for use as Service Equipment when application requirements comply with UL 67 and NEC Articles 230 -F and -G. d. All current - carrying parts shall be insulated from ground and phase -to- phase by Noryl high dielectric strength thermoplastic or equivalent. e. Split solid neutral shall be plated and located in the mains compartment up to 225 amperes so all incoming neutral cable may be of the same length. [UL Listed panelboards with 200% rated solid neutral shall be plated copper for non - linear load applications. Panelboards shall be marked for non - linear load applications]. f. Interior trim shall be of dead -front construction to shield user from energized parts. Dead -front trim shall have pre - formed twistouts covering unused mounting space. g. Nameplates shall contain system information, catalog number, or factory order number. Interior wiring diagram, neutral wiring diagram, UL Listed label, and short circuit current rating shall be displayed on the interior or in a booklet format. h. Interiors shall be field convertible for top or bottom incoming feed. Main and sub -feed circuit breakers shall be vertically mounted. Main lug interiors up to 400 amperes shall be field convertible to main circuit breaker. Interior leveling provisions shall be provided for flush mounted applications. 2. Main Circuit Breaker a. Main circuit breakers shall have an overcenter, trip -free, toggle mechanism which will provide quick -make, quick -break contact action. Circuit breakers shall have a permanent trip unit with thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. Each thermal element shall be true rms sensing and be factory calibrated to operate in a 40° C ambient environment. Thermal elements shall be ambient compensating above 40° C. 16470 -9 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility Panelboards b. Two- and three -pole circuit breakers shall have common tripping of all poles. Circuit breakers frame sizes above 100 amperes shall have a single magnetic trip adjustment located on the front of the circuit breaker which allows the user to simultaneously select the desired trip level of all poles. Circuit breakers shall have a push -to -trip button for maintenance and testing purposes. c. Breaker handle and faceplate shall indicate rated ampacity. Standard construction circuit breakers shall be UL Listed for reverse connection without restrictive line or load markings. d. Circuit breaker escutcheon shall have International I/O markings, in addition to standard ON /OFF markings. Circuit breaker handle accessories shall provide provisions for locking handle in the ON or OFF position. e. Lugs shall be UL Listed to accept solid or stranded [copper and aluminum conductors] [copper conductors only]. Lugs shall be suitable for 90° C rated wire, sized according to the 75° C temperature rating per NEC Table 310 -16. Lug body shall be bolted in place; snap - in designs are not acceptable. f. The circuit breakers shall be UL Listed for use with the following accessories: Shunt Trip, Under Voltage Trip, Ground Fault Shunt Trip, Auxiliary Switch, Alarm Switch, Mechanical Lug Kits, and Compression Lug Kits. 3. Branch Circuit,Breakers a. Circuit breakers shall be UL Listed with amperage ratings, interrupting ratings, and number of poles as indicated on the panelboard schedules. b. Molded case branch circuit breakers shall have bolt -on type bus connectors. c. Circuit breakers shall have an overcenter toggle mechanism which will provide quick -make, quick -break contact action. Circuit breakers shall have thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. Two- and three -pole circuit breakers shall have common tripping of all poles. d. There shall be two forms of visible trip indication. The breaker handle shall reside in a position between ON and OFF. The exposed faceplates of all branch circuit breakers shall be flush with one another. e. Lugs shall be UL Listed to accept solid or copper conductors only. Lugs shall be suitable for 90° C rated wire, sized according to the 75° C temperature rating per NEC Table 310 -16. Branch breakers rated 30 amperes and below shall be UL Listed to accept 60° C rated wire. f. Breakers shall be UL Listed for use with the following factory installed accessories: Shunt Trip, Auxiliary Switch, Alarm Switch. '16470-10 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 4. Enclosures a. Type 1 Boxes Boxes shall be galvanized steel constructed in accordance with UL 50 requirements. Galvanealed steel will not be acceptable. Boxes shall have removable end walls with knockouts located on one end. Boxes shall have welded interior mounting studs. Interior mounting brackets are not required. Box width shall be 20 in wide. b. Type 1 Fronts Front shall meet strength and rigidity requirements per UL 50 standards. Front shall have ANSI 49 gray enamel electrodeposited over cleaned phosphatized steel. Fronts shall be 1 -piece with door. Mounting shall be flush and /or surface as indicated on associated schedules. Panelboards rated 225 amperes and below shall have MONO -FLAT fronts with concealed door hinges and trim screws. Front shall not be removable with the door locked. Panelboards rated above 225 amperes shall have fronts with trim clamps and concealed door hinges. Front doors shall have rounded corners; edges shall be free of burrs. Front shall have cylindrical tumbler type lock with catch and spring - loaded stainless steel door pull. All lock assemblies shall be keyed alike. Two (2) keys shall be provided with each lock. A clear plastic directory card holder shall be mounted on the inside of door. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, NEMA PB 1.1 and NEC standards. B. Anchor panelboards to structure and make branch circuit connections. C. Coordinate the panelboard bus ratings and circuit breaker coordination rating with the available fault current. D. Install panelboards complete with all feeders and sub - feeders as indicated on the one -line diagram, floor plans on the drawings and as specified herein. E. All wiring to all panels is to be neatly cabled and tied. F. Surface mounted panels denoted with skirts shall have one piece backcan with skirt to floor or ceiling as indicated on the plans and schedules. Skirts are to be fabricated by panel manufacturer and to be same thickness and finish as panel. G. All panels shall be cleaned of debris and thoroughly cleaned internally before trim is installed. Panelboards 16470 -11 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility H. Each panelboard enclosure shall have a nameplate fastened to the outside of panel door engraved with the panelboard designation as noted on the panel schedules. See other Division 16 sections for identification /labeling requirements. I. Equip all panels with a typewritten circuit directory on the inside of each panels door identifying the type and location of every Toad. Spare circuits shall be identified as such in pencil. Permanent room numbers shall be used for location identification. Include all field changes and change order additions and deletions to the schedules prior to application of the indexes. DO NOT SIMPLY COPY THE PANELS SCHEDULES AS LISTED ON THE DRAWINGS. J. All panelboards flush mounted shall have a minimum of four (4)'/," spare conduits extended into drop ceiling above and available for future expansion of conduits. Cap and label conduits inside the panelboards. K. Install panelboards such that the maximum height conforms to the height restriction of the NEC and does not exceed 6' -0" to the centerline of the main breaker. L. Where multiple panels are located side by side and of different cabinet sizes, they shall be aligned with the top edge of the tallest panel. M. Panelboards which have sections which are not align will not be accepted. N. Mount panelboard at location shown, make sure that N EC clearances are maintained. O. Where cabinets cannot be set fully flush due to the shallowness of a partition, trim protruding sides with an approved metal or hardwood molding, fasten cabinet so as to conceal intersection of the wall and cabinet. P. Where modification of an existing panelboard or switchboard is required provide all modifications required to accommodate the new installation. Such modifications shall in no fashion void the UL label for such equipment. Note that the plans may not indicate all work required and the Contractor shall field verify conditions prior to bid. Later claims for additional work or materials that could have been foreseen by such field inspection will not be allowed. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect complete installation for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. B. Measure steady state Toad currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads within 20% of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi -wire branch circuits. C. Check tightness of bolted connections and circuit breaker connections using calibrated torque wrench or torque screwdriver per manufacturers written specifications. END OF SECTION Panelboards 16470 -12 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 16481 SURGE SUPPRESSION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. AC main entrance protection. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code B. NEMA ST20 C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1449 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Suppliers asking consideration as an approved equal shall submit complete, warranted performance data and physical dimensions for similar devices. Data shall be submitted for each size specified, and shall be received by the consultant engineer no less than 10 days prior to the bid due date for consideration. 1.04 STANDARDS A. All equipment shall be listed by UL. B. Conform to the requirements of ANSI /NFPA 70. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All TVSS units shall be AC type and meet ANSI /IEEE C62.41 -1980 for both categories A and B, and shall be guaranteed for a period of two years. B. The Contractor shall include in their bid the cost for an on -site installation coordination with an authorized factory representative before final acceptance of the installation. PART2 PRODUCT 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Surge suppression components shall be as manufactured by Northern Technologies, or prior approved equal. B. Approved manufacturers shall be registered firms in accordance with ISO 9001. 2.02 RATINGS INFORMATION Surge Suppression 16481 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility A. Unit shall be rated as approved for service entrance main swithgear protection. B. Unit shall be selected to match incoming voltage, phase and frequency. C. Unit shall comply with UL -1449 ratings for surge suppression equipment. D. Enclosure shall be NEMA 1 rated 2.03 MATERIALS A. Provide a Northern Technologies Model #DMK -I5 for 277/480 volts AC, three phase, four wire and ground operation TVSS for the main incoming switch section. B. Provide surge suppression receptacles as specified in Section 16140 at all noted computer and telephone backboard locations unless receptacle circuits originate from a branch circuit panelboard equipped with TVSS protection. C. All TVSS devices shall be manufactured by a single source manufacturer with local representation and offer a source of replacement parts within 50 miles of the project. D. Product employing encapsulation potting shall not be permitted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Mount unit to the structure with an approved means and located adjacent to the servicing load in a manner that does not conflict with the current and potential conduit entrances to the panelboard /service equipment. B. TVSS units to be mounted in a plumb manner parallel to the panelboard which is being protected. C. Where possible, keep connecting leads under 18 inches in total length. END OF SECTION Surge Suppression 16481 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 16485 CONTACTORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General purpose contactors B. Lighting contactors 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI /NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. B. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. C. ANSI /NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include dimensions, size, voltage ratings and current ratings. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. 1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Accurately record actual locations of each contactor and indicate circuits controlled. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for replacing and maintaining coil and contacts. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI /NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS - GENERAL PURPOSE CONTACTORS Contactors 16485 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility A. Square D Company - 8502 Type S or approved equal. 2.02 GENERAL PURPOSE CONTACTORS A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, ac general purpose magnetic contactor. B. Coil Voltage: 60 Hz As indicated on plans. C. Coil: Be of the encapsulated type. D. Poles: Four as indicated on plans. E. Contacts: Totally enclosed, double -break silver- cadmium -oxide power contacts. Contact inspection and replacement shall be possible without disturbing line or load wiring. F. Wiring: Straight- through wiring with all terminals clearly marked. G. Enclosure: ANSI /NEMA ICS 6, as required to meet conditions of installation and /or mounted in skirt of panelboard. H. Accessories: 1. Auxiliary Contacts: field convertible. 2.03 MANUFACTURERS - POWER LIGHTING CONTACTORS A. Square D Company - 8903 Type S or approved equal. 2.04 POWER LIGHTING CONTACTORS A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, magnetic lighting contactor. B. Configuration: Mechanically held and electrically operated with encapsulated coils. Standard coil clearing contacts are to be provided so that the contactor coils shall be energized only during the instance of operation. C. Coil Voltage: 60 Hz as indicated on the plans. D. Poles: Four as indicated on the plans. E. Contact Rating: 30 amperes for all types of ballast and tungsten lighting, resistive heating, and motor loads. F. Contacts: Totally enclosed, double -break silver- cadmium -oxide power contacts. Contact inspection and replacement shall be possible without disturbing line or load wiring. G. Wiring: Straight- through wiring with all terminals clearly marked. Contactors 16485 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility H. Enclosure: ANSI /NEMA ICS 6, Type as required to meet conditions of installation. I. Disconnect Means: Contactor shall not provide the disconnecting means in the same enclosure. J. Accessories: 1. Auxiliary Contacts: field convertible. 2.05 MANUFACTURERS - MULTI -POLE LIGHTING CONTACTORS A. Square D Company - 8903 Type L & LX or approved equal. 2.06 MULTI -POLE LIGHTING CONTACTORS A. Description: magnetic lighting contactor. B. Configuration: Mechanically held and electrically operated with encapsulated coils. Standard coil clearing contacts are to be provided so that the contactor coils shall be energized only during the instance of operation. C. Coil Voltage: 60 as indicated on the plans. D. Poles: 4 as indicated on the plans. E. Contact Rating: 30 amperes for ballasted lighting loads and 20 amperes for all types of tungsten lighting, resistive heating, and motor loads. F. Contacts: Totally enclosed, double -break silver- cadmium -oxide power contacts. Contact inspection and replacement shall be possible without disturbing line or load wiring. All contacts shall have clearly visible N.O. and N.C. contact status indicators. G. Wiring: Straight- through wiring with all terminals clearly marked. H. Enclosure: ANSI /NEMA ICS 6, as required to meet conditions of installation. 2.07 MANUFACTURERS - PANELBOARD LIGHTING CONTACTORS A. Square D Company - 8903 Type PB or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION Contactors 16485 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 16500 LIGHTING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Relocation of existing Tight fixtures as noted on plans. B. Installation of new light fixtures as noted on plans C. Control of new and existing light fixtures as noted on plans 1.02 CODE REQUIREMENTS AND STANDARDS A. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. 57 -1972 Electric Lighting Fixtures (R1982) 2. 844 -1984 Electric Lighting Fixtures for Hazardous Locations (R1985) 3. 1570 -1982 Fluorescent Lighting Fixtures (R1985) 4. 1571 -1984 Incandescent Lighting Fixtures (R1985) 5. 1572 -1985 High Intensity Discharge Lighting Fixtures 6. 773 -1982 Plug -in Locking -Type Photo Controls for Use With Area Lighting 7. 917 -1985 Clock Operated Switches 8. 924 -1984 Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment (R1985) B. Guarantee: Contractor shall guarantee and replace without charge, all ballasts which fail in normal service or generate abnormal or objectionable noise within a two -year period following final acceptance or use by the Owner. 1 1.03 SUBMITTALS 1 1 1 A. Per Section 01340 and 16010 on the following: Lighting 1. Lighting Fixtures 16500 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 2. Photoelectric Relay 3. Contactor Relay 4. Ballasts 5. Lamps PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIXTURES A. Provide in accordance with Lighting Fixture Schedule on drawings and as shown on plans. B. Verify exact type of all ceilings before bidding and following approval of ceiling submittals. C. Provide fixtures with proper fitting flanges, mounting supports, including sloped ceiling adapters, etc., UL listed for conditions of use, at no increase to contract amount. 2.02 LAMPS A. Provide lamps for all fixtures in accordance with Fixture Schedule and as follows: 1. High Pressure Sodium: Diffuse coated lamps only. 2. Provide other lamps and special purpose lamps as scheduled or required by fixture type specified. 3. Provide 10% spares of all lamp types at final acceptance. 4. Incandescent lamps shall be rated 130 -volt. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. General Electric Company b. GTE Sylvania, Inc. c. Westinghouse Electric Corporation B. Provide all new lamps delivered to project in original manufacturer's cartons. Factory prelamped fluorescent fixtures are approved for use. Clean fixtures and replace damaged or faulty lamps and equipment to provide proper operation not more than 14 days prior to final inspection. Lighting 16500 -2 07/07/98 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. 2.03 BALLASTS Tukwila Switch Facility A. Provide high power factor regulator or autoregulator -type ballasts for luminaires with manufacturer's best sound rating for the lamp current and primary voltage required. B. Outdoor Ballasted Fixtures: Provide with appropriate ballasts and auxiliaries as required to ensure reliable starting and operation in temperatures of at least -70 °F. 2.04 CONTROLS A. Photoelectric Relay: Existing — re -use. B. Reverse Acting Thermostat: SPDT switch with remote sensor adjustable from -30 °F to +90 °F, 120 -volt. Honeywell No. T6031A1029. C. Contactor: 120 -volt, 60 cycle, enclosed in NEMA I enclosure. Co tinuous rating for inductive or tungsten loads per drawings and schedules. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FIXTURE INSTALLATION A. Mount outlets to be readily accessible and at positions and height to clear ductwork, piping, etc. Lighting 1. Coordinate with work of all other trades so that light fixture ceiling pattern or mechanical diffusers. Where shown in a on Architectural plans the configuration with the highest qu Closely examine both Architectural plans and electrical pla layouts. do not conflict with the ifferent configuration ntity shall govern. s for lighting fixture 2. Lay in lighting fixtures independently supported by fixture w res from structure and not solely supported by 2x4 ceiling cord. Provide 2 additio al #9 wire support, securing the fixture in all four corners per the UBC, NEC A icle 410 and WAC. B. Set all fixtures true to line, free of light leaks, warps, dents, or other irregularities. 1. Adjust length of stems of suspended luminaires as require to hang all luminaires level and in same horizontal plane. 2. Mount fixtures at heights shown on drawings. C. Cleaning: Leave fixtures clean, free of fingerprints, etc., especial y on lenses and reflectors. D. Grounding: Connect each fixture housing to the equipment grou ding conductor by means of a crimped, spade -type terminal connector secured to t e housing with a self - tapping screw. 16500 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility E. Repair or replace excessively noisy ballasts to attain rated sound level. F. Multiple section fluorescent lighting fixtures shall be internally wired and connected to accomplish the switching arrangements required by the electrical drawings for the building and the intended switching configuration. G. Coordinate will other electrical and mechanical work as appropriate to properly interface installation if interior lighting fixtures with other work to avoid conflicts. H. Securely mount all fixtures, provide all additional hangers and support brackets , including canopies, stem suspensions of proper length chains, etc. as necessary to securely fasten and support fixtures. All hangers shall support a weight of three times the weight of the fixture supported. Recessed fixtures shall be secured to the ceiling framing to comply with NEC Article 410. I. Install recessed luminaire using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating and energy code compliance. J. Cord connected fixtures shall be complete with cord and plug. Plug to be twistlock type to match receptacle. A separate supporting means shall be provided. Do not support the fixture by the cord. K. Provide a receptacle for cord connected fixtures directly above the fixture. The cord shall be visible for the entire length and shall penetrate a ceiling tile. L. All recessed Tight fixtures(in accessible ceilings) shall be connected by means of a flexible conduits which is attached to a 4' square junction box located in the immediate vicinity of the fixture. Boxes may serve more than one fixture. However, no more than one extension ring may be installed and the junction shall of sufficient size to accommodate all conductors and accessories. M. For Hi /Low switched fixtures the inboard lamps shall be switched separately then the outboard lamps. N. Where channels in light fixtures are used as raceways a separate grounding conductor shall be installed through and connected to each Tight fixture. END OF SECTION Lighting 16500 -4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 16611 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPP Y PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This specification describes a three -phase continuous duty, uninterruptible power system, hereafter referred to as the U in conjunction with the existing building electrical system to back -up and distribution for critical electrical Toads. The UP module, one or more battery strings, and other features as 1.02 UPS MODULE DESCRIPTION n -line, solid state S. The UPS shall operate rovide power conditioning, shall consist of the UPS escribed in this specification. A. UPS Module Components: The UPS module shall consist •f the following main components: 1. Rectifier /Charger 2. Static Inverter 3. Bypass 4. Output Isolation Transformer 5. Control Panel 6. Monitor Panel 7. Communication Panel B. UPS Module Modes of Operation: The UPS Module shall o automatic system in the following modes: 1. Normal: The critical load shall be continuously suppl Rectifier /Charger shall derive power from the comm supply DC power to the Inverter while simultaneous) 2. Battery: Upon failure of the commercial AC power, t to be supplied by the Inverter, which shall obtain po any operator intervention. There shall be no interrup failure or restoration of the commercial AC source. erate as an on -line, fully ed by the Inverter. The rcial AC source and shall float - charging the battery. e critical load shall continue r from the batteries without ion to the critical load upon 3. Recharge: Upon restoration of the AC source, the R recharge the batteries and simultaneously shall provi Static Uninterruptible Power Supplies 16611 -1 ctifier /Charger shall e power to the Inverter. 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility This shall be an automatic function and shall cause no interruption to the critical load. 4. Bypass: If the UPS module must be taken out of the Normal mode for overload, load fault, or internal failures, the static bypass switch shall automatically transfer the critical Toad to the commercial AC power. Return from Bypass mode to Normal mode of operation shall be automatic. No -break transfer to and from Bypass mode shall be capable of being initiated manually, without operation of the static switch. 1.03 REFERENCES A. UL 1778 - (Underwriters Laboratories) Standard for Uninterruptible Power Supply Equipment. Listed Equipment (US and Canada). B. CSA C22.2 NO.107.1 -M91 - (Canadian Standards Association) Commercial and Industrial Power Supplies. Listed Equipment (US and Canada). C. NEMA PE -1 -1983 - (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) Uninterruptible power systems standard. D. IEC 801 -2 - (International Electrotechnical Commission) Electromagnetic Compatibility For Industrial- Process Measurement and Control Equipment. E. IEC 146.4 - (International Electrotechnical Commission) Methods of specifying performance and test requirements of uninterruptible power systems. F. ANSI C62.41 -1980, Category A & B - (American National Standard) Recommended practice on surge voltages in low voltage power circuits. G. FCC Rules and Regulations 47, Part 15, Subpart J, Class A - (Federal Communications Commission) Certified compliance. H. EN 50091 -1 - (European Standard) Uninterruptible power systems, General and safety requirements for UPS used in restricted access locations. I. EN 50091 -2 - (European Standard) Uninterruptible power systems, Electromagnetic compatibility requirements. J. EN 50082 -1 - (European Standard) Uninterruptible power systems, Electromagnetic compatibility - generic emission standard; Generic standard class: Residential, commercial and Tight industrial. K. MIL - HDBK -217E - (Military Handbook) Reliability Prediction Of Electronics Equipment. 1.04 SUBMITTALS Static Uninterruptible Power Supplies 16611 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility A. The UPS shall be supplied with sufficient documentation, including the following manuals: 1. Operation Manual: One copy of the operation manual shall be furnished. It shall possess sufficient detail and clarity to enable the owner's technicians to understand and operate the UPS equipment. The manual shall describe the UPS in full by including the following major items: a. Operating Procedures b. Performance Data and Technical Data c. General Description d. UPS Module Description e. Communications Capability f. Battery Description g. Accessory Description 2. Installation Manual: One copy of the installation manual shall be furnished. It shall possess sufficient detail and clarity to enable the owner's technicians to install the UPS equipment. One set of the following drawings and data sheets shall be supplied: a. Receiving and Installation Instructions b. UPS One -Line Drawings c. Equipment Outline Drawings d. Interconnection Drawings e. Battery Wiring Diagram f. Accessory Wiring Diagrams 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. The UPS manufacturer shall have a minimum of ten years experience in the design, manufacture and testing of solid -state UPS. A list of installed UPS of the same type as the manufacturer proposes to furnish for this application shall be supplied with the proposal. Static Uninterruptible Power Supplies 16611 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility B. The UPS manufacturer shall have ISO 9001 certification for engineering /R &D, manufacturing facilities and the field service organization. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. The UPS shall withstand any combination of the following extemal environmental conditions without operational degradation. 1. Operating Temperature: 0 degrees C to +40 degrees C (32 degrees F to 104 degrees F) without derating (excluding batteries). 2. Storage Temperature: -20 degrees C to +70 degrees C (-4 degrees F to 158 degrees F). Prolonged storage above +40 degrees C (104 degrees F) will cause rapid battery self- discharge. 3. Relative Humidity (operating and storage): 95% maximum non - condensing. 4. Elevation: 5000 ft (1500 m) maximum at 40 degrees C without derating. B. Acoustical Noise: Noise generated by the UPS under normal operation shall not exceed 65 dbA at one meter from any operator surface, measured at 25 degrees C (77 degrees F) and full load. C. EMI Suppression: The UPS shall meet FCC Rules and Regulation 47, Part 15, Subpart J, for Class A devices. D. Electrostatic Discharge (ESD): The UPS shall meet IEC 801 -2. The UPS shall withstand up to 25 kV without damage and with no disturbance or adverse effect to the critical load. E. Efficiency: The typical UPS efficiency shall be 92% at full unity power factor Toad and nominal input voltage. 1. If present, an input auto - transformer may reduce the UPS efficiency an additional 1%. 2. If present, an input isolation transformer may reduce the UPS efficiency an additional 3 %. F. Input Surge Withstand Capability: The UPS shall be in compliance with ANSI C62.41, Category A & B (6 kV). 1.07 RELIABILITY AND MAINTAINABILITY A. Reliability 1. The calculated UPS module mean - time - between- failure which would result in an unsuccessful emergency transfer to intemal bypass and subsequent Toad loss, Static Uninterruptible Power Supplies 16611 -4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility shall be no Tess than 2,250,000 hours. This calculated MTBF shall be derived in accordance with MIL - HDBK -217E guidelines (ground benign conditions at 25C) and assume the availability of bypass input power to the UPS module. 2. The calculated mean - time - between- failure for the UPS module, which would result in a successful emergency transfer to internal bypass, shall be no Tess than 62,000 hours. This calculated MTBF shall be derived in accordance with MIL - HDBK-217E guidelines (ground benign conditions at 25C) and assume the availability of bypass input power to the UPS module. 3. The calculated mean - time - between- failure for any UPS module component, shall be no less than 43,000 hours. This calculated MTBF shall be derived in accordance with MIL - HDBK -217E guidelines (ground benign conditions at 25C). 4. The UPS module shall feature redundant power supplies. Power to the control power supplies shall originate from the Rectifier /Charger input, Bypass input and UPS module output. In the event one of the power supplies shall fail, the UPS module shall continue to operate in Normal mode without load derating. A failed power supply condition shall be enunciated on the monitor panel and available remotely through the RS232 port. A failure alarm shall automatically clear when the failed power supply is replaced. 5. The UPS module shall feature redundant cooling fans. In the event one of the fans shall fail, the UPS module shall continue to operate in Normal mode without Toad derating. A failed cooling fan condition shall be enunciated on the monitor panel and available remotely through the RS232 port. A failure alarm shall automatically clear when the failed fan is replaced. 6. The UPS module shall utilize high - reliability wiring and connectors. The UPS module shall not feature ribbon cables. 7. The inverter controls, rectifier /charger controls, bypass controls and monitoring /communication controls in the UPS module shall be contained, in their totality, on a maximum of four control printed circuit boards. 8. All power cable connections to power transformers and chokes shall be secured with permanent cold weld crimps which require no maintenance or periodic retorquing. These cold weld crimps shall be Underwriters Laboratories recognized components. B. Maintainability: Calculated and demonstrated mean - time -to- repair (MTTR) shall not exceed 30 minutes, including time to diagnose the problem and replace the subassembly. 1.08 SAFETY A. The UPS shall be certified by Underwriters Laboratories in accordance with UL 1778. Static Uninterruptible Power Supplies 16611 -5 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility B. The UPS shall be certified by the Canadian Standards Association in accordance with CSA C22.2 NO.107.1 -M91. C. The UPS shall carry the CE mark, indicating the equipment complies with European Community standards EN50091 -1 (Safety) and EN50091 -2 (Electromagnetic Compliance). 1.09 WARRANTY A. UPS Module: The UPS module warranty shall be no Tess than 24 months after acceptance and must include all costs including repair, parts, labor, travel and living expenses for the manufacturer's service personnel, within the 48 contiguous United States. B. Battery: The UPS manufacturer shall warrant their battery cabinets on a prorated basis for ten years to deliver no Tess than 80% of its rated capacity, provided the prevailing ambient temperature of the battery area does not exceed 25 degrees C (77 degrees F). For external battery systems, the battery manufacturers' warranty shall apply. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Approved Manufacturers: Exide Electronics 2.02 UPS MODULE STANDARD FEATURES The UPS module shall consist of the following standard components: A. Rectifier /Charger: The Rectifier /Charger shall convert incoming AC power to regulated DC output for supplying the Inverter and for charging the battery. The Rectifier /Charger shall be of a six - pulse, phase - controlled, solid -state design. The modular design of the UPS module shall permit easy removal of the Rectifier /Charger without removal of any other assembly. B. Inverter: The Inverter shall feature insulated gate bi -polar transistors (IGBTs) in a three- leg, pulse- width - modulation (PWM) design with a switching speed of 4500 HZ. The Inverter shall also have the following features: 1. The Inverter shall be capable of providing the specified quality output power while operating from any DC source voltage (rectifier or battery) within the specified DC operating range. 2. The modular design of the UPS module shall permit easy removal of each phase of the Inverter and DC electrolytic capacitors without removal of any other assembly. 3. Uninterrupted manual transfers shall be initiated from the control panel. Uninterrupted manual transfers to Bypass and from Bypass shall be possible with Static Uninterruptible Power Supplies 16611 -6 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility the Inverter logic, without using the emergency bypass control logic or the static switch. During manual transfers to Bypass mode, the Inverter must verify proper Bypass operation before transferring the critical load to the Bypass. 4. The Inverter shall feature protection circuitry which prevents the IGBTs from sourcing current in excess of their published ratings. C. Bypass: The Bypass shall serve as an alternate source of power for the critical load when performing maintenance on the UPS module or when a failure prevents operation in Normal mode. The Bypass shall consist of a naturally- commutated static switch, for high -speed transfers, and wrap- around switchgear. The modular design of the UPS module shall permit removal of the static switch without removal of any other assembly. The static switch shall only be necessary for controlling emergency make before break transfers. The Bypass shall feature the following transfer and operational characteristics: 1. Uninterrupted transfers to Bypass shall be automatically initiated for the following conditions: a. Output overload period expired. b. Critical bus voltage out of limits. c. Over temperature period expired. d. Total battery discharge. e. UPS module failure. 2. Uninterrupted automatic retransfer shall take place whenever the Inverter is capable of assuming the critical load. 3. Uninterrupted automatic retransfers shall be inhibited for the following conditions: a. When transfer to Bypass is activated manually or remotely. b. In the event of multiple transfer - retransfer operations the control circuitry shall limit "cycling" to three (3) operations in any ten minute period. The fourth transfer shall lock the critical load on the Bypass source. c. UPS module failure. 4. All transfers and retransfers shall be inhibited for the following conditions: a. Bypass voltage out of limits ( +1 -1 O% of nominal). b. Bypass frequency out of limits ( +/ -0.5 Hz; adjustable, factory set). c. Bypass out of synchronization. Static Uninterruptible Power Supplies 16611 -7 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility d. Bypass phase rotation /installation error. 5. The Bypass shall be manually energized with a keyswitch on the control panel. No additional control logic shall be required. 6. The logic power required to perform an emergency transfer to bypass shall be derived separately from the logic power required to operate the inverter controls. 7. The control circuitry required to perform an emergency transfer to bypass shall operate independently from the inverter control circuitry. 8. The Rectifier /Charger input circuit breaker shall have no effect on Bypass operation D. Monitoring and Control Components: The following components shall provide monitor and control capability: 1. Micro - controller driven circuitry: Embedded 20 MHZ, 16 bit, single chip controller. 2. Monitor Panel with status indicators 3. Alarm and metering display 4. Building alarm monitoring 5. Input circuit breaker 6. Inverter and bypass contactors 7. RS -232 (EIA/TIA -232) and RS-485 communication ports E. Output Isolation Transformer: The UPS module shall contain an output isolation transformer featuring two primaries (an Inverter Delta winding and a Bypass Wye winding) and a single secondary (a Wye winding to the UPS module output terminals). The Wye/Wye transformation of the Bypass through the transformer shall produce a zero degree phase shift. This transformer shall provide isolation between the primaries and secondary and shall qualify the UPS as a separately derived source when in both Normal and Bypass modes. F. Battery Contactor: The UPS module shall contain a two pole contactor for disconnecting the battery from the rectifier output and the Inverter input. A contactor enable switch shall be located on the UPS module control panel. With the UPS module in Bypass mode, this contactor shall permit the rectifier, Inverter, DC capacitors and associated control boards to be safely serviced without opening a battery breaker external to the UPS module. G. Battery Management System: The UPS module shall contain a battery management system which has the following features: Static Uninterruptible Power Supplies 16611 -8 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 1. The battery management system shall provide battery time available, or percent remaining, while operating in Normal mode and Battery mode. Battery time available information shall be displayed real -time, even under changing load conditions. Once commissioned, the battery time available information shall be accurate within +/- 3 %. 2. The battery management system shall automatically analyze the UPS battery during a user defined periodic test cycle (quarterly, monthly, etc.). During the test, the Rectifier /Charger shall not de- energize, but shall share load with the battery. For determining battery time remaining information, the battery shall be tested under the same load for each user defined periodic test. Should the battery be weak or defective, The battery management system shall detect and enunciate the battery failure condition without transferring the critical load to Bypass. 3. The periodic test performed by the battery management system shall not remove more than 10% of the available battery run time from the battery. The periodic test, if performed on a monthly basis, shall not reduce overall battery life. 4. If a utility outage occurs while a test is in progress, the test shall be discontinued and subsequently conducted at the next programmed interval. The occurrence of the periodic test shall be user programmable for day, date and time. 5. The battery management system shall record and display the pass /fail status, battery voltage and health indicator value of the previous thirty (30) periodic tests. 6. The battery management system shall provide battery health information in the form of a health indication value. When the health indication value approaches 0.80, it shall correspond with battery string end of life. 7. The battery management system shall enunciate a user programmable battery time remaining warning when the UPS module is on battery power. 8. The battery management system shall provide an imminent shutdown alarm to signal a low battery condition. 9. The battery management system shall work with either wet cell batteries or valve - regulated batteries. H. Wiring Terminals: The neutral output compression terminal shall be sized for 200% of UPS module rated current to accommodate higher neutral currents associated with non- linear Toads. The UPS module shall contain mechanical compression terminals (adequately sized to accommodate 75 °C wiring) for securing user wiring to the following locations: 1. Rectifier /Charger input connections(3 phases) 2. Bypass input connections (3 phases) 3. DC link connections for battery cabinets (positive and negative) Static Uninterruptible Power Supplies 16611 -9 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 4. AC output connections (3 phases and 1 neutral) 2.03 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES The uninterruptible power system shall consist of the following options and accessories: A. Battery Cabinets: The battery cabinets shall feature valve regulated, high -rate discharge, lead -acid batteries which provide energy to the support the critical Toad during a momentary loss of input power to the rectifier. The batteries shall be flame retardant in accordance with UL 94V2 requirements. The battery cabinets shall have the following features: 1. Battery Capacity Protection Time (at 25 degrees C): 15minutes. 2. The battery cabinets shall the be same depth and height as the UPS module. The battery cabinets shall be available in two widths: 27 & 43 inches. 3. The battery cabinets shall feature a mechanical enclosure of like appearance to the UPS module and shall feature casters. Each battery cabinet shall require front access only for installation, service and maintenance. The battery cabinets shall provide top and bottom cable entry. 4. Each battery cabinet shall feature 10 battery trays which can be individually disconnected from the battery cabinet power wiring with quick disconnect devices. Each battery tray shall be firmly secured to the battery cabinet frame with fasteners. Each battery tray shall be removable from the front of the battery cabinet. 5. The battery cabinets shall be available in an integral configuration (line -up & match), where multiple battery cabinets shall be secure together. In this configuration the number one battery cabinet shall provide the electrical connection to secure all the battery cabinets to the UPS module with a single quick disconnect device. All power wiring and control wiring shall be provided by the manufacturer. All power wiring and control wiring shall pass through the battery cabinets. All power wiring and control wiring connections between multiple battery cabinets and the UPS module shall be secured with quick disconnect devices. 6. The battery cabinets shall be available in a remote configuration, where multiple battery cabinets stand apart from the UPS module and but shall be installed secured to each other. Power wiring and control wiring between battery cabinet shall pass through the battery cabinets. All power wiring and control wiring connections between multiple battery cabinets and the UPS module shall be secured with quick disconnect devices. All power wiring and control wiring between the number one battery cabinet and UPS module shall be provided by others. 7. The battery cabinets shall be available in a remote configuration, where multiple battery cabinets stand apart from the UPS module and shall be installed separate Static Uninterruptible Power Supplies 16611 -10 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility from each other. The power wiring and control wiring between multiple battery cabinets and the UPS module shall be provided by others. 8. The battery cabinets shall each feature a DC rated circuit breaker. The circuit breaker within an individual battery cabin shall only provide protection to the battery string with that battery cabinet. For battery configurations involving multiple battery cabinets, a battery string in one battery cabinet may be isolated from the DC link via its circuit breaker without removing other battery strings from the DC link and the UPS module. 9. The circuit breaker in each battery cabinet shall feature an NB auxiliary switch. The UPS module shall be capable of monitoring and alarming an open battery cabinet circuit breaker condition. 10. The circuit breaker in each battery cabinet shall feature a 24 VDC shunt trip. 11. Expected battery life: 200 complete full Toad discharge cycles when operated and maintained within specifications. 12. Final Discharge Voltage: a. Full Load: 1.66 V per cell (adjustable). b. No Load: 1.75 V per cell (adjustable). The UPS module shall automatically select the final discharge voltage (either 1.66 or 1.75 Volts per cell) based on the rate and length of discharge. 13. Nominal Float Voltage: 2.25 V per cell. 14. Maximum Equalizing Voltage: 2.40 V per cell. B. Maintenance Bypass Panel: The Maintenance Bypass Panel (hereafter referred to as the MBP) shall provide electrical power to the critical load from the UPS module output or utility bypass and shall have the following features: 1. The MBP shall provide a make before break power transfer to the critical load between the UPS module output and utility bypass. 2. The MBP shall provide disconnect devices enclosed within galvanized steel boxing with code gauge steel trim painted ANSI 61 gray. Integral bussing shall be factory installed tin - plated aluminum for 100 -400 amperes and tin - plated copper for 600- 1200 ampere panels. The MBP shall be available in the following configurations: a. Two Device - This configuration shall include both the UPS module wrap around (maintenance bypass) disconnect and UPS module output disconnect devices. Static Uninterruptible Power Supplies 16611 -11 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility b. Three Device - This configuration shall include the UPS module wrap around (maintenance bypass) disconnect, UPS module output disconnect and UPS module bypass input disconnect devices. c. Four Device- This configuration shall include the UPS module wrap around (maintenance bypass) disconnect, UPS module output disconnect, UPS module bypass input disconnect and UPS module rectifier input disconnect devices. 3. The MBP disconnect devices shall be available as either molded case switches or molded case circuit breakers. 4. The MBP shall have an ampacity ratings as shown on the plans. 5. The MBP shall have a voltage ratings of 480 volts AC. 6. An interlock key shall be available which provides electrical isolation between the UPS module inverter output power and the utility bypass circuit while transferring power to the critical Toad. 7. A breaker auxiliary switch shall be available which provides includes 2NO and 2NC contacts suitable for remote signaling and indication of the circuit breakers main contact position. 8. A breaker shunt trip device shall be available which provides remote controllable tripping of circuit breakers with 24 VDC. 9. A NEMA 3R Enclosure shall be available which is suitable for outdoor use and protection. 2.04 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY RATINGS AND OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS A. UPS Continuous Ratings: 1. The UPS shall be rated as indicated on the plans for a Toad power factor range of 0.8 lagging to 0.9 leading. B. Rectifier /Charger Input: 1. Nominal Input Voltage: 480 VAC, 3- phase, 3 -wire plus. 2. Operating Input Voltage Range: +10 %, -15% of average nominal input voltage without battery discharge. 3. Operating Input Frequency Range is within 3 Hz of the nominal input frequency: a. For a 50 Hz UPS module, the range is 47 to 53 Hz. Static Uninterruptible Power Supplies 16611 -12 07/07/98 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 1 1 b. For a 60 Hz UPS module, the range is 57 to 63 Hz. c. The frequency range is adjustable to nominal + 5 Hz, factory set. 4. Input Power Factor Range with optional input filter: 0.95 lag minimum (with optional input filter) at full load and nominal input voltage (with battery on float). 5. Normal Input Current Limit: The UPS module shall have the following programmable input current limit settings while operating in Normal mode: a. Rectifier /Charger Input Current Limit: Shall be adjustable from 50% to 100% of full -load input current. b. Battery Input Current Limit: Battery charge current limit shall be adjustable from 10% to 100% of the UPS module's full Toad input current regardless of the actual Toad on the UPS module. 6. On Generator Input Current Limit: The UPS module shall have the following programmable input current limit settings while operating in Normal mode on generator: a. Rectifier /Charger Input Current Limit: Shall be adjustable from 50% to 95% of full -load input current. b. Battery Input Current Limit: Battery charge current limit shall be adjustable from 10% to 95% of the UPS module's full Toad input current regardless of the actual Toad on the UPS module. 7. Input Current Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) with optional input filter: 10% Maximum. 8. Magnetizing Inrush Current: Typically 800% of the largest model's full load rectifier input current. The input isolation transformer doubles this value. 9. Power Walk -in: Ramp -up to full utility load adjustable from 3 seconds to 60 seconds. C. Bypass Input: 1. Synchronizing Bypass Voltage Range: +/ -10% of average nominal input voltage. 2. Synchronizing Bypass Frequency Range is centered on the nominal frequency (choose a value from Table Four of Appendix 1). 3. Magnetizing Inrush Current: Typically 800% of the largest model's full load rectifier input current. The input isolation transformer doubles this value. Static Uninterruptible Power Supplies 16611 -13 07/07/98 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 4. Input Surge Withstand Capability: The UPS shall be in compliance with ANSI C62.41, Category A & B (6 kV). D. Rectifier /Charger Output: 1. Nominal DC Voltage: Nominal DC voltage shall be 480 V. 2. (Steady State Voltage Regulation: +/- 0.5% 3. Voltage Ripple: less than 0.5% (peak to peak) 4. Low Line Operation: The Rectifier /Charger shall be capable of sharing the DC load with the Battery when the input voltage falls below the specified operating input voltage range, The On Battery indicator shall enunciate operation in this mode. 5. Battery Equalize: Automatic and manual means must be provided for battery equalization 6. DC Sensing: Redundant DC voltage sensing methods shall be incorporated for providing battery overvoltage protection. E. UPS Output in Normal Mode: 1. Nominal Output Voltage: 480 VAC, 3- phase, 3 -wire plus ground or 4 -wire plus ground (choose a VAC value from column 4 of Table Three in Appendix 1). 2. Steady -State Voltage Regulation (on Inverter): Within +/ -1% average from nominal output voltage. 3. Transient Voltage Response: Within +/ -5% from nominal voltage for a 100% Toad step, full load re- transfers and full load drop on battery. 4. Transient Voltage Recovery: 25 ms to within +/-1% of steady state. 5. Linear Load Harmonic Distortion Capability: Output voltage THD of Tess than 3% into 100% linear load; 2% for a single harmonic. 6. Non - Linear Load Harmonic Distortion Capability: Output voltage THD of less than 5% for 100% non - linear Toad with a 3:1 crest factor. 7. Manual Output Voltage Adjustment: +/ -5% from nominal. 8. Line synchronization Range: +/ -0.5 Hz, adjustable to +/- 5 Hz. 9. Frequency Regulation: +/ -0.005 Hz free running. 10. Frequency Slew Rate: 1 Hz/second maximum (adjustable). Static Uninterruptible Power Supplies 16611 -14 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 11. Phase Angle Control: a. Balanced Linear Loads: +/ -1 degree from nominal 120 degrees. b. Unbalanced Linear Loads: +/ -3 degrees from average phase voltage for 100% Toad unbalance. 12. Phase Voltage Control: a. Balanced Linear Loads: +/ -1% from average phase voltage. b. Unbalanced Linear Loads: +/ -3% for 100% load unbalance. 13. Overload Current Capability (with nominal line and fully charged battery): The unit shall maintain voltage regulation for 125% for 10 minutes and 150% for 10 seconds. 14. Fault Clearing Current Capability: 160% phase -to -phase for 10 cycles; 300% phase -to- neutral for 10 cycles. 15. Static Transfer Time: Make- before -break transfer completed in Tess than 4 ms. 16. Common Mode Noise Attenuation: -65 dB up to 20 kHz, -40 dB up to 100 kHz. F. UPS Output in Bypass Mode: 1. Nominal Output Voltage: 480 VAC, 3- phase, 3 -wire plus ground or 4 -wire plus ground (choose a VAC value from column 4 of Table Three in Appendix 1). 2. Static Transfer Time: Make - before -break transfer completed in Tess than 4 ms. 3. Common Mode Noise Attenuation: -65 dB up to 20 kHz, -40 dB up to 100 kHz. 2.05 MECHANICAL DESIGN A. Enclosures: The UPS module shall be housed in free - standing, double front enclosures (safety shields behind doors) equipped with casters and leveling feet. The enclosures shall be designed for industrial or computer room applications in accordance with the environmental requirements. The enclosures shall line up and match up in style and color for an aesthetically pleasing appearance. Each of the enclosures shall be shipped separately with joining hardware to be bolted together at the time of installation. B. Ventilation: The UPS module shall be designed for forced air cooling. Air inlets shall be in the lower front. Air outlets shall be in the rear of the top. Twelve inches of clearance over the UPS air outlets shall be required for proper air circulation. Air filters for the UPS module shall be in commonly available sizes. Static Uninterruptible Power Supplies 16611 -15 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility C. No back or side clearance or access shall be required for any enclosure. The back & side enclosure covers shall be capable of be located directly adjacent to a wall. D. Cooling Fans: The modular design of the UPS module shall permit removal of each fan without removal of any other assembly. Fan replacement shall be accomplished by removing no more than one fastener per fan and shall not require the removal of another subassembly. E. Cable Entry: Standard cable entry for the UPS module shall be through either the enclosure bottom or top. A dedicated wireway shall be provided within the UPS module for routing user input and output wiring. F. Front Access: All serviceable subassemblies shall be modular and capable of being replaced from the front of the UPS (front access only required). All components with exception of the power magnetics shall be located within the front 12 inches of the UPS module enclosure for easy maintenance access. Removal and replacement of any subassembly shall not require the removal of another subassembly. Side or rear access to the UPS module shall not be required for UPS module installation, service, repair or maintenance. G. Service Area Requirements: The UPS module, battery and options enclosures shall require no more than thirty inches (30 ") of front service access room, and shall not require side access for service or installation. H. Size: The UPS module shall not exceed a depth of 31.5 inches or a height of 73.5 inches. The UPS module input voltage configurations shall not exceed a width of 34 inches and installation weight of 2,000. 2.06 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS A. Micro - Controller Operated Circuitry: The UPS controls shall have the following design and operating characteristics: 1. Fully automatic operation of each UPS module shall be provided through the use of micro - controllers. (Digital signal processing shall eliminate variances from component tolerance or drift, and provide consistent operational responses.) 2. All operating and protection parameters shall be firmware controlled, thus eliminating a need for manual adjustments. All adjustments and calibrations shall be performed without the use of potentiometers. Printed circuit boards replacement shall be possible without requiring calibration. 3. Start -up and transfers shall be automatic functions. 4. Multiple micro - controllers shall be used, so no single controller is in a mission critical application. 5. All configuration, setup and calibration information shall be stored in non - volatile memory that does not require a control battery for data storage. Static Uninterruptible Power Supplies 16611 -16 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 6. Emergency transfers to Bypass due to UPS module failure, shall be independent of the control logic controlling the Rectifier /Charger, Inverter and Monitor panel. Emergency transfer circuitry shall contain all the necessary circuitry to perform an emergency transfer without any other functioning logic. 7. Monitoring and communications logic shall be independent of the Rectifier /Charger and Inverter control logic. Circuitry and firmware required for monitoring and communications logic shall be functionally isolated from the Bypass, Rectifier /Charger and Inverter controls. Monitoring firmware shall be field upgradeable. 8. The UPS module shall be programmable to optionally provide automatic restart capability following loss of utility and a complete battery discharge. When utility power returns, the UPS module shall automatically energize the output terminals and subsequently transfer to Normal mode. B. Monitor Panel Indicators: The UPS module shall be equipped with a monitor panel providing the following monitoring functions and indicators (each alarm and notice condition shall be accompanied with an audible alarm): 1. NORMAL: This symbol shall be lit when the UPS module is operating in Normal mode. 2. BATTERY: This symbol shall be lit when the UPS module is operating in Battery mode. The Normal indicator also remains lit. 3. BYPASS: This symbol shall be lit when the UPS module is operating in Bypass mode. The critical load is supported by the Bypass source. The Normal indicator shall not be lit when the UPS module is in Bypass mode. 4. NOTICE: This symbol shall be lit when the UPS module needs attention. Some notices may be accompanied by an audible horn. Notices shall include: a. Bypass not available b. Battery undervoltage 5. ALARM: This symbol shall be lit when a situation requires immediate attention. All alarms shall be accompanied by an audible alarm. Alarms shall include: a. Over temperature b. Output overload c. Inverter failure d. Rectifier /Charger failure Static Uninterruptible Power Supplies 16611 -17 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility e. Shutdown imminent (Low battery in Emergency mode.) 6. STANDBY: This symbol shall be lit when electricity is present in the rectifier and Inverter while the Normal indicator is not lit. During normal startup this indicator shall remain lit until the UPS module transfers to Normal mode, at which time the Normal indicator shall light. During normal shutdown the Standby indicator shall remain lit until all energy in the UPS module is dissipated and shutdown is complete. C. Monitor Panel Controls: The UPS module shall be equipped with a monitor panel providing the following control functions: 1. Menu and Cursor Controls: Selects, displays and scrolls data on the LCD. 2. Load Off: Shuts down the UPS module, de- energizes the critical load and opens the UPS module's breakers and contactors. 3. Horn Silence: Silences the current audible alarm(s). The Horn shall sound again if new alarms occur. 4. Screen Adjust: Controls the liquid crystal display contrast. D. Monitor Panel Liquid Crystal Display (LCD): The UPS module shall feature a liquid crystal display measuring 6" by 7.5" with 30 lines of information, 80 characters wide. The display shall feature an autoblanking feature. Graphical user screens shall be provided on the Monitor panel LCD to display the UPS module's operating parameters. The monitor panel pushbuttons shall be used to access information in these screens. Information in the meter screen and alarm history screen shall be available to a remote terminal or printer through the RS -232 (EIA/TIA -232) communication port. The screens shall include: 1. Common Information: The following information shall be presented on the LCD panel at all times: a. UPS Module Identification: A user programmable UPS module identification of up to 45 characters. b. UPS module status. c. Highest priority active alarm. d. Highest priority active notice. e. Real time clock, featuring time and date indications, which is programmable from the monitor panel. f. Real -time battery time available (in the event a utility outage occurs) for the current critical load. Static Uninterruptible Power Supplies 16611 -18 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 2. UPS Module Meter Screen: Real -time digital metering of: a. Rectifier /Charger inputs: voltage (per phase, RMS), current (per phase), frequency, kW, kVA, power factor. b. UPS module outputs: voltage (per phase, RMS), current (per phase plus neutral), frequency, kW, kVA, power factor. Output voltage and current sensing shall independent of the Inverter controls. c. Bypass inputs: voltage (per phase, RMS). d. DC link voltage. e. Battery charge and discharge current. 3. Output Current Screen: Bar graph display of the percent output current of each phase. 4. Event History Screen: Shall display up to 400 of the most recent events by date and time. Time shall be displayed in tenths of seconds (0.1 sec) and recorded in thousandths of seconds (0.001 sec). The screen shall define and display events as either alarms, notices, commands or status. A brief description shall be provided for each event recorded on this screen. 5. Active Events Screen: Shall automatically display a list of all active alarms and notices. 6. Statistics Screen: This screen shall display the following: a. Time on battery: A record shall display the duration and frequency of utility outages in the life of the batteries and in the current month. b. Building alarms: A record shall display the frequency of each building alarm enunciation in the life of the UPS module and in the current month. c. Operational History: A record shall display the total amount of time the UPS module has been in the each of the following modes of operation: Normal, Bypass and Battery. A record shall display the total amount of time the UPS module has been on generator. d. Availability: The observed availability of the Normal mode shall be displayed. In addition, the availability of the Bypass supply as a backup source shall be displayed. e. Startup Date: The date the UPS module was initially energized shall be displayed. Static Uninterruptible Power Supplies 16611 -19 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 7. UPS Module Mimic Screen: A graphic display of the UPS module operational mode and power flow through the UPS module to the critical load shall be displayed in real -time. The operational status of the Inverter, Rectifier /Charger, Bypass and Battery is also indicated. Circuit breaker and contactor states shall be indicated. 8. Setup Screen: Shall permit setting time and date for the UPS module clock with controls on the Monitor Panel. Shall permit configuration of the RS232 and RS485 communications ports, with controls on the Monitor Panel, for the following modes of operation: a. Terminal Mode: UPS module events shall be logged immediately as they occur. b. Calibration Mode: Shall be used by service personnel for UPS module diagnostics. c. UPS Module Configuration Mode: Shall allow setup and configuration of user level functions like battery test and building alarms. Shall allow the six building alarms to be customized with a description of up to 30 characters for display locally on the monitor panel screens and remotely. Shall allow the six building alarms to be programmed to initiate UPS module commands upon contact closure. d. Computer Mode: Shall allow the user to interface with the UPS module in Binary Computer Mode. e. Remote Monitor Mode: The RS485 port shall be configured to interface with a Remote Monitor Panel, Supervisory Contact Module or Relay Interface Module. E. Control Panel: The UPS module shall be equipped with a control panel providing UPS module control functions. (A key shall be required to turn on the UPS module.) The following controls shall be provided on the control panel: 1. The Keyswitch shall initiate the energize sequence to place the UPS module in either Normal mode or Bypass mode, as defined by the Mode switch position. 2. The Mode switch shall control the manual transfer of the UPS module to and from Bypass mode. 3. The Battery switch shall enable or disable the intemal battery contactor closure. 4. A circuit breaker shall enable operation of the rectifier. 5. A Load Off Reset switch shall reset the UPS module, following a Load Off command. Static Uninterruptible Power Supplies 16611 -20 07/07/98 9 f Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility F. Communication Panel: The UPS module shall be equipped with a communication panel, located behind a protective cover, which provides the following signals and communication features in a Class 2 environment: 1. Alarm and Notice Contacts: Dry contacts for summary alarms and notices shall be provided for external use. a. Alarm: Indicates the UPS module is experiencing an Alarm condition. b. Notices: Indicates the UPS module is experiencing a Notice condition. 2. RS -232 (EIA/TIA -232) and RS-485 Communication Interface: Circuitry shall be provided for one RS -232 (EINTIA-232) and one RS-485 communication port. These ports may be used with simple terminals to gain remote access to all unit operation information. 3. Remote Monitor Panel Connection: Circuitry shall be provided for connection of up to two accessory remote monitor panels, relay interface modules or supervisory contact module. 4. Building Alarms: Six inputs shall be provided for monitoring the status of external dry contacts. One input shall be dedicated to monitoring an external battery disconnect, and one shall be dedicated to monitoring an auxiliary generator and initiating reduced input current limit. The remaining four inputs shall be user selected (smoke, temperature, water, etc.) Building alarms shall be set up through the UPS module configuration mode function of the RS -232 (EIA/TIA -232) port. The building alarms shall also provide the following capabilities: a. Building alarms shall allow the user to customize the building alarm message (up to 30 characters max.) which appears locally on the Monitor Panel or remotely through the communication ports. b. Building alarms shall be programmable to initiate a transfer of the UPS module from Normal Mode to Bypass Mode upon contact closure. c. Building alarms shall be programmable to initiate a transfer of the UPS module from Bypass Mode to Normal Mode upon contact closure. 2.07 UPS MODULE PROTECTION A. Rectifier /Charger protection shall be provided by thermal- magnetic or RMS current sensing molded -case circuit breakers and transient suppression circuitry. B. Bypass protection shall be provided through individual fusing of each phase. C. The static switch shall feature a thermal switch which will open the backfeed contactor in the event the static switch temperature exceeds normal operating parameters Static Uninterruptible Power Supplies 16611 -21 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility D. Battery protection shall be provided by individual fusing or thermal- magnetic molded - case circuit breakers in each battery cabinet (if standard battery pack is provided) or external protective device for an external battery. E. Output protection shall be provided by electronic current limit circuitry and fuses in the Inverter circuit. F. Input wiring to the Rectifier /Charger input and Bypass input shall be monitored for proper sequencing. If wiring is installed out of sequence, the UPS module shall detect and enunciate this condition (on the Monitor Panel) when power is supplied to the inputs. The UPS module shall not allow operation in Normal mode until the wiring error is corrected. G. Inverter circuitry shall be provided which automatically inhibits the Inverter IGBT switching currents should they exceed normal operating parameters. H. The UPS module shall remain in Normal mode during a failure condition where the Bypass backfeed protection fails. Manual transfers between Normal mode and Bypass mode shall be possible with this failure condition I. The UPS module shall remain in Normal mode during a failure condition where one or more SCRs in the static switch shorts. Manual transfers between Normal mode and Bypass mode shall be possible with this failure condition J. To comply with agency safety requirements, the UPS module shall not rely upon any disconnect devices outside of the UPS module to isolate the battery cabinet from the UPS module. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The following procedures and tests shall be performed by Field Service personnel during the UPS startup: 1. Visual Inspection: a. Visually inspect all equipment for signs of damage or foreign materials. b. Observe the type of ventilation, the cleanliness of the room, the use of proper signs, and any other safety related factors. 2. Mechanical Inspection: Static Uninterruptible Power Supplies 1661 1 -22 07/07/98 .r • 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility a. Check all the power connections for tightness. b. Check all the control wiring terminations and plugs for tightness or proper seating. 3. Electrical Precheck: a. Check the DC bus for a possible short circuit. b. Check input and Bypass power for proper voltages and phase rotation. c. Check all lamp test functions. 4. Initial UPS Startup: a. Verify that all the alarms are in a "go" condition. b. Energize the UPS module and verify the proper DC, walkup, and AC phase on. c. Check the DC link holding voltage, AC output voltages, and output wave forms. d. Check the final DC link voltage and Inverter AC output. Adjust if required. e. Check for the proper synchronization. f. Check for the voltage difference between the Inverter output and the Bypass source. 5. Operational Training: Before leaving the site, the field service engineer shall familiarize responsible personnel with the operation of the UPS. The UPS equipment shall be available for demonstration of the modes of operation. 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICE A. Field Engineering Support: The UPS manufacturer shall directly employ a nationwide field service department staffed by factory- trained field service engineers dedicated to startup, maintenance, and repair of UPS equipment. The organization shall consist of local offices managed from a central location. Field engineers shall be deployed in key population areas to provide on -site emergency response within 24 hours 80% of the time. A map of the United States showing the location of all field service offices must be submitted with the proposal. Third -party maintenance will not be accepted. B. Spare Parts Support: Parts supplies shall be located in the field to provide 80% of all emergency needs. The factory shall serve as the central stocking facility where a dedicated supply of all parts shall be available within 24 hours. Static Uninterruptible Power Supplies 16611 -23 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility C. Maintenance Contracts: A complete range of preventative and corrective maintenance contracts shall be provided and offered with the proposal. Under these contracts, the manufacturer shall maintain the user's equipment to the latest engineering levels as they are developed. D. Product Enhancement Program: The UPS manufacturer shall make available feature upgrade service offerings to all users as they are developed. These products shall be proposed as a field- installable, optional kit. Static Uninterruptible Power Supplies END OF SECTION • 16611 -24 r 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 16612 DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR SET PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Electrical contractor shall furnish and install a complete emergency standby power system including all related equipment as shown on the drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 STANDARDS AND CODES A. All materials and equipment specified herein shall, within the scope of UL Examination Services, be listed by the Underwriter's laboratories for the purpose for which they are used and shall bear the UL label. B. All materials and equipment specified herein and their installation methods shall conform to the latest published version of the National Electric Code, N.E.C. 1 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog data showing pertinent overall dimensions and component information and the following documents: 1 i 1 1 0 1 1 i 1. Provide five copies of detailed operations and maintenance manuals with parts lists. 2. Provide five copies of wiring diagrams, specification sheets, and outline drawings of the equipment being supplied. 3. Provide three copies of manufacturers warranty certificates and evidence of registration. 4. Provide three copies of factory certified test reports showing maximum power capability of the generation plant, voltage regulation and frequency regulation. 5. Provide factory Osillograph test report showing single step load pickup capability of generator set with full load at .8pf, in accordance with NFPA 110. Provide test report to engineer and owner. 1.04 SUPPLIER A. Manufacture of equipment herein specified shall be that of Cummins /Onan corporation or prior approved equal. 1.05 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warranty the engine generator set and automatic Toad transfer control for a period of five years. The warranty shall be a comprehensive warranty with Diesel Engine Generator Set 1 661 2-1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility no deductibles, covering parts and labor. Upon completion of startup and test and owner acceptance, the system shall be registered for manufactures 5 year warranty. Certificates and evidence of coverage shall be provided to the owner. PART 2 ENGINE GENERATOR SET 2.01 GENERAL A. The entire emergency standby power system shall be built, tested and shipped by the manufacturer of the alternator so that there is one source of supply and responsibility. B. The emergency standby power system shall include an Onan 750DFHA electric generating plant as herein specified. The unit shall be rated to deliver 750KW, 937 KVA @ 0.8 PF continuous standby for the duration of any normal power outage. The voltage shall be 480/277 volts, 3- phase, 4 -wire, 60 Hertz. C. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for providing all installation hardware, level measurement system, and all miscellaneous items required for a complete installation ready to operate the diesel electric engine generator set. D. System design is based on specified Onan /Cummins generator set. Any revisions required to that design for the fuel system, exhaust system, cooling system or any other support accessories to accommodate a substitute manufactures generator set shall be sole responsibility of the contractor and generator set supplier. 2.02 ENGINE A. The engine shall be diesel driven four cycle, turbo charged, mounted radiator and fan cooled. Radiator and fan cooling system shall be rated for 125 degree Fahrenheit ambient. shall have twelve cylinders, with a minimum rating of 1135bhp, 1815cubic inch, 30L, displacement, at its operating speed of 1800 RPM. B. Engine speed shall be governed by an electronic governor. The governor shall provide automatic engine generator set frequency regulation adjustable from isochronous to 5% droop operation from no -load to full rated Toad. The engine shall have a 24 volt battery charging alternator with an automatic charge rate regulator. Starting shall be by a 24 volt dual electric solenoid shaft starters and dual 24 volt battery systems. C. Routine service shall be capable of being performed without the usage of special tools. D. Engine components and fasteners shall be U.S. standard, metric fasteners are not acceptable. 2.03 ALTERNATOR A. The alternator shall be synchronous, four pole, revolving field reconnectable alternator. The armature shall have skewed laminations of insulated electrical grade steel, and two - thirds pitch windings. The rotor shall have amortissuer (damper) windings, layer wound mechanically wedged winding construction. The excite shall be brushless, three phase, with full wave silicon diodes mounted on the rotating shaft and a surge suppressor connected in parallel with the field winding. Diesel Engine Generator Set 16612 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility B. The temperature rise of the alternator at rated Toad shall be within NEMA MG1 -1.65 standards for class H insulation system. Alternator shall be Onan /Newage frame size 6, rated and sized for this specific application of anticipated non- linear Toad. Alternator rating shall have minimum rating of 750KW, 937kva @ .8pf with no greater than 105 degree C temperature rise over a 40 degree C ambient. C. Frequency Regulation: Isochronous under varying loads from no Toad to 100% rated load. D. Voltage regulator: An automatic voltage regulator shall be solid state, temperature compensated design and include overvoltage and overexcitation protection. The voltage regulator shall be held within + or - 0.5% from no Toad to full Toad. The voltage regulator shall be equipped with three phase RMS sensing. A permanent magnet generator , PMG, shall provide excitation power to the automatic voltage regulator for immunity from voltage distortion caused by nonlinear SCR controlled Toads on the generator. The PMG shall sustain main field excitation power for optimum motor starting and to sustain short circuit current for selective operation and coordination of system overcurrent devices. E. The diesel engine generator set shall be capable of picking up 100% of nameplate KW and KVA, Tess applicable derating factors, in one step with the engine - generator set at operating temperature, in accordance with NFPA standard 110. Evidence of such capability shall be provided to the engineer and owner in the form of an oscillograph recording of the generator set supplied. F. Motor starting KVA shall be not Tess than 3313 KVA at the generator sets operating voltage of 480/277 three phase. and shall provide a minimum of 770KW of power output for motor starting. 2.04 CONTROLS A. All engine controls, signal lights, gauges and generator instruments shall be incorporated in a single NEMA 1 enclosure for simplicity and convenience of operating personnel;. it shall be shock mounted over the alternator and incorporate the following . Control shall be Onan Power Command Control System, microprocessor -based or equal. All functions and features of the Power Command Control shall be available for operator use in addition to those specifically listed below. 1. Generator Set controls a. Push -button Panel Lamp switch b. Push -button fault Reset switch c. Run - off -Auto selector switch d. Emergency Stop "mushroom" pushbutton. B. Alarm & Status Monitoring Display. 1. The generator set shall be provided with alarm and status indicating lamps to indicate non - automatic generator status, and existing alarm and shutdown conditions. the lamps shall be high intensity LED type. The generator set control shall indicate the existence of the following alarm , shutdown and status Diesel Engine Generator Set 16612 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility conditions on a digital display panel. 2. Alarms: 3. Status: a. Low oil pressure alarm b. Low oil pressure shutdown c. Oil pressure sender failure alarm d. Low coolant temperature alarm e. High coolant temperature alarm f. High coolant temperature shutdown g. Engine temperature sender failure h. Low coolant level alarm i. Fail to crank shutdown j. Over crank shutdown k. Overspeed shutdown 1. Low DC voltage alarm m. High DC voltage alarm n. Weak battery alarm o. Low fuel day tank alarm p. High AC voltage shutdown q. Low AC voltage shutdown r. Under Frequency shutdown s. Emergency stop shutdown a. Engine oil pressure b. Engine coolant temperature c. Engine oil temperature d. Engine RPM e. Battery voltage f. Cumulative engine hours of operation g. Cumulative number of engine starts h. KW /Hours C. Provide in addition to the above factory installed alarm conditions, provide for two customer specified alarm or shutdown conditions to be programmed into the microprocessor control. D. Alternator Metering and Monitoring 1. Provide analog and digital instrumentation as follows: a. Analog dual range voltmeter /phase selector switch Diesel Engine Generator Set 16612 -4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility b. Analog frequency meter c. Analog dual range ammeter /phase selector switch d. Analog Kilowatt meter e. Digital phase voltages, I -1 and I -N f. Digital phase current, I -1 and I -N g. Digital Kilowatt output h. Digital Power Factor indication 2.05 ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES A. Starting batteries shall be lead acid type. Batteries shall be 24 volt 225 ampere hour and shall include electrolyte, battery cables and battery hydrometer. The batteries shall be mounted on an integral frame mounted battery rack. B. Solid state cycle cranking control. The cranking cycle, shall consist of an automatic crank period of 15 second crank and 15 second rest periods. Failure to start after three cranking cycles shall shut down and lockout the engine, and visually indicate an overcrank shutdown on the control panel. C. Provide a critical rated exhaust muffler with companion flanges and stainless steel flexible exhaust wye flex section. Muffler and flexible exhaust connections shall be configured to provide the least amount of back pressure. Provide side inlet exhaust muffler with hanger brackets for installation in horizontal position over generator set. D. Provide Spring type RJSD series Caldyn spring isolators or equal as recommended by generator set manufacturer. A minimum of 10 isolators shall be provided. Isolators shall be mounted between generator set enclosure and base fuel tank. E. Generator set shall have mounted output circuit breaker rated for 600 volts, 3 pole 1200 amperes for operation on 208/120 volts 3 phase. F. Provide and install remote annunciator panel at location as shown on plans. Annunciator shall meet requirements of NFPA 99. G. Provide generator set mounted water jacket heater rated for 120/208/480 volt operation and 4000 watts. Heater shall be thermostatically controlled. Kim hot start or equal. Provide gate valves on inlet and outlet of heater for ease of service and removal. H. Provide initial fill of lube oil and antifreeze. Coolant system shall be charged with 50% glycol. I. Five sets of operation and maintenance manuals with full set of wiring diagrams and outline drawings shall be provided. J. Provide SCR battery float charger. Charger shall be rated at 120 VAC input and 24VDC 10 ampere output. Charger shall be Onan model 305 -813 or equal Sens model FCA -24- 10/2411. Charger shall be mounted within generator set enclosure and connected to enclosure service panel. Diesel Engine Generator Set 1 661 2-5 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 2.06 FUEL TANK A. Furnish and install a 1500 gallon skid mounted diesel fuel storage tank. All piping between storage tank and generator set shall be black iron pipe and sized as recommended by engine manufacturer. Fuel tank shall include low fuel level contacts which will indicate low fuel, 8 hours operation remaining, at the remote annunciator panel. Provide critical low fuel oil level engine shutdown at fuel level of 200 gallons, to prevent loss of fuel prime. B. Fuel storage tank shall be integral part of generator set housing and skid assembly. Base fuel tank assembly shall be designed to support entire weight of generator set and housing. Provide a minimum of 10 isolator mounting pads on fuel storage tank. Provide adequate electrical stub -up area for power, control and generator service panel. Fuel tank shall be U/L listed, double wall with containment. Provide alarm contacts for fuel leakage into containment area. Provide all venting, fuel fill, fuel alarm contacts and fuel connections to generator set supply and return lines. C. Initial fill of generator set fuel tank shall be responsibility of generator supplier. 2.07 GENERATOR ENCLOSURE A. Furnish and install complete generator set enclosed in a weather protective housing. Housing shall be "walk in type ", with two personnel access doors, motorized exhaust air louvers and intake air louvers sized for the operation of the generator set at full rated power at an ambient air temperature of 120 degrees F. Housing shall include a 100 ampere three phase 208/120 service panel to provide power for water jacket heaters, battery charger, receptacles and enclosure lighting. Lighting shall be a minimum of 4 each incandescent vaporproof ceiling fixtures. B. The generator housing walls shall be a minimum of 1 1/2" fiberglass insulated, protected by interior wall lining of 22 gage galvanized perforated metal. C. The generator exhaust silencer shall be a super critical grade, mounted horizontally within generator enclosure roof. Provide all exhaust piping between generator set and exhaust muffler. D. Housing, shall provide noise suppression for a sound level of a maximum of 75dba at 7 meters in any direction from the enclosure. Enclosure shall include self contained 1500 gallon fuel tank and specified, integral insulated exhaust silencer, sound attenuating intake and exhaust air duct chambers to achieve the desired noise level suppression specified. E. Entire enclosure shall be painted with selected color as specified by owner. 2.08 AUTOMATIC BYPASS LOAD TRANSFER CONTROL A. Rating 1. An automatic bypass load transfer control rated for 277Y/480 volts , 3 phase, 1200 amperes, Onan model BT1200 or approved equal shall be furnished and installed. Diesel Engine Generator Set 16612 -6 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 2. The automatic Bypass transfer control shall be provided with four poles for normal service of 480Y/277 volts, 60 hertz, 3 phase and an emergency source of 480Y/277 volts, 3 phase. The Bypass transfer switch shall be UL listed per standard 1008 and rated for total system Toad. The transfer switch shall be 60 hertz. Main power switch contacts shall be rated for 600 volts AC minimum for all classes of Toad. 3. The transfer switch main contacts shall be rated for continuous operation, resistant to burning or welding. Fully enclosed individual arc chutes shall be provided for rapid arc quenching by the de -ion principle. The transfer switch mechanism shall be capable of being switched manually by the operator. The bypass design shall provide a no -break design to provide bypass to emergency or normal power sources without interruption to the Toad. The draw out mechanism shall provide for convenient removal of the transfer switch for maintenance or service. 4. Draw out positions shall be provided for "Test" and "Isolated" positions. In the test position, the automatic Toad transfer control can be tested without interruption to the facility load. In the Isolated position, the transfer switch shall be capable of removal from the switch enclosure for bench testing and repair. B. Accessories and Features 1. Solid state fully adjustable undervoltage sensors shall simultaneously monitor all phases of the normal source and all phases of the emergency source to provide adjustable range sensors for field adjustment. Pick -up setting shall be adjustable from minimum of 85% to maximum of 98% of nominal voltage. Dropout settings shall be adjustable form minimum of 75% to maximum of 98% of pick -up setting. Voltage sensors shall allow for adjustment to sense partial loss of voltage on any phase of normal or emergency source, where motor feedback voltages exist. 2. Adjustable solid state time delay start, adjustable from 0 to 5 seconds to avoid nuisance start-ups on momentary voltage disturbances and outages. 3. Adjustable time delay retransfer to normal owner source. Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes, to allow normal power to stabilize before retransfer and shall allow staggered retransfer of loads to multiple transfer switch systems. 4. Adjustable time delay transfer to emergency source, solid state adjustable from 0 to 120 seconds, to allow emergency source to reach rated voltage and frequency and stabilize before transfer to emergency Toad. ■ 5. Adjustable time delay stopping. Solid state adjustable time delay from 0 to 10 minutes shall maintain availability of emergency source in unloaded condition to allow engine to cool down before engine shut -down. 6. Provide "control mode status" indicators to indicate the functions of the timing functions and voltage conditions as follows: a. Normal source ok b. Emergency source ok c. Transfer timing Diesel Engine Generator Set 16612 -7 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility d. Retransfer timing e. Transfer complete f. Retransfer complete g. Timing for stop 7. Provide door mounted indicators to indicate Normal source available, Emergency source available, Normal position and Emergency position. 8. Provide door mounted operator control selector switch with TEST, NORMAL and RETRANSFER positions. Test position shall allow operator to test system under load or no -load conditions. Normal position shall allow operator to place system in standby mode for full automatic operation. Retransfer position shall allow bypass of retransfer timer and cause immediate retransfer to normal power at operators request. 9. Provide "Delay neutral" feature to allow inductive loads to decay before transfer from one live source to another. Delay shall be adjustable from 0 to 5 seconds. 10. Provide clock exerciser. Solid stated exerciser clock with adjustable run periods and capability to exercise generator set under Toad or no Toad conditions at operators selection. 2.09 FIELD TESTING :... A. The emergency power system shall be tested after installation by the contractor in the presence of the manufacturer's representative and the engineer. All functions of the emergency power system shall be tested to the engineer's satisfaction. The system shall be tested under simulated power failure conditions and operated under emergency conditions for a minimum period of one hour, connected to a 750KW load bank. The contractor shall supply all personnel, instrumentation, loadbank, fuel and all other miscellaneous items required to conduct this test. The engineer and factory representative shall be notified tin writing at least 7 working days in advance of the test date. At the conclusion of the full load test the system shall be demonstrated to operate in fully automatic mode and all timers and functions verified by simulating a power outage. Diesel Engine Generator Set END OF SECTION 16612 -8 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 16615 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER EQUIPMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provision and installation of Owner furnished automatic transfer switch for the emergency generator system. 1.02 CODE REQUIREMENTS AND STANDARDS A. Standards: 1. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1008 -1984 Automatic Transfer Switches (R1985) 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): ICS- 2- 447Transfer Switches 3. Applicable ANSI and IEEE standards. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Per Section 01340 and 16000. 1.04 TESTS A. The complete Owner furnished automatic transfer switch shall be factory- tested to ensure proper operation of the individual components and correct overall sequence of operation and to ensure that the operating transfer time, voltage, frequency, and time delay settings are in compliance with the specification requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Electrical Characteristics: 277/480 -volt, 3- phase, 4- poles, 100% neutral, 60 Hz, rated 1200 -amps. B. Enclosure: Per Section 16130, nonventilated, wall- mounted, with door lock and provisions for padlocking. C. Switch Ratings: Automatic Transfer Equipment 16615 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 1. All classes at 600- volts, six times the switch continuous rating. 2. Twenty times the continuous switch rating in -rush capability, both opening and closing switch without welding. D. Contacts: 1. Siler tungsten alloy main contacts protected by arching contacts with arc barriers provided between each pole. 2. Main contacts electrically operated and mechanically locked in both normal and emergency positions. E. Interlocks: 1. Electrical and mechanical interlock to prevent simultaneous connection or normal and emergency supplies. 2. If switch is equipped with means for manual transfer, provide means for disconnecting electrical operating coils during manual transfer operation; disconnecting means wired to door interlock switch to prevent leaving transfer switch in manual position. F. Lugs: 1. Wire Sizes #6 AWG and Smaller: Screw -tight pressure type for copper conductors. 2. Wire Sizes #4 AWG and Larger: Bolt -type, tin - plated, made of high strength aluminum alloy, UL approved and stamped for use with copper and aluminum conductors. Burndy KA -U or Ilsco type TA, AU, or D. G. Instruments: Voltmeter, ammeter, and frequency meter mounted on cabinet. H. Accessories: Provide transfer switch equipped with the following: 1. Adjustable time delay on momentary outage to discriminate between transient and sustained outage, 1.5 to 15 seconds. 2. Adjustable time delay on engine start, 5 to 50 seconds. Automatic Transfer Equipment 16615 -2 07/07/98 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 1 f3. Adjustable time delay on retransfer to normal (approximately 0 to 30 minutes) with five minute overload running time of emergency generator. 1 4. Disconnect Devices: Electrically disconnect control section from transfer switch and a barrier to permit safe access for maintenance or service during periods of normal operation. I5. Three- position selector switch with the following operating modes: a. Suitable: Run engine generator and transfer Toad. b. Automatic: Normal automatic operations. Also permit remote signal ( through telemeter to start and exercise engine generator without Toad transfer. 1 c. Test: Allow switch transfer without starting and running the engine generator. 6. Indicating Lights: a. Green - Normal Source b. Red - Emergency Source 7. Voltage and frequency lockout relay. 8. Differential Protection: Dropout at 70% and pickup at 90% voltage. 9. Engine starting contacts. 10. Two auxiliary contacts - close on emergency, close on normal. 11. Exerciser clock. 2.02 OPERATIONS A. .Automatically signal emergency generator to start when any phase of normal power falls below 70% of rated voltage for ten seconds or greater. B. Automatically transfer Toad to emergency power at 90% rated speed and voltage. C. Automatically transfer load back to normal power when normal power has been restored to at least 90% of normal voltage for ten minutes. Automatic Transfer Equipment 16615 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility D. Stops emergency generator after five minute cool -down at end of power transfer. E. Exercising Program: Automatically starts system transfer to exercise emergency generator for one hour every two weeks, minimum, under full Toad. 2.03 INSTALLATION A. Mounting: Per manufacturer's instructions, with top of switch approximately 6'-6" above floor. B. Identification per Section 16040 and as follows: 1. Identifying Label: a. First Line: Automatic Transfer Switch b. Second Line: 480 -volt, 3 -phase c. Third Line: Panel 'MDS1' /Emergency Generator 2. Warning Sign: Red phenolic nameplate in 1/4" white letters engraved as follows: "Warning: To ensure against shock or accident hazard, disconnect all sources of supply before servicing or operating manually." END OF SECTION Automatic Transfer Equipment 16615 -4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 16628 ENGINE/GENERATOR CONTROL AND ALARM PANELS PART 1 GENERAL - PROVIDED WITH GENERATOR 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. .Engine control panel. B. Generator control panel. C. Engine alarm panel. D. Annunciators. 1.02 REFERENCES 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Provide audio and visual alarms in accordance with National Electrical Code and applicable electrical inspection authority. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, and maintenance and repair data. PART 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER A. Furnished by Owner. 2.02 GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL A. Provide totally enclosed ventilated metal panel [mounted on unit,] free floor standing,] with channel or angle finished in enamel applied over corrosion - resistant primer, complete with hinged door incorporating [output circuit breaker] [volt meter and volt meter selector switch] [ammeter and ammeter selector switch complete with current transformers as required] [frequency meter, vibrating reed type] [voltage adjustment rheostat plus or minus 5 percent] [running time meter] and ground bus. Provide battery operated service Tight to illuminate panel under power outage condition.] Engine /Generator Control and Alarm Panels 16628 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 2.03 ENGINE ALARM PANEL A. Incorporate in generator control panel complete the folowing items: 1. Low oil pressure alarm. 2. High water temperature alarm. 3. Low oil pressure shut down. 4. High water temperature shut down. 5. Overspeed shut down. 6. Over cranking shut down. 2.04 ANNUNCIATORS A. Locking type with manual reset button for DC operation from battery bank, incorporating contacts for remote indication. B. Provide contacts so that when shutdown occurs from one set of shutdown contacts, subsequent operation of shutdown contacts are locked off from operating annunciators. C. Operation of silencing switch to silence trouble alarm but pilot to remain illuminated. D. On return to normal and resetting of annunciators, trouble horn to sound again until switch is returned to normal position. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install alarms and instrumentation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. <. END OF SECTION Engine /Generator Control and Alarm Panels 16628 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 16720 SECURITY SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Section includes specifications for an integrated security management system which shall perform the following general services: 1. Access control. 2. Alarm monitoring. 3. Reporting functions. 4. Security management functions. 1.02SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Access Control System: 1. Access management system (System) shall monitor and control access to areas defined herein. 2. System shall be capable of supporting multiple access control technologies at each door, as well as alarm inputs and control outputs. 3. System shall consist of a microprocessor -based controller, card readers and /or keypads [and host software]. 4. System shall be capable of operating with or without host software station. 5. Specific types of devices and their functions shall be addressed in relevant sections. B. Description of work: 1. The Systems Integrator shall include all necessary labor, tools, equipment, and ancillary materials required to furnish and install a complete and operational access control and alarm monitoring system. 2. The access control system will manage access to building and selected areas using encoded cards. 3. The extent of access control system work is defined to include, but not by way of limitation: Security System 16720 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility a. Alto 818SC ACU central controller. b. and 4203 proximity card reading sensors. c. MSM input monitoring modules. d. 778 output relay modules. e. Wiring, power supplies, switches and ancillary equipment. 4. Requirements are indicated elsewhere in these specifications for work including, but not limited to, raceways and electrical boxes and fittings required for installation of control equipment and wiring: not the work of this section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit for prior approval, three (3) copies of manufacturer's data on proximity or magnetic stripe access control system and components. B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of access control system and accessories including, central controller, external keyboard and printer, proximity card reading sensors, power supplies switches and ancillary equipment. C. One Line Diagram: Submit a one line diagram of the system configuration proposed if it differs from that illustrated in the riser diagram included in these specifications. Submittals indicating typical riser diagrams are not acceptable. D. Operator's Manual: Submit for prior approval, three copies of manufacturer's manual for programming and operating the Alto 818SC /SX system and its related components. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Manufacturer of products defined in this section must have: 1. Industry experience: Company must have at least 25 years experience in manufacturing and servicing access management systems. 2. ISO 9001 Certification: Manufacturing process of company must meet stringent standards of ISO 9001 Certification. B. Systems Integrator: 1. Company with a minimum of 5 (five) years system design, engineering supervision, and installation experience in the alarm, building automation, or access control industry. Security System 16720 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 2. Company that is trained and authorized to install manufacturer products. C. System Checkout: 1. Pre - testing: All components and assemblies of the control unit are to be pre- tested at the factory prior to shipment. 2. Burn -in: 1,000 hours at normal operating conditions or equivalency. 3. On -site testing: Manufacturer trained and authorized Systems Integrator shall functionally test each component in the system after installation to verify proper operation and confirm that the panel wiring and addressing conform to the wiring documentation. D. Regulatory Requirements: 1. NEC Compliance: All electrical wiring work shall comply to NEC. 2. NEMA Compliance: Electrical equipment shall comply with applicable portions of NEMA. 3. FCC Emissions: All assemblies shall be in compliance with FCC emission standards. a. Microprocessor based controller: Part 15, Subpart F, Class A. b. Proximity Card Reading Sensors: Part 15, Subpart F (field disturbance sensors). c. Dial -up modems: Part 68. 4. UL -1012 and CSA: All power supplies shall be in compliance with Underwriters Laboratories standard 1012 and CSA standards for power supplies. E. Warranty: 1. Analog Proximity Command Cards: No less than 5 (five) years. 2. Digital Command Cards: No less than 1 (one) year. 3. System Components: 15 (fifteen) months from shipment date or 12 (twelve) months from date of purchase by Systems Integrator, whichever comes first. PART 2 2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. System Description: Security System 16720 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 1. The access control and security system within the building shall consist of a microprocessor -based controller that can be either a standalone or a networked unit with means to program, monitor intrusion and limit access to a single, or a series of, one -door to eight -door controlled areas. 2. A single system shall support up to 8 (eight) card reading sensors and up to 8 (eight) modules of 4 (four) inputs each. 3. Cards: a. Digital proximity: QuadraKey, DuraKey, NexKey, KeyMate, DuraTag. b. Analog proximity: SE 1030, 1040, 1050, 1060 cards. 4. Keypad modes: a. Standalone mode with user entered card number for access, or b. In conjunction with sensor for dual verification entry. 5. The access control and security system shall provide complete software and hardware to operate with the following features: Security System a. Database: Database shall store all user operating data and handle event reporting for all possible attached devices, and shall contain memory capacity for the following: i. Users with unique ID: 11,200. ii. Users with 12 character name and unique numeric ID: up to 4,400. b. Event activity: System shall designate activity as an alarm or non -alarm condition, dependent upon modules installed, and shall report activity for: Supervised monitor points: 32 maximum. ii. Unsupervised monitor points: 9 maximum. Outputs: 16 maximum. c. Relay outputs: System shall initiate relay output commands based on: i. Card access activity. ii. Operator keyboard inputs. iii. Pre - programmed time schedule. 16720 -4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility Security System iv. Switch input. d. System diagnostics: Automatic system diagnostics and automatic alarming based on detected faults in the controller, sensors, wiring, and multiple switch monitor. ii. Off -line diagnostics for checking the integrity of controller's memory (RAM and ROM test), annunciator control test and radio frequency interference test. e. Communication modes: System shall communicate activity in either of two modes, as follows: i. Stand alone mode: In standalone mode, all system activity messages to the operator shall be printed in standard English text. Mnemonic type or transaction code type operator messages are not acceptable, or; ii. Networked mode: In networked (Host) mode, the Alto 818SC will be polled by a Host system for activity messages. All system activity messages to the Host system shall be binary for efficient data communications supporting SEEP protocol. The Host shall have the responsibility for acknowledging and translating the received messages. While operating in Host mode, a second port on the controller shall be available for standalone mode connection and output. f. Battery back -up: The access control and security system shall include internal battery backup to maintain controller database, program, time, date, and building mode during a power Toss. g. Passwords: The system shall utilize passwords. ii. A password must be used by operator to gain access to the system commands. Authorization levels: Each password shall be assigned to one of 6 (six) • authorization levels. iv. Operator passwords defined: up to 8 (eight). v. Duplication: If a password is duplicated, the Alto 818SX will only recognize the first occurrence. h. Pre- programmed: The access control and security system shall have WSE pre- programmed default data for ease in start-up and testing of equipment. 16720 -5 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility i. Transaction buffer: 4,000 transactions, minimum. j. Off -site programming: The access control and security system shall allow for off -site programming via dial -up modem. k. Automatic dial -up: The access control and security system shall provide means of using automatic "dial -up" smart modem to automatically report alarms or send messages to remote terminals. I. Disk backup: The access control and security system shall allow for disk backup and restoration of user data in the event of database loss. m. Modular components: The access control and security system shall be such that its controller(s) are modular and expandable in design so that it can accommodate facility growth. B. Hardware features: 1. Access Controller Alto 818 SC. Security System a. General: The Alto 818SC Controller shall be a microprocessor- based, 8 (eight) door controller that provides the following functions in the system: i. Provides central control for all devices attached. ii. Makes decisions for access. iii. Responds to monitor activity. iv. Receives input to control its decision making. v. Reports activity to other devices. b. Capacities: i. Addressable devices: Via coaxial cable or twisted pair, Controller shall have following capacities: 1 Analog proximity sensors: up to 8 (eight) via coaxial cable. 2 Digital proximity sensors: up to 8 (eight) via twisted pair. 3 Keypads: up to 8 (eight) keypads. ii. Contact inputs: up to 32 contact inputs for alarm and status reports via coax. 16720 -6 07/07/98 v -, Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility Security System iii. Controller shall provide for operation of electrified locking hardware by means of contact -fused relays, each with a rating of 3 amps. iv. Controller shall have means to connect a remote annunciator control module with 8 (eight) output alarm contacts and 1 (one) master latched alarm contact. Module shall also have building mode indicator and mode selector switch and remote switch connections. c. Specifications: i. Dimensions: 18 X 10.5 X 2.3 in. (45.7 X 26.7 X 5.8 cm). d. Mounting: i. The Controller shall be capable of being wall mounted. ii. All wiring connections shall be provided at the top and right side of the unit for ease of access. iii. The front cover, containing 6 self- contained screws, shall remove for access to internal switches and parts. e. Power: i. Source: Power is provided via wiring from a power supply unit (see Section 2 or 3). ii. Consumption: 650 mA at 16 volts AC and 500 mA at 25.2 volts AC input (typical). iii. Battery: A low voltage battery shall maintain the internally stored database setup when no power is available to the controller. f. Wiring: i. Host, terminal or printer: 2 (two) 9 -pin female Phoenix. ii. RS -485 (for keypads and /or digital proximity readers): Phoenix. iii. 20mA communications to other controllers or to host system: Phoenix. iv. Power supply: Phoenix. v. Output relays: Phoenix. vi. Annunciator (778): 15 -pin D- subminiature. 16720 -7 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility g. Communication: i. ASCII encoded data: 2 (two) RS -232 data I/O ports. ii. Host communication: 1 (one) RS -232 port shall provide for Host communication utilizing HOST or SEEP Protocol. 1 Note: Both of the above ports shall be usable for a terminal / printer. iii. Networking with other controllers and host systems: 1 (one) 20mA data I/O port for connecting to other controllers and host systems. h. Feedback: LED status lights indicate: i. Controller CPU operational status. ii. Lock status. iii. Communication status. iv. Alarm status. v. Readiness of entry keypad and program mode. i. Diagnostics: LED status lights shall indicate: i. Operational status of the Controller. ii. Door status and lock status of controlled entries. Self- protection: The Controller shall have inputs to detect: i. Power input failures. ii. Controller tampering. k. Manufacturer: Westinghouse Security Electronics, Model: ALTO 818SC. 2. Multiple Switch Monitor (774A): a. General: J. i. The 774A Multiple Switch Monitor (MSM) is a single board monitor point input device with enclosure for connection to 4 (four) dry contacts normally opened or normally closed. MSM supports higher voltages for extended read ranges. Security System 16720 -8 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility b. Capacities: 1 i. Monitor point inputs: 4 (four) 2- state. ii. MSM units: up to 8 Monitor inputs: 32 c. Specifications: t i MSM board dimensions: 4 in. sq. by 1 in. (10 cm sq. X 2.54 cm). ii. MSM enclosure dimensions: 4.5 in. sq. X 2.25 in. (12 X 15.7 cm). d. Environmental: i. Humidity: 10% to 95% non - condensing. j ii. Temperature: +20° to +120° F ( -7° to +49° C). e. Mounting: The MSM shall be mounted in a NEMA type enclosure with the Controller or standalone in a controlled area. l f. Power: 1 i. Source: Coax wiring connected to the Controller. r g. Wiring: i. A single coax cable with recommended maximum length of 1,000 feet shall connect the MSM to the Controller and must meet the following specifications: 1 Pure copper, single strand, 18 AWG center conductor, a foam dielectric and a dual shield, 61% AL braid, 100% AL bond wrap, impedance of 75 ohms and the physical dimensions of RG6 /U. All Lspools must have a 100% sweep test before use. 2 Additional cables, for direct burial, plenum and elevator rated i conforming to WSE models SE9284DB, SE9284PL and SE9284EL can be utilized for the respective applications. ii. Input wiring: Twisted pair wiring with distances up to 200 feet between CMSM and contact point. iii. Module shall require a supervisory end -of -line resistor at each contact. 1 Security System 16720 -9 07/07/98 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. ,Tukwila Switch Facility h. Communication: The MSM transmits information via the coaxial cable to the Controller. i. Manufacturer: Westinghouse Security Electronics, Model: #774 -A Multiple Switch Monitor. 3. Annunciator Control Module (778A): a. General: i. 778A Remote Annunciator Control Module (Annunciator) provides 8 (eight) dry contact outputs plus status and latched alarm outputs. Security System ii. Module shall also have building mode indicator and mode selector switch and input points for remote selector switches. iii. Outputs are programmed to operate based on alarm /report generated from the Controller. b. Capacities: i. Output alarm contacts: 8 (eight). ii. Master latched alarm contact: 8 (eight). 1 Rating: 0.5A. c. Specifications: i. Dimensions: 3 X 11.4 X 1.5 in. (7.6 X 28.9 X 3.8 cm) d. Environmental: i. Humidity: 10% to 90% non - condensing. ii. Temperature: +20° to +120° F ( -7° to +50° C). e. Mounting: The Annunciator should be installed in a secure area within 12 feet of the Controller. f. Power: Power provided by Controller. g. Wiring: Included control cable. h. Communication: Control signals for output relays and building mode switch are provided for the Controller only. 16720 -10 07/07/98 1 a 1 i 1 1 I i I 1 1 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility i. Feedback: i. Power ON: 1 (one) LED. ii. Output relay status: 8 (eight) LEDs. iii. Building mode status. iv. Mode selection switch status: Limited or Closed. v. Latched alarm status. Manufacturer: Westinghouse Security Electronics Model: 778A Remote Annunciator Module. 4. Digital Proximity Key Reading Sensor (DigiReader): a. General: DigiReader (DR) shall read digital proximity keys and send signal to Controller for processing. ii. DR 4226 shall comply with the Americans with Disability Act (ADA). iii. DR 4238 shall comply with the Americans with Disability Act (ADA). iv. DR 4205K shall have an integrated weatherized keypad for additional security and shall comply with the ADA. J• Security System v. DR 4205GM shall feature a glass -mount kit for status display on front and back of reader. b. Capacities: DigiReader shall read digital proximity cards supporting phase shift signals to a distance of [ ) and does not require contact with the sensor. ii. DigiReader shall be capable of reading up to 3 (three) cards in field at the same time. c. Specifications: Material shall be high- impact Lexan with 94V -2 UL flame class rating, and shall be UV resistant, sealed, water and weather resistant, and tamperproof. d. Environmental: 16720 -11 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility Humidity: 10% to 90% non - condensing ii. Temperature: -4° to +140° F (-20° to +60 ° C). e. Regulatory: Controller shall be designed to meet the following regulatory requirements: UL294 Listing Standard for Safety. ii. FCC EMI and EMC Class A. iii. EN55022 EMI and EMC Class A. f. Mounting: DigiReader shall have the capacity to be mounted and operated behind any non - metallic, non - conductive surface, including glass. ii. (DR 4204 only) DigiReader shall have the capability to be mounted on any metal door frame. g. Power: i. Source: Via the network twisted pair (shielding optional) wiring. ii. Consumption: 1 [DR 4204: Less than 5 watts.] 2 [DR 4208: Less than 6.5 watts.] h. Wiring: Twisted pair (shielding optional) with 4,000 foot maximum recommended length. i. Feedback: i. Single tri -color LED (green /amber /red) shall provide capability for diagnostic feedback. ii. Tri -color LED shall be programmable. iii. An audio tone shall indicate successful digital proximity card read and access granted. Diagnostics: DigiReader and data -line integrity shall be monitored continuously and shall alarm if failure is detected and indicate device and location of fault. J. Security System 16720 -12 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility k. Self- protection: Physical damage, including breaking open sensor housing, shall not allow access to any circuitry which would allow the system to be compromised. ii. Transmission of any frequency (or set of frequencies) into the sensor at any power level shall not compromise the system. I. Manufacturer: Westinghouse Security Electronics. m. Model: i. [Model DR 4204] ii. [Model DR 4208] 5. Analog Proximity Card Reading Sensor (SE 2800 Series): a. General: Analog Proximity Card Reading Sensor (Sensor) shall connect to the Controller via data -line as specified by the manufacturer. ii. Sensor shall have the means to be electrically isolated to prevent short circuits from disrupting other communications in the data -line network. iii. At a minimum, the Sensor shall detect command card codes when a card is within two inches (5 cm) of its surface. b. Capacities: The Sensor shall "read in" data encoded on analog proximity cards containing tuned circuits (Model SE 1050 or SE 1060) placed within a minimum of 2 inches of the sensor. ii. The Sensor shall not require contact with the key. Specifications: The Sensor shall be sealed, waterproof, weather - resistant, and tamperproof. Material shall be Lexan or equal. c. Environmental: Humidity: 0% to 100% condensing. H. Temperature: -50° to +180° F ( -46° to +82° C). Security System 16720 -13 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility Security System d. Mounting: Sensor shall have the capacity to be mounted and operated behind any non - metallic, non - conductive surface, including glass. e. Power: i. Via the coax cable connection. ii. The Sensor shall emit a low power (less than one microwatt) RF field in the 2 to 27 MHz range which is concentrated in a region up to 6 (six) inches from the surface. f. Wiring: A single coax cable shall connect the Sensor to the Controller. Coax will conform to the following: g. i. A standard coax cable has a pure copper, single strand, 18 AWG center conductor, a foam dielectric and a dual shield, 61% AL braid, 100% AL bond wrap. This cable has an impedance of 75 ohms and the physical dimensions of RG6 /U. All spools must have a 100% sweep test before use. ii. Additional cables, for direct burial, plenum and elevator rated conforming to WSE models SE9284DB, SE9284PL and SE9284EL can be utilized for the respective applications. Communication: An analog signal between Sensor and Controller shall provide necessary communication. h. Feedback: Single red LED shall indicate power on and provide capability for diagnostic feedback. i. Diagnostics: J. i. Sensor and data -line integrity shall be monitored continuously. ii. An alarm shall sound if failure is detected, indicating device and location of fault. Self- protection: i. Physical damage, including breaking open Sensor housing, shall not allow access to any circuitry which would allow the system to be compromised. ii. Transmission of any frequency (or set of frequencies) into the Sensor at any power level shall not compromise the system. k. Manufacturer: Westinghouse Security Electronics, Model 2814A (rear coax) Model 2815A (side coax). 16720 -14 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 6. Analog Proximity Card Reading Sensor — Compact Model (2804): a. General: I) 2804 Compact Sensor (Sensor) is an analog proximity sensor designed for mounting indoors on plastic single gang box or any non- metallic surface. b. Capacities: i. Read range: 3 inches maximum. ii. Cards: Analog proximity keys containing tuned circuits (SE 1030, SE 1040, SE 1050, SE 1060). c. Specifications: i. Material: ABS or equal. ii. Dimensions: 3.3 X 4.5 X 1.3 in. (8.3 X 11.4 X 3.8 cm). d. Environmental: i. Humidity: 10% to 95% non - condensing. ii. Temperature: + 20° to +120° F (-7° to +49° C). e. Regulatory: FCC Part 15, Subpart C regulations for field disturbance sensors. f. Mounting: Sensor shall: 1 Be mounted on indoor surfaces only. ii. Have the capacity to be mounted and operated on any non - metallic, non - conductive indoor surface. Power: i. Source: Via the coax cable connection with the Controller (refer to Section 1). g. ii. The Sensor shall emit a low power (less than one microwatt) RF field in the 2 to 27 MHz range which is concentrated in a region up to three inches from the surface. iii. The Sensor can also receive power for the dual color (red /green) LED from an external power source at 12VDC. Security System 16720 -15 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility h. Wiring: i. Controller connection: A single coax cable shall connect the Sensor to the Controller. ii. LED power: A two -pair wire, 12 inches in length, shall provide ability to power the red /green LED in the unit. iii. Sensor shall have the means to be electrically isolated to prevent short circuits from disrupting other communications in the data line network. i. Communication: An analog signal between Sensor and Controller shall provide necessary communication. j. Feedback: Single red /green LED shall indicate power on and secure (red) and provide access granted indication (green). k. Diagnostics: Sensor and data -line integrity shall be monitored continuously and shall alarm if failure is detected and indicate device at fault. I. Self- protection: i. Physical damage, including breaking open Sensor housing, shall not allow access to any circuitry which would allow the system to be compromised. ii. Transmission of any frequency (or set of frequencies) into the sensor at any power level shall not compromise the system. m. Manufacturer: Westinghouse Security Electronics, Model: 2804 -B (black). 7. QuadraKey Digital Proximity Command Card: a. General: i. OuadraKey Digital Proximity Command Key (card) is an ISO compliant, single -coil passive proximity card that supports multiple technologies on one card, including: proximity, magnetic stripe, bar code and photo ID. ii. Design shall be capable of smart card chip insertion, color imaging on both sides and hole punch horizontal or vertical for using the card as a badge. iii. Each card shall have the capability to be programmed to operate universally at different locations. iv. Note: Active circuit type cards (those requiring batteries) shall not be acceptable. Security System 16720 -16 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility' b. Capacities: i. Card can generate a minimum eight digit access number. ii. Cards shall have numeric encoded data embedded in an integrated circuit within the card. iii. Each card shall be encoded so that it is totally unique and is not duplicated anywhere in the world. c. Specifications: i. Dimensions: ISO standard size and thickness of 3.37 X 2.125 X 0.032 in. (8.55 X 5.39 X 0.081 cm). ii. Material: Polyester and appropriate adhesive based materials. iii. Magnetic stripe material: single layer 3M type 5203 High Coercivity, 4000 Oersted using Track 2, without exception. iv. Magnetic stripe dimensions: The stripe shall minimally extend from 0.333 in. to 0.493 in. from the upper card edge and for the entire length of the card. d. Environmental: i. Temperature: 14° to 140° F ( -10° to 60° C). ii. Humidity: 0% to 100 %. e. Regulatory: N/A (Card is totally passive requiring no approval.) f. Power: i. Source: Passive - powered by DigiReader digital proximity reader. ii. Consumption: Not detectable. g. Communication: Via low power radio frequency, providing read ranges up to 1 [22] inches depending on the selected DigiReader. (See DigiReader /Prox Card Read Range Matrix in Part IV.1 for actual figures). h. Manufacturer: Westinghouse Security Electronics, Model: QuadraKey. 8. NexKey Digital Proximity Command Card: a. General: Security System 16720 -17 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility i. NexKey Digital Proximity Command Key (card) is a single -coil passive proximity card that can, through add -on options, support additional technologies, including: bar code and photo ID with lamination. ii. Each card shall be encoded so that it is totally unique and is not duplicated anywhere in the world. iii. Card shall be highly resistant to face abrasion or bending. iv. Card shall have a slot in the vertical position for use as a badge. v. Note: Active circuit type cards (those requiring batteries) shall not be acceptable. b. Capacities: i. Card can generate a minimum eight digit access number. ii. Cards shall have numeric encoded data embedded in an integrated circuit within the card. iii. Each card shall be encoded so that it is totally unique and exists in no other system anywhere in the world. c. Specifications: i. Dimensions: 3.37 X 2.125 X 0.075 in. (8.55 X 5.93 X 0.19 cm) ii. Construction: Durable ABS with vinyl or polycarbonate covering. d. Environmental: i. Temperature: 14° to 140° F ( -10° to 60° C) ii. Humidity 0% to 100% humidity. e. Regulatory: N/A (Card is totally passive requiring no approval.) f. Power: Passive - powered by DigiReader digital proximity reader. g. Communication: Card shall communicate via low power radio frequency, providing read ranges up to [22) inches depending on the selected DigiReader. (See DigiReader /Prox Card read range matrix for actual figures.) h. Manufacturer: Westinghouse Security Electronics, Model: NexKey. 9. DuraKey Digital Proximity Command Card: Security System 16720 -18 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility a. General: i. DuraKey Digital Proximity Command Key (card) is a highly durable, dual - coil passive proximity card that supports multiple card technologies on one card, including: proximity, bar code, and photo ID with lamination. ii. Each card shall be encoded so that it is totally unique and is not duplicated anywhere in the world. iii. Note: Active circuit type cards (those requiring batteries) shall not be acceptable. b. Capacities: i. Card can generate a minimum eight digit access number. ii. Cards shall have numeric encoded data embedded in an integrated circuit within the card. Each card shall be encoded so that it is totally unique and exists in no other system anywhere in the world. c. Specifications: i. Dimensions: 3.37 X 2.125 X 0.099 in. (8.55 X 5.93 X 0.25 cm). ii. Construction: Durable polycarbonate with vinyl covering. d. Environmental: i. Temperature: 14° to 140° F ( -10° to 60° C). ii. Humidity: 0% to 100% relative humidity. e. Regulatory: N/A (Card is totally passive requiring no approval). f. Power: Passive - powered by DigiReader digital proximity reader. g. Communication: Card shall communicate via low power radio frequency, providing read ranges up to 36 inches depending on the selected DigiReader. h. Manufacturer: Westinghouse Security Electronics, Model: DuraKey. 10. Analog Proximity Command Card ([SE 1050] [SE 1060]): Security System a. General: [SE 1050] [SE 1060] is a highly durable analog proximity command key (key) that transfers data in the form of passive tuned circuits within the card. Additional card features include: 16720 -19 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility i. Unique encoding: Each key shall be encoded so that it is totally unique. ii. Universal operation: Each key shall have the capability to be programmed to operate universally at different locations. iii. Durable: Key shall be highly resistant to face abrasion or bending. iv. Warranty: 5 (five) years. v. Note: Active circuit type cards (those requiring batteries) shall not be acceptable. b. Capacities: Key can generate an eight digit access number. c. Specifications: i. Dimensions: 3.36 X 2.12 X 0.1 in. (8.53 X 5.38 X 0.25 cm). ii. Construction: Heavy duty fiberglass epoxy with vinyl covering. d. Environmental: i. Temperature: -50° to + 120° F ( -46° to 49° C). ii. Humidity: 0% to 100% relative humidity. e. Regulatory: N/A (Key is totally passive requiring no approval). f. Power: Passive - powered by Analog Proximity Card Sensor. g. Communication: Via field disturbance from Analog Proximity Card Sensor. h. Manufacturer: Westinghouse Security Electronics, Model: [SE 1050 Command Key] [SE 1060 Command Key]. 11. Power Supply, Controller (3018): Security System a. General: The power supply can provide continuous power to the Controller, Sensors, monitor modules and annunciator devices. b. Capacities: The power supply shall provide low volt DC output to the Controller. c. Specifications: i. Dimensions: 7 X 5.7 X 3.125 in. depth (17.8 L X 14.5 W X 7.9 cm). 16720 -20 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility d. Environmental: i. Humidity: 10% to 95% non - condensing. ii. Temperature: 20° to +120° F ( -7° to +49° C). e. Regulatory: UL 1012 or 1310 and CSA or cUL listed. f. Mounting: The Controller power supply should be installed in a secure area at least 2 feet away from the controller g. Power: 115VAC /60Hz source. h. Wiring: i. The power supply shall be connected to the Controller via wiring of at least 18 AWG. ii. Connectors: Phoenix.Feedback: A single LED indicates power ON condition. i. Manufacturer: Westinghouse Security Electronics Model: 3018, or other Westinghouse- approved device. 12. Power Supply with battery backup, Controller (3718S or 718SUL): a. General: Security System i. Un- interruptable power supply shall provide continuous power to the Controller, Sensors, monitor modules and annunciator devices, and operate from 115VAC /60Hz source. ii. Optionally, it shall support external lead acid battery(s) to maintain all Controller, Sensor and monitor modules operations for at least 4 (four) hours in event of power failure. b. Capacities: The power supply shall provide: i. Low volt DC output to the Controller. ii. Limited lock power output at 12 Volts DC. iii. Ampere output current at 12 VDC, 1.5 A at 24 VDC. iv. Power failure output and battery charger output. c. Specifications: 16720 -21 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility i. Dimensions: 18 X 7.2 X 5.2 in. depth (45.7 X 18.3 X 13.2 cm). d. Environmental: i. Humidity: 10% to 95% non - condensing. ii. Temperature: 20° to +120° F ( -7° to +49° C). e. Regulatory: UL 1012 or 1310 and CSA or cUL listed. f. Mounting: The power supply should be installed in a secure area at least two feet from the Controller. g. Power: 115VAC /60Hz source. h. Wiring: 1 The power supply shall be connected to the Controller via a special wiring harness of at least 18 AWG. ii. The power supply shall utilize Phoenix -type connectors to allow for ease of field wiring and unit replacement. i. Feedback: A single LED indicates power ON condition. J. Self- protection: The power supply shall provide the following signals to the Controller: i. Power fail. ii. Battery recharge signal. k. Manufacturer: Westinghouse Security Electronics, Model: 3718S or other Westinghouse- approved device. 13. Power Supply (PI -1) Power Inserter: a. General: Un- interruptable power supply shall provide low voltage DC power. It shall also support optional external lead acid batteries to maintain all controller operations for at least four (4) hours in event of power failure. b. Capacities: i. volt DC output to readers. ii. Limited lock power output at 24 Volts DC. Security System 16720 -22 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 1 iii. ampere output current. iv. Power failure output. v. Battery charger output. 1 vi. Additional power supplies may be required based upon system configuration of other devices and wiring distances. 1 c. Specifications: i i. Dimensions: 12 X 5.25 X 3.375 in. (31 X 13.4 X 9.5 cm) d. Environmental: 1 i. Humidity: 10% to 90% non - condensing ii. Temperature: 20° to +120° F (-7° to +49 ° C). e. Regulatory: UL 1012 or 1310 and CSA or cUL listed. i. NOTE: PI -1 Power Supply is required when configuring NexSentry with ` a keypad and /or digital readers to meet FCC requirements. f. Mounting: Power supply should be installed in a secure area at least two feet from the Controller. 1. g. Power: 115VAC /60Hz source. h. Wiring: Power supply shall be connected to the Controller and keypad network wiring via twisted pair wire (shielding optional) of at least 18 AWG. ii. Connectors: Phoenix -type. 1 i. Feedback: A single LED indicates power ON condition. j. Self- protection: PI -1 shall send a POWER FAIL signal to the Controller. k. Manufacturer: Westinghouse Security Electronics, Model: PI -1, or other manufacturer - approved device. 14. Accessories a. Terminal: Security System 16720 -23 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility i. Standard Video display terminal (CRT) with full keyboard and display. ii. Shall be capable of data throughput at 9600 baud. iii. Systems Integrator shall furnish as shown on plans. iv. Manufacturer: Westinghouse Security Electronics, Model: #57101 -L -1 (110v) or equal. b. Printer: i. Printer shall be standard RS -232 serial communications printer. ii. Printer shall be capable of data throughput at 9600 baud. iii. Systems Integrator shall furnish as shown on plans. iv. Manufacturer: Westinghouse Security Electronics, Model: parallel /serial 57184 -V (115v) or equal. c. Locking Hardware: i. Systems Integrator shall furnish all system electrified locking hardware as shown on plans which is used in conjunction with the card access and alarm monitoring system. d. Switches: i. Provide all necessary monitoring and manual switches as shown on plans which are used in conjunction with the card access security system. e. External UPS batteries: i. Provide necessary batteries to be used with UPS power supply to maintain all controller operations and provide limited DC lock power at either 12VDC or 24VDC. C. Controller software features: 1. Control operation: Based on the ability to force relay lock outputs to an operating mode. Forcing action may be initiated by: a. Time -of -day schedule. b. Switch closure. Security System 16720 -24 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility c. Command card presentation. d. Keyboard command. 2. Access Codes: a. The access code shall define where and when the card holder will be granted access. b. Number available: 120. c, Capacity: Each access code shall have the capacity of defining up to 4 (four) time periods for each door in the system. d. Definable time periods: Time of Day, Day of Week, and Holidays. 3. Holidays: a. User - definable holidays: up to 30. b. By way of the "Access" command, user may define the access privileges (times and doors) of a card holder for any or all of those days. 4. Card Commands: The user shall be able to define command cards according to the following parameters: a. Unique numeric identification: 11,200 command cards. b. character description and unique numeric identification: 4,400 command cards. c. Both cards with names and without within the same database. d. Bulk program cards in groups and remove any card from the database. e. Any card usage shall be traced by the system and a card trace report generated. 5. Card functions: Card functions shall include: a. Access: i. Access parameter definition: any single card can be programmed to open each door during four different time periods. ii. Time intervals: Up to 128 different time intervals. Security System 16720 -25 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility iii. Modification of card access parameters: may be modified at any time. b. Building Mode: i. Any card shall have means to be programmed as PRIVILEGED and be authorized to arm or disarm the building mode feature. ii. If the card is not authorized to disarm mode alarm system, the card user shall be unable gain entry, regardless if user's access code has been programmed for that period. iii. Building Modes shall be defined as follows: 1 OPEN mode: designates any key holder, privileged or not, may enter the building provided he has a valid access code (used during peak normal hours). 2 LIMIT mode: designates when a privileged key holder may enter the building, provided he has a valid access code. 3 CLOSED mode: is used when the building is unoccupied. Although a privileged key holder may enter a closed building, he must put the structure in the open or limited mode within one minute or an alarm will be activated. c. Anti - passback: i. System shall have capability to designate any command card so that when it is used to enter an area it must be used to exit that area before it can be reused for entry. ii. System shall have capability to manually or automatically reset the location of all command card's passback status at any time. iii. Anti - passback modes: 1 HARD mode: Denies re -entry and reports passback violation. 2 SOFT mode: Allows re -entry but reports passback violation. 6. Monitoring (if monitoring module is required): a. Supervised alarm contacts: up to 32. b. Character names: up to 24 characters defined by user. c. Monitor points shall: 16720 -26 Security System 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 1 i. Be designated by the user as an alarm or non -alarm event. ii. Be elected to either monitor at all times or during selected time periods. iii. Be capable of being enabled /disabled from terminal or externally from card holder. iv. Be capable of enabling any lock output or annunciator output including latched alarm contact. v. Work with the controller to provide immediate re -lock after card holder has gained access into a facility. System re- locking only after preset time delay shall not be acceptable. 7. Annunciation (if Annunciator is used): a. Annunciation may be sent to unused controller lock outputs or to remote annunciation module. b. System shall have means to annunciate any alarm report generated by the system including: i. All monitor points. ii. Power fail input. iii. Tamper input. iv. Card trace reports. v. Access denied reports. vi. Passback violations, etc. 8. Alarm Shunting: a. System shall have means to connect presence detecting device to shunt alarms when authorized employee uses an alarmed exit. b. Exit reporting shall be selected by user. 9. Forced Entry Alarms: a. System shall have means to select which doors shall report forced entry alarms or door held open alarms. Security System 16720 -27 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility b. On a door by door basis, user shall be able to select which doors are to report forced entry and during what time periods. c. User shall be able to select whether such alarms will be generated at all times or when system is in NIGHT mode. 10. Passwords: a. Identification of operators for terminal use: 8 (eight) different operators. b. User definable passwords: Up to 12 (twelve) character user definable passwords shall be used to log on to the system. c. Access levels: Up to 6 (six) access levels each having different operator function capabilities shall be available. 11. Printed Data Output: System shall be capable of selecting which access and monitor point activity messages are to be output the printer. The system shall be capable of printing the following information: a. Card Definitions: Keycodes/ Names/ Access Codes /Location (In -Out status for anti - passback)/ Key trace function (Enable /Disable)/ whether Privileged or not. b. Monitored Point Parameters. c. Door Parameters. d. Access Code Parameters. e. User Names, Passwords, and Access Levels. f. System Status (real time report). g. All Report Types. 12. Sensors: a. System shall be able to assign a 24 character name for each sensor. Security System b. System shall be capable of defining which sensors and at what times they are to report valid access reports. c. User shall be able to select which times and at what sensors key trace reports are generated. d. User shall be able to define which are "night mode" sensors (sensors where privileged cards function). 16720 -28 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility PART 3 3.01 3.01 A. B. C. Security Sys 13. Dial -up: a. System shall capable of utilizing a dial -up modem to automatically report alarms or send messages to a central station or remote terminal. b. There shall be at least 3 telephone numbers programmable for dial -up use. c. User shall be able to define how many attempts (up to 10) will be made to communicate via dial -up. 14. Telecommunications: a. System shall be capable of being programmed remotely via modem. b. System shall have means to be programmed so that it requires central station to "call back" controller to ensure that only central station can gain access to controller database. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND DOCUMENTATION Installation: 1. The proximity access control and alarm monitoring system shall be installed and wired completely as shown on the plans by a trained and authorized Westinghouse Security Electronics Systems Integrator. 2. Systems Integrator shall make all necessary wiring connections to external devices and equipment. Telephone Lines: 1. The owner shall arrange for dedicated or dial -up telephone lines for the telecommunications equipment as shown on the plans. 2. Each phone line shall be terminated in an RJ -11 telephone jack. 3. Note: Any connections to the public telephone system require notification of the local telephone company. See specific instructions in manual for modem used. Documentation: 1. Accurate "as built" drawings shall be furnished by the Systems Integrator to aid the owner in programming. These should indicate the door(s) controlled by each lock output, the monitoring points for the door controlled area, and any annunciator outputs or special inputs into the system. em 16720 -29 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 2. The Systems Integrator shall supply operating and maintenance manuals to aid the owner in the programming of the system. 3.02 SERVICE AND SUPPORT A. Startup: 1. After the system has been installed, the documentation delivered to the owner and the telephone lines are operational in compliance with Part 111.1 above, the Systems Integrator shall verify correct operation of all system components. 2. The Systems Integrator shall guarantee all material and workmanship involving the system for up to one year after startup. B. Training: 1. After system startup, the Systems Integrator shall instruct owners personnel in how to program the system and demonstrate a typical operating program for a single door controlled area. C. Warranty Support: 1. The authorized Systems Integrator shall be available during the warranty period to answer programming and application questions to support owners personnel during this period. 2. Option: The authorized Systems Integrator shall have capability to have a remote terminal for programming the Controller to support the owner's personnel during this period. The owners system shall include a modem SE Model # 5200 or equal, necessary cabling and telephone extension to support this telecommunications operation. 3. Option: The authorized Systems Integrator shall have the training and capability to provide additional support services including: Security System a. Regular testing and inspection of all system components and to submit reports on the results. b. Emergency service for repairs and adjustments to the system and part replacement if necessary. END OF SECTION 16720 -30 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 16721 WATER ALERT SYSTEMS PART 1GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Fumish and install a complete water leakage detection system. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. ALL Equipment shall be manufactured by Dorlen Products. See manufacturer's contact phone number index on first sheet of electrical drawings for telephone. B. Refer to plans for quantities and locations. C. Sensors: Dorlen #SS -R (T) (RELAY) D. Water Alert Alarm Panel (Remote Indicator Panel): Dorlen #RI -2(T) E. Power Supply: Dorlen #PS -3 F. Power Wire: Dorlen #Call manufacturer for recommended wire size based on Contractor's field wire routing. G. Mounting Shelf: Provide a mounting shelf with oak shelving to be located in the MAP room at a final location as directed by the Owner's representative. 2.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Provide a phenolic label at each water detector stating the device number as it corresponds to the remote alarm panel located in the MAP room. B. Provide a phenolic label above each indicator at the map room stating the room number that the water detector is located in. PART 3EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with all plumbing fixtures such that the detectors do not conflict with the installation of other trade's work. B. Place detectors in a location to be determined in the field that will not result in a hazard to personnel and equipment. Telephone Raceway Systems 16721 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility C. Coordinate entire system installation with manufacturer to assure a complete working installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A.. Locate Water Alert Alarm Panel (WAAP) in the MAP room at a height that will not conflict with ADA requirements. B. Place detectors in a location to be determined in the field that will not result in a hazard to personnel and equipment. C. All wiring to be conceal except where the installation will not permit such. D. Adjust water level detectors as directed by the Owners representative. END OF SECTION Telephone Raceway Systems 16721 -2. 9 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 16742 TELEPHONE /COMPUTER SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install a complete system of telephone and data outlets, wire, jacks, faceplates and conduits. B. Termination of telephone and data cabling. C. Relocate existing incoming telephone underground conduit to new locations as denoted on the drawings. D. Demolition of the existing telephone and data systems as required to conform to the new device locations. 1.02 STANDARDS The installation shall comply with the following standards: A. TIA/EIA 568A Commercial Building Standards B. EIARIA 569 Commercial Building Standards C. TIA/EIA 606 Commercial Building Standards D. IEEE 802.3 -1993 Local Area Networks PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. Raceways: Provide electrical metallic tubing in partitions and office areas and rigid conduit in industrial areas according to Section 16111. Cabling may be run exposed above accessible ceilings where protected from physical damage and the cable type is adjusted to match the environment. Provide pleneum rated cable where the ceiling space is used as an air return. Coordinate with the Division 15 Contractor to determine the space usage prior to bid. B. Wall Outlets: Provide 4" x 2 -1/8" x 1 -1/2" deep boxes mounted to match adjacent receptacle heights (unless noted otherwise on drawings) above finished floor, with a 3/4" conduit stubbed out above ceiling and extended to terminal cabinet or board. In industrial areas, locate outlet 5' above finished floor, or as noted on drawings. C. Terminal Mounting Boards: 4' x 8' x 3/4" plywood board securely mounted to wall surface at locations shown on drawings. D. Mounting Board: Telephone Raceway Systems 16742 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 1. A NEMA 1 enclosure with a 3/4" plywood backing finished with dielectric paint may be provided in telephone area for installing necessary terminal blocks for telephone line. Provide a bare #2 copper ground wire from the primary principal ground bare to the telephone backboard. 2. Boxes shall match standard lighting panelboards in appearance and dimensions. E. Telephone Jacks: ATT #107 - 321 -721, ivory color. F. Telephone cabling to comply with category 3 requirements, 4 pair, 24 gauge ATT #3 N P4 P24 GY- R- ATT -PV. G. Data Jacks: ATT #107 - 565 -491, orange color. H. Data cabling to comply with category 5 requirements, 4 pair, 24 gauge, ATT #5N P424GT- R- ATT -PV. I. Faceplate ATT #106 - 313 -646, 4 port, ivory w /ATT #107 - 067 -860 blanks as needed. 2.02 IDENTIFICATION A. All data and telephone jacks shall be numbered to correspond to the jack numbers listed on the plans. Where additional jacks are installed in the project as requested by the Owner's representative, the locations and numbers shall be added to the record documents. B. Label cables on both ends with the corresponding jack number. At the backboard end the cabling shall be labeled 2" from the termination end and again 18" from the termination end. Labels shall be shrink type applied to the overall cable jacket with the cable number facing front. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION A. The location and details for telephone and data system equipment shall be coordinated and approved by the Owner's Representative before installation. The exact dimensions shall be determined by the telephone equipment representative. B. The location of telephone outlets shall be as noted on the construction drawings. C. Coordinate locations and mounting heights with Architectural drawings which may reflect cabinet and other furniture type equipment. Adjust mounting heights as required to reflect cabinets and other casework dimensions. D. Coordinate with US West and provide telephone service at new telephone demarcation areas as indicated on the drawings. See coordination telephone number list on first sheet of electrical plans. Telephone Raceway Systems 16742 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Surface - mounted cabinets and boxes shall be mounted on spacers to provide a minimum clearance of 1/2" between the equipment and the mounting surface. B. Install raceways and conduits as required for the indicated placement and quantity of stations. C. Where possible the WAO and the telephone jacks shall be combined in a single four -port faceplate with excess ports blanked off for future additions. D. Install a Category 3 wire and an additional pull- string Greenlee #431 in the telephone raceways for the convenience of the telephone system installation and future additions. E. Install a Category 5 wire and an additional pull- string Greenlee #431 in the LAN /Data raceways for the convenience of the Work Area Outlet (WAO) system installation and future additions. F. Conduits to each extension and telephone in these facilities shall be installed by the Contractor. Outlet boxes with flush mounting plates shall be installed for concealed wiring in offices and other areas where masonry walls are required and shall be located as indicated or changed by the Owner's Representative. G. Install a telephone type plate on all outlet boxes that may be equipped with a telephone outlet. H. Install a data type plate on all outlet boxes that may be equipped with a data outlet. END OF SECTION Telephone Raceway Systems 16742 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Facility SECTION 16950 TESTING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION Test and provide written certification that the entire electrical installation complies with contract documents, code and proper system operation. Perform acceptance tests in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, NFPA 70B and International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) testing specifications NETA ATS -1991. A. Testing company. The following testing shall be performed by an independent testing company: 1. Service Grounding Test 2. Ground Fault Protection Systems Test & Calibration 3. Transformers Dry Type 4. Automatic Transfer Switch Test & Calibration 5. Switchboards 6. Molded -Case Circuit Breakers 7. Metering Test & Calibration 1.02 SCHEDULE A. Perform all testing after installation. All systems shall pas tests prior to substantial completion or owner occupancy. 1.03 RECEPTACLE AND DEVICE TEST Testing A. Receptacle Polarity Test: Test every receptacle installed or reconnected under this contract with a receptacle circuit tester. Tester shall test for open ground, reverse polarity, open hot, open neutral, hot and ground reversed, hot or neutral and hot open. Rewire receptacles with faults and retest. Submit test report signed by electrician that performed the test. B. Ground -Fault Receptacle Circuit Interrupter Tests: Test each receptacle or branch circuit breaker having ground -fault circuit protection to assure that the ground -fault circuit interrupter will not operate when subjected to a ground -fault current of less than 4 milliamperes and will operate when subjected to a ground -fault current exceeding 6 milliamperes. Perform testing using an instrument specifically designed and manufactured for testing ground -fault circuit interrupters. Apply the test to the receptacle. "TEST" button operation will not be acceptable as a substitute for this test. Replace receptacles that to not shutoff power with 5/1000 of an ampere within 1 /40th of a second and retest. 16950 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Facility C. Operational Tests: Demonstrate the operation of each switch, circuit breaker and other item of electrical control with the systems fully energized and operating. Each shall be demonstrated three times. 1.04 600 VOLT WIRING A. Scope: Test all electrical feeders whose operating voltage is 600 volts or less that are installed or reconnected under this contract. B. Test for continuity of each circuit. C. Test for grounds in each circuit which shall consist of the physical examination of the installation to ensure that all required ground jumpers, devices, and appurtenances do exist and are mechanically firm. D. Perform a 500 volt megohm meter test on each circuit between the conductor and ground. The insulation resistance shall not be less than 2 megohms for circuits under 115V, 6 megohms between conductor and ground on those over, nor less than 8 megohms for those circuits (115V -600V) with single conductor length of less than 2,500 feet. If conductor fails test , replace wiring or correct defect and retest. 1.05 POWER SYSTEM TESTS A. Scope: Inspect and test entire electrical systems provided by this contract to'verify equipment and controls are correctly operating.. B. Load Balance Tests: Checks all panelboards for proper Toad balance between phase conductors and make adjustments as necessary to bring unbalanced phases to within 15% of average load. C. Motor Tests: Check all motors for proper rotation and measure actual load current. Submit tabulation of motor currents for all motors 1 HP or more after the HVAC system has been balanced. D. Phase Relationship Tests: Check connections to all new and existing equipment for proper phase relationship. During such check, disconnect all devices which could be damaged by the application of voltage or reversed phase sequence. E. Transformer Taps: Connect all transformers at "Normal" tap. After facility if completely occupied for two weeks, measure secondary voltages at all new and existing transformers. Forward a list to engineer including service switchboard voltmeter reading at the time of the test for evaluation. Reconnect taps as subsequently directed. 1.06 SERVICE GROUNDING TEST A. Perform fall -of- potential tests on main grounding electrode system provided by this contract per IEEE Standard No. 81. Maximum resistance to ground shall be Tess than 10 ohms. If this resistance cannot be obtained with the ground system shown, notify the Architect immediately for further instruction. Testing 16950 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Facility B. Confirm that the neutral is grounded only at the service equipment by removing the service neutral grounding conductor and meggering the neutral bus. 1.07 TRANSFORMERS DRY TYPE A. Test transformers dry type rated 150 kVA and over provided by this contract. B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection Test dry type transformers per the following procedures: 1. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation, anchorage and grounding. 2. Verify transformer is supplied and connected in accordance with contract documents. C. Electrical Tests D. Perform insulation resistance tests winding -to- winding and winding -to- ground. 1.08 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Scope. Test all new circuit breakers 100 amps and over within new switchboards and panelboards. Testing B. Inspect each breaker, operate manually, and electrically. Test shunt trips and alarm devices manually and electrically. C. Adjust breaker trips to settings furnished by the coordination study and verify settings of the manufacturer's rating by passing controlled current through the trip devices. Record values and report deficiencies. D. Circuit Breaker Electrical Tests 1. Contact resistance shall be measured. 2. Time - current characteristic tests shall be performed by passing three hundred percent (300 %) rated current through each pole separately. Trip time shall be determined. 3. Instantaneous pickup current shall be determined by run -up or pulse method. Clearing times should be within four (4) cycles or less. 4. Insulation resistance shall be determined pole to pole, across pole and pole to ground and across open contacts. Test voltage shall be 1000 volts D.C. 5. Check trip unit reset operation. 16950 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Facility 1.09 SWITCHBOARDS A. Scope. Test all new switchboards. B. Inspect equipment and each breaker, fused switch and report installation or shipping damage, loose material, shipping blocks, contamination or unfavorable environmental conditions that must be corrected. Check equipment for operation of doors, security of mounting. Report deficiencies. C. Check the equipment ground and record the number and size of ground bus and straps. Report deficiencies. D. Inspect the bus assembly for deficiencies and torque test all bolted connections. Test insulation of each bus phase -to -phase and phase -to- ground and all control circuits to ground with a suitable megohmeter. Record values and report deficiencies. E. Inspect for proper identification of protective devices. F. Surge Arrestors Test surge arresters per the following procedures: 1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection a. Inspect for physical damage, such as chipped or fractured porcelain. b. Inspect ground and discharge counter connections for integrity. 2. Electrical Tests a. Perform ground continuity test to ground grid system. 1.10 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES A. Scope. Test Automatic Transfer Switches provided by this contract. B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection 1. Inspect for physical damage, anchorage and grounding 2. Perform manual transfer operation. Testing 3. Clean and lubricate transfer mechanism as required. Check alignment and operation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Verify proper operation of all interlocks. 5. Perform bypass and isolation functions. C. Electrical Tests 16950 -4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Facility Monitor and verify correct operation and timing of the following applicable items: 1. Normal voltage sensing relays. 2. Emergency voltage sensing relays. 3. Test switch. 4. In -phase monitor. 5. Engine start sequence. 6. Time delay upon transfer. 7. Alternate voltage sensing relay. 8. Interlocks and limit switch function. 9. Timing delay and re- transfer upon normal power restoration. 10. Engine cool -down time delay and shutdown 11. Contact resistance shall be measured across main contacts. D. Perform insulation resistance tests phase -to -phase and phase -to- ground with switch in both source positions. E. Set and calibrate in accordance with specifications: 1. Voltage sensing relay. 2. Frequency sensing relay. 3. Transfer time delay relay. 4. Engine shutdown relay. 5. Engine exercise time (if present). 1.11 METERING TEST & CALIBRATION FOR METERS A. Scope. Test all new meters provided by this contract. B. Instrument Transformers 1. Test transformer polarity electrically Testing 16950 -5 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Facility 2. Verify connection at secondary CT leads by driving a low current through the leads and checking for this amount at applicable devices. 3. Confirm transformer ratio by primary current injection. 4. Measure insulation resistance primary-to- ground, secondary-to- ground and primary-to- secondary. 5. Overpotential test primary insulation. 6. Measure potential transformer ratio. C. Metering and Instrumentation 1. Calibrate all meters at midscale 2. Calibrate watthour meter to one -half percent 3. Verify all instrument multipliers PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TESTING COMPANY A. Retain the services of an independent testing company that is qualified to test electrical equipment, and is an approved testing company by the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries. The testing company shall not be associated with the manufacturer of equipment or systems under test. Approved companies: Electro -Test, Apparatus Service and Engineering Technology, Inc. B. Testing company shall prepare test reports on the systems they test. 2.02 MATERIALS AND INSTRUMENTATION All shall be furnished by and remain the property of the Contractor. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT DOCUMENTS Deliver the following project documents to testing company two weeks prior to testing: Division 16 Specification. Electrical Floor Plans showing equipment to be tested. Electrical One Line Diagrams. Submittals of Manufacturers Data and Shop Drawings including engineers review letter of all systems to be tested. Coordination Study. 3.02 SCHEDULE Testing 16950 -6 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Facility Notify Architect 10 working days prior to performance of any test. 3.03 TEST REPORTS A. The Contractor shall prepare test reports including description of project, description of equipment tested, description of test, test results, conclusions and recommendations, retesting results and list of test equipment used and calibration date. Calibration shall be traceable to the National Bureau of Standards and shall not be more than 6 months since last calibration. B. One copy of each test report shall be delivered directly to the electrical engineer and Owner within 7 calendar days of the test. C. Insert a copy of each test report in the operation and maintenance manuals. 3.04 RETESTING A. Any fault in material or in any part of the installation revealed by these tests shall be investigated, replaced or repaired by the Contractor and the same test repeated at Contractor's expense until no fault appears. 3.05 LABELS A. Upon completion of the tests a label shall be attached to all serviced and the testing company. 3.06 OBSERVATIONS BY ENGINEER A. Contractor shall remove and replace covers of electrical equipment, open manholes and remove /replace ceiling tiles to permit engineer to observe equipment and wiring provided. Furnish ladder and flashlight. 3.07 TROUBLESHOOTING Testing A. If a system or device provided under this contract does not operate per manufacturers specifications contractor shall provide qualified men with tools and test equipment to find and repair problem at contractor's expense. END OF SECTION 16950 -7 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility DIVISION 17 FIRE PROTECTION WORK TABLE OF CONTENTS A. 17050 Fire Alarm/Releasing Systems B. 17100 Clean Agent Suppression Systems C. 17300 Automatic Sprinkler Systems TABLE OF CONTENTS Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 17050 FIRE ALARM /RELEASING SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section of the specification includes the fumishing, installation, connection and testing of the microprocessor controlled, intelligent reporting fire alarm equipment required to form a complete, operative, coordinated system. It shall include, but not be limited to, alarm initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP), auxiliary control devices, annunciators, and wiring as shown on the drawings and specified herein. B. The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of 1993 NFPA Standard 72 for Protected Premises Signaling Systems except as modified and supplemented by this specification. The system shall be electrically supervised and monitor the integrity of all conductors. C. The fire alarm manufacturer shall be of the highest caliber and insist on the highest quality. The system shall be manufactured by an ISO 9001 certified company and meet the requirements of BS EN9001: ANSI /ASQC Q9001 -1994. D. The system and its components shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed under the appropriate UL testing standard as listed herein for fire alarm applications and shall be in compliance with the UL listing. 1.02 SCOPE A. A new intelligent reporting, microprocessor controlled fire detection system shall be installed in accordance to the project specifications and drawings. B. Basic Performance: 1. Alarm, trouble and supervisory signals from all intelligent reporting devices shall be encoded on NFPA Style 4 (Class B) Signaling Line Circuits (SLC). 2. Initiation Device Circuits (IDC) shall be wired Class B (NFPA Style B) as part of an addressable device connected by the SLC Circuit. 3. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be wired Class B (NFPA Style Y) as part of an addressable device connected by the SLC Circuit. 4. Digitized electronic signals shall employ check digits or multiple polling. 5. A single ground or open on the system signaling line circuit shall not cause system malfunction, Toss of operating power or the ability to report an alarm. 6. Alarm signals arriving at the main FACP shall not be lost following a primary power failure (or outage) until the alarm signal is processed and recorded. C. Basic System Functional Operation: When a fire alarm condition is detected and reported by one of the system initiating devices, the following functions shall immediately occur: 1. The system alarm LED on the FACP shall flash. 2. A local piezo electric signal in the control panel shall sound. 3. A backlit 80 character LCD display on the FACP shall indicate all information associated with the fire alarm condition, including the type of alarm point and its location within the protected premises. 4. Printing on the FACP and history storage equipment shall log the information associated each new fire alarm control panel condition, along with time and date of occurrence. FIRE ALARM /RELEASING SYSTEMS 17050 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 5. All system output programs assigned via control -by -event interlock programming to be activated by the particular point in alarm shall be executed, and the associated system outputs (alarm notification appliances and/or relays) shall be activated. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. Two copies of all submittals shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review. 2. All references to manufacturer's model numbers and other pertinent information herein is intended to establish minimum standards of performance, function and quality. Equivalent compatible UL- listed equipment from other manufacturers may be substituted for the specified equipment as long as the minimum standards are met. 3. For equipment other than that specified, the contractor shall supply proof that such substitute equipment equals or exceeds the features, functions, performance, and quality of the specified equipment. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications. 2. Include manufacturer's name(s), model numbers, ratings, power requirements, equipment layout, device arrangement, complete wiring point -to -point diagrams, and conduit layouts. 3. Show annunciator layout, configurations, and terminations. C. Manuals: 1. Submit simultaneously with the shop drawings, complete operating and maintenance manuals listing the manufacturer's name(s), including technical data sheets. 2. Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each device and the interconnections between the items of equipment. 3. Provide a clear and concise description of operation that gives, in detail, the information required to properly operate the equipment and system. D. Software Modifications: 1. Provide the services of a factory trained and authorized technician to perform all system software modifications, upgrades or changes. Response time of the technician to the site shall not exceed 4 hours. 2. Provide all hardware, software, programming tools and documentation necessary to modify the fire alarm system on site. Modification includes addition and deletion of devices, circuits, zones and changes to system operation and custom label changes for devices or zones. The system structure and software shall place no limit on the type or extent of software modifications on -site. Modification of software shall not require power -down of the system or loss of system fire protection while modifications are being made. E. Certifications: Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from the major equipment manufacturer indicating that the proposed supervisor of the installation and the proposed performer of contract maintenance is an authorized representative of the major equipment manufacturer. Include names and addresses in the certification. 1.04 GUARANTEE A. All work performed and all material and equipment fumished under this contract shall be free from defects and shall remain so for a period of at least one (1) year from the date of acceptance. The full cost of maintenance, labor and materials required to correct any defect during this one year period shall be included in the submittal bid. FIRE ALARM /RELEASING SYSTEMS 17050 -2 07/07/98 L 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 1.05 POST CONTRACT MAINTENANCE A. Complete maintenance and repair service for the fire alarm system shall be available from a factory trained authorized representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment for a period of five (5) years after expiration of the guaranty. B. As part of the bid /proposal, include a quote for a maintenance contract to provide all maintenance, tests, and repairs described below. Include also a quote for unscheduled maintenance /repairs, including hourly rates for technicians trained on this equipment, and response travel costs for each year of the maintenance period. Submittals that do not identify all post contract maintenance costs will not be accepted. Rates and costs shall be valid for the period of five (5) years after expiration of the guaranty. C. Maintenance and testing shall be on a semiannual basis or as required by the AHJ. A preventive maintenance schedule shall be provided by the contractor describing the protocol for preventive maintenance. The schedule shall include: 1. Systematic examination, adjustment and cleaning of all detectors, manual fire alarm stations, control panels, power supplies, relays, waterflow switches and all accessories of the fire alarm system. 2. Each circuit in the fire alarm system shall be tested semiannually. 3. Each smoke detector shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 72 Chapter 7. 1.06 POST CONTRACT EXPANSIONS A. The contractor shall provide parts and labor to expand the system specified, if so requested, for a period of five (5) years from the date of acceptance. B. As part of the submittal, include a quotation for all parts and material, and all installation and test labor as needed to increase the number of intelligent or addressable devices by ten percent (10 %). This quotation shall include intelligent smoke detectors, intelligent heat detectors, addressable manual stations, addressable monitor modules and addressable control modules equal in number to one tenth of the number required to meet this specification (list actual quantity of each type). C. The quotation shall include installation, test labor, and labor to reprogram the system for this 10% expansion. If additional FACP hardware is required, include the material and labor necessary to install this hardware. D. Do not include cost of conduit or wire or the cost to install conduit or wire except for labor to make final connections at the FACP and at each intelligent addressable device. Do not include the cost of conventional peripherals or the cost of initiating devices or notification appliances connected to the addressable monitor /control modules. E. Submittals that do not include this estimate of post contract expansion cost will not be accepted. 1.07 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The specifications and standards listed below form a part of this specification. The system shall fully comply with the latest issue of these standards: 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) - USA: a. No. 12 CO2 Extinguishing Systems b. No. 12A & 12B Halon Extinguishing Systems c. No. 15 Water Spray Systems FIRE ALARM /RELEASING SYSTEMS 17050 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility d. No. 16 Foam/Water Deluge and Spray Systems e. No. 72 -1993 National Fire Alarm Code f. No. 101 Life Safety Code 2. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) - USA: a. No. 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems b. No. 864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems c. No. 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications d. No. 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective e. No. 464 Audible Signaling Appliances f. No. 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes g. No. 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems h. No. 1076 Control Units for Burglar Alarm Proprietary Protective Signaling Systems i. No. 1971 Visual Notification Appliances 3. Local and State Building Codes. 4. All requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 1.08 APPROVALS A. The system shall have proper listing and /or approval from the following nationally recognized agencies: UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. B. The fire alarm control panel shall meet UL Standard 864 (Control Units) and UL Standard 1076 (Proprietary Burglar Alarm Systems). C. The system shall be listed by the national agencies as suitable for extinguishing release applications. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL, GENERAL A. All equipment and components shall be new, and the manufacturer's current model. The materials, appliances, equipment and devices shall be tested and listed by a nationally recognized approvals agency for use as part of a protective signaling system, meeting the National Fire Alarm Code. B. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturers' recommendations. Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals for all wiring diagrams, schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc., before beginning system installation. C. All equipment shall be attached to walls and ceiling /floor assemblies and shall be held firmly in place (e.g., detectors shall not be supported solely by suspended ceilings). Fasteners and supports shall be adequate to support the required load. 2.02 CONDUIT AND WIRE A. Conduit: 1. Conduit shall be in accordance with The National Electrical Code (NEC), local and state requirements. 2. Where possible, all wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway. Conduit fill shall not FIRE ALARM /RELEASING SYSTEMS 17050 -4 07/07/98 ii t t 1 1 1 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility exceed 40 percent of interior cross sectional area where three or more cables are contained within a single conduit. 3. Cable must be separated from any open conductors of power, or Class 1 circuits, and shall not be placed in any conduit, junction box or raceway containing these conductors, per NEC Article 760 -29. 4. Wring for 24 volt DC control, alarm notification, emergency communication and similar power- limited auxiliary functions may be run in the same conduit as initiating and signaling line circuits. All circuits shall be provided with transient suppression devices and the system shall be designed to permit simultaneous operation of all circuits without interference or loss of signals. 5. Conduit shall not enter the fire alarm control panel, or any other remotely mounted control panel equipment or backboxes, except where conduit entry is specified by the FACP manufacturer. 6. Conduit shall be 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) minimum. B. Wire: 1. All fire alarm system wiring shall be new. 2. Wiring shall be in accordance with local, state and national codes (e.g., NEC Article 760) and as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system. Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, but not less than 18 AWG (1.02 mm) for initiating device circuits and signaling line circuits, and 14 AWG (1.63 mm) for notification appliance circuits. 3. All wire and cable shall be listed and /or approved by a recognized testing agency for use with a protective signaling system. 4. Wire and cable not installed in conduit shall have a fire resistance rating suitable for the installation as indicated in NFPA 70 (e.g., FPLR). 5. Wiring used for the SLC multiplex communication loop shall be twisted and shielded and support a minimum wiring distance of 10,000 feet. In certain applications, the system shall support up to SLC loops with up to 1,000 feet of untwisted, unshielded wire. The system shall permit use of IDC and NAC wiring in the same conduit with the SLC communication loop. 6. All field wiring shall be completely supervised. 7. The fire alarm control panel shall be capable of t- tapping Class B (NFPA Style 4) Signaling Line Circuits (SLCs). Systems which do not allow or have restrictions in, for example, the amount of t -taps, length of t -taps etc., are not acceptable. C. Terminal Boxes, Junction Boxes and Cabinets: All boxes and cabinets shall be UL listed for their use and purpose. D. Initiating circuits shall be arranged to serve like categories (manual, smoke, waterflow). Mixed category circuitry shall not be permitted except on signaling line circuits connected to intelligent reporting devices. E. The fire alarm control panel shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit, maximum 20 amperes. This circuit shall be labeled at the main power distribution panel as FIRE ALARM. Fire alarm control panel primary power wiring shall be 12 AWG. The control panel cabinet shall be grounded securely to either a cold water pipe or grounding rod. 2.03 MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL A. The FACP shall be an AUTOPULSE IQ -396X and shall contain a microprocessor based Central Processing Unit (CPU). The CPU shall communicate with and control the following types of equipment used to make up the system: intelligent addressable smoke and thermal (heat) detectors, addressable modules, printer, annunciators, and other system controlled devices. FIRE ALARM /RELEASING SYSTEMS 17050 -5 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility B. Operator Control 1. Acknowledge Switch: a. Activation of the control panel acknowledge switch in response to new alarms and/or troubles shall silence the local panel piezo electric signal and change the alarm and trouble LEDs from flashing mode to steady -ON mode. If multiple alarm or trouble conditions exist, depression of this switch shall advance the 80- character LCD display to the next alarm or trouble condition. b. Depression of the Acknowledge switch shall also silence all remote annunciator piezo sounders. 2. Alarm Silence Switch: Activation of the alarm silence switch shall cause all programmed alarm notification appliances and relays to return to the normal condition after an alarm condition. The selection of notification circuits and relays that are silenceable by this switch shall be fully field programmable within the confines of all applicable standards. The FACP software shall include silence inhibit and auto - silence timers. 3. Alarm Activate (Drill) Switch: The Alarm Activate switch shall activate all notification appliance circuits. The drill function shall latch until the panel is silenced or reset. 4. System Reset Switch: Activation of the System Reset switch shall cause all electronically- latched initiating devices, appliances or software zones, as well as all associated output devices and circuits, to retum to their normal condition. 5. Lamp Test: The Lamp Test switch shall activate all system LEDs and Tight each segment of the liquid crystal display. C. System Capacity and General Operation 1. The control panel shall provide, or be capable of expansion to 396 intelligent/addressable devices. 2. The system shall include Form -C alarm, trouble, supervisory, and security relays rated at a minimum of 3.0 amps @ 30 VDC. It shall also include four Class B (NFPA Style Y) or Class A (NFPA Style Z) programmable notification appliance circuits. 3. The system shall support up to 8 additional output modules (signal, speaker, telephone, or relay), each with 8 circuits for an additional 64 circuits. These circuits shall be either Class A (NFPA Style D) or Class B (NFPA Style Y) per the project drawings. 4. The fire alarm control panel shall include a full featured operator interface control and annunciation panel that shall include a backlit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), individual color coded system status LEDs, and an alphanumeric keypad for the field programming and control of the fire alarm system. 5. All programming or editing of the existing program in the system shall be achieved without special equipment and without interrupting the alarm monitoring functions of the fire alarm control panel. The system shall be fully programmable, configurable, and expandable in the field without the need for special tools, PROM programmers or PC based programmers. It shall not require replacement of memory ICs to facilitate programming changes. 6. The system shall allow the programming of any input to activate any output or group of outputs. Systems which have limited programming (such as general alarm), have complicated programming (such as a diode matrix), or require a laptop personal computer are not considered suitable substitutes. 7. The FACP shall provide the following features: a. Drift compensation to extend detector accuracy over life. Drift compensation shall also include a smoothing feature, allowing transient noise signals to be filtered out. b. Detector sensitivity test, meeting requirements of NFPA 72, Chapter 7. c. Maintenance alert, with two levels (maintenance alert/maintenance urgent), to warn of excessive smoke detector dirt or dust accumulation. d. Nine sensitivity levels for alarm, selected by detector. The system shall also include up to nine levels of prealarm, selected as a percentage of the alarm level, in steps FIRE ALARM /RELEASING SYSTEMS 17050 -6 • 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility from 90% down to 50 %. e. System status reports to display or printer. f. Alarm verification, with verification counters. g. PAS presignal, meeting NFPA 72 3 -8.3 requirements. h. Rapid manual station reporting (under 3 seconds). i. Non -alarm points for general (non -fire) control. j. Periodic detector test, conducted automatically by the software. k. Self optimizing pre -alarm for advanced fire waming, which allows each detector to leam its particular environment and set its prealarm level to just above normal peaks. I. Cross zoning with the capability of counting: two detectors in alarm, two software zones in alarm, or one smoke detector and one thermal detector. m. Walk test, with a check for two detectors set to same address. n. Control -by -time for non -fire operations, with holiday schedules. o. Day /night automatic adjustment of detector sensitivity. p. Device blink control for sleeping areas. q. UL -1076 security monitor points. r. Releasing options including: 8 independent hazards, a sophisticated cross zone, delay and discharge timers, and an abort function. 8. The FACP shall be capable of coding notification circuits in march time (120 PPM), temporal (NFPA 72 A -2- 2.2.2), and california code. D. Central Microprocessor 1. The microprocessor shall be a state -of -the -art, high speed, 16 bit RISC device and it shall communicate with, monitor and control all external interfaces. It shall include an EPROM for system program storage, non - volatile memory for building - specific program storage, and a "watch dog" timer circuit to detect and report microprocessor failure. 2. The microprocessor shall contain and execute all control -by -event programs for specific action to be taken if an alarm condition is detected by the system. Control -by -event equations shall be held in non - volatile programmable memory, and shall not be lost even if system primary and secondary power failure occurs. 3. The microprocessor shall also provide a real -time clock for time annotation of system displays, printer, and history file. The time -of -day and date shall not be lost if system primary and secondary power supplies fail. The real time clock may also be used to control non -fire functions at programmed time -of -day, day-of -week, and day-of -year. 4. A special program check function shall be provided to detect common operator errors. 5. An auto - program (self -leam) function shall be provided to quickly install initial functions and make the system operational. 6. For flexibility and to ensure program validity, an optional Windows(TM) based program utility shall be available. This program shall be used to off -line program the system with batch upload /download. This program shall also have a verification utility which scans the program files, identifying possible errors. It shall also have the ability to compare old program files to new ones, identifying differences in the two files to allow complete testing of any system operating changes. This shall be in incompliance with the NFPA 72 requirements for testing after system modification. E. Display 1. The display shall provide all the controls and indicators used by the system operator and may also be used to program all system operational parameters. 2. The display shall include status information and custom alphanumeric labels for all intelligent detectors, addressable modules, intemal panel circuits, and software zones. 3. The display shall include an 80- character back -lit alphanumeric Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). It shall also provide 8 Light - Emitting - Diodes (LEDs), that indicate the status of the following system parameters: AC POWER, FIRE ALARM, PREALARM WARNING, SECURITY ALARM, SUPERVISORY SIGNAL, SYSTEM TROUBLE, DISABLED POINTS, FIRE ALARM /RELEASING SYSTEMS 17050 -7 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility and ALARM SILENCED. 4. The display keypad shall be an easy to use QWERTY type keypad, similar to a PC keyboard. This shall be part of the standard system and have the capability to command all system functions, entry of any alphabetic or numeric information, and field programming. Two different password levels shall be provided to prevent unauthorized system control or programming. 5. The display shall include the following operator control switches: ACKNOWLEDGE, ALARM SILENCE, ALARM ACTIVATE (drill), SYSTEM RESET, and LAMP TEST. F. Signaling Line Circuits (SLC) 1. The system shall include two SLC circuits. Each SLC interface shall provide power to and communicate with up to 99 intelligent detectors (ionization, photoelectric or thermal) and 99 intelligent modules (monitor or control) for a system capacity of 396 devices. Each SLC bop shall be capable of NFPA 72 Style 4, Style 6, or Style 7 (Class A or B) wiring. 2. The Loop Interface Board (LIB) shall receive analog information from all intelligent detectors to be processed to determine whether normal, alarm, prealarm, or trouble conditions exist for each detector. The software shall automatically maintain the detector's desired sensitivity level by adjusting for the effects of environmental factors, including the accumulation of dust in each detector. The analog information shall also be used for automatic detector testing and for the automatic determination of detector maintenance requirements. 3. The detector software shall meet NFPA 72, Chapter 7 requirements and be certified by UL as a calibrated sensitivity test instrument. 4. The detector software shall allow manual or automatic sensitivity adjustment. G. Serial Interfaces: The system shall include two serial EIA -232 interfaces. Each interface shall be a means of connecting UL Listed Electronic Data Processing (EDP) peripherals. H. Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) Module 1. The notification appliance circuit module shall provide four fully supervised Class A or B (NFPA Style Z or Y) notification circuits. An expansion circuit board shall allow expansion to eight circuits per module. 2. The notification circuit capacity shall be 3.0 amperes maximum per circuit and 6.0 amperes maximum per module. 3. The module shall not affect other module circuits in any way during a short circuit condition. 4. The module shall provide eight green ON /OFF LEDs and eight yellow TROUBLE LEDs. 5. The module shall also provide a momentary switch per circuit that may be used to manually turn the particular circuit on or off or to disable the circuit. 6. Each notification circuit shall include a custom label inserted to identify each circuits location. Labels shall be created using a standard typewriter or wordprocessor. 7. The notification circuit module shall be provided with removable wiring terminal blocks for ease of installation and service. The terminal strips shall be UL listed for use with up to 12 AWG wire. 8. Each circuit shall be capable of, through system programming, deactivating upon depression of the signal silence switch. I. Control Relay Module 1. The control relay module shall provide four Form -C auxiliary relay circuits rated at 5 amperes, 28 VDC. An expansion circuit board shall allow expansion to eight Form -C relays per module. 2. Each relay circuit shall be capable of being activated (change in state) by any initiating device or from any combination of initiating devices. 3. The expansion module shall provide 8 green ON /OFF LEDs and 8 yellow LEDs (indicates disabled status of the relay). FIRE ALARM /RELEASING SYSTEMS 17050 -8 07/07/98 1 H 9 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 4. The module shall provide a momentary switch per relay circuit that may be used to manually turn the relay ON /OFF or to disable the relay. 5. Each relay circuit hall include a custom label inserted to identify its location. Labels shall be created using standard typewriter or wordprocessor. 6. The control relay nodule shall be provided with removable wiring terminal blocks for ease of installation and service. The terminal blocks shall be UL listed for use with up to 12 AWG wire. J. Enclosures: 1. The control panel mounting. The ca coat, and manuft 2. The back box ar conduit connectic 3. The door shall pr for viewing of all i left hand hinging. K. Power Supply: 1. The main power power for the col 2. Provisions will b adding modular 3. Positive - Temper protection shall integral battery cl battery and char 4. The main pow€ conditions, and a. Ground F shall be housed in a UL- listed cabinet suitable for surface or semi -flush binet and front shall be corrosion protected, given a rust- resistant prime cturer's standard finish. d door shall be constructed of .060 steel with provisions for electrical ms into the sides and top. ovide a key lock and shall include a glass or other transparent opening ndicators. For convenience, the door may be selected for either right or >upply for the fire alarm control panel shall provide 6.0 amps of available trot panel and peripheral devices. made to allow the audio - visual power to be increased as required by expansion audio - visual power supplies. iture- Coefficient (PTC) thermistors, circuit breakers, or other over - current �e provided on all power outputs. The power supply shall provide an larger for use with batteries up to 55 AH or may be used with an external der systems. Battery arrangement may be configured in the field. r supply shall continuously monitor all field wires for earth ground hall have the following LED indicators: ult LED b. Battery Fail LED c. AC Power Fail LED 5. The main power supply shall operate on 120 VAC, 60 Hz, and shall provide all necessary power for the FACP. 6. The main power supply shall provide a battery charger for 24 hours of standby using dual -rate charging techniques for fast battery recharge. 7. The main powe supply shall provide a very low frequency sweep earth detect circuit, capable of dete ting earth faults on sensitive addressable modules. 8. The main powe supply shall provide meters to indicate battery voltage and charging current. 9. All circuits shall be power - limited, per 1995 UL864 requirements. L. Field Charging Power Supply: The FCPS is a device designed for use as either a remote 24 volt power supply or used to power Notification Appliances. 1. The FCPS shall offer up to 6.0 amps (4.0 amps continuous) of regulated 24 volt power. It shall include an ntegral charger designed to charge 7.0 amp hour batteries and to support 60 hour standby. 2. The Field Charging Power Supply shall have two input triggers. The input trigger shall be a Notification A pliance Circuit (from the fire alarm control panel) or a relay. Four outputs (two Style Y or Z and two style Y) shall be available for connection to the Notification devices. 3. The FCPS shal include an attractive surface mount backbox. 4. The Field Charging Power Supply shall include the ability to delay the AC fail delay per 1993 NFPA requirements. FIRE ALARM /RELEASING SYSTEMS 17050 -9 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 5. The FCPS include power limited circuitry, per 1995 UL standards. M. Specific System Operations 1. Smoke Detector Sensitivity Adjust: A means shall be provided for adjusting the sensitivity of any or all addressable intelligent detectors in the system from the system keypad. Sensitivity range shall be within the allowed UL window and have a minimum of 9 levels. 2. Alarm Verification: Each of the intelligent addressable smoke detectors in the system may be independently selected and enabled to be an alarm verified detector. The alarm verification delay shall be programmable from 5 to 30 seconds and each detector shall be able to be selected for verification. The FACP shall keep a count of the number of times that each detector has entered the verification cycle. These counters may be displayed and reset by the proper operator commands. 3. Point Disable: Any addressable device or conventional circuit in the system may be enabled or disabled through the system keypad. 4. Point Read: The system shall be able to display or print the following point status diagnostic functions: a. Device status b. Device type c. Custom device label d. View analog detector values e. Device zone assignments f. All program parameters 5. System Status Reports: Upon command from an operator of the system, a status report will be generated and printed, listing all system status. 6. System History Recording and Reporting: The fire alarm control panel shall contain a history buffer that will be capable of storing up to 1000 events. 200 events shall be dedicated to alarm and the remaining events are general purpose. Each of these activations will be stored and time and date stamped with the actual time of the activation. The contents of the history buffer may be manually reviewed, one event at a time, or printed in its entirety. The history buffer shall use non - volatile memory. Systems that use volatile memory for history storage are not acceptable substitutes. 7. Automatic Detector Maintenance Alert: The fire alarm control panel shall automatically interrogate each intelligent detector and shall analyze the detector responses over a period of time. If any intelligent detector in the system responds with a reading that is above or below normal limits, then the system will enter the trouble mode, and the particular detector will be annunciated on the system display, and printed on the optional printer. This feature shall in no way inhibit the receipt of alarm conditions in the system, nor shall it require any special hardware, special tools or computer expertise to perform. 8. Pre -Alarm Function: The system shall provide two levels of pre -alarm warning to give advance notice of a possible fire situation. Both pre -alarm levels shall be fully field adjustable. The first level shall give an audible indication at the panel. The second level shall give an audible indication and may also activate control relays. The system shall also have the ability to activate local detector sounder bases at the pre -alarm level, to assist in avoiding nuisance alarms. 9. Software Zones: The FACP shall provide 99 software zones and 10 additional special function zones. 10. The fire alarm control panel shall include a walk test feature. It shall include the ability to test initiating device circuits and notification appliance circuits from the field without returning to the panel to reset the system. Operation shall be as follows: a. Alarming an initiating device shall activate programmed outputs, which are selected to participate in walk test, for 3 seconds. b. Introducing a trouble into the initiating device shall activate the programmed outputs for 8 seconds. c. Walk test shall be selectable on a per device /circuit basis. All devices and circuits FIRE ALARM /RELEASING SYSTEMS 17050 -10 07/07/98 1 i 4 1 1 1 1 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility which are not selected for walk test shall continue to provide fire protection and if an alarm is detected, will exit walk test and activate all programmed alarm functions. d. All devices tested in walk test shall be recorded in the history buffer. 11. Waterflow Operation: An alarm from a waterflow detection device shall activate the appropriate alarm message on the 80 character display, tum on all programmed notification appliance circuits and shall not be affected by the signal silence switch. 12. Supervisory Operation: An alarm from a supervisory device shall cause the appropriate indication on the 80 character display, light a common supervisory LED, but will not cause the system to enter the trouble mode. 13. Signal Silence Operation: The FACP shall have the ability to program each output circuit (notification, relay, speaker etc) to deactivate upon depression of the signal silence switch. 14. Non -Alarm Input Operation: Any addressable initiating device in the system may be used as a non -alarm input to monitor normally -open contact type devices. Non -alarm functions are a lower priority than fire alarm initiating devices. 2.04 SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Programmable Electronic Sounders: 1. Electronic sounders shallbe UL Listed or FM approved and operate on 24 VDC nominal. 2. Electronic sounders shall be field programmable without the use of special tools, to provide slow whoop, continuous, or interrupted tones with an output sound level of at least 90 dBA measured at 10 feet from the device. 3. Shall be flush or surface mounted as show on plans. B. Strobe lights shall meet the requirements of the ADA, UL Standard 1971 and shall meet the following criteria: 1. The maximum pulse duration shall be 2/10 of one second. 2. Strobe intensity shall meet the requirements of UL 1971. 3. The flash rate shall meet the requirements of UL 1971. 4. The appliance shall be placed 80 in. above the highest floor level within the space, or 6 in. below the ceiling, which ever is the lower. C. Sprinkler and Standpipe Valve Supervisory Switches: 1. Each sprinkler system water supply control valve riser, zone control valve, and standpipe system riser control valve shall be equipped with a supervisory switch. Standpipe hose valves, and test and drain valves shall not be equipped with supervisory switches. 2. PIV (post indicator valve) or main gate valves shall be equipped with a supervisory switch. 3. The switch shall be mounted so as not to interfere with the normal operation of the valve and adjusted to operate within two revolutions toward the closed position of the valve control, or when the stem has moved no more than one -fifth of the distance from its normal position. 4. The supervisory switch shall be contained in a weatherproof aluminum housing, which shall provide a 3/4 inch (19 mm) conduit entrance and incorporate the necessary facilities for attachment to the valves. 5. The switch housing shall be finished in red baked enamel. 6. The entire installed assembly shall be tamper proof and arranged to cause a switch operation if the housing cover is removed, or if the unit is removed from its mounting. 7. Valve supervisory switches shall be provided and connected under this section and installed by mechanical contractor. D. Water Flow Switches: 1. Flow switches shall be integral, mechanical, non - coded, non- accumulative retard type. 2. Flow switches shall have an alarm transmission time delay that is conveniently adjustable from 0 to 60 seconds. Initial settings shall be 30 - 45 seconds. FIRE ALARM /RELEASING SYSTEMS 17050 -11 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 3. Flow switches shall be located a minimum of one foot (.3 m) from a fitting that changes the direction of the flow and a minimum of three feet (.91m) from a valve. E. All interfaces and associated equipment are to be protected so that they will not be affected by voltage surges or line transients consistent with UL standard 864. F. Field Wiring Terminal Blocks: For ease of service all panel I/O wiring terminal blocks shall be removable, plug -in types and have sufficient capacity for 18 to 12 AWG wire. Terminal blocks which are permanently fixed are not acceptable. 2.05 SYSTEM COMPONENTS - ADDRESSABLE DEVICES A. Addressable Devices - General 1. Addressable devices shall use simple to install and maintain decade (numbered 1 to 10) type address switches. 2. Addressable devices which use a binary address setting method, such as a Dip switch, are difficult to install and subject to installation error. This type of device is not an allowable substitute. 3. Detectors shall be intelligent (analog) and addressable, and shall connect with two wires to the fire alarm control panel signaling line circuits. 4. Addressable smoke and thermal detectors shall provide dual alarm and power /polling LEDs. Both LEDs shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the detector is operational and in regular communication with the control panel, and both LEDs shall be placed into steady illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. If required, the LED flash shall have the ability to be removed from the system program. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED. 5. Smoke detector sensitivity shall be set in the fire alarm control panel and shall be adjustable in the field through the field programming of the system. Sensitivity may be automatically adjusted by the panel on a time - of-day basis. 6. Using software in the FACP, detectors shall automatically compensate for dust accumulation and other slow environmental changes that may affect their performance. The detectors shall be listed by UL as meeting the calibrated sensitivity test requirements of NFPA Standard 72, Chapter 7. 7. The detectors shall be ceiling -mount and shall include a separate twist -lock base with tamper proof feature. Base shall include a sounder base with a built -in (local) sounder rated at 85 DBA minimum, a relay base and an isolator base designed for Style 7 applications. 8. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector itself (by activating a magnetic switch) or initiated remotely on command from the control panel. 9. Detectors shall also store an intemal identifying type code that the control panel shall use to identify the type of device (ION, PHOTO, THERMAL). 10. Detectors will operate in an analog fashion, where the detector simply measures its designed environment variable and transmits an analog value to the FACP based on real -time measured values. The FACP software, not the detector, shall make the alarm/normal decision, thereby allowing the sensitivity of each detector to be set in the FACP program and allowing the system operator to view the current analog value of each detector. 11. Detectors shall provide address - setting means using decimal switches and shall also store an internal identifying code that the control panel shall use to identify the type of device. LEDs shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the device is operational and is in regular communication with the control panel. 12. A magnetic test switch shall be provided to test each detector for 100% obscuration, reported to the FACP. FIRE ALARM /RELEASING SYSTEMS 17050 -12 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 13. Addressable devices shall provide address - setting means using decimal switches and shall also store an internal identifying code that the control panel shall use to identify the type of device. LED(s) shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the device is operational and is in regular communication with the control panel. 14. A magnetic test switch shall be provided to test detectors and modules. Detectors shall report an indication of an analog value reaching 100% of the alarm threshold. B. Addressable Pull Box (manual station) 1. Addressable pull boxes shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the state of the manual switch and the addressable communication module status. They shall use a key operated test -reset lock, and shall be designed so that after actual emergency operation, they cannot be restored to normal use except by the use of a key. 2. All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation and utilize a key type reset. 3. Manual stations shall be constructed of metal or Lexan with clearly visible operating instructions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the front of the stations in raised letters, 1.75 inches or larger. 4. Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting or semiflush mounting as shown on the plans, and shall be installed not Tess than 42 inches, nor more than 48 inches above the finished floor. C. Addressable Dry Contact Monitor Module 1. Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of conventional alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contact device) to one of the fire alarm control panel SLC loops. 2. The monitor module shall mount in a 4 -inch square, 2 -1/8 inch deep electrical box. 3. The IDC zone may be wired for Style D or Style B operation. An LED shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the monitor module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. 4. For difficult to reach areas, the monitor module shall be available in a miniature package and shall be no larger than 2 -3/4 inch x 1 -1/4 inch x 1/2 inch. This version need not include Style D or an LED. D. Addressable Control Module 1. Addressable control modules shall be provided to supervise and control the operation of one conventional NACs of compatible, 24 VDC powered, polarized audio /visual notification appliances. For fan shutdown and other auxiliary control functions, the control module may be set to operate as a dry contract relay. 2. The control module shall mount in a standard 4 -inch square, 2 -1/8 inch deep electrical box, or to a surface mounted backbox. 3. The control module NAC may be wired for Style Z or Style Y (Class A/B) with up to 1 amp of inductive AN signal, or 2 amps of resistive AN signal operation, or as a dry contact (Form -C) relay. The relay coil shall be magnetically latched to reduce wiring connection requirements, and to insure that 100% of all auxiliary relay or NACs may be energized at the same time on the same pair of wires. 4. Audio/visual power shall be provided by a separate supervised power loop from the main fire alarm control panel or from a supervised, UL listed remote power supply. 5. The control module shall be suitable for pilot duty applications and rated for a minimum of .6 amps at 30 VDC. E. Isolator Module 1. . Isolator modules shall be provided to automatically isolate wire -to -wire short circuits on an SLC loop. The isolator module shall limit the number of modules or detectors that may be FIRE ALARM /RELEASING SYSTEMS 17050 -13 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility rendered inoperative by a short circuit fault on the SLC Loop. At least one isolator module shall be provided for each floor or protected zone of the building. 2. If a wire -to -wire short occurs, the isolator module shall automatically open - circuit (disconnect) the SLC loop. When the short circuit condition is corrected, the isolator module shall automatically reconnect the isolated section 3. The isolator module shall not require any address - setting, and its operations shall be totally automatic. It shall not be necessary to replace or reset an isolator module after its normal operation. 4. The isolator module shall mount in a standard 4 -inch deep electrical box or in a surface mounted backbox. It shall provide a single LED that shall flash to indicate that the isolator is operational and shall illuminate steadily to indicate that a short circuit condition has been detected and isolated. 2.06 BATTERIES A. The batteries shall be 25 amp -hour sealed Gel Cell type, 12 volt nominal (two required). B. The battery shall have sufficient capacity to power the fire alarm system for not less than twenty-four hours plus 5 minutes of alarm upon a normal AC power failure. C. The batteries are to be completely maintenance free. No liquids are required. Fluid level checks for refilling, spills, and leakage shall not be required. D. If necessary to meet standby requirements, extemal battery and charger systems may be used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, NFPA 72, local and state codes, as shown on the drawings, and as recommended by the major equipment manufacturer. B. All conduit, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished areas and may be exposed in unfinished areas. Smoke detectors shall not be installed prior to the system programming and test period. If construction is ongoing during this period, measures shall be taken to protect smoke detectors from contamination and physical damage. C. All fire detection and alarm system devices, control panels and remote annunciators shall be flush mounted when located in finished areas and may be surface mounted when located in unfinished areas. 3.02 TEST A. The service of a competent, factory- trained engineer or technician authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment shall be provided to technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system. All testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 72, Chapter 1. Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation. 2. Close each sprinkler system flow valve and verify proper supervisory alarm at the FACP. 3. Verify activation of all waterflow switches. 4. Open initiating device circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates. 5. Open and short signaling line circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates. FIRE ALARM /RELEASING SYSTEMS 17050 -14 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 6. Open and short notification appliance circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates. 7. Ground all circuits and verify response of trouble signals. 8. Check presence and audibility of tone at all alarm notification devices. 9. Check installation, supervision, and operation of all intelligent smoke detectors using the walk test. 10. Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be introduced on the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at the FACP and the correct activation of the control points. 11. When the system is equipped with optional features, the manufacturer's manual shalt be consulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended to address such items as verifying controls performed by individually addressed or grouped devices, sensitivity monitoring, verification functionality and similar. 3.03 FINAL INSPECTION A. At the final inspection, a factory trained representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment shall demonstrate that the system functions properly in every respect. 3.04 INSTRUCTION A. Instruction shall be provided as required for operating the system. Hands -on demonstrations of the operation of all system components and the entire system including program changes and functions shall be provided. B. The contractor and /or the systems manufacturer's representatives shall provide a typewritten "Sequence of Operation" to the owner. END OF SECTION FIRE ALARM /RELEASING SYSTEMS 17050 -15 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 17100 CLEAN AGENT SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Design and installation of an engineered fire detection and INERGEN total flooding, gaseous agent, fire suppression system as ma ufactured by Ansul Fire Protection, Marinette, Wisconsin. B. Drawings: The contract drawings indicate the general arrangements of the areas to receive detection and INERGEN protection. Contractor is to review all drawings so that all items affecting the operation of the fire detection /INERGEN suppression system (such as equipment location, air diffusers, damper closures, and door openings) are considered in the design of the engineered system. C. Fumish all engineering design and materials for a complete fire detection /INERGEN suppression system including charged INERGEN storage cylinders, nozzles, control panel, detectors, wiring, annunciators, alarm and all other equipment necessary for a complete operational system. D. Major system components shall be produced by Ansul Fire Protection (no altematives) and shall be installed by an authorized Ansul distributor certified for the design and installation and service of INERGEN suppression systems. E. Contractor shall, as a minimum, provide 24 -hour emergency service, 7 days a week and shall be able to respond to an emergency situation within 2 hours of receiving an emergency trouble call. In addition, contractor shall maintain no less than $2 million liability insurance. 1.02 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. The following publications of the issues listed below, but referred to thereafter by basic designation only, form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by the reference thereto (latest edition): 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards: No. 2001 Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems No. 70 National Electric Code No. 72 National Fire Alarm Code 2. Factory Mutual Systems (FM) Publication Factory Mutual Approval Guide 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Publication Fire Protection Equipment Directory with quarterly supplements 4. Department of Transportation (DOT) Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Parts 100 to 199 Transportation of Hazardous Materials, DOT3AAZ300 or 3AAZ15T CLEAN AGENT SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 17100 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Publication, Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems 6. Industrial Risk Insurers Interpretive Guide (Detection & Controls) 7. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Protection of Stratospheric Ozone 59 FR 13044, March 18, 1994 (Final SNAP Ruling) 8. Requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) 1.03 REQUIREMENTS A. This installation shall be made in strict accordance with the drawings, specifications and applicable National Fire Protection Association Standards. All equipment and devices used shall be listed in both the UL Fire Equipment Directory and the Factory Mutual Approval Guide. B. Design and installation of the fire detection /INERGEN suppression system will be in strict accordance with the following guidelines and regulatory agencies: 1. NFPA 2001 Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems 2. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code, Latest Edition 3. NFPA 70 National Electric Codes, Latest Edition 4. Americans with Disabilities Act, Title 24, Latest Edition 1.04 SUBMITTAL A. The following shall be submitted for approval within 21 days of award and prior to delivery of materials: 1. Material and equipment information shall include manufacturer's catalog cut sheet and technical data for each component or device used in the system. This shall include, but not be limited to, the following: a. Detectors b. Manual discharge switches c. Control panel d. Release devices e. Alarm devices f. Agent storage cylinders g. Mounting brackets h. Discharge Nozzles i. Abort stations j. Piping isometrics k. Flow calculations B. Provide information outlining the warranty of each component or device used in the system. C. Provide information outlining the operation and maintenance procedures that will be required of the owner. This information shall explain any special knowledge or tools the owner will be required to employ and all spare parts that should be readily available. D. Drawings shall indicate locations, installation details and operation details of all equipment associated with the INERGEN system. Floor plans shall be provided showing equipment locations, piping, point -to -point wiring and other details as required. Floor plans shall be drawn to a scale of not less than 1/8 "= 1' -0 ". Elevations, cross sections and other details shall be drawn to a larger scale as required. Isometric piping layouts shall be provided with the shop drawings. CLEAN AGENT SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 17100 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility In addition, point -to- point electrical layout drawings shall be provided. E. Sequence of operation, electrical schematics and connection diagrams shall be provided to completely describe the operation of the INERGEN system controls. 1.05 FLOW CALCULATIONS A. Computerized verification of flow calculations shall be submitted for each INERGEN fire suppression system and include the following data as a minimum: 1. Quantity of agent per nozzle 2. Type of nozzle 3. Pressure at nozzle (psi) 4. Nozzle body nominal pipe size (inch) 5. Number and size of cylinders 6. Total agent 7. Pipe size per pipe section 8. Pipe schedule per pipe section 9. Number, size and type of fitting per pipe section 10. Actual length per pipe section (feet) 11. Equivalent length per pipe section (feet) 12. Discharge time (seconds) 1.06 WARRANTY A. All INERGEN system components furnished under this contract shall be guaranteed against defect in design, material and workmanship for the full warranty time which is standard with the manufacturer and/or supplier but not less than one (1) year from the date of system acceptance. In addition, the installing contractor must guarantee the system against false actuation or leakage due to faulty equipment, design or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from final acceptance. In the event of INERGEN agent leakage or system discharge from any of the above conditions, the installing contractor shall completely recharge and recondition the system at no cost to the owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Materials and equipment shall be of a single manufacturer (Ansul Fire Protection). Alternates will not be accepted. The name of the manufacturer and the serial numbers shall appear on all major components. 2.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION A. The system shall be an INERGEN total flooding, gaseous, clean agent, fire suppression system designed to provide a uniform concentration of INERGEN for the protected area. 1. The amount of INERGEN to be provided shall be the amount required to obtain a uniform (minimum) concentration as required by the design manual for ten (10) minutes. Take into consideration such factors as unclosable openings (if any), "rundown" time of fans, time required for dampers to close (and requirements for any additional dampers), and any other feature of the facility that could affect concentration. The design concentration shall be by volume at 70 deg. F. B. Cross -zoned or Counting Zone Smoke Detection: The INERGEN system shall be automatically CLEAN AGENT SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 17100 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility actuated by either counting zone detection circuits or cross -zoned detection circuits. Smoke detectors shall be ionization detectors and photoelectric with compatibility listings for use with the control unit. Smoke detectors shall be installed at no more than 400 square feet of coverage per detector. The detectors shall be alternated throughout the protected area with the system requiring two (2) detectors in alarm prior to automatic agent release. 2.03 AUXILIARY COMPONENTS A. Double action manual releasing stations shall be provided at each exit of the protected area and shall, when activated, immediately release the INERGEN agent and cause all audible /visual alarms to activate. In addition, activation of the manual releasing stations shall cause immediate shutdown of air and power circuits. B. Abort stations shall be provided at each exit of the protected area and shall, when operated, interrupt the discharge of INERGEN agent and emergency power -off functions. The abort stations shall be momentary devices (dead -man) requiring constant pressure to maintain contact closure. Note: Manual Releasing Station activation shall override any abort station. Abort station operation shall be per IRI and FM guidelines. C. Graphic annunciator (optional) shall be provided at the control panel location. The graphic annunciator shall be provided by the equipment manufacturer in an approved NEMA enclosure with keyed face plate. The graphic annunciator shall display the entire INERGEN protected area and shall indicate each smoke detector and its proximity. Smoke detectors, when activated, will individually annunciate at the graphic annunciator as follows: 1. Ceiling Detector: Red LED 2.04 INERGEN SUPPRESSION SYSTEM A. 1NERGEN fire suppression system shall be of the engineered, permanently piped, fixed nozzle type with all pertinent components provided by Ansul Fire Protection. B. All agent storage cylinders shall be centrally located as vertical, free - standing cylinders with wall and /or floor mounted retaining brackets. Where multiple cylinders are required for the same hazard, a common manifold shall be employed. (Cylinders mounted horizontally shall be installed in accordance to the manufacturer's design manual.) C. On multiple cylinder arrangements (discharging into a common hazard), one cylinder shall be designated as the pilot cylinder and employ both the restorable electric and mechanical manual actuators. All remaining cylinders shall be pneumatically operated from the INERGEN agent discharge of the pilot cylinder into the manifold. D. Manifolded cylinders shall employ a flexible discharge hose to facilitate installation and system maintenance. Each cylinder on a manifold shall also include an agent check valve installed to the manifold inlet. 2.05 PIPE MATERIAL A. System piping shall be of non - combustible materials having physical and chemical characteristics such that its integrity under stress can be predicted with reliability. B. As a minimum, piping materials shall be black steel pipe conforming to ASTM A -53A ERW or ASTM A -106A seamless. C. Under no conditions shall ordinary cast iron pipe, steel pipe conforming to ASTM A -120 or ASTM CLEAN AGENT SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 17100 -4 07/07/98 1 1 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility A -53/A -120 be used. D. Piping joints shall be suitable for the design conditions and shall be selected with consideration of joint tightness and mechanical strength. E. As a minimum, fittings beyond the orifice union /nipple shall be black, 300 Ib. class fittings conforming to ANSI B -16.3. Ordinary cast iron fittings shall not be used. F. The system manifold up to the orifice union nipple must be constructed of Schedule 80 piping and 2000 Ib. or 3000 Ib. forged steel fittings. Distribution piping downstream of the orifice union must be a minimum of Schedule 40 with 300 Ib. fittings. G. All piping shall comply with NFPA 2001. H. Piping shall be installed in accordance with good commercial practice to the appropriate codes, securely supported with UL Listed hangers and arranged with close attention to the design layout since deviations may alter the design flow performance as calculated. I. Piping shall be bracketed within 12" (.3 m) of all discharge nozzles. J. All piping shall be reamed, blown clear and swabbed with appropriate solvent to remove mill vamish and cutting oils before assembly. K. Multi- outlet fittings, other than tees, shall not be permitted. L. Assembly of all joints shall conform to the appropriate standards. Threaded pipe joints shall utilize Teflon tape applied to the male threads only. 2.06 EXTINGUISHING AGENT A. The agent shall be INERGEN, a trademark name registered to Ansul Fire Protection. 2.07 INERGEN STORAGE CYLINDERS A. Cylinder assemblies shall be of steel construction with a standard RED epoxy paint finish. Each cylinder shall be equipped with a pressure seat -type valve and gauge. The system shall utilize Ansul's CV -90 valve assemblies. When the system's capacity exceeds 40 cylinders, a second pilot valve shall be provided and used for cylinder activation. Each valve shall be constructed of forged brass and shall attach to the cylinder providing a leak tight seal. Each valve shall also include a safety pressure relief device which provides relief at 3000 -3360 PSI per CGA test methods. B. Filling of the cylinder assembly shall be by Ansul Fire Protection or an authorized INERGEN systems distributor in conjunction with a factory authorized INERGEN agent filling station. Initial filling and recharge shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's established procedures and shall not require replacement components for normal service. 2.08 CYLINDER BRACKET A. Each cylinder assembly shall be furnished with a bracket made from welded steel. The bracket shall hold the cylinders in a saddle with a front bracket piece that secures the cylinders. The brackets shall be modular in design to allow added bracketing or stacking of cylinders depending on installation requirements. CLEAN AGENT SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 17100 -5 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility B. Cylinder brackets shall be UL listed and /or FM approved for use with the INERGEN system. 2.09 VALVE ACTUATORS A. Electric valve actuators shall be of brass construction and stackable design with swivel connections to allow removal of actuators for maintenance or testing. B. Operation of actuators shall not require replacement of components. NO ELECTRO - EXPLOSIVE DEVICES may be used to actuate the valve assembly. C. Electric actuators shall be the magnetic latch, continuous duty type for 24 VDC operation. D. Actuation devices shall be UL listed and /or FM approved for use with the INERGEN system. 2.10 DISCHARGE HOSE/CHECK VALVE A. When manifolding, all cylinder assemblies shall include a flexible discharge hose and check valve for connection to the manifold inlet. B. All hose /check valves shall be UL listed and /or FM approved for use with the CV -90 INERGEN valve as manufactured by Ansul Fire Protection. 2.11 DISCHARGE NOZZLES A. Discharge nozzles shall be of two -piece construction and sized to provide flow rates in accordance with system design flow calculations. B. A nozzle inlet orifice plate shall be included. The orifice size shall be determined by a computerized UL listed flow calculation program. C. Orifice(s) shall be machined in the nozzle body to provide a horizontal discharge pattern based upon the approved coverage arrangements. D. Nozzles shall be permanently marked with the manufacturer's part number. The nozzles shall be threaded directly to the discharge piping without the use of special adapters. E. Nozzles shall be UL listed as manufactured by Ansul Fire Protection. 2.12 ORIFICE UNION /NIPPLE ASSEMBLIES A. An orifice union /nipple shall be included in the manifold to reduce pressure in the downstream pipe network. B. Orifice union /nipple assemblies shall be rated at 2000 Ib. Class minimum. C. Orifice union /nipple assemblies shall be permanently marked with the manufacturer's orifice code. The union orifice /nipple shall be threaded directly to the manifold piping without the use of special adapters. D. Union orifice /nipple assemblies shall be UL Listed and /or FM Approved for use with the INERGEN system. CLEAN AGENT SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 17100 -6 07/07/98 11 fi 1 9 1 r 1 1 1 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 2.13 GENERAL MATERIALS - ELECTRICAL A. All electrical enclosures, raceways and conduits shall be employed in accordance with applicable codes and intended use and contain only those electrical circuits associated with the fire detection and control system and shall not contain any circuit that is unrelated to the system. B. Unless specifically provided otherwise in each case, all conductors shall be enclosed in steel conduit, rigid or thin wall as conditions dictate. C. Any conduit or raceway exposed to weather or other similar conditions shall be properly sealed and installed to prevent damage. Provisions for draining and /or drying shall be employed. D. NEMA rating and /or electrically hazardous classifications shall be observed and any equipment or materials installed must meet or exceed the requirements of service. E. Any wiring shall be of the proper size to conduct the circuit current but shall not be smaller than #18 AWG unless otherwise specified for a given purpose. Wire that has scrapes, nicks, gouges or crushed insulation shall not be used. The use of aluminum wire is strictly prohibited. F. Splicing of circuits shall be kept to a minimum and are only to be found in an electrical device suited for the purpose. G. Wire spliced together shall have the same color insulation. H. Wire splices shall be made with appropriate devices suited for the purpose. I. All wire terminations shall be made with crimp terminals unless the device at the termination is designed for bare wire terminations. J. All electrical circuits shall be numerically tagged with suitable devices at the terminating point and/or splice. All circuit numbers shall correspond with the installation drawings. K. The use of colored wires is encouraged but not required unless dictated by state or local authorities. L. White colored wire shall be used exclusively for the identification of the neutral conductor of an alternating current circuit. M. Green colored wire shall be used exclusively for the identification of the earth ground conductor of an AC or DC circuit. 2.14 CONTROL SYSTEMS - GENERAL A. All control systems shall be UL Listed or FM approved and be utilized with listed or approved compatible operating devices and shall be capable of the following features: 1. Ground fault indication 2. Supervised detection circuit(s) 3. Supervised alarm circuit(s) 4. Supervised release circuit(s) 5. Supervised manual pull circuit (if applicable) 6. Supervised primary power circuit 7. Alarm overrides trouble logic 8. Battery standby 9. Front panel indicating lamps (LEDs) CLEAN AGENT SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 17100 -7 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 10. Key lock steel enclosure 11. Programmable time delay 12. Programmable detection logic 13. Prioritized trouble logic 14. Microprocessor based logic 15. History buffer B. The Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) shall be an AUTOPULSE IQ -396 and shall contain a microprocessor based Central Processing Unit (CPU). The CPU shall communicate with and control the following types of equipment used to make up the system: intelligent detectors, addressable modules, printer, annunciators, and other system controlled devices. C. See Section 17050. 2.15 PROGRAMMABLE ELECTRONIC SOUNDERS A. Electronic sounders shall be UL Listed or FM Approved and operate on 24 VDC nominal. B. Electronic sounders shall be field programmable without the use of special tools to choose one (1) of eight (8) tones with an output sound level of at least 90 dBA measured at 10 feet (3 m) from the device. C. Electronic sounders shall be flush or semi -flush mounted as shown on plans. 2.16 STROBE LIGHTS A. Strobe lights shall operate on 24 VDC nominal. B. Strobe lights shall meet the requirements of the ADA as defined in UL standard 1971 and shall meet the following criteria: 1. The maximum pulse duration shall be 2 /10ths of one second. 2. The strobe intensity shall meet the requirements of UL 1971. 3. The flash rate shall meet the requirements of UL 1971. 4. The appliance shall be placed 80 in. (2 m) above the highest floor level within the space, or 6 in. (152 mm) below the ceiling, which ever is the lower. 2.17 ADDRESSABLE DEVICES - GENERAL A. Addressable devices shall provide an address - setting means using rotary decimal switches. B. Addressable devices shall use simple to install and maintain decade (numbered 1 to 10) type address switches. Devices which use a binary address setting method, such as a dip switch, are difficult to install and subject to installation error. This type of device is not an allowable substitute. C. Detectors shall be intelligent and addressable, and shall connect with two wires to the fire alarm /release control panel signaling line circuits. D. Addressable smoke and thermal detectors shall provide dual alarm and power LEDs. Both LEDs shall flash under normal conditions indicating that the detector is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. Both LEDs shall be placed into steady illumination by the control panel indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. If required, the flashing mode operation of the detector LEDs shall be optional through the system field program. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED. CLEAN AGENT SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 17100 -8 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility E. Smoke detector sensitivity shall be set through the FACP and shall be adjustable in the field through the field programming of the system. Sensitivity may be automatically adjusted by the panel on a time -of -day basis. F. Using software in the FACP, detectors shall automatically compensate for dust accumulation and other slow environmental changes that may affect their performance. The detectors shall be listed by UL as meeting the calibrated sensitivity test requirements of NFPA Standard 72, Chapter 7. G. The detectors shall be ceiling -mount and shall include a separate twist -lock base with tamper -proof feature. An optional base shall be available with a built -in (local) sounder rated at 85 dBA minimum. H. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector itself (by activating a magnetic switch) or initiated remotely on command from the control panel. I. Detectors shall also store an internal identifying type code that the control panel shall use to identify the type of device (ION, PHOTO, THERMAL). 2.18 ADDRESSABLE MANUAL PULL STATION A. Addressable manual pull station shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the state of the manual switch. They shall use a key operated test -reset lock and shall be designed so that after actual emergency operation, they cannot be restored to normal use except by the use of a key. B. All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation and utilize a key -type reset. C. Manual stations shall be metal with clearly visible operating instructions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the front and both sides of the stations. D. Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting or semi -flush mounting as shown on the plans, and shall be installed not Tess than 42 inches (1.06 m), nor more than 48 inches (1.22 m) above the finished floor. E. Operation shall require two (2) actions. 2.19 ANALOG ADDRESSABLE PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE DETECTOR A. The detectors shall use the photoelectric (light - scattering) principal to measure smoke density and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of smoke density. 2.20 ANALOG ADDRESSABLE IONIZATION SMOKE DETECTOR A. The detectors shall use the dual- chamber ionization principal to measure products of combustion and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of products of combustion. 2.21 ANALOG ADDRESSABLE HEAT DETECTOR A. Heat detectors shall be analog addressable devices rated at 135 °F (58 C) and have a rate -of -rise element rated at 15 °F (9.4 C) per minute. It shall connect via two wires to the FACP signaling line CLEAN AGENT SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 17100 -9 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility circuit. Up to 99 intelligent heat detectors may connect to one SLC loop. B. The detectors shall use an electronic sensor to measure thermal conditions caused by a fire and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of such thermal measurements. C. An optional, intelligent heat detector shall be available for applications which do not require a rate -or -rise element. 2.22 ANALOG ADDRESSABLE DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR A. In -duct smoke detector housing shall accommodate either an intelligent ionization sensor or an intelligent photoelectric sensor, which provides continuous analog monitoring and alarm verification from the panel. B. When sufficient smoke is sensed, an alarm signal is initiated at the FACP and appropriate action is taken to change over air handling systems to help prevent the rapid distribution of toxic smoke and fire gases throughout the areas served by the duct system. 2.23 ADDRESSABLE DRY CONTACT MONITOR MODULE A. Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of conventional alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contact device) to one of the FACP signaling line circuit (SLC) loops. B. The monitor module shall mount in a 4 -inch square, 2 -1/8" deep electrical box C. The IDC zone may be wired for Style D or Style B operation. An LED shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions indicating that the monitor module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. D. For difficult to reach areas, the monitor module shall be available in a miniature package and shall be no larger than 2- 3/4" x 1 -1/4" x 1/2" (69 x 32 x 13 mm). This version need not include Style D or an LED. 2.24 ADDRESSABLE TWO -WIRE DETECTOR MONITOR MODULE A. Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of conventional two -wire smoke detectors or alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contact device). B. The two -wire monitor module shall mount in a 4 -inch square, 2- 1/8" deep electrical box or with an optional surface backbox. C. The IDC zone may be wired for Class A or B (Style D or Style B) operation. An LED shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions indicating that the monitor module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. D. Smoke Detectors 1. Smoke detectors shall be 24 VDC and shall be UL Listed and FM approved. 2. Each detector shall include a visual status indicator, provide remote LED output, and include a built -in test capability. 3. The sensitivity shall be factory set per UL 268. 4. The detector cover and screen shall be easily removable for field cleaning. 5. A special vandal - resistant locking screw shall be provided to lock the head to the base. CLEAN AGENT SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 17100 -10 07/07/98 1 1 1 1 1 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 6. The head -to -base connection shall be made by use of bifurcated contacts. Terminal connections to the base shall be of the screw type that are accessible with the base installed on the mounting box. 7. Where specifically identified on the contract drawings, detector bases shall incorporate a relay with Form C contacts rated at 1 amp at 120 VAC and 2 amps at 28 VDC. 8. Ionization -type smoke detector shall be dual chamber type and compatible with the Ansul control system. The detector shall have an LED in its base which is illuminated in a steady -on mode when in alarm and pulse mode when in standby. Reset of the detector shall be performed by the control unit reset switch. 9. The design of the ionization detector compensating circuits shall provide stable operation with regard to minor changes in temperature, humidity and atmospheric conditions. 10. Photoelectric -type smoke detector shall be light reflective type and compatible with the Ansul control system. The detector shall have an LED in its base which is illuminated in a steady -on mode when in alarm and pulse mode when in standby. Reset of the detector shall be performed by the control unit reset switch. 11. The design of the photoelectric detector compensating circuits shall provide stable operation with regard to minor changes in temperature, humidity and atmospheric conditions. 12. Photoelectric -type smoke detector with heat detector shall be light reflective type and compatible with the Ansul control system. The detector shall have an LED in its base which is illuminated in a steady -on mode when in alarm and pulse mode when in standby. Reset of the detector shall be performed by the control unit reset switch. 2.25 ADDRESSABLE CONTROL MODULE A. Addressable control modules shall be provided to supervise and control the operation of one conventional Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) of compatible, 24 VDC powered, polarized audio /visual notification appliances. For fan shutdown and other auxiliary control functions, the control module may be set to operate as a dry contract relay. B. The control module shall mount in a standard 4 -inch square, 2 -1/8" deep electrical box, or to a surface mounted backbox. C. The control module NAC circuit may be wired for Style Z or Style Y (Class A/B) with up to 1 amp of inductive AN signal, or 2 amps of resistive NV signal operation, or as a dry contact (Form C) relay. The relay coil shall be magnetically latched to reduce wiring connection requirements and to insure that 100% of all auxiliary relay or NACs may be energized at the same time on the same pair of wires. D. Audio /visual power shall be provided by a separate supervised power loop from the main FACP or from a supervised, UL listed remote power supply. E. The control module shall provide address - setting means using decimal switches and shall also store an intemal identifying code that the control panel shall use to identify the type of device. An LED shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions indicating that the control module is operational and is in regular communication with the control panel. F. A magnetic test switch shall be provided to test the module without opening or shorting its NAC wiring. G. The control module shall be suitable for pilot duty applications and rated for a minimum of .6 amps at 30 VDC. CLEAN AGENT SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 17100 -11 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 2.26 ISOLATOR MODULE A. Isolator modules shall be provided to automatically isolate wire- to -wire short circuits on an SLC loop. The isolator module shall limit the number of modules or detectors that may be rendered inoperative by a short circuit fault on the SLC Loop. At least one isolator module shall be provided for each floor or protected zone of the building. B. If a wire - to-wire short occurs, the isolator module shall automatically open - circuit (disconnect) the SLC loop. When the short circuit condition is corrected, the isolator module shall automatically reconnect the isolated section. C. The isolator module shall not require any address - setting and its operations shall be totally automatic. It shall not be necessary to replace or reset an isolator module after its normal operation. D. The isolator module shall mount in a standard 4 -inch deep electrical box or in a surface mounted backbox. It shall provide a single LED that shall flash to indicate that the isolator is operational and shall illuminate steadily to indicate that a short circuit condition has been detected and isolated. 2.27 ABORT SWITCH A. The abort switch shall be used where an investigative delay is desired between detection and actuation of the fire suppression system. B. This switch shall be a momentary contact "dead -man" type switch requiring constant pressure to transfer one set of contacts. Clear operating instructions shall be provided at the abort switch. C. This switch shall be rated at 28 VDC @ 1.1 amp make /break or 6 amp continuous carry. D. The terminal connections shall be of the screw type. 2.28 MAINTENANCE LOCK -OUT SWITCH A. The maintenance lock -out switch shall be used where it is desired to disable the fire suppression system during routine maintenance. B. This switch shall be key operated allowing removal of the key in either the "Normal" or "Lock -Out" position. A red indicator lamp shall be included on the switch assembly to be illuminated when in the "Lock -Out' position. The control unit is to indicate a trouble condition when in the "Lock -Out" position. C. The switch shall include one (1) set of normally open and one (1) set of normally closed contacts rated at 28 VDC @ 1.1 amp make /break or 6 amp continuous carry. D. The terminal connections shall be of the screw type. 2.29 SELECTOR SWITCH A. The selector switch shall be used where a connected reserve is required. B. This switch shall be key operated allowing removal of the key in either the "Main" or "Reserve" position. CLEAN AGENT SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 17100 -12 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility C. This switch shall be rated at 28 VDC @ 1.1 amp make /break or 6 amp continuous carry. D. The terminal connections shall be of the screw type. 2.30 SERIALLY CONNECTED ANNUNCIATOR REQUIREMENTS A. The annunciator shall communicate with the fire alarm control panel via an EIA 485 communications loop and shall annunciate all zones in the system. Up to 10 annunciators may be connected to the EIA 485 communications bop. B. The annunciator shall need only four wires to connect to the FACP. C. The annunciator shall provide a red alarm LED per zone, and a yellow trouble LED per zone. The annunciator will also have an "ON- LINE" LED, local piezo sounder, local acknowledge /lamp test switch, and custom zone /function identification labels. D. The annunciator switches may be used for system control such as Global Acknowledge, Global Signal Silence, and Global System Reset. 2.31 LCD ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY ANNUNCIATOR A. The alphanumeric display annunciator shall be a supervised, remotely located back -lit LCD display containing a minimum of eighty (80) characters for alarm annunciation in clear English text. B. The LCD annunciator shall display all alarm and trouble conditions in the system. C. The annunciator shall connect to a two -wire EIA 485 interface. The two -wire connection shall be capable of distances of 6,000 feet (1,829 m). The signal may be increased in 3,000 ft. (914 m) increments with an optional repeater. An optional (UL 864 Listed) module shall be available which allows the EIA -485 signal to be transmitted over fiber optics. D. The system shall allow a minimum of four LCD annunciators. Each LCD shall be capable of the following system functions: Acknowledge, Signal Silence and Reset. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. Activation of any single smoke detector in any detection zone shall: 1. Cause a first -stage alarm. 2. Energize a lamp on the activated detector and control panel (and graphic annunciator, if included). B. Activation of a second smoke detector shall: 1. Transmit an alarm signal to remote monitoring or building alarm panel. 2. Cause a second -stage (pre - discharge) alarm to operate. 3. Operate auxiliary contacts for air conditioning shutdowns and automatic dampers. 4. Initiate a programmable time delay (INERGEN agent release). C. Upon completion of the time delay the INERGEN system shall: 1. Cause a discharge alarm to be activated. CLEAN AGENT SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 17100 -13 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 2. Operate auxiliary contacts for emergency power off of all electrical equipment (excluding lighting and emergency circuits for life safety). 3. Activate visual alarms (strobe) at protected area entrance. 4. Energize control solenoid for INERGEN cylinders releasing gaseous agent into the protected area. 3.02 SYSTEM CHECKOUT AND TESTING A. The completed installation shall be inspected by factory authorized and trained personnel. The inspection shall include a full operational test of all components per the equipment manufacturer's recommendations (including agent discharge). B. Inspection shall be performed in the presence of the owner's representative, architect's or engineer's representative, insuring authority and /or the local authority having jurisdiction. C. All mechanical and electrical components shall be tested according to the manufacturer's recommended procedure to verify system integrity. D. Inspection shall include a complete checkout of the detection /control system and certification of cylinder pressure. A written report shall be filed with the owner. E. As -built drawings shall be provided by the contractor (2 copies) indicating the installation details. All routing of piping, electrical conduit and accessories shall be noted. F. Equipment installation and maintenance manuals shall be provided in addition to the as -built drawings. G. Prior to final acceptance, the contractor shall provide operational training in all concepts of the system to the owner's key personnel. Training shall consist of: 1. Control system operation 2. Trouble procedures 3. Abort procedures 4. Emergency procedures 5. Safety requirements 6. Demonstration of the system (excluding INERGEN release) H. The quantity of agent shall reflect the actual design quantity of INERGEN agent. I. A functional test shall be completed prior to the concentration test consisting of detection, release, alarm, accessories related to the system, control unit and a review of the cylinders, piping, fittings, hangers and cylinder pressure. J. Concentration testing shall be performed under the supervision of the contractor's authorized personnel in the presence of the owner's representative, local authorities and any other insuring authority. K. INERGEN test procedures shall be recommended by the equipment manufacturer and /or the INERGEN equipment supplier. L. The contractor shall provide a gas analyzer capable of automatically recording sampling points. Concentration recording shall continue until authorities are satisfied with hazard integrity or until 10 minutes have elapsed. M. The sampling point(s) shall be located at a strategic area(s) but no higher than the highest CLEAN AGENT SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 17100 -14 07/07/98 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility combustible contents. N. If the test results indicate that the design concentration was not achieved and/or held, the contractor shall determine the cause of the failure. After determination of the cause, the system shall be recharged and again placed in operation. The contractor shall only be responsible for retest based on equipment design failure. 3.03 PIPING A. Preparation: 1. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. 2. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly. 3. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. B. Installation: 1. Install piping in accordance with NFPArequirements. 2. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient. 3. Install piping to conserve building space,and not interfere with use of space and other work. 4. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. 5. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. 6. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. 7. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated. 8. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings, floors and walls. Seal pipe and sleeve penetrations to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required. 9. Die cut screw joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed oil or other non -toxic joint compound applied to male threads only. END OF SECTION CLEAN AGENT SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 17100 -15 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tuwila Switch Facility SECTION 17300 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe and fittings. B. Valves. C. Wet sprinkler systems. D. Preaction sprinkler systems. 1.02 REFERENCES a A. ANSI /ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800. B. ANSI /ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 150 and 300. C. ANSI /ASME B16.4 - Cast Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 125 and 250. D. ANSI /ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. E. ANSI /ASME B16.9 - Factory-made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings. F. ANSI /ASME B16.11 - Forged Steel Fittings, Socket - welding and Threaded. G. ANSI /ASME B16.18 Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. H. ANS;:.SME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. I. AN. %ASME B16.25 - Buttwelding Ends. J. ANSI /ASME B36.10 - Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe. K. ANSI /ASME Sec 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications. L. ANSI /ASTM A135 - Electric- Resistance - Welded Steel Pipe. M. ANSI /ASTM A47 - Malleable Iron Castings. N. ANSI /ASTM B32 - Solder Metal. 0. ANSI /AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal. P. ANSI/AWVVA C110 - Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings. Q. ANSI /AWWA C151 - Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast. R. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot - Dipped, Zinc - coated Welded and Seamless. AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 17300 -1 07/07/98 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tuwila Switch Facili S. ASTM A234 - Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevat: d Temperatures. T. ASTM A795 - Black and Hot - Dipped Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pi ' e for Fire Protection Use. U. ASTM B75 - Seamless Copper Tube. V. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube. W. ASTM B251 - General Requirements for Wrought Seamless Copper and Copper -Alloy Tube. X. AWS D10.9 - Specifications for Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping a d Tubing. Y. FM - Factory Mutual Approval Guide. Z. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems. AA. NFPA 14 - Standpipe and Hose Systems. BB. NFPA 24 - Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances CC. UL - Fire Protection Equipment Directory. DD. See Division 15 of these Specifications for other information applicable to this Section. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design, furnish and install all materials and equipment required for complete and operational Fi e Sprinkler systems as hereinafter described and shown on the drawings including all p —nits a d fees. Contractor shall provide a complete design prepared by a Licensed Fire :tecti n Engineer or NICET Level 3 Sprinkler Designer. B. System to provide fire sprinkler coverage for entire building. Limits of tyDeF. of sprinkler I::::tecti.n are shown on the contract drawings. C. Remove all existing wet sprinkler system piping within or above rooms or areas to be served .y clean agent fire suppression systems and preaction systems. No piping systems containi g water under pressure shall be located in those areas wherever possible. Reestablish fire servi•e water to other areas of the existing building. D. Provide system designed to NFPA 13 and local requirements and as noted on drawings. E. Interface system with building fire and smoke alarm system. Note that conventional sprinkler -flo alarms are required. F. Provide fire department connection as indicated and new preaction system connection to the existing water main in the sprinkler valve room. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Preliminary Shop Drawings: Prior to detailed submission, submit preliminary layout of finished AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 17300 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tuwila Switch Facility ceiling areas indicating only head locations coordinated with ceiling installation. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor and wall penetration seals. 2. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, and piping connections. 3. Indicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, components and accessories. 4. Indicate system controls. C. Product Data: Provide data on sprinkler heads, valves, and specialties, including manufacturers catalogue information. Submit performance ratings rough -in details, weights, support requirements, and piping connections. D. Submit shop drawings, product data, hydraulic calculations to local Fire Marshal for approval. Submit proof of approval to Architect/Engineer. E. Manufacturers Field Report: Indicate time of start-up of treatment systems and include analysis of system water after cleaning and treatment. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that system has been tested and meets or exceeds local Fire Marshal's requirements. 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Record actual locations of sprinkler heads, valves, flow switches and deviations of piping from drawings. Indicate drain and test locations. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010. B. Maintenance Data: 1. Include components of system, servicing requirements, Record Drawings, inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and location and numbers of service depot. 2. Maintenance Instructions: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, procedures, and treatment programs. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sprinkler Systems: Perform work to NFPA 13. B. Standpipe and Hose Systems: Perform to NFPA 14. C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Perform to ASME Code. D. Valves: Bear UL or FM Zabel or marking. Provide manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. 1.08 QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this Section with minimum five (5) years experience. B. Design sprinkler system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 17300 -3 07/07/98 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tuwila Switch Facility design of this work and licensed in the State of Washington. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store products in shipping containers, with labelling in place. B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide extra sprinkler heads under provisions of NFPA 13. B. Provide suitable wrenches for each head type. C. Provide metal storage cabinet in location designated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER/INSTALLER A. Automatic sprinkler system shall be engineered, designed and installed by Grinnell Fire Protection Systems Company. 2.02 SPRINKLER PIPING, BURIED A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B75; ASTM B88; or ASTM B251; Type L annealed. 1. Fittings: ANSI /ASME B16.18, cast bronze, or ANSI /ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze, solder joint, pressure type. 2. Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA or ANSI /AWS A5.8 BCuP silver braze. B. Cast Iron Pipe: ANSI /AWWA C151. 1. Fittings: ANSI /AWWA C110, standard thickness. 2. Joints: ANSI /AWWA C111, rubber gasket. C. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, Class 50, cement mortar lined and seal coated. 1. Fittings: Ductile or gray iron, standard thickness. 2. Joints: AWWA C111, rubber gasket with 3/4 inch diameter rods or mechanical joint. 2.03 SPRINKLER PIPING, ABOVE GROUND A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53; ASTM A795; Schedule 40 black. 1. Steel Fittings: ANSI /ASME B16.9, wrought steel, buttwelded; ANSI /ASME B16.25, buttweld ends; ASTM A234, wrought carbon steel and alloy steel; ANSI /ASME B16.5, steel flanges and fittings; ANSI /ASME B16.11, forged steel socket welded and threaded. 2. Cast Iron Fittings: ANSI /ASME B16.1, flanges and fittings; ANSI /ASME B16.4, screwed fittings. 3. Malleable Iron Fittings: ANSI /ASME B16.3, screwed type. 4. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C" shaped EPDM composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe. Acceptable Manufacturers: AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 17300 -4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tuwila Switch Facility a. Victaulic; Style 75 for 8 inch size and smaller, Style 77 for larger than 8 inch. b. Gustin- Bacon. c. Grinnel. B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B75; ASTM B88; or ASTM B251; Type L, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ANSI /ASME B16.18, cast bronze, or ANSI /ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze, solder joint, pressure type. 2. Joints: ANSI /ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA. or ANSI/VVSA5.8, BCuP silver braze. 2.04 VALVES A. Gate Valves: 1. Manufacturers: a. Milwaukee. b. Mueller. c. Stockham. d. Central. 2. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, single wedge or disc, solder or threaded ends. 3. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS &Y, single wedge, flanged grooved ends. B. Globe or Angle Valves: 1. Manufacturers: a. Nibco. b. United. c. Central. 2. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem and handwheel, inside screw, renewable composition disc, solder or screwed ends, with backseating capacity repackable under pressure. 3. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS &Y, plug -type disc, flanged ends, renewable seat and disc. C. Ball Valves: 1. Manufacturers: a. Milwaukee. b. Central. c. Grinnell. 2. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze one piece body, stainless steel ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle, solder or threaded ends. 3. Over 2 Inches: Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball, teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever handle, flanged. D. Check Valves: 1. Manufacturers: a. Central. b. Viking. c. Stockham. 2. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze swing disc, screwed ends. 3. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends. 4. Iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, renewable composition disc, screwed, wafer or flanged ends. AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 17300 -5 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tuwila Switch Facility E. Drain Valves: 1. Manufacturers: a. United. b. Central. c. Stockham. 2. Bronze compression stop with hose thread nipple and cap. 3. Brass ball valve with cap and chain, 3/4 inch hose thread. 2.05 SPRINKLER HEADS A. Manufacturers: 1. Grinnell Fire Protection Systems. 2. Patriot Fire Protection. 3. Fireguard Fire Protection. 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 15010. B. Suspended Ceiling: 1. Type: Semi - recessed pendant type with matching push on escutcheon plate. 2. Head Finish: Brass. 3. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Chrome plated. 4. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard. C. Exposed Area Type: 1. Type: Standard upright type. 2. Head Finish: Brass. 3. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard. D. Sidewall Type: 1. Type: Standard horizontal sidewall type with matching escutcheon plate. 2. Head Finish: Brass. 3. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Chrome plated. 4. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard. E. Dry Sidewall Type: 1. Type: Adjustable dry horizontal sidewall sprinkler head. 2. Head Finish: Brass. 3. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Chrome plated. 4. Fusible Link: Fusible alfoy, temperature rated for specific area hazard. F. Guards: Finish to match sprinkler head. 2.06 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Preaction Sprinkler Alarm Valve Assembly: Electric/electric double interlock preaction system with automatic resetting deluge valve and swing check valve. Releasing trim includes control panel and solenoid valve. Assembly shall also include main control valve (supervised), system shut -off valve (supervised), low air pressure alarm switch, water flow pressure alarm switch, manual control station, automatic pressure maintenance device, deluge valve releasing panel with battery backup, alarm bell, main drain valves and other standard accessories. B. Water Motor Alarm: Hydraulically operated impeller type alarm with aluminum alloy red enamelled gong and motor housing, nylon bearings, and inlet strainer. Pipe drain to floor drain. C. Electric Alarm: Electrically operated red enamelled gong with pressure alarm switch. It shall be AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 17300 -6 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tuwila Switch Facility 24VDC, operated by the fire alarm system. D. Water Flow Switch: Vane type switch with adjustable retard for mounting horizontal or vertical, with two contacts rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC. E. Fire Department Connection: 1. Type: Wall outlet type with brass finish. 2. Outlets: As specified by local Fire Marshal. 3. Label: Auto sprinkler. 2.07 AIR COMPRESSOR A. Manufacturers: 1. EMGLO. 2. Bell and Gossett. B. Duplex unit, electric motor driven. ASME rated horizontal receiver tank, air pressure operated electric switch, motor, motor starter, safety valves, check valves, automatic tank drain, muffler - filter, belt guard, and controls. C. Performance: As required to suit system volume. D. Motor: 115 volt, single phase, 60 Hz. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING A. Preparation: 1. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. 2. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly. 3. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. B. Installation: 1. Install piping in accordance with NFPA 13 for sprinkler systems, NFPA 14 for standpipe and hose systems, NFPA 24 for service mains. 2. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient. 3. Install piping to conserve building space,and not interfere with use of space and other work. 4. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. 5. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. 6. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. 7. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. 8. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated. 9. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings, floors and walls. Seal pipe and sleeve penetrations to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required. 10. Die cut screw joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed oil or other non -toxic joint compound applied to male threads only. 11. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Remove protective coatings after installation. 12. Provide gate valves for shut -off or isolating service. AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 17300 -7 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tuwila Switch Facility 13. Provide drain valves at main shut -off valves, low points of piping and apparatus. 3.02 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Install in accordance with NFPA 13 and 14 for standpipe and hose systems and sprinklers. C. Provide double detector check valve assembly in vault outside building. D. Locate fire department connection with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions, or adjacent siamese connectors to allow full swing of fire department wrench handle. E. Locate outside alarm gong on building wall as indicated. F. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work. G. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings where possible. H. Center heads in one direction only in ceiling tile with location in other direction variable, dependent upon spacing and coordination with ceiling elements. Coordinate head locations with Architectural drawings. I. Apply masking tape or paper cover to ensure concealed sprinkler head cover plates do not receive field paint finish. J. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter. K. Hydrostatically test entire system. L. Require test be witnessed by Fire Marshal. END OF SECTION AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 17300 -8 07/07/98 ,a 1 understand that the Plan Check cppr v:'3 subject to errors and omissions and f plans does not authorize the violation cf adapted code or ordlname. Receipt of contrc::::.r'.; copy of :..... i ::. %;,: • • edged. At - I% /1 ELECTRIC 1GH WA VE ukwila Switch Facility TUkWiEA, WASIiiNCjTON JUL 2 8 1998 NOI ;:[i E3l. i5 Got i3 ?0N— SET # REGISTERED ARCHITECT CR G D. BEAUMONT STATE OF WASHINGTON - 7/1/1! PPL. COFFMAN I N E E R S 201 W. North River Drive, Suite 510 Spokane, WA 99201 (509) 328 -2994 Electric Lightwave, Inc. ELECTRIC LIGHTWAVE TUKWILA SWITCH FACILITY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 00 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS (VOLUME 1) Section 00100 Section 00200 Section 00300 Bid Solicitation Instruction to Bidders Bid Form DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (VOLUME 1) Section 01100 Summary Section 01200 Price and Payment Procedures Section 01300 Administrative Requirements Section 01400 Quality Requirements Section 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 01600 Product Requirements Section 01700 Execution Requirements Section 01800 Closeout Requirements DIVISION 02 - SITEWORK (VOLUME 1) Section 02223 Selective Demolition DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE (VOLUME 1) Section 03300 Cast -in -Place Concrete DIVISION 05 - METALS (VOLUME 1) Section 05500 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTICS (VOLUME 1) Section 06100 Section 06410 Rough Carpentry Custom Cabinets Tukwila Swi DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION (VOLUME 1) Section 07200 Insulation Section 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Section 07840 Firestopping Section 07900 Joint Sealers ch Facility 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS (VOLUME 1) Section 08110 Steel Doors and Frames Section 08211 Flush Wood Doors Section 08710 Door Hardware Section 08800 Glazing DIVISION 09 - FINSHES (VOLUME 1) Section 09260 Section 09511 Section 09650 Section 09900 Gypsum Board Assemblies Suspended Acoustical Ceilings Resilient Flooring Paints and Coatings DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL (VOLUME 2) Section 15010 Mechanical General Provisions Section 15020 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Section 15050 Basic Materials and Methods Section 15250 Insulation Section 15400 Plumbing Piping and Accessories Section 15450 Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment Section 15530 Refrigeration Piping and Accessories Section 15770 Air Conditioning Units Section 15840 Ductwork and Accessories Section 15850 Fans Section 15900 Building Controls System DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL (VOLUME 2) Section 16010 General Provisions Section 16111 Conduit Section 16112 Surface Raceways Section 16118 Underground Ducts and Manholes Section 16121 600 Volt or Less Wire and Cable Section 16130 Boxes Section 16140 Wiring Devices Section 16150 Motors Section 16160 Cabinets and Enclosures Section 16180 Overcurrent Protection Devices Section 16190 Supporting Devices Section 16195 Electrical Identification Section 16425 Switchboards Section 16440 Disconnect Switches Section 16450 Secondary Grounding Section 16451 Lightning Section 16461 Dry-Type Transformers Section 16462 Dry-Type Transformers - K -Rated Section 16470 Panelboards Section 16481 Surge Suppression Section 16485 Contactors 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility DIVISION 16 CONT'D ELECTRICAL (VOLUME 2) Section 16500 Lighting Section 16611 Static Uninterruptible Power Supply Section 16612/1 Diesel Engine Generator Set #1 Section 16612/2 Diesel Engine Generator Set #2 Section 16615 Automatic Transfer Equipment Section 16628 EnginelGenerator Control and Alarm Panels Section 16720 Access Control Systems Section 16721 Water Alert Alarm System Section 16742 Telephone Computer System Section 16950 Testing DIVISION 17 - FIRE PROTECTION (VOLUME 2) Section 17050 Section 17100 Section 17300 Fire Alarm /Releasing Systems Clean Agent Suppression Systems Automatic Sprinkler System 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 00100 BID SOLICITATION 0.1 PROJECT: ELECTRIC LIGHTWAVE, LAS VEGAS SWITCH FACILITY FROM: COFFMAN ENGINEERS 1.01 DATE: 1.02 TO: POTENTIAL BIDDERS A. Your firm is invited to submit a sealed bid to Electric Lightwave, Inc. for construction of a Switch Facility located at 13705 Gateway Drive, Suite 510, Tukwila, WA, before 4:00 p.m. local standard time on the day of , 1998, per Section 00200 - Instructions to Bidders. B. Project Description: The work consists of tenant modifications to designated areas of the existing building. The work includes modifications to existing spaces, finishes, fire alarm and protection systems, and mechanical, plumbing and electrical systems. Some site work is required for an electrical grounding system. New utility connectors will be required. C. Bid Documents for a Stipulated Sum contract may be obtained from the office of Coffman Engineers upon receipt of a refundable deposit, by certified check, in the amount of $100.00 for one set. D. Refer to other bidding requirements described in Section 00200- Instructions to Bidders. E. Bidders are required to complete Bid Form provided. F. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all offers. END OF BID SOLICITATION BID SOLICITATION 00100 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS FORM OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS DOCUMENT 1.01 DOCUMENT INCLUDES A. Electric Lightwave, Inc. solicits proposals for the construction of a Switching Facility, located at 13705 Gateway Drive, Suite 510, Tukwila, WA. It shall be the duty of the bidder to submit his bid per the requirements herein. Bids must provide breakdown into the categories shown on the bid form attached. Each bid must be signed by the bidder with his usual signature in longhand with the name of the firm and title of the signer printed or typed. 1. Bid Submission: Original sealed bids shall be submitted to Electric Lightwave, Inc., 8100 N.E. Parkway Drive, Suite 150, Vancouver, Washington 98662, Atttention: not later than 4:00 PM (PDT) , 1998. Sealed copies of the same bids shall be submitted to Coffman Engineers, 201 W. North River Drive, Suite 510, Spokane, Washington 99201, Attention: Craig D. Beaumont, not later than 4:00 PM (PDT) , 1998. 2. Contract Time: It is anticipated that work on the project will commence immediately after receipt of bids and Contractor selection. Substantial Completion shall occur on 1998. Final Completion shall occur on 1998. B. Bid Documents and Contract Documents 1. Definitions: All definitions set forth in the Master Agreement for Construction and Service or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents. 2. Availability: Copies of the Contract Documents may be obtained from Coffman Engineers, 201 W. North River Drive, Suite 510, Spokane, Washington 99201, telephone (509) 328 -2994. A $100.00 refundable deposit for each set will be required. Execution of the Electric Lightwave, Inc. "Confidentiality Agreement" is required prior to release of documents. Only pre - qualified General Contractors, Mechanical and Electrical Contractors may receive documents. Documents are available for review at the offices of Coffman Engineers. 3. Inquiries /Addenda: All inquires shall be directed to Coffman Engineers, Attention: Craig D. Beaumont. 4. Production /Assembly /System Substitutions: Comply with Section 01600. C. Site Assessment 1. Prebid Conference: A Pre -Bid Conference will be conducted at the project site, 13705 Gateway Drive, Suite 510, Tukwila, WA, at 10:00 AM, , 1998. Attendance by invited General Contractors is mandatory. Attendance by pre - qualified mechanical and electrical subcontractors is strongly recommended. D. Qualifications INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00200 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 1. Prequalification. 2. Subcontractors/Suppliers: The Mechanical and Electrical Contractors listed immediately following this Section have been pre - qualified for bidding on this project. Bids by other Mechanical and Electrical subcontractors will not be allowed. No additional pre - qualification will be made. E. Bid Enclosures /Requirements 1. Performance Assurance: Contractor's bid shall include a Performance Bond, executed by the Contractor and his surety company. Whoever signs for the company must provide proof of power of attomey. 2. Insurance: Contractor shall provide liability and property damage insurance as required in the Master Agreement for Construction and Service. The Contractor shall also provide Builder's Risk insurance. F. Retainage: Until substantial completion, the Owner shall pay 90 percent of the amount due the Contractor on account of progress payments. Ten (10 %) percent will be held as retainage in an interest bearing account agreed upon by the Owner and Contractor at time of Bid Award. Fifty (50 %) percent of retainage will be paid to the Contractor at Final Completion. The remaining 50 percent of retainage will be paid to the Contractor 90 days after Final Completion. G. Offer Acceptance /Rejection 1. Duration of Offer. Bids shall be firm, fixed and shall be the maximum set forth. Bids shall be held firm for ninety (90) days from the time of bid opening. 2. Acceptance of Offer: It is the intent of Electric Lightwave, Inc. to award a contract to the lowest responsive bidder, provided that the bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents. However, Electric Lightwave, Inc. reserves the right to award a contract to any bona fide bidding submitting a responsive bid. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Document 00100 - Bid Solicitation. B. Bid Form. END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00200 -2 07/07/98 1 1 1•• 1 1 i 1 s t Electric Lightwave, Inc. SECTION 00300 BID FORM Tukwila Switch Facility The undersigned submits the following bid for fumishing goods and services according to all provisions set forth in the Master Service Agreement, General Requirements, Contract Documents, and the Technical Specification. The bid amounts provided shall not include Washington State Sales Tax. :... :DESCRIPTION ` . _.: .: .::: ,: General Construction :.• .BID AMOUNT .: $ Mechanical Construction - HVAC $ Mechanical Construction - Plumbing $ Electrical Construction - Power Distribution System $ Electrical Construction - Generator System $ Electrical Construction - Lightning Protection System $ Electrical Construction - Security System $ Electrical Construction - Grounding Interior System $ Electrical Construction - Grounding Exterior System $ Electrical Construction - UPS System $ Electrical Construction - All Remaining Items $ Fire Protection - Inergen System $ Fire Protection - Fire Alarm System $ Fire Protection - Sprinkler System $ TOTAL BID AMOUNT Addenda Acknowledgment The undersigned acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: (List by number and date appearing on addendum). Addendum No. Date 1 1 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility It is acknowledged that the documents enclosed are hereby incorporated by reference and upon award, constitute the basis for a contract between the undersigned and Electric Lightwave, Inc. BIDDER BY: TITLE: ADDRESS: PHONE: DATE: END OF BID FORM [ Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 1 SECTION 01100 SUMMARY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT 1 A. Project Name: Tukwila Switch Facility. B. Owner's Name: Electric Lightwave, Inc. C. Owner's Representative Name: Coffman Engineers, although Owner's Representative may P 9 include personnel directly employed by Electric Lightwave, Inc. and /or individuals hired to act 1 as the agent of Electric Lightwave, Inc. D. The Project consists of tenant improvements to a portion of an existing building located at 13705 Gateway Drive, Tukwila, WA 98188. The work includes modifications of existing spaces, finishes, fire alarm and protection systems, and mechanical, plumbing and electrical systems. The finished facility will be a satellite switching and transmission facility for distribution of "dial tone ". 1 1.02 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION A. Executed Master Agreement for Construction and Service as prepared by Electric Lightwave, Inc. 1.03 EXISTING FACILITIES �. A. The existing project facilities consists of a completed office warehouse building constructed in 1997/1998. 1.04 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. See Section 00100 - Bid Solicitation, for project recap.E. 1 1.05 WORK BY OWNER A. Electric Lightwave, Inc. will award a contract for supply of the operational equipment for the building following Final Completion. 1.06 OWNER OCCUPANCY 1 A. Electric Lightwave, Inc. intends to occupy the building on B. Electric Lightwave may, at any time, and from time to time, during the performance of the Work, enter the Work for the purpose if installing any necessary work by Electric Lightwave labor or other contracts, and for any other purpose in connection with the installation of facilities. In so doing, Electric Lightwave shall not delay Contractor and Contractor shall not intefere with other work done by or on behalf of Electric Lightwave. 1 SUMMARY 01100 -1 07/07/98 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 1.07 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings. B. Contractor shall have charge and care of, and bear the risk of damage to the Project until its acceptance. C. Commercial uses on or to Project property or facilities may only be made with written consent of Owner's Representative. D. Contractor shall not create or permit the continued existence of any nuisance in or about the work site. E. Materials and equipment shall be fumished in sufficient quantities and at such times to ensure orderly progress of Work. They shall be stored and protected to guarantee preservation of quality, appearance, and suitability for the Project. F. Electric Lightwave will provide the lands, easements, and right -of -way, or other right to enter and work on lands shown on the Drawings. Nothing herein contained and nothing marked on the Drawings, shall be interpreted as giving Contractor exclusive occupancy of the lands provided by Electric Lightwave. G. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code open during construction period. H. Existing building spaces may be used for storage. 1.08 WORK SEQUENCE A. Coordinate construction schedule and operations with Owner's Representative. 1.09 OWNER - FURNISHED ITEMS OF WORK AND EQUIPMENT PART 2 PRODUCTS - PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED - NOT USED END OF SECTION SUMMARY 01100 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 01200 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 1 A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments. B. Documentation of changes in Contract Price and Contract Time. 1 C. Change procedures. D. Correlation of Contractor submittals based on changes. 1 E. Procedures for preparation and submittal of application for final payment. 1.02 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit a printed schedule on AIA Form G703 - Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation Sheet. Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be considered. 1 B. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date of Owner - Contractor Agreement. 1 C. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the specification Section. Identify site mobilization and bonds and insurance. 1 D. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders with each Application for Payment. 1.03 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS 1 A. Payment Period: Calendar Month. B. Present required information in typewritten form. 1 C. Form: AIA G702 Application and Certificate for Payment and AIA G703 - Continuation Sheet including continuation sheets when required. D. For each item, provide a column for listing each of the following: 1. Item Number. 2. Description of work. 3. Scheduled Values. 4. Previous Applications. 5. Work in Place under this Application. 6. Authorized Change Orders. 7. Total Completed to Date of Application. 8. Percentage of Completion. 9. Balance to Finish. 10. Retainage. E. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer. 1 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01200 -1 07/07/98 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility F. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item for portion of work performed and for stored Products. G. List each authorized Change Order as a separate line item, listing Change Order number and dollar amount as for an original item of Work. H. Submit three copies of each Application for Payment. I. When Owner's Representative requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Show application number and date, and line item by number and description. 1.04 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES A. The Owner's Representative will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum or Contract Time as authorized by the Conditions of the Contract by issuing supplemental instructions on AIA Form G710. B. Construction Change Directive: Owner's Representative may issue a document, signed by the Owner, instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. The document will describe changes in the Work, and will designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. 2. Promptly execute the change in Work. C. Notice of Change: The Owner's Representative may issue a document which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change. Contractor shall prepare and submit a estimated price quotation within 5 days. D. The Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to the Architect/Engineer, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation. E. Computation of Change in Contract Amount: 1. For change requested by Owner's Representative for work falling under a fixed price contract, the amount will be based on Contractor's price quotation. 2. For change ordered by Owner's Representative without a quotation from the Contractor, the amount will be determined by the Owner's Representative based on the Contractor's substantiation of costs as specified for Time and Material work. F. Substantiation of Costs: Provide full information required for evaluation. 1. On request, provide following data: a. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment. b. Taxes, insurance, and bonds. c. Overhead and profit. d. Justification for any change in Contract Time. e. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented. 2. Support each claim for additional costs with additional information: a. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom. b. Time records and wage rates paid. c. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarly documented. 3. For Time and Material work, submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01200 -2 07/07/98 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility G. Execution of Change Orders: Owner's Representative will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract on AIA G701. H. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents. Record documents shall be updated weekly (minimum) for review by Owner's Representative. Failure to comply may affect progress payments. 1.05 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT A. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. B. Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been accomplished: 1. All closeout procedures specified in Section 01700. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION 1 l 1 1 1 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01200 -3 07/07/98 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 01300 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preconstruction meeting. B. Progress meetings. C. Construction progress schedule. D. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout. E. Number of copies of submittals. F. Submittal procedures. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01100 - Summary: Stages of the Work, Work covered by the Contract. B. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Additional coordination requirements. C. Section 01730 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents. 1.03 PROJECT COORDINATION A. Project Coordinator: Owner's Representative. B. Cooperate with the Project Coordinator in allocation of mobilization areas of site; for field offices and sheds, for sanitary facilities access, traffic, and parking facilities. C. During construction, coordinate use of site and facilities through the Project Coordinator. D. Comply with Project Coordinator's procedures for intra - project communications; submittals, reports and records, schedules, coordination drawings, and recommendations; and resolution of ambiguities and conflicts. E. Comply with instructions of the Project Coordinator for use of temporary utilities and construction facilities. F. Smoking will not be allowed within the building. G. Make the following types of submittals to the Owner's Representative. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED 1 1 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 -1 07/07/98 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Owner's Representative will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award. B. Attendance Required: 1. Electric Lightwave, Inc.. 2. Owner's Representative. 3. Contractor. 4. Mechanical and Electrical Subcontractors. C. Agenda: 1. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, schedule of values, and progress schedule. 2. Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract, and the Owner's Representative. 2. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 3. Temporary utilities provided by Electric Lightwave, Inc.. 4. Security and housekeeping procedures. 5. Application for payment procedures. 6. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 7. Scheduling. D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Owner's Representative, Electric Lightwave, Inc., participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. General Contractor will make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda and preside over meetings. Meetings shall be held weekly at the Project. B. Attendance Required: Contractor's Project Manager, job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Electric Lightwave, Inc., Owner's Representative, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. C. Agenda: 1. Review of Work progress. 2. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 3. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 4. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 5. Review of off -site fabrication and delivery schedules. 6. Maintenance of progress schedule. 7 Planned progress for the next two calendar weeks. 8 Other business relating to Work. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Within 10 days after date established in Notice to Proceed, submit preliminary schedule defining planned operations for the first 15 days of Work, with a general outline for remainder of Work. B. Submit two week "look ahead" schedule in bar chart form at every construction Progress Meeting. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility C. Within 120 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit complete schedule for review. 3.04 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: 1. Product data. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Samples for selection. 4. Samples for verification. B. Submit to Owner's Representative for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. Submit two copies to Coffman Engineers and one copy to Electric Lightwave, Inc., Attn.: Shaaban Naim. C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01780 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. 3.05 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information: 1. Design data. 2. Certificates. 3. Test reports. 4. Inspection reports. 5. Manufacturer's instructions. 6. Manufacturer's field reports. 3.06 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout: 1. Project record documents. 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Warranties. 4. Bonds. 3.07 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS A. Submit required copies for review to Coffman Engineers and one informational copy to Electric Lightwave, Inc., Attn.: Shaaban Naim, B. Documents for Review: 1. Small size sheets, not larger than 8 -1/2 x 11 inches: Submit the number of copies which the Contractor requires, plus two copies which will be retained by the Owner's Representative. 2. Larger sheets, not larger than 36 x 48 inches: Submit the number of opaque reproductions which Contractor requires, plus two copies which will be retained by Owner's Representative. C. Documents for Information: Submit two copies. D. Documents for Project Closeout: Make one reproduction of submittal originally reviewed. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility Submit one extra of submittals for information. E. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be retained by Owner's Representative. 1. Retained samples will not be retumed to Contractor unless specifically so stated. 3.08 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Transmit each submittal with approved form. B. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a sequential alphabetic suffix. C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier, pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate on each copy. D. For each submittal for review, allow 10 working days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor. It is the intent of the Owner and Coffman Engineers to process all submittals without requiring resubmission. The Contractor, and his subcontractors and suppliers, shall cooperate with the Owner and Coffman Engineers to this end. E. Provide space for Contractor and Owners Representative review stamps. F. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements. END OF SECTION ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 -4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS A. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Owner's Representative and to Contractor. 1. Test reports are submitted for the Owner's Representative's knowledge as contract administrator or for Electric Lightwave, Inc., for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. B. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation /application subcontractor to Owner's Representative, in quantities specified for Product Data. 1. Indicate material or Product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. 2. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Owner's Representative. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the Electric Lightwave, Inc. 's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. D. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for the Owner's Representative 's benefit as contract administrator or for Electric Lightwave, Inc.. 1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. 1.02 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by applicable code. C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections. D. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until Substantial Completion. E. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from the Owner's Representative before proceeding. F. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of the Owner's Representative shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, Products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Owner's Representative before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. 3.03 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or Product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. 3.04 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the Owner's Representative will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS END OF SECTION 01400 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 01500 1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary Utilities. B. Temporary sanitary facilities. 1 C. Security requirements. D. Vehicular access and parking. E. Waste removal facilities and services. F. Field offices. 1.02 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Provide and pay for all power, lighting, water, and heating and cooling required for construction purposes. 1.03 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain chemical toilets, and other facilities and enclosures as required by the Contractor. Provide at time of project mobilization. 1_ B. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition. 1. C. At end of construction, remove temporary sanitary facilities, and return site to same or better condition as originally found. 1.04 SECURITY 1_ A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, existing facilities, and Electric Lightwave, Inc. 's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. 1.05 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING A. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Electric Lightwave, Inc.. 1 B. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. C. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. D. Existing parking areas may be used for construction parking. Parking location to be coordinated with Owner's Representative. 1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 -1 07/07/98 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 1.06 WASTE REMOVAL A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition. B. Provide containers with lids. Dispose of waste off-site periodically. 1.07 FIELD OFFICES A. Contractor shall construct temporary offices, facilities and Iaydown areas as needed within the Project area as needed to complete the Work. Other lands or use of lands necessary for Contractor's operation shall be obtained by Contractor at Contractor's expense. 1.08 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion inspection. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General product requirements. B. Transportation, handling, storage and protection. C. Product option requirements. D. Substitution limitations and procedures. E. Spare parts and maintenance materials. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. B. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project. C. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns. D. Indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS A. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacture for components being replaced. B. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal Tugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Size terminal Tugs to NFPA 70, include lugs for terminal box. 2.02 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed, unless specifically noted. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. Substitution requests to be submitted on CSI Substitution Request form completed in full. 2.03 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS A. Provide spare parts, maintenance, and extra products of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Substitution requests during the bidding period will be allowed until B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. C. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required for the Work to be completed with no additional cost to Electric Lightwave, Inc.. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent. D. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed substitution. 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 3.02 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 3.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. C. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product. D. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility E. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. F. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. G. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. END OF SECTION PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 1 SECTION 01700 1 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 1 A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures. B. Pre - installation meeings. 1 C. Cutting and patching. D. Surveying for laying out the work. E. Cleaning and protection. 1 F. Starting of systems and equipment. G. Closeout procedures, except payment procedures. 1 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures. 1 B. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection procedures. C. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: . �. D. Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance data, warranties and bonds. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. B. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air -borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere. C. Noise Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction operations. Adjacent tenant spaces are occupied. Coodinate noisy operations with Owner's Representative. D. Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents from accessing or invading premises. 1.04 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work of alterations and renovations to expedite completion and to accommodate occupancy requirements. 1 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 -1 07/07/98 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility B. Verify utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. C. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. D. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. E. Coordinate completion and clean -up of work of separate sections. F. After Electric Lightwave, Inc. occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Electric Lightwave, Inc.'s activities. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work. B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where necessary, referring to existing work as a standard. C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution described in Section 01600. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Beginning new work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that demolition is complete in alterations areas and areas are ready for installation of new work. C. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached. D. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations. F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 3.02 PREPARATION A. Cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovation work. Replace and restore at completion. B. Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, such as rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete. Replace materials as specified for finished work. C. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces. D. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work and salvage items from weather and extremes of temperature and humidity. Insulate ducts and piping to prevent condensation in exposed areas. E. Prepare surfaces and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new work and finishes. F. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. G. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. H. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at the site prior to commencing work of the section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific seciton. C. Notify Owner's Representative four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Owner's Reprsentative, Electric Lightwave, Inc., participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.04 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install Products as specified in individual sections. B. Make neat transitions. Patch work to match adjacent work in texture and appearance. Where new Work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. C. When existing finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to Owners Representative. D. Where removal of partitions or walls results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors, walls, and ceilings to a smooth plane without breaks, steps, or bulkheads. E. Where a change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs in existing work, submit recommendation EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility for providing a smooth transition for Owner's Representative review and request instructions. F. Trim existing doors as necessary to clear new floor finish. Refinish trim as required. G. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes. H. Re -cover and refinish work that exposes mechanical and electrical work exposed accidentally during the work. 3.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Execute cutting and patching including excavation and fill to complete the work, to uncover work to install improperly sequenced work, to remove and replace defective or non - conforming work, to remove samples of installed work for testing when requested, to provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work, to execute patching to complement adjacent work, and to fit Products together to integrate with other work. B. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition. C. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces. D. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval. E. Restore work with new Products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. F. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. G. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07270, to full thickness of the penetrated element. H. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. I. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections. Repair substrate prior to patching finish. Finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections. 3.06 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 -4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site periodically and dispose off - site. 3.07 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. 3.08 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION A. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble- shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled time, at equipment location. B. Provide a qualified person who is knowledgeable about the Project to perform demonstration and instruction of owner personnel. C. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Electric Lightwave, Inc.'s personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. D. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. 3.09 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. B. Testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems: See Section 15990 and 01400. 3.10 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning after Substantial Completion but before making final application for payment. 1. Clean areas to be occupied by Electric Lightwave, Inc. prior to final completion before Electric Lightwave, Inc. occupancy. B. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. D. Clean filters of operating equipment. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 -5 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site. 3.11 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Make submittals that are required by goveming or other authorities. B. Accompany Project Coordinator on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for completion or correction in Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion. C. Notify Owner's Representative when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion. D. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Owner's Representative's review. E. Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion and comply with requirements for access to Electric Lightwave, Inc. - occupied areas. F. Notify Owner's Representative when work is considered finally complete. G. Complete items of work determined by Owner's Representative's final inspection. END OF SECTION EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 -6 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 1 SECTION 01780 1 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 1 A. Project Record Documents. B. Operation and Maintenance Data. 1 C. Warranties and bonds. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Contract closeout procedures. C. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. 1. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Owner's Representative with claim for final Application for Payment. After Record Drawings have been reviewed and approved by Coffman Engineers, submit two blueline prints of the Drawings and one set of reproducible transparencies to Electric Lightwave, Inc. 1 B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Provide Electric Lightwave, Inc. with three complete manuals, as set forth in this Section. C. Warranties and Bonds: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Electric Lightwave, Inc. 's permission, submit documents within ten days after acceptance. 1 D. Lien Waivers: Provide four sets of "Paid in Full" lien waivers from the General Contractor and subcontractors. 1 E. Certificate of Occupancy: Provide two copies of the approved Certificate of Occupancy. F. Asbestos Certification: Provide one set of certification letters which assure Electric Lightwave, Inc., that no materials containing asbestos were used on the Project. Certification letter shall be provided by the General Contractor and all subcontractors and material suppliers fumishing or installing materials on the Project. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 1 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01780 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. • 2. Addenda. 3. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 4. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting. B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Electric Lightwave, Inc.. C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D. Record information concurrent with construction progress. E. Record Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 2. Field changes of dimension and detail. 3. Details not on original Contract drawings. 3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble manuals in three ring binders with an index and card stock dividers designed for easy reference. The manual will include at a minimum the following information and documentation: B. Each index item shall reference the appropriate Section of the Specifications and be placed in the binder in numeric order. Provide four (4) sets of the manuals. C. Subcontractor list with name, address, phone number, and contact person. D. Guarantees and warranties for all required materials and equipment. E. Receipts for all extra materials tumed over to Electric Lightwave, Inc. F. Maintenance and operating instructions for all equipment. Include parts list and manufacturer's name, model number, serial number, name, address, and phone number of local supplier and /or installer. G. Copy of color schedule listing the paint manufacturer and colors used along with the name of the supplier where matching colors areavailable. H. Hardware schedule with keying information. 3.3 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS A. Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall be provided prior to training. B. Sessions may be video taped by Electric Lightwave, Inc. C. Instructors to experienced and qualified. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01780 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility D. Minimum duration of instruction periods by system: 1. Electrical Lighting Systems (lighting, power distribution, fire alarms, and security systems): 2 hours 1 2. HVAC Systems (package units, controls): 1 hour 3.03 TESTING 1 A. Building Walls: Water pressure test all precast concrete walls with the equivalent of 10 psi over an area not larger 30 square feet for not less than 30 seconds. Inspect all interior surfaces opposite test areas for evidence of leakage. Correct all deficiencies per project requirements. 1 Building Walls: Water test all storefront/glazed walls with continuous water flow at pressure applicable for such surfaces, over an area not larger than 10 square feet for not less than 60 1 seconds. Inspect all interior surfaces opposite test areas for evidence of leakage. Correct all deficiencies per project requirements. B. Building Root Flood roof area over space to be occupied by Electric Lightwave, Inc. with the equivalent of 2 inches of water, dispersed over a period of time so as not adversely affect the existing roof structure. Inspect all interior surfaces opposite test areas for evidence of leakage. Correct all deficiencies per project requirements. 1 C. All testing shall be performed in the presence of the Owner's Representative. The Contractor shall provide a written description of the testing and written certification that the building is free of leaks in the areas tested. 3.04 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 1 A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Electric Lightwave, Inc. 's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined. B. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. 1 END OF SECTION 1. 1 1. 1 1 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01780 -3 07/07/98 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 02223 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Removal of designated construction. B. Disposal of materials. 1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for demolition work, dust control, products requiring electrical disconnection and re- connection. B. Obtain required permits from King County. C. Do not close or obstruct egress from any building exit or site exit. D. Conform to applicable regulatory procedures when hazardous or contaminated materials are discovered. 1.03 SCHEDULING A. Submit proposed demolition schedule according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 of the Specifications. B. Schedule work to coincide with new construction. C. Describe demolition removal procedures and schedule. D. Perform noisy work: 1. As governed by King County, and as required by the Landlord. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items except those indicated to be reinstalled, salvaged, or to remain the Owner's property. B. Remove and Salvage: Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain the Owner's property. Remove, clean and pack or crate items to protect against damage. Identify contents of containers and deliver to Owner's designated storage area. C. Existing to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by the Owner's Representative, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and then cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations. Selective Demolition 02223 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 1.05 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain the Owner's property, demolished materials shall become the Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site with further disposition at the Contractor's option. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas. B. Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger and notify Owner's Representative. Do not resume operations until directed. C. Asbestos: It is not anticipated that asbestos will be encountered. If any materials suspected of containing asbestos are encountered during performance of the work, do not disturb the materials. Immediately notify the Owner's Representative. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 UTILITY SERVICE A. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities, except when authorized in writing be the Owner's Representative. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to the Owner's Representative. B. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services serving facilities to be selectively demolished. Mark location and termination of utilities. 1. When necessary, make arrangements with utility companies to shut off utilities. Notify Owner's Representative prior to making any such arrangements. 2. Comply with all utility company requirements. C. Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and 16 sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing and sealing or capping utility services. Do not start selective demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers at locations indicated. B. Protect existing materials and equipment that are not to be demolished. C. Prevent movement of structure; provide bracing and shoring. D. For removal and storage of mechanical or electrical equipment, see Divisions 15 and 16. E. Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. Ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area. Selective Demolition 02223 - 2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility F. Protect walls, ceilings, floors and other existing finish work that are to remain and are exposed to selective demolition operations. 3.03 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Disconnect, remove, and identify designated utilities within demolition areas. B. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing supporting structural members to remain.. C. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage adjacent construction. To minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain. D. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. E. Clear work area of flammable materials before using cutting torches. Maintain portable fire suppression devices during flame - cutting operations. Maintain adequate ventilation. F. Locate selective demolition equipment throughout the structure and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls or framing. G. Demolish concrete in small sections. Cut concrete at junctures with construction to remain, using power driven concrete saw. Use power - driven impact tools inside saw -cut areas only. 3.04 PATCHING AND REPAIRS A. Patch and repair holes and damage caused to adjacent construction by selective demolition operations. B. Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials. C. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into adjoining construction to remain in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing. D. Patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space where demolished walls or partitions extend one finished area into another. Provide a flush and even surface of uniform color and appearance. 3.05 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on site. B. Buming: Do not bum demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.06 CLEANING A. Sweep the building broom clean on completion of selective demolition activities. B. Leave the site clean and free of debris upon completion of the work. Selective Demolition 02223 - 3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility C. Remove temporary facilities. END OF SECTION Selective Demolition Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwail Switch Facility SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete formwork. B. Floors and slabs on grade. C. Concrete reinforcement. D. Joint devices associated with concrete work. E. Miscellaneous concrete elements, including equipment pads. F. Concrete finishing. G. Concrete curing. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 1991. B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute; 1989. C. ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute; 1989. D. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 1989. E. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute; 1988. F. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 1992. G. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 1992. H. ASTM A 185 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 1994. I. ASTM A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 1996a. J. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 1993. K. ASTM C 39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 1996. L. ASTM C 94 - Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete; 1996. Cast -In -Place Concrete 03300 - 1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwail Switch Facility M. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 1996. N. ASTM C 173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method; 1994a. O. ASTM C 260 - Standard Specification for Air - Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 1995. P. ASTM C 309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane - Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 1997. Q. ASTM C 494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 1992. R. ASTM C 685 - Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing; 1995a. S. ASTM C 1059 - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete; 1991. T. ASTM D 994 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type); 1994. U. COE CRD -C 572 - Corps of Engineers Specifications for Polyvinylchloride Waterstop; 1974. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following according to the conditions of the contract and Division 1 Specification Sections: 1. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including admixtures, patching compounds, joint systems, curing compounds, dry-shake finish materials, and others if requested by the Owner's Representative. 2. Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design tests. 3. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. B. Conform to ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. C. Acquire all cement from the same source; acquire all aggregate from the same source. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK A. Form Materials: Contractor 's choice of standard products with sufficient strength to withstand hydrostatic head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances. 1. Form Facing for Exposed Finish Concrete: Contractor 's choice of materials that will provide smooth, stain -free final appearance. 2. Form Coating: Release agent that will not adversely affect concrete or interfere with application of coatings. 3. Form Ties: Cone snap type that will leave no metal within 1 -1/2 inches of concrete surface. Cast -In -Place Concrete 03300 - 2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwail Switch Facility 2.02 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 40 (300). 1. Deformed billet -steel bars. 2. Unfinished. B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, plain type. 1. Mesh Size and Wire Gage: As indicated on drawings. C. Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage. 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during concrete placement. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II - Moderate Portland type. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33. C. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 2.04 ADMIXTURES A. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C 260. 1. Available products: MB -VR or Micro-Air, Master Builders, Inc., or approved equal. B. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C 494, Type A - Water Reducing, Type C - Accelerating, and Type G - Water Reducing, High Range and Retarding. 1. Provide products manufactured by Master Builders, Inc., or approved equal. 2. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of cement. 2.05 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES A. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II acrylic non - redispersable type. B. Vapor Retarder: 6 mil thick clear polyethylene film, type recommended for below grade application. C. Sealer: epoxy based Sonneborn, Son -No-Mar or approved equal. D. Non - Shrink Grout: ASTM C 1107; premixed compound consisting of non - metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 7,000 psi. 2. Product: "Masterflow 928" as manufactured by Master Builders, Inc. or approved equal. E. Liquid Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, clear or translucent. Provide Masterseal manufactured by Master Builders, Inc. or approved equal. Cast -In -Place Concrete 03300 - 3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwail Switch Facility 2.06 JOINT DEVICES AND MATERIALS A. Waterstops: Continuous Hydrophilic type. B. Joint Filler: ASTM D 994; Asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, 1/2 inch thick; tongue and groove profile. Provide Asphalt Expansion Joint filler, as manufactured by BURKE, or approved equal. C. Construction Joint Sealant: thermosetting chemically curing material, one -part nonacid - curing silicone sealant meeting the requirements of ASTM C 920, Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Use T. Acceptable products subject to compliance with requirements which may be used, but are not limited to, the following: 1. "Dow Coming 888"; Dow Corning Corporation. 2.07 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations. B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for concrete on the basis of trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301. 1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Owner's Representative for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by manufacturer. D. Normal Weight Concrete: 1. Compressive Strength, per ASTM C 39 at 28 days: 3000 psi. 2. Cement Content: Minimum 470 lb per cubic yard. 3. Water- Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight. 4. Total Air Content: 4 to 7 percent, per ASTM C 173. 5. Maximum Slump: 3 inches. 6. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1 inch. 2.08 MIXING A. On Project Site: Mix in drum type batch mixer, complying with ASTM C 685. Mix each batch not less than 1 -1/2 minutes and not more than 5 minutes. B. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C 94. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design and fabricate forms to support all applied loads until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete. B. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent. Cast -In -Place Concrete 03300 - 4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwail Switch Facility C. Coordinate placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. D. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight by taping edges and ends. Cover with sand to 2" depth. 3.03 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and accurately position, support, and secure in place to achieve not Tess than minimum concrete coverage required for protection. B. Install wire fabric in maximum possible lengths, and offset end laps in both directions. Splice laps with tie wire. C. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with concrete placement. 3.04 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R. C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement. D. Repair vapor retarder damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with vapor retarder material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches and seal watertight. E. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F. Apply sealants in joint devices in accordance with Section 07900. G. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. H. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints. I. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur. J. Place floor slabs in checkerboard or saw cut pattern indicated. K. Saw cut joints within 24 hours after placing. Use 3/16 inch thick blade, cut into 1/4 depth of slab thickness. L. Screed floors level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/4 inch in 10 ft. Cast -In -Place Concrete 03300 - 5 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwail Switch Facility 3.05 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork. B. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1 R, and as follows: 1. Wood float surfaces that will receive quarry tile, ceramic tile, and terrazzo with full bed setting system. 2. Steel trowel surfaces that will receive carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring, thin set quarry tile, and thin set ceramic tile. 3. Steel trowel surfaces that will be left exposed. a. Chemical Hardener: After slab has cured, apply water - diluted hardener in three coats per manufacturer's instructions, allowing 24 hours between coats. C. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at 1:100 nominal. 3.06 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. 1. Normal concrete: Not less than 7 days. C. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: 1. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep continuously moist for not Tess than three days by water ponding, water - saturated sand, water -fog spray, or saturated burlap. 2. Begin final curing after initial curing but before surface is dry. a. Curing compound: Apply in two coats at right angles, using application rate recommended by manufacturer. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Division 1 of the Specifications. B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm. C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of concrete operations. D. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance with specified requirements. E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39. For each test, mold and cure three concrete test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 100 cu yd or Tess of each class of concrete placed. F. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. G. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken. Cast -In -Place Concrete 03300 - 6 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwail Switch Facility 3.09 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Owner's Representative and Contractor within 24 hours of test. B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Owner's Representative. The cost of additional testing shall be bome by Contractor when defective concrete is identified. D. Do not patch, fill, touch -up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Owner's Representative for each individual area. Cast -In -Place Concrete END OF SECTION 03300 - 7 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop Fabricated steel items. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 36/A 36M — Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 1996. B. ASTM A 53 — Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot - Dipped, Zinc - Coated, Welded and Seamless; 1996. C. ASTM A 500 — Standard Specification for Cold- Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 1993. D. AWS D1.1 — Structural welding Code — Steel; American Welding Society; 1996. E. SSPC (PM2) — Painting Manual, Vol. 2, Systems and Specifications; Steel Structures Painting Council; 1995. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 — Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Included erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. C. Welder's Certificates: Submit certification for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS — STEEL A. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B C. Pipe: ASTM A 53, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish. D. Checker plate: Ryerson Steel Inland 4 -Way Plate, thickness as indicated, medium diamond treased pattern. E. Expansion anchors shall be "Hilti Kwik -Bolt II" or approved equal with ICBO approval card. F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. G. Shop and Touch -Up Primer: SSPC -Paint 15, Type 1, red oxide. Metal Fabrications 05500 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. D. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrications, expect where specifically noted otherwise. 2.03 FINISHES — STEEL A. Prime paint all steel items. Primer must be rust inhibitive, lead free, VOC complying with minimum 50% solids by volume: Tnemec 10 -99 or approved equal. B. Prime Painting: One Coat PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS DI.1. D. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. END OF SECTION Metal Fabrications 05500 - 2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing. 1 B. Wood nailers, equipment bases and cant strips for roofing. C. Miscellaneous wood nailers and furring strips. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 A. Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection agencies. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DIMENSION LUMBER 1 A. Grading Agency: Westem Wood Products Association (WWPA). B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. 1 C. Moisture Content: S -dry or MC19. D. Stud Framing (2 x 2 through 2 x 6 ): 1 1. Species: Any allowed under referenced grading rules. 2. Grade: No.2. 2.02 ACCESSORIES 1 - A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Fasteners: Hot - dipped galvanized steel for high humidity and treated wood locations, I. unfinished steel elsewhere. 2. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of sheathing. 3. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry or frame walls. I2.03 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT I A. Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA Treatment C2 using waterbome preservative to 0.25 percent retention. 1. Kiln dry after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. 2. Treat wood in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing. 1 3. Treat wood in contact with masonry or concrete. 1 1 Rough Carpentry 06100 - 1 07/07/98 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS WOOD A. Provide miscellaneous members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. B. Curb roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Form comers by altemating lapping side members. C. Coordinate curb installation with installation of decking and support of deck openings. END OF SECTION 1 Rough Carpentry 06100 - 2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 06410 CUSTOM CABINETS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Special fabricated cabinet units. B. Countertops. C. Cabinet hardware. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See section 01300— Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes. C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Protect units from moisture damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD MATERIALS A. Softwood Lumber: NIST PS 20; Graded in accordance with AWI P -200 Custom; average moisture content of 6 percent; species and grade as follows: 2.02 PANEL MATERIALS A. Wood Particleboard: NIST PS 1; AWI P -200 standard, composed of wood chips, medium density, made with high waterproof resin binders; of grade to suit application; sanded faces, located as follows: 2.03 MANUFACTURERS — PLASTIC LAMINATE A. Laminart or approved equal. B. Substitutions: See Section 01600 — Product Requirements. 2.04 LAMINATE MATERIALS A. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, color- through plastic laminate. Colors to be determined during construction. Custom Cabinets 06410 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 2.05 HARDWARE A. Hardware: BHMAA156.9. Type, materials, sizes and finish to be selected from manufacturer's standard line. B. Shelf Brackets: Formed steel brackets, formed for attachment with lugs; chrome finish. C. Drawer and Door Pulls: Extruded aluminum pull, full width of drawer, polished finish. D. Catches: Magnetic. E. Drawer Slides: Galvanized steel construction, ball bearings separating tracks, full extension type. F. Hinges: Knuckle disappearing type, steel with chrome finish. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. B. Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with 3/8 inch matching hardwood edging. Use one piece for full length only. C. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern. D. Door and Drawer Fronts: '/. inch thick; flush style. E. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. F. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Finish corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut -outs. G. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from on -site dimensions. Prime paint cut edges. PART 3EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Set and secure casework in place; rigid, plumb, and level. B. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units. C. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. Custom Cabinets 06410 - 2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility D. Secure cabinet to floor using appropriate angles and achorages. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust installed work. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings and fixtures. Custom Cabinets END OF SECTION 06410 - 3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 07212 BOARD AND BATT INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Batt insulation and vapor retarder in exterior wall, roof, and soffit construction. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include information on special environmental conditions required for installation and installation techniques. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS - INSULATION MATERIALS A. Owens Coming Fiberglas Corp. B. Celotex, Corp. C. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS A. Batt Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed glass fiber batt; conforming to the following: 1. Thermal Resistance: As noted on the drawings. 2. Facing: Unfaced. 3. Flame /Smoke Properties: 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E 84. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Black polyethylene film for above grade application, 6 mil (15 mm) thick. B. Tape: Bright aluminum self - adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inch (50 mm) wide. C. Nails or Staples: Steel wire; galvanized; type and size to suit application. D. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application. BOARD AND BATT INSULATION 07212 - 1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are ready to receive insulation and adhesive. B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond. 3.02 BATT INSTALLATION A. Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Install in exterior wall and roof spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation. C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids. D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of the insulation. E. Install with factory applied vapor retarder membrane facing warm side of building spaces. Lap ends and side flanges of membrane over framing members. F. Tape seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in membrane. G. Tape seal tears or cuts in vapor retarder. H. Extend vapor retarder tightly to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames and other items interrupting the plane of the membrane. Tape seal in place. 3.03 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment. BOARD AND BATT INSULATION END OF SECTION 07212 - 2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 1 SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fleshings, counterflashings and fabricated sheet metal items, as indicated in Schedule. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract: 1. Submit product data including manufacturer's material and finish data, installation instructions, and general recommendations for each specified flashing material and fabricated product. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and standard details, except as otherwise indicated. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with 2 years of 1 documented experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1 A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. B. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; .0396 inch thick steel, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers. 1 B. Underlayment: ASTM D 2178, glass fiber roofing felt. C. Primer: Zinc chromate type. 1 D. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc chromate alkyd. 1 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07620 - I 07/07/98 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility E. Sealant: Polyisobutylene; non - hardening, non - skimming, non - drying, non - migrating sealant. F. Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I. G. Solder. ASTM B 32; Sn50 (50/50) type. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. D. Form material with fiat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet -type or interlocking hooked seams. E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. F. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over existing roofing . Return and brake edges. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located. B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Conform to drawing details B. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. C. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. D. Fit flashings tight in place. Make comers square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07620 - 2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility deterioration of finishes. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal flashing and trim work during construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07620 - 3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 07840 FIRESTOPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Firestopping materials. B. Firestopping of all penetrations and interruptions to fire rated assemblies, whether indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 — Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics and performance ratings. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructictions. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs which provide the scheduled fire ratings when tested in accordance with methods indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRESTOPPING ASSEMBLIES A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements. 1. Fire Ratings: See Drawings for required systems and ratings. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Intumescent sheeting, cavity material and sealant as indicated, manufactured by 3M Company System to be similar to U.L. System No. W -L -4004. B. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, and Accessories: Type required for tested assembly design. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in manner in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, completely closing openings. Firestopping 07620 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. Firestopping END OF SECTION f I 1 1 9 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sealants and joint backing. B. Other applications as indicated. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim B. Section 09620 - Gypsum Board Assemblies C. Section 09511 - Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract: 1. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics. 2. Samples: Submit two samples, 6x6 inch in size illustrating sealant colors for selection. 3. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years experience. C. Single Source for materials: Obtain joint sealant materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Correct defective work within a two year period after Date of Substantial Completion. B. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. Joint Sealers 07900 - 1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Silicone Sealants: 1. Bostik. 2. ChemRex Inc. (Sonnebom). 3. Dow Corning Corporation. 4. Substitutions: Submit product data for approval by the Owner's Representative. B. Polyurethane Sealants: 1. Bostik. 2. ChemRex Inc. (Sonnebom). 3. Master Builders (Iso- Flex). 4. Substitutions: Submit product data for approval by the Owner's Representative. C. Butyl Sealants: 1. Bostik. 2. H.B. Fuller Company (PTI). 3. Tremco, A BFGoodrich Specialty Chemicals Company. 4. Substitutions: Submit product data for approval by the Owner's Representative. D. Acrylic Emulsion Latex Sealants: 1. Bostik. 2. ChemRex Inc. (Sonnebom). 3. Substitutions: Submit product data for approval by the Owner's Representative. 2.03 SEALANTS A. Acrylic Emulsion Latex: ASTM C 834, single component, non - staining, non - bleeding, non - sagging. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Product: SONOLAC manufactured by Sonnebom (ChemRex Inc.). 3. Movement Capability: 2 to 5 percent. 4. Service Temperature Range: 2 to 160 degrees F. 5. Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to 40. 6. Applications: Use for. a. Filling joints between walls and woodwork. b. Patching and wall cracks. c. Interior sealing joints. B. Butyl -based tape: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12 -1/2, Uses NT, M, A, G, 0; single component, solvent release, non - skinning, non- sagging. 1. Color: Colors as selected. 2. Product: Sonnebom. 3. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 12 -1/2 percent. 4. Service Temperature Range: -13 to 180 degrees F. 5. Shore A Hardness Range: 10 to 30. 6. Applications: Use for: Joint Sealers 07900 - 2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility a. Joints between metal flashing and existing roofing. C. Nonsag Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, M, A, G, 0; single component, chemical curing, non - staining, non - bleeding, capable of continuous water immersion, non - sagging type. 1. Color: Colors as selected. 2. Product: NP -1 manufactured by Sonnebom Chemrex Inc.. 3. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent. 4. Service Temperature Range: -40 to 180 degrees F. 5. Shore A Hardness Range: 20 to 35. 6. Applications: Use for: a. Exterior or interior vertical joints. D. Self- Leveling Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T, M, A, 0; single component, chemical curing, non staining, non - bleeding, capable of continuous water immersion, self - leveling type. 1. Color: Gray. 2. Product: SL 1 manufactured by Sonnebom (ChemRex Inc.). 3. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent. 4. Service Temperature Range: -40 to 180 degrees F. 5. Shore A Hardness Range: 20 to 30. 6. Applications: Use for: a. Concrete floor expansion joints. E. Multipurpose Silicone Sealant ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, A, G; single component, solvent curing, non - sagging, non - staining, fungus resistant, non - bleeding. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Product: OMNIPLUS manufactured by Sonnebom. 3. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent. 4. Service Temperature Range: -65 to 180 degrees F. 5. Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to 35. 6. Applications: Use for. a. Glass, Aluminum, tile, fiberglass, countertops, nonstructural glazing, sanitary seals in kitchen and bath areas. b. General purpose use in HVAC, plumbing, and roofing. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non - staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non - corrosive and non - staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width; Closed -Cell Backer Rod manufactured by Sonneborn (ChemRex Inc.). D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. Joint Sealers 07900 - 3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193. D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193. C. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width -to -depth ratio, neck dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific dimensions are indicated. D. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Width /depth ratio of 2:1. 2. Neck dimension no greater than 1/3 of the joint width. 3. Surface bond area on each side not less than 75 percent of joint width. E. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. G. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. H. Tool joints concave. I. Precompressed Foam Sealant: Do not stretch; avoid joints except at corners, ends, and intersections; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect sealants until cured. Joint Sealers END OF SECTION 07900 - 4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Un- insulated Hollow Metal Doors for interior locations. B. Adjustable Metal Frames. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors. B. Section 08710 - Door Hardware. C. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Field painting. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract: 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature demonstrating compliance with referenced standards. 2. Shop Drawings: Indicate the following: a. Door and frame schedule in accordance with SDI 111D. b. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 3. Selection Samples: Two sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available factory finishes. 4. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions for each specified product. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Member of Steel Door Institute (SDI). B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum three years documented experience installing products specified in this section. C. Provide doors and frames complying with ANSI /SDI 100 "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" and as specified. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect products from moisture, construction traffic, and damage; store under cover. 1. Place units upright on 4 inch high wood sills to prevent rust or damage. 2. Provide 1/4 inch space between doors to promote air circulation. B. Do not use non - vented plastic or canvas shelters; should wrappers become wet, remove immediately. C. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired Steel Doors and Frames 08110 - 1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility provided refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Owner's Representative; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard warranty, effective on date of purchase, against defects in product workmanship and materials; minimum 18 months for doors and frames, including 12 month warranty against rust. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, or approved equal: 1. Ceco Door Products. 2. Fenestra Corp. 3. Steelcraft. B. Unless otherwise specified for an individual product or material, supply all products specified in this section from the same manufacturer. 2.02 DOOR AND FRAME ASSEMBLIES A. Door and Frame Assemblies: Provide the following performance: 1. Air infiltration, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283, ISDSI 101, and SDI 116: 0.04 cu ft/min /lin ft at 25 miles per hour wind velocity. B. Fire -rated door and frame assemblies: Tested in accordance with UL 10B, NFPA 252, UBC 43 -2, and type tested by WHI for 1 1/2 hour resistance rating. 1. Attach fire rating seal of certifying agency to fire -rated doors and frames. 2. Provide metal seals. 2.03 DOORS A. General: Provide the following performance: 1. Standard 3 feet by 7 feet door (unless noted otherwise) to meet requirements of ANSI A250.4 procedure for level C doors for 250,000 cycles. B. Doors: Un- insulated hollow metal doors; (Manufacturer). 1. 1 -3/4 inches nominal thickness. 2. Face sheets: Galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), with A40/ZF120 coating. 3. Doors for interior use: Minimum 16 gage thickness. 4. Type: Indicated on drawings. 5. Sizes: Indicated on drawings. 6. Door finish: Factory- applied primer. C. Door Construction: Visible seams on face sheets not permitted. 1. Core: Expanded polyurethane, foamed in place, without voids, and bonded to inside surfaces of both face sheets. D. Hardware Preparation: Doors prepared for hardware, reinforced with same material as door face sheet, and as follows: 1. Hinges: Non - handed cut -outs and minimum 10 gage reinforcement provided for full- Steel Doors and Frames 08110 - 2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility mortise 4 -1/2 inches by 4 -1/2 inches standard weight template hinges, located in accordance with SDI 100; one hinge handing plate supplied for each hinge cut -out. 2. Lockset: Minimum 18 gage. 3. Surface- mounted hardware: Concealed reinforcement of minimum 16 gage for other door hardware specified in Section 08710. 2.04 FRAMES A. Frames for doors: Hollow metal frames; (Manufacturer same as for doors) 1. Three -piece frames constructed of galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), with A40/ZF120 coating, 16 gage minimum metal thickness. 2. Profile: Double- rabbeted for 1 -3/4 inch door thickness, with 2 inches wide trim face, double return to wall, and 5/8 inch high stop; throat dimensions indicated. 3. Comers: Mitered for hairline joint at intersections of head and jambs, with concealed corner reinforcement and factory- installed alignment tabs for tight fit. 4. Shop - assembled, with face - welded joints, welds ground smooth; with primer re- applied. 5. Ship frames with spreader bar. 6. Hardware preparation: Frames prepared for mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of SDI 100 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. 7. Anchoring Devices: countersunk or oval heads for exposed fasteners. 8. Frame finish: Factory- applied primer. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors and frames to meet requirements of SDI 100. B. Ship frames knocked down, with components for each opening packaged together in manufacturer's standard protective packaging. C. Shop - Assembled Frames: Install one hinge at each hinge reinforcement location; ship doors and frames together as pre -hung units, with shipping clips and spreader bars to prevent warping or racking, in manufacturer's standard protective packaging. 2.06 FINISHES A. Factory - Applied Primer: Water - dispersed acrylic primer meeting requirements of ANSI A224.1. B. Factory- Applied Dry Powder Prime Coat: Baked -on dry powder prime coating meeting requirements of ANSI A224.1. C. Factory- Applied Baked Enamel: Electrostatically applied, forced -air oven dried acrylic enamel meeting requirements of ANSI A250.3, and the following: 1. 240 -hour humidity test without deterioration, in accordance with ASTM D 1735. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Have installer verify that project conditions are acceptable before beginning installation of frames; verify that completed openings to receive frames are of correct size and thickness. Steel Doors and Frames 08110 - 3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility B. Correct unacceptable conditions before proceeding with installation. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove spreader bars provided for shipping before installing units; using spreader bars to assist installation and alignment is not permitted. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, approved shop drawings, and requirements of SDI 105; in addition, install frames for fire -rated openings in accordance with requirements of NFPA 80. B. Installation of door hardware is specified in Section 08710. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Prime Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air drying primer. B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from frames. Steel Doors and Frames END OF SECTION 08110 - 4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flush wood doors; flush configuration; fire rated. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames B. Section 08112 - Standard Steel Frames. C. Section 08710 - Door Hardware. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AWI P -200, Section 1300, Custom Grade. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Door Construction: Conform to NFPA 252. 1. Listed and classified by UL as suitable to for the purpose specified and indicated. B. Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as indicated. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with AWI P -200, Section 1300. B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DOOR TYPES A. Flush Interior Doors: 1 -3/4 inches (44 mm) thick; solid core construction; fire rated as indicated. 2.02 DOOR CORES A. Fire Rated Doors: AWI P -200, Section 1300, Type FD, hourly ratings as indicated. 2.03 DOOR FACINGS A. Interior Doors - Face doors and side edges with .050" thick plastic laminate. Plastic laminate color to be selected during construction. Door thickness 1 -3/4" typical. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards requirements. B. Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with UL requirements. Attach fire rating label to door. C. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing. D. Bond edge banding to cores. E. Provide edge clearances in accordance with AWI 1600. 2.05 FINISH PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out -of- tolerance for size or alignment. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and AWI P -200 requirements. 1. Install fire -rated doors in accordance with and NFPA 80 requirements. B. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4 inch (19 mm). 1. Trim fire door height at bottom edge only, in accordance with fire rating requirements. C. Machine cut for hardware. D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in Section 08112 and hardware specified in Section 08710. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement. B. Adjust closers for full closure. END OF SECTION FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 3. 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hardware for hollow steel and aluminum doors. B. Hardware for fire -rated doors. C. Electrically operated and controlled hardware. D. Thresholds. E. Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames. B. Section 16720: Access control systems. 1.03 REFERENCES A. DHI (LOCW) - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Flush Wood Doors; Door and Hardware Institute; 1993. B. UL (BMD) = Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 1996. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract B. Product data including manufacturers' technical product data for each item of door hardware. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements.. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of installed cylinders and their master key code. E. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. F. Keys: Deliver with identifying tags to Owner's Representative by security shipment direct from hardware supplier. G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Electric Lightwave, Inc. 's name and registered with manufacturer. Door Hardware 08710 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. C. Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware with 2 years of documented experience. Supplier must have warehousing facilities in the Project's vicinity. D. Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to assist in the work of this section. The AHC must be available to Owner, Engineer, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation. 1. Require supplier to meet with Owner's Representative to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for requirements applicable to fire rated doors and frames. B. All Hardware on Fire -Rated Doors: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to match hardware schedule. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of intemal reinforcement for door hardware. B. Fumish templates for door and frame preparation. C. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. D. Coordinate Electric Lightwave, Inc.'s keying requirements during the course of the Work. E. Coordinate all work with that of security system contractor. Intent of work and system operation to be defined at Pre - Construction Conference and Pre - Installation Conference. Hardware /security system to work as a "complete unit" acceptable to Electric Lightwave, Inc. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty for door closers. Door Hardware 08710 - 2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 1.10 MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS A. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component. B. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer. 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide two extra key lock cylinders for each master keyed group. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. MANUFACTURE ID CODES: 2.02 ITEM DESCRIPTION A. BUTTS, PIVOTS AND SPECIAL HINGES 1. Hinge type shall be as listed. 2. Butt width listed is minimum. Provide proper width as necessary and required. Where no size is indicated, provide 4 1/2" x 4 1/2 ". 3. Provide nonremovable pins (NRP) for all outswinging exterior doors. 4. Provide number of hinges indicated, but not Tess than 3 hinges for each door leaf 90" or less in height. Add one additional hinge for every additional 30" of height. 5. intode nonremovable pins (NRP) for all outswinging exterior doors. 6. Hinge tips to be flat button and matching plug, finished to match hinge. B. LOCKS, LATCHES & CYLINDERS 1 Locks shall be subject to 3 separate master keying systems. 2. All cylinders shall be Schlage 6 pin. 3. Keying schedule will be approved by the Owner. All cylinders shall be factory combinated. 4. Fumish two keys per cylinder. Keys shall be cut as directed by the Owner. 5. All keys shall be delivered directly to the Owner's Representative. 6. Coordinate cylinder type to meet the requirements of devices made by other. 7. Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike with curved lip extension for each lock and latch. 8. All locks to have 2 3/4" backset. All locks and latches on labeled doors shall have UL listing. C. CLOSERS 1. Closers shall be sized as recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Closers shall be adjustable such that the door may be put into motion and swung to the full open position by a force not exceeding 8.5 pounds as required by ADA and the Washington State Handicap Regulations. 3. Closers shall be adjustable to close from an open position of 70 degrees to a point 3 inches from the latch in not less than 3 seconds as required by ADA and the Washington State Handicap Regulations. 4. Provide parallel arms for all overhead closers, unless otherwise scheduled. 5. All closers shall have a nonferrous cover without a manufacturer's trademark or name applied, embossed or exposed in any manner to the cover. 6. All closers to be attached to door with sex bolts. Sex bolts shall be finished to match Door Hardware 08710 - 3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility door hardware. 7. Provide drop plates where required by installation conditions. 8. Fumish closer key valves, lock wrench and booklet on maintenance. D. SMOKE SEALS 1. Smoke seals shall be bulb type with self - adhesive back. E. SILENCERS 1. Provide silencers for each metal door frame without integral or scheduled weatherstripping: 3 for each single door type, 4 for each double door type. Type equal to Glynn Johnson #64. 2. Silencers shall not be installed until after metal door frames have received their final coat of paint. F. FASTENERS 1. All hardware items shall be fumished complete with necessary fastening accessories, including machine screws and tampins for attaching hardware to concrete or masonry surfaces. 2. Pulls and other surface mounted hardware shall be thru bolted when recommended by door manufacturer. G. FINISH 1 The finish of all hardware in general SHALL be dull chrome US26D. 2. Door closers are to be painted with aluminum lacquer to match adjacent door hardware. 3. Kickplates shall be dull stainless steel US32D. 4. Pulls shall be dull stainless steel US32D. 5. Weatherstripping shall be natural mill finish aluminum. 2.03 HARDWARE GROUPS A. HW GROUP 1 VD 2 EA Power Transfer DL7 Hinges Reuse existing VD 1 EA Exit device EL33NL -OP 313 SC 1 EA Cylinder 20 -022 Q 2 EA Pull 521 -10" Closer Reuse existing OH Stop Reuse existing Threshold Reuse existing VD 2 EA Mag lock SLA4110 VD 2 EA Switch MS764 VD 1 EA Power supply PS872 VD 1 EA Motion sensor Scan II VD 1 EA Exit Devices EL3360 -313 VD 1 EA Mullion 5654 Coordinate with security system for wiring. B. HW GROUP 2 (NOT USED) ST 3 EA Hinges CB1900NRP 4.5 x 4.5 US26D SC 1 EA Passage D1 OS RHO LC 1 EA Closer arm 4010- 3077RA 1 EA Wall stop Door Hardware 08710 - 4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility VD 1 EA Mag lock DS4010 VD 1 EA Switch MS764 VD 1 EA Power supply PS871 VD 1 EA Motion sensor Scan 11 C. HW GROUP 3 ST 3 EA Hinges CB1900NRP 4.5 x 4.5 US26D SC 1 EA Passage set DIOS RHO LC 1 EA Closer 4111CNS P 1 EA Smokeseal S88D VD 1 EA Mag lock DS4010 Door 6 VD 1 EA Switch MS764 VD 1 EA Power supply PS871 VD 1 EA Motion sensor Scan II VD 1 EA Mag lock DS4050 Door 7 Q 1 EA Wall stop 302PT D. HW GROUP 4 (NOT USED) Reuse all existing hardware from relocated doors. E. HW GROUP 5 ST 3 EA Hinges CD1900 4.5 x 4.5 SC 1 EA Lockset D8OPD RHO LC 1 EA Closer 4011 Q 1 EA Wall stop 302PT F. HW GROUP 6 (NOT USED) ST 3 EA Hinges CB1900 4.5 x 4.5 SC 1 EA Passage set DIOS RHO Q 1 EA Wall stop 302PT P 1 EA Smokeseal S88D G. HW GROUP 7 (NOT USED) ST 3 EA Hinges CB1900 4.5 x 4.5 SC 1 EA Passage set DIOS RHO LC 1 EA Closer 4011 Q 1 EA Wall stop 302PT VD 1 EA Mag lock DS4010 VD 1 EA Switch MS764 VD 1 EA Power supply PS871 VD 1 EA Motion sensor Scan II H. HW GROUP 8 VD 1 EA Exit device 99E0 x 990NL Q 1 EA Floor stop 144 P 1 EA Astragal 3572SP VD 1 EA Mag lock DS4010 VD 1 EA Switch MS764 VD 1 EA Power supply PS871 VD 1 EA Motion sensor Scan II VD 1 EA Electric strike 6112 DS Reuse existing closer, hinges, threshold and weatherstrip. I. HW GROUP 9 (NOT USED) Hinges Reuse existing ST 1 EA Lockset D8OPD RHO Door Hardware 08710 - 5 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility LC 1 EA Closer arm (Reuse existing Q 1 EA Wall stop P 1 EA Smokeseal J. HW GROUP 10 ST 3 EA SC 1 EA LC 1 EA Q 1 EA P 1 EA HW GROUP 10A ST 3 EA SL 1 EA L 1 EA Q 1 EA P 1 Set K. HW GROUP 11 ST 3 EA SC 1 EA LC 1 EA Q 1 EA P 1 EA L. HW GROUP 12 ST 3 EA SC 1 EA LC 1 EA Q 1 EA P 1 EA VD 1 EA VD 1 EA VD 1 EA VD 1 EA M. HW GROUP 13 ST 6 EA VD 2 EA LC 2 EA P 2 EA VD 2 EA VD 2 EA VD 1 EA VD 1 EA VD 2 EA HW GROUP 13A ST 6 EA SL 1 EA GJ 1 Set GJ 1 EA P 1 EA L 2 EA Hinges Lockset Closer Wall stop Smokeseal Hinges Privacy lock Closer Wall stop Smoke seal Hinges Lockset Closer Wall stop Smokeseal Hinges Passage Closer Wall stop Smokeseal Mag lock Switch Power supply Motion sensor Hinges Exit devices Closers Smokeseals Mag locks Switches Power supply Motion sensor Power transfer Hinges Lock Flush bolts Coordinator Astragal Closers 4010- 3077RA closer cover and body) 302PT S88D CBI900 4.5 x 4.5 D8OPD RHO 4111 302PT S88D CB1900 -41/2 x4 % DYDS RHD 4011 302PT S88D CB1900 4.5 x 4.5 D8OPD RHO 4011 302PT S88D CB1900NRP 4.5 x 4.5 DIOS RHO 4011 302PT S88D DS4050 MS764 PS871 Scan 11 CB1900NRP 4.5 x 4.5 EL99L -F x 499F 4111 Cush S88D DS4010 MS764 PS872 Scan 11 EPT2 CB1900 -4 1/2 x 4'/ D8 -PD RHD FB31P COR2 x FB1 x BX 3575P x S88D 4111 Door Hardware 08710 - 6 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. P 1 Set Q 2 EA Smoke seal Wall stops S88D 302PT Tukwila Switch Facility N. HW GROUP 14 (NOT USED) P 1 EA Astragal 3452SP SC 1 EA Deadbolt B661P 626 Deadbolt to be mounted with keyed side inside building O. HW GROUP 15 ST 3 EA Hinges VD 1 EA Exit device SC 1 EA Cylinder LC 1 EA Closer P 1 EA Gasket VD 1 EA Mag lock VD 1 EA Power supply VD 1 EA Motion sensor VD 1 EA Switch VD 1 EA Electric strike P. HW GROUP 16 ST 1 EA VD 1 EA LC 1 EA Q 1 EA P 1 EA (NOT USED) Hinges Exit device Closer Wall stop Smokeseal Q. HW GROUP 17 (Overhead Doors) SC 1 EA Clyinder R. HW GROUP 18 (Padlocks — Provide 2) SC 1 EA Padlocks PART 3 EXECUTION CB1900NRP 4.5 x 4.5 99NL 20 -022 4111CNS S88D DS4010 PS871 Scan II MS764 6112DS CB1900NRP 4.5 x 4.5 99L -F -BE 4111 302PT S88D Verify w /overhead door supplier PL1001 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct characteristics. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. C. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item: 1. For steel doors and frames: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Steel Doors and Frames." Door Hardware 08710 - 7 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide an Architectural Hardware Consultant to inspect installation and certify that hardware and installation has been fumished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish. Door Hardware END OF SECTION 08710 - 8 07/07/98 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass and plastic glazing. B. Glazing compounds and accessories 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI Z97.1 — American National Standard for Glazing Materials Used in Buildings — Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 1984 (R1994). B. ASTM C 1172 — Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass; 1996. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 — Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. 1.04 PRE - INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.05 WARRANTY A. See Section 01780 — Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for delamination of laminated glass and replacement of same. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.01 FLAT GLASS MATERIALS A. Safety Glass: glazing film as indicated; tempered at required locations, in insulating units as indicated on the drawings. 1. Laminated with 0.060 inch thick plastic interlayer; comply with ASTM C 1172, as indicated. B. Wired Glass: Clear, diamond pattern. 1. Diagonal mesh of woven stainless steel wire. 2. % inch grid size. 3. Polished both sides. 4. % inch thick. 2.02 GLAZING ACCESSORIES Glazing 08800 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility A. Provide all applicable glazing accessories for a complete, sealed installation equal to existing conditions. Finished installation shall match the existing condition. PART 3EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove existing sealed insulating glazing units. If undamaged, return to building owner. B. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install retrofitted glass in entrance /storefront systems (including doors) as specified by aluminum storefront system manufacturer, dry glazed, using continuous glazing gaskets with welded joints and corners. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove labels after work is complete B. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces. Glazing END OF SECTION 08800 - 2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal stud wall framing. B. Metal channel ceiling framing. C. Gypsum wallboard. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Building framing system and Gypsum sheathing. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract: 1. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single- Source Responsibility for Steel Framing: Obtain steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies from a single manufacturer. B. Single- Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board and other panel products from a single manufacturer. C. Single- Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer. D. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years of experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. C. Handle gypsum board to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal comer beads and trim. Gypsum Board Assemblies 09260 - 1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F. Do not exceed 95 deg F when using temporary heat sources. B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces, as required, for drying joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire rated assemblies as indicated on drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS - GYPSUM BOARD AND RELATED PRODUCTS A. Domtar Gypsum. B. Georgia- Pacific Corp.. C. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.. D. United States Gypsum Co.. 2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS A. Non - Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, size and gage to comply with ASTM C 754 at spacing indicated; maximum deflection L/240 at 5 psf. 1. Studs: C shaped with knurled faces. 2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs. 3. Ceiling Channels: C shaped. 4. Furring: Hat - shaped sections, minimum depth of 3/4 inch. B. Ceiling Hangers: ASTM C 754. 2.03 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS A. Standard Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2. Edges: tapered edges. B. Fire Rated Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36; Type X, UL or WH rated; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Edges: tapered edges. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Joint Materials: ASTM C 475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. 1. Ready -mixed vinyl -based joint compound. 2. Powder -type vinyl -based joint compound. 3. Chemical hardening type compound. Gypsum Board Assemblies 09260 - 2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility B. Screws: ASTM C 1002; self - drilling type; cadmium- plated for exterior locations. C. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place. D. Trim Accessories: Comer beads edge trim, and control joints complying with ASTM 01047 and requirements indicated below: 1. Material: Formed metal (galvanized after fabrication), plastic, or galvanized metal combined with paper. 2. Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C 1047: a. Cornerbead on outside comers, unless otherwise indicated. b. LC -bead with both face and back flanges; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use LC -beads for edge trim unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. 3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Metal Framing: Comply with ASTM C 754 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Studs: Space studs as permitted by standard. 1. Extend stud framing to ceiling where indicated. Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling framing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Extend stud framing through ceiling to structure above only where indicated. Maintain clearance under structural building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. Provide deflection head track as indicated. C. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not less than double studs at jambs. D. Blocking: Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures. Bolt or screw steel channels to studs. 3.03 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 840. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. B. Single -Layer Fire - Rated: Install gypsum board vertically, with edges and ends occurring over firm bearing. C. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of all gypsum board except face layer of non -rated double -layer assemblies, which may be installed by means of adhesive lamination. D. Moisture Protection: Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board and exterior gypsum soffit board with sealant. Gypsum Board Assemblies 09260 - 3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 3.04 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated. 1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet long. B. Comer Beads: Install at extemal comers, using longest practical lengths. C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated. 3.05 JOINT TREATMENT A. Finish all gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C 840 Level 4. B. Finish gypsum board in scheduled areas in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C 840 . C. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and comers to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. 2. Taping, filling, and sanding is not required at surfaces behind adhesive applied ceramic tile and fixed cabinetry. 3.06 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. 3.07 FINISH LEVEL SCHEDULE A. Level 1: Above finished ceilings concealed from view. B. Level 2: Utility areas and areas behind cabinetry. C. Level 3: Walls scheduled to receive textured wall finish. D. Level 4: Walls and ceilings scheduled to receive flat or eggshell paint finish. E. Level 5: Walls and ceilings scheduled to receive semi -gloss or gloss paint finish. Gypsum Board Assemblies END OF SECTION 09260 - 4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 09511 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B. Acoustical units. C. Special ceiling panels. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components and acoustical units. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Ceiling material to be supplied by a single supplier. Suspension shall be supplied by a single supplier. 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain temperature requirements as recommended by the manufacturer.. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. B. Install acoustical units after interior wet work is dry. 1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 2 percent (2 %) of total acoustical unit area of each type of acoustical unit and suspension system for Electric Lightwave, Inc." use in maintenance of project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Manufacturers: Armstrong or approved equal (if applicable), as indicated on drawings. Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 09511 -1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility B. Special Ceiling Panels; Kermite, FRP Board. Factory cut and integral color, color to be black to match suspension system. C. Acoustical Units — General: ASTM E 1264, Class A. 2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S) A. Suspension Systems - General: ASTM C 635; die cut and interlocking components, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips as required. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified. B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid. 1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L- shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of grid. C. Touch -up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. 3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636, ASTM E 580, and manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section. B. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum deflection of 1:360. C. Lay out system to a balanced grid design with edge units no less than 50 percent of acoustical unit size. D. Install after major above - ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. E. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. F. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. G. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead Toad to exceed deflection capability. H. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each comer, or support components independently. Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 09511 -2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility I. Do not eccentrically Toad system or induce rotation of runners. J. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other interruptions. 1. Install with continuous gasket. 2. Use longest practical lengths. 3. Overlap comers. K. Form expansion joints as detailed. Form to accommodate plus or minus 1 inch movement. Maintain visual closure. 3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL ANS SPECIAL CEILING UNITS A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. C. Lay directional patterned units with pattern parallel to longest room axis. D. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces. E. Install units after above - ceiling work is complete. F. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents. G. Cutting Acoustical Units: 1. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim. 2. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges. 3. Double cut and field paint exposed reveal edges. H. Where round obstructions occur, provide preformed closures to match perimeter molding. I. Lay acoustical insulation for a distance of 48 inches either side of acoustical partitions as indicated. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees. END OF SECTION Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 09511 -3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Vinyl composition tile flooring. B. Static dissipative tile flooring. C. Resilient base. D. Vinyl transition strips. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire performance ratings as follows: 1. Critical radiant flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, per ASTM E 648. 2. Flame spread: Maximum 75, per ASTM E 84. 3. Smoke developed: Maximum 450, per ASTM E 84. 4. Smoke density: Maximum 450, per ASTM E 662. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract: 1. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions. 2. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Architect/Engineer's initial selection. 3. Verification Samples: Submit two samples, 4 1/2" x 4 1/2" inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each resilient flooring product specified. 4. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re- waxing. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single- Source Responsibility: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of tile from a single source with resources to provide products of quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide floor tile with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products per ASTM test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq cm or more per ASTM E 648. 2. Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E 662. Resilient Flooring 09650 - 1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain temperature in storage area as recommended by manufacturer. B. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 55 degrees F (13 degrees C). 1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide one box per 50 boxes of flooring installed, 10 lineal feet of base for each 500 lineal feet installed, of each type and color specified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS - TILE FLOORING A. Vinyl Composition Tile: ASTM F 1066: 1. Size: 12 x 12 inch. 2. Thickness: 0.125 inch. 3. Pattern: Putty #129. 4. Manufacturers: a. Mannington, Essentials . b. Substitutions: Not permitted. B. Tile Flooring - Static dissipative 1. Size: 12 x 12 inch. 2. Thickness: .125 inch. 3. Pattern: Armor Gran #5195. 4. Manufacturers: a. Armstrong, Excelon . b. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.02 MATERIALS - BASE A. Base: Vinyl; top set coved. 1. Height: 4 inch. 2. Length: Provide continuous roll material. 3. Color: Gray #50. 4. Accessories: premolded extemal comers and end stops. 5. Manufacturers: a. Roppe. b. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer. B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer. C. Moldings and Edge Strips: Same material as vinyl base; manufactured by Roppe. D. Filler for Coved Base: Plastic. E. Sealer and Wax: Types and quantities as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Resilient Flooring 09650 - 2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility Flooring contractor shall prepare, clean and apply floor wax in quantities recommended by manufacturer as initial maintenance after installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub -floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified in Section 03300 and are ready to receive resilient flooring. B. Verify that sub -floor surfaces are dust -free, and free of substances which would impair bonding of adhesive materials to sub -floor surfaces. C. Verify that concrete sub -floor surfaces are ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within the following limits: 1. Moisture emission rate: Not greater than 3 lb per 1000 sq ft per 24 hours when tested using calcium chloride moisture test kit for 72 hours. 2. Alkalinity: pH range of 5 -9. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove sub -floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub -floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. B. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. C. Clean substrate. D. Apply primer as required to prevent "bleed- through" or interference with adhesion by substances that cannot be removed. Apply primer to all surfaces to receive resilient flooring according to manufacturer's directions. 3.03 INSTALLATION - TILE FLOORING A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed. C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. D. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. E. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern. F. Install tile to ashlar pattern. Allow minimum 1/2 full size tile width at room or area perimeter. G. Where floor finishes are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under centerline of door. H. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated. Secure metal strips after installation of flooring with stainless steel screws. I. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to Resilient Flooring 09650 - 3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility produce tight joints. J. Install flooring in recessed floor access covers. Maintain floor pattern. 3.04 INSTALLATION - BASE A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints. B. Miter intemal corners. At external comers, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use premolded units. C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions. 3.05 CLEANING AND WAXING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Flooring contractor shall prepare and clean floors and apply floor wax in quantities recommended by manufacturer as initial maintenance after installation. 3.06 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation. Resilient Flooring END OF SECTION i 09650 - 4 07/07/98 1 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility SECTION 09900 PAINTS AND COATINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints, stains, vamishes, and other coatings. C. Painting materials and methods for conduit identification specified in Section 16075. D. See Schedule - Surfaces to be Finished, at end of Section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 — Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. In addition, submit the following: 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years experience. C. Single Source for materials: Obtain coating materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. C. Minimum Application Temperature for Vamish Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. D. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid - height at substrate surface. Paints and Coatings 09900 - 1 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Supply 1 gallon of each color and type; store in a location as directed by the Owner's Representative. B. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers - Paints: 1. Base Manufacturer: Columbia Paint & Coatings. 2. Pratt & Lambert . 3. PPG Industries. 4. Pittsburgh Paints. B. Manufacturers - Stains: C. Manufacturers - Primer Sealers: 1. Base Manufacturer: Columbia Paint & Coatings 2. Pratt & Lambert. 3. PPG Industries. 4. Pittsburgh Paints. D. Substitutions: Submit product data for approval of Owner's Representative. 2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, except field - catalyzed coatings. Prepare pigments: 1. To a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating. 2. For good flow and brushing properties. 3. Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR A. Primers: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory- formulated primers that are compatible with the substrates and finish coats indicated. B. Finish Paint: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory- formulated finish coat materials that are compatible with the substrate and undercoats indicated. 2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified; commercial quality. B. Patching Material: Latex filler. C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler. Paints and Coatings 09900 - 2 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Test shop - applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. D. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Concrete Floors: 8 percent. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Appurtenances: Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. B. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects. C. Marks: Seal with shellac those which may bleed through surface finishes. D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tetra - sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. E. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. F. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent, per SSPS — SP -1 standard specification. Apply coat of stain blocking primer Columbia Acry-Prime or equal. 3.03 APPLICATION A. GENERAL 1. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. 3. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved. 4. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. 5. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 6. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured 7. Apply additional coats of undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film of of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, and crevices receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or Paints and Coatings 09900 - 3 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to the manufacturer's directions. Use of spray equipment is restricted to unoccupied areas. D. Minimum coating thickness: Apply materials no thinner than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with specified requirements. 3.04 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Refer to Section 15075 and Section 16075 for schedule of color coding of equipment, duct work, piping, and conduit. B. Paint shop -primed equipment, where indicated. C. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. D. Finish equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed duct work in utility areas in colors according to the color coding scheme indicated. E. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 3.05 CLEANING A. Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. B. After completing painting, clean glass and paint- spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.06 SCHEDULE - SURFACES TO BE FINISHED A. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items fully factory- finished unless specifically noted. 2. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels. B. Paint the surfaces described below under Schedule - Paint Systems. C. Mechanical and Electrical: Use paint systems defined for the substrates to be finished. 1. Paint all insulated and exposed pipes occurring in finished areas to match background surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Paint shop - primed items occurring in finished areas. 3. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces. 4. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels. Paints and Coatings 09900 - 4 07/07/98 Electric Lightwave, Inc. Tukwila Switch Facility 3.07 SCHEDULE - PAINT SYSTEMS A. METAL WORK - INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR 1. Paint all exposed ferrous metal work, including hollow metal doors and frames, other than factory finished surfaces. 2. Spot paint all abraded surfaces before first coat is applied. If priming of iron, steel, and metal doors and frames has been done by others, omit first coat. 3. Metal work shall be given a three coat application as follows: a. First Coat: Rust inhibitive metal primer b. Second Coat: Alkyd enamel c. Third Coat: Alkyd semigloss enamel B. GYPSUM BOARD 1. Provide three coat application of gypsum board walls as follows: a. First Coat: latex enamel undercoat b. Second Coat: Acrylic latex eggshell enamel c. Third Coat: Acrylic latex eggshell stippling enamel, heavily stippled C. PRECAST CONCRETE 1. Provide three coat application of interior exposed precast concrete wall panels and underside of precast concrete floor panels as follows: a. First Coat: Latex primer sealer b. Second Coat: Interior latex c. Third Coat: Interior latex D. ROOF DECK, JOISTS AND JOIST GIRDERS 1. Provide two coat application of exposed roof deck, joists and joist girders as follows: a. First Coat: Alkyd enamel b. Second Coat: Alkyd Semi -gloss enamel. E. ELECTRICAL AND TELEPHONE BACKBOARDS 1. Provide three coat application of exposed plywood backboards as follows: a. First Coat: Latex primer b. Second Coat: Acrylic latex eggshell enamel c. Third Coat: Acrylic latex egshell stippling enamel, heavily stippled F. HARDBOARD: 1. Provide three coat application of exposed hardboard as follows: a. First Coat: Acry-Prime stain blocking primer b. Second Coat:: Acrylic latex eggshell enamel c. Third Coat: Acrylic latex eggshell stippling enamel, heavily stippled END OF SECTION Paints and Coatings 09900 - 5 07/07/98 MARR SHAFFER & MIYAMOTO • Consulting Structural Engineers QZ6- 07- j, Typical Suspended Ceiling Seismic Bracing Calculations Job Name: Electric Light Wave Tukwila, Washington Client: Acoustical Design Inc. 5820 South 194 St. Kent, Washington 98032 Contact: Jim Gibson a Design Criteria: 1) Code: 2) Grid: 3) Zone: 4) Occupancy: 5) Wire: 6) Partitions: Splay Wire Summary: The maximum area to be supported by each 4- way splay wire group is 256.00 square feet with the . st splay wire first splayed wire group within six (6) feet of the perimeter of the ceiling, and spaced at sixtee (16) feet by sixteen (16) feet on center. Page: 1 Date: 10/29/98 Phone Number: (800) 777 9583 Fax Number: (253) 395 4332 1994 U.B.C. Standard 25 -2 (Volume 3 of 1994 U.B.C.) Armstrong (7301 main, XL7342 cross) Zone 3 (z =0.3) Standard Occupancy Structure (I =1.0) 12 GA. Brace Wires Ceiling Does Not Brace Partitions. Partitions are braced by others, independent from ceiling. Basis For Design: The following calculations are to determine the maximum ceiling area which can be laterally supported by one, four - wire splay brace group, using Armstrong (7301 main, XL7342 cross) ceiling grid. The following conditions are considered: 1) Ceiling located in seismic Zone 3 (z =0.3) 2) Standard Occupancy Structure (I =1.0) 3) 12 GA. Brace Wires (55 ksi yield stress) 4) Ceiling weight excludes weight of partitions. Partitions are braced by others, independent from ceiling. RECEIVED NOV 24 1998 DEVELOPMENT There are four wires per splay wire bracing group. The wires make an angle to the horizontal plane of no more than 45°. An earthquake can come from any direction, therefore, the total force delivered to any splay wire group must be taken by one wire. System Weight: Ceiling (code minimum) [psf]: = 4.00 E Wt. [psfj 4.00 MARR SHAFFER & MIYAMOTO Consulting Structural Engineers Job Name: Electric Light Wave Allowable Force For 12 GA. Brace Wires : FY 55.0 ksi. Ft= 0.6 *(55.0)= 33.0 ksi. A wire= rz *(d)2 /4.0= Page: 2 Date: 10/29/98 0.00882 in 22 Allowable diagonal force to wire = A,,,Qe * F, * (1.33) = 388.08 lbs. Allowable horizontal force to wire = 0.707 *A • * FL * (1.33) = 274.41 lbs. Allowable Force For Connection To Structure Above: Use 1/4" Diameter x 1 -3/4" Embedment Eve Screw to connect to the structure above. Allowable diagonal force to connection = 401.0 lbs. Allowable horzontal force to connection = 283.5 lbs. Allowable Force on Ceiling Runners: Armstrong (7301 main, XL7342 cross) Grid Type 4 Splay Wire Test Values [lbs] Control Splay Wire and Connection Design Value 3 lbs Main Tee Cross Tee Test Tension 1 Comp. Tension 1 Comp. Value'" Armstrong (7301 main, 12 GA. 446.70 j 509.30 1 300.00 J 300.00 300.00 274.41 274.41 NOTES: 1. Since one- half of the runners are in tension and one- half are in compression, multiply test value by 2. 2. Factor of Safety = 2.0 (i.e., Divide by 2.0) 3. Smaller value of "Control Test Value" and "Splay Wire and Connection" values. 4. USG RXC Cross Tees must be used with USG RXM main tees. Summary: Since the Control Test Value is greater than the Splay Wire Capacity, the allowable load for the wire governs. Lateral Force Determination: Fp= ZIC,Wp Zone 3 (z =0.3) Standard Occupancy Structure (1 =1.0) C ,= 0.75 W, Area * ( Weight ) Let Fp = Design Value in table above. Amax = Fp Z I Cp (Weight) Allowable Area Determination: Armstrong (7301 main, XL7342 cross) ceiling grid braced with 12 GA. wire , located in Zone 3 (z.3) , in a Standard Occupancy Structure (I =1.0) .Ceiling Does Not Brace Partitions. Allowable Area A m,: = 304.90 ft2 >1= Actual Area A= 256.00 ft2 o.k. MARR SHAFFER & MIYAMOTO Consulting Structural Engineers Job Name: Electric Light Wave Compression Post Calculation: Page: 3 Date: 10/29/98 USE Double 3 -1/2 "x 18 GA. Metal Studs (MSMA 350XC18 or equal) for Maximum Length of 22' -0" See double stud detail below. (See page 5 for calculation) P= 0.3* 1.0 *0.75 *4.0psf* 16.0ft* 16.0ft = 230 # KL /rx = 22.0(12)/1.4002 = 189 <200 o.k.!!! i= 0.91 Properties for 3 -1/2" x 18 GA. Metal Stud (MSMA 350XC18): Joist Depth = 3 -1/2" Flange Width = 1-5/8" Stiffener Lip = 3/8" Minimum 3/8" min. t1 -5/8" for XC studs # 8 Self Drilling Self Tapping Sheet Metal Screws at 12 inches on center along height of compression post. _ Double Stud Detail 1986 AISI Specification w/1989 Addenda DATE: 10/29/98 MARR SHAFFER & MIYAMOTO, INC. Electric Light Wave SECTION DESIGNATION: 350XC18 Single INPUT PROPERTIES: Web Height = 3.500 'in Top Flange = 1.625 in Bottom Flange = 1.625 in Stiffening Lip = 0.375 in Punchout Width = 1.500 in Steel Thickness = 0.0451 in Inside Corner Radius = 0.0938 in Yield Stress, Fy = 33.0 ksi Fy With Cold -Work, Fya = 33.0 ksi Punchout Length = 4.000 in OUTPUT PROPERTIES: Effective Section Properties, Strong Axis Neutral Axis from Top Fiber (Ycg) Moment of Inertia for Deflection (Ixx) Section Modulus (Sxx) Allowable Bending Moment (Ma) Gross Section Properties of Full Section, Strong Axis Neutral Axis from Top Fiber (Ycg) Moment of Inertia (Ixx) Cross Sectional Area (A) Radius of Gyration (Rx) Section Properties, Weak Axis Gross Neutral Axis (Xcg) From Web Face Gross Moment of Inertia (lyy) Radius of Gyration (Ry) Other Section Property Data Member Weight per Foot of Length Allowable Shear Force In Web (Unpunched) Allowable Shear Force In Web (Punched) Pao for use in Interaction Equation C5 -2 Torsional Properties Dist. from Shear Center to Neutral Axis (Xo) St. Venant torsion Constant (J x 1000) Warping Constant (Cw) Radii of Gyration (Ro) Torsional Flexural Constant (Beta) a. 1.7848 in 0.6296 in ^4 0.3435 in^ 3 565.71 Ft -Lb 1.7500 in 0.6296 in ^4 0.3211 in ^2 1.4002 in 0.5074 in 0.1109 in ^4 0.5877 in 1.0927 Ib /ft 1762.28 Ib 931.49 Ib 3788 Ib - 1.2532 in 0.2177 in ^4 0.2806 in ^6 1.9689 in 0.5949 Project: Electric Light Wave Date: 10/29/98 MARR SHAFFER & MIYAMOTO, INC. R1 Section : 350XC18 Single Maxo = Moment of Inertia, I = 0.63 inA4 Va = Wind or Earthquake Factor Included ? YES Flexural and Deflection Check 22.00 565.7 Ft -Lb 1762.3 Lb Page 1/1 R2 Mmax Mmax/ Mpos Bracing Ma(Brc) Mpos/ Deflection Span (Ft -Lb) Maxo (Ft -Lb) (in) (Ft -Lb) Ma(Brc) (in) Ratio Left Cantilever 0.0 0.000 0.0 Full 565.7 0.000 0.000 L/0 Center Span 0.0 0.000 0.0 Full 565.7 0.000 0.000 U0 Right Cantilever 0.0 0.000 0.0 Full 565.7 0.000 0.000 L/0 Combined Bending and Web Crippling Reaction or Load Brng Pa Mmax Intr. Stiffen Pt Load P (Ib) (in) (Ib) (Ft -Ib) Value Req'd ? R1 0.0 1.0 323.7 0.0 0.00 No R2 0.0 1.0 323.7 0.0 0.00 No Combined Bending and Shear Reaction or Vmax Mmax Va Intr. Intr. Pt Load (Ib) (Ft -Lb) Factor VNa M /Ma Unstiffen Stiffen R1 0.0 0.0 1.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA R2 0.0 0.0 1.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA Combined Bending and Axial Load Axial Ld Bracing (in) Allow Ld Intr. Span (Lb) KyLy KtLt (Lb) P /Pa Value Left Cantilever 230.0 (c) None None 6345.3 (c) 0.04 0.00 Center Span 230.0 (c) None None 190.4 (c) 1.21 0.91 Right Cantilever 230.0 (c) None None 6345.3 (c) 0.04 0.00 bHARR SHAFFER M{4RNEERSMOTO $TRUCTUR&L E4G, I 1C. JoB ne,' -r1-G 11 JOB NUMBER at(' 2 CALL. BY L hGYG.�/� J �4 , / Ili/`.{ 1^ SHEET No. DATE !01 4( Ile) : ecy r 6-7 (4/1� ,r • r. 1 i { • i t t 1.:A 1 • : _ t j I. - .• . -. ... i _? .4 »' ... • { COMPRESSION POST PER PAGE 3. ATTACH TO MAIN RUNNERS WITH 1/4' MACHINE BOLT AND TO STRUCTURE WITH 4 — #10 x 2 in. WOOD SCREWS. COMPRESSION POST SHALL NOT REPLACE HANGER WIRE. TYPICAL: 12 GA. VFRTIcAL HANGER WIRE © 4 —0 EA. WAY W/MIN. 3 TIGHT TURNS IN 1 1/2" BOTH ENDS OF WIRE 12 GA. BRACING WIRE W/ MIN. 4 TIGHT TURNS IN 1 1/2" BOTH ENDS OF WIRE. TYPICAL. SEE PAGE 1 FOR SPACING. 2" MAX TYP. FROM BRACING WIRES TO CROSS RUNNERS CROSS RUNNER MAIN RUNNER TYPICAL SUSPENDED CEILING SEISMIC BRACING. LOAD SCALE: S1/32 NO SCALE VRRR SHAFFER & NIYAMOTO STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS INC. OVER 50 YEARS 1661 GARDEN HWY #101 SACRAMENTO, CA 95833 TEL 916.567.0793 FAX 916.567.1044 msm ® msm 1 .com ELECTRIC LIGHT WAVE. TUKWILA, WASHINGTON ACOUSTICAL DESIGN INC. DATE: 10 -29 -98 SHEET: ,SK102998. =02 iw ROOF UPGRADE FOR MECHANICAL UNITS TUKWILA, WA ELECTRIC LIGHTWAVE Structural Calculations JULY 9, 1998 1:;213 40;i. sge5 Prepared By: PPL COFFMAN EER West 201 North River Dr., Suite 510 Spokane, WA 99201 (509) 328 -2994 Dq0 - 0246 CITY OF TUKWILA J U L 1 0 1998 PERMIT CENTER PPELARFEFEWP4 SPOKANE, WASHINGTON PROJECT r 1_1" - Tt k U ,'Gc JOB NO. 61&/5 3 MADE BY .ICJ % DATE 6f/i4/Me PAGE OF t .11z4 _0 I c J.1 2 j Otro 711 • /001 X /)0 N�tz240I'4 .) ShLc / c/ -reb ochov /oeCt 1-6 el r7 117 4. r��Y)i rear ri cy al I-he s N e f elcel f o i1 A I ovG. ramea{ S kC I aar 3paCed 5 .Y2' apt) r*) Cv(IC /'/u)r s' 1 Cltc�C,, 6'!j {7'clinl Skel beams, ' 0/16rc +6 Ti'l-1 -L,'p walls cilok) j b c d weal. vlosll sblyd wtt-h Q kDw (1 wiidot -US meAr • +he h p. G,)a lr!S havt mare w�rrdvU -�5 w/ 1I' -wide shear pant 1S 6efwec h. x 12' ebII -up dwes 64e%, C0ne1e 4-6 Slab vn Jo ra d w/ a -46.1-u er46.es, eve cles • eev id he vs ec/ 6� hud 6r no It ou.� h Coro ' Po;)-1 S/i:1es 61) rridj 2/3 G /Drz +u. a 114&11-74 32' Alm ,ecGe, w/ ICSSer ySlop G Eli cic. ra 5 Let v!'C I-4112) ,l 3/616 Lo e cl /3U 5 0-04 rcOa Design Loud /.rve Load = 25 p Dead L Qa cf 15p.s7( D r. ' KLV: i Gt .i'✓./ • • 4:0 :0”:111x41404,0101W VW ifi aPA �w��ww *mow Cs� P t 1 I/VIM tote ...�.1.. tp* 6 \ I ;F 4O> ' .. :— <34•- 5o' <36' -0" 36' -0"> A -5.0 ' 34' —O"> 6 4 x371/2 GLB _rL + 7Ae (Fv =190 psi) J -5.0B t1i • 34'—O'} [34' -0" 63'4x371/2 GLB TRUSS 8' -0' /8 O.C. " DG H 0 34' -0" 64'4 (Fv: 63'4: s J -5.0A (Fv = 31' -9 "] 31' -1 1 1/2 "] 513 x25V2 GLB 31'— 32' -0" A -5.0 ).S. D.S. NOTE: CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY WEIGHTS & LOCATIONS OF ALL MECHANICAL UNITS Sc SPRINKLER LINES PRIOR TO SUBMITTING ROOF TRUSS & GIRDER. SHOP DRAWINGS. M -5.0 <34' -0" �Ukboilet (t)01 FVCi;;'i PIcti Petect meckniial OnEIS r c' �f i� r 4,L0G 7iUI A J i .1 . _ _ ,, ter,, :, �, / ez e ,- / , , , ► 1 _ � 1 31 D.S. ,/ PPLCOFFMAN SPOKANE, WASHINGTON PROJECT C T 1.-.T - ht )l • JOB NO. 96 63 MADE BY DATE (D /2' //Q 6 PAGE OF xt's -tins R01) Rran e AhG, / s�.� • 5,10" Cox Plywood Shea- lhi,'i�. 2 ' co S1-i. 1e ,,` r G; 24/ G • S Y6 x f°1 %z G(v la. n J /O rei_ fi 31-r V# C l vvt9 . Grid • Girl e r S : (I, ' /q k 33 6-1-1 51)Ct in 35 ' - (o (/ k 31 Y GL(3 Spar (04/ "-Co C(3eorns bYt' suppo /f ColJp7r7S 1'-v + % -(p) A.CIIco' Roof 1'Vetell; Shea-111;4i (Ipsi /4(5/e) _ 0 Lo Fsr fo,$ 7 - p. p U i'Sf 2x Lo 51-i- f616rs y„ o.c. / 0 (;"'"Y. I, y, Roof (3 -1)ly ) 1.6 pr. //I e r5 ' I, U 1, Duc-is 0,5 Cis. /i.,9 g,q? .ps.f -* 9Dps1 M T E llowez ne_e /5ps. - 9.O s/ (opsic Ca.17tlev;?tr. PPL4 OFFMAN E. I N E E R S SPOKANE, WASHINGTON PROJECT EL T- %u /S bo f JOB NO. 98/63 MADE BY 1J DATE 2 e PAGE OF 015 i 5 3 s.T/ ,i q (v r, trJ elrH �or 4•/1 S1)a.ti TL = 29 / pg L/1,0 =413 /"MME( UN /T SIZ .S • l31.5 " 33 /1c," (.1olt(pix 3;.1o04) 1/15"x e-I 3 3/h„," ( I i .7c x 3, (o of ) e391/414 x 517/to" (� <r ' x 41.96 6315/6k x y (P5/6 " ((D , V ' )`" .E Ck C /i?DE/,) 111 1 A JD/ 770iVAL• L 04 v. I'm 2(e Span GI U4et r -r b1a/rl (p 3 /el` x .33 4- 3/y ?b = 2JOOPsi' 1=�1 = (P50 p.51. i= v 190 /pi , %ecd.. t-vvc ` ')1,7,7.)oi,s ; C /c q, 0 ps /. = > C 01,5c9;, l%,t.)rsA I0041 - Cr /+ 25)(p/)(3t3' -qq) 6)40 00'tb LOG d P -L .i 0.61. ti :.! 1.0'70 1,0 (Oti. 14:f 5 21S Zt5 Z i,.i Z en-terco ( 6 / S'/, CV t rs iVtss okA PPL Coffman Engineers 201 W. North River Drive, Suite 510 Spokane, WA 99201 (509) 328 -2994, (509) 328 -2999 fax Title : Dsgnr: Description : Scope: Job # Date: 11:12AM, 25 JUN 98 General Timber Beam Page 1 General Information Description Glulam Beam Analysis Section Name 6.75x33.0 Beam Width 6.750 in Beam Depth 33.000 in Member Type GluLam LL & ST Act Together Load Dur. Factor Beam End Fixity Wood Density 1.000 Pin -Pin 34.000 pcf Center Span 35.00 ft Lu 8.00 ft Left Cantilever ft Lu 0.00 ft Right Cantilever ft Lu 0.00 ft Fb Allow 2,400.0 psi Fv Allow 190.0 psi Fc Allow 650.0 psi E 1,800.0 ksi Point Loads ea • oa Live Load ...distance Summary 9,600.0 • . es Ibs 2.000 10.000 18.000 26.000 34.000 0.000 0.000 ft Overstressed in Bending I Span= 35.00ft, Beam Width = 6.750in x Depth = 33.in, Ends are Pin -Pin Max Stress Ratio 1.055 : 1 Maximum Moment 211.5 k -ft Maximum Shear'' 1.5 25.1 k Allowable 200.4 k -ft Allowable 42.3 k Max. Positive Mom 211.51 k -ft a 17.920 ft Shear: © Left 25.52 k Max. Negative Moment 0.00 k -ft a 35.000 ft © Right 26.46 k Max @ Left Support 0.00 k -ft Camber. @ Left 0.000 in Max @ Right Support 0.00 k -ft @ Center 1.856 in Max. M allow 200.43 Reactions... @ Right 0.000 in fb 2,071.74 psi fv 112.61 psi Left DL 25.52k Max 25.52c Fb 1,963.22 psi Fv 190.00 psi Right DL 26.46 k Max 26.46 k Deflections Center Span... Dead Load Total Load Deflection -1.237 in -1.237 in ...Location 17.500 ft 17.500 ft ...Length /Defl 339.4 339.42 8 Left Cantilever... Deflection ...Length /Defl Right Cantilever... Dead Load 0.000 in 0.0 Total Load 0.000 in 0.0 Deflection 0.000 in 0.000 in ...Length/Defl 0.0 0.0 • c: u een rode -s = i - i- •eam.ecw •v, 1.1 V -1 un- PPLACOFFM►N E. I N E E R S SPOKANE, WASHINGTON MADE BY , IF DATE (0 2V 9 PAGE OF PROJECT ELT - 77)16A 11 JOB NO. 96/5 Cflrev Ex. /sr/A /c7' F J(r/"s' /-6 p' E1t)l -;I 770 /,'!I. 1- 6 D x /2 LeU9er. W/ 51- 3/4 "ld rl/)Q ?S,) /7 1Jo115 @ P.'r1,'n /v" EX,o. 130 /4 / a J . eer) Pur 114 • 1/x12 Lecict1' nerds f j'f,riry _! gel r<,'h,vn A..!1 sh.cc,r V- (qio ) (6') t (S {Q U - b q00-1)111 7 1(00 erg ►skn 11cj i ;iCt n n(1c.11'11., er Do�l�l eCete A\. 5iti `�,,��f: i 1 Q -i(( 3 `/2 '' fV er11}- L.e.p( !, ` 3 /�r 4 )u I4- Cy 1.0 51.4e. 4--1-kt bv/ls 401-- ci�1 yned -.he /re f � 4)4 oad CDT- L ie ff Lo cI �i) ledge ?"jig,' % "3 vl y 9 U /2 = yf306 zP,uv o7(.0 ( 4i) y30 h • )'YI u S i p o v; c( aG c 1.h`ori rn ej. 45 or dew con e.e. t o y?. PP F ELACREFIMktil ERIls SPOKANE, WASHINGTON NEW .1)/57 S1Z /NG- PROJECT ELT- rukiA):16() JOB NO. qt3/53 MADE BY ti../ E DATE 7 f; • tt ei SHI(1,4 S RE-G1',0 22 (JEvg PAGE OF Spar) 3 331-4/ • .& 3<1' Spar) 22"I e'il• co R. p 14 LI'Vt LOGlat: (0,);' 3.Q' Pur coiq 104 Pole 21 nisi-- 20 " Tot's+ L o h is tin /Is = ÷ 25) 260 1,1- 15 15 2(6 i 1 & PrOpat /• 22" Tr 4,1 2 " Tits Mry,Ay e41'.; Mc I c)ecd 0( £, 57? 3q(Da- (1; 'ILI .51) 44. 69/9 (Liti,31) 26,26 4- 6,66 (106)(16) tvlj 2(4.961 1, FPLACOFFNAN E I 1 N E E R S SPOKANE, WASHINGTON PROJECT ELI ` Tu e,lt)I I L,..: JOB NO. q131 3 MADE BY JJ E NE tAl JO /ST 5/ Z! CCoNT ) De nt ch. bn � 1,) L �r 36,1 rt por4-ion 5 (II 0., � /12 3bq (3Q1n7x1U (1\ load 2. 0, 63 in 6a 1lo W ' 1.1i in (o k> CoNWVEC (IOt\f Ft)( / Gnl 015T Ex 1ST We,°COX 2 u to NA-/ LC • 11 DATE CGr ;L'G� PAGE OF 22" EX isr1N & PREcAST £. G G 5i0 `,v /(2) 3/y uS l�XP A-NC- -fcHL5 PJ /41 .5/diF1"1B'D *7-7-r-- • As eeD'D EY isT Z' -0 2v4 (31.tt,- w / C'.1) i 1 Ni a To 15-r t i 3 Y3 %A1 w /( I) /?` 11-1-KU 8oLT PPL4COFFMAN SPOKANE, WASHINGTON PROJECT FLJ2' _ ru gi,th li JOB NO. 96/5' 3 MADE BY JJE DATE 7 /7 /fl3 PAGE OF ConInlGcr /oN poR NEW TO Ccc PT) Y = Shear iris@ (Gracell co -c/L * LL 51v0 e511 wait E.x,:::.)v q coon e 6110/1 -11) 04 r 500 V Exp 1 fsior) Bc; if • a (/O:v sly i r- ( I-}; I44 k.1,) r'1c 8, i4 Tl \/ = 5/2o 7 21600f6 -t- 300 0114-s • -a!t c i i) ! = 10 i */1 ' 2,0 �'I. 5,.71 use • 64 /1 v4/ cr e Ci' ek' anCI7Q/ CGpac(Vid. s_"� y q6,0V (234 1/troy 54 (v)(61L00) IOzgU 0,f 7 1. hobs / con oe.c.�'?oi't • Colt. retc( thi•c/thus -'b_ tab 27,0bbest 0. 1€ Rd L Di L s <VARIES> 2x TOP PLATE w /'/2 "0 A.B. @ 6'- 0 "o.c. 3/4"0 EXP. BOLT (EMBED 4 3/4" MINIMUM TYP.) P.C. PANEL THICKNESS & REINF. PER PANEL ELEV.'s [VARIES] 2 ROWS 10d O 4 "o.c. SIMPSON MTT28B O 8'- 0 "o.c. w/24 -16d (LOCATE UNDER PLYWD) SHEATHING PER PLAN TRUSS PER PLAN .71 A. Y5/53 DETAILS STIFFENER & HANGER PER PLAN 4x 12 LEDGER w /4- EXP. BOLTS ® PURLIN & 3/4 "0 EXP. BOLT MIDWAY BETWEEN PURLINS HANGER BY TRUSS MANUFACTURER SECTION A -5.0 SCALE: 4'4" =1 ' -0" SUPPORTING (CANTILEVERED) BEAM 8" TYP. TRUSS PER PLAN w /HANGER BY TRUSS MFR. (TYP.) — SUPPORTED (DROP -IN) BEAM TYP. 3 V2'--� TYP. 11/2 „ TYP. SHEATHING PER PLAN r-10d 0 6" o.c. 1. w 4 <PER PLAN> 2x PLATE w /'/2 "0 A.B. ® 6'-0" c.c. 3/4 "0 EXP. BOLT (EMBED 31/2" MIN.) DETAIL a [PER PLAN]4 —4- RFAM 10d06' SHEATHING PER PLA■ fc • PPELAFTEFE'liN sti SPOKANE, WASHINGTON PROJECT el - Toet-t)(11- JOB NO. 9eiti- 3 MADE BY JJ F DATE ca/2slei P., PAGE OF fo / /-/4 No-Et: CoNNF_ cr/o/v_ i-/x Co ex' Yq x 7 ^ LAI; Se Rev' 1 41 If Vci " 4/5 00 - l b f e • L q(-1 2:417 k . .9ross cross- ste;lioel 41600 1/1.41(1— (vq•J- vt?.)'t 1.141 tes; int•+ 21.6 ks; > Cole) bolis ok4. 0,926 CS- sied-ce_r74-hs) 2.16'4 1'41 N'O(l p.14.) (2.-76q) 16 le (o/ PPL &C®FFMAN SPOKANE, WASHINGTON ,q OOP 3LFE PIERS PROJECT . Li"- I I) k JOB NO. gel 163 MADE BY .l,,F_ t3EAM PER PLAN -L.....;. o rj 5 /I -i p o Av A39 checLa be 4.01 t 9.t T DATE 7 7 '7 PAGE OF 0/ pro cti lqt-I 4k 1 1 ' /414/(/0.33) 1U.33) 11 ma 4 3/0 of Vmau -72 'M 4s.,61).: Give k (ZTU Loads ioa. of . 9oD 200,6,). Px iST STI FFNEPS loads kic-) Trui 2r 12 14EN vi I2 Ko,2 Fb - b60 A (1:1) (.5 C� Lr. GM 1l.IPS; 37U(Z) 13,63 x 15 ps; (0.(1) (o Fri) = (495 Go ern. L90, 2 Coe.) MrncOt fb 1 le; r `►11(A ur - ci2 8 g 3 2 t},'• Ff (b� PPL4 OFFIVI�►N SPOKANE, WASHINGTON PROJECT ELZ JOB NO. /63I6 3 MADE BY JJE DATE PA 4-4 F RA-AI 8 1-0 ADS PAGE OF Gra v h Dead Loac1s •r.) fl cccLl/ Supports 30ps7c (Desi -for WorS Siesm is Zone _ U impor -la r1Cc l= a C.-/-0 .2 QP- 1.v El t Cdr; CA n r' wG e p fri.d.r7 anal RI, _ 3,p ass itc.1 coo 0I4crINoi , p,,�,.f�. Ca 0;</V Na For Iva = I2 M 05-i a M v e ALA { , 5 ern u) a �t be CoilSC- rvcl'VG C � � ` f 3 W h, t' �! 010, 7(/)0. 2) (/.2 ) (1 4. 3 �= VJp 3. oi ` 30' A/lowable 51ss DeSi , v /d€ i.y vv p 0.33 Wp PPL4COFFMAN PROJECT JOB NO. SPOKANE, WASHINGTON MADE BY 1 I IF 0181-E Rik Fekfv1E (CDNT) Co1unvir 6 /2r . • r - F5 DATE 7/606 PAGE OF • D.3 (O 1)(6)1V r "t3") 52 BD t" • 033 (36?:;-1.) (IV) Lt -8`) • 792 v -it 13cysi) (30 (1,0(.2 "E3m) • 1950.2 Ff, t 0.33 (Ups-i)( 6, -3 `) (22,') • lots -It = 0.33 ( 3o psi Mc°,lo- ')(ZZ' 3L3 D Worse ease, EX/5-77N47 COL U/VijV I Z Esc e5-1"IrnakG. Q.s 7SSNeexy4 Lae = 79'2x ' Ve (1V-6 )(re" (4ps4� to ODD bk A /Iowa 1)1 e. UCL. -e Al n i+ds ►'S 1'1'1 o dd c t` 1 r end ID Si : :2 c men ibcr5 A VisualAnalvsis 3.11.c Report July 9, 1998 7:58 AM Project: Nortel columns and brace File: C: \Juleen \Projects \ELI \brace2.VAP Engineer: JJE Default Units: Feet, Kips, Degrees, °Fahrenheit, Seconds. Nodal Displacements Node Load Case DX DY RZ ft ft deg N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 Service Case 1 0.0000 0.0000 - 0.9173 0.1096 - 0.0002 - 0.1480 0.1118 - 0.0002 -0.0701.6:- Moaxim01/1 0.1118 - 0.0019 - 0.0475 ��3 a 0.1117 0.0011 - 0.0474 0.1117 - 0.0006 - 0.0699 0.1095 - 0.0005 - 0.1477 0.0000 0.0000 - 0.9164 Member Elements Member Section Material (1)Node (2)Node Length Weight Rzl Rz2 ft M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 TS6x6x. Steel W10x19 N1 N2 9.5000 0.1807 N2 N3 1.5000 0.0285 N6 N7 1.5000 0.0285 N7 N8 9.5000 0.1807 N3 N4 1.5000 0.0287 N5 N6 1.5000 0.0287 N4 N5 9.0000 0.1721 Fix Fix ,, 3103'4 10x19 Ww0x19 W10 • PPELAE9FEFEIVr SPOKANE, WASHINGTON PROJECT JOB N0. MADE BY DATE PAGE OF Ci8LE I2Ac K Fr A-rv7e (CD,VT" 1/.5 uaJ Ano / J5/'s Shows 7S to x x 1!y Columns 61061 ' W 10x I G' eani p eooi te. .34" • de le c,h'or) Check Cvlorri loads Kt (0)(11,5)(i2) ►' - '2:,s".3 r&• - 21.413 !'s t • ° oK = .l. UT k • • si • noft =1,0 'r-bc (nom c.:n res iskirio Ira rnts S>: '-1 /-bracc. 11121) -1.6) \-2 bouts. (9 k.(& (1g, 8)(12) 10.1 23.62k51. 0,(.6,(4lto la's{.) 30. 3(.0 ks fb Fa 1'6x 23: 5'2 U.05 3'3(a Ts >< x Ai (0 k PPLAC®FFIIAAN PROJECT JOB NO. SPOKANE, WASHINGTON •' MADE BY JJ C— DATE % /BlQ PAGE OF CA 131. (coN7) • Urh.strt)t Supper f (ham/It Is ® 5' o.c, -to harry --rays • (16(11-? lever tr)GIS o vcr 0-/ • Need @ least Cir of r,e4m �Fr'1r r� [ II-co :LI Arlalt,JsIs required q f l -e as tA/1ox19 -he de!(ech i-1 Gri ma 5p& /9 - U rlas e' Cri ktcJ .odd (V - o")( 3° PS) 180ptf Lb: f ' Nl max 050)(1w . 8 8/25 lq 4( Inl to x o r = 221 Fb ° 6. 01- ks i (6.13 1 �E 12) = 5,19 _ Igi12> : 0.1v3 in dall�w 3(o v 5 (Igo) /a (I' , �2') 4 3fB`I (Lq,000,00o (q(,,3) = kS; < = 0,19 (00 Ust W 10 x I q 'all .beards. (Alsc e Ft -/) CA6L.E RAUK- 'F .t MC (CoNT) Check. cxcis41 no\ column 5 Mod el eel vsin� all bak3s 1A)144i new columns VisualAnalvsis 3.11.c Report Ax aol , c-c"111 tc'fi.°' +P eY rsh'n '" Fk tI July 9, 1998 10:16 AM Project: Nortel columns and brace 51.0 CO lum rIS pinned File: C: \Juleen \Projects \ELI \Frame.vap Engineer: JJE Default Units: Feet, Kips, Degrees, °Fahrenheit, Seconds. Nodes Node X Y Fix DX Fix DY Fix RZ ft ft N1 N3 N6 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 0.0000 0.0000 16.3300 16.3300 33.3300 52.3300 66.6700 66.6700 52.3300 33.3300 33.3300 0.0000 0.0000 11.5000 11.5000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 11.5000 11.5000 11.5000 34.0000 34.0000 Yes No „ Yes „ „ 11 No „ Yes 1, Yes No No „ Yes „ No Nodal Displacements Node Load Case DX DY ft ft RZ deg N1 N3 N6 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 Service Case 1 „ 0.0000 0.0000 0.1043 - 0.0035 0.1038 - 0.0004 0.0000 '0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.1030 - 0.0005 0.1031 - 0.0003 0.1033 - 0.0035 0.0000 - 0.0103 0.0000 - 0.0103 - 0. 6526 - 0.2541E I. Z5 4 - 0.0957 - 0.7277 - 0.6462 - 0.7438 - 0.7210 - 0.0971 - 0.0528 - 0.2516 0.5204 0.5256 Member Elements maximum del (e tilt) (1 toy) Member Section Material (1)Node (2) Node Length Weight Rzl Rz2 Et K M9 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 TS6x6x.25Stee1 TS8x8x.25 " W10x19 „ „ „ „ „ „ „ TS8x8x.25 " TS6x6x.2S" N13 N10 N12 Nil N15 N14 N14 N9 N16 N3 N6 N14 N14 N13 N13 N12 N6 N3 N3 N1 N6 N8 11.5000 11.5000 22.5000 11.5000 22.5000 17.0000 19.0000 14.3400 16.3300 11.5000 11.5000 0.2187 0.2187 0.5811 0.2970 0.5811 0.3251 0.3633 0.2742 0.3123 0.2970 0.2187 Fix „ „ „ „ „ Free Fix Free Fix „ Free Fix Member Extreme Results Fx (lc) K Fy(lc) Mz(lc) K -ft fc max(lc) fcmin(lc). ksi ksi Dx(lc) Dy(lc) in in M9 M10 M11 It M12 M13 M14 M15 11 • M16 M17 M18 M19 -4.71( -4.71( -7.47( -7.47( - 66.70( - 66.70( - 66.82( - 66.82( - 66.70( - 66.70( -4.50( -4.50( -2.12( - 2.12( - 1.00( - 1.00( -5.52( -5.52( - 66.30( - 66.30( - 6.10( -6.10( Mz PA cr.k4) 00,x Fe, rv11 px (ks+') (Ii) Can) (_in 1.11( 1) - 12.80( 1.11( 1) 0.00( - 11.56( 1.021_11) 0.00( -1-0-731( 1) - 18.12( 1) 0.00( ( 1) - 0.81( 1) - 0.81( 1) - 0.30( 1) - 0.30( 1) - 0.18( 1) - 0.18( 1) - 1.47( 1) -1.47( 1) -0.40( 1) - 0.40.( 1) 1.59(. 1) 1.59( 1) 1.02( 1) 1.02( 1) - 18.12( 0.00( - 18.29( 0.00( 0.00( 5.10( -3.33( 0.00( - 11.56( 9.46( 0.00( 6.61( - 18.29( 0.00( - 11.71( 0.00(. - 0.84( 1) - 16.05( 14.36( 1) -0.84( - 1.34( 1) - 15.06( 12.39( 1) -1.34( -8.79( 1) - 20.35( 2.78( 1) -8.79( - 8.80( 1) -20.37( 2.76( 1) -8.80( - 8.79( 1) - 20.47( 2.89(1) -8.79( - 0.80(1) -4.05( 2.45( 1) -0.80( - 0.38( 1) -2.50( 1.75( 1) -0.38( 0.49( 1) -7.55( 7.20( 1) -0.85( -0.98( 1) -5.20( 3.24( 1) -0.98( -8.73( 1) - 20.41( 2.94( 1) -8.73( -1.09( 1) -15.00( 12.82(.1) - 1.09( 0.00( 0.00( 0.00( 0.01( 0.04( 0.12( 0.00( 0.04( 0.04( 0.12( 1.24( 1.25( 1.24( 1.24( 1.24( 1.24( - 1.25( - 1.25( 0.00( 0.04( 0.00( 0.01( 0.00( 1.24( 0.00( 1.24( 0.00( 1.34( 0.00( 1.24( 0.00( 1.35( - 0.08( - 0.01( - 0.04( 0.03( -0.02( 0.03( - 0.05( 0.04( 0.00( 1.25( 0.00( 1.25( exi5- 0 75 Columns carry rnore. toad 44u. nc(A ) co Iu ,rts bu vi e )44-rtme.` ail') our1 f5 -rhe exiS�1�1� ColvvniS will 11 6rau 0 (1; hC,c t'i :• . 5*'5Se5 �.�Z . W10x19 W10x19 W10x19 ti P� PPI14 OFFMAN E. I H E E R S SPOKANE, WASHINGTON O PROJECT . }' JOB NO. MADE BY JJ / DATE 7 /8/913 PAGE OF CA6LE R14C k FRA-ME (CoNT) SIZE C 4 L E /?r? C S v ego2 r5 1)11.61-61 L oG Ut , W = 31),..)._ (6t sp c,) 13 U p l • 2 Load Cuscs (o'•- D" Simple Span isu / 1p')z N1 may (0 75 4 4fl- Try vsinq a rnaxinn unti 61 2 Canfkve.r /Inn,x = 533 k 11- ioti DD in +to to Ust .P 55 Du Ur '5frut-, P5500 Uri►sfiyt) C -)i&r ( Isoelf L_._ L. .P55007 . & P5501.: CHANNELS- FOR-13/4" (4.1 MM). WIDTH..;SERIES.CHANNEL P5500 3/8"— .� 1 5 /nu -.- Vs" — - r,•3 /Bn 1 1.336" 2 7/16" 2 2 Pierced channels are found on pages 60 and 61. Weight: 247 Lbs /C Ft (368 kg /100 m) BEAM LOAD* 5000. 1 ( 1 4500 .7- .- .`_. -_ -. - ...._. - , r i 4000 •-, -- - �._..... --•— P5500 i -• --, 3500 ----• r _.... . I l I .0 3000. r ...._...- _ -- I : r r i`— ! 1 1 1 o 2500 + i 1 + 2000 I . + r— f 1 1500 ---- .- J__.__ i 1000 - t - - - -- ---- j • - - - - -+ 1- i 500 I 0 - .-- r. - -,- 1 1, --I- -i--- ---i i 2.4 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180 192 204 216 228 240 SPAN (In) 'Maximum allowable uniform load. Channel Weight Allowable Moment Material Thickness Standard • Lengths Finishes Other Materials Lbs /Ft kg /m In -Lb N•m In mm 10' 20' PL GR HG PG SS FA P5500 "- 2.47: 3.7 9,830 1110 IF '051x`'. 2.7 al P5501 ':4.94 ". 7.4 29,000 3280 -4 ;,.?105; > 2.7 ,:.,;t:a Nominal thickness of 12 gage strip steel is .105 inches. "PPLACOFF d E . I N E E R S SPOKANE, WASHINGTON PROJECT JOB NO. MADE BY J.1 !- CAeL E ,Q At. kf RA-*vl E (CoNT) CoLuMN ekcE PATE �2" I1^ 64;;, :e • EPax�f i�f�1G��c:RS to -c(.41 .' DATE 7 el PAGE OF a, 95 Cc, - 6,-7 In regVire.ct p 1a.71/4 4-hick-tie ro 0 01 ' use 1/2" -VIPs a la in %2) 6ir12 • C016) PPELAS9FEFE"W1 SPOKANE, WASHINGTON PROJECT JOB NO MADE BY JJE CACI_ E R(e- FRA-64 E ON Eiiro E / S V 6- DATE PAGE OF 3 17.Th.1 BEArvi To E. X iST/Al6 01/1.6/_. __C_ONA1...,E24.7"/D.z\/ • • • 51710 r V orvl C_Ah v if) c.6( Corifittil-jao nt• (141)bzi)C3Copt.):= 3.44 2 k 4-ransPcr ) Wad ettp06.1..h8 . . o. 6 (.92'3)(3)(2) to. 2 tO k) t 10101 \ 5en4 ott s;on 8-,--)15 -6`c-ie-ilt Ss 70t,t Ix lot „vt ot le 3x PAGE re eiI61 Ai ,s114- t3 oc,it• e to t4,) 11 -z e w-c lc! WELAC9 FErliAN PROJECT E SPOKANE, WASHINGTON MADE BY J.1 E DATE -7iel jog 8 PAGE OF CA6LE RAcc PRk r/1 E (eoNT) 8EA-m TD eEr•vi CoNNE'c:rio)V JOB NO.. 0 4„ 1/ 1361 PE k P1.14-1•1 p ." 4p,x I i • 3j STEEL sp ft 1.4 t2) ?s/t44 A 3-2.S eoi-Ts NOTE: AT oNt-7- coN/vecTioNss SuPtivs/ 3/(5" n 0 PP osl FP 1.1 17-1R a. Tyci(AL 8F iv] r 19 A ? t:- /V7 Co ad EciryarV • 61,,ectf- ie-yh) c ono te--1-ion V: 11)( )rt3ops1) 1.1 k Allot/06_1:( c 511tar ovi bol-l-s V A)fooi z 9.3 bo 14- Lbfr-) Ghec_le attuvo O. (o (S(')C565') - 241.3 ciross s e '00 Toilo = a.6,b•FIA ( 3 -(3/4 Cole-) PL COFFMAN E I N E E R S SPOKANE, WASHINGTON PROJECT JOB NO MADE BY JJ CA8LF R x! c� _ PP. /\-M E (C wvT ) e(� fJr'vi 1 i` ��iC pLA J (14- 3., Pt' / / f • { • DATE PAGE OF �.. j .x mil,' X ; • „ wi(4) A 32S 860 — y2 e.:.p;° • 343" :PAS, FE T5 . i. A 32 J .&o 7j 1 3 6 ' A c t � � � . u fvt rely ..... C °1V 1\41 Et r7 o N Des on op he Ap P 16). (1 z) _ ( ) (2(It t , 1 _ 1.Igin1' U 5 C 3/6 x l `' i /(q) FLA ri COr7rlC6/72,0 19.8 x. irrIcor 5;,. • Boi+-, , \/ tj 10 k, Vd i(aw T 19, K.; - cnsi011)(2bo[lfs) 12D 145)113 k) 7 37.2 - (3''- (3A:- '1)(2)) ' %)1.6) F'Lf 14. r)64- area City of f Tukwila Fire Department Iukj ty, 1948 Fire Department Review . Control # D03-0a,y (p John W. Rants, Mayor Re: T.I. at E)'e (C 1.--1' YlhWC1Ue. Dear Sir: Thomas P. Keefe, Fire Chief The attached set of building plans have been reviewed by The Fire Prevention Bureau and are acceptable with the following concerns: 1. The total number of fire extinguishers required for your establishment is calculated at one extinguisher for each 3000 sq. ft. of area. The extinguisher(s) should be of the "All Purpose" (2A, 10B:C) dry chemical type. Travel distance to any fire extinguisher must be 75' or less.:. (NFPA 10, 3 -1.1) Extinguishers shall be installed on the hangers or in the brackets supplied, mounted in cabinets, or set on shelves (NFPA 10, 1 -6.9), and shall be installed so that the top of the extinguisher is not more than 5 feet above the floor. (NFPA 10, 1 -6.9) Extinguishers shall be located so as to be in plain view (if at all possible), or if not in plain view, they shall be identified with a sign stating, "Fire Extinguisher ", with an arrow pointing to the unit. (NFPA 10, 1-6.3) (UFC Standard 10-1) Clear access to fire extinguishers is required at all times. They may not be hidden or obstructed. (NFPA 10, 1 -6.5) Fire extinguishers require monthly and yearly inspections. They must have a tag or label securely attached that indicates the month and year that the inspection was performed and shall identify the company or person performing the service. (NFPA 10, 4 -3, 4 -4 and 4 -4.3) Every six years, dry chemical and Headqua ers Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: (206) 575-4404 • Fax (206) 5754439 City of Tukwila Fire Department Page number 2 John W. Rants, Mayor Thomas P. Keefe, Fire Chief ha-ion type fire extinguishers shall be emptied and subjected to the applicable fecHiarge procedures. (NFPA 10, 4 -4.1) If the required monthly and yearly inspections of the fire extinguisher(s) are:not accomplished or the inspection tag is not completed,.a reputable fire extinguisher service company will be required to conduct these required surveys.• (NFPA 10A -4 -4)' Maintain fire extinguisher coverage throughout. 2. No point in an unsprinklered building may be more than 150 feet from an exit, measured along the path of travel. (UDC 1003.4) No point in a sprinklered building may be more than 200 feet from an exit, measured along the path of travel. (UBC 1003.4) Exit doors shall swing in the direction of exit travel when serving any.hazardous area -or when serving.an occupant load of 50 or more. (UBC 1004.2) 3. Exit doors shall be openable from the inside.without . the use of a key or any special knowledge or effort. Exit doors shall not be locked, chained, bolted, barred,. latched or otherwise rendered unusable. All locking devices shall be of an approved type. (UFC 1207.3) Dead bolts are not allowed on auxiliary exit doors unless the dead bolt is automatically retracted when the door handle is engaged from inside the tenant space. • 4. When two or more exits from a story,are required,.: exit signs shall be installed at the 'required exits and where otherwise necessary to clearly indicate .the direction`: of, egress. (UBC 1013.1) When two or more exits from a story are required and when two or more exits from a room or an area are Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: (206) 575-4404 • Fax (206) 575-4439 l.. City of Tukwila Fire Department Page number 3 John W Rants, Mayor Thomas P. Keefe, Fire Chief required by U.B.C. Section 3303, exit signs shall be illuminated. (UBC 1013.3). "' -- Internally illuminated exit signs shall have both bulbs working at all times. (UBC 1013.3) 5. Exits shall be illuminated any time the building is occupied with light having an intensity of not less than 1 foot candle at floor level. Fixtures required for exit illumination shall be supplied from separate sources of power for Group I, Divisions 1.1 and 1.2 occupancies and for all other occupancies where the exiting system serves an occupant load of 100 or more. (UBC 1012.1, 1012.2) The power supply for the exit pathway illumination . shall normally be provided by the premise's wiring system. In the event of its failure, illumination shall be automatically provided from an emergency system. Emergency system shall be supplied from storage batteries or an on -site generator set and the system shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the Electrical Code. (UBC 1012.2) 6. Maintain sprinkler coverage per N.F.P.A. 13. Addition /relocation of walls, closets or partitions may require relocating and /or adding sprinkler heads. Sprinkler protection shall be extended to all areas where required, including all enclosed areas, below obstructions and under overhangs greater than four feet wide. (NFPA 13- 4- 4.1.3.2.1) 7. Maintain hose station coverage per City Ordinance #1742 and N.F.P.A. 14. Addition /relocation of walls or partitions may require relocating and /or adding hose stations. 8. An approved hose station requires plans review. (Plans must be submitted to the Fire Marshal for approval prior to installation.) (City Ordinance #1742) Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: (206) 5754404 • Fax (206) 575-4439 City of Tukwila John W. Rants, Mayor Fire Department Page number 4 Thomas P. Keefe, Fire Chlef 9. All new sprinkler systems and all modifications to existing sprinkler systems shall fiave-fire department review and approval of drawings prior to installation or modification. New sprinkler systems and all modifications to sprinkler systems involving more than 50 heads shall have the written approval of the W.S.R.B., Factory Mutual, Industrial Risk. Insurers, Kemper or any other representative designated and /or recognized by The City of Tukwila, prior to submittal to the Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No sprinkler work shall commence without approved drawings. (City Ordinance #1742) All sprinkler system plans, calculations and the contractors Materials and Test Certificates submitted to The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau must be stamped . with the appropriate level of competency seal. (WAC 212 -80) 10. Maintain automatic fire detector coverage per N.F.P.A. 72. Addition /relocation of walls, closets or partitions may require relocating and /or adding automatic fire detectors. Maintain square foot coverage of detectors per manufacturer's specifications in all areas including: closets, elevator shafts, top of stairwells, etc. (NFPA 72, 5- 1.3.4) 11. All new fire alarm systems or modifications. to existing systems shall have the written approval`of The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau.' No work.shall commence until a fire department permit has been obtained. (City. Ordinance #1742) (UFC 1001.3) 12. All electrical work and equipment shall conform. strictly to the standards of The National Electrical Code. (NFPA 70) 13. Required .fire resistive construction, including occupancy separations, area separation. walls, exterior . walls due to location on property, fire resistive Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: (206) 5754404 • Fax (206) 575-4439 City of Tukwila Fire Department Page number 5 John W. Rants, Mayor Thomas P. Keefe, Fire Chief requirements based on type of construction, draft stop partitions and roof coverings shall be maintained as specified in the Building Code and Fire Code and shall be properly repaired, restored or replaced when damaged, altered, breached, penetrated, removed or improperly installed. (UFC 701) The maximum flame spread class of finish materials used on interior walls and ceilings shall not exceed that set forth in Table No. 8 -B of The Uniform Building Code. (UBC 804.1) 14. Your street address must be conspicuously posted on the building and shall be plainly visible and legible from, the street. Numbers shall contrast with their background. (UFC 901.4.4) In order to provide you with the fastest police and . fire protection under emergency conditions, please post your suite, room or apartment number in a conspicuous place near the main-entry door. Numbers shall contrast with their background. (UFC 901.4.4) Contact The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau to witness all required inspections and tests. (UFC 10.503) (City Ordinance #1742) This review limited to speculative tenant space only - special fire permits may be necessary depending on detailed description of intended use. Any overlooked hazardous condition and /or violation of the adopted Fire or Building Codes does not imply approval of such condition or violation. Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: (206) 5754404 • Fax (206) 575-4439 City of Tukwila Fire Department Page number 6 Yours truly, John W. Rants, Mayor The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau cc: TFD file ncd Thomas P. Keefe, Fire Chief Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: (206) 575-4404 • Fax (206) 575-4439 s PLPANr"R'v� /ROU G SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: D98 -0246 DATE: 7 -10 -98 PROJECT NAME: ELECTRIC LIGHTWAVE X% Original Plan Submittal Response to Correction Letter # Response to Incomplete Letter Revision After Permit Is Issued DEPARTMENTS: Division (� ►�, C/,. T r blic W rks i1 F' e Prevention S uc ral1'� 1z6n Plan ing Division �a. "eg Per it Coordinator DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues, Thurs) Complete Incomplete n Comments: DUE DATE: 7 -14 -98 Not Applicable n TUES /THURS ROUTING: Routed by Staff Please Route n No further Review Required (if routed by staff, make copy to master file and enter into Sierra) REVIEWERS INITIALS: DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) Approved n Approved with Conditions REVIEWERS INITIALS: DUE DATE: 8 -11 -98 Not Approved (attach comments) DATE: CORRECTION DETERMINATION: Approved Approved with Conditions DUE DATE: Not Approved (attach comments) El REVIEWERS INITIALS: DATE: \PR- ROUTE.DOC 6/98 STATE OF WASHINGTON V • " .T4m9mORMOMP4N1w MASTER LICENg. '7RVICE REGISTRAfjO.N.S.AND LICENSES UNIFIED BUSINESS ID #: 171 004 362 BUSINESS ID #: 001 EXPIRES : 07-31-1999 ORGANIZATION TYPE DOMESTIC PROFIT CORPORATION POE CONSTRUCTION, INC. 332 1ST ST NE AUBURN WA 98002 wRUr DOMESTIC rnUFIT CORPORATION RENEWED BY AUTHORITY OF SECRETARY OF STATE • :,,f •; ; . • ';' . 0000015 AT F625-052-000 (8/97) DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIES REGISTERED AS PROVIDED BY LAW AS CONST CONT GENERAL POECOI*241QZ EFFECTIVE.EPATE POE CONSTRUCTION INC7, PO BOX 899 • AUBURN WA 98071-0899 DRAWING INDEX GENERAL PROJECT NOTES 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. H. 7. B 9. 10. 12 13. 14. THESE GENERAL PROEM NOTES SHALL APPLY TO ALL ORATING& - 19 RNIESS OBERESE SPECIFIED AND /OR RDOATED ON THE ORAWNS, THE GC SHILL APPLY, INSTALL, CONNECT. ERECT, USE, CLEW NO ORURO YANFACRIIED ARTICLES, MATERIALS, AND EQUIPMENT PER MANUFACIUERS CURRENT PRIDED RECOMENDAIONS ALL PWOIICIS MAMEMALS, AND EQUIPMENT PROMOED ON TLS PROJECT SHALL BE SUITABLE FOR THE MENDED SERIE AND LOCATION AT OM THEY ARE *STALLED. 16_ ALL SNAE AUDI STORAGE OF MATERIALS SHALL BE ON SITE 17 DE EWEU1L CONTRACTOR SHALL KEEP W 10 DATE AS BOLTS AND UPON COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT, SUBMIT REDLINES TO THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL HEREAFTER ALSO BE REFERRED 10 AS CONTRACTOR OR GC. DE GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND palm= SUB CONTRACTORS ARE REQUIRED TD 1197 RTE JOB STE POOR 10 swims= OF oft ORETWE BD MAY NOT BE ACCEPTED: DE MORN CONSISTS OF TENANT YODIRCAIIOLS'TO DESIGNATED AREAS OF THE DIEM BLI.QIG. RE WORK !AIDES YmFiCATIO S OF ESSIING SPACES, EASES FEE ALARM AND PROTECTION SIS1010. AID IEOINREA. PITMEN' NO NECLNCN- SOWS. RE PPL COFFMAN ENGINEERS FOR TRANSMITTAL TO ELECTRIC UGITIWAVE IN ALO0CAD R13 FORMAT. 18 DIE GOURD CONTRACTOR SHALL PROTECT ALL 1RK AND MATERIAL FROM DARE BY NS WORK, WR NE N, SUB CONTRACTORS MONK SUB OR S CONTRACTOR'S WORKMEN AND SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ALL DAMAGE THUS CAUSED. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BECOME THORDHQLY FNILA R 0)10 ALL PIIT'9CW ND,LTLIDIAL OPERATIONS OF ME AFFECTED AREAS. PORK RK MST BE CAREFULLY SCHEDULED ND DEDU10D TO ASSURE DE AYNAMRY OF u EQUALIZE. MUM UM O1 TIE ATE AS REQUITED NBA AL TRADES RIM SHALE MEN STE EN WOIOM DE GENERA- CONTRACTOR SHALL COORONAIE AND CREER S SPACE N CONDOR AREAS TO MAXMM . TIE ACCESS TO EACH SYSTEM ND RWR RESPFCTIE COFOEIS 19. BE GC MALL COORDINATE 1W LOCATION OF TERM DEVICES AND RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK MMTH THE EXISTING COIO11O S AS TO MIRY ENOUGH CLEARANCE BELOW THESE REA6 FOR THE INSTALLATION OF LIGHT FIXTURES AND SPRINKLER LINES. 20. ILL EEAPIENT SELECTED WLL FIT ALTO 11E PHYSICAL SPACES NOCAIED, ALCOTING SUFFICIENT 0001/ FOR ACCESS. SERVICING, REMOVAL MO REFUGE/ ENT T OF PARTS. ETC. ADEQUATE SPACE SHALL BE ALLOWED FOR CLEARANCE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE EI APPLICABLE OWES AND LOCAL ORDINANCES.. AS PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS AND SPACE REQUIREMENTS THE BE RESPONSIBLE THE GENERAL. CONTRACTOR 9MNL ENSILE THAT DE MORAL SHILL ME TOE N ACCODNISE AIM ALL DIMS PM REDRA9N5, A R) APPLICABLE CODES THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR ML OUIAN ND PAY FOR ALL MO RED INSPECTORS ELBFG BE COURSE OF RE WQOL THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR STALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR AM REQUIRED 70 76f 71E AREAS DRAM RE SALE IIOAL WIRY ALL DIMENSIONAL .DATA MD IENEN RE EASING 17010171126 BEFORE PROOIDl6. NTH RE NOUN- MY OOEUCIS PATH THE EXISTING CONDITIONS SHALL BE BROUGHT IMMEDIATELY TO 1HE ATTDTOM OF DE OTTERS �LTAIDE OFQS ACCORDING GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FO SUCH INITIAL E ACCESS VARY ACCORDING TO EACH MANUFACTURER. FEN2 NIIAL ACCESS AND PROPER FM THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE PROTECTOR TO ALL DOSING FAMES N PUBLIC ND PNVA7E LEAS AID DULL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR REPAIR OF ANY DAMAGES CAUSED. BY. 101 OR HAS SACONTRACERS REPAIR AND / OR OEM MY DMA= 21- AIL MADNILS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPLED FOR TES CONTRACT STALL BE FREE FROM DEFECTS N MATERIAL WORKMANSHIP, TILE. AND SHALL BE OF THE TYPE AND QUALITY DESCRIBED HEREIN. IF IT BECOMES APPARENT WITHIN. ONE YEAR FROM THE DATE OF ACCEPTANCE OF FINAL COMPLETION BY THE OWNER THAT THE EQUIPMENT DOES NOT MEET THE WARRANTIES ' :SHALL SURFACES USD PROCESSES RECO/1E70ED BY TIE YAMIACT ER TO 1W SATISFATIOII OF RE CRIERS RFPIESIEEAUTE. REPLACE ANY ANSIES MERE CIENENO 0R REPAIRING HAS FARED TO SATISFACTORILY RESPITE APPEARANCE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SET AND STERNS AIL SAFETY PREMIERS 01 COLECTDN MW 1TE NEK THROUGHOUT TE PROECT- THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SEAL BE RESMASBLE TO COORDINATE TIE' REMOVAL OF AL DEBTS 061 ME WE ON A DALY BANG, AND 70 KEEP THE CONSTRUCTION 9TE.CLEAN ND FREE FROM ANY OBSI01C1D16 AT ALL j71Et :. HE GENERA- CONTRACTOR SHALL MORE N A COOPFRATAE MANIER WITH TE 0)1161 G DODOS ME GENERAL OONRACTEN SOIL SPECIFIED ABOVE. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR CORRECT ANY DEFECT, INCLUDING NONCONFORMANCE WITH THESE SPECIFICATIONS AT NO COST. TO THE... OWNER. 22. 71E.CENRM. CONRACTOR SHALL MAINTAIN ADEQUATE RECORDS IN 1YATTE N FORAM THAT CLEARLY DOCUMENTS AU IESING, TRNNNC AND REVIEW PROCEDURES. THIS DOCUMENTATION SHALL INCLUDE. BUT NOT BE UNITED TO THE FOLLOWING: NAME AND COMPANY OF ATTENDING PERSONNEL GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PROCEDURE(S), DATE(S). BALE OF DAY, DEFICIENCIES FOUND. CORRECTIVE 'ACTON TAKEN, AND NATURE OF FINAL RESULTS. " DOCUMENTATION RECORDS SHALL BE KEPT IN A N ORDERLY, LEGIBLE AND UP TO DAZE FORMAT. SUCH DOCUMENTATION SHALL BE IN A REPORT FORMAT AND SUBMITTED NOTIFY THE SHREWS REPRESENTATIVE F A DISPUTE MISTS TAT AFFECTS 71E PRO,ECT MEDIAE ITT DIAUIY 11ORC THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY EXACT MEASUREMENTS AY THE JOB SITE COOTDNNE VON EASING OIIMOO6 THERE WEEKLY TO TFE ARCHITECf.. AND THE ELEL O GHTWANE REPRESENTATIVE. INSUFFICIENT DETAIL OR. UIMENSONS ARE AYM.ABLE. ALL TME74°O16 ARE TO FARMED FACE OF CO�ICOO1 UNLESS ORERNE WED- CUT. PATCH AND REST AI- EXISTING SURFACES NOT MEMO NEW RASHES OR OR DIMMED OUTDO MECUM!! OF ME WOOL MATERIALS AN FNISHES USED SHALL BEM EXACT MATCH TO ADAACENT SURFACES - AID THE CROWED WPM 9WL Ku TEE APPROVAL OF THE OTTERS REPRESENTATIVE. NORMAL FUNCTIONS OF. THE ADJACENT STRUCTURES EST CONNIVE DURING TE CONSIRUCTIOR PHASES MIFF EFFORT SNAIL RE MADE TO INSURE SUCH FUNCTIONS ARE NOT DISRUPTED. - THE GQNQRN. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE RENEW OF AN) CO0UANLE WM THE PROECT DOORMATS FM 2 ALL PEW EKI AND STORAGE OFNAIE SHALL SHALL BE ON SITE B 50G. E . 24.. AL FEW F SHALL ENT ND MATERIALS MATCH THE EXSTNG EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS UNLESS OTERPASE HE N TIE DRAMAS OR SPECIFICATIONS 25- TEE BASE BIMIG STANDARDS, SPECR AN CATT NS D DETAILS SHALL GOVERN SHORN RN ALL WORK E ON THE DOMINOS UNLESS OI ERWS: INDICATED. RESOLE ANY CONl1G l OMNOWNERS REPRESENTABLE 29 RE GENERAL CONTRACTOR ILL OSTAN AND ADHERE TO THE LANDLORDS 'RULES AND REGULATIONS FOR FOR CONSTRUCTOR'. THE . INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS AND COORDINATOR. ME 001 'PROVIDE' SHALL BE DEFINED AS 'FUOASi AM) INSTALL EMCEE ND READY 10 USE'- ALLO A N. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ADHERING. TO ALL LANDLORD REQUIREMENTS' INCLUDING, BUT NOT LAMED T0: /HOR* ROUTS. ' AEN CORE DRIWNG, NOISE SECURITY, DUST CONTROL, TRASH REMOVAL. STAGING AREEAS, STORAGE OF WTBCALS, OE/MP. IBET VPA W TT Y LIMES 111.I ALT. TEMPORARY AND ALL UMW SERVICE DERUPTONL THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SNAIL COORDINATE TE A ALL ACTIVATES ME THE LANDLORDS DESIGNATED REPRESENTABLE DRAWING INDEX A0.1 PROJECT DATA (BASS 1997 LBO) PROJECT NAME ELECTRIC DOITWAI£, INC. A2.1 FLOOR PLAN NOTES AND ROOM TRASH 509.100E TYPE OF CONS.. 11141 REFLECTED CRAIG PLAN AND DETAILS TUKWILA SCOTCH FACILITY NIERIOR ELEVATORS, DETAILS AND SCHEMES A4.2 ROOF RAN AID DETALS 51.0 13705 GATEWAY DRIVE, SUITE 510 521 FRAAENG PLANS ND DETAILS 52.2 ROOF FRAANG PUN AID DETAILS GATEWAY CENTER LEGENDS, GENERAL NOTES MID SCHEDULES MO.2 FIRE SPRINKLERS TES 01.0 TUKMILA WA 98188 M1.1 FLOOR PLAN MOMS 112.1 FLODt PLAN - HVAC 1422 HVAC FIPNG RAN 023 BUODNG HEGHE 34 FT. (EXISTING) LEGAL DESCRIPTION: N/A 63.2 NTET.7N SISTUI M4.1 MECHANICAL OETATS MD DIAGRAMS E0.1 SYMBOLS ND GENERAL NOTES E1.1 ALLOWABLE AREA: 12,000 SF (BASIC) CONTACT: ARCHITECT /ENGINEER- E3.1 AMER PLAN E4.1 SYSTEMS PLAN PR COFFMAN ENGINEERS (509) 328 -2994 UDHNNG PUN E4.3 ACTUAL AREA: 9,800 SF E5.1 CRAIG BEAUMONT MA E5.2 GROUNDING ONE-LNE DIAGRAM E5.3 MISCELLANEOUS DIAGRAMS OTTER -, ELECTRIC UGHIWAVE, INC SCHEDULES E6.2 OCCUPANT LOAD: 98 E7.1 (360) 818 -3224 E7.2 MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS SHAABAN NASA EXITS REQUIRED: 2. EXITS PROVIDED: 3 BUILDING USE: TELECOMMUNICATION: GROUP 8 (SEE DESCRIPTION BELOW) BUILDING USE DESCRIPTION: THE TUKWILA SWITCH FAOUTY IS A SATELLITE SWITCHING AND TRANSISSON FACKITY FOR DISTRIBUTION OF 'DIAL TONE ". OCCUPANCY GROUP B THIS IS NOT A FACUTY ORDINARILY AVAILABLE TO THE PUBLIC, MD IS STAFFED BY FIE TO EIGHT EMPLOYEES AT INTERMITTENT INTERVALS. NO FULL-TIME RECEPTION OR CLERICAL STAFF ARE ON STE DRAWING INDEX A0.1 TILE SHEET. IS EtAL NOTES AND PRQECT DATA ALT SITE PLAN AND DETAILS A2.1 FLOOR PLAN NOTES AND ROOM TRASH 509.100E A3.1 REFLECTED CRAIG PLAN AND DETAILS A4.1 NIERIOR ELEVATORS, DETAILS AND SCHEMES A4.2 ROOF RAN AID DETALS 51.0 GENERAL. ST1UCTO2AL NOTES 521 FRAAENG PLANS ND DETAILS 52.2 ROOF FRAANG PUN AID DETAILS 140.1 LEGENDS, GENERAL NOTES MID SCHEDULES MO.2 HVAC SCHEDULES 01.0 FOUNDATION PLIABNG M1.1 FLOOR PLAN MOMS 112.1 FLODt PLAN - HVAC 1422 HVAC FIPNG RAN 023 ROOF RAN MEOIANOAL 03.1 FRE PROTECTION SYSTEM ZONE PLAN 63.2 NTET.7N SISTUI M4.1 MECHANICAL OETATS MD DIAGRAMS E0.1 SYMBOLS ND GENERAL NOTES E1.1 ELECTRICAL SITE RAN E2.1 UGHTNG PLAN E3.1 AMER PLAN E4.1 SYSTEMS PLAN E4.2 UDHNNG PUN E4.3 INTERIOR GROUNDING PLAN E5.1 POKER ORE -LINE DIAGRAM E5.2 GROUNDING ONE-LNE DIAGRAM E5.3 MISCELLANEOUS DIAGRAMS E8.1 SCHEDULES E6.2 SCIEELE5 '.. E7.1 MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS E7.2 MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS SYMBOLS LIST DETAIL: SECTION: INTERIOR ELEVATION: WALL TYPE: NEW RICK NOTE DOOR DESIGNATION: ROOM HARE AND NUMBER: SBOAR, MEWED AL NUMBER SHEET WERE DETAIL IS LOCATED ARROW INDICATES MECIION CF SENT SECTOR MOOT SHEET MERE SECTOR IS LOCATED ARROW INDICATES DIRECTION OF SORT ELEVATOR NUMBER SHEET WERE DETAIL IS LOCATED -SEE SHEET A21 FOR TYPICAL WALL TYPES DX -500 91FET A21 /FEW CONSTRUCTION FLOOR PLAN G)--:-SEE FLOOR RAH /DOOR SCHEDULE FOR MORE NFORYAIUOI M.XX ' -NAME OF ROOM NUMBER OF ROOM VICINITY MAP ELECTRIC •VE L IGHT TukWita Switch Facility Drive, ve, Suite 510 Gateway Tukwila, WA 9818 SEEM/RE PERMIT P role EN ENGASPMING CITY OF 1UKW®.A BUILDING DIVISION CITY OF- TRI'NTA eAPROVED , JUL 281998 AtNNOIED BUILDING RLE COPY I NMARAT L Rat U° No Check npROnb ma Mica m ems MO mBltmW MO approval of pram tl0Y net MAMMA r Voldkm Al Am REVISIONS NO CHANGES SHALL BE MADE TO THE SCOPE OF WORK WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVAL OF TUKWTA BUILDING DIVISION. NNE Ammon COIL P G1mE A' PEW PIMA smart. "AO° uIW INCLUDE A*[INaw. FEES PPL COFFMAN ENGINEERS - 'CONTACTS TO OPENS RESPONSE BODING Cl) COP,STRIETOR =MO* THE FDL.DWIIG 55140 OF PPL COFFMAN PERSONNEL IS PRONGED. IT I STRONGLY RECOMMENDED THAT ALL INQUIRES BE MADE Al 6101150 FORM. ALL PARTIES CAN BE REARED AT (509) 328 -2994. ARCHITECTURAL CRAIG BEAUMONT, MA STRUCTURAL CRAIG LEE. S.E. MECHANICAL ED LANGEBARTEL, P.E, ELECTRICAL MARK. MCMICHEAL, P.E. JUL 1 01998 PERMIT CRATER 6 G V 0 0 0 O 0) 0 6 Z m 0 7 C O lil I. W a U U) 0 U. 153 \OBS \9710919809 70:00 E E R }RTH RIVER DRIVE, SUITE 510 IS, WASHINGTON 99201 • 609) 328 2994' - 9 P ROJ ECT ELECTRIC Poet 0fflee Box 4959 E Fox O (300) 90 -3297 TUKWILA- SWITCH - .FACILITY SHEET TITLE SITE PLAN AND DETAILS DRAWN DPM CHECKED CB DATE 07/07/88 JOB NO. 98169 FILE 98183803 SCALE - 1:1 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE . - FLOOR - BASE WKL COLN REMARKS 313801100 3111 31N2433 STATIC DISSIPATIVE Virtu CONP. 3NON 3SVS UNU 3111 OINVS331 3111 31rNf331 NINrt321 01 'ISIlG 3110N, 1'3Y 50Z 101 LOBBY • • • • • 9' -0' NOTES: 1,4,5,7,11 102 NOOK • • ' • • • 9=0" NOTES: 1,4,5.211 103 CONDOR • • • • 9'-7 NOTES 1.4,5,7,11 104 SECURITY ROOM • • • • • - NOTES: 1,5,11 105 JANITOR • • • • 8'-0' NOTES 1,5,11 106 MEN • • • • • • 8 NOTES 1.5,9,11 107 WOMEN • • • • • • 8' -0" NOTES: 1,5,9,11 108 BREAK ROOM • • • • • 9'-7 NOTES: 1.4.5,7,8,11 109 ELECTRICAL • • • • • - NOTES: 2,5,10 110 MAP ROOM • • • • 12' -0" NOTES 2,3,4,5,6,11 111 POWER ROOM • • • • 12'-0' NOME 2,3,4,5,6,11 112 HEDGER • • • • - NOTES: 2,5,11 113 MATERIALS NWT. • • • • - NOTES 2,5,10 114 SNITCH AREA • • • • • 12' -0' NOTES: 2,3.4,5,6,11 115 TRANSMISSION AREA • • • • • 12'-0' was: 2,3,4,5,6,11 116 COLLOCATE ROOM • • • • • 17 -7 NOTES: 23,4,5,6,11 v l 2 . 6 ' TRANSMISSION AREA TYPICAL RACK HEIGHT 01 I7 -6' 25'-0 CO- LOCATE ROOM JL61 42' -3' 25'-0' 1113 34' -7' 25' -0' INFRGFN ROOM SECU 04 ELECTRICAL ROOM BREAK. ROAM 1 /8" = 1' -0" I-HOUR RATED W ALL T' NOT -TO " SCALE' ' Sr GM 44' GYM 6" STEEL STUDS Si" STEEL STUDS (25 GA.024" O.C.) (25 GA. 0 24' 0.C.) H MGSTURE RESISTANT 006 N GAT N' CERAMIC TILE (MERE V..' CERAMIC TILE APPLICABLE)' (WHERE APPLICABLE) 1-11QUR RATER 1-HOUR RATED t WALLS TO EXTEND TO THE BOTTOM OF THE ROOF DECK UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, . CONTINUOUS OEFLECTON-NEAD REQUIRED, 2. - NRNCATES,TOE PAPTRO 10, 6 ABOVE HIGHEST ADJANNT COUNG V 7 •_ HMS PARTITIONS TOO S UTERAL/f BRACED PER MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS BRAON5 9AAIL.NOT BE NTERSE OTHER PMfiIOO1NS, .. £. VAPOR TO. HAVE F,L WE:SPRE■ CLASSIFICATION F 25 OR 065. 96' ORB 6' STEEL STUDS (20 CA. 024' 0.C.) 46" ORB R-19 SOUND BATT NSA. 1-HOUR RATED BUILDING DIVISION ' REOENED TTYAETUKW 8199a PERMRbENTER 6 FLOOR PLAN GENERAL CONSTRUCTION EXIST. PRECAST CONC. WALL 6" STEEL STUDS (20 GA. `0 24' O.C.) R -11 BATT INSUL W/ 6 MIL CONT. V.B HE GTO (TYPE EXIST. ALUMINUM STOREFRONT 8' STEEL STUDS (25. GA. 0 24" 0.0.) 6 -11 BATT INSUL W/ 6 MIL CONT. V.B. ' TEMPERED HARDBOARD -0 GENERAL NOTES: 1. Al DIMENSIONS ARE OWN FROM TE CENTER TINE OF COLUMN OR BEAM TO FACE OF FINISH 0R FROM FACE OF FN194 TO FACE 06 FINISH CO FURRING, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. DCEN90N5 OVEN FROM DOSING CONSTRUCTION ARE FROM FNIOIED SURFACES. MESS NOTED 019ERYISE. 2. IF COMRICIS OCCUR BETWEEN. DRAWING AND 17DSING FIELD CONDITIONS, THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL IINEBIAIELY CONTACT THE OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE FOR DIRECTOR. 3. ALL PARTTIONS 9161. BE RASTALFD PLI118, TAPED AND SANDED SMOOTIN 50 THAT THERE ARE NO %SHE JAM 4. PROVIDE STEEL BRACING ABOVE CEILING IWIOIT PARIITNNS PER MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS AND ABOVE ALL DOORS AND GLAZING JAMBS 5. PARTITIONS SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED PER MANUFACTRERS RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DEFLECTIONS NOT TO EXCEED 1/240 OF. SPAN. 6. PROVIDE AND INSTALL NON- COINU511&E 6000 BLOWS AND /OR STEEL SUPPORTS AS REQUIRED IN PARTITIONS BERND WALL MOUNTS EQUIPMENT, COUNTERTOPS, AND OTHER CASEWORK ITEMS TO PROVIDE SUFFICIENT SUPPORT AS TO PREVENT SAGGING. 7. ALL PPE AND CONDIT PENETRATIONS THROWN ANY FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES SHA11. BE FIRE STOPPED NTH TESTED IA RATED THROUGH PENETRATION RRESTOP SYSTEMS REARM 111E REQUIRED RATINGS. 8. SEAL ALL PFNEIRATIOIS OF PIPING, WCTLMIRK, ETC.. WWI ADJOINING WALLS AGAINST LEAKAGE OF J6490094 FIRE SUPPRESSION AGENT. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY THE INTEGRITY OF THE PERIMETER ENCLOSURE OF THESE AREAS UPON COMPLETION' OF PARTITIONING. NEW CONSTRUCTION PLAN NOTES: ❑1 NEW OGNAGE ON EXISTING STOREFRONT DOOR - SEE DETAA 3, SHEET A1.1. El 'OPEN °ma FOI IINRE'BY OTHERS. Q3 AIL W51NG EXTERIOR GLAONG (NCIUING DOORS) TO BE REMOVED AND REPLACED WI71 I' INSULATED OLA7#10 UNITS CON9SIING OF LAMINATED UNIT OF N' CLEAR, 060 'SAFIE0" PLASTIC INNER LAYER. 16' TINTED (TO MATCH COSTING (OUTBOARD • NA ND I (WBTE OR 9 �PERED (AT REVD LOCATORS) W/ 3M 'PANTHER' DE). Q4 PROVIDE AND INSTALL CONTINUOUS N' 116 FLAT EIIPANOED METAL AS MANUFACTURED BY MCNN71OS CO., ATTACHED. TO DOSING WALL AT. 24' O.C. OVERLAY ONE LATER 96' TYPE 1C 51113 (TAPE, FIMSH AND PAINT), TYPICAL AT DEMONS WALLS OS 6' -0' W z J'-0' H.N. BORROWED LIGHT W/ i4' WREGLASS 511 FIGHT TO BE 4' -0' AFL. © 4'4764' 07 6.01065 61003 CORN(. BOARD WITH NIE(RAL AUNININI FRAME. MOUNT NTH - TOP AT 7-0" A.F.F. E7 EXISTING FLOOR TO BE CONFIRMED TO BE LE/EL 14' / 6-0' INTERVALS INEAS1 /NEST AND WORTH /SOUTH DIRECTORS IF FOUND, NOT TO MEET THESE TOLERANCES, THE EXISING CONCRETE. POOR -SUB SHALL BE GROUND 9100TH. OR LEVELING COMPOUND (SO NEBORB ^SONOFLON' OR. APPROVED ADDED TO MEET 1180 REQUIREMENT. THE E]OSTNG /MODIFIED -: FLOOR. SHA1. THEN BE PRPARED PET MANUFACTURERS FNISH.STEOPICATIONS, FOR FINISH MATERIALS INSTALLATION. Q WSTIIO'ELECTIROAL EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURE TO BE RELOCATED TO NEW LO,CATON IN COAPLEX LOCATION TO BE'OEFEBAOFIED WRING CONSTRUCTION. Q9 PRIME AD JNSTA L TOOT (2) ADA A TY SONS (1 -MEN, 1-11 AT AESTROOM ENTRIES. LOCATION TO BE DURING CONSTRUCTION.. BEST I/ANFACIURER 90/R- SYSIENS - HC300 OR APPROVED EPA - 10 NST4LL NEW CONCRETE CURB AT NEW.SP*RIKLER ROOM ENCLOSURE SIMILAR TO ._,. DETAIN.• 1T, MST A4.1. CURB TO CONNUE UNDER 0008 9LL:(RAISE DOOR). APPLY WATT RESISTANT COMING 'WILCO; AND ORB (N9DE AND OUT) PER NAIIJ ACIUFEliS RECO4WENDATONS. PFRPARE.SURFACES ACCORDINGLY. I , INSTALL, NEW *CRETE/CURB'AT EXISTING AMONG PAL. - CONTRACTORS OPTION SHOREENSTt4G WALL TD,CONSTRUCT WRB'OR REMOVE AND :REPLACE 1X15. O E1OSTNG DTL19146, . .� . • TERIAN(ATION fgNT FOR NEW CONCRETE WAIL /OIRB. 13 FUR OUT WNL,IPPROXINATIY 6 F>FLD VERIFY. EN5T1HC•CONO61s TO BE, COIIP1E74.Y C,.GVE'RED M97j1 NEIY WAIL ^ FRAME OVER EXISIRD'DOGR ■® IN9N4TF 9MMR TO WALL TIPE,'O BOTTOM aT bOOR 7D PREVENTpfTR 3 Qf MATER, FINISH. SCHEDULE NOTES: 1 PANT FINISH OF ALL WALL 50900)05 AND COLUMNS SHALL BE #349067, EGRET,. SEMI-GLOSS 01190, MANUFACTURED BY COLUMBIA; OR APPROVED EQUAL PER SPECIFICATION SECTION 09900. 2. PAINT FROM OF' ALL WALL SURFACES;AD COLUMNS (BELOW 7 -10' AFT.) SHALL BE #349088, CANYON GRAY, SOB-GLOSS ANON. MANUFACTURED BY CGLUANIA OR APPROVED EQUAL PER SPECIFICATION SECTION 08900. 3. PAINT FINISH: OF ALL WAS SURFACES, COLUMNS (7 -10' ABOVE FINISH FLOOR). AND STUNG SYSTEM SHALL BE #8788N, BLACK, SATIN FINISH, MANUFACTURED BY COLUMBIA; . OR APPROVED EQUAL PER. SPECIFICATION SECTION 09900. 4. VINYL BASE SHALL BE 4', #30, GRAY. MANUFACTURER BY ROPPE OR APPROVED EQUAL PER SPECIFICATION SECTION 09650. 5. HOLLOW METAL DOORS, DOOR FRAMES AND GLAZING FRAMES SHALL BE PAINTED WITH #349030. TOKAY. Mil-GLOSS FNISH, MANUFACTURED BY COLUMBIA; OR APPROVED EQUAL (NEW AND DOSING INTERIOR LOCATIONS) PER SPECIFICATION SECTOR 09901. EXISTING EXTERIOR HOLLOW METAL FINISHES TO REMAIN. 6. STATIC OSSPATI6 FLOORING SHALL BE #51951, ARMOR GRAY, EXCELON TILE MANUFACTURED BY ARMSTRONG OR APPROVED EQUAL PER SPECIFICATION SECTION 09650. 7. VINYL COMPOSITE TILE SHALL BE 1124, PUTTY, ESSENTIALS TIE MANUFACTURED BY MANMNGTON OR APPROVED EQUAL PER SPECIFICATION SECTION 09650. 8. ALL EXPOSED SURFACES OF CASEWORK SHALL BE PLASTIC LAMINATE #387 -T. DUSTY GRAY, TEXTURED, MANUFACTURED BY LASINART OR APPROVED EQUAL (VERTICAL ROVED EQUAL (VERTICAL 4221-T, RT SURF�ACEES) GREEN MAKI, PER SPECIFICATION LAMINART OR SECTON12311. 9. CERAMIC FLOOR, BASE AND WALL TILE WALL TILE - WOMEN 004 - MONARCH - BRIGHT SERES, 123 PALE MAUVE MEN #103 - MONARCH - BRIGHT SERIES, 131 SOFT TAUPE FLOOR TILL - WOMEN #104 - NNBURNE - GRANITONE, 1551 NEVADA MEN 1103 - WNBURNE G 811110NE, 1633 SALINE SAND 10. PAINT FINISH OF Al EXPOSED ROOF STRUCTURE, NEW DUCTWORK AND MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL BE #8788N. BLACK, SATIN FINISH, MANUFACTURED BY COLUMR9 OR APPROVED EQUAL PER SPECIFICATION SECTION 09900. 11. SEE REFLECTED CEILING PLAN /SCHEDULE - SHEET A3,1 FOR SPECIFIC CEILING TYPES. GENERAL FINISH NOTES: 1. ALL WALL AND FLOOR SURFACES SHALL BE PROPERLY PREPARED PER MANUFACTURER'S FINISH SPECIFICATIONS PRIOR TO FINISH INSTALLATION. FLOOR SUBSTRATES SHALL BE PREPARED TO. ALLOW PROPER ADHE9ON AND SNOOD', FIAT INSTALLATION. 2 ALL FINISHES SHALL BE INSTALLED IN STRICT ACCORDANCE NTH THE MANUFACTURERS FINISH SPECIFICATIONS AND INSTRUCTORS AND IN A MANNER CON9STENT NTH THE HIGHEST QUALITY STANDARDS CR WORKMANSHIP. FINISH SHALL MEET OR EXCEED ALL APPLICABLE CODE REQUIREMENTS 3. INTERIOR FLOOR FINISH MATERIALS SCHEINBED TO BE APPLIED WITHIN ENCLOSED SPACES SHALL HAVE A FLAMESPREAD CLASSIFICATION AND MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS. CITY OF TUKWILA APPROVED JUL 2 8 1998 AS NO 4. SHOULD THE INSTALLER FIND ANY DISCREPANCIES, OMISSIONS. AMRIQUITES OR CONFUCTS ON THE PLANS HE SHOULD BRIG THE ITEM(S) TO THE OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE ATTENTION FOR DIRECTION. BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH ANY WORK IN QUESTION, LLI a z Ca W I- O z z J a. cc 0 0 - J 11 W J A W" U C 2 z {L 0 0 cc 0 0 0 0 0 0 ® ®L Sww! w'wwwl L �►.Iwwwwl•Owwwi•�Il w w Obi' ■► ■►jdiw\ \ww■1° . - w�www -mowoi� m -w. N1 1wu ®ww w wwwwwww■�wlr■w ww � =w = =ww1EN•� in Elmo e w ww ii ■ ' 'ww w� i■■wwwiw■www■■■wwww�l■w_w M1 a ■1I /II - ■ wow wl•wwwwwlwwwl>w111ow -� ■wi•w■ 1•11•11 w■w■wwwwwwwwww� w 11111111..w ® ®w �wwiwiw� ■ ewr7 mommag wwwwwwwwwwimila aiiiuii oiw ■alai .=11111 :wow ∎wow ∎wW ∎5 - 1181 -_^� ■w■�1�1•I�� 1 ∎41 ■w■ idwc�l ■c :�w>tua■wwoi�iwwwwwe lww_■wiw■ I 1 �wwiwMwwwwww®IiOwwww •• ∎•L■MMIll iiilw�iiwiwli�wtwiw■ii�rwwif�■ •ooiiwem• al Iwi l�w ■■w■w■wiw•1riwlww�l�ww1■�w■w■11` ■ ■�ww1• ■ ®�■ wwwwww■•wwwwwwwww_ �U ��. C I I ® ®� w====wwt7wwQ1c111Dw ••w E...F�.IV._ ®, -_ t] om wwwwwwl•wwww mminim ®wwww� i sm ■ � ww_ww••wwwwwwwwww ®�►s�ww►5�� a .w_ ••••••-- M1211 11•111•1111.111111 11•111•1111.111111 1 �' !, �w ■ww� � w�■wwww■wwwwiwwwiw �_ ■.'-7.o I w=ww =wwww1311t7ww7w1•w ■ Mahal www >www■w11♦■Iwwww■wliw. "- Iwi / ®G Male • www ww■ww>•ww■wwwlwi�- - PEN ' 1 1 A ;. iw � wwwww wwww��w�>•ww v 0 1 0 iw6►ZI� 1 a_1wIN�w _ w�wlN� i ♦1111111 ■: Iw\ 1� 0 0 _ _ =MIME 17411111•111011•••111111M•1•1•111111•61 alb.,> w .W; w S�KIM / � N E/� ww` ■ � DOWN= MINI III= ill∎MI =al tail ■■_w_.11 , I m o- ••••••w 1•••l•RMw■•••_u1111 PEN TO ABOVE w■■ isommu wwwww■■■ • w■��■w11•111.111111111•11111111 o i01CwwQtww. • "M /IMMO ••w••wwwwww w••1.- III P■■iwlwiwl•11111111w•■111• ••••■O 9 GA 891100R. AARE'AT PERIMETER SUPPORTING, MAN RUNNERS (8' MAX FROM EDGE) - 9T GA HANGER WIRE AT EACH CORNER OF ALL LIGHT FIXTURES AND ALL 01969 EQUIPMENT WHICN NPOSES ADDED YACHTS TO ()IDLING SYS1ED RECESSED LIGHT 41010RE -_ :ACOUSTIAL'11LE -SEE FIN SCHFDUIE GROSS RUNNER TEE MAN RUNNER TEE ,41 NORTH REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 1/8 = 1'4" 10 MAX. 9.0X. LATERAL. BRACING HIRE5. 2' MAX. , FROM DM RU974 4 AND CROSS. RUNNER '.JNTERSEC11ON AT'APPROX. 45' EACH :QIRECIJON: LOCATE AT 12'- 0'. MAX. CEILING- S NOT.-10 : SCALE 21. IA A% PP RI DETAIL 1••w•w1•1wwwww •wol.11Ewo111•11E1 NMI ••w i�ii��ii O 0 Mill w wMMw wIII o o v ■►./w ©MEMO •311E'•11 . I.,-. MI .■wll•www•••111l w. wwwiwww WALL ANGLE TRIM TIP. ATPETDYEEER POP RIVET ALL TEES TO WALL ANGLE, 099. 9 GA. HANGER ACRE AT 4-0' O.C. EACH WAY MAX GENERAL CONSTRUCTION YPE 2 105 Y� 1 PE 1 0 LAY - IN CEILING SCHEDULE: TYPE 1: ARMSTRONG 'IQ1AT0110 CORIECA' 81 ARMSTRONG 'PRELUDE' SUSPENSION SYSTEM. TYPE 2 294 DER PANELS' IN ARMSTRONG'PRFIIRIE' SUSPENSION SYSTEM W/ HODOAN CUPS, OR APPROVED EQUAL SUSPENSION 0151018 AND 'FRP PANELS' TO BE BLACK COLOR TO MATCH ADJ. WALL SURFACES. NEW CONSTRUCTION GENERAL NOTES: 1. CONTRACT EMS OPTION: REUSE EXISTING CFIL8NG SUSPENSION SYSTEM (AS APPLICABLE) AT NEW LOCATIONS. COMPONENTS SHALL MATCH FEW an MR AS CLOSELY AS POSORLE, AND SHALL BE USED BASED UPON ACCEPTANCE BY 0989005 REPRESENTATIVE 2. TINE ELECT. WRINGS SHALL DOCUMENT LOCATIONS OF EXIT LIGHTS AND OTHER LIFE SAFETY EQUIPMENT. 3. ALL CEILING TILE SHALL BE INSTATED MTH THE PATTERN 131.919190 N DE SAME DIRECTION. 4. REFER TO MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL CRANKS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MD REQUIREMENTS. 5. CERARG SUSPENSION SHALL BE ADEQUATE 10 CARRY LOAD OF CEING SYSTEM. CEJUNG MOUNTED EQUIPMENT SHALL BE INDEPENDENTLY SUPPORTED. 600140 AND EQU99ENT SUPPORT MEMBERS SHALL BE 0ED TO 196 89210NG STRUCTURE. 6. ALL LIGHTING FIXTURES ROLL. BE ATTACHED TO THE SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM. THE ATTACHMENT DEVICE SHALL HAVE THE CAPACITY Cr 100 PERCENT OF THE FIXTURE VEQHT ACTING IN ANY DIRECTION. 7. 9 GA HANGER IMRE SNAIL ATTACH 13E GRID RIKR TO THE STRUCTURE ABOVE M1HIN 2' OF EACH CORNER OF EACH FIXTURE TANDEM FIXTURE MAY UTIUZE 03R/0N MKS. 8. 50HT FIXTURES NEIGHING LESS THAN 56 PMINO5 SHALL HAVE (2) 9 GA HANGER MKS CONNECTED FROM THE FIXTURE HOUSING TO THE STRUCTURE ABOVE. THESE WIRES MAY BE STACK. LIGHT FIXIU9ES NEIGHING 56 POUNDS OR YORE SHALL BE SUPPORTED DIRECTLY FR08J THE STRUCTURE ABM BY APPROVED HANGERS. 9. 9 GA VERTICAL HANGER WIRES KITH NOT LESS THAN 3 TIGHT TURNS. 9 GA BRACING WIRES MTH 4 TIGHT TURNS. MAKE ALL TIGHT TURNS INTHN A DISTANCE OF 1-1/2". g 10. SUSPENDED CBUN 14 G 91 COMPLY KITH THE RECARRENTS OF THE 4 U.B.C. STANDARDS N0. 25 -2. META IIEO 9 SYSTEMS 10 9 FOR 1/404 FO THE AND R LAY-EN PANEL EL CEILINGS, AND INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO CURRENT OA REQUREMQI15 IS FOR LATERAL IRATE BRACING AND LIGHT FIXTURE TUNNE SUPPORTS. 11. CERRIG 521111 TO MEET A CLASS 2 FLAME SPREAD IN ALL AREAS 12 SPLICES AND INIERSECTICNS Cr RUNNERS SHALL BE ATTACHED NTH MECHANICAL INTERLOCKING CONNECTORS SUCH AS POP RIVETS, SCREWS, PINS OR RATES 911H BENT TABS CR OTHER APPROVED CONNECTORS 13. SE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR LOCATIONS OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK. 14. AT LOCATIONS MERE NEW OPENINGS OCCIAR N EXISTING MEII.WINE FLOOR STRUCTURE, ATTACH FRAMED PARTITIONS TO UNDERSIDE OF FLOOR C 1ERI NAME Se BELOW CEILING. ATTACH CEILING TO PARTITION 6 BRACE AS REQUIRED. 15. LAY-19 CEI0NG PANELS IN ROOMS 002, 183, 113E 114 SHALL BE NUMBERED W/ 11/2' H. LABELS BELOW ALL SMOKE DETECTORS SEE ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS: NEW 2.4 CEILING SYSTEM RETURN AIR GRILLE 0 SUPPLY DIFFUSER FLUORESCENT RECESSED LIGHT FIXTURE ® EXIT LIGHT SURFACE 61D. STRIP FIXTURE NOTE SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR EXISTING E NEW LIGHTING. CITY OF MORAL APPROVED 1 JUL.2 8 1098 AS NOTED RPAB 01' 89 OFNUQFA N J11 0199 M ikmAGENTEN HEET..; REGISTERED CHITECT' / CRNG D. STATE OF. YYSMIEMB 1/7 SIX v 0 Z 0 n w 0 0 9, m to 0 Z m a J a C7 z V w cc 1- U w J w W 0 0. 01 O W N DOOR SCHEDULE 0o0R FRAME Hdwe, No. 'Size Type ' Moth Finish Type Mall. Finish 10b6 Group Note, 1 6' -0" x 7-0" (E) - 1 Existing to remain. 1 -, HM PL 1 HM PT 1 HR. 5 - SEW PL 1 HM PT 20 MIN. 10 4 3' -0" z 7' -0 1 SEW PL 1 HM PT 20 MIN. 100 5 3' - x 7' -0" 1 SCW PT 1 HM PT 20 MIN. 100 6 3' -0" z 7' -0" 1 HM - PT 1 HM PT 1 HR. 3 7 3' -O" z 7' -0" 1 HM PT 1 HM PT 1 HR. 3 8 HM PT 1 HM PT 1 HR. 12 9 8' -0" x 7' -0" 2 HM PT 2 HM PT 1 HR. 13 10 3' -0" x 7' -0" 1 HM PT 1 HM PT 1 HR. 12 11 3' - x 7' -0" (E) - HM PT - HM PT - 8 Existing to re 12 12' -0" x 10' -0" (E) - 511 - - 511 - - 17 Exiting to remain. 13 12' -0" x 10'-0" (0) - 511 - - 051 - - 17 Existing to remain 14 3' -0" z 7' -0" (0) - HM PT - HM P7 - 8 Existing to remain. 15 6' -0" 0 7' -0" 2 HM PT 2 HM PT 1 HR. 13A 16 3' -0" x 7' -0" 1 HM PT 1 HM PT 1 HR. 11 17 3' -0" z 7' -0" 1 HM PT 1 HM FT 1 HR. 11 18 3' -O" x 7' -0" 1 HM. PT 1 HM PT 1 HR. 11 Install door above concrete curb DOOR SCHEDULE NOTES: 1. NEW 000R AND FRAMES TO BE PAINTED PER ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE 2. DOOR SCHEDULE ABBRENARONS AL - ALUMINUM 511. - STEEL HM - HOLLOW METAL PT - PANT 5CW - SOUD CORE WOOD PL - PLASTIC.. LAMINATE 3. EXISTING DOOR HARDWARE TO BE REPLACED PER HARDWARE SCHEDULE REFRIGERATOR PL LAIN. BASE CABINETS NOTE: "BLOC( -OUT" CERAMIC TILE O ACCESSORIES INDCAIF.D. ROOM 107- 106 (REVERSED) 1/4" — —0" BREAK ROOM - ROOM 108 1/4" = 1' -0" 2430165 293011E MOP RA 18 "x36' MIRROR SOAP DISP -P.T. DISP 0 DOOR TYPES 6ATHROOM /JANITOR ACCESSORY SCHEDULE TOILET PAPER DISPENSER (2) REQUIRED BOBRICK B-6977 PAPER 10961 DISPENSER (3) REQUIRED 808006 B -282 GRAB BAR AS I NDICATED 130611106 6 -6800 SERIES SOAP DISPENSER 2) REQUIRED E10131601( B-4112 190600 2) REQUIRED 8089106 8 -292 SERIES 140P RACK 1) REQUIRED 6086100 B-221:36 N01E: GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE /INSTAI1 DE FOLLOWING APPUANCES: - REFRIGERATOR - GE 16X18010 OR APPROVED EQUAL, COLOR- WHITE ON WRITE - DISHWASHER - GE 05111930011W OR APPROVED EQUAL, COLOR - 9191E ON WHITE - MICROWAVE OVEN - GE JE12409N OR APPROVED EQUAL COLOR- WHITE 1/4" = 1' -0" 1/4" = 1' -0" CERAMIC 5LL 2430165 (2)103086 ' 2'10 ". MIN. TOILET PAPER HOLDER NOTE: CERAMIC TILE TO CONTINUE ON 0600000160 WALLS (11P). ROOM 107 - 106 (REVERSED) PL LAN. WALL CABINETS PL LAN. BASE CABINETS BREAK ROOM - ROOM 108 CABINETS PL LAN. COUNTERTOP E 4" COAT. OACKSPLASH CONTINUOUS - SEALANT (TYP) CONTINUOUS DRIP PAN - 0%1511AC RO0F DECK 66" TYPE 'X" GYP BO N.T.S. TYPICAL THROUGH -WALL PIPING DETAIL STEEL SANDS DEFLECTION HEAD DETAIL 1 1/2" _ — 0" 5 243095 - - -�- -DRAW TO FLOOR GRAN. SERVICE SINK OR 11.16U -WALL DRAIN P11190 O BOTH SIDES CONT. 764" VIDE z 023 z 'FIRE TRAK' STEEL RLINNER 6" 20 GA STEEL STUDS W/ 66' TYPE "X" GWB BOTH SIDES REFRIGERANT PIPING 8'012",CON1. CONCRETE CURB W/ COA1. K TOP 0 60T. - CUT EAST. CONCRETE SLAB - POUR CURB TIGHT TO SLAB EDGE _ _ - CONT. HYDROPHILIC WATER STOP _ II II II II TI X11 -11 II 11 II BOM SIDES OF CIATB - MONF. II II 11 =11 11 BY GREEN 01REAK 60` WALL 1 C URB- DETAIL CONT. 2%2'AN' STEEL ANGLE FRAME WALL FRAME 0 OPENING - PAINT GYPSUM BASED. SETTING-5196 SEALANT, 66 DEEP -BOTH SIDES 1 1/2 = i' - 0" NOTE: CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE 3'-0',3 -0" OPENINGS AT FIVE (5) LOCATIONS FIELD VERIFY ACTUAL REQUIIRED OPENING (WAIT) DIMENSIONS AND LOCATIONS DURING CONSTRUCTION. SEE ELECTRICAL WALL PENETRATION DETAIL 1 1/2" = 1' -0" ARIES - SE WALL TYPES CERAMIC DE WHERE 5110101 ON FINISH SCHEDULE 66' GW6 EA SIDE DOUBLE STUDS -20 GA —STUD ANCHORS (3 PER JAMB. TYP.) HOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAME GROUT FRAME FULL HOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAME DETAIL TYP. INTERIOR PARTI5ON - 5EE PLANS 11 WALL TYPES 31A TYPE CS -195. INTUMESCENT SHEET OVER WALL OPENING - TO BE USED IN CONJJNCTION W/ CANTY MATERIAL (3M- F5-195 CR EQUAL) AND SEALING MATERIALS (39- CP2598 S NPS-2 OR EQUAL) AT WALL PENETRATIONS FIELD VERIFY ACTUAL REQUIREMENTS MIN. - TYP. CITY OF TUKWILA APPROVED JUL 2 8 1998 AS N01EU' BUILDING - OlVIBIQN C rr YO FTUKYRLA JU PERMRCENIER PARTIAL ROOF PLAN 1/16" = 1' -0" EXISTING R -19 BATT INSUL MID V.B. EXIST. BUILT -UP ROOF, ROOF DECK t ROOF STRUCTURE NOTE: AT LOCATIONS MERE EXISTING ROOF INSULATION MID V.B. ARE DAMAGED OR REMOVED AS A RESULT OF NEW CONSTRUCTOR REPLACE AND /OR PATCH TO MATCH EXISTING CONSTRUCTION AND PRONDE CONTINUOUS THERMAL AND MOISTURE BARRIER. APPLY 3M 'PANTHER' SHADING TO THE. INTERIOR SIDE OF "SECOND LEVEL' GLAZING 0 NORTH AND SOUTH ELEVATIONS R-11 BATT . W/ 6 M JH8. 6 t6' METAL FRAMING NEW SUSPENDED.? CEIUNG SYSTEM. SEE SHT. A3.1 14' TEMP. HAROUO OVER 6' METAL FRAMIND-t R -11 BATT INSUL VA/ 6 MIL V.B, OVER EXIST. STOREFRONT ROOF TOP MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT RILL BE SCREENED BY EXISTING PARAPETS. EXISTING OATS TO BE REMOVED. NRLL YAM Y' PLYWOOD ATHING. ROOF SHEATHING MIND RE -ROOF SEE DETAIL $ THIS SHEET. TYPICAL OF 8 EXIST. TILT-UP CONCRETE PANEL EXIST. ALUM. STOREFRONT SYSTEM El as i¢33 NOTE: CONTRACTOR TO PATCH ALL PENETRATIONS IN THE EXISTING BUILT -UP ROOF TO COMPLETELY COVER ALL PENETRATIONS, WITH BUILT -UP ROOFING TO MATCH EXISTING. ELECTRIC UGHTWAVE - TUKWILA SWITCH FACILITY PIPE /CONDUIT PENETRATION 1 1/2" = 1' -0" 24 GA SHT. MIL. CURB ENCL. OVER (2) 2x8 TREATED MOOD CURB CONTINUOUS (2) 246 80. HEADER (TYP. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) TYPICAL ROOF CURB DETAIL 1 1 /2" = P-0" I. GLAZING CALCULATIONS: GROSS WALL AREA = 598,0 S.F C8A5 RE 6/ PERCENTAGE OF. WALL AREA = 12.40 2. U- FACTOR = 0.58 3. SHARING COEFFICIENT = 0.52 LOBBY FINISH TOP EDGE OF GM IV /. CONT., TOLE BE PAINT,TT MATCH WALL M' GWB OVER 6' -\ METRE FRAMING AND R-T1 BATT INSUL t 6 MIL 613. VENT PIPE OR STEEL CONDUIT PIPE SEAL W/ ADJ. COLLAR t ALUMINUM BASE FLASHING 12' NOTE EXISTING ROOFING TO BE REMOVED TO ALLOW INSTALLATION OF NEW BBB. EXIST. ROOFING AND INSULATION OVER PLYWOOD SHEATHING 4' CANT. 24 GA GALV. SHT. NTE • COUNTER FLASHING OVER NEW BASE FLASHING MOPPED TO EXISTING ROOF EXIST. ALUM. STOREFRONT SYSTEM 18 GA GAM SHEET METAL ENCL098E-CRO55BREM( TO DRAIN SHEET METAL OR FLEX -TUBE COLLAR 24 GA GALV. S.M. TRANSITION COLLAR 24 GA. GALV. S.M. COUNTER FLASHING 0148 2.46 P.T. ROOF CURB t CANT PIPE PENETRATION FLASHING ENCLOSURE 11/2" =1' -0" EXIST. ROOFING AND INSULATION OVER PLYWOOD SHEATHING 1 1 /2" = 1' -0" NEW 3-PLY BUILT-UP ROOF (TO MATCH EXISTING) OVER 4' PLYWOOD SHEATHING EXTEND ROOFING MIN. 12' OVER EXISTING - ALL SEWS. NEW 246 SUPPORT HEADER ATTACHED TO EXISTING HEADERS SKYLIGHT INFILL DETAIL SUITE t 50 MATCH BUILDING STANDARDS TWO COLOR 3M SCOTCH CAL VOC - PARS NOS. AND 'CAMERA READY° ARTWORK TO BE PROVIDED BY ELECTRICAL LIGHTWAVE EXISTING SKYLIGHT TO BE REMOVED AND RETURNED TO BUILDR10 OWNER (TYP. 1I (5) FIVE LOCATIONS) 1 I I I I REMOVE EXISTING BASE I I FLASHING NOTE: NEW PLYWOOD ROOF SHEATHING TO 8E SET IN CONTINUOUS MASTIC AT NEW HEADER PRIOR TO NAILING. G0I12 OF TUKWDU "" - APPROVED JUL 28:1998 OS NO (ED OFSIIN! IOADC, '..ROOF SNOW LOA , 25 PSF ROOF DEAD LOAD .15 PSF. CABLE TRAY FRAME LOAD - - 30 PSF SEISMIC: ZONE" 3 SEISMIC COEFKICIENT;.CA ..36 IMPORTANCE FACTOR — ?`• PER NER'S REQUEST CITY OF TUIW[A APPROVES JUL 28 .199$ AS NOIES BUILOING, DIVI5IG)J OFNFRAI • THE STRUCTURAL CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS REPRESENT THE FINISHED STRUCTURE. THEY DO NOT INDICATE THE METHOD OF CONSTRUCTION. THE STRUCTURE IS DESIGNED TO BE A STABLE UNIT AS A COMPLETED WHOLE. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO DESIGN, ERECT AND INSPECT TEMPORARY SHORES, BRACES, ETC. TO SUPPORT THE STRUCTURE AGAINST ALL ANTICIPATED LOADS INCLUDING GRAVITY, WIND AND LATERAL EARTH PRESSURE UNTIL ITS COMPLETION. OBSERVATION VISITS TO THE SITE BY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER SHALL NOT INCLUDE INSPECTION OF THESE METHODS OF CONSTRUCTION.' CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL SHALL BE PLACED ON FRAMED FLOORS AND ROOFS SUCH THAT THE DESIGN LIVE LOADS ARE NOT EXCEEDED.. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS, ELEVATIONS AND SITE CONDITIONS PRIOR TO STARTING CONSTRUCTION. RESOLVE ANY DISCREPANCY WITH THE ARCHITECT. WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS SHALL COMPLY WITH THE LATEST EDITIONS OF THE UNIFORM BUILDING CODE AND TESTING STANDARDS. NOTES AND DETAILS ON -THE DRAWINGS TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER THE GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES AND TYPICAL DETAILS. WHERE NO SPECIFIC DETAILS ARE SHOWN. CONSTRUCTION SHALL CONFORM TO SIMILAR WORK ON THE PROJECT. 'TYPICAL" DETAILS ARE NOT FLAGGED ON THE DRAWINGS. BUT APPLY UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. COORDINATION. ALL DRAWINGS ARE CONSIDERED TO BE PART OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATING THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS AMONG THE SUBCONTRACTORS PRIOR TO START OF CONSTRUCTION. ANY DISCREPANCIES THAT ARE FOUND SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ARCHITECT PRIOR TO'START OF CONSTRUCTION. ANY WORK PERFORMED IN CONFLICT WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS OR ANY CODE REQUIREMENTS SHALL BE CORRECTED BY THE CONTRACTOR AT HIS OWN`EXPENSE AND AT NO EXPENSE TO THE OWNER OR ARCHITECT. - - COORDINATION SHALL INCLUDE. BUT NOT BE LIMITED TO. VERIFYING THE LOCATION AND WEIGHT OF ALL MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AS WELL AS THE SIZE AND LOCATION OF ALL MECHANICAL OPENINGS IN ROOFS, FLOORS AND WALLS. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON 'THE DRAWL NGS, DO NOT PENETRATE ANY STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS SUCH AS BEAMS. COLUMNS, WALLS. SLABS. ETC. WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER THROUGH THE ARCHITECT. - SHOP DRAWINGS: THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW AND APPROVE ALL SHOP DRAWINGS PRIOR TO ENGINEERING REVIEW. - SPFC I AI INSPECTIONS • THE OWNER WILL EMPLOY AN ICBO CERTIFIED SPECIAL INSPECTOR TO PROVIDE INSPECTION OF'THE FOLLOWING ITEMS PER UBC SECTION 1701 AND THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE APPROPRIATE LOCAL JURISDICTION: WELDING: DURING ALL STRUCTURAL WELDING INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO JOISTS, BEAMS, COLUMNS, BRACING;,'' STEEL DECK, HEADED STUDS,' REINFORCING STEEL, ETC. HIGH STRENGTH. BOLTING: - DURING BOLT - INSTALLATION AND TIGHTENING OPERATIONS. I'997 EDITION OF THE UNIFORM BUILDING CODE. RENFRAI STRUCTURAL NOTE$ CTRIICTLIRAI STFFI • ROLLED SHAPES AND PLATES, TUBULAR STEEL BOLTS EXPANSION BOLTS ADHESIVE ANCHORS FABRICATION AND ERECTION: WELDING: BOLTS: GENERAL: PREFABRICATED WOOD "I" JOISTS: UJMIRKITOt( A'RRP(ION c ORRlC4AI -5 ASTM A36, Fy = 36 KSI ASTM A500 GRADE B, Fy = 46 KSI ASTM A325 U.N.O. HILTI KWIC BOLT II HILTI HY 150 ANCHOR SYSTEM LATEST AISC AND ABS CODES APPLY. FABRICATE AND ERECT IN ACCORDANCE WITH LATEST EDITION OF AISC 'SPECIFICATION FOR DESIGN, FABRICATION AND ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR BUILDINGS'. SPLICING OF STRUCTURAL MEMBERS IS NOT PERMITTED UNLESS NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS. ALL BEAMS SHALL BE ERECTED WITH THE NATURAL CAMBER UPWARDS. SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO FABRICATION. ALL WELDING BY HAVING CURRENT EXPERIENCE IN TYPE OF WELD SHOWN ON DRAWINGS OR NOTES. CERTIFICATES SHALL BE THOSE ISSUED BY AN ACCEPTED TESTING AGENCY. ALL WELDING SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LATEST EDITION OF AWS "CODE FOR ARC AND GAS WELDING IN BUILDING CONSTRUCTION ". USE E70 SERIES LOW HYDROGEN ELECTRODES. ALL WELDS ON DRAWINGS ARE SHOWN AS SHOP WELDS. SHOP WELDS AND FIELD WELDS SHALL BE SHOWN ON SHOP DRAWINGS. ALL BOLTS, ANCHOR BOLTS, EXPANSION BOLTS, ETC., SHALL BE INSTALLED WITH STEEL WASHERS. TYPE N. BOLTS PER LATES EDITION OF AISC "SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURAL JOINTS USING ASTM A325 OR 490 BOLTS' AND MAY BE TIGHTENED TO THE SNUG -TIGHT CONDITION AS DEFINED BY AISC UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. HILTI BOLTS AND ANCHORS MAY BE SUBSTITUTED WITH AN APPROVED ICBO RATED PRODUCT. DO NOT NOTCH OR DRILL JOISTS, BEAMS OR LOAD BEARING STUDS WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVAL OF THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER THROUGH THE ARCHITECT. ALL NAILS SHALL BE COWAIN NAILS. ALL NAILING NOT NOTED SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH TABLE 23 -1-0 OF THE LATEST EDITION OF THE UNIFORM BUILDING CODE. ALL FRAMING ANCHORS AND CONNECTORS SHALL BE AS MANUFACTURED BY SIMPSON COMPANY OR OTHER APPROVED EQUAL WITH CBS CERTIFICATION. ALL NAIL HOLES IN FRAMING ANCHORS AND CONNECTORS SHALL BE FILLED WITH NAILS PER MANUFACTURERS PUBLISHED NAIL SIZES. ALL BOLTS SHALL BE ASTM A307 BOLTS INSTALLED WITH STEEL WASHERS. ALL EXPANSION BOLTS SHALL BE HILTI KWIK BOLT II OR AN APPROVED ICBO RATED PRODUCT. PROVIDE JOISTS AS MANUFACTURED BY STANDARD STRUCTURES INC OR AN APPROVED SUBSTITUTE WITH A CURRENT ICBO APPROVAL. DESIGN, FABRICATE AND ERECT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE APPLICABLE ICBO REPORT. JOIST. MANUFACTURER SHALL SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS AND CALCULATIONS FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO FABRICATION. PROVIDE SEALED CALCULATIONS BY A CIVIL OR STRUCTURQ. ENGINEER REGISTERED -IN THE STATE IN WHICH THE PROJECT IS LOCATED FOR ALL JOISTS. CALCULATIONS SHALL INCLUDE DEFLECTION AND CAMBER REQUIREMENTS. FRAMING LUMBER: BASE VALUES FOR DIMENSION LUMBER Fb (PSI) SPECIES MEMBER SINGLE Fv(PSI) E(PSI) Ft/ /(PSI) A GRADE 4X MEMBERS 2% MEMBERS 875 95 1,690,000 850 75 1,300,000 1250 - HEM FIR #2 300 DOUG FIR #2 FRAMING LUMBER SHALL COMPLYTWITH THE LATEST EDITION OF -THE GRADING RULES OF THE WESTERN PRODUCTS:ASSOCIATION OR THE WEST COAST CO.-.., LUMBER INSPECTIONS BUREAU; -ALL SAWN`LUMBER SHALL BE STAMPED`WITH THE GRADE' MARK OF`AN`APPROVED GRADING AGENCY'., MOISTURE � .CONTENT SHALL NOT EXCEED' 19X. 2 z N O FA. O w 0 I 0 w I- U Q O co co co O Z m • O 0 OS w n J cc F 0 Q I Co -J w z w 0 U) w I 0 z CITY 'OF TUKWILA APPROVED JUL 2 8 1998 As RCMP BUILDING DIVISION RECENEO CRY CFTTUK'MLA ... . JU41 81998 PERMIT CENTER PER . PLAN 11' -11 3/8" FLOOR PLAN I/8• = 1'-0• ri ri 12' 4 5/8" 3' -6 5/8" P5500 UNISTRUT 0 5 -0" O.C.: FRAME LENGTH, 2' -0" CANTILEVER n EACH SIDE FRAMING PLAN 1/e• . 1'-6" BASE PLATE DETAIL BM PER P 3/8" R W/ (2) 3/4" A325 BOLTS 1L 3/B" SHEAR R 3/1 PER: PLAN 1.DRYPACK W/� 0 3TS /4'0 EPDXY ANCHOR AND LEVELING NUTS_ . (3• MIN: EMBED) EXIST TS 3 /8 "O"UX' -6 1/2' 3/16 BEAM TO EXIST COL CONN 1 1/2" -I-6 BM PER PLAN OLTS W/ (2) 3/4 "B 4325 B TS PER PLAN BEAM TO BEAM CONN 1 1/2 ".1'-0' 1 4. 3" BEAM TO COL CONN 11/2• -,•-0" NOTE: AT ONE SIDED CONNECTIONS SUPPLY 3/8 ", STIFFENER PLATE OPPOSITE SHEAR PLATE 1/4 1/2" CAP P . W/ (4) 3/4"B 4325 BOLTS BM PER PLAN W/ (4) 3/4"A 1/2" 25 BOLTS 3/16 3/8" KNIFE R I1 5/16 's W W I U) 0 41 I 0 A 0 "S< CO 8 EE O EXI5T 6 3/4'x37'1/ ' GLB � J06L PER PAN 2E MAKER 0601 412 (R CITY OF TUI6VILA APPROVED JUL 281998 AS NOSED BUILUM3 010191011 �y7 OF NIN6U JUL 1 0'1998 PERMITCE MEEK'. NOTES: F O EXIST 6 3/4'x37' I/2 610 C 1p a IYP. 1. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY EXISTING DIMENSIONS AND COORDINATE BEAM SPACING 1WTH MECHANICAL UNIT BASES. PARTIAL ROOF PLAN SCAM 1 /6'.x -0' \ 2. INDICATES APPROXIMATE MECHANICAL UNIT SIZE AND LOCATION. SEE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR SPECIFIC LOCATIONS. C ] PROVIDE MOUNTING PLATE FOR MECHANICAL UNIT. ALSO PROVIDE RUBBER VIBRATION ISOLATORS BETWEEN SUPPORT _ _ AND EQUIPMENT. EXIST JOIST it (REF) W /(2) 3/4' 0 (TYP) BOLTS L4x4x1 /4 4x6 BLOCKING 0 ALL LOCATIONS 'WHERE 4x6 BM CROSSES NEW JOIST EXIST 2x6 (REF) A34 ANCHORS 0 EA END OF 8160 4634 ANCHORS 0 4' -0' O.C. JOIST P56 PUN 1 1/2'-1'-0' EXIST SHEATHING CONNECTION DETAIL m 0 —J CC W 0 U. 0 U. M- 0 1- 0 F cc w w I 1n TYPICAL WOOD ROOF CURB CONNECTION DETAIL DETAIL 1 1/2'-x-0' - 1 1/2' ■1-0' 1 1/2 41 3/16 4x6 BONG A34 ANCHORS 0 EA END OF 8LXG BM -'65 PER 88 pal :'Pus :'. 13x30/16,0' - 3`.(04129 EA. SIDE. OF BEAN W / {2) 5/8%1/44' LG 'BOLTS AND 8'MS BOLT A LOC*1I E 4x6 B1/: CROSSES NEW JOIST COST SHEATHING EXIST 2x6 (RS') EXIST JOIST (REF) SHIM AS 6550 JOIST PER PLAN WEB STIFFENERS EXIST GLB PER PLAN (REF) I /4'x2' LAG SCREWS 3/16 BEM PER PLAN PLAN VIEW 64640/160Y-5' W/ (4) 5/8'0:2 1/2' LAG BOLTS 0 2' 0.C. `BEAM PER PUN 5/8 HH / BOLT W/ (2) 1/4 LAG SCREWS T3x1/4 W /1 END PLATES EXIST JOIST (REF) ANGLE PER 2/52.1 2' J' Jr 10' ' X 2 EXIST 4x12 W /(4) ANCHOR BOLTS JOIST PER PLAN WEE STIFFENERS NOTCH AS 6555 0 EXIST ANCHOR BOLTS 2x6 NAILER ANGLE PER 2/S2.1 TS PER 2/52.1 13iAc'A %PI : DOPLEXED WF SP - 2/ 'PROVIDE ACTERIYATOR CTN4T{00L$ RND 110(1 I` 01)4& 4 1 01005, G RAENOTES AND SCHEDULES M09 0vA0 SCHEDULES 01.0 FOUNDATIONR.10MBING 41.1 , PI`�N PLUMBING " 02.1 FLOOR PL/MA "HVAC. :I 82.2 14000 PIPING PLAN 82.3 RODE - PLAN MECHANICAL 63.1 ' FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM ZONE PLAN 03.2 1610110 SYSTEM 84.1 MECHANICAL DETAILS AND DIAGRAMS MECHANICAL ABBREVIATIONS MESH BUM CF C.C. CFM ORS ON DRWG DB EA E.C. EDB EWB 1A EXT FPM FP GALV GO C.C. GRO HTR FRG HP IH KW MNV 0NC M.C. MIN MCA NOM N.T.S. NO 060 OSA PH RH REQ RA RAT RET 1111/ SCH SENS SP 5A T� w WB 1000 BRITISH THERMAL UNITS PER HOUR BRITISH THERMAL UNITS PER HOUR CEILING FAN CONTROL CONTRACTOR CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE AIRFLOW DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH DOWN DRAWING DRY BULB EACH ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR ENTERING DRY BULB ENTERING WET BULB EXHAUST AIR EXHAUST OR FXHAUST AIR FAHRENHEIT FEET PER MINUTE FIELD PANEL GALVANIZED GAUGE GENERAL CONTRACTOR GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS HEATER HEATING HORSE POWER INTAKE HOOD KILOWATTS (1009. WATTS) MAXIMUM NECK VELOCITY MAXIMUM NOISE CRITERIA RATING MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR MINIMUM MINIMUM CIRCUIT RAPACITY NOMINAL 'NOT TO SCALE , NUMBER OPPOSED BLADE DAMPER OUTSIDE AIR PHASE RELIEF HOOD REQUIRED RETURN AIR RETURN AIR TEMPERATURE RETURN OR RETURN AIR RISE ROOF TOP UNIT SCHEDULE SENSIBLE STATIC PRESSURE SUPPLY AIR TRANSFER AIR TYPICAL WATTS WET BULB R EFRGERANT NOT GAS UNE' REFRIGERANT 5UCTINA•71NE' INDUSTRIAL COLD 8ATER PIPING FLIEL' GAS PIPING LVE GV ' 1GA1E VALVE - " 5V T" 50LEN008 VALVE : _ i BY . ,...9ALL 00 VA. OLV. GLOBC VALVE 50C S QUARE HEAO'00016 PTRV PRE55URE(TEMPERAIIRIE. RELIEF VALVE BTFV BUTTERFLYNALI£ CV CHECK VALVE' BALANCING VALVE ' - 2 - WAY CONTROL VALVE 3- WAY.00NTROL VALVE PIPE LIMON DIELECTRIC PIPE UNION MECHANICAL SYMBOL LEGEND AIR FLOW - SUPPLY SOV STRAIGHT -OUT VANE ASSEMBLY '`' AIR FLOW - RETURN - - -"'- AIR ROW - EXHAUST SUPPLY AIR DUCT TURNING TOWARD VIEWER %�- THERMOSTAT OR TEMPERATURE SENSOR L xj SUPPLY AIR DUCT TURNING AIR DUCTWORK 88104 ACOUSTIC LINING FROM VIEWER DUCT SIZE INDICATES INSIDE DIMENSION RETURN OR EXHAUST AIR DUCT TURNING TOWARD VIEWER 12 "D ROUND DUCT L '1 RETURN OR EXHAUST AIR DUCT MINING AWAY FROM VIEWER VD VOLUME DAMPER TAG FOR GRILLE, REGISTER OR DIFFUSER • P�£VS! LETTER REFERS TO AIR INLET /OUTLET SCHEDULE MD MOTORIZED DAMPER 41Q1� TOP LINE INDICATES NECK OR DUCT SIZE UNE INDICATES SUPPLY, RETURN, OR EXHAUST CENT AIR QUANTITY R RISE IN DUCT TO MATCH STRUCTURE �' SQUARE CEIUNG DIFFUSER - - 800 BACK DRAFT DAMPER / SQUARE CEILING RETURN GRILLE ��[� FLEXIBLE DUCT LINEAR CEILING SLOT DIFFUSER PLUMBING SYMBOL LEGEND SWABOL DESCRIPTION - - -SS- - - SS EXTERIOR SANITARY SEWER BY OTHERS - -- -ST- - - -- 5T EXTERIOR STORM SEWER BY OTHERS - - -WS- - - WS EXTERIOR WATER SERVICE BY OTHERS - - -FS- - - FS EXTERIOR PRE SERVICE BY OTHERS - - -GS- - - GS EXTERIOR GAS SERVICE BY OTHERS W 501L OR WASTE PIPING ABOVE GROUND W SOIL OR WASTE PIPING BELOW SLAB 0 INDIRECT DRAIN PPING ✓ PLUMBING VENT PIPING RWL RWL RAINWATER LEADER RWL0 RWL0 RAINWATER LEADER OVERFLOW CW COLD WATER PIPING HW HOT WATER PIPING HWC HOT_ WATER CIRCULATION PIPING ICW ICW INDUSTRIAL COLD WATER PIPING' 0 --„- 0 FUEL GAS PIPING ABBR. DESCRIPTION - - -o- --{- GV GATE VALVE SV SOLENOID VALVE BALL OR SHUT -OFF VALVE b - GIN GLOBE VALVE Dq --W- -- -.�k -- 0OC '251 PTRY PRES /TENPERATUREREIJEF VALVE .�1 BTFV BUTTERFLY VALVE ty CV. CHECK VALVE .. • FCO .... FLOOR CLEANOUT YCO YARD CLE4NW0 CO CLEANOUT PIPE UNION DIELECTRIC PIPE UNION ' BALANCING VALVE MARE HEAD COCK MINIMUM NORMALELECTRIC MOTOR FULL ,LOAD E , OPEN MOTORS ' CLOSED MOTORS RPM OPEN 0005080 T CL0010 0001000 HP 3.600 1,800 . 1,288 3.600 1;800 1.200 H - 3,600 1,600 1,200 3500 1,800 1,200 1.0 - 825 80.0 75,5 82.5 80 30 91 924 .. 924 - 91.0 92.4 91.7 1.5 825 84.0 „ 84.0 82.5 84.0 85.5 40.0 91 93.0 93.0 91.7 93 93.0 20 84.0 84.0 85 84.0 84.0 88,5 50.0 92 93.0 93.0 92.4 930 93.0 3.0 84.0 86.5 86.5 85.5 87.5 87.5 80.0 - 93.0 93.6 93 , 93.0 93.6 93.6 5.0 855 87.5 87 87.5 87.5 07.5 75 93.0 94.1 93.6 93.0 94.1 93.6 7.5 87.5 88 88 88.5 89.5 89.5 100.0 93.0 94,1 94 93 94 94.1 10 88.5 89.5 90.2 89.5 89 89 125 93 94 94 94 94 94,1 15 89.5 91.0 90.2 90.2 91.0 90.2 150.0 93.6 95.0 94.5 94 95 95.0 20.0 98.2 91.0 91 90.2 91.0 90.2 200.0 94.5 95.0 94 95.0 95.0 95 25.0 91.0 91.7 91.7 91.0 92.4 91.7 • A5 REQUIRED BY 1995 WA. STATE NON- RESIDENTIAL ENERGY CODE. ENERGY CODE NOTES 1. ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE HEAT IS NOT ALLOWED AS PRIMARY HEAT SOURCE, PER 1995 WASHINGTON STATE NREC SECTION 1302. 2. PROVIDE ALL SYSTEMS WITH THERMOSTAT LOCATED IN SPACE SERVED, PER 1995 WASHINGTON STATE NREC SECTION 1412.1. 3. ZONE THERMOSTATIC CONTROLS SHALL BE CAPABLE OF A DEADBAND OF AT LEAST 5'F PER 1995 WASHINGTON STATE NREC SECTION 1412.2. SEE SECTION 15900 OF SPECIFICATION. 4 PROVIDE A HUMIDISTAT TO ALL SYSTEMS EQUIPPED WITH A MEANS OF ADDING MOISTURE, PER 199 WASHINGTON STATE NREC SECTION 1412.4. SEE SECTION 15900 OF SPECIFICATION. 5. THE AUTOMATIC CONTROLS SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM OF 7 DAY TYPES WITH NIGHT SETBACK PER 1995 WASHINGTON STATE NREC SECTION 1412.4. SEE SECTION 15900 OF SPECIFICATION. 6. PROVIDE ALL OUTSIDE AIR INTAKES. EXHAUST IE RELIEF OUTLETS WITH WITH DAMPERS WHICH CLOSE AUTOMATICALLY WHEN SYSTEM IS OFF OR DURING POWER FALIURE, PER 1995 WASHINGTON STATE NREC SECTION 1422. 7. PROVIDE MODULATED OR STAGED COMBUSTION HEATING CONTROLS, PER 1995 WASHINGTON STATE NREC SECTION 1412.6. SEE SEC110N 15900 OF SPECIFICATION. 8. CONTROLS SHALL BE CAPABLE, 00 EVALUATING OUTSIDE AIR AND PROVIDING PARTIAL MECHANICAL COOLING PER 1995 WASHINGTON STATE NREC SECTION 1413.2 8 1413.3. SEE SECTION, 15900 OF SPECIFICATION. 9. DUCTWORK SHALL BE SEALED PER SMACNA STANDARDS, SEE SECTION 15840 OF SPECIFICATION. 10. DUCT INSULATION SHALL B PER 1995 WASHINGTON STATE NREC SECTION 1414.2. SEE SECTION 15250 OF SPECIFICATION. 11. PIPING INSULATION SHALL BE PER 1995 WASHINGTON STATE NREC SECTION 1415.1. SEE SECTION 15250 OF SPECIFICATIONS. 12. PROVIDE R -10 INSULATION UNDER- ALL ELECTRIC WATER HEATER TANKS, PER 1995 WASHINGTON STATE NREC SECTION 1441. 13. PROVIDE SHUT OFP CONTROLS FOR DOMESTIC. HOT WATER RECIRC PUMP, PER 1995 WASHINGTON STATE NREC SECTION 1442. 14. SYSTEMS SERVING ZONES WITH DIFFERENT USES SHALL BE SEPARATED OR ISOLATED, PER 1995 WASHINGTON STATE NREC SECTION 1432.1.. ' 15. CONTROLS SHALL: BE CAPABLE OF AUTOMATIC RESET OF SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE PER 1995- WASHINGTON STATE NREC SECTION 1432.2.1. SEE 1590D OF SPECIFICATION. 16: CONTROLS SHALL BE CAPABLE OF AUTOMATIC RESET OF SUPPLY WATER TEMRERATURE, PER 1995 WASHINGTON STATE NREC SECTION 1432. SE'SEClT(ON 15900 OF SPECIFICATION. 17. ZONES WITH SPECIAL PROCESS TEMPERATURE OR HUMIDITY REQUIREMENTS SHALL 'PE,SERVEOlY A SEPARATE AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, PER 1995 WASHINGTON STATE NREC SECTION 14344 I 18 CQNTRbLS SHALL HAVE,CAPABILITY TO P SIMULTANEOUS HEATING COOLING PER 1995' WASHINGTON STATE NREC SECON 1435. $EE [JCL 15900 OP SPECIFICATION, p011101001' SP -1. PROVIDE- 0 0 AT TER' ALARM' SIGALLS AND HIGH:' CTTP OFTU A 391,; 0 5998 PERMIT CENTER AIR-COOLED CONDENSER SOHEDULE .. , . _ TAG LOCAO FAN PERFORMANCE CONDENTR CONDENSER - 610010(081 REQUIREMENTS MANUFAC110001(10(0009 SWITCH FACILITY 01000T BERT SERES HP TOTAL NOISE HEAT , (ONNECTION' 0000. PUMP FAN 001 0 11 (,) 95099010'9001t9 0911 PO . WER CONNECTION - SET UNIT ON STEEL SUPPORT STRUCTURE W/ (4000500 A(4000500 ISOLATION 080. MAKE ALL REMARKS t MODEL SIZE REJECTION a CHRt 00440 EA (1(64 0110 0100 TS., 00 00060 , UQ 0-22 CAP. HP:- FL4 WATTS AMPS VOLTS 0 ELA 9009 00115 0 bila yaw ROOF 18090610009 AREA MODEL (603081 3 26'0 3/4 15,665 77.3 238,540 2 1-3/8 -- 1.1/8 105 -- 3 3/4 1.4 ... ..-, -- ,-- -- 65 15 460 CONNECTERS AND P001910 SER AC-I SWITCH FACILITY UEBERT 691 UNIT ON STEEL SUPPORT STRUCTURE W/ 918R01109 ISOLATION PAD MAKE ALL 41 0000 TRANSMISSION AREA MODEL 001(3001 . 3 26 3/4 15,665 77.3 238,540 2 1-3/8 . -- 1-1/8 105 -- 3 3/4 1.4 • 6.5 15 460 3 900 CONNECTIONS AND 905 1910 SERVICE. AC-2 - - SVNTCH 003000 010100 501 0+00 011 STEEL SUPPORT STRUCTURE W/ VIBRATION ISOLATION PAD. MAKE ALL bilk 0000 TRANSMISSION AREA MODEL (503081 3 26'0 3/4 15,665 77.3 238,540 2 1-3/8 -- 1-1/6 105 -. 3 3/4 1.4 -- -- -- - 6.5 15 460 -3 900 COM006109016060 AND PUT INTO SEINCE. AC-3 MITA (00.0(815 LIEBERT SET UNIT ON S1611 SUPPORT STRUCTURE W/ VIBRATION 10019000 P00. MAKE ALL Ty 0000 00064 60001 (017850 4 26'0 3/4 25.288 78.5 356.580 2 1-5/8 -- 1-1/8 186 -- 4 3/4 1.4 -- - -- - 8.5 15 460. 3 1400 CONNECTERS AND PUT INTI3 SERVICE. AC-4 COU.00ATE 001105 x - ., . SET UNIT 06 STEEL SUPPORT STRUCTURE W/ 9080500 00003006 PAD MAKE ALL 1414 ROOF ROOM MODEL CO3E480C 4 26°0 3/4 25,288 78.5 356,580 2 1-5/8 -- 1-1/8 186 -- 4 3/4 1.4 - '- -- 8.5 15 460 - 3 1400 CONNECTIONS AND PUT 0110 018805. 018805. AC-5 MAP UEBERT SET 0900 ON STEEL SUPPORT STRUCTURE W/ 8050009 ISOLATION PAD. MAKE ALL blk 7/8 ROOF ROOM MODEL PFCO37A 1 - 1/5 - i suc) -- 3/0 279 -- - - 14.9 25 208/230 3 CONFECTIONS AND PUT INTO 500(4(0. C6 ' PACKAGED ROOFTOP GAS/ELECTRIC AIR CONDITIONER SCHEDULE UNIT PERFORMANCE ELECTRICAL 01806(945919 FRIERS UNIT TAG LOCATION SERVES MANUFACTURER/MODEL SUPPLY FAN COOLING CAPACITY (9811) GAS 010560 (MBH) SUPPLY FAN RETURN FAN COMPRESSOR(S) CONOR FAN080(5) BURNER FAN UNIT' POWER CONNECTION WEIGHT REMARKS (0704 ESP BHP RPM DRIVE SONS TOTAL AAT 100 NB S/EER KW INPUT OUT EFF 9118 .609 0101 HP FLA 0. HP RLA 0 HP FLA HP 918 04CA 90(9 VOLT 0 SIZE 0A35 ROOF OVER ELECTRICAL . ROOM TRANS MODEL 01101030410 3060 . 75" 1 730 8011 763 895 95 75 61 10 9.9 150 122 81 35.5' 2 3.4 - 2 3.5 10 1 1 2.9 1/20 as 30 35 460 ;11/x0,220x2N2 1400 CONNECTIONS. MOUNT UNIT ON ROOF CURD, MAKE ALL ELECTRICAL ROOM K ROOF OVER MATERIALS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT TRANE MODEL 000037C41C 1080 .75" 0.33 1075 DIRECT 22.3 41.5 95 75 67 12 3.78 80 65 81 55' .30 1.9 - - 1 3 5.9 1 .25 .9 1/20 0.4 9.9 15 480 3 2 20.25 1900 CONNECTIONS MOUNT UNIT ON ROOF CURB, MAKE ALL MANAGEMENT ROOF OVER INERGEN ROOM WER ROOM 18091 MODEL YCD037C4LC (080 .75" 0.33 1075 DIRECT 28.1 36.0 95 75 61 12 3.78 80 65 81 55° 0Y25 1900 CONNECTIONS. MOUNT UNIT ON ROOF CURB, MAKE ALL MERGER ROOM PO ic ROOF OVER BREAK ROOM K AREA 10090 900(4. 000037C410 1449 .75" 0.33 1400 DIRECT 25.1 43.5 95 75 67 12 3.78 110 65 81 55' ,40 19 - - 3 5.9 1 .25 .9 1/20 0.4 9.9 15 460 3 2 20x25 1900 CONNECTIONS. . . . . MOUNT UNIT ON ROOF (088, MAKE ALL ELECTRICAL 08. WOR - . LOBBY . . RLE EITR IFSR AD LUE CEUE PROMNE A ECITO AUATRR i MDL 1114 RC 90 . 20 PROAE ELN EUN GIL /00901 BO. (1 EUG RTR /OT TTS PR SE DTL 5 HE 1. . . "= EDUIPAD 09 UPY AEOTT D IFSAJT 70 2 0 E R DFUO ATR EETC UT MUTD I S U " v 111 59 R 3OS 90 ELCIN OIOTL BAE, 7' SAAG U TE OSUTO. . . AJSAL, SEL CNTUTO, DSHRE AR PTEN A HW 00E CIIG DFUE 10 DA 50 2 0 O LN. (1 CIIG RTR RLE 11.0 PR 20 - - PROAE EUG RT O 0-9 CIN. CR 0(01 000 09' OU 0 4 - - L EG 000 ELN EUN - SRAE MUT DUTBE ETCL T OIOTL DSHRE RUD CIIG DFUE- TTS W 0 8 I L TE OSRCIN . 0,51114 NC EOIY MXMM NIE CIEI AIG . . FN EUPET SHDL A ECITO A EFRACIREI OO A A A 0911 EVS RS FN M RV IE CAS 0404S 4' RM 1 V H OT 0 R M OE OM A OF OE a PU iu LP GL R,, 7 2 /' - 15 92 _OE. FN - /5 15 1 ON N 909 CR / 0( RF O RN CNIUUL. Co( MDL 7(01 a RO VN JNTR 00k, MUT O OF CR / BC RF APR A W IEGN RO OLT (00010DRC 0 4 )' - 00 25 - 12 1 O RN (99001 810 WRRO CUID ROS HUS OK 901 0009 MSELNOS MCAIA QIMN OE EFRMN EUPET 1(10 190(048 60E EFRACF CPCT C OP 610 0 (010 WTR HAE 1 I8 OL EE4 Y NN SMLAEU 1 190 SN O CATICN COLLOCATE ROOM COLLOCA ROOM U08801 moon. UH-380A )2,00o 210 01 05,200 339,900 339,000 .q#0,430tafittifsawnlaiptk nook:STAND:. 'UNIT ON:R005:LEXIEND.CONDENSATE!DRAKTOARIN MOOR OR 11111IATEIC SENSCWZGOINNECT TO REFR16% PAN F ,...6 PIPE ANT TOCONDENSER 43N.ROOF.,•(1E4OvoNDENSA19 DRAM .70 kINNEL FL DRAIN. FLOWSTAND -SET i : V $,OIA■4117 0 9" Ail FLOOR STOW SETICM5 1(190801(9090960+41 10 ( .. ) STANDE10 UNIT.. Yol'& LIP81.1M• 6 IINIT.MOONTEDANi91:1801411.00R STAND; SET INISTARILESS STEEL DRAIN PAN WMAATE9 SENSOR. CONNECTAW TO PIPE REFRIGER/INT TO CONDENSER UNITMN-ROOFi, EXTEND .TWIMEATE ORMH:TO fliNtlEt. MOOR ORAN. ' MEMCfling *1 14' gam - ,;;■, f gnu Ei2.4 WONCESUCCOCEIBEE1 5 IZIOREMAM011'1°' - , A , 4 , 90°0E1111 ,3„- 2.`.3 206 T22.2 150 460 till 2tha6 - CANNISTER UMW( tORT MOUNMDIT_9 FLOOR.STAND, SET IN 01060055 STEEL DRAIN pas .161,31640-SENSOR,t,VpRIECTIC61.10 HUMIDIFIEV PlPf'REERICENANT TO CONDENSER . 3.2417.014-1100F. 0111861 CONDENSATE ORAN TO FUNNEL 01000' DRAIN: STANDBY UNIT, COLLOCATE ROOM - MAP ROOM DIRECT 26900 32,100 167 - 10.7 I GANNISIER , 25 1 114 :4.8 [° 6.5 I 1 - - I 35.5 40 "1'277 1 1848 HORIZONTAL 6061.1000900000 FROM ROOF STRUCTURE 1(80089 0111010 BOX ON UNIT 49039069 AIR CONNECTION. DUCT SUPPLY AND RETURN MR TO MAP ROOM. EXTEND CONOBASATE ORM1410sEmna SINK. CONNECT ICW TO 8091011166, PIPE REF. TO ROOF. L3M PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE HOT WATER • CO LU -J 3 0. uj .30 1.9 - - 1 3 5.9 1 .25 .9 1/20 0.4 9.9 15 460 3 2 2 CATICN RLE EITR IFSR AD LUE CEUE PROMNE A ECITO AUATRR i MDL 1114 RC 90 . 20 PROAE ELN EUN GIL /00901 BO. (1 EUG RTR /OT TTS PR SE DTL 5 HE 1. . . "= EDUIPAD 09 UPY AEOTT D IFSAJT 70 2 0 E R DFUO ATR EETC UT MUTD I S U " v 111 59 R 3OS 90 ELCIN OIOTL BAE, 7' SAAG U TE OSUTO. . . AJSAL, SEL CNTUTO, DSHRE AR PTEN A HW 00E CIIG DFUE 10 DA 50 2 0 O LN. (1 CIIG RTR RLE 11.0 PR 20 - - PROAE EUG RT O 0-9 CIN. CR 0(01 000 09' OU 0 4 - - L EG 000 ELN EUN - SRAE MUT DUTBE ETCL T OIOTL DSHRE RUD CIIG DFUE- TTS W 0 8 I L TE OSRCIN . 0,51114 NC EOIY MXMM NIE CIEI AIG . . FN EUPET SHDL A ECITO A EFRACIREI OO A A A 0911 EVS RS FN M RV IE CAS 0404S 4' RM 1 V H OT 0 R M OE OM A OF OE a PU iu LP GL R,, 7 2 /' - 15 92 _OE. FN - /5 15 1 ON N 909 CR / 0( RF O RN CNIUUL. Co( MDL 7(01 a RO VN JNTR 00k, MUT O OF CR / BC RF APR A W IEGN RO OLT (00010DRC 0 4 )' - 00 25 - 12 1 O RN (99001 810 WRRO CUID ROS HUS OK 901 0009 MSELNOS MCAIA QIMN OE EFRMN EUPET 1(10 190(048 60E EFRACF CPCT C OP 610 0 (010 WTR HAE 1 I8 OL EE4 Y NN SMLAEU 1 190 SN O 05,200 339,900 339,000 .q#0,430tafittifsawnlaiptk nook:STAND:. 'UNIT ON:R005:LEXIEND.CONDENSATE!DRAKTOARIN MOOR OR 11111IATEIC SENSCWZGOINNECT TO REFR16% PAN F ,...6 PIPE ANT TOCONDENSER 43N.ROOF.,•(1E4OvoNDENSA19 DRAM .70 kINNEL FL DRAIN. FLOWSTAND -SET i : V $,OIA■4117 0 9" Ail FLOOR STOW SETICM5 1(190801(9090960+41 10 ( .. ) STANDE10 UNIT.. Yol'& LIP81.1M• 6 IINIT.MOONTEDANi91:1801411.00R STAND; SET INISTARILESS STEEL DRAIN PAN WMAATE9 SENSOR. CONNECTAW TO PIPE REFRIGER/INT TO CONDENSER UNITMN-ROOFi, EXTEND .TWIMEATE ORMH:TO fliNtlEt. MOOR ORAN. ' MEMCfling *1 14' gam - ,;;■, f gnu Ei2.4 WONCESUCCOCEIBEE1 5 IZIOREMAM011'1°' - , A , 4 , 90°0E1111 ,3„- 2.`.3 206 T22.2 150 460 till 2tha6 - CANNISTER UMW( tORT MOUNMDIT_9 FLOOR.STAND, SET IN 01060055 STEEL DRAIN pas .161,31640-SENSOR,t,VpRIECTIC61.10 HUMIDIFIEV PlPf'REERICENANT TO CONDENSER . 3.2417.014-1100F. 0111861 CONDENSATE ORAN TO FUNNEL 01000' DRAIN: STANDBY UNIT, COLLOCATE ROOM - MAP ROOM DIRECT 26900 32,100 167 - 10.7 I GANNISIER , 25 1 114 :4.8 [° 6.5 I 1 - - I 35.5 40 "1'277 1 1848 HORIZONTAL 6061.1000900000 FROM ROOF STRUCTURE 1(80089 0111010 BOX ON UNIT 49039069 AIR CONNECTION. DUCT SUPPLY AND RETURN MR TO MAP ROOM. EXTEND CONOBASATE ORM1410sEmna SINK. CONNECT ICW TO 8091011166, PIPE REF. TO ROOF. AIR-COOLED CONDENSER SOHEDULE .. , . _ TAG LOCAO FAN PERFORMANCE CONDENTR CONDENSER - 610010(081 REQUIREMENTS MANUFAC110001(10(0009 SWITCH FACILITY 01000T BERT SERES HP TOTAL NOISE HEAT , (ONNECTION' 0000. PUMP FAN 001 0 11 (,) 95099010'9001t9 0911 PO . WER CONNECTION - SET UNIT ON STEEL SUPPORT STRUCTURE W/ (4000500 A(4000500 ISOLATION 080. MAKE ALL REMARKS t MODEL SIZE REJECTION a CHRt 00440 EA (1(64 0110 0100 TS., 00 00060 , UQ 0-22 CAP. HP:- FL4 WATTS AMPS VOLTS 0 ELA 9009 00115 0 bila yaw ROOF 18090610009 AREA MODEL (603081 3 26'0 3/4 15,665 77.3 238,540 2 1-3/8 -- 1.1/8 105 -- 3 3/4 1.4 ... ..-, -- ,-- -- 65 15 460 CONNECTERS AND P001910 SER AC-I SWITCH FACILITY UEBERT 691 UNIT ON STEEL SUPPORT STRUCTURE W/ 918R01109 ISOLATION PAD MAKE ALL 41 0000 TRANSMISSION AREA MODEL 001(3001 . 3 26 3/4 15,665 77.3 238,540 2 1-3/8 . -- 1-1/8 105 -- 3 3/4 1.4 • 6.5 15 460 3 900 CONNECTIONS AND 905 1910 SERVICE. AC-2 - - SVNTCH 003000 010100 501 0+00 011 STEEL SUPPORT STRUCTURE W/ VIBRATION ISOLATION PAD. MAKE ALL bilk 0000 TRANSMISSION AREA MODEL (503081 3 26'0 3/4 15,665 77.3 238,540 2 1-3/8 -- 1-1/6 105 -. 3 3/4 1.4 -- -- -- - 6.5 15 460 -3 900 COM006109016060 AND PUT INTO SEINCE. AC-3 MITA (00.0(815 LIEBERT SET UNIT ON S1611 SUPPORT STRUCTURE W/ VIBRATION 10019000 P00. MAKE ALL Ty 0000 00064 60001 (017850 4 26'0 3/4 25.288 78.5 356.580 2 1-5/8 -- 1-1/8 186 -- 4 3/4 1.4 -- - -- - 8.5 15 460. 3 1400 CONNECTERS AND PUT INTI3 SERVICE. AC-4 COU.00ATE 001105 x - ., . SET UNIT 06 STEEL SUPPORT STRUCTURE W/ 9080500 00003006 PAD MAKE ALL 1414 ROOF ROOM MODEL CO3E480C 4 26°0 3/4 25,288 78.5 356,580 2 1-5/8 -- 1-1/8 186 -- 4 3/4 1.4 - '- -- 8.5 15 460 - 3 1400 CONNECTIONS AND PUT 0110 018805. 018805. AC-5 MAP UEBERT SET 0900 ON STEEL SUPPORT STRUCTURE W/ 8050009 ISOLATION PAD. MAKE ALL blk 7/8 ROOF ROOM MODEL PFCO37A 1 - 1/5 - i suc) -- 3/0 279 -- - - 14.9 25 208/230 3 CONFECTIONS AND PUT INTO 500(4(0. L3M PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE HOT WATER • CO LU -J 3 0. uj FOUNDATION PLUMBING 1/Er = 1 DUPLEX r p,t g.F0 • 14 1 GEH4Wr '.4 • :,• tMS • : wAGkommi'd 444 i4a, • pir;14 •:VciirgbyrElfti§:ivOicirni °kit 3 WOO( SI**C420 Tb Ali#PLIOADLE CODES ANOtANDARDS UNLESS CCNIIIKCT DOCUMENTS ARE MORE STRINGENT. • 4. ARRANGE. AND PAY FOR ALL PERMITS, INSPECTIONS AND TEES REQUIRED IN CANNECTIOMIATEOHIS INSTALLATION. FURNISH ALL EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, LABOR, TOLLS, ETC., REWARD FOR DIE INSTALLATION OF THE COMPLETE AND OPERANNG SODA. ALL EQUIPMUIT AND MATERIALS SHALL BE NEW UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED AND OF THE HIGHEST (DONUTS. U. PROVIDE All DEMOLITION WORK CALLED FOR OR REOUIREQ BY THE iNSTALLATION. REMOVE ALL COSTING EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS NOT REUSED UNLESS SPECIFIED ODIERVASE BY THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE 7. EXAMINE PREMISES AND BECOME FAMILIAR VATH EXISTING CONDIDONS PRIM TO COMMENCING WM. DO NOT ALLOW ANY WORK TO BE COVERED UP OR ENCLOSED UNTIL INSPECTED, TESTED AND APPROVED BY OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE OR AUTHORITY HALING JURISDICTION. ALL PIPE SIZES ARE OWEN IN RICHES UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, ALL DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPING SHALL BE INSULATED NATO GLASS FIBER INSULATION, 0.25 BTU-04. PER SOFT. kR T PER HOUR AT A MEAN TEMPERATURE CF 75 F. INSULATION IIIICXNESS' FOR EACH PIPE SHALL BE AS SPECIFIED IN THE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDE SEISMIC RESTRAINT OF ALL MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND ECOPMENT AS REQUIRED BY UNIFORM &ADM CODE TABLE 23.P, PART In. AND AS ADDITIONALLY NOTED Al DRAWINGS AND IN TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS. • • ‘1 • • ••. • , II PR DNDE I AN E* A LL CW PIPING IN P IRIS NOON MAIN. FLOOR PLUMBING o 1 BACKFLOW PREVENTER ASSEMBLY NOT TO SCALE PTRV - PIPE TO FUNNEL DRAM OR JANITOR SINK EXPANSION TANK (1 111 aZ A II�ANIA I SY1a' -1•A..- l.ommm O!q∎. --J ®_ !Cy� ? ■ � - +, � I , � A I I. I � I 1 u. _ . 7-R M ! ® rI �� 111111 MME i ii IUMINa is NISUIVEAKINGGRALADDiNFAANUNDOANNWMATIMINVANANOWIROMMINTLAI Il - ' 'b s'�9� eat' 2s r�i rY am 1 2gel si mum P „rrt ing 1.IW, 1521warNeyaaasrTl mU D r : M19afa96J1 reaAlEaai'a1:fll'f'a0a0 • 'a 4A. �� Iiptih% Tai 72 TYPICAL SEE DETAIL — o_ Immix ®��ue � shnlas■_11 / � I ®M ® : MIN 1111 EMU 111011 w w f i ECa sue® ®C0I ®1 MN `LWn._ 1•�R ANN— NwS s_ \TG� AV U N NORTH INNATE COUNG GRIDS Dfl%N�NG ARE TAA ,Afi°iaiG AND MA SH@Y/AU OFfSEiS DUOM}XN. CO TTURN THORN H TIR THE Of` ,. DTINS TRADES ANO 'PRO'AOE, ALL NECESSARY CFFSESS, °' : IMMSP SHALL *GRi _ft("µ1 APPLCABLE CODES AND STPNDARDS' UMESS CONTRACT DOCISM ARE MORE,STNINGENC ARNANOE AND PAY FEW µL PERMITS, MSPECTIONS AND'. FEES RERMIED IN COHAECTION -aTH THIS INSTA ADON. 5 PoRXISN,µL ESNINENT MATTRIAES LHBOR, TOOLS ETC,REQUIRE- FOR lX.NSTNUIP9N OF THE l fETC AND CPERE,TING DOSjEM. itt MATERIAL SIN/' BE NEW UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED AND DE AIE HIGHEST DUAUTY 6. PRO'AOE ALL DEMCURON WORK CALLED OA OR REQUIRED .BY THE INSTALLATION. RU'/04E ALL E OSTMO EDGPMENT AND MATERIALS NOT REUSED UTAESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE BY THE OWNERS REPRESENTASN, 7. - ENNGME PREMISES HAS BECOME FAMILIAR ICH. E%ISTNC COLAIRONS PRIOR TO COMMENCING WORK. 8 DO NOT ALLOW ANY WORK TO.BE CONFREO UP OR ENCLOSED UNIV. INSPECTED. TESTED AND APPROVED BY OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE OR AUTHORITY HAVMIG JgaSQICRSM7.' 9. ALL DUC111KNK'SRES'ARE;ZRVEFI:IN INCHES UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. DUCT DIMENSIONS - ARE FOR SHEET METAL SIZES, OR CLEAR OPENING INSIDE LINED DUCT. • 10. PRONOE SDSMIC RESTRAINT OF ALL MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. AND EUIPMENTAS,OPRARED BY UNIFORM BUILDING CODE TABLE 23-P, PMT III, AND AS'AODITIONALLY NOTED ON DRAWINGS AND N TECHNICAL SPECIACASONS 1I. ALL SUPPLY; RETURN AND EXHAUST AIR DUCTS SHALL HAVE THE TRANSVERSE JOINTS. LONGITUDINAL. SEAMS AND DUCT WALL PENETRATIONS SEALED VAIN. APPLICABLE SEALER AS SPECIFIED IN THE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS. 12. ACOUSTCAL UNING FOR SUPPLY AND RETURN AM DUCTS WHERE SHOWN ON DRAWING SHALL HAVE 1.0 NCH DUCT UNER 0 3.0 LA /CU:FT. DENSITY THAT PROVIDES AN INSTALLED TOTAL THERMAL RESISTANCE OF A MNWIUM R -3.3. • 13. CONCEALED SUPPLY AND RETURN AIR DUCTS SHALL BE INSULATED AS NOTED ON DRAWINGS VAN BLANKET CLASS FIBER INSULATION, 2' THICKNESS, 3.0 LB /CU.FT. DENSITY, AND A VAPOR BARRIER PERM RATING NOT GREATER THAN 0,5 PERM. INSULATION SHOAL PROVIDE AN INSTALLED TOTAL THERMAL RESISTANCE OF A MINDATM R-0 Ii7 _ n NORTH - [T], ,H -- s 146 WUG e HVAC PIPING 1 /g ' = P -0 " /OE\ AC 1WHG k•UQ 141;HG AV LIG 1P98 -02'4( `-CONDENSER UNIT OR ROOF (TYPICAL) e �6- ERR CONDENSATE TO MR OAP DRAM IN WADS SEE SHEETS MIS MAO NIT FOR LOCATIONS ICW IN UNE FILTER HANGER RODS (BOTH SIDES) O A/C UNIT NOT TO SCALE SEE SMACNA SEISMIC RESTRAINT GUIDE SHEET 37 FOR TRAPEZE CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS. 1 PIPE BRACING ON TRAPEZE HANGER NOT TO SCALE FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS DRIP CONDENSATE DRAIN TO AIR GAP DRAIN AIR COOLED CONDENSER ROOF ICW \ ICW NEW NEW W OUTSIDE WALL A/C UNIT O A/C UNIT PIPING DIAGRAM NOT TO SCALE SUPPLY AIR TO DIFFUSERS LIQUID PIPING HOT GAS PIPING DRAIN PAN IIERRCAL ANGLE LONGITUDINAL DIAGONAL BRACING AT BOTH ENDS PIPE HOLDDDMN CLAMP (TYPICAL) DRAIN PAN • DEEP SEAL TRAP INHERTED TRAP IN LINE FILTER TRAP DIAGONAL BRACING (BOTH SIDES) PIPE ROOF PENETRATION tWe FLASHING CAP REFRIGERANT PIPING SEE PLANS FOR SIZES 6 NO. CKTS. A/C UNIT CTTV O5 I PI_ 1 0 1990 PERMIT GENTEET Z 3 Q 0 S 0 0 0 0 0 2 m a W J AL W J ER 0 SHEET- M2.2 PEOEINEO F'* OTT'TOP'ng" JUG 1 0 199 2 PERMITOEM JL `24 MECHANICAL ROOF PLAN 1/8• =1 NORTH mr II I I I 3'VfR� j1� !\,\ \ \ T ,► .1 i ROOF q MECHANICALLY �� _� IUNTER FLAS CA SHFEINHING E FASTEN SHEET CO METAL TO ROOF (NO JACKET) (TYP8 . 4 SIDES) TAI EACH CLAMP O FIRE STOPPING, CONTINUOUS AROUND INSUL PIPE REFRIGERANT PIPE ALUMINUM JACKETED INSULAR O FLASHING CAP DETAIL NOT TO SCALE BRACKET PIPING TO BLOCKING 14TH NEOPRENE GROMMET 4'O4" PRESSURE TREATED WOOD BLOCKING PROVIDE NEOPRENE MIX PAD BELOW BLOCKING TO PROTECT ROOF (TYP ALL) O PIPING SUPPORT ON ROOF NOT TO SCALE REFER TO PLAN FOR ACTUAL y OF PIPES Y MINIMUM EACH SIDE 18 GA, - SIEETMETAL FLASHINE. CAP STAINLESS STEEL SHEETMETAL SCREWS 18 GA SHEET METAL FLASHING ROOFING MAIL. IJ 0 144 RELEASE ABORT MANUAL RELEASE TYPICAL ELEVATION OF DEVICES WITHIN INERGEN PROTECTED AREAS INERGEN SYSTEM ZONE DIAGRAM , i8" = ,� -ef NOTE: REFER TO DEMON. SHEETS FOR. LOCATION OF 06MCES 1 ► : ♦ ..4 _- eeeeaeo �7i.I�O�.�E�� (► e • • eeeee " 1 ew • ►ee eeeo4 �.�e�. ∎simemo F 4 ♦ee4 e!eee ►ee♦ ,s ►+ _ _, � e ►eee e . . Ae�C� _.N 1 x .11 . 0 . \ ® \ \� °ee , • �.�F �. o.�.�c � a ►ee ° °d� °� IIIIIIIIIIIII ..��. ∎i.I.�i1=M ∎II lll, _��F w rOWINIE E10A ► ° e ° e ° ev, P,•4 ■ miimum . .v ∎. _ ►eeee�ee e.J1 _ -_ __. ___T Z• , - - - ♦e eeeeee e 1 1•111111111111•11111=11111• MI .�....M8. '�'C7 7u �e� e..• ► ° e ° e ° e ° °e�NI iT • M .e... e. ► ° e ° e p0 ° e ° D e r . ♦eeeeeeoe -.. ► eeeeeee♦ 4..16• fee ► °i ° i ° *****# c °A r I l i • ° • � ° e e e o e ®e � °� ° e ►� FINISHED FLUOR TYPICAL ELEVATION OF DEVICES OUTSIDE INERGEN PROTECTED AREAS NOT TO SCALE NOTE. REFER TOEIECTRICAL SHEETS FOWLOCATWN OF OEMCE& TO (E) WET SPRINKLER SYSTEM TO PREACTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM FIRE PROTECTION SCHEDULE FLANK SPACE ZONE 51N8gL AREA AREA VOLUME DESCRIPTION /REMARKS :.. S0. FT. CU. FT. FlFRE SU // v ROOM A1E 1320 15,840 �NT S EE PR S5 I �� N p P ppRR�� S SSII��SSyy Y SS STEM 2 \ \ \ p i 450 5880 K p . 1 R � E � AC E T ry IO F N I RSPR S I U N P K P L 8 E E RS g S � Y � S N TE 0 J S TEM 3 �S111SSION 4203 50.436 p REAC110NRWNKLERSSYSTEAI TEM .�� MAP ROOM �T4ER(� FLREE S5UUppppRR�� TEM �� 276 3312 P SYSTEM ° : ----Hari 40MIN. AREAS 1262 13,227 SPACE ABOVERCEILINGM INCLUDING 6 279 3348 � R gpPp T E M SI I p N ry CLUDING / / / FC RICAL 436 5232 yp�R7EASCpTIpO�NNK $�PNRINgKyLSE7RESSYSTEM 8 l�TftlALS 1084 13,008 SPACE ABOVE CEIIJNGM INCLUDING 1. REMOVE ALL EXISTING SPRINKLER SYSTEM PIPING ABOVE AREAS TO BE SERVED BY INERGEN AND PREACOON SYSTEMS. NO WET SPRINKLER PIPING ALLOWED IN THESE AREAS. 2. RE- ESTABUSH SPRINKLER SERVICE TO ALL AREAS AFFECTED BY WORK OF THIS CONTRACT. 3. SCHEDULE ALL SYSTEM SHUTDOWNS FOR TIE -INS W1TH BUILDING OWNER. COORDINATE SHUTDOWNS WITH LOCAL FIRE MARSHAL OR OTHER AUIHORNY R4NNG JURISDICTION. TO WATER MOTOR ALARM PREACTION DELUGE VALVE TAP INTO EXISTING FIRE SERVICE RISER (E) FlRE SVI 111 MAIN TO BUI G PREACTION SPRIKLER VALVE PIPING DIAGRAM I--8 Y"= 2IV SIGN NO. 3 SIGNAGE REQUIREMENTS NOT TO SCALE Dr Y O KMn s JUL 1° p 1998,, 459MITCE101684 • RELEASE ABORT MANUAL RELEASE TYPICAL ELEVATION OF DEVICES WITHIN INERGEN PROTECTED AREAS INERGEN SYSTEM ZONE DIAGRAM , i8" = ,� -ef NOTE: REFER TO DEMON. SHEETS FOR. LOCATION OF 06MCES 1 ► : ♦ ..4 _- eeeeaeo �7i.I�O�.�E�� (► e • • eeeee " 1 ew • ►ee eeeo4 �.�e�. ∎simemo F 4 ♦ee4 e!eee ►ee♦ ,s ►+ _ _, � e ►eee e . . Ae�C� _.N 1 x .11 . 0 . \ ® \ \� °ee , • �.�F �. o.�.�c � a ►ee ° °d� °� IIIIIIIIIIIII ..��. ∎i.I.�i1=M ∎II lll, _��F w rOWINIE E10A ► ° e ° e ° ev, P,•4 ■ miimum . .v ∎. _ ►eeee�ee e.J1 _ -_ __. ___T Z• , - - - ♦e eeeeee e 1 1•111111111111•11111=11111• MI .�....M8. '�'C7 7u �e� e..• ► ° e ° e ° e ° °e�NI iT • M .e... e. ► ° e ° e p0 ° e ° D e r . ♦eeeeeeoe -.. ► eeeeeee♦ 4..16• fee ► °i ° i ° *****# c °A r I l i • ° • � ° e e e o e ®e � °� ° e ►� FINISHED FLUOR TYPICAL ELEVATION OF DEVICES OUTSIDE INERGEN PROTECTED AREAS NOT TO SCALE NOTE. REFER TOEIECTRICAL SHEETS FOWLOCATWN OF OEMCE& TO (E) WET SPRINKLER SYSTEM TO PREACTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM FIRE PROTECTION SCHEDULE FLANK SPACE ZONE 51N8gL AREA AREA VOLUME DESCRIPTION /REMARKS :.. S0. FT. CU. FT. FlFRE SU // v ROOM A1E 1320 15,840 �NT S EE PR S5 I �� N p P ppRR�� S SSII��SSyy Y SS STEM 2 \ \ \ p i 450 5880 K p . 1 R � E � AC E T ry IO F N I RSPR S I U N P K P L 8 E E RS g S � Y � S N TE 0 J S TEM 3 �S111SSION 4203 50.436 p REAC110NRWNKLERSSYSTEAI TEM .�� MAP ROOM �T4ER(� FLREE S5UUppppRR�� TEM �� 276 3312 P SYSTEM ° : ----Hari 40MIN. AREAS 1262 13,227 SPACE ABOVERCEILINGM INCLUDING 6 279 3348 � R gpPp T E M SI I p N ry CLUDING / / / FC RICAL 436 5232 yp�R7EASCpTIpO�NNK $�PNRINgKyLSE7RESSYSTEM 8 l�TftlALS 1084 13,008 SPACE ABOVE CEIIJNGM INCLUDING 1. REMOVE ALL EXISTING SPRINKLER SYSTEM PIPING ABOVE AREAS TO BE SERVED BY INERGEN AND PREACOON SYSTEMS. NO WET SPRINKLER PIPING ALLOWED IN THESE AREAS. 2. RE- ESTABUSH SPRINKLER SERVICE TO ALL AREAS AFFECTED BY WORK OF THIS CONTRACT. 3. SCHEDULE ALL SYSTEM SHUTDOWNS FOR TIE -INS W1TH BUILDING OWNER. COORDINATE SHUTDOWNS WITH LOCAL FIRE MARSHAL OR OTHER AUIHORNY R4NNG JURISDICTION. TO WATER MOTOR ALARM PREACTION DELUGE VALVE TAP INTO EXISTING FIRE SERVICE RISER (E) FlRE SVI 111 MAIN TO BUI G PREACTION SPRIKLER VALVE PIPING DIAGRAM I--8 Y"= 2IV SIGN NO. 3 SIGNAGE REQUIREMENTS NOT TO SCALE Dr Y O KMn s JUL 1° p 1998,, 459MITCE101684 SINRA F RO ol0000 - RACK TO RACK 4 00 DOUR F RAW 9P A' ... .�I SEE PILOT SYSTEM ACTUATION DETAIL n ' LJ T7 T INERGEN NOZZLE DETAILS, FROM SOLENOID PILOT VALVE ACTUATION ADAPTOR P/N 873236 MALE TEE P/N 418359 PIL OT SYSTFM ACTUATION PILOT VALVE :' ACTUATION ADAPTOR P/N 873236 . FT L rl H I H H H H H H I H ZONE-43 FT J L H H L I H H H 7 F1 ZONE 48 ZONE $4 P 7-1\ JAI( INERGEN SYSTEM PIPING PLAN I/8 = 1_1_1 J ZONE ZONE 47 — 1` Y‚ .<,l THESE SEECIFICATIONS ARE TO APPLY TO ALL INSTALLATIONS or MERGER FIRE EIIHANISHER .S SILMS. NOTE TIWE SINLL CONFORM TO A51AI SPECIFICATIONS FOR A53 OR 6106 PIPE. Al20 :AWL NOT :'BE DffD. 1. ALL THREADED PIPE BEYOND ARE' OR1RCE UNION TO DE BLACK OR GALVANIZED'. STEEL OF THE FO(IOYANG PIPE SIZE. AND CRADE. COMBINATIONS AS A- SEAMLESS. GRADE' C SCH. 40 -THRU 8 NO RM A- 1 66 /A -53'SEAM E LLE'SS GRADE B SCH. 40-THRU 5' PS1M A- 106 /A -53 "SFAYIE36,GRADE A - AR SCH. 40 -THRU 2.5" M' A-53 ERW, GRADE: B SCH. 40 -THRU 3" ASR/ A -53 EON, "CRADE'A SCH. 10 -THRU 1.25' 2. ALL THREADED PIPE USED - TO CONSTRUCT THE MANIFOLD. INCLUDING PIPE BEFORE TIC ORRICE UNION TO BE BLACK OR GALVANIZED STEEL OF THE FOLLOWING PIPE SEE AND GRADE COMBINATIONS. ASTM A -106 SEAMLESS, GRADE C SCA. 80 -THRU 2.5" ASTN A- 106 /A -53 SEAMLESS, GRADE B SCH. BO -THRU 1.25' A5TM A-106/A-53 SEAMLESS, GRADE A SCN 80 THRU 75" ASTM 4-53 ERN, GRADE B SCH. 80 -THRU 1.0" ASTM A-53 ERN, GRADE A SCH. 80 -THRU 5" 3, PIPE GRADES MUST BE SUITABLE FOR THE PRESSURES CALCULATED BY ANSUL'S BERCALC PNEUMATIC CALCULATION PROGRAM. CONSULT THE CHART IN ANSUL'S DESIGN MANUAL OR NFPA 2001, A- 2.2.1, FOR MAXIMUM PIPE PRESSURES FOR THE EFFERENT PIPE GRADES. A. ALL FIT@IGS BEYOND THE ORIFICE UNION TO BE 3001 ANSI 8 -16.3 BLACK OR GALVANIZED MALLEABLE IRON THREADED FITTINGS THROUGH 3" SIZE. FORGED STEEL. FITTINGS TO BE USED FOR LARGER SIZES. FLANGED JOINTS TO BE CLASS 600 LB. CLASS 300. MALLEABLE IRON UNIONS OR STREET ELBOWS SHALL NOT BE USED. 5. ALL FITTINGS USED TO CONSTRUCT THE MANIFOLD. INCLUDING FITTINGS BEFORE THE ORIFICE UNION TO BE BLACK OF GALVANIZED FORGED STEEL 2000# OR 3000+ ANSI 13- 16.11. 6. ALL PIPE FITTINGS AND MANIFOLDS TO BE SUPPUEQ BY OTHERS. 7. PIPE LENGTHS GIVEN ARE FROM CENTER TO CENTER OF FITTINGS. & ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TO FIELD CHECKED, ANY DEVIATIONS FROM THE ARRANGEMENT SHOWN WILL REQUIRE COMPLETE REVIEW OF THE NOZZLE AND LINE PRESSURE CALCIAJRINS BY THE DESIGNER. 9. REAM AND CLEAN EACH PIPE SECTION INTERNALLY AFTER PREPARATION AND BEFORE ASSEMBLY BY MEANS OF SWABBING. UTILIZING A SUITABLE NON - FLAMMABLE CLEANER. TFE PIPING NETWORK SHALL BE FREE OF PARTICULATE MATTER AND OIL RESIDUE BEFORE INSWIATION OF NOZZLES OR DISCHARGE DEVICES. 10. THE USE OF PIPE DOPE OR TEFLON TAPE IS RECOMMENDED. APPLY SPARINGLY TO MALE THREADS ONLY. 11. CYLINDERS AND PPE TO BE SECURELY BRACKETED - ESPECIALLY AT FIRINGS AND NOZZLES. 12. ALL DEAD END PIPE ONES TO BE PROVIDED WITH A 1/2" CAPPED NIPPLE 2" LONG. 11 PROVIDE DIAGONAL BRACING ON INERGEN BOTTLE RACKS TO FLOOR. ANCHOR TO FLOOR WITH 3 -1/2' DEEP EXPANSION BOLTS. OZZLE w/ DEFLECTOR 16" ACTUATION ROSE P/N 831809 ]NEROCN NOTES. SYSTEM'SHH L. BE AN TOTAL FLOODING. GASEOUS..: CLEAN AGENT.: _FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM DESIGNED TO PROVIDE- AN UNIFORM CONCENTRATION AT A MINIMUM or 37.50 FOR THE PROTECTED AREAS SYSTEM'SHALL BE MANUFACTURED BY ANSUL INCORPORATED ■ 2. INSTALLATION SHALL RE BY AN AUTHORIZED AND CERTIFIED AN. SUL INERCEN DISTRIBUTOR. C -0 -1W0 FIRE EQUIPMENT 117 SOUTH VERMONT GLENDORA, CA 91740 (81B) 914 -1997 CONTACT: BRUCE.. DEUSHANE 3. THE ANSUL INERGEN DISTRIBUTOR SHALL PREPARE SHOP DRAWINGS. AND CALCULATIONS IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 2001 AND THE UL USTED DESIGN MANUAL. ANSUL DISTRIBUTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ACQUIRING NECESSARY PERMITS AND APPROVALS FROM THE LOCAL AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION (AHJ) PRIOR 'TO INSTALLATION OF THE SYSTEM. 4. THE ANSUL INERGEN DISTRIBUTOR SHALL SUBMIT PRODUCT DATA FOR EACH TYPE OF STORAGE CONTAINER, RELEASING DEVICE, NOZZLE, ORIFICE UNIONS. CONTROL PANEL SUPPORT AND ALARM DEVICE REQUIRED PER NFPA 2001 AND THE AHJ. 5. ANSUL INERGEN DISTRIBUTOR SHALL PROVIDE PRESSURE VENTING CALCULATIONS AND NECESSARY VENTING DIMENSIONS. (INSTALLATION OF ANY REQUIRED VENTING DAMPER, ETC IS BY OTHERS). 6. ANSUL INERGFE DISTRIBUTOR SHALL PROVIDE AS -BUILT DRAWINGS, OWNERS MANUALS, AND ORIENTATION TO EU PERSONNEL UPON FINAL ACCEPTANCE OF SYSTEMS. MALE ELBOW P/N 832334 tu F- z Z0 f (L Z it CC a W . 2 w O O rg LL w ' aOU'lNrt ® z L3Bh CEILING ROUND TRUNK DUCT BEI VOLUME DAMPER ROUND JET DIFFUSER SEE PLANS FOR SIZE 0 EQUIPMENT ROOM DIFFUSER DETAIL NOT TO SCALE EMU ROUND TRUNK DUCT J VOLUME DAMPER ROUND DIFFUSER A im ROUND DIFFUSER DETAIL NOT TO SCALE / \ ® TYPICAL. SECTION SCALE 1/7 = 1' -b 'ME t FILTER BANK 1) 24x24112D 1) 241121125 9' FLOOR STAND AND DRAIN PAN SEE DETAIL SOT. 142.3 12' EQUALIZING GRID ROUND DUCT DROP — SET NOZZLE FOR DIFFUSE AIR PATTERN FLEX CONNECTOR CEIUNG EQUAUZING GRID ROUND DUCT DROP i r CONFIRM TET ELEVATION FROM 'ARCHITECTURAL DRWG moor kT, m AIR CONDITIONING UNIT P IO o2 D AAL CRBN MAY BE US`EC V'6 AAEAs WHERE CEILING SPACE IS LDB�B� FLEXBLE DUCT 5' MAX. LENGTH - FLEXIBLE DUCT SIZE AS NOTED SMACNA APPROVED CLAMP PLAN Via I PRUDE K' BEAD AROUND COLLAR FOR CLAMP CATCH BACK ORAFT DAMPER CEIUNG TILE CEILING GRID • 22/8 SHEET METAL DUCT CEUNG PLENUM ELEVATION LINE BOOT RUTH 1" DUCT LINER LEVELING CURB, CANT STRIP. AND FUSING NOT BY BLOWN CAL BACK DRAFT DAMP CEILING RETURN GRILLE a EXHAUST F DR BOOT MISJunau METAL DECK 1PM EDGE OF DUCT DFTUSER BOOT NECK (SQUARE OR ROUND) ROOF EXHAUST FAN NSTALLATION NOT TO SCALE PERFC RATED PLATE CR EXPANDED METAL 64% FREE AREA AM DIFFUSER CONNECTION DETAIL Aft BRANCH TAKE OFF DETAIL NOF NOT TO SCALE NOT TO SCALE ita CEILING RETURN GRILLE AND BOOT NOT TO SCALE FOAM BEATHER- STROP Ale HEN EDGE OF DUCT TIRO SCREEN RELIEF AIR HOOD BALI DRAFT DAMPER PITCH BOTTOM TO DRAIN , 18 GAUGE SHEET METAL COLLAR FLANGE TIGHT AGAINST WALL SURFACE. ATTACH TO DUCT 1111H SHEET METAL SCREWS OR POP RIVETS SHEET METAL DUCT NOT TO SCALE FLEX DUCT N' BEAD AROUND FOR CLAMP CATCH I G' MIN. ROOFING - INSULATION METAL DUDE SMACNA CLAMP CONICAL SPIN-IN OR BELL MOUTH TAKEOFF W/ VOLUME DAMPER LEHEUNG CURB, CANT STRIP AND FLASHING NOT BY MECHANICAL SHEET METAL DUCT DRAIN' TO SUITABLE ik RELIEF HOOD THRU ROOF RECEPTOR NOT TO SCALE PARTITION WALL WALLBOARD STUD FRAME OPENING NOT BY MECHANICAL STUD WALL DUCT PENETRATION WENS, NT�SA 30'1 01990 PERTUIT CENTE cc 3 z K TI O W 0 0 U O , 10 B p 4 0 2 0 v'. w ti Wi D`: i cc J Q Q U'® z o ' z z Lu 2J a W J: S98JBBS \9815361166107/097960 6: - 48: 46 > ! *'Y 4 o p � 1 � V � i a q 7 V ° �' a HHffl 1 I ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS LEGEND r^ 1 1 i d fill 1 ” z A 1 i 0 1 I - 00 § " N" gggP53 R ig 20 1 1 II 9 A T 9 ` P SL�f 1 s g : :: P o 1 :":11 tip! i ll 1!All!P 111' � 9 8. 1 o FAr�`I F A 4 I 0®- ®o ®o®®®®oM �po�2®k 00 4 go luff1fd®®6®® ®.o a B a ®,o® l o iii A� ` o2moi€ m iVIIIII I IMmI'MIM§ 1_ g i 1W1111 1 111 g ?J b r i y Egt z TRICAL SYMBOLS, LEGEND 55 CC 11 ��11 m Tm p y1 �I f O s I 9 S i . <C � o i - I � 8<N A A- + -m Z Z tC 5 x x "' .A SO(f C JC N � % m� O C) N n n Z C l ZZ A rN F D 2 s15 � Z r• S C:C C C A A A AA 9 A 9 V 9 A V 0 2 2 2 2 ; t C C - x Zzzzz 9Ax m N �� L oxc o oy o tSSS x`�- mm ..., � 0 � 4 m x Fl oLE� DN A O ; �'Z ge A o CQ O I AA G�+' Vg ° R m 8 h ' ZZ r3 L o {mp� m g »CC IL O E M. T K [+ £+ "I y N :. -^'' m A F 2 O o� O D =5 o z <m�a gi p., Al E2 o G I^ A m y O A O 2 O m+Im 1�1 O Opr y D o I j A�D (II F S Cj ~ Z 8 � sl VIZ' '�I O --11 AA L 9 9J9 g p 4 R yy yj 2 I N K m2 5 e q 0A id va m .8m N, i9 @ A ao m y K 8 S T O A ELECTRICAL ABBREVIATIONS L4.1 S7S1LMS PLAN _ E4.2 L GH1NING PLAN 54.3 INTERIOef GRGt(Np9G_RIAN •; E5 POWER, ONE 4INE. DIAGRAM, • E5.2 _ GROUNDING ONE —UNE .DIAGRAM _ MISCELLANEOUS �DUGRAMS FB00NBD u E6,1 SCHEDULES O tty OP 55.3 E6.2 SCHEDULES +,,g96 57.1 MISCELUWEOUS DETAIL$ E7.2 MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS PE,04,00r. C T R IC • L S ELECTRICAL nevr�� SHEET INDEX PRODUCT ATTN PHONE f FAX 7 ' DORLEN LYNN WOLOSZYK (414) 282 -4840 (414) 282 -5870 EXIDE UPS MIKE ZACCAGNI (425) 885 -7493 (425) 885 -7411 FIRE ALARM BOB BAKER (509) 535 -4766 (509) 535 -8633 GENERATOR DAN PEDERSON (208)235 -3400 (206) 235 -$202 MT GRND SCOTT CURRY (800) 962 -2610 (310) 214 -1114 INTERCOM TERRY MOREAU (509) 536 -0477 (509) 536 -9034 LIGHTING DARRIN BLANKENSHIP (509) 535 -6006. (509) 535 -6514 LIGHTNING ERIC ROBERTSON (801) 292 -2956 (801) 292 -4164 PWR UTILITY BOB HANSEN .(206)386- 4200.(208) 386 -4222 SECURITY MIKE KOBELIN (503) 639 -9988 (503) 684-4357 SW GEAR ROD WOLFF (509) 535-3685 (509) 535 -0747 TEL UTILITY KEN STONER (206) 345 -3399 (253) 872-5434 TVSS MICHAEL CHANNON (800) 727 - 9119(509) 927 -0435 MANUFACTURER PHONE NUMBERS U pg �$ a � 2 RRI. q M g F g � R I 8 a 1 8 E n 10 i F 1 g gg. P_ gR a E g pl DEMOLITION NOTES EKW� smL,<a<Y € � RR q ms g p 2c M R Rg g P. AsE 20 9E 5 ? E t AR _ P : @ E % P A r cs vm § A 6 m$ -0°a 1 g ; GENERAL NOTES NM1T 'SE EO41? ,f C{) FFMAN E 6 ' E E R 8 WEST 20t° NORTH RIPER GT ° DRNE . -SUITE s1 O SP O K ANE . WASHINON 99201 'TEt; 509 f 3 328 -2994 F Ax - 809 328 -2999 /9 w;c- 3.. PROJECT - SHEET TITLE SYMBOLS AND GENERAL NOTES - DRAWN CI . KED CHECKED M�M � c pp rrpD L:LU • •• / / //< ////:��•, • • IT UGH RIC Pur omo.9ua 4939 /•e� F ••• •••••• / .� ` FOIl (360) 6 96 - • - FACILITY DATE 07 /07 /8 JOB JO NO. 98153 - 1 TUKWILA SWITCH FILE 98153E01 SCALE 1•Y 04/ }E%PIRESr' 04/05/00 '1 J: S98JBBS \9815361166107/097960 6: - 48: 46 - SO So SO 50 So So SO m m NOT TO SCALE 1D' BARE .4/0 AM COPPER CONDUCTOR BURIED 30' BEL UNE, WHICHEVER 1S GREATER. 1. USE CARLON SNAP —LOC DUCT SPACERS TO NAN CONDUITS AS SHOWN. 2. INTERVALS BETWEEN SPACER ASSEMBLIES SHALL BE 10 FEET MAXIMUM. 3. SPACER ASSEMBLES SHALL BE INSTALLED PER MANUFACTURERS REQUIREMENTS. 4. AIL IN GROUND CONDUITS SHALL BE 4' PVC, SCHEDULE 40, SUNLIGHT RESISTANT. 5. EXPOSED CONDUITS AND RISER SWEEPS SHALL BE 4' GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL SECONDARY DUCT BANK DETAIL ELECTROLYTIC GROUND ROD. PROVIDE 20 ,.05100 SPACING SETWEEEN RMS. 3D EXISTING TELEPHONE SERVICE, SEE SHEET E4.1 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. D INCOMING ELECTRICAL SERVICE, SEE SHEET E3.1 FOR CONTINUATION. 5D TO SPPG, SEE SHEET E4.3 FOR CONTINUATION. ®.FIBER OPTIC CONDUIT STUB OUTS, SEE SHEET 04.1 FOR CONTINUATION. CONDUIT AMP TRENCH TO VAULT PROVIDED 85 .OTHERS. TO UTILITY COMPANY TRANSFORMER: COORDINATE. LOCATION WITH UTILITY COMPANY: I TO AIM SWITCH, SEE SHEET 03.1 FOR CONTINUATION. ASPHALT FINISHED GRADE CUT AND PATCH TO MATCH EXISTING plcDI NORTH 1/8" = 1' -0" CO- LOCATE ROOM [T Fl FIE 3'. X1 3 �•� F1 FIE 3X1:1 F1 © FIE LIGHTING PLAN SWITCH FACILITY FIE FIE FIE MATERIALS MOMT. 1113 AP ROOM to POWER ROOM FIE 'F1 F1 F1 F4E F4: F4' 0 2 4 8 8 iiefaM 3H1:7 F2 ' :P WOME 109 J �E. F4 z ELECTRICAL ROOM olo SECURITY ROOM C100Y AETITER (OP) 3/8' THREADED R005 LAMP LIGHT FIXTURE SEE SCHEDULE REFLECTOR ELECTRONIC BALLAST LAMP #1 TB OCTRON LAMP 42 T8 OCTRON +10' -0' AFT BLUE BLUE RED WHITE 120V BLACK EMERGENCY 277V ORALS BATTERY UNIT RED SELECT LEAD TO MATCH INDICATOR SYSTEM VOLTAGE LAMP TYPICAL FOR ALL FIXTURES DENOTED WITH THIS SYMBOL: BRACKET FOR CHAIN CONNECTION ROOF. UNE. STRUCTURAL ROOF TRUSS SUPPORT HOOK (TYP OF 2) FLOOR LINE O EMERGENCY LIGHT WIRING DIAGRAM NOT TO SCALE LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE DUAL 1TTE OR APPRVD EQUAL -COLAMBUA OR APPRVD EQUAL COLUMBUA` OR APPRWD EQUAL COLUMBIA OR APPRVO':C. EQUAL ` COLUMBIA 'OR APPRVD EOUN,: CWRWW- LPLEDE EXCALIBUR LED LTTECELL SERIES 4P514- 2320- RSAl2.125- EBBLH277 4PS14- 232G- RSAl2.125- EB8LH277 -EL 4PS241232- RSAl2.125- 4E88277 4F'S24- 232- RSAl2.125- 4EB8277 -EL 4P524- 332- RSAl2.125- 4EE88277 400524- 332- 14SAl2.125- 4E88277 -8, KL398 -277V SURFACE INDUSTRIAL.- (2) F32T8 > 70 CRI 4100K (2) F32T8 > 70 CRI 4100K (2) F32T8 > 70 CRI 41000 (3) F32T8 > 70 CRI 4100K (3) F32TB >70 CBI 4100K. (2) F32T8 >70 CRL. ,'. (2) F32T8 > CA1 41001 (2)'F32T8. VOW 500K' ELECTRONIC THD <- _10x. ELECTRONIC THD <= 10% ELECTRONIC THO <- 10x ELECTRONIC' TND C. 10% ELECTRONIC 1HD S- 10X ELECTRONIC' THD < =.10x' ELECTRONIO' ELECTRONIC. • HPF T20 J.STA# WALL OR CEILING RECESSED T -BAR RECESSED T -BAR RECESSED T -BAR RECESSED T -BAR CEILING SURFACE EGRESS DOORS RMS 110,111, 113,114 RMS 110,111, . 113,114 RMS 103,104, 106,112 _ RMS`. 105,T07•:., RMS 108,118, ' 117 , LED EXIT LIGHT WITH EMERGENCY POWER PACK. 1'X4' LENSED TROFFER, 2 -LAMP ELECTRONIC BALLAST SAME AS TYPE. PT, BUT WITH EMERGENCY • BATTERY INVERTER BALLAST TO OPERATE ONE LAMP FOR OVER 90 MINUTES 2'X4' 'LENSED TROFFER 2- LAMA'; ELECTRONIC BALLAST SAME AS TYPE. F2, BUT WITH EMERGENCY BATTERY INTERIOR BALLAST TO: OPERATE.. ONE LAMP FOR :GOFER 00 MINUTES 2'04' LENSED. TROFFER WITH MASTER/SLAVE CONFIGURATION OR USE A 2 -LAMP. PLUS A 1 SMAE A$' F2, -BUT WITH EMERGENCY'. ONE LAMP FOR DOER 90 MINUTES 4' IADU$TSIM. FIXTURE WITH WIRE GUARD SAME AS TYPE P4, NT WITH EMERGENCY_ BATTERY INVERTER MAST TODPERPE . SUE. LAMP FOR OVER 90, MINUTES:':. . .... • • • ■ L _1..J Lil i • CO LOCATE ROOM 0 NOR[( 1 SWITCH FACILITY F!14] 7 B O TRANSMISSION AREA 1:1 POWER PLAN lir AM C1 Vir Ala A PI kl MI 1 J Ir 1- W H i H — FLEW NRNG H � Ha � 70 TOP H ® SCAN 1J2, - 002:42 J J I■ H PANEL "PDSC -SW r1 PANEL "PDSC -TR" 0 m PANEL 'PDSC -001" PANEL 'PDSC -0O2' KcY NOTES: P %PROVIDE• YELLOW AND, BLACK DIAGONAL STRIPPING ON FLOOR IN FRONT OF PANELS TO INDICATE WORKING' CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS AS CRUET FOR IN NEC 110 - m v 3 4 PPSC- 002:36 28 22 26 MAP ROOM 4 1 L' PDSC- 002:222426;28 312:5 3 3 1.2:1, mI � v DRKR 'PDSC -CO" BRKR '312' XFMR 3T2" WP /GFCI ON ROOF MATERIALS MGMT, 31119. 311:4,6 113 I PDSC- 002:34 80" 811" BOT BOT 22 00 Li 3L2:15 LOBBY lot l IIIt1 " RN Gr /GFCION ROOF POWER ROOM 1 F C m l I 1 BREAKER FOR • POSC -co - l anl �� 311 nt 3L2:19 IrII' AX WOR A EA 31.2:17 OWE 102 31.2:21 .- - 312:16 O L WOME GFCI 31.26 GEM CFC IO KFNR 'STN.' ELECTRICAL ROOM 109 i SPARE F USE 13110 E3.1 CA81NET . , r �' • � ...11111111 RREEABER FOR 31.2:8 31.2:12 312:10 3L2:14 STEP DOWN XFRM6 MAN DISTRIBUTION SMTCHBOARD 14001" PANEL *361' PANEL 311Y UPS BATTERY OABINET UPS.BYSIEN /1 BYPASS SW /1 SW ,A GENSET /1 XFNR SW MyN SW }T 9 9 9 Q 19 9 1 SW ( HOUSE P POWER ' 'POSC -TTY - a•.DOWN. XFRMR III ®III P~D '3L1' STEP XFRMR , 311 CU - CU -2 CU -3 ' CU -4 CU -5 CU-6 11211118111111112ESIMEM .NATERYLS NOT ''+ © 9 9:8 INVIEMIENNEMIGIMEIVIIIMIMMIIMDMEWENUMMEgi EMEIMMMEIIIIIIMILMILIIKEINIMIXIIIIIMMENNEMENIKIIIMEMINEINIMISEMIEDMIIMMEEINIEWETLEIMEEMINI smn=m ITOOF � T } i�l ®��ffl�B�IL9 a 1 AKE 1 ESSIIIIIIIMINE1111210111E222EMINISEI [ MMIlll( EM MA EMINMENNE ENIEMNBIBEINIIIIMENNINMINIIIMMEMENIZMINEMEMIMINIEWSIENERMINESIMMIUMNIERNEEMINEM ° a ' MITLUILEM EFL �' nipai ' IiiY ' ' ��1�N ��;'pgEM ��yy.L�I.+�� 1 .' p,�I N' . . ,yp ��3�pyq ' hY 1 1 EMNI lllEM r`•..� NINI PCi:® MI 'ISENE4 PEN WIN iEMIS 0ii31" me COND. -FOR AC -1 COND.' COND. FOR AC -3 - COND. FOR AC-4 COND. FOR AC-5 , RTU 1 EF -1 EF. -2 WH SP -T SP -2 3 4 DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARD 11151' DISC - WIRES • 4 CKT NUMB$R Y J POW ' ER CESSED R OOM ELEVATION O POWER R SCALE: 1/4" = 1' -0" MEET G 4 v O POWER ROOM ELEVATION SCALE: 1/4" = LIo 4�a� 31.2:7,9 3.2:11,13 31.212 PDSC- 002:38,40 PANEL 3L2' PDSC- 002:32 SECURITY ROOM IOU IAN' mS_1 8RKR "PDSC -SW BRKR PDSC -TR" PANEL '3L1" SEE NOTE /2 DMA/COMMUNICATIONS JACK DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, SEE PLANS FOR SPECIAL TYPE IF REQUIRED AND NOTE f4 UNIT It FUNCTION LOCATION AC -1 AR CONDITIONER. SWITCH ROOM 480 AC -4 AIR CONDITIONER COLLOCATE. RN 480 AC -2 AIR CONDITIONER SWITCH 80061 460 AC -3 AIR " CONDITIONER SWITCH ROOM 480 AC -5 AR CONDITIONER COLLOCATE'RAI 480 NR CONDITIONER' NAP -ROOT 277 O C9 POWER ROOM ELEVATION O SCALE: 1/4" = 1' -0" 3- COMPARTMENT SURFACE WIREWAY SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR TYPE. STUB UP TO CABLE TRAY HEIGHT 3 15 87.7 102 3 15 3 15 87.7 102 3 15 87.7. 102 3 -_15 1/2 12.6 28.3 DEVICE TAG, SEE SPECIFICATIONS SEE NOTE /3 BKRS UPS SYSTEM BATTERY UPS SYSTEM BYPASS SW FUSE IT /T CABINET NOTES I. PROVIDE GROMMETS IN FIELD -CUT OPENINGS. 2. ALL CUTS SHALL BE PRECISION MADE. HACKSAW AND BANDSAW CUTS ARE NOT ALLOWED. 3. SECURE WIREWAY TO WALL WITH /10 SCREWS ANCHORED TO WALL STUDS BEHIND, PLASTIC ANCHORS ME NOT ACCEPTABLE. MAXIMUM ANCHOR INTERVAL NOT TO EXCEED 24' O.C. WHERE WALL IN NOT TRUE, CAULK TOP EDGE OF WIREWAY TO CONCEAL OAP. 4, PROVIDE DEVICES AT LOCATIONS INDICATED BY PUNS. O SURFACE WIREWAY DETAIL - MAP ROOM NOT TO SCALE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE Project Nemec TUKWILA 1. MAGNETIC STARTER 2. MANUAL STARTER 3. DISCONNECT SWITCH 4. DIRECT CONNECTION 5. THERMOSTAT max A. FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY DIVISION 15 B. FURNISHED BY DMSION -15, INSTALLED BY DMSION -16 C. FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY DMSION 16 D. FURNISHED BY OTHERS, INSTALLED BY DMSION 18 111 3 125 3 200 ; OFT 3 -1 6 1 1/2 to 30 N/A .MDS7 5052,54 ' III 3 125 3 200 WY 3 8 , 1 t/2 1A 3C /A MD51 5158,60' " 1I1 3 125. 3 200 WY 3 1 .1 11/2 4A' - 3C =.N/A .NOBt6284,66 122 3 150. 3 200 WY 3 I/O ': 6 1.T //2 7C (i / A' M DS1.14,16,18 122 3 150 3 200 'NAY 3 1./O. f2 IA : ' 3C' ' TE11:41 35.5 1 40 .60 'WY 1 '..4 . 10 - 1 1A WE CO A P. 0 r 0 0 z o5 0' m O UI 111, 12.1 EL,1 rIg El] rag ra XIV 11 II IQ :mg FIBER OPTIC PULLBOX #I r y TRANSM 55100 AREA ri o0A 1=1 • 59508 LPP 2"..'"' r111,,LOCIA_TE R_gou C)p A CR HOF BOX FIBER OPTIC PULLBOX #2 LI Fe= 4111 2 02 sa■mo ..., -.., n.9 4 034 1 DJ TAOS _ ROOMpj 1 ; 0 ta : 201 00A ,14 J'HO TD.:11 • la DJ 10 110 rzumuciLA • - 1=1 12. .0p ,®,DA L op 1:1 crn I SWITCH FACILITY 1 11 e Op 00A 4 ri MA pc rc? FRIALS MGMT. F 1 L j I i • F.1 „IMLAY SYSTEMS PLAN vEr = NORTH pcig.o.21-1-(a 10 1 o p 60 1 1 50, tr, POWER ROO pirfl I - I R31 7 I ®A ' OP nhl nh h1A" " 202 202 112 INERGEN ROOM 11 - le:614616.4111 7.; 4460" 02401 ELECTRICAL ROOM 1 109 1 1 BREAK ROOM 0 LEL! 4"C.O. , 1100119000=107 0 2 4 8 8 16 JAN. MEN 06 WOMEN r TO TELEPHONE DEBARK FOR BLDG 24 KEY NOTES: ...:N om,liT HOFF:tm o tto irarmoNE ALARM CO CABIN ET: SEE Ail:: (08180(1104 680809 ON SHEET E O > DNNECTION TO FURNITURE WITH 1 S11.jB-UP TO DEILING. SPRINT TELEPHONE R ERATO REMME !rue * Nam' 24 ix TRI°4°!1., 060 ANTENNA J-0°4004 to i GRS• M06160811 :60 669000 062. WEST EXTERIOR WAU. I 5/8' UMSTRUT SAWCUT 4000 MO PATCH AFTER INSTALLATION OF CONDUITS CRS COUPUNG PVC SCHEDULE 40 101E ADAPTER PVC SCHEDULE 40 TO MANHOLE —III 08ER OPEC PULL BOX 0 LOCATED ON NORTHWEST WALL OF SWITCH FACILITY ROOM I I 1 e7,1 1 . AG 1111, FIBER OPTIC STUB-UP DETAIL NOT TO SCALE 8BER OPTIC PULL BOX 42 LOCATED ON NORTHWEST WALL OF SWITCH FACILITY OM CABINET 42 LOCATED IN SWITCH FACILRY ROOM ‘11. OVERHEAD CONDUIT ROUTING NOT TO SCALE LIU 11110 Isp FIBER PULL BOX DETAIL NOT TO SCALE EAR MCA/ 4 PER SET, 8 TOTAL FIBER OPTIC PULL BOX 38 NEMA 12 HOFFMAN CONCEPT UNE 4C-50382412, NO BACK PANEL REQUIRED CABINET II LOCATED IN SWITCH FACILITY ROOM EMT BONDING WIRE, SEE GROUNDING ONE-UNE MAGMA BONDING CLAMP EMT STEEL COMPRESSION MING CRS COUPUNG UNISTRUT CLAMP 4" CRS CONCRETE FOOTING CONDUITS TO TERMINATION CABINETS PICAL FIBER OPTIC PULL BOX 361Hx2418012'D, NENA 1 C0001•S :OUT TO SITE co NE ettlfo PE vagEB R° Li 10 0 0 0 111 0 CP 90 t. 0 0 0 9.. 0 0 0 0 - 5 cc "' a a§ z ' 0. 08' LLI -J J, • ... • 0 re 0. KEY NOTES: tio D PROVIDE ALUMINUM COMPONENTS WHERE IN CONTACT WITH ALUMINUM MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT HOUSING. PROVIDE BIMETALLIC CONNECTOR FOR JOINING ALUMINUM TO COPPER BONDING CABLES. D BOND TO GND RODS USING LPS MAIN CONDUCTOR. D MOND TO GAS MAIN ON LOAD SIDE OF METER USING LPS MAIN CONDUCTOR, SEE SHEET MO.1. ® BOND TO BURIED SANITARY SEWER PIPE USING LPS MAIN CONDUCTOR, SEE SHEET M0.1. D BOND TO BURIED WATER MAIN USING LPS MAIN CONDUCTOR, SEE SHEET ©BOND TO STEEL JOIST BY CLEANING TO BASE METAL AND USING COMPRESSION CLAMP. PROTECT BASE STEEL wan A CONDUCTIVE CORRISION INHIBITING COATING WEATHER SEAL ROOF. D BOND TO CPS ANTENNA SUPPORT CONDUIT USING LPS SECONDARY CONDUCTOR. BD BOND TO BURIED SPRINKLER MAIN USING LPS MAIN CONDUCTOR, SEE SHEET MO.T. D BOND TO DIESEL FUEL TANK FOOTING REBAR AND FUEL UNE USING LPS MAIN CONDUCTOR AND COMPRESSION CLAMPS. NORTH ROOF AND FLOOR PLAN - GROUNDING /LIGHTNING 1" = 20 ' -0° .. NEW CONSTRUOTION ( ' 1"=20 0 10 20 40 Q Z �. Z Go H o v . : O -I l- u. CD p G Z G Q g O O 0 e CC SHEET: TRANSMISSION AREA NORTH • FLOOR PLAN - GROUNDING AND DETAILS v-ar 0 2 4 8 1/8 16 24 .1" 801115660 0601111 ESTABLISH NEUIRAL AT 1R6NSFORMER CHASE NIPPLE WITH PLASTIC BUSHING 7-6 AFF BRMC14-0QUIT TRANSFORMER O GROUND CONNECTION DETAIL NOT TO SCALE FLOOR TILE GROUNDING STRIP CONNECTION DETAIL NOT TO SCALE . KEY NOTES: GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR #8 AVG TEE TAP HYDRAULIC COMPRESSION tz ... „.- 16 MG IN 1/20 PVC SURFACE MOUNTED JUNCTION BOX. FOLD STRIP, SECURE TO LUG, CONNECT TO #6 AWG r GROUNDING 51R0 BY FLOOR CONTRACTOR r STATIC DISSIPATIVE TILE BASE TRIM 25 0.C. EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR MAN BONDING JUMPER FLEX CONNECTION nNisHED FLOOR SEE GROUNDING AND BONDING ONE-UNE DIAGRAM FOR SIZES OF GROUNDING CONDUCTORS > TO LYNCOLE GROUND RODS, SEE SHEET El. I. BOND 11000 TILE GROUNDING STRIP 10 BARE, CLEAN METAL OF CCOJIAN. BOND AT 810013 LEVEL , WITHIN JUNCTION BOX. PROVIDE TWO BONDS AT EACH COLUMNS. BOND ALL COLUMNS IN ROOMS %MTH ' STATIC DISSAPATWE TILE (SOT). > BOND GROUNDING STRIPS OF FLOOR TILE WITH #6 WIRE.- GROUNDING STRIPS ARC PROVIDED BY THE FLOOR CONTRACTOR AT 25' 0.C. MAXIMUM AROUND THE PERIMETER AND TWO AT, EACH UPOSED , . UNISTRUT MTH CLAMP CONDUIT, CONDUCTORS MD CABLES PER ONE-LINE DIAGRAM COLUMN. GROUND TO WATER PIPE. CONNECTION TO BE ACCESSIBLE AFTER INSTALLATION. > DO NOT INSTAU. METALLIC CLAMPS THAT ENCIRCLE CONDUCTOR 56064 SUPPORTING CONDUCTOR. CLAMP -• ' FORMS A CHOKE ON CABLE. 'USE FIBERGLASS OR ECIUAL•SUPPORT (1) L p 198% 2 , - a' 0 Z E0 0 2 6. 0' z a. 0 z 0 cc 0 cc 1120 cc P JJ I— I— Z Ul ce 0 I + + <Go • p /OPACITY AMPS N N +- ®®• + mmJl a11.�ff pp 125 156 175: t q g G y K I FEEDE 2.25142 4.052 4.05X2 SYMBOL ID. 12N 16N 20N 4.5N 5.014 6.01 I 2.011 2.25N 2.514 1.2514 1.55 1.7514 85 914 1.014 514/0,1446 ..(2005 NEUTRAL) 54600KCMIL, 1420 (200% N) 2 SETS 444/0, 1120 (PARALLEL) 4' i m 0 m OW Pill piL P HI ggE 4 SETS 443SOKCMIL 143/00 4 SETS 44600KCM1L 114/0G 5 SETS 4160014C4114 1422 6CM1LO 2 SETS 44500 1L 1 /CC 2 SETS 44600KCMIL 141/00 3 SETS 44458KCMLL: 142/00 1 2 SETS 444/0, 142G -- 2 SETS 41250KCMIL 1420 2 SETS 4/350KCNIL, 1416 44358CMIL, 1440 44548KCMIL, 1426 44600KCMIL 1420 i WC 1460 4 44/0.. 1 4 4 0. 4/250KCMI., 1440 1:4 11,/:,#1°468 - - - 612/0, 1466 443 11815 442' 1466 gt,'1480 446, 1 444, 14106 444.10G 1 4412, 1 4120 4410, 14100 , 418, 1410E IgI I i i 2 1/7 4 2 -21/7 CONDOR I r 66 GOdNU , 11111111111 A A ♦W WI�14AW NNNNN t�NN 1 3- 3 1/7 4' 7 2 1/7 2 1/7 11 1/7 1, 1/2' 2' _ \ \.,/ 41 " " ,• w4. \ \ "41 - R SCHEDULE 1 Notes: Conductors based on Copper conductors With XHHW (48 & Larger) or THHN (410 & 4 insulation. r1. O.Nb6,0ldNm<x0 2.0 2.25 2.5 1.25 1.5 1.75 • .ro 01 N I 6 SETS 34600KCMIL, 14350KCMILG 8 SETS 34500KCMIL 14350KCMILG 10 SETS 34600KCMIL. 14500KCMIL 4 SETS '34350KCMIL 143/0C 4 SETS 34600 /KCMIL, 144/00 S SETS 3 600KCMIL, 14250KCMILG 2 SETS 34500KCMIL 141/00 2 SETS 34600KCIIIL 141/00 3 SETS34400KCMIL, 142 /0G 31350KCMIL 1440 34500KCMIL, 1420 316001(CMIL 1420 2 SETS 344/0, 1420 2 SETS 34250KCMIL 4420 2 SETS 34350KCMIL, 1410 _ 343/0, 1480 '- 344/0, 1446 34250KCMIL 1446 _. 341, 1465 341/0, 116G 342/0. 1460.__ - 345, 148G 342, 1486 341, -: 1486 346, 14100 344, 14106 344, 1480 3412, 1412G 3410, 14100:: 348, - :14100. . -WIRE, (3 -PHAS WITHOUT NEUTRAL I I I "4 N' I I I • ^1"1 4 1^1 N I I N" 1 3 1/7 3 1 2' 2 -21/2' 2 - 2 1/2' N 41"1 41 » -. ^ \ 1 ^ 1"1 ... 1 1 1 1/7 1 1/2' 3/ 3/4' CONDUIT ..:,I 4 IDE 98153 \0X66 \07 /09/9809:i3i4 RM T SET r 3P -200A , 1 125 AF RK1 I 1. 126 AF RK1 1 1�3P� -1256 UEBERT SWITCH I PE-2 ®. L ® / ' I z r 3P -200A , 1.25 1 12.5 AF I I SWITCH ROOIA 1.2 3P -125A UEBQtf UNff /AC -3 ® 04 1- L 3 J k - 4 ,- ,,1 °. ,;1 , TRANSMISSION ROOK 1.5 1 1 1 1.5 3P -150A F1 UEBERT UNIT , /AC-4 ®� f J ROOM ,NEke, UEBERTT UNIT 11 AF )' 13 1 TRANSMISSION ROOM o UEBERfR � ® UN 5 L J 1 :'`I I�� I L_ 1 0 S r o 4 L P AI I I o I I wit L J n � o 30-2 2.ON MA A IN n , IV �4 11 1 RF D I3P ^200.4 _. I 20N �K J A 61MM 0 RECTIFIER 1{04 (FUME) RECRFER /R5 (FUNRE) RECTIFIER #R6 (FUTURE) RECTIFIER /R1 le> 125 30 -12:4 RECTFER /R2 ®) 3P -125A RECIIFER /R3e)' 3P-1254 3P -125A )---o .• 30 -1256 L _ _ _J ' C; O FFMAN _ "`N E .� R S- WEST 201 - NORTB. RIVER DRIVE. - SUITE' Sio S P O KA NE WASHINGT 99203 'T '(30 289:+4 _FAX 50 :328- 2999`- I- BYPASS SWITCH 1 I 480VAA K 3 •• 3W 20 AC I 3 480VAC I I 3P-250A 480VAC 1 L - - 30 56 2 MAIN MAX 10 FT 11 S 4i L iwp PROJECT 100 - 1600196 S BATTERY L H11 ,€ N 0.6 3P -604 2 TOSS WAN) _ o BAIT 010011 3t2...5,0" 2.SN 254 3P250A J 3P 2504 3P - ^25A 1.5 3P -7504 2.ON 8.0 3P -2006 3P - ^00A 30 ^250 3P -125A 30 -1254 30 -8004 3�P-200A SPARE � 30 -125A SPARE 3P -1251 SPARE >4--6 8 s S L ____ J ELECTRIC Post Office Box 4959 L G ) 892 -1080 11..2 WA 98882 60 Fax (360) 896 - TUKWILA SWITCH FACILITY L- 1 S 3 SHEET TITLE g tt § DIAGRAMS 1 2.ON NO GROUND WIRE REVD I i rQ L J _ _ L : t € yP A,r .. : DRAWN CI" CHECKED '' MAU' DATE 07/07/98= JOB NO. - 98168 FILE 98153E51. SCALE SERVICE LATERAL NO GROUND WIRE SERVICE LATERAL W/ GROUND WIRE GROUND ALL METAL PARTS IN VAULT STL GROUND ROD EGC GROUND NEUTRAL MEAD OF GFI CTS MAIN DISCONNECT #1 AT PREMISE NOT TO SCALE PARTIAL GROUNDING ONE -LINE DIAGRAM 4 -POLE AUTOMATIC GC TRANSFER SWITCH N1 EVE ON -SITE I 1 GENERATOR 41 J GEC STL GROUND ROD GENERATOR 11 L - AWN DISCONNECT NO GROUND WIRE GROUND NEUTRAL AHEAD r -- OF GFI CDS I AWN DISCONNECT I1 #2 AT PREMISE SERVICE GROUNDING CONNECTION DIAGRAM N DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARD DS1 GROUND BUS TVSS �N'10 EGC.14 EGC p/- #4 EGC y UPS RECTIFIER GND UPS BYPASS CND GND #6 EGC /• /• !• #4 EGC — - 1 EGC CO - #2 MBJ MAINTENANCE �I UPS NEUTRAL BYPASS SWITCH AC T -7-__ N2 GEC d #6 EGC #2 XFMR '375' GND NI /0 MBJ --p #2 EGC XFMR '3T5' PANEL 'PDSC -CO' NEUTRAL • -N7 /0 GEC. NT /0 —AS O AC -2 AC -4 %FMR '3T1' GND N4 ABS AFAR '301' NEUTRAL #4 N6 EGC�- mwwwww PANEL '3H1' PANEL '3L1A' LMB -SW � 750 KCLRL. MGB -TR T 750 KARL BUILDING T STEEL 14/O UNDERGROUND r COLD WATER PIPING I Q N4 /0 TELEPHONE r BACKBOARD I 9 4o i GROUNDING & BONDING KEY NOTES: 0 CONNECT TO NEAREST EFFECTIVELY GROUNDED BUILDING STEEL 0 BOND TO NEAREST INTERIOR WATER PIPE. O TO COPPER -CLAD STEEL GROUND ROD. GENERAL NOTES: 1. SEE GROUNDING PLANS SHEET E4.3 FOR ADDRIONAL GROUNDING CONDUCTORS REQUIRED AT SPPG. 14/0 GEC —d N4 /0 SECO3 (4) 13/0 MBJ UTILITY AFAR _ GND BAR (4) N3 /0 MBJ MAIN DISC N1 GND BAR I (4) 13/0 EGC GROUNDING & BONDING ONE -LINE DIAGRAM NOT TO SCALE AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 11 GROUND.. BUS 750 KCMIL N4 /0 CND CONDUCTOR WITH (2) ELECTROLYTIC GND RODS. PROVIDE GND CONDUCTOR AND GND RODS, SEE SITE GROUNDING PLAN SHEET E1.1 T UNDERGROUND SANITARY SEWER 13/0 T UNDERGROUND SPRINKLER MAIN # T LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM T ON -SITE GENERATOR NI FRAME /ENCLOSURE 1 N /D GEC 14/0 GEC (4) 13/0 MBJ GENERATOR 11 MAIN DISC (4) 14/0 GEC (4) #3/0 ABS MAIN DISC 1 GND BAR (4) 13/0 EGC '1 (4) 13/0 ESC XFMR '312' GND 11 XFMR '3T3' GND II AFAR '314' CND #4 MBJ d N6 ECC 1 MW P 1 EGC #4 HAS p— #6 EGC XFMR - '312' =ANEL '3L2' X FMR '3T3' =ANEL 'PDSC -TR' XFMR '3T4' PANEL 'PDSC -SW2' NEUTRAL NEUTRAL NEUTRAL p-1 GEC A14 GEC p- N4 GEC 14 _P 14 --P 14 __ PANEL 'POSE-DC' 0 0 1 EGC O 0 O N6 EGC PANEL '311' RECTIFIER RECTIFIER RECTIFIER 'R3 110 -.EGC 1 W m DM ?LAN Dweargen tialli eleM Oman 181848009 Illegal Entry CR NO Env/Hoffman SITE TECH ' Technician on 019 - NN NO Env/Hoffman SEC FNL ' Security System Failure NJ NO Env/Hoffman AC FAIL Commercial AC Power Failure MJ. 60 - Env/Hoffman SfDBY G06 Standby Generators Running (Common) MJ Nli 1 6 Env /Hoffman ' 0EN FAIL Standby Generators Failure (Common) CR NO 1 7 Env /Hoffman LOW FUEL Standby Generator, Low Fuel (Common) MJ NO 1 8 EQU RECT FAIL 480 Common Rectifier Failure MJ NO 1 9 008 BAIT FUSE Battery Plant Fuse CR NO 1 10 EQU HIGH BAIT 4804 High Battery Voltage MJ NO 1 11 EQU LOW 8617 4811 Low Battery Votage MJ NO 1 12 Env/Hoffman HVAC FAIL HVAC Failure CR NO 1 13 Env /Hoffman HIGH TEMP High Temperature MJ NO 1 14 Env/Hoffman LOW TEMP Low Temperature MN NO 1 15 Env /Hoffman LOW HUM Low Humidity MN NO - 1 16 Env /Hoffman ARE Fire Detected CR NO 1 17 Env /Hoffman OA FIRE Fire Detector Norm (Dual Zone) CR NO 1 18 Env/Hoffman FIRE DSCO Fire System Discharged CR NO 1 19 Env /Hoffman FIRE 400 Fire System Aborted MJ NO 1 20 Env /Hoffman ARE OFF Fire System OH Normal MJ NO 1 21 Env /Hoffman UPS F Uninternrptible Power System Failure CR NO KEY NOTES: QI Y PANDUIT C —TYPE YAWN? WITH MATCHING COVER, GREY. [D ALLEN — BRADLEY NEA4A TERMINAL BLOCKS /1492 —F1 WIN PMTS 11492 —N22, 11492 -618 AND 11492 -623. TYPICAL OF 2 ROWS OF 40 EACH. ❑3 HOFFMAN CONCEPT WALL MOUNTED 24 '1(24%8' ENCLOSURE /C- SD24248 WITH BACK PANEL Q4 SEE ALARM CONTACT SCHEDULE THIS SHEET FOR TERMINATIONS, M ROUTE WIRES BACK FROM EACH UNIT AND SERIES CONNECT TOGETHER AT THIS CABINET. MB- 02M* ALARM ENCLOSURE LAYOUT NOT TO SCALE 1/2"C, 10116 AWG, 11126 RS232 —s 1/A, 8114 AWO. 11 2G 1 /YC, 2114 ANC, 1 /120 1/2'C, 11114 A80, 1/ 2G FRCP INIERGEN SYSTEM ALARM CONI (JOT To JCALE HVAC SITE SCAN SYSTEM SEE DN -15 DOCUMENTS ECTION DIAGRAM 1/2'C, 2114 A80, 11120 WATER ALERT ALARM PANEL LAN NOTES: 1. PROVIDE ONE (1) CAT. 5 CABLE TO THE PATCH PANEL FROM EACH DATA JACK LOCATION. 2. CABLING TO BE LABELED WITH TYPED BRADY OR EQUAL MARKERS AT EACH LOCATION. 3. ONE (1) 3/4 EMT CONDUIT STUB WITH PLASTIC BUSHING ON BOTH ENDS SHALL BE PROVIDED AND ROUTED TO AN ACCESSIBLE CEILING LOCATION FROM EACH DEVICE 4. EACH CONDUIT STUB SHALL BE BONDED TO THE ELECTRICAL GROUNDING SYSTEM. 5. ALL WIRING IN SWITCH/TRANSMISSION ROOM SHALL BE COMPLETELY INSTALLED IN CONDUIT. 6. LAN CABLE SHALL BE A CONSISTENT COLOR AND VARY FROM TELEPHONE CABLING. 7. CONTRACTOR TO LAND AND TEST BOTH CABLE ENDS. 8. NOT ALL DEVICES ARE SHOWN BY RISER DIAGRAM, SEE SHEET E4.1 FOR QUANTITY AND LOCATION. 9. TERMINATE REMAINING PAIRS PER 75689. LAN RISER DIAGRAM NOT TO SCALE CUSTOMER NORTHSTAR PHONE SYSTEM PAIR 1 100 SERIES 1 CBL /JACK 06ASE -5 200 SERIES 1 CBL /JACK LAN PATCH PANEL 100 SERIES 280 SERIES 1 CBL /JACI( 1 CBL /JACK LOCATED IN SWITCH ROOM SEE SHEET E4.1 PAIR 3 I PAIR 1 I PAIR 4 T568A 8— POSITION NODULAR JACK PAIR ASSIGNMENTS FOR U1P 66 BLOCKS PAIR 2 EXISTING SPIR6T. REMARK LOCATION TELEPHONE NOTES: 1, PROVIDE ONE (1) CAT. 5 CABLE TO THE PATCH PANEL FROM EACH TELEPHONE JACK LOCATION. 2. CABLING TO BE LAMED : WITH TYPED : BRADY OR EQUAL MARKERS AT EACH LOCATION. -' 3. ONE (1) 3/4 EMT CONDUIT STUB WITH PLASTIC BUSHING ON BOTH ENDS. SHALL BE PROVIDED AND ROLREb TO AN ACCESSIBLE CEILING LOCATION FROM EACH DEVICE. 4. EACH CONDUIT SUB SHALL BE BONDED TO 114E ELECTRICAL GROUNDING SYSTEM. 5. AIL WIRING IN SWITCH/TRANS/415510N R0051 SHALL BE COMPLETELY INSTALLED IN CONDUIT., 6. TELEPHONE CABLE SHALL BE A 11014515TENI COLOR AND VARY' FROM LAI CABLIND. 7. CONTRACTOR TO LAID AND TEST BOTH CABLE. ENDS. TELEPHONE RISER DIAGRAM NOT .TO SCALE OF4E0°FEMNIii, /4". DI (n 1999 : n 50890110051 ''. w s31na31aos AJ.1113Y4 HOIIMS YIIM>I(Il L8Z£ -988 (09£) x8J 0°01 -Z68 (09£) 49988 WA muloa mA 1 6S88 xO8 8.1110 I�od Mal YUD31J 31111 133HS 6'662 -8Z£ (805) 466Z-95£ (605) '731 60Z66 NOIONIWSVM '3NVNOdS 065 3UnS '3n1210 N3Na 1-UU0N LOS` I8.3M S U 3 3 N 1 NVw�doO add 133('O21d g 8. .0a ..o ai:.9.6111 113 1 1 1 111 1 1 a a 9 e1 2 Itini v. 1 tit 1 2 8 111 1 1 9 1 9 1 1 a 1 1 1 1 1 1 Y sal 1 I 1 1 1 9 11 h 1 222222 23.2 , M 51999999999 2 1 1 11 1 1 1 986 1 1 9 5 1 8 8 8 8 , 1 ] 1 81 8. 1 11999991999! 91111199111 13S 11 13d g w 2r m UST - 2 ti �> w 6. 1 6. 11 111 599999159999 11919991,119 rrr� hew k 3 km: ] 11/111111/1 i !OhIIIIIIIIIII E11iirri i � i in - it ii mr IIIIIIIIIIiI EM1111 Iiiie 11 il? 951I:::1� DIIIIIIIIIIIUII 11 111111111.11 II cIl :ll: :::: 9r�'J minx cm •IIIICIII=IC II IM= I _ 8999919999 i13#9999995 1 111 11 g 11 1 1- W a- IlIIliiQiiiiiiuI , T 4 cgs 5 :V2:(086/60/C0 \5990 \59186\S80f86 \rr ,I \ \98153 \0M99\07 /09!9807 . 26'. 09 II ICII 91�C Fi rCCCjFJk PITT X11 Wf��a�,�� ° 4 IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII * =1rr 11�r1 - CC - ' �C� 1 111 I.IIQIIIIIIIIlulilli I IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII ■11111111111111111 IIIIIIIIIIIIIII111 ®IIi11111111111111 IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII ■11111111111111111 ®IIIIIi111111iiiu 111111111011111111 11166u6666116S 11111111M111111 !I1!!!!IIIIIIIII ' pm D m PERMIT SET to S 9I19GIGIIGOIIIGIIIIII: i� IIIIIIIOIIIIIIIIIIIII 1111011111111111311 1111111111111111111111 IIIIIIIIIIIIili"uiiE Ii111111111111I111111] IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIHI3 IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII 11111IIIIII1111111111 ® 1lii ° 11111 I1111] IIMMISSESSEll III111111111111111111I !!IU!I11IIIIIIIHIIh3 IIII IIIIIIIIIMIIIIr111I _F E r m ;PIP 777711717 111 ;li II ` `l4�' � LL 1 i 1 l- III A EI III il li .: , . F :. IIIIIIIIm::IIIIIIIII IIIII:::IIImcm11u1 f 11 :: 1 :::::::::::::::: iuiii U oji mo p I Q i 11 11 II II I i 1 11111111 IlilIllIlIli!! Illlll�ll umommink 1 IIIIIIII111111 !!!!!!!!!!!!11!I!I =!1!!!!!!!!!!!!! 1 R�±1 fil ( r I -II q r ' I l ' " E ii: 1 =�I l- - ....$&s°sse°B I�__ _' 1 f if a PPL COFFMAN I N E E R S WEST 201 NORTH RIVER DRIVE. SUITE 510 SPOKANE. WASHINGTON 99201 TEL: (5095 329 -2 FAX: (509) 328 -2999 u 1 E tits 6801 si IS a a 009 s _ I f x I I if I 1 i s r 0 0 o I €t CS Pit a C s I I FIN r 01 0 C F m 0 PROJECT ELECTRIC LIGHiTWAI TUKWILA. SWITCH FACILITY Post Office Box 4959 1 Vonoaawr WA 98662 (360) 692 -1000 Fax (380) 898 -3297 SHEET TITLE SCHEDULES a 611 88 69 8889088 88 gggggggggssagsts I CSI 2 Oat i a a 9 a 158 a 95 • y$_ d I SS aa� 1 ss a a g 8 a: Or �Q if ggggggggggggggggggggg ggg6ggggSggSn eee�ane �...` 1111 1 "1111111Jil. Q =� 1 }III II.I ki a es�BB98s9598 11 [ � 4 1 a. Bak9�88��a8 °s� i r O So in DRAWN CI CHECKED MAM DATE 07/07008 JOB NO. 08183 • FILE amen SCALE NONE LIGHTNING DOWN CONDUCTOR AND AIM GROUND ROD CONNECTION DETAIL NOT TO SCALE NOT TO SCALE PVC CONDUIT FIBERGLASS PIPE CLAMP OR METAL PIPE CLAMP WHICH DOES NOT COMPLETELY ENCIRCLE CONDUIT TO AV10D CHOKE. ROOF TRUSS OR BEAM BEAM CLAMP 3/8" ALL THREAD ROD UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED 3/8' NUTS ON BOTH SIDES WITH FLAT CUT WASHERS SEAL ALL PENETRATIONS (TAP) DOAN CONDUCTOR (LPS MAIN CONDUCTOR) TRAPEZE HANGER DETAIL ' $ -O Zylo PAINT CONDUCTOR AND CONDUIT TO MATCH BUILDING'S EXTERIOR FINISH PVC CONDUIT UNISTRUT PVC ROE END TWO HOLE COMPRESSION LUG GROUND BAR FINISHED FLOOR CONDUIT NUMBER At SIZE SEE PLAN DRAWING 5/8' UNISTRUT TRAPEZE HANGER CONNECT CONDUCTOR TO GROUND ROD WADI EXOTHERMIC WELD COPPER -CLAD STEEL GROUND ROD Ai GROUND CONDUCTOR PROTECTION NOT TO SCALE rr v rr v -Ir PARAPET MTD AIR TERMINAL DETAIL NOT TO SCALE AIR TERMINAL FLAT SURFACE BASE LIGHTNING CONDUCTOR CABLE FASTENER 30 SPACING MAXIMU ROOF MTD AIR TERMINAL DETAIL NOT TO SCALE ASPHALT NOT TO SCALE AIR TERMINAL FIAT SURFACE BASE LIGHTNING CONDUCTOR CABLE FASTENER 30 SPACING MAXIMUM SLOTTED COVER m UL NAATE PLATE Z `r a 2 2 )D' W I- O A O 6 Z m O U- PROTECTIVE COVER BOX BREATHER HOLE PROVIDE EXOTHERMIC CONNECTION TO 4/0 COPPER CABLE PIGTAIL LYNCONITE BACK FILL WEEP HOLES ELECTROLYTIC ROOTS ELECTROLYTIC GROUND ROD DETAIL GROUNDING AND 0 BONDING CONDUCTOR BEND DETAIL NOT TO SCALE 7/16' DIA INSULATOR SPPG BAR AND MGB DETAIL NOT TO SCALE w o a3�� a �o tgrE N? zaaz o Y SPPG BAR CONNECTION DETAIL NOT TO SCALE RADIUS OF BEND. NOT 1 /4 " WALL MOUNTING BRACKET COPPER BAR THE ANGLE OF ANY BEND SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN 90 DEGREES 36" SURGE SURGE COMMON ISOLATED PRODUCER ABSORBER BONDING BONDING, LPS DOWN CONDUCTOR THRU -WALL CONNECTOR LPS THRU -WALL DETAIL NOTES 1. MCB(3) FURNISHED BY OWNER, INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR. 2. SPPG PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR. 2. MOUNT BOTTOM OF BAR 8' AFF. 3. USE NO -OXIDE AGENT FRO CLEANING. NOTES' 1. PROVIDE TWO HOLE COMPRESSION LUGS FOR CONNECTIONS AT SPPG. CABLE FASTENER 36' SPACING MAXIMUM CITY OFTUIMIILAF.r JUL 1 0 1998 • PERMITCENTF-1 w 0 3/4" CONDUIT SINGLE DOOR 18 C� ELDED REAL LE 13 F . CABLE CO IX 12 0 X CABLE IX88 SWITCH LOCATED INSIDE PANIC BAR (SEE NOTE 5) THROUGH HINGE POWER TRANSFER CABLE, USE CABLE LOOP WHERE DOOR FRAME IS NOT ACCESSIBLE 4' OX WIN LOCAL ALARM DOOR RION SWITCH CONDUIT TO READER �MAGNETIC LOCK READER MOUNTS ON EXTERIOR OF PROTECTED SPACE BO1E5• 1. THE 1/2" CONDUIT FROM THE 4'x4" J -BOX TO THE DOOR FRAME IS USED TO RUN THE RX (REQUEST TO EXIT) AND DOOR CONTACT SIGNALS TO THEIR DEVICES. 2. THE MOUNTING ELEVATION OF THE READER IS SHOW AS 42' AND MAY VARY DEPENDING ON THE SPECIFIC DOOR REQUIREMENTS. 3. THE 4 "x4" J -BOX SHOULD BE BELOW THE CEILING HEIGHT AND BE CONCEALED WHERE POSSIBLE. 4. THE 1/7 CONDUIT FOR THE READER SHOULD BE STUBBED OUT FLUSH WITH THE WALL AT ME PROPER MOUNTING HEIGHT. 5. PROVIDE DPDT SWITCH IN PANIC BAR WITH ISOLATED CONTACTS. ONE SET OF CONTACTS FOR REX INPUT TO SECURITY SYSTEM. THE OTHER SET OF CONTACTS FOR MAO LOCK POWER DISRUPTION. INTER -TIE MAO LOCK WITH FIRE ALARM SYSTEM FOR DOOR RELEASE IN THE EVENT OF FIRE. 0 - CARD IN /FREE EXIT /MONITORED ® NOT TO SCALE LEGEND RS 485 — COAX 15 PIN RIBBON TWISTED PAIR WIRE RS 232 - - - - - — PHONE LINE PUBLIC PHONE SYSTEM ALTO 8185C ACV TM. OF 2 UNITS 37085 POWER MODULE TIP OF 2 UNITS AC INPUT NOTE: NOT ALL DEVICES ARE SHOWN. REFER TO PONS FOR QUANTITIES ARO LOCATIONS. COORDINATE EXACT INSTALLATION WITH MIKE KOBELIN 0 SELECTRON, SEE (0.1. VIDEO MONITOR VIDEO SWRCHER 778 ANNUNCIATOR 74 CCTV CAMERA CCTV CAMERA CCTV CAMERA ((((yy�� CCTV CAMERA (FUTURE) (FUTURE) (FUTURE) I (FUTURE) �DIGIREADER 4208 ZONE 1 MAGNETC LOCK 4 DOOR SWITCH NOT TO SCALE DIGIREADER 4204 O PARTIAL SECURITY SYSTEM DIAGRAM NOT TO SCALE 16'COND. 22 AMC SHIELDED. READER CABLE 13' PR 2.2 AWG SIGNAL CABLE CONf8C8/REX 12 COND. 18 AWG LOCI( CABLE: DOOR POSIRON sWITCH,4 I 1 loom P0SR10N SWITCH T,/ T 3 CO- LOCATE ROOM 010888 ADER 4208 — 3/4 CONDUIT — 4'x4' J-80X WITH LOCAL ALARM 7/2' 50X0088 TO FRAME ..DOOR POSINON INDICATOR SWITCH MEI 1. THE 1/7 CONDUIT FROM THE 4 J -80X TO THE DOOR FRAME 15 USED TO RUN THE LOCK POWER TO THE 5 -MAC. LOCK & SIGNAL WIRES TO THE CONTACT & REX. 2. THE MOUNTING ELEVATION OF THE READER IS SHOW AS 4Y AND MAY VARY DEPENDING ON THE SPECIFIC DOOR REQUIREMENTS. 3. THE 4'x4' J -BOX 5HOUL11 BE BELOW THE CEILING HEIGHT AND BE CONCEALED WHERE POSSIBLE 4. THE 1/Y CONDUIT FOR THE READER SHOULD BE STUBBED OUT FLUSH WITH THE WALL AT THE PROPER MOUNTING HEIGHT. 5. PROVIDE DPDT SWITCH IN PANIC BAR WITH ISOLATED CONTACTS. ONE SET OF CONTACTS FOR REX INPUT TO SECURITY SYSTEM. THE OTHER SET OF CONTACTS FOR MAO LOCK POWER DISRUPTION. INTER-TIE MAC LOCK WITH FIRE ALARM SYSTEM FOR DOOR RELEASE IN THE EVENT OF FIRE. DOUBLE DOOR 2 , - CARD IN /FREE EXIT /MONITORED 1/2' CONDUIT 71) READER SUB INTERCOM STATION 31 LOCATED AT FRONT DOOR VANDAL PROOF CONSTRUCTION SURFACE MOUNTED 3 CONDUCTOR WITH OVERALL SHIELD, WEST PENN 330 5U8 INTERCOM ST TON 12 LOCATED AT RECEIVING DOOR VANDAL PROOF CONSTRUCTION SURFACE MOUNTED SUB INTERCOM ST 110N /3 LOCATED AT CO- LOCATE DOOR VANDAL PROOF CONSTRUCNON SURFACE MOUNTED AUDIO DOOR 1 AUDW DOOR 2 40010 DOOR 3 LE-MP LE -NVP LE -MVP 22 ARC 18 ANC 8'x 854 D NINA 1 JUNCTION BOX WITH ADDRESSABLE FA NODULE LOW VOLTAGE SOLENOID VALVE CONTROLLED BY FIRE ALARM 0851EM (TYP OF 2 PER ZONE) INERGEN TANKS INTERCOM WIRING DIAGRAM NOT TO SCALE ALL-CALL ADAPTER 8D -105 F18 AWG MASTER INTERCOM STATION /1 (LEF-5C) LOCATED IN MAP ROOM SEMI -FLUSH MOUNTED 12 VDC POWER SUPPLY 14 AWG PIGTN1 (PS -12F) LOCATED IN BREAK ROOM ABOVE CEILING -- 22 AWG 3 CONDUCTOR WITH OVERALL SHIELD, WEST PENN /301 A11 -CALL ADAPTER BC -100 15 CONDUCTOR WITH OVERALL SHIELD, WEST PENN /3274 MASTER INTERCOM STATION /2 LOCAT D M RE AREA SEMI -FLUSH MOUNTED MASTER 1 IEF -5C ASTER INTERCOM STATION /3 (1EF -5C) LOCATED IN BREAK ROOM SEMI -FLUSH MOUNTED ❑1 DC a � � 4 �I DA 5 5 COMPONF8TS (NPHOI(F( `J TEE -5C 5 -CALL MASTER LE -DA 88010 00088 BC -105 ALL- CALL /CHIME ADAPTER P5 -1718 POWER SIIPPIY 588 -MVP/ VANDAL PROOF STATION LE -MVP CABLE & DISTANCE PS -12F FIG-105 TO FARTHER5TR LEF -5C STATION 22 AWG 20 AWG 18 AWG 0 500' 750' 1,180' LEf -5C TO AUDIO IXIOR r.7 VANN 11, LU 0 INERGEN SOLENOID VALVES co ® NOT TO SCALE 88 MNLV I� cmQF JUL PETiMR0514TBB ';- LEi' SHEET